Auerbach_Standard_EDP_Reports_196609_Volume_1 Auerbach Standard EDP Reports 196609 Volume 1
User Manual: Pdf Auerbach_Standard_EDP_Reports_196609_Volume_1
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 607
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
An Analytical Reference Service
for the Electronic Data Processing Field
Prepared and Edited by
AUERBACH Corporation
Philadelphia, Penna.
1
Published by
I
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
I
The information contained herein has been obtained from reliable sources
and has been evaluated by technical teams with extensive working experience
in computer design, selection and application. The information, however, is
not guaranteed.
Acknowledgement is made of the inspiration and guidance provided by the
Information Systems Branch of Office of Naval Research which has supported
data gathering activity by Auerbach Corporation in fields similar to some
covered in these reports. The data contained and formats used in STANDARD
EDP REPORTS were not prepared under any contract with the U. S. Government; and they are the exclusive property of the copyright holders.
WHAT IT IS--HOW TO USE IT
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN
u.s.
A.
-IA1.
AUERBAC~
•
1:001. 100
"mIlD
EDP
U'DITS
SUMMARY TABLE OF CONTENTS
(For Detailed Table of Contents to the Users' Guide and all Computer System Reports,
turn to Page 4:001. 001. )
Binder 1
AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports: What It is - How to Use it
1:010.100
General Index . . • • . . • . . • • . • . • . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . • . . . . ..
2:100.001
Users' Guide. . . • . . . . • . . • . • . . • • . • . • • • . • • . . • • . • • . . . • . . • . . . . . . ..
4:001. 001
Glossary ...•• . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . • . • . . • • . • . . • . . • • . • . . . • . . . . . . . ..
7:101. 001
Comparison Charts Configuration Rentals . . . . • . . . • • . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . • • • . . • . • . . • . . •
Hardware Characteristics . . . . . • . . • • • • . • • • . . • . . • . . . • • . . . . . . . .
System Performance ••••.•.•...•.•••....•.•..•.••..••..•..
11:010.101
11:210.101
11:400.101
Selection Procedure Reports EDP Systems Analysis Techniques . • • . . . . . . . • • • . . • . . • . . • . • • . . • ..
15:001. 001
Directories Organizations in the Computer Field . • . • . . . . . • . . • . • . . • . • . . • • . . . .
Buyers' Guide for the Computer Field . • . • . . . . • . . . . • . . • • • • . . . . . . .
Electronic Computing and Data Processing Services .••.••..•••.....•.
School, College, and University Computer Centers. . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . ..
Periodicals for the Computer Industry . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . .
21:010.001
21:020.001
21:030. 001
21:035.001
21:040.001
Special Reports -
./
Factors to Consider in Contracting for an Electronic Data
ProceSSing System . . . . • . . . • . • . • • . . . • . . . • . . . • . . • . • . . . . . . . .
A Survey of the Character Recognition Field • . . . . . . . . . , , . , . , .. , , .. , .
Decision Tables Symposium. , . , , ... , , •.•. , ....•. , . , , .•.• , .. , ..
U. S.-Manufactured Magnetic Tape Handlers:
A State-of-the-Art Report. , . . . . , , .•.•. , , . , •.•.. , ..••• , •. , , , .
High-Speed Printers:
A State-of-the-Art Report. , .•. , , .•..•...•.• , •..... , • , •.. , •..
Random Access Storage:
A State-of-the-Art Report ..••. , , , . , , , , , •.• , .• , , •. , .••.....• ,.
Digital Plotters:
A State-of-the-Art Report. , .•. ' .••••.•....•.••••..•.• , . . . • . . .
Data Collection Systems:
A State-of-the-Art Report ...• , ..• , • . . • . • . . . . . . • . . • . , ....•. , .
How Computer Rental Terms Look in 1965 ••..•••••••••••• '•..•.••••
Data Communications - What It's All About ••.••.••••.••.•••••.••.•
23:010.001
23:020,001
23:030.001
23:040.001
23:050.001
23:060.001
23:070.001
23:080.001
23:090.001
23:100.001
\
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
1:001. 101
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
Binder 2
Report
Computer System Reports Autonetics Recomp II .•..••••.••••••••.••.....•••.•.•••••.
Autonetics Recomp III . • • . • . . . . • . • • . . • . • . • • • . • • • • • . . • • • . . . •
161:
162:
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series (Burroughs Corporation) .••••.•••.•..
Burroughs B 5500 (Burroughs Corporation) . . • • . . • . . • • • • . • . • • . . . . .
Burroughs B 2500 & B 3500 (Burrouglis Corporation) .••.•••.•.••••.••
201:
203:
210:
CDC
CDC
CDC
CDC
241:
242:
243:
244:
1604 (Control Data Corporation) .•.••.•••••.••.•••••.•.••••
160 (Control Data Corporation) . . . • . . . . • . • . • . . • . . • . • . • . . • • •
1604-A (Control Data Corporation) .••.• ; ••.• ~ ..•.•••.•• ".•.•
160-A (Control Data Corporation) . • • • . . . . • . • • . . . . • . . • . . • . • .
CDC 3200 (Control Data Corporation)
CDC 3400 (Control Data Corporation)
CDC 3600 (Control Data Corporation)
245:
246:
247:
CDC 3100 (Control Data Corporation)
CDC 3300 (Control Data Corporation)
254:
255:
CDC 6000 Series (Control Data Corporation) . • . • • . • . . • . . . • • • . . . • . .
CDC 6400 . . . . •" ..••.•••.•..••". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDC 6600 . . . • . . . . • • . . . • . . . • . • • . . . • . . • . . . . • . . . • • . . . •
CDC 6800 . . . . . . • . . . • . . • . . • • . . • . • . . • • . . . • . . • • • • • . . . •
260:
263:
264:
265:
Binder 3
GE 115 (General Electric)
GE 215 (General Electric)
GE 225 (General Electric)
GE 235 (General Electric)
310:
............ ...... ... ............ .
............................. , ... .
320:
321:
323:
GE 400 Series (General Electric)" . . • . . • . . . • . . . . • • . • . • • "• • • . . . . .
GE 415 . • . . • . • . • . . . . • . . . • . • • • • . . . . . . . • . . • . . • . • . . . • .
GE 425 . • . . • • . . . . • • . • . . • • . . • . • • • . . . . • • . • . • . . • • . . . . .
GE 435 . . • . . . . . • . . • . • • . . • . . • . • . . . . . • . • • . • • . • • • • . . . .
330:
332:
333:
334:
GE 600 Series (General Electric) . . • . . • . . • . . . . • . . . . . . • • • . • . . • .
GE 625 . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . • . • ;." . • . . • . . . . . • • . . . • . .
GE 635 . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . • . . '. . . . . • . . • . . . • . • • • • . . . . . •
"340:
343:
344:
RPC-4000 (Control Data Corporation) •.••.••....• '..••..•••.•..••
LGP-30 (Control Data Corporation) . • . . • . • . . . . . • . . • • • • • • • • • . . • .
351:
352:
'
,
'
,
Binder 4
IBM 1401 (International Business Machines) . . • . • . . • . • • . . . • • • • • • . .
IBM 1401-G (International Business Machines) •...•••••.•..••.•.•.
-IBM 1410 (International Business Machines)
401:
401:
402:
IBM 7070 (International Business Machines)
IBM 7072 (International Business Machines)
IBM 7074 (International Business Machines)
403:
404:
405:
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
406:
407:
408:
409:
410:
411:
0"
9/66
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
704 (International Business Machines) . • . . . . . . . . . • . • • . • . . • • . .
709 (International Business Machines) .••••...••.•..••••..•.•
7090 (International Business Machines) . • . . • . . • • • • . . . • • • • • . . .
7094 (International Business Machines) . • • . • . • • . • • . • . . • • . . . • .
7040 (International Business Machines) . • • . . . . . . . • • . . • • • . . . . .
7044 (International Business Machines) ...••.••••••••••••....
A
AUERBACH
~
/
1:001. 102
SUMMARY TABLE OF CONTENTS
Binder 5
Report
Computer System Reports (Contd.) Model 1 (International Business Machines) . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 2 (International Business Machines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(International Business Machines) . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(International Business Machines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(International Business Machines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(International Business Machines) . . • • . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(International Business Machines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . •
412:
413:
414:
415:
416:
417:
418:
IBM System/360 (International Business Machines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode120 . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode130 . . . . . . • • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode140 . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode165 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
420:
422:
423:
424:
425:
426:
427:
428:
435:
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
1620
1620
1440
1460
7010
7080
1130
Binder 6
Honeywell 400 (Honeywell EDP Division) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Honeywell 800 (Honeywell EDP Division) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Honeywell 1800 (Honeywell EDP Division) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Honeywell 1400 (Honeywell EDP Division) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Honeywell Series 200 (Honeywell EDP Division) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Honeywell 120 . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . .
Honeywell 200 . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
Honeywell 1200 . • . . . . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Honeywell 2200
....•...............................
Honeywell 4200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Honeywell 8200 . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
501:
502:
503:
505:
510:
511:
512:
513:
514:
516:
518:
Monrobot XI (Litton Industries, Inc.)
531:
Binder 7
NCR 315 (National Cash Register Company) . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NCR 315-100 (National Cash Register Company) . . . • . • . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NCR 315-RMC (National Cash Register Company)· • • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
601:
602:
603:
PB 250 (Raytheon Company) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . '.' . . . . . . .
631:
Philco 2000-210 (Philco Corporation) . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . •
Philco 2000-211 (Philco Corporation). . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
Phil co 2000-212 (Philco Corporation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
651:
652:
653:
RCA 301 (Radio Corporation of America) . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RCA 3301 (Radio Corporation of America) • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . .
RCA Spectra 70 (Radio Corporation of America) . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectra 70/15 . . . . . . . • . • • . . . • . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectra 70/25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectra 70/35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectra 70/45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectra 70/55 . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
701:
703:
710:
712:
713:
714:
715:
716:
SDS Sigma 7 (Scientific Data Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
740:
Binder 8
1004 (Sperry Rand). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SS 80/90 Model I (Sperry Rand) • . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
SS 80/90 Model II (Sperry Rand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
III (Sperry Rand) . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . .
770:
771:
772:
774:
UNIVAC 1050 (Sperry Rand) • • . . . • . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNIVAC 1107 (Sperry Rand). . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
UNIVAC 1108 (Sperry Rand) . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
UNIVAC 418 (Sperry Rand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • . . .
UNIVAC 490 Series (Sperry Rand) . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNIVAC 490 . . . . . . • . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNIVAC 491/492 . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNIVAC 494 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
. UNIVAC 9000 Series (Sperry Rand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
777:
784:
785:
790:
800:
801:
802:
804:
810:
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
© 1966 AUERBACH aCorporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
A.
1:002.00f
n ......
~EDP
.UEAlAC~
....-
Rout. to •..
millS
SEPTEMBER
1966
NEW MATERIAL
For Your
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
r
information products and services
AUERBACH INFO,
IN~
121 nartll broad stree·(
philade!phia, pa. 1910l
'JPC# 0616c)
l.TP I r~c eu·\Ss pn HH E C
['"liHTE':)
C827
C Cl
o,::!I,
1
CICC
CC
:l
PACKING LIST
J
The enclosed September supplement for your AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports
features:
•
An incisive Summary Report on the new Sigma computer systems from
Scientific Data Systems (SDS).
•
A reformatted and expanded edition of the] ] O-page Comparison Charts section.
•
A revised .edition of the 39-page General Index to AUERBACH Standard EDP
Reports.
The Summary Report on the new SDS computers reviews the small-scale Sigma 2
system and analyzes in depth the medium-scale Sigma 7 system. Sigma 7 is the archetype
system of the gradually expanding family of Sigma systems, and is the first SDS computer with
noteworthy capabilities for business data processing. The announcement of Sigma 7 raised
industry eyebrows with the promise that it "performs three times as much work as other
machines in its price class and sells for half the price of computers with comparable capability. "
Continuing a definite trend among new computer systems, Sigma 7 is largely compatible with the
mM System/360.
The AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports Comparison Charts are the most comprehensive
and up-to-date quick reference guide to computer characteristics available anywhere. The enclosed revised edition includes comparative informatioll Oll the newest Burroughs "500 Systems"
- the B 2500 and B 3500 - and on the industry's latest computer family - the UNIVAC 9000
Series. The Comparison Charts are divided into three basic categories:
•
Configuration Rentals (page 11:010.1(1). These charts show the prime-shift
monthly rental prices for more than !IO U. S. -manufactured digital computer
." ............ systems in various standardized equipmcnt configurations. The specifications
I"Clr·each of the standard configurations are described on page 4:030.100 of the
Users' Guide. These charts enable you to make direct, meaningful comparisons
of the costs of competitive systems with similar capabilities.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation nnd AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
1:002.002
•
Hardwarl' Characteristics (page 11:210.101). These charts list, in a standardized
format, thc important characteristics of thc central processor, internal storage,
and standard peripheral devices for each computer system. The entries in these
charts a)'(~ designed to be largely self-explanatory and to facilitate valid comparisons, but wo urge you to turn to the individual Computer System Reports in Binders
2 through H for more detailed analyses of the information summarized in the charts.
Because of the physical limitations upon the amount of information that a printed page
can hold, thc Hardware Characteristics charts are divided into four subsections
covering different classes of equipment; the Quick Reference Index on page 11: 001. 002
will dired you to all the entries pertaining to any particular computer system.
•
System Performance (page 11:400.101). These unique charts summarize the total
processing times for our standard "benchmark" problems, which are representative
of computer workloads in both business and scientific applications. Each of the 280
lines shows the cost and calculated performance of a particular computer system
arranged in a particular standard configuration. The System Performance charts
will help you to determine quickly which computer systems may be able to meet your
performance requirements and your budget, enabling you to weed out the inapplicable
computers and concentrate on the detailed Computer System Reports on the systems
which appear to be suitable for your needs.
The expanded edition of the General Index includes entries for every device, program, and
concept covered in your eight-volume service through September 1966. The first page of the General
Index contains concise instructions to make it easier than ever to find the information you need.
Please file the enclosed material promptly and carefully in accordance with the filing
instructions below. Then we suggest routing this cover sheet to the others in your organization who
should be informed of the important new material being added to AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports.
FILING INSTRUCTIONS
Binder 1
Behind Tab 1: WHAT IT IS - HOW TO USE IT:
•
Remove existing pages 1:001.100 thru 1:001. 102 (Summary Table of Contents), and
insert revised pages 1:001.100 thru 1:001.102.
Behind Tab 2: INDEX:
•
Remove existing pages 2:050.001 thru 2: 100.037 (Supplement Index and General Index),
and insert revised pages 2: 100.001 thru 2:100.039.
Behind Tab 11: COMPARISON CHARTS:
•
Remove existing pages 11:001. 001 thru 11:400.111 (entire Comparison Charts section),
and insert new pages 11: 001. 001 thru 11:400.111.
Binder 7
.Behind Tab 716: Spectra 70/55:
•
Insert new Tab 740: SDS SIGMA 7 and pages 740:001. 010 thru 740:221.101 immediately
behind existing pagc 7 Hi:201. 400.
The October supplement to AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports will bring
you an up-to-date, expanticI\ report on the GE-600 Series systems, analyzing
their hardware, softwarc, and compatibility features. The November
supplement will featurc a rl'vised and penetrating analysis of the IBM
System/360.
9/66
fA
AIlIBBACH
'"
1:010.100
A•
AUERBACH
STANDARD
ED]?
WHAT IT I S HOW TO USE IT
R[PORTS
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS:
WHAT IT IS - HOW TO USE IT
.1
WHAT IT IS
AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports is an analytical reference service designed to satisfy
the need for accurate, effective dat~ to aid in the selection and utilization of computer
systems for business and scientific applications. This service can save you countless
hours by providing the facts you need, when you need them, in .'standardized formats
that permit rapid references and facilitate objective comparisonS. Regular supplements
keep the service up to date and keep you informed of significant new developments in
the EDP field.
AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports is a uniquely useful tool for every user and potential
user of digital computer systems. Like most tools, it will be of some value to nearly
everyone who uses it, but it will be of far greater value to those who are willing to invest a little time and effort in learning how to use it most effectively. To ensure that
all of the information in AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports can be effectively employed
in solving your data processing problems, we strongly recommend a thorough reading
of the remainder of this "What It Is - How to Use It" section .
.2
STRUCTURE AND CONTENTS
AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports has a looseleaf format and an open-ended numbering system to facilitate additions and revisions. The service currently fills eight large
binders. Binders 2 thru 8 contain the detailed Computer System Reports, while Binder
1 holds all of the other material described in the paragraphs that follow. Numbered
divider tabs make it easy to locate individual reports. The Summary Table of Contents,
immediately behind Tab 1, provides an up-to-date summary of the overall structure
and contents of the servic~ .
. 21
Computer System Reports
These detailed technical reports on the hardware, software, and overall performance
of individual computer systems are the principal component of AUERBACH Standard
EDP Reports.
Every Computer System Report has the same basic format. Each report is divided
into a number of logical sections, and each section is devoted to a specific category
of information. For example, Section :021 of each Computer System Report describes
the system's Data Structure, Section :051 describes its Central Processor, Section
:171 describes its Machine Oriented Language (assembler), and Section :191 describes
its Operating Environment. Section :201 of each Computer System Report is particularly Significant; it contains the results of a series of standard "benchmark" problems
which measure the system's overall performance in typical business and scientific
applications.
A single Computer System Report may contain two or more sections of a particular
type. For example, there will usually be several Internal Storage sections - one
describing each type of storage device (core, drum, disc, etc.) that is available for
the system. To facilitate comparisons, all of the Internal Storage sections have the
same format, and they are numbered :041, :042, :043, etc. The first page of every
Computer System Report is a Contents page that summarizes the structure and content
of the report by listing each section .
. 22
Users' Guide
The Users' Guide (behind Tab 4) explains the basis and significance of each of the
standardized entries in the Computer System Reports. Keyed to the Computer System
Reports through corresponding section and paragraph numbers, the Users' Guide
provides the background you need to derive maximum value from the facts and evaluations in the individual reports. The Users' Guide constitutes "an encyclopedia of computer terms and characteristics, and it can serve as a checklist to ensure that no
important item is overlooked in computer system evaluations. Regular references to
the appropriate Users' Guide entries will help you get the most out of AUERBACH
Standard EDP Reports.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
3/66
1;010.230
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
.23
Index
The Index (behind Tab 2) is the natural starting point for most references. It is arranged
in straightforward alphabetical order to lead you quickly to all the information about any
specific device, program, or concept. The first page of the Index, Page 2;100.001,
contains brief instructions for using the Index effectively .
. 24
Glossary
The rapid, unregimented growth of the computer industry has led to significant differences
in the meanings and usages of many technical terms. A prerequisite for the preparation
of standardized Computer System Reports is the adoption of a consistent set of terms,
each of which has a single clearly-defined meaning. The Glossary (behind Tab 7) defines
the precise meaning of each technical term as used throughout AUERBACH Standard EDP
Reports.
---
.25
Comparison Charts
The Comparison Charts (behind Tab 11) summarize the key data from the Computer
System Reports in formats designed to permit quick, objective comparisons. The charts
are divided into three main categories;
• Configuration Rentals (Page 11;010.101). These charts show the prime-shift
monthly rental prices for individual computer systems arranged in various
standardized equipment configurations; the specifications for each of the
standard configurations are described on Page 4;030.100 of the Users' Guide.
These charts enable you to make direct, meaningful comparisons of the costs
of competitive systems with similar capabilities.
• Hardware Characteristics (Page 11;210.101). These charts list, in a standardized
format, the important characteristics of the central processor, internal storage,
and standard peripheral devices for each computer system. The Hardware
Characteristics charts are divided into four subcategories covering different
classes of equipment.
• Svstem Performance (Page 11;400.101). These unique charts summarize the
total processing times for our standard "benchmark" problems, which are
representative of computer workloads in both business and scientific applications.
Each line shows the cost and calculated performance of a particular computer
system arranged in a particular standard configuration. The System Performance
charts will help you to determine quickly which computer systems may be able to
meet your performance requirements and your budget.
The Quick Reference Index to the Comparison Charts on Page 11;001.002 will direct you
to all the latest entries pertaining to any particular computer system. Although the
Comparison Charts are quite comprehensive and largely self-explanatory, the serious
user is urged to turn to the individual Computer System Reports in Binders 2 thru 8 for
more detailed information .
. 26
Directories
The Directories (behind Tab 21) provide detailed listings of manufacturers and suppliers
of computing equipment and services - a handy compilation of likely sources of the
products and services you need.
.
. 27
Special Reports
A series of Special Reports (behind Tab 23) rounds out the service by providing facts
and guidelines on individual topics of special interest to many of our subscribers. Recent
reports, for example, have intensively examined optical character recognition, computer rental terms, random-access storage, and data collection systems •
.3
RE GULAR SUPPLEMENTS
Your copy of AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports will be kept comprehensive and up to
date by means of regular supplements. Each supplement contains new reports on recentlyannounced equipment and/or revised versions of previously-published reports that reflect
changes in equipment characteristics and in the state of the art. A blue cover sheet
containing a summary of the new information and easy-to-follow filing instructions
accompanies each supplement. We recommend that you set up a standard procedure to
ensure that each new supplement will be filed promptly and that the cover sheet will be
routed to everyone who may profit from the new material in AUERBACH Standard EDP
Reports.
3/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
(Contd. )
1:010.400
WHA T IT IS-HOW TO USE IT
.4
THE NUMBE.RING SYSTEM
The page numbers in AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports, which look rather formidable at
first glance, are part of a numbering system that has been specifically designed to facilitate rapid references and meaningful comparisons. The basic unit of reference is not
the page, but the paragraph. Referencing by paragraph number rather than by page number permits standardized report structures, ease of cross-referencing, simplicity of
indexing, and convenient supplementation.
Each major component of the service is identified by a separate divider tab and is called
a report. Report numbers consist of one, two, or three digits - the digits to the left of
the colon in every page number or index reference. For example, Report 203 (behind
Tab 203 in Binder 2) is the Computer System Report on the Burroughs B 5500.
Each report is, in general, divided into a number of logical sections. Section numbers
consist of the three digits to the right of the colon in every page number or index reference. For example, Section :051 of every Computer System Report describes the
system's Central Processor. The Central Processor section of the Burroughs B 5500
report, therefore, is Section 203:051, and it begins on Page 203:051.100.
Each section is further divided into numbered paragraphs, which constitute the basic
unit of reference in AUERBACH Sta':ldard EDP Reports. Every paragraph number consists of from one to four digits preceded by a decimal point. For example, Paragraph
.232 of every Central Processor section shows the processor's "Instruction layout."
To find the Burroughs B 5500's instruction layout, you simply turn to Paragraph
203:051. 232; that is, the" Instruction layout" entry (Paragraph .232) of the Central
Processor section (Section :051) of the B 5500 report (behind Tab 203). You will find
this entry on Page 203:051. 215. The page is so designated "because the first entry on
it is Paragraph .215. Thus, every page number is composed of a report number (the
digits to the left of the colon), a section number (the three digits to the right of the
colon), and the number of the first paragraph on the page (the three digits to the right
of the d'3cimal point, with zeros added :0 oue-digit or two-digit paragraph numbers).
For guidance in finding specific information, turn to the concise instructions for using
the Index on Page 2:100.001.
All report numbers, paragraph numbers, and page numbers throughout AUERBACH
Standard EDP Reports are strictly sequential, although there are many" gaps," or
omitted numbers. These gaps help to keep the service "open-ended" by facilitating
the insertion of new material in the most appropriate places.
Note that although individual Computer System Reports may contain two or more sections
of a particular type, a single Users' Guide sectio!l. applies to all sections of that type.
Therefore, although section numbers in the Computer System Reports end with the digits
1, 2, 3, etc., the corresponding Users' Guide section numbers end with O. Thus,
Section 4:040 of the Users' Guide applies to all of the Internal Storage sections which are
numbered :041, :042, :043, etc. in the various Computer System Reports •
.5
DERIVATION AND RELIABILITY
AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports is prepared a-:J.d edited by experienced computer
system analysts, all of whom are members of the Technical Staff of AUERBACH
Corporation.
In gathering, analyzing, and evaluating material for these reports, our staff starts with
the specifications and manuals issued by the equipment manufacturers and other reliable
sources. Advance information from the manufacturers frequently enables us to publish
a detailed analysis immediately after the official announcement of a new computer system.
Extensive amplification and clarification of the generaliy-available specifications are
usually obtained through visits to or correspondence with the manufacturers. Users of
the equipment are also interviewed whenever practical. The comprehensive, systematic
structure of the Computer System Reports helps us to identify and resolve the errors and
inconsistencies that are common in manufacturers' speCifications. The procedures that
are involved in deriving certain standardized report entries from the manufacturers'
specifications are clearly explained in the corresponding Users' Guide entries.
Throughout AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports, every effort is made to adhere to a consistent set of technical terms, as defined in the Glossary. Therefore, some of the terms
used in our reports on a given manufacturer's equipment may, of necessity, differ from
the terms used 'in the manufacturer's own literature. "
© 1966 AUERBACH Ccrporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
3/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
1:010.500
.5
DERIVATION AND RELIABILITY (Contd.)
Every report describing a specific manufacturer's equipment or services is sent to the
manufacturer for review prior to publication. We invite the manufacturer's comments
regarding the completeness and accuracy of the report. Where differences of opinion
exist between a manufacturer and our staff, however, AUERBAGH Standard EDP Reports
always reflects the opinion of our staff.
.
Where insufficient specific data is available, estimates may be used. All estimates or
approximations are clearly identified as such. Where specific data is unavailable and
an estimate is considered impractical, a question mark (?) is inserted in the published
report to indicate that the manufacturer was unable or unwilling to supply the requested
data.
Comments and suggestions from our subscribers are always welcome because they help
us to make AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports even more effective in meeting the needs
of its users. We welcome notification of any errors or omissions, as well as suggestions for additions to the service or improvements in its clarity or balance. Extensions
and improvements are frequently made to ensure proper coverage of new developments
in the EDP field; but the general format, content, and style of the service will remain
stable so that straightforward comparisons can be made between reports issued at
different times .
.6
HOW TO USE THIS SERVICE EFFECTIVELY
The information in AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports can meet many different needs,
and you will probably discover new applications nearly every time you use it. A thorough
reading of the Users' Guide and the Computer System Reports on a few of the newer
systems amounts to a concentrated course in data processing technology. The possibilities for casual yet rewarding "browsing" are virtually unlimited. Most of your EDP
information needs, however ,. will probably fall within one of four general classes:
(1)
Information about a specific device, program, or concePt is needed.
How can it be located quickly?
(2)
The characteristics of hardware or software items of a particular type
must be surveyed and compared. How can the necessary data be
compiled?
(3)
The throughput of an existing data processing system must be increased.
How can this be accomplished most economically?
(4)
A new computer system must be selected. How can the most suitable
equipment be chosen and justified?
Recommended procedures - though by no means the only ones - for using AUERBACH
Standard EDP Reports to help you solve each of these four types of problems are outlined
in the following paragraphs .
. 61
Locating Specific Information
To locate the information pertaining to any specific device or concept, the Index should
always be yOlJr starting point. Arranged in straightforward alphabetical order, the
Index will guide you quickly to the exact report, section, and paragraph that contains the
information you need. The instructions on Page 2:100.001 explain how to use the Index
effectively .
. 62
Comparing Hardware or Software
The standardized format of AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports is especially valuable
when the characteristics of hardware or software items of a particular type must be
surveyed and compared. In fact, you are likely to find that the job has already been
done for you. To survey the characteristics of Central Processors, for example,
you need only turn to Section :051 of each Computer System Report. There, Paragraph
.237 discusses each processor's indexing capabilities, Paragraph .42 lists its
processing speeds for numerous standardized tasks, and so forth. (Much of the same
information, in more abbreviated form, can be found in the Comparison Charts, which
make comparisons of key characteristics even easier.)
A unique feature of AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports is that software comparisons
can be made in the same straightforward, objective manner as hardware comparisons.
3/66
A
AUERBACH
"
(Contd.)
1:010.620
WHAT IT IS-HOW TO USE IT
.62
Comparing Hardware or Software (Contd.)
To survey the language facilities of the various COBOL or FORTRAN compilers, for
example, simply turn to the Process Oriented Language sections (:161, :162, etc.) of
each Computer System Report. There, each implementation of COBOL or FORTRAN
is compared to a clearly-defined standard version of the language. In a similar manner,
you can compare the capabilities and limitations of the highly-publicized new operating
systems by referring to Section :191 of each Computer System Report .
. 63
Improving an Existing System
When expanding workloads make it necessary to increase the throughput of your present
data processing system, turn to the Computer System Report that describes it. Chances
are that a careful reading of our objective analys}s will disclose numerous ways in which
you can increase, or more fully utilize, the processing power of your system.
Maybe the use of an integrated operating system (Section :191) can save several minutes
of set-up time on every job. Maybe most of your main runs are tape-limited, so that
the installation of faster magnetic tape units or another controller (Section :091) can
double your throughput. Maybe your programmers and/or your equipment configuration
are not taking full advantage of the system's capabilities for simultaneous operations
(Section :111). Maybe an optical or magnetic character reader (Sections :101, :102,
etc.) can remove your input bottlenecks. Maybe the addition of optional features to your
central processor (Section :051) can significa:J.tly increase your processing speeds. Maybe
a faster, cheaper random-access storage device (Sections :042, :043, etc.) is now available. Maybe there's a compiler, assembler, sort routine, or application package
(Sections :151 thru :191) that can simultaneously cut your programming costs and improve
performance.
These are just a few of the possible ways in which AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports
can help you to get more out of your present system; the possibilities are really limited
only by your own imagination. Furthermore, you'll want to read the Introductions and
other descriptive portions of the Computer System Reports on all the new systems. They
will help you to keep up with the advances in data processing technology, find out about
new concepts and equipment that can be adapted ;'or use with your present system, and
decide when it's time to trade up to one of the newer computer systems .
. 64
Selecting a Computer System
When the time comes to select and justify a new computer system, you can utilize the full
power of the facts and evaluations in AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports. The Selection
Procedure Report on Analysis Techniques (Tab 15) will guide you in analyzing your
requirements. Next, you can use the Comparison Charts (Tab 11) to "weed out" the
computer systems that are clearly too slow, too expensive, or otherwise unsuitable.
The characteristics and capabilities of the systems that survive this preliminary screening process can now be investigated in detail by turning to the appropriate Computer
System Reports. In each report you will find: a descriptive Introduction (Section :011)
that highlights the system's overall characteristics and limitations, several representative equipment configurations and their prices (Section :031), detailed reports on each
item of hardware and software, a complete price list (Section :221), and a uniquely
useful evaluation of the system's overall performance on a group of standard "benchmark" problems that you can readily relate to your own applications (Section :201).
The format and contents of these reports (and of the supporting Users' Guide) have been
especially designed to provide the information you need to pinpoint each system's
advantages and limitations, to make objective comparisons, to write realistic procurement specifications, to evaluate manufacturers' proposals, and to measure the system's
effectiveness after installation. AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports frees you from the
frustrating, time-consumiJ;lg job of collecting, correlating, and analyzing manufacturers'
specifications that otherwise complicates every computer selection task - and it provides authoritative documentary evidence to support your recommendations.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
3/66
INDEX
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
2:100.001
1.
mmRQ
GENERAL INDEX
~,EDP
AUERBAC~
•
IEPoalS
GENERAL INDEX
This Index, arranged in straightforward alphabetical order, is designed to lead you quicldy to
all the information in AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports about any specific device, program,
or concept. It is the natural starting point for most references. All index entries are expressed in terms of Report (or Tab) numbers (the digits to the left of the colon), Section numbers (the three digits immediately to the right of the colon), and Paragraph numbers (the
digits, if any, to the right of the decimal point) j e. g. :
710:051. 237
Lparagraph .237, "Address indexing."
LTL
Section :051, "Central Processors. "
Report 710, "RCA Spectra 70" (behind Tab 710).
Where no Paragraph number is shown, the entire indicated Section is devoted to the subject
device, program, or concept. Where no Report (or Tab) number is shown, the entry refers
to a general concept which is described in the indicated Paragraph of the indicated series
of Sections in each of the Computer System Reports in Binders 2 through 8, as well as in
the Users' Guide. For example, the Index entry for "reserved storage, internal storage"
is ":040.16". This means that: (1) a general discussion of the purposes and implications
of reserved storage areas in internal storage devices will be found in Paragraph 4:040.16
of the Users' Guide; and (2) the reserved storage in specific internal storage devices is
described in numerous correspondingly-numbered Paragraphs such as 420:041. 16,
420:042.16, and 420:043.16 (for the IBM System/360), 340:041.16, 340:042.16, and
340:043. 16 (for the GE 400 Series), etc.
For a more detailed explanation of the structure and numbering system of AUERBACH
Standard EDP Reports, please turn to "What It Is - How to Use It," beginning on page
1:010.100.
A
AAS, RCA 301 •..••
abandon, error . . . . • . . . . . . . • . • . .
absolute code, machine oriented
language . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . • . .
absolute form . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . •
absolute lockout . . . . . . . . . • . . • • . •
Absolute Vectors feature, IBM
System/360 . . . • • . . . . • . • . . . • . •
Abstract routine, RCA 301 .•....••.
access, input-output area .•••...•••
access, multiplexed ...•...•.•.•••
access lock . . • . . • . • . . . • . . . • • • • .
access techniques, internal storage ••.
access time . • . . . • • . • . . • • . . • • . .
access time, internal storage ..•••..
access time, variation . . • . . . . • . . . •
access type, internal storage .•..•.••
ACT III Compiler, LGP-30 . . . . . • • . .
ADC equipment, comparison chart .••.
ADC equipment, Special Report . . . • . .
additional buffered channel,
CDC 160-A • • . . . . • . . . • • . . . . • . .
Additional Read Station, IBM 1418 ..•.
address, chain . . • • . . • . • . . . . . • . .
address, complex . . . . . . • • . . . • • . .
address, compound, machine
oriented language. . • . . . . . • • • • . • •
701:171.1
701:182.1
4:180.7
4:170.512
4:050.221
4:070.444
420:101
701:151.17
:070.443
4:110.17
4:040.448
:040.28
:040.531
:040.5
:040.532
:040.283
352:133
352:161
352:181
23:080.900
23:080
244:011
244:111.12
244:041.13
401:102.12
4:050.2381
4:170.241
:170.241
address, direct, central processor .•.••
address, executed ..•••••••...•..•
address, indirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . .
address, multi-, machine oriented
language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "
address, overflow . . . . . • • . . . . . • • . .
address, presumptive ...•.••••.•..
address, relative . . • • . • • . . • . . . . . .
address, special, machine
oriented language . . . • • • . • . . • . . . •
address, stored .•.•••••.....•.••
address allocation, process
oriented language .•••..••••.•.••
address capacity, instructions,
central processor • . . • . . • • . • . . . . .
address combine, UNIVAC 1004 •.•.•..
address indexing, central processor ••
address modification sequence,
.
GE 400 Series . . • • . . . . . . • . . • • .
Address sequencing, PB 250 . . . . • . . • .
address structure, instructions . . . . . • .
addreSSing, indirect, central
processor . . • . . . . . • . • • . . . . • . . •
addressing modes . . • . • . • • . . . . • . • .
adjustment control, input-output ...•.•.
adjustment time, input-output ..•.•.•.
Advanced Assembly Language •••..•.•
Advanced Programming feature,
IBM 1401 . . . • . . • • . • • . • • . • . . . . •
agenda, H 200 Series . . • . . . . . . . • . . •
AIDS, RCA Spectra 70 ••••••.•••.••
air flow, physical characteristics ..••.•
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
:050.236
4:050.2373
:050.238
:170.242
4:050.2373
4:050.2373
4:170.3
:170.244
4:050.237
:160.92
:050.2362
770:051.122
:050.237
330:051.12
631:051.12
:050.234
:050.238
244:051.12
:070.71
:070.733
201:172
401:051.12
510:152.17
710:152.17
:210
9/66
2:100.002
Airline Reservations System,
NCR 315 .••••••••••.•••.•••
AJAX, UNIVAC 1050 •••....•••••
alarm •••.•••••.•.••..•••.•.
alarm display, console . . . . . . • • • . •
ALGOL, UNIVAC 1108 .••..•••.••
ALGOL, B 5500 . . . . . . • . . . . . • • • •
ALGOL CXA,CDC 3600 . . . . . . • . • •
alignment, numeric . • . . . • • . • . . • •
alignment rules, mMSystem/360 ..••
allocating segments . . . . • • • • . . . . •
allocation, address, process
oriented language . . . • • . . . . . . • .
allocation, dynamic . • . . . . • . . • . . •
allocation, hardware, operating
environment . '.•. '.• '.' .' ••.•.•••
allocation, input-output .••.••.•.•
allocation, storage level, 'process
oriented language . . . • • . . . . . • • . .
allocation, target computer, process
oriented ll;Ulguage .•••..•..•••.
allocation counter, ,machine
oriented language •.••..••...•.
allocation counter control. • . . • • • . • .
allocation impossible . • • . • • . • . . • .
ALMOST; UNIVAC III •••••.•..•..
alphameric literals . . . . . • • . • • . • .
ALTAC III, P 2000 . . • . • . . . • . . . . •
Alternate bank storage allocation,
UNIVAC 1107 •••...•..•...•.•
alternating areas, target computer •..
alternation, in -out unit, operating
environment . • . . • . • • . • . . . . . • .
alternation control • . • . . . . . • . . • • .
alternative exit, subroutine . . . . . . . •
alternative procedure, language . . . . .
alternative translator ..•...••••••
American Standard Code for Information Interchange, mM System/
360 ..•••..••..••...•.••.•.
Ampex TM2, P 2000 . . • • . . • • . . • . .
Ampex TM5, P 2000 .•.•.•..•..••
AMS, GE 400 Series . . . . . . . . . . . •
analysis techniques, selection
procedure report • . • . . • . • • . • . • •
Anelex Disc Files . . . . . . • • . . • . • •
Anelex Printer ••....••...••.•.
annotation, machine oriented
language . • . . . . • . . . . • • . . • . . .
Application Programs, IBM 1440 •...
APT III, UNIVAC 1108 . . . • • • . . . • .
area, input-output, internal storage ..
area, input-output, machine
oriented language. . • . • • . . . . • • • •
area, input-output, process
oriented language. • . . . • . . . . • . • .
area, working, machine oriented
language . . . • • . . . . . . • • . . • . . .
area iockout; internal storage .••.••
argument, table . . . . . • • • . • • . . . •
ARGUS Assembler ..•.••••.....•
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
ARGUS Operating System, H 800 •••.••
601:106.12
777:151.16
4:040.8
4:050.5
4:060.31
4:070.8
:060.31
785:163
203:161
247:163
4:160.345
420:051. 122
4:180.53
:160.92
4:190.41
:190.3
4:190.32
:160.91
:160.9
:170.542
4:170.542
4:190.44
774:172
4:160.352
651:161
651:181
784:051.12
4:180.512
:190.322
4:190.322
4:190.632
4:160.534
4:160.5
4:180.8
15:010
23:060
244:081
321:081
601:081
651:081
701:081
701:082
arithmetic task time, central
processor ..••..••.•...•.•••.•
arrangement, word, language ••.....
array of bits • . • . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . .
array operation . . . . • • • . . . . . . • . . •
ART, UNIVAC 418 • • . . • . . • • . . . • . .
ASCENT Assembly Language,
CDC 6000 Series .•••••.....•.••
ASCII code, mM System/360 ....•.••
ASPER Assembly Language,
CDC 6000 Series ..•••.••..•••••
Assembler, UBC, P 2000 ..••..•••.
Assembler J, H 200 Series .•..•.••.
assembly language ••..••.•••••.••
Assembly Line Balancing
GE 215/225/235 .•.•..••••••...•
assignment, input-output, process
oriented language . • • . . . • • • . • . • . .
assignment, input-output unit,
operating environment ....•••••••
aSSignment, multi- .•.•.....•••••
associative memory, IBM System/
360 . • . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . •
ASU, IBM 7080 .••..••......••••
atmosphere, physical characteristics ..
A TRAN Compiler, PB 250 . . . . . . • . .
Autocoder, Basic • . . . . • . . • . . . • • .
:170.544
414:151.17
785:151. 192
:040.442
:160.95
arithmetic tables, IBM 1620 Model 2 ••.
Augmented Input-Output Buffer and
Control, CDC 6411 . • . . . • • . . • • . . .
Autocoder • • • . . • . . • • . . • . . . • . . .
420:141
651:091.12
653:093.4
330:051. 12
:170.43
arithmetic, instruction list . . . . . . • • •
arithmetic and program control,
UNIVAC 4121 ••.•..•....•..•••
arithmetic error . . . . . . . . . . • • • . . •
arithmetic instructions .••.••••...
Arithmetic Language, IBM 7080 .••..•
arithmetic radix ..••..•.••••••..
arithmetic routine, machine
oriented language .•••••.•..••••
arithmetic tables, IBM 1620 Modell .••
Autocoder, Four-Tape, mM 7070/
7072/7074 ...••.••..••.••••...
AUTOCOMM, CDC 160-A ..•••..•.•
AUTOLOG, H 200 Series •••....•••.
AUTOMAP, IBM 1620 .•...••..••.
AUTOMATH-400 Language, H 400 .•••
AUTOMATH-400 Translator, H 400 ••.
AUTOMATH-800 . . . . • . • • . . . . • • • •
Automatic Assembly System,
RCA 301 ••••••..•..•..••.•••
:170.42
:040.444
4:160.363
502:171
502:183
Ji:.tomatic carriage
502:191
502:192
:120
774:051
:050.5
:120
417:151. 22
:050.21
:170.61
412:041. 13
412:051. 12
413:041.13
413:051.12
:050.42
4:160.93
4:050.213
:160.42
790:171
260:171
420:141
260:172
651:102
510:193.121
:170
321:151. 17
:160.94
:190.321
4:160.413
427:051. 121
417:051. 12
:210
631:161
631:182
401:172
401:182
260:101
401:172
401:182
402:172
402:182
403:171
403:181
414:172
417:171
402:171
403:171.12
403:183
414:171
403:171.12
403:182
244:011
244:163
510:151.17
412:151. 3
501:161
501:182
502:161
701:171.1
701:182.1
4:070.524
(Contd. )
9/66
AUERBACH
'"
/
GENERAL INDEX
2: 100. 003
Automatic Cartridge Loader, IBM
System/360 ..•••••••.•••.•.••
automatic code translation .•.••••..
Automatic Interrupt feature, GE 225 ••
automatic jump instruction,
Monrobot XI .•••...••••.•.•.•
automatic recovery, error . . • . . . • .
Automatic Recovery Option,
NCR 315 . . . • • . . . • . . . . . • . . . • .
automatic recovery procedure . . • • . •
automatic rejection procedure ....••
automatic rounding. . . • • . . . • • . . • •
automatic synchronization .••....••
Autonetics RECOMP II .•.••...•••
Autonetics RECOMP III . • . • • . . . . • .
Auto-Test, IBM 1401 .••••.•..•••
Autotest, IBM System/360 .•...••••
Autowrap, IBM System/360 •.•.••.•
Auxiliary Arithmetic Unit .••..••••
Auxiliary Read-Write Channel, H 200 .
Auxiliary Ribbon Feed, IBM 1403 ...•
Auxiliary Ribbon Feeding feature ..••
IBM System/360 .••.•••.•••.••
auxiliary storage ..••.••..•••••.
auxiliary storage, instruction list .•••
auxiliary storage performance,
internal storage . . . • . . . . . • • . . • •
Auxiliary Storage Unit, IBM 7080 .•••
average hand coding, definition
420:092
4:070.53
321:051.12
321:051. 33
100/200/300 Series •...•.•••••.
101 Sorter-Reader .•.•.•..••••
102 Sorter-Reader .••..•••••••
103 Sorter-Reader . . . . . . • . . . • .
104 Sorter-Reader • . • . • . • . . • . .
106 Sorter-Reader .••..••.••..
107 Sorter-Reader .•..•..••••.
116 Sorter-Reader . . . . • . • . . . • .
122 Card Reader . . • • . . • . . . • • • .
B 123 Card Reader • . • . . . • . . . • . . .
B 124 Card Reader . . • • . . • . . . • . • .
B 129 Card Reader . . • . . . • • . • • . • .
B 141 Paper Tape Reader .•••..•.•
B
B
B
B
B
B
142
160
170
180
247
248
Unit
B 251
Input Code Translator .••...•
Central Processor ..•••.••.•
Central Processor .•.••..•.•
Central Processor .••..•..••
Disk File Control Unit .••.•••
Data Communications Control
••••..•••••.••..••....
Visible Record Computer
(VRC) •••••••••••••••••••••
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
260
263
270
273
275
280
283
Central
Central
Central
Central
Central
Central
Central
Processor .•.•••.•••
Processor ..••.•.•••
Processor .••.•..•••
Processor ..••.•..••
Processor ..••.•..••
Processor . • . . • • . . • .
Processor .•.••..••.
B 304 Card Punch
B 320 Line Printer . . • . . • . . • . • . . • .
531:051.12
4:190.44
601:051.12
4:190.44
4:190.44
4:050.211
4:050.212
4:040.445
4:070.446
161:
162:
401:191. 52
420:152.17
420:153.17
420:107.12
320:051
321:051
323:051
512:111
415:081. 12
B 321 Line Printer . • • • • . . . . . . • . • .
B 322 Multiple Tape Lister . • . . . . . . •
B 323 Multiple Tape Lister . . . . • . . . •
B 325 Line Printer . • • • . . . • • . • . . . .
B 326 Multiple Tape Lister . . • . • . . . •
B 328 Line Printer . • . . . . . . . . . . . . •
B 329 Line Printer . . . • . . . . . . . . . . •
B 332 Multiple Tape Lister . . . • . • . . .
B 333 Multiple Tape Lister . . . . . . . . .
B341 Paper Tape Punch . . . . • . . . . . .
B
B
B
B
342
401
421
422
Output Code Translator • . . . . . .
Record Processor . • • . . . . . . . •
Magnetic Tape Unit . • . . . . . . • .
Magnetic Tape Unit . . . . . . . . . .
B 423 Magnetic Tape Unit
420:081. 12
4:040.1
:120
B 424 Magnetic Tape Unit
B 425 Magnetic Tape Unit
:040.7
417:051.12
4:180.54
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B 300 Central Processor . . . • . • . . . .
B 303 Card Punch • . • • • . . . . . • . . . .
201:
201:102
201:102
201:102
201:102
201:102
201:102
201:102
201:071
203:071
201:072
203:072
201:072
203:072
201:072
203:072
201:074
203:074
203:074
201:051
201:051
201:051
201:042
201:103.12
201:031. 500
201:051
201:052
201:051
201:052
201:011.1
201:051
201:052
B 430 Magnetic Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B 450 Disk File/Data Communications Basic Control . . . . . . . . • . . .
B 460 Memory Module • . . . . . • . . . . .
B 461 Memory Module . • . . • . . . . . • .
B 475 Disk File Storage Module . . . • . .
B 481 Teletype Terminal Unit . . . . . . .
B 483 Typewriter Terminal Unit . . . . .
B 484 Dial TWX Terminal Unit . . . • . . •
B 486 Central Terminal Unit . . . . • • • .
B 487 Data Transmission Terminal
Unit . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . .
B 493 Typewriter Inquiry Station . . • . .
B 495 Supervisory Printer . . . . . . . . . .
B 5000 Information Processing
System . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . .
B 5220 Central Control . • • . . . • • . • . .
B 5281 Processor . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
B 5290 Display and Distribution
Panel . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . •
B 5480 Data Communication
Control Unit . • . . . . • • . . . . • . . • . .
B 5470 Disk File Control Unit . . • . . . .
B 5500 Information Processing
System . • • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . .
backspace, input-output . • . . . • • . . . .
backward, read . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
BAL, GE 400 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
band . . . • • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
band, external storage, inputoutput . • . • • . . • . . • . . . • • . • • . . .
band, internal storage • . . . . . • . . • . •
band storage . • . . • . . • . . . . . . • . . . .
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
201:052
201:073
203:073
201:073
203:073
201:081
203:081
201:081
203:081
201:083
201:083
201:081
203:081
201:083
201:082
203:082
201:082
203:082
201:083
201:083
201:075
203:075
203:075
201:101
201:091
201:091
203:091
201:091
203:091
201:091
203:091
201:091
203:091
203:042
201:042
203:041
203:041
201:042
201:103.12
203:101
201:103.12
203:101
201:103.12
203:101
201:103.12
203:101
201:103.12
203:101
201:061
203:011
203:051
203:051
203:051
203:101
203:043
203:
4:070.523
4:070.521
330:171
4:040.51
4:070.24
4:070.323
:070.323
:040.26
4:040.25
9/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
2: 100. 004
bank control registers, CDC 160-A .•.
Bank-File Processor, NCR 315 ...••
BANKPAC, GE 215/225/235 . • • . . . .
Bank Processor, NCR 315 ••.•...•.
base address, GE 400 Series . • . . . . •
base address, GE 600 Series .••...•
base address, IBM System/360 . . . . .
base-register technique, IBM
System/360 . . • • . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
base-register technique, RCA
Spectra 70 . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Assembler, CDC 3200 . . . . . . .
Basic Assembly Language,
B 100/200/300 Series . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Assembly Language,
GE -400 Series . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
Basic Assembly System,
RCA Spectra 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Easycoder, H 200 Series . . . . .
BasicOperating System/360 (BOS) ..•
Basic Operating System/360
Assembler . • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Programming Support (BPS),
IBM System/360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Programming Support AssembIer, IBM System/360 . . . . . • • . . .
Basic Programming System, H 200
Series· . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . .
BasicReport Program Generator,
IBM 1440 . . . . • . • . . • • . . • . . . . .
Baudot Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BCL Code . . . • • . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
BEEF,UNIVAC 1108 . . . . . . . . • . . .
Bell Floating Decimal Interpretive
System, LGP-30 . . . • . . . . . • • . . •
BEST, NCR 315 • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . •
bibliography, COBOL . . . . . . • • . . . •
Binary Tape, Read, feature,
IBM 7072/7074 . . . . . . • . . • . . . • .
Binary Transfer feature, IBM 1460 ...
Bit Test feature, IBM 1441 . . . . • . . .
block i ' • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
block, gap, input-output . . . . . • . . • .
block, input-output . . . • . . • . . . • . . .
block of data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
blocking, machine oriented language ..
blocking control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
blocking control, in-out . . . . . . . . . •
blocking control, routine . . . . . . . . . .
blocking facilities, language .; . . . • .
boolean instructions . . . • . . . . . . . . ~
boolean operation. . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
BOS, IBMSystem/360 . . . • . . . • . . .
BOSS III, UNIVAC III . . . • • . . . . . . •
BPS, IBM System/360 . . . . . . . . . . .
Break Point Logic, LGP-30 . . . . . . . .
BRIDGE 1401, H 200 Series . . . • . . .
BRIDGE II Service System,
GE 215/225/235 . . . . . • . . . . . . . . .
broad-band communications facilities .
Bryant Disc File . . . • . . . . . . . • . . .
9/66
244:041.13
601:051.11
321:151. 17
601:051. 11
330:051. 12
340:051. 122
420:051. 121
buffer .•••.•..•..•..•.•••••.•
Buffer feature, IBM 1447 Console .•••
buffer, input-output . • . . • . • . '•.•••
bulk loading, internal storage .••..•
.bulk loading cartridge . • . . • . . . . • •
bulk program translation . . . . . . . . . .
bulk translating, program
translator .•...••.•..••••.•.•
Bunker-Ramo Display Stations, .
H 200 Series . . . • • . • . . ' ••.•...•
Burroughs Common Language Code ...
Burroughs Corporation . . . . . . . . . • .
Burroughs Corp., Paper Tape
Reader . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . .
420:051. 121
710:011. 21
245:172
201:171
burst mode, IBM System/360 .••.•..
burst mode, RCA Spectra 70 . . . . • . •
Business EDP Systems Technique,
NCR 315 • . . . • . . . • . . . • .' . . . . .
busy controller, test ••..••••••..
busy device, test . . . . • . . . • . . . . . .
busy test . . • • . . . . . . . . . . • • • . • . .
330:171
710:171
510:182
420:192
420:172
420:193
busy test, input-output . • . . . . . . • • .
Buyers' Guide for the Computer Field,
Directory . . • • . . • . . • . . ' ....... .
byte, IBM System/360 • • . . . . . . . . .
byte, RCA Spectra 70 . • . . • • . • . • . .
420:173
510:191
414:151. 14
161:141
203:141
785:151. 17
4:040.442
414:061.13
4:070.442
:040.624
4:040.624
4:180.44
:180.44
510:109
203:141
See B
502:071
503:071
420:111. 23
710:111
601:152
. 4:070. 56
4:070.56
4:040.444
4:040.448
:070.447
21:020
420:021
710:011. 22
C
Calcomp Plotter ..•. • . . ; . . . . • . .
352:173.14
601:152
4:161. 9
Calendar, STEP, PACE . . . . • . . . . .
call at loading time . • • . . . . . • . • • .
call by name • . . . . . . • . . • . . • . . . .
call by value . • • • . . . . • . . . . . . • . .
call library, process oriented
language . . • . . . . . • . . . • . . . . • . .
call list, translator . • • . • • . . • . . . •
call routine, machine oriented
language . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . .
Canning, R. G., analysis techniques ..
capacity, cartridge, internal storage .
capacity, hopper . . . . . . • • . . . • . . .
capacity, stacker . . . . . • . . . . . . • . .
capstan drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . .
carbon copies, input-output . . . • . . • •
card . . . • • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
Card Basic Programming Support,
IBM System/360 • . . • . . . . . . . . . •
card configuration (I) . . . . ' . . . . . . . .
card dimension, input-output . . . . . . .
404:091.12
415:091. 12
415:092.12
415:051.12
4:070.51
:070.325
:070.51
4:040.51
:170.653
4:190.1
:160.339
:170.65
:160.45
:120
:050.213
420:192
774:192
420:193
352:051. 12
510:131
510:181
Card Image feature, IBM 1442 . . . . . .
card offset, control . . • . . • . . . . . . .
Card Operating System,
GE 400 Series • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Processor Expansion Kits,
UNIVAC 1004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • •
Card Program Generator, .
GE 215/225/235 . . . . • . • • . . . • . . •
Card Punch Coupler, PB 250 . . . • . . .
Card Punch Synchronizer,
UNIVAC III ...................... .
Card Random Access Memory,
CRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
321:151. 15
321:191
23:100.52
23:060
501:042
502:043
502:072
503:043
505:042
653:042
701:043
A
23:070
245:102
412:101
631:101
651:104
601:191. 12
4:190.22
4:160.27
4:160.27
:160~ 753
4:180.465
:170.6
15:010
:040.611
4:070.731
4:070.731
4:070.211
:070.23
4:070.511
420:193.121
:030.1
:040.223
:070.51
414:071.12
4:070.55
330:191. 12
770:051. 123
321:151. 14
631:075
774:072.4
601:042
601:101
(Contd. )
AUERBACH'
'"
,/
/
GENERAL INDEX
2:100. 005
Card Read/Punch feature,
UNIVAC 1004 •.•••.••.•••..•..
Card Reader Synchronizer,
UNIVACm •••••••••••...••••.
Card Report Program Generator,
IBM 1401 ••••••••••.•...•..••
Card Transmission Terminal
IDM 1013 •....•••.•...•••••..
CART, H 200 Series •..••.•••....•
cartridge . • • • . • . . . • . • . . • . . • • . .
cartridge, internal storage .••..•••.
cartridge-loaded storage deVices,
Special Report ..•••..•.•••...•
cascade merge routines .••..••..•.
CASH, H 200 Series •..••..•••..••
CDC 160 . . . • • • • • . . . • . . . • • . . • •
CDC 160-A . . • . • • • • . • • . . • . . . . • .
CDC 161 Typewriter . • • . . • . . . . . • .
CDC 166-1 Line Printer ....•..••••
CDC 166-2 Line Printer . . • • . . . . • . .
CDC 167 Card Reader ..••.•...•••.
CDC 168-1 Arithmetic Unit
(fixed point) . . . • • . . • • . . . . . • • . .
CDC 168-2 Arithmetic Unit
(floating point) . . . • . • . . . . . • . . . .
CDC 169 Auxiliary Memory Unit .••..
CDC 170 Card Punch . • . . . . . . . . • . .
CDC 180 Data Collector . • . . . . . . . . .
CDC 350 Paper Tape Reader . . • . . . . .
CDC 405 Card Reader . • . . . . . . . . . . .
CDC 415 Card Punch
CDC 501 Printer
CDC 505 Printer
CDC 600 Series 7 -Track Magnetic
Tape Units . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . • . . .
CDC 600 Series 9-Track Magnetic
Tape Units . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . •
CDC 601 Magnetic Tape Unit . . . . • . . •
CDC 603 Magnetic Tape Unit ...••..•
CDC 604 Magnetic Tape Unit
CDC 606 Magnetic Tape Unit ...•.••.
CDC 607 Magnetic Tape Unit .•.••.•.
CDC
CDC
CDC
CDC
CDC
626
692
694
696
828
14-Track Magnetic Tape Unit .
Magnetic Tape Unit . • . • . . . .
Magnetic Tape Unit . . • . . . . •
Magnetic Tape Unit ..•.•.••
Disc File . • . . • • . . • • . . • • .
CDC 838 Disc File . • . . . . . • . . . . . • •
CDC 852 Disk Storage Drive ••...•.•
CDC 853 Disk Storage Drive . • • . . • . .
CDC 854 Disk Storage Drive •....•••
CDC 861 Drum Storage Unit . . . . . . • •
CDC 862 Drum Storage Unit ..•.••••
CDC 915 Page Reader . . . . • • . . . . • • .
CDC 1604 •••.••.•••.•••..••.•.
CDC 1604 and 1604-A Processors
compared ..••..••.••..••.••••
CDC 1604-A . . . . . • . . • • . . . . • . . • •
CDC 1604-A Central Processor . . . • . .
770:072.12
774:071.4
401:151.14
408:103.121
510:152.17
4:040.61
:040.61
23:060
4:150.13
510:151. 17
242:
244:
244:101
244:082
244:082
244:073
244:052
244:053
244:041
244:074
23:080.3
244:071
245:071
246:071
260:071
245:072
246:072
260:072
245:083
246:083
260:083
245:083
260:083
260:091
260:092
245:091
244:091
245:091
245:091
246:091
244:092
245:091
247:091
245:091
246:091
260:093
245:092
245:092
245:092
245:042
246:042
245:042
260:046
260:046
260:046
245:045
245:045
23:020.910
241:
243:011
243:
243:051
CDC 1607 Magnetic Tape System
CDC 1608 Magnetic Tape System
CDC 1610-A Card Reader-Punch
Control .••.•.•••••••••.••••
CDC 1612 High Speed Printer ••••.••
CDC 1615 Tape Control Unit ..•..••
CDC 1617 Card Reader .••...••.•.
CDC 3100 . . • . . . . . . . • . . • . • • . • •
CDC 3101 Desk Console . • . • • . . . . •
CDC 3103 Storage Module .••••.••.
CDC 3104 Computer ..••••••..•..
CDC 3106 Standard Communication
Channel . • • . • • • . • . . • . • . • . . . .
CDC 3107 Special Communication
Channel ..••••.••..••••••••.
CDC 3108 Storage Module ..••.•..•
CDC 3109 Storage Module . . . • . . . • •
CDC 3152 Line Printer . . . . • • . . • • .
CDC 3200 . • • . . . • . . . . . . • . • • . . .
CDC 3200 Basic Assembler . . . . . . . .
CDC 3200 Basic FORTRAN II . • . . • . .
CDC 3200 Cobol . • . . . . . • . . • . . . .
CDC 3200 COMPASS . . . • . . . • . . . •
CDC 3200 FORTRAN . . . . . • . . . . . •
CDC 3200 SCOPE . . . . . • • . . • . . . •
CDC 3201 Desk Console . . . . . . • . . •
CDC 3203 Storage Module . . . • • . . • .
CDC 3204 Basic Processor .....•••
CDC 3205 Scientific Processor . . • . .
CDC 3206 Standard Communication
Channel . . • • . • • . . • • . . . . . • . . .
CDC 3207 Special Communication
Channel . • . • • . . . • . . . . . . . . • . .
CDC 3209 Storage Module . . . . • . . . .
CDC 3210 Data Processor . . . . • • . . •
CDC 3215 General Processor .•••••
CDC 3235 Drum Storage Unit . . • . . . •
CDC 3276 Communications Terminal
Controller . . . . • . . . • . . . . . • • . .
CDC 3293 Incremental Plotter •..••.
CDC 3300 . . . • . . • . • . • . • • • . . . . .
CDC 3300 General Processor ...••.
CDC 3301 Desk Console . . . • . . • . . .
CDC 3303 Storage Module . . . • . . . . .
CDC 3306 Standard Communication
Channel . . . . • . • • . . . . . . . . • . . .
CDC 3307 Special Communication
Channel . . . • • • • . . . . . • . . • . . . .
CDC 3309 Storage Module . • . . . . . • •
CDC 3400 • . . . • . . . . . • • • . . • . . . •
CDC 3400 COMPASS . . • . . . . . . . • .
CDC 3400 FORTRAN . . • • • . . . . • • .
CDC 3400 SCOPE • . • . . • • . . . . . . .
CDC 3401 Console . . • • • • . . . . • . . .
CDC 3404 Basic Computer .•..•.•••
CDC 3406 Standard Input-Output
Channel . . . • • . • • . . . . • . . . . • • .
CDC 3409 Storage Module .•..•.••.
CDC 3600 . • . • • . • . . . . • . . • . . . • .
CDC 3604 • • . . • . • . . . • . . • . . . . . .
CDC 3641 Card Reader • • . . . . . . . . .
CDC 3642 Card Punch . . . . . . • • . . .
CDC 3643 Card Reader Controller . . .
CDC 3655 High Speed Printer ..••.•
CDC 3681 Data Channel Converter
CDC 3682 Data Channel Converter
CDC 3682 Satellite Coupler .••.••.•
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
244:011
244:091.12
244:102
244:081
243:091.4
244:073.12
254:
254:061
254:041
254:051
254:111
254:111
254:041
254:041
245:081
260:081
245:
245:172
245:163
245:161
245:171
245:162
245:191
245:061
245:041
245:051
245:051
245:111
245:111
245:041
245:051
245:051
245:044
260:102
245:102
255:
255:051
255:061
255:041
255:111
255:111
255:041
246:
246:171
246:162
246:191
246:061
246:051
246:111
246:041
247:
247:051
247:071
247:072
247:073
247:081
245:101
246:101
247:101
247:101
245:101
246:101
9/66
2:100.006
CDC 3691 Paper Tape Reader Punch ••
CDC 3694 Paper Tape Reader-Punch .•
CDC 6000 Series . • . • . . . • • • . • . . .
CDC 6000 Series ASCENT Assembly
Language . • . . • • . . . . . . . • . • • • .
CDC 6000 Series ASPER Assembly
Language . • . . . • . . . • • . . . . . . • .
CDC 6000 Series COBOL .•....•••
CDC 6000 Series Extended Core
Storage . . . . • . • . . . • •, . . • . . . . .
CDC 6000 Series FORTRAN 66 . . . . • .
CDC 6000 Series Peripheral and
Control Processors . • • . . . • . • . . .
CDC 6000 Series PERT . . . • • • • . . . .
CDC 6000 Series SIMSCRIPT . . . . . • •
CDC 6000 Series SIPROS . . • • . . . . .
CDC 6060 Remote Calculator . . . • . . •
CDC 6090 Entry/Display Console ..•.
CDC 6400 • . • • . . • . . . • • . • • . . . •
CDC 6411 Augmented Input-Output
Buffer and Control . • . • . . . . • . . . .
CDC 6600 . . . . • . . • • . . . . . . • • . . .
CDC 6600 Series Data Set Controllers .
CDC 6602 Display Console ..••.•.••
CDC 6603 Disk File ....••.•••..•
CDC 6607 Disk File .•..•..•••.•.
CDC 6608 Disk File . . . . . . • • . . . . .
CDC 6800 . • . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . •
CDC 8010 Data Collection System . . . .
CDC
CDC
CDC
CDC
8951 Drum Memory Unit . . . . . .
LGP-30 . . . • . . . . . . • • • . . • . .
RPC-4000 •..••..•••••.•..
Transacter System ..••••••..
central processor . • . . . . • . . • . . . •
central processor, errors, checks
action . . . . . • . • . • . . • • • . • . . . .
central processor, general . . • . . • . .
central processor, instruction time ..
central processor, interrupt . . . . . . .
central processor, look ahead . . . • . .
central processor, multi-running .•..
central processor, multi-sequencing ..
central processor, operand . . . . . . . .
central processor; operation .•.•••.
cent~~ processor, processing
faclhtles • • . . . . . . • . . • • • . • • . •
central processor, sequence control .•
central processor, special storage . . .
central processor, speed . . . . • . • . .
central processor, task time . . . . • . .
chadless tape • . . . . • • . . • • . . • . . .
chaining, IBM System/360 . • . . • . . .
chaining instruction, IBM 1401/1410 ..
changeable storage. • • . • . • • . • • • . .
Channel Address Word, IBM
System/360 . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . .
Channel Address Word, RCA
Spectra 70 . . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . ~ .
Channel Command Word, IBM
System/360 . . . . . • • . . . . • • . . . . .
Channel Command Word, RCA
Spectra 70 . . . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . .
9/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
245:073
246:073
247.074
260:073
245:073
260:073
260:
Channel-to-Channel Adapter, IBM
System/360 . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . .
260:171
260:172'
260:162
260:043
260:161
260:052
260:161.184
260:151. 185
260:051. 125
260:151.16
260:191
260:062
260:063
263:
260:101
264:
260:103
260:061
260:044
260:045
260:045
265:
23:080.72
23:080.900
244:042
352:
351:
23:080.71
23:080.900
:050
4:040.1
:050.5
:050.1
:050.41
:050.33
:050.32
:050.34
:050.35
:050.22
:050.21
character code . . . . . . . . . . . . . ; ..•
Character Generator feature,
IBM System/360 . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
character manipulation verbs . . . . . .
Character Mode, B 5500 • . . • • . . • . .
Character Processor, H 8200 ...••.
character recognition, Special
Report . • • . . . • • . • . • • . . . . • . . •
character set ; . . . . . . . • . . . . . • • .
character set, input-output . . . . . . • .
character size, code . . . . • . . . • . . . .
character structure, code . . . . . . . . .
characters, floating . . . • . . ; . . . . . .
characters, protection . . . . . . . , •..
charts, information flow, analysis
techniques . . . . ; . . . . . . . . . . . . .
charts, information process,
'
analysis techniques . . . . . . . . . . . .
check, dispatch of data . . . . . . . . . . •
check, echo .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . .
check, invalid address . . . . . . . . . . .
check, invalid code . . . . . . . . . . . . .
check, longitudinal . . . . . . . . . • . . .
check, read-back . . . . • '. . . • . . . . .
check, receipt of data . . . . . . . . . . .
check, recording of data . • . . . • . . • .
check, recovery of data . • . • . . . • • .
check, re-read . . . . . . . . • . . . . • • .
check, timing conflict . . • . . . . . . . .
check only, translation . . . . . . . . . . .
check only mode, program
translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .
checkpOint, object program . . • . . . . .
check-points, multi-sequencing . . . . .
checks, central processor . . . . . . . .
checks, input-output . . . . . . . . . . . . .
checks, internal storage . . . . . . . . . .
checks, operating environment . . . . • .
checks, program translator . . . . . . • .
checks, translation . . . . . . . . . . . • .
CHIEF , UNIVAC III . . . . • . , ..•.•.
Chippewa Operating System,
CDC 6000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CINCH Interpreter, PB 250 ... i • • • •
:050.2
:050.3
:050.24
:050.4
:050.42
4:070.221
420:111.4
401:051. 12
4:040.6
4:040.245
CLAMP, UNIVAC 1107 . . . • . . . . • • .
class, data . . . . • . . . . • • . . . . . . • .
clock, console . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . •
Clock, Program Addressable,
IBM 1410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock, Real Time, GE 225 . . • . . . . .
clock track, input-output . . • . • . . . . .
close file verbs . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
closed routine, library, machine
oriented language . . . . • . . . . . . . • .
closed routine, library, process
oriented language . . • . . . . . . . . . .
clutch points . . . . . . . • . • • . . . . • . .
COBOL . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . •
420:111.3
710:111.104
420: 111.3
710:1i1. 104
A
AUERBACH
'"
420:051.127
420:111. 26
:140
420:101
4:160.449
203:051 .
518:051.122
23:020
4:070.25
:070.25
:140.21
:140.22
4:050.217
4:050.217
15:010.51
15:010.511
4:040.8
4:070.222
4:040.8
4:040.8
4:070.325
4:070.222
4:040.8
4:040.8
4:040.8
4:070.22
4:040.8
4:180.452
:180.423
4:180.452
4:190.43
:050.5
:070.8
:040.8
:190.44
:180.7
4:180.7
774:191
260:191.121
631:172
631:192
784:151. 17
4:160.242
:060.52
402:051.12
321:051. 12
:070:324
4:160.45
:170.762
:160.762
4:070.623
4:161
201:162
203:162
245:161
'260:162
330:161
340:161
401:161
402:001
,402:161
403:161
414:161
(Contd. )
GENERAL INDEX
2: 100.007
COBOL . • • . . . . • • . . . • • . . . . . . • .
COBOL B, H 200 Series . . . . . . . . . . .
COBOL character set . . . . . . . . . . • . .
COBOL characters, input-output . . . . :
COBOL D and H, H 200 Series . . . . . . .
COBOL electives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COBOL general description . . . . . • . . .
COBOL Language Conversion Program (LCP), IBM System/360 . . . . . .
COBOL User's Guide . . . . . • . . . . . . .
code, external storage, input-output .. .
code, invalid, input-output . . . . . . .. .
code, invalid check . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
code, translate, input-output . . . . . . . .
code compatibility . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Conversion feature, UNIVAC
1004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . • .
code conversion time, central
processor . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . • .
code, data • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Image feature, UNIVAC 1004
code translate operation, central
processor . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . .
code translate operation, process
oriented language . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
code translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
code translation, automatic ..•.••••.
code translation routine . • . . . . . . . . .
codes, macro . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
codes, matched, input-output . . . . . . . .
codes, mnemonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
coding, own . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . .
coding correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
coding fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
coding form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . •
coding level, process oriented
language . . . • . . • • . . . . • . . . . . . •
coding sheet . . . . . . • . . • • • . • . . . • •
coding specimen, computer system
reports . • • . . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . • .
COGO, IBM 1130 . . . . . . • . . . . • • . . .
cold generator . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . •
COLLATE, EASY . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
collating sequence . . . . . • . . . . . • . • .
collating sequence, data code . . . . . . • .
Collectadata 30 System . . . . . . . . . . . .
command chaining, IBM System/360 . . .
comment, program . . . . . . . • . . . . . .
comments, program . • . . . . . • . . . . . .
417:161
417:182
420:164
420:165
501:162
502:163
502:184
510:161
510:162
601:161
651:163
651:183
701:161
703:162
710:162
710:164
710:165
774:161
777:161
784:161
785:161
800:161
510:161
4:070.25
:070.25
510:162
4:161. 3
4:161. 4
420:164.14
4:161
:070.33
:070.8
4:070.8
:070.53
:070.34
770:051. 123
:050.417
:140
770:051. 123
770:072.12
:050.215
:160.448
:050.214
:070.53
:170.64
:170.52
4:070.53
4:170.511
4:150.1
:170.23
:170.22
:170.21
:160.318
:170.21
:130
418:151.19
4:150.13
501:151. 13
:050.214
4:140.22
23:080.74
23:080.900
420:111:3
4:160.242
4:170.544
Commercial Controls Paper Tape
Reader, Monrobot XI . • . . • • . . • • .
commercial rental terms, Special
Report . • • . • • . • . . . . . . . . . . • • .
common carriers . • . . . • • . . . . . . •
communication, console .•••....••
communication, operator . . • . . . . . .
communication, operator, operation,
process oriented language . . . . . . • .
Communication Buffer Calls,
H 8200 . • . • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Control System, RCA
Spectra 70 . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . .
Communication Control Unit . . . . . . .
Communication Line Terminal
UNIVAC 1050 . . . . . . • • . . • • . . . .
Communication Multiplexer,
UNIVAC 1050 . • . . . . . . . . . . . . • .
Communication Multiplexor Channel,
RCA Spectra 70 . . . . . . . • . . . . . . .
Communications Control, RCA 3301 ..
Communications Control programs,
IBM System/360 • . . . . . . . . • . . . .
communications facilities . . . . . . . . .
Communications Mode Control
RCA 3301 . . . . . . . . • . . . • • . . . . .
Compact COBOL, B 200/300 Series ..
compacting, UNIVAC 494 . . . . . • . . .
comparator, UNIVAC 1004 . • • . . . . •
comparison charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
comparison operation . . • . . . . . . . . .
comparison operation, central
processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • .
comparison task time, central
processor . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . • . .
COMPASS, CDC 3200 . . • . . . . . . . • .
COMPASS, CDC 3400 . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPASS, CDC 3600 . . . . . . • . . . . .
compatibility, COBOL . . . . . . . . . . .
compatibility, code . . . . . . . . . . . . .
compatibility, format, external
storage, input-output . . . . . • • . . . •
compatibility, GE-400 Series with
IBM 1401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . .
compatibility, GE 600 Series and
IBM 7090/7094 . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
compatibility, H 200 Series with
IBM 1400 Series . . • . . . • . . • . . . .
compatibility, IBM System/360
Model 30 with IBM 1620 . . . . . • . . .
compatibility, IBM System/360
Models 30, 40 with IBM 1401/
1440/1460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
compatibility, IBM System/360
Models 40, 50 with IBM 1410/7010 ..
compatibility, IBM System/360
Models 50, 65, 67 with IBM
7070/7074 . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
compatibility, IBM System/360
Models 65, 67 with IBM 7040/7090 ..
compatibility, IBM System/360
Models 65, 67 with IBM 7080 . . . . . .
compatibility, RCA Spectra 70 with
IBM 1401/1460 . . . . . . . . • • . . . . •
compatibility, RCA Spectra 70 with
IBM 1410/7010 . • . . . . . . . • . . . • .
compatibility, RCA Spectra 70 with
IBM System/360 . . . . . . . . • . . . • •
compatibility, RCA Spectra 70 with
RCA 301 . • • . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . •
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
531:071
23:090
23:100.51
:060.51
:190.6
:160.46
518:121
710:191. 124
501:101
505:101
777:101
777:101
710:102
703:103
420:153.17
23:100.5
703:101
201:161
804:191. 123
770:051. 122
11:
4:050.214
:050.214
:050.423
245:171
246:171
247:171
247:181
4:161. 2
4:070.34
:070.34
330:131
340:011.100
510:131
420:136
420:131
420:132
420:133
420:135
420:134
710:131
710:132
710:133
710:134
9/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
2: 100. 008
compatibility, RCA Spectra 70 with
RCA 501 .••.•.••.••.•.•
compatibility, UNIVAC 1108 with
UNIVAC 1107 .••.•..•...•
compatibility feature, IBM 7010 .
Compatibility features, IBM
System/360 . . . . • • . . . . . . . .
Compatibility Support Package,
RCA Spectra 70 . . • • • . . • . . .
Compiler System Tape, IBM 1410 . . . .
Compiling System, IBM 7080 ...
complement, number . . . . . . . . . . . •
complement, re- . . • • . . . . . . • . . . .
complex address . • • . . . • . . . . . . • .
complex FORTRAN, IBM 1620 • . . . . .
compound address, machine
oriented language . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
compound conditions . . . . • . . . . • . . •
compound names, language . . . . • . . •
Compressed Tape feature . • . . . • . • .
computation, process oriented
language . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
computer configuration, program
translator . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . .
computer load-balancing . . • . . . • . • .
computer simulation . • . • . . • • . • . . .
computer simulators . . . • . . • . • . • .
computer system reports, system
configuration . • • . . . . . . • . • • • . . .
condition, Simple, process
oriented language. • . . • . . • • • . . • .
condition, testable, input-output . • . . .
condition, testable, internal storage .•
condition display, console . . . . . . . . •
condition loop, process oriented
language . . . • . . . • . . . . . . • . . . •
conditional, compound, process
oriented language. • . . . . . . . . • . . .
conditional clause . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
conditional procedure, process
oriented language . . . . . . . • . . • .
conditional relation, process
oriented language . . • . . . . . . . . • . .
conditional variable, process
oriented language. • • . . . . . • . . . . .
conditional variables . • . . . • . . • . • .
configuration, computer, program
translator. . • . • . • • . . . . • . . . . . .
configuration, system . . • . . . . . . . . .
configuration, target computer . . . . .
configuration, translating computer
configuration condition,
simultaneous operations . . . . . . . . .
configuration diagram symbols .•..•
configurations, standard . . . . . . . . . .
connection, control, console . . . . • . •
connection, controller,' input-output .•
connection, device, input-output ...•.
connection panel, UNIVAC 1004
connection restriction, internal
storage . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
connector, UNIVAC 1004 . . . . . . . . .
consistency checks . . . • . . • . . . • . • •
9/66
785:131
416:051.12
console .•••.•.•.•••••....•••
Consolidata system, RCA 301 ••••••
constant, process oriented language ..
constant label, machine oriented
language . . . • . . . • . . • • • • • . . • .
420:011. 62
420:131
constants .•.••••••.••••...••.
710:135
713:051
402:182.12
417:051. 12
417:181. 12
417:182.12
4:050.221
4:050.4
4:170.241
412:151. 173
context recognition ..•.•.•• , ••..•
continue, error •.•.•••.••••..••
contracts, Special Report . • . . . • . . .
contract terms, Special Report .•...
control, simultaneous working •••••.
Control Adapter, IBM 1074 . . . • . . • .
control adjustment, input-output .•••
Control Data Corporation . . • . . . . . •
control, manual, input-output ••....
Control Mark, magnetic tape,
NCR 315 . . • . . . . . . . . . . • • • . . .
:170.241
4:160.525
4:160.251
401:091. 12
415:091. 12
415:092.12
control method, interruption,
central processor . . . . • . . . • • . . .
control operations, input-output . . . . .
Control Programs, IBM System/360 ..
:160.43
control sequence, central processor ..
control time, central processor ..••.
control, translator, machine
oriented language. . • . • . . • . . . • . .
control unit, central processor ..••.
Control Unit Adapter, H 120 .••..•.
control variables, loop • . . • . • . • . • .
controller . . • . . . . • . . . • . . • . . . .
controller, test busy . • • . . . • . . . . .
controller, input-output ...•••..•.
controller, internal storage . • . • . . . .
Controller Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:180.6
23:100.24
:150.12
:150.11
:030
:160.522
:070.56
:040.448
:060.32
:160.564
:160.525
4:160.354
4:160.52
controls, console . . . . . . . • . . • . . . .
controls, operator . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
convenience, console . . . . . • . • . . . .
converSion, radix . . . . . . . . . • • . . .
conversion routine, radix . . . • • . • . .
conversion time, central processor ..
conventions, machine oriented
language . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . .
conventions, output, program
translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . .
Coordinator, UNIVAC 1107 ..••••.•
Coordinator, UNIVAC 1050 ...••.•.
copies, multiple, input-output ..•.•.
COPS . . • . . . . . • . . • . . . . . • . . • • .
copy format . . . . • . . • . . . . . • . • . .
copy mode, RPC-4000 . . . . . • • . . . •
4:160.52
:160.523
:160.354
4:160.354
:180.6
:030
4:160.84
4:180.62
4:160.83
4:180.61
:110.2
4:030.11
4:030.1
:060.22
:070.42
:070.43
770:051. 122
770:121. 102
:040.432
770:051. 122
4:170.422
core storage sharing, CDC 160-A . . . .
correction, machine oriented
language . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . • .
corresponding, move . . . . . . . • . . • .
cost, data processing, analysis
techniques • . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
count, loop, process oriented
language . . • . . . . • . . . • . . . • • . . •
count byte, IBM System/360 ...•.••
counter, data size . • . . . . • . . • . . . •
counter, sequence . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
counter, sub-sequence ..••..••.•.
A
:060
701:192.512
:160.351
:170.323
:170.334
:170.41
4:160.351
4:170.41
23:020.83
4:180.7
23:010
23:090
4:190.41
410:042.4
411:042.4
:070.71
See CDC
:070.72
601:091. 12
601:101. 12
:050.336
:070.55
420:191. 122
420:192.122
420:193.122
:050.3
:050.414
:170.54
:050
511:111
4:160.563
4:070.4
4:040.448
:070.4
:040.4
320:111.1
321:111.1
323:111.1
4:060.2
4:070.7
:060.5
4:050.216
4:170.64
:050.417
:170.24
:180.32
784:151.17
777:191
:070.23
651:192
4:160.361
351:064.12
351:011
244:041. 13
:170.23
4:160.444
15:010.62
:160.562
420:043.13
4:050.223
:050.31
:050.314
(Contd. )
AUERBACH
'"
./
./
GENERAL INDEX
2:100.009
counter control time, central
processor . • . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
courtesy call, GE 600 Series ..•••.••
CRAM, 353-1 . • • . . • • . . • . . • • . . • .
CRAM, 353-2
CRAM, 353-3
CRAM File Adapter, NCR 315-100 ..
CRAM Printout Routine, NCR 315 ...
CRAM Sort Generator, NCR 315 .•..
Critical Path Method,
GE 215/225/235 . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cue, subroutine . . . • . . . . • . . . .
cumulative indexing . . . . . • . . . . . . . .
cumulative indexing, instruction,
central processor . . . . . • . . • • • . • .
cut-off, input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CXA, ALGOL 58, CDC 1604-A . . . . . .
cyclic check bits . . . • . . . .
. .... .
cycle time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cycling rate, storage . . . • . . . . . . . . .
cylinder, IBM 1130 Disk File . . . . . . .
cylinder, IBM 1311 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cylinder, Read/Write, feature,
IBM 1301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cylinder mode, IBM System/360 . . . .
:050.415
340:191. 122
601:042
601:101
601:043
601:101
601:043
601:101
602:071
601:151.15
601:151.13
321:151. 17
4:160.5
4:050.2377
:050.2377
4:070.51
243:166
420:043.13
:040.531
:040.291
418:042.13
414:042.13
402:043.13
403:043.13
420:043.13
420:048.13
D
Daily Start, STEP, PACE . . . . . .
data, optimizing data, program
translator . . . . . . . • . . • . . . • . . • .
data, permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .
data, process oriented language . . . . . .
data, subscriptible, process
oriented language . • . . • . . . . . . . . • .
data, table description, process
oriented language . . . . . . • . . . . . . .
data block . . . . . . . . . • . • • . . . . .
data capacity, internal storage . • . . . .
data chaining, IBM System/360 . . • . . .
Data Channel, IBM 7607 . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Channel, IBM 7909 . . . . . . . • . . •
Data Channel, IBM 7904 - I, II . . • . . .
\
I
\
Data Channel A, IBM 7040 . . . . . . . . •
data class . • . . . • • . . • . . • . . . . . . . .
data class, mixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .
data class, process oriented
language . . . • . . . . . . • . . • • . . • . •
data code . . . • • . . • . . . • • • • • . . . . .
data code, internal . . . • . . . . . . . • . . .
data code, process oriented
language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data code utilization, IDM 1130 . . . . . .
data collection systems, comparison chart . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . • .
601:191. 12
:180.53
:040.244
:160.352
:160.364
:160.363
:040.51
:040.3
420:111. 3
409:071.4
409:072.4
409:081.4
409:091.4
409:101
409:111
409:042.421
409:102
409:103
410:091.4
410:092.12
410:101
411:101
411:091. 4
411:092.12
410:101
4:160.242
4:160.432
:160.342
:160
4:070.53
:160.347
418:141. 104
23:080.900
data collection systems, Special
Report . . • . • . . • . . . . . • . . • • • . .
data communications, Special
Report • • • . . . • . . . . . . • • . • . . . •
data communications applications . . . .
data communications controllers ..••
Data Communications System, B 5500 •
data communications system design .•
data communications terminal
equipment . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . • •
Data Control Word, GE 600. Series •..
data delimiter . . . • . . • . . • • • • • . . •
data description, program . • . . . • . . •
data description facilities, process
oriented language. . . . . . . . . . . . . •
data distribution systems . . . . . • . . .
data edit routine, machine oriented
language . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data entities, process oriented
language . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
data entry, console . . . . . . . . . . . . •
Data Exchange Control, RCA 3301 . . .
Data Exchange Control, RCA
Spectra 70 . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . .
data, figurative, process oriented
language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data format, duplicate, process
oriented language. . . . . . . . . .
data format operation, process
oriented language . . . . . . . . . .
data, internal storage . . . . . . .
data item, description, process
oriented language . . . . . . . . .
data layout . • . . . • . . • . . . . . .
Data Line Terminal, UNIVAC 1004 .. .
data, machine oriented language ... .
data management, IBM System/360 .•
data, manual insertion . . . . . . .
data merge routines . . . . . . . . .
data merging, problem oriented
facilities . . • . . • . . . . . . . . .
data movement operation, process
oriented language. . . . . . . . . .
data name, process oriented
language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data name, structure, process
oriented language. . • . . . . . . .
data permanence, internal storage . . .
Data Processing Package, CDC 3200 ..
data processing problem . . . . . . . • . .
Data Processing Services, Directory .
Data Products Corp. Disc File . . . . .
data radix, process oriented
language . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . • .
data rates, peak . . • . . . • • • . .
data re-definition, process
oriented language. . . . . . . . . .
data representation . . . . . . . . .
data sets . . . . . . . • . . • . . . . .
data sorting, problem oriented
facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data sorting routines . . . . . • . . . . . •
Data Station, H 200 Series . . . . . . . . .
data storage location . . . . . . . • . • . •
data structure . . . . . • . . • . . . . . • . .
data switch . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . .
data switch, process oriented
language . . • . . . . . • . . . • . • . .
data switch statement . . . . . . • . . .
data track . . . . . . • . • . . • . . . . .
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
23:080
23:100
23:100.2
23:100.42
203:101
23:100.3
23:100.41
340:111
4:160.248
4:160.3
:160.3
23:100.22
:170.64
:160.23
:060.4
703:102
710:105
:160.353
:020.2
:160.361
:160.44
:040.44
:160.34
:170.421
770:101
:170.4
420:191. 122
:060.4
:150.13
:150.13
:160.44
:160.24
:160.25
:040.24
245:151. 17
4:160.1
21:030
23:060
:160.344
:040.292
:160.362
:020.22
23:100.45
:150.13
:150.13
510:108
:020.1
:020
4:050.424
:160.515
4:160.51
:070.324
9/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
2:100.010
data transcription, problem
oriented facilities .••••..•..•..•
data transcription routine .•.••.••••
data transfer, instruction list .••..••
data transfer control, input-output ...•
data transfer instructions . . . . • . • . • .
Data Transmission Adapter,
IBM 3238 . . . . . • • . . • . . . • . • . • • •
Data Transmission Unit . . • . • . • . . . •
data type .•••.•.•.•..•....••.•
data usage . . • • . . . . • . . • . . . . • • . •
data value, process oriented
language . . • • . . . . • . • . . . . . • . . •
data volume, internal storage ...•••.
DATANET-10 . • . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . .
DATANET-11 . . . . . . • • . • • . . . . . • •
DATANET-15 . • • . . . . • • . . . . . • . • .
DATANET-20 . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . • •
DATANET-21 . . • • • . . . . . • . . . . . . •
DATANET-25 . . • . . . . . • • • . . . . . . •
DATANET-30 . . • . . . • . . • . . • • . . . •
DATANET-70 . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . •
DATGEN Language, IBM 7080 .•..•.•
Debug, FORTRAN IV, GE 600 Series ..
debugging routine . • . . . • . . • . . • . . .
debugging run supervision . . • • . . . • . .
decade, RCA 3301 .•...•..••..•••
Decimal Arithmetic feature,
IBM System/360 . . . . . . . . • . • . . . •
Decimal Computation Package
(BCK) CDC 160/160-A . . . . . • . . • • •
Decision Language, IBM 7080 .••...•
decision, logging, operating
environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
decision tables, Special Report . . . . . .
delay line storage, PB 250 . . . . . . . . •
deletions, program . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
delimiter, block . . . . . . . . . . • . . • • .
delimiter, data . . . • . . . . . . . • • . . . •
delimiter, data size . . . . . • . • . . . . • .
delimiter, location . • . • . . . . . . . • . .
delimiter, loop . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . •
delimiter, subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . •
Demand Deposit Accounting Programs, B 100/200/300 Series ....••
Demand Deposit/Proof and Transit
Financial Application Package,
B 100/200/300 Series .•.•••.•...•
Demand Permit Flag, NCR 315 ••..•.
demarcation, block, input-output . . . . .
density, packing, disc . . . . • . . • . . . .
density, packing, drum . . . . . • • . . . .
density, packing, magnetic tape . . . . . .
density, packing, paper tape . . . • . . . .
depth, unit, physical characteristics ...
description faCilities, data, process
oriented language .••..••.•.••..
Descriptor, B 5500 . • . . . • . . . . . . . .
design sessions, analysis techniques ...
designator, conditional, process
oriented language . . • . . . • • . • . • . .
designator, label .••••.•..•..•...
designator, label, machine
oriented language . . . . . . . • . . . . • •
designator, loop, process
oriented language . . • . . . . • . . . . . .
deSignator, name, process
oriented language . . . . . . . . . . . . • .
:150.15
4:150.15
:120
:070.44
4:120.7
408:103.12
408:103.121
410:104
411:104
:020.21
4:160.82
:160.35
:040.25
310:011. 101
310:011.101
320:102
321:102
323:102
330:102
330:102
330:103
330:104
330:105
417:151. 22
340:162.143
4:170.67
4:190.5
703:041. 13
420:051. 121
244:151. 176
417:151. 22
:190.72
23:030
631:041
4:170.23
4:070.51
4:160.348
4:050.223
4:160.348
4:160.561
4:160.531
201:151. 17
201:151.17
601:051.12
:070.512
:040.25
:040.25
:090.321
:070.34
:210
:160.3
203:051
15:010.33
:160.521
4:170.3
designator, procedure, process
oriented language ..•.••••••..•
deSignator, sub-routine, process
oriented language .•.•••••.••••
designator, class, process
oriented language. . • . . . . • • . • • • .
Desk Calculator Language,
IBM System/360 •.•.•••.•.•••.
desk space, console . . • . . . . • . . • • •
diad .•••••..•.•...•.•.•••• ' ••
diagnostic parameters, object
program .••..•.•••.•.•.••••
diagnostic program, operating
environment . . . • • • . • . . • . . • . . •
diagnostic program, translator . . . • .
diagnostic routine, machine oriented
language . • . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . • .
diagram symbols, configurations ..•.
DIAL, H 200 Series . . . . . . . . . • . . •
DICTATOR Interpretive System,
LGP 30 . . • . . . . . • . • . . • • . . . . •
digital plotters, comparison chart ..•
digital plotters, Special Report .•.•.
digital recorder; IBM 1620 .•.••...
Digitronics 201/751 Data Collection
System .•••.•••••.••..•.••..
Digitronics Corporation photoelectric reader ...••..•••..••.
Digitronics Dial-O - Verter Magnetic
Tape Terminal . . . . . • . . . • • . . . .
dimenSion, internal storage .••..••
dimenSion, phYSical, external
storage, input-output . . . . . . . • . . .
DIPDOP, H 200 Series . . • . . . • . . . .
Direct Access Option,
GE-400 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
direct access storage, Special
Report • . . . . . . • . • . . • . . • . . • • .
direct address . . . . . . • • . . • . . • • .
direct addressed operand, central
processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • .
Direct Control feature, IBM
System/360 . • . . . . • . . . • • • . . • •
Direct Control feature, RCA
Spectra 70 . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
Direct Data Channel, IBM 1401 •...•
Direct Data Channel, IBM
System/360 • . . . • • . . . . • . . . • • . .
Direct Seek feature, IBM 1311 . . . . . .
direct operation codes . . . . • . . • . . .
Direct Program Control Channel,
IBM 1130 . • . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
directories . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . •
disable, input-output . . • . • • . . . . . .
disable interrupt .••....•••.•.•.
disable operation . . • . • . . . . . • . . . .
disabled, test .•.•.•..••.•..••.
disc, dimension . . . . . . . . . . • . • . .
disc files, Special Report . • . . . . • • .
Disc Operating System, RCA
Spectra 70 • . . . • . . • . . . • . • • . . .
:170.315
Disk Channel, IBM 1130 . . . • . . . . . •
Disk Control Field: IBM 1311 ..•.•.
Disk File Organization Programs •..•
:160.24.
:160. 561
:160.541
:160.531
:160.5211
427:161. 124
:060.53
701:041.13
4:180.45
:190.5
:180.45
:170.67
4:030.11
510:152.15
352:173
352:194
23:070.900
23:070
412:101
23:080.73
23:080.900
351:072
770:074
784:075
:070.35
510:152.16
330:051. 12
23:060
4:050.238
:050.236
420:051.127
710:051. 128
401:051.12
435:111
401:043.13
414:042.13
415:042.13
:170.5
418:111.11
21:
:070.55
4:050.3321
4:070.55
4:040.448
:040.222
23:060
710:191
710:193
418:111.11
412:042.13
401:151. 16
414:151. 16
(Contd.)
9/66
AUERBACH
'"
/
770:101. 12
:040.22
/
/
GENERAL INDEX
Disk
Disk
Disk
Disk
2:100.011
File Sort Generator III . . . . . • . . .
File System, Burroughs . . . . • . .
MCP, B 5500 . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
Pack, IBM 1311 . . • . . . . . . . . . .
Disk Pack Controller, CDC . . . . . . . . .
Disk Resident Monitor, IBM
System/360 . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
Disk Sort/Merge, IBM System/360 .•..
Disk Utility Programs . . . . • . . . . . . .
Disk utility Programs IBM 1130 .•..•
DISPATCH, H 200 Series . . . . . . . . . .
dispatch of data, check . • . . • . . . . . . .
displacement, IBM System/360 . . . . • .
displacement address field, IBM 1130 .•
display, console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
Display Mask, UNIVAC 1004 . . . . . . . .
Display Stations, H 200 Series . . . • . . .
display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
distributor, UNIVAC 1004 . . . . . . . • . .
division, process oriented language ...
division remainder . . . . . • . . . . . . . .
divisions, program . . . . . . . . . • .
divisor zero procedure . . • . . . . . .
documentation, process oriented
language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
documentation, program translator . . . .
documentation, translation . . . . . . . . .
documentation, translator . . . • . . • . . .
DOS, RCA Spectra 70 . . . . . . . . . • . . .
Double Access Bands, RPC-4000 . . . . .
Double Access Track, LGP-30 . . • . . .
double length product . . . . . . . . . . . . .
double length working . . . . . . . . . . . . .
double word, IBM System/360 . . • . . . .
drive, capstan. . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . ..
drive, friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .
drive mechanism, input-output . . . . . .
drum, dimension . . • • . . . . . . . • . . . .
drum files, Special Report . . . . . . . . .
Drum MCP, B 5500 . . . . . . • . . . . . . .
Dual Access Controller Selector
GE 235 . . • . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Processors, B 5500 . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Read feature, P 2000 . . . . . . . ..
dump, object program . . . . . . . . . . . .
dump, program translator . . . . . . . . .
dump, restart . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . .
dump routine . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . .
dump facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
dump, machine oriented language . . . . .
DUMP, UNIVAC 1050 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
duplicate data format, process
oriented language . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
duplicate names, translation . . . . • . . .
duplicate output . . . . . • . . . . • . . . • .
dust limit, physical characteristics .•.
DUTY, UNIVAC III . . • . . . . . • . . . . .
dynamic allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dynamic display . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
dynamic parameters . • . . . . . . . . . . .
dynamic storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dynamic variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
201:151.13
203:043
203:192
401:043.13
412:042.13
414:042.13
415:042.13
245:043
EASY CO LLATE ...••••.••.•••
EASY Monitor, H 400 .....••••••.
Easy Programming System,
Monrobot XI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . •
EASY Selection .••.••••..•.••••
EASY SORT II . • . . . • • . . . . . . . . •
EASY Updating • • . . . • . . • . . . . . . .
Easycoder, H 200 Series . . . . . • . • • .
435:151. 11
420:152.13
401:151. 15
414:151.15
418:191. 11
510:152.17
Easytab, H 200 Series . . . . . . . • . . .
Easytran, H 200 Series . . . . . . • • . .
EBCDIC code, IBM System/360 . . . . •
EBCDIC Mode option, RCA
Spectra 70 . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • • • .
EDGE System . . . . . • . . . • . . . • • . •
4:040.8
420:051. 121
418:051. 12
:060.3
770:061. 12
510:109
4:060.12
770:051. 122
:160.21
4:050.211
:160.21
4:190.44
:160.85
:180.33
4:160.85
4:180.33
710:103
351:041. 13
352:051. 12
4:050.211
4:050.221
420:011. 3
4:070.211
4:070.11
:070.21
:040.222
23:060
203:191
323:111. 12
203:051. 127
651:073.12
4:180.453
:180.453
4:190.451
:170.67
:190.52
:170.671
777:151. 17
:160.361
4:180.7
:070.23
:210
774:191
4:190.41
:060.3
4:160.27
:040.242
4:160.332
E
Early Card Read feature, IBM 1402 ...
EASY, H 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
401:071. 12
501:171
echo check . . . . . . • • . . . . . • . . • . •
edit, format operation . . . . • • . . • . .
edit format . • . . . . . . • . . . • . • . • . .
edit operation, central processor ...•
edit operation, edit time, central
processor . • . • . . • . . . . . • . . • . .
edit operation, process oriented
language . • . . • . . . . . . . . . • • • • .
editing control, input-output . . . • . . •
editing routine, machine oriented
language . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . • .
editing verbs . . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . .
EDP problems, analysis techniques .,
effective speed, input-output .•..••.
effective transfer rate, internal
storage . . • . . • . . . . . • . . . • . . . .
efficiency, object program . . . . . • . •
efficiency, translator ..••••...••
eigen vectors . . • • . . . . • • . . . . • • .
Elapsed Time Clock, RCA Spectra 70 .
electives, COBOL . . . . • • . . . . . . . .
Electric Utility Routines,
GE 215/225/235 . . • • • . . . . . . . . .
electrical, physical characteristics ..
Electronic Accumulator feature,
IBM 1419 . • . • • . . • • . . • . . • • • . .
Electronic Computing Services
Directory . . . . . . . . • . . . . '. . • • . .
emergency off control . . . • • . . • • . .
emulators, IBM System/360 . . . • . • .
emulators, RCA Spectra 70
enable interrupt . • . . . . • . . . . . . . .
enable operation . . . • . . . . . . • • . . •
end value, index . • . . . . . . . . . • • . .
end value, loop . . . . . . . . . • • . . • . .
enter language, process oriented
language • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . .
entry of data, console . . . • . . . . • . .
environment data, analysis
techniques . . . . . • • . . . . . . • . . . .
environment division . . . . • . . . . • . .
environment, operating . . • . • • • . . .
environment, target computer,
process oriented language ..•••...
environment, translator, process
oriented language . . . . • • . . • . . • •
error control units, data communications . . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . • •
equipment, reserved, operating
. environment . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . •
equipment name, process oriented
language . . . . • . . • . • • . • . . . • • •
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
501:151.13
501:191
531:171
501:191. 12
501:151. 13
501:191. 12
510:171
510:182
510:151. 17
510:183
420:141
710:073
23:080.79
23:080.900
4:070.222
4:070.54
4:050.217
:050.217
:050.416
:160.446
:070.54
:170.64
4:160.446
15:010.75
:070.624
:040.73
:180.53
4:180.22
4:160.42
710:051. 128
4:161. 3
321:151.17
:210
401:103.12
21:030
4:060.21
420:011.62
420:131
710:131
710:132
710:134
710:135
4:050.3321
4:070.55
4:050.239
4:160.563
:160.81
:060.4
15:010.21
4:160.1
:190
:160.84
:160.83
23:100.43
:190.82
:160.264
9/66
2:.100.012.
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
erasable,. data •.••••••••.••.•.•
erasable storage ••••.•.••••.•••
error, central processor . ~ .•..• ; •
error, input-output . . . • . . . . • . . . .
error, internal storage . . • . • . . . . •
error, object program, process
oriented language. . • . . • • . . . • . • .
error, operating environment . . . . • '.
error, persistent . . . . . • . • . • . . • .
error, program translator . . . . . . • .
error, recording check . • • • . . • . . .
error, recovery procedure ..•••••.
error, translation . . • . . • • . . . . . . •
error control, machine oriented
language . . . . • . • . • . . . • . • . . . . •
error control, process oriented
language . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . •
error correction . . • . . . . . . • . . .
error, logging, operating
environment . . . . . . . . ' . . . .
error control units,
data communications ..•.•..
ESPOL Language, B 5500 ..•••.•••
ESI, UNIVAC 418 ••••.••..•...•
Exchange Jump instruction,
CDC 6000 Series. '" .•••••. ; .•
EXEC, UNIVAC 418 .••.••••.• " •
EXEC I, UNIVAC 1107 .••.••.••••
EXEC II, UNIVAC 1107 ..••••..•..
executed address .' ••• ; .• '••••.•••
Executive routine, RCA.30L •••••••
Executive routine, RCA Spectra 70 •••
Executive Control System, RCA 3301 .
executive routine . . . • . . • . . . . . ;.
exhausted condition, input-output . . . .
exhausted medium, input-'-output
exhausted medium check . . . • . . . . • .
existence, label . . . . . • . • ~ .
exit,' loop', : control, language ..
Expanded Print Edit feature ..
Extended ALGOL, B 5500 . . . .
Extended Assembly System;
RCA Spectra 70 . . • . . • • . .
Extended COBOL, B 5500 ..•.
Extended Core Storage, CDC 6000
Series . . . . . . • . . • • . . . . . . . . . .
extension of the language, process
oriented language . . . . . . . . . . . . .
external facilities, input-output . . . . .
external programming, UNIVAC
1004 . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . • .
external radix, procesS oriented
language . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
external storage, input-output . . . . . .
extra-usage rentals, Special Report .•
Extremity, STEP, PACE . . . • • . . • .
:040.241
4:040.241
:050.5
:070.8
:040.8
fast access registers, Monrobot XI •.
fast unoptimized translation .••••.
Fastbands option . . . • • . • . • • • . . •
Fastrand II Mass Storage . . . . • . . .
feed drive, input-output . . • . . • . . •
Ferranti punched tape reader,
LGP-30 ••••••••••••••••••.
FH -432 Magnetic Drum ..••.••••
:160.47
:190.44
4:190.44
:180.7
4:070.8
4:190;44
4:180.7
FH-B80 Magnetic Drum ...•••••.•
FH-1782 Magnetic Drum ...•..•••
:170.654
:160.328
4:040.8
:190.74
23:100.43
203:192
790:101
260:051. 125
790:191
784:191
784:192
4:050.2373
701:191.12
710:191.121
703:191
4:190.1
:070.56
:070.8
4:070.8
4:170.3
4:160.56
401:051. 12
414:051.12
415:051. 12
203:161
203:181
710:171
203:162
203:182
260:043
:160.6
:070.7
770:051. 121
:160.343
4:070.3
:070.3
23:090
601:191. 12
FICS, H 200 Series . . . . . . • • . . • .
field definition, IBM 7070/7072/7074.
Fieldata Code, UNIVAC 1107 •..•••
figurative, process oriented
language . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
file, multi-reel . • . . . . . . . . . . . . •
file, patching . . • . . . . . . • . • . • . •
File Adapters, NCR 315-100 .••...
file analysis techniques . . . . • . . . .
File Control, IBM 7631-II •....•••
File' Control Processor, RCA 3301 •.
File Control Processor, RCA
Spectra 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .
file description, process
oriented language. . . . . . . . • • . . .
file label • . • • . . • • . . . . • • . . • . .
file label, machine oriented
-language . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . . .
file label control, machine
oriented language . • . . • . . . . . . •
file label control, routine . . . . . . • .
file maintenance, problem oriented
facilities . . • . . . . . . . • • . . . . . .
file maintenance routine . • . . • . . . .
File Maintenance Routine, RCA 301 •
file manipulation operation, process
oriented language . . . . . . . . . . . .
file manipulation verbs . . . . . . . . . . .
File Manager, CDC 6000 Series ... .
File Processor, NCR 315 .•..••.•
File Scan function, IBM System/360 .
file updating routine . . • . . . . • . . . •
fill verbs . . . • . • . . . . • . . • . . . . .
filling, move . • . . . . . . • . . • . . . •
Film Memory, UNIVAC 1107 .•...•
filter, unit, physical characteristics.
fixed point operation, central
processor . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . .
fixed point time, central processor .•
fixed store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • •
Flexible Algebraic Scientific Translator, NCR 315 . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
Flexowriter, LGP-30 • . . • . . . . • . •
F
FACILE, H 200 Series . . • . . .
FACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
FARGO, IBM 1401 . . . . . • . . . • . . .
Farrington Electronics optical
.scanners . . . . . . .
. •........
FAST, NCR 315 . . . . . ; . . . • . . . . .
9/66
Flexowriter, PB 250 . . . • • . . . • . •
510:152.17
502:162
502:182
401:151.14
23:020.910
601:163
601:184
Flexowriter code, PB 250 •..•..•
FLIRT Interpretive System,
RPC-4000 . . . . . . . • . • . . . • . • . .
floating characters.
531:041.13
4:180.432
777:043.13
785:044
800:045
:070.213
352:073
785:042
800:043
800:042
785:043
800:044
510:151. 17
403:051. 12
404:051. 12
405:051.12
784:141
4:160.353
4:160.321
4:150.16
602:071
15:010.43
410:042.4
411:042.4
703:191
710:191. 123
:160.32
4:170.33
:170.324
:170.335
:170.651
4:170.65
:150.16
4:150.16
701:192.23
:160.45
4:160.45
260:151. 16
601:051.11
420:044.13
4:150.16
4:160.447
4:160.445
784:042
:210
:050.211
:050.412
4:040.241
601:163
601:184
352:071
352:072
352:081
631:071
631:072
631:081
631:141
351:151. 11
352:151.12
4:050.217
(Contd. )
A
AUERBACH
@
,/
/
GENERAL INDEX
2:100.013
Floating Point Arithmetic Subroutine,
NCR 315 .••..•.•.••••••.••••
Floating Point Interpretive System 1
(24.0), LGP-30 ••.•••.••••.•••.
Floating Point Interpretive System 3
(24.2), LGP-30 •.••...••••...•.
floating point operation, central
processor .•.•••.•.•••...••..
Floating Point Option, GE-400
Series ....•••••.•.••••••••••
Floating Point Routines, Monrobot
XI ......•.•.•.••.•••.•••.••
floating point time, central
processor .•••.•••..•...•..••
floor strength, physical characteristics . • . . . • . . . • • . • • . . . . . . • • .
Flow Chart Generator, B 100/
200/300 Series . • . . • . • . • . . . . . . .
flow charts, information, analysis
techniques . • • . • . • • . . . . • • . • . . .
Font E-13B ..•••••.•...•.•••••.
forced relinquish, GE 600 Series •••.•
FORGO, IBM 1620 • • • • . . • . . . • • . . .
FORGOL 4, B 5500 . . • . . . . . . • • . . .
form, coding .•••.•..••.•.••.• " .
form of display •••••••..•••.••••
format, data structure ..•••.•..•.•
format, edit . • . • • • . • . . . • • . . . • . .
format, edit operation . . . • • • • . . • . .
format, machine oriented language •.•.
format compatibility, external storage,
input-output . . • . . . . . . • • . • . . • . •
format control, input-output ..•...••
format control, machine oriented
language . • • • • • . . • . . • . . . . . • . • •
format control instructions . . . • . . • . •
format control task . . • . . . . . • . • • . •
format control time, central
processor . • . . • • . . . . . • • • . . . . .
format edit operations . • . . • • • . . . . .
format instructions . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
format of instructions . . . . • • . . • • . .
format operation, process oriented
language . • . • • . . • • • . • . . • . . . . .
format rule, label . • • . . . . . . . • . • . .
forms, analysiS techniques . . . • • . . • .
formulae operator, process
oriented language . • • . • . . . . . . • • •
FOR-TO-GO, IBM 1620 .•••••..•••
FORTRAN ..•••••••.•.•....•.•
\
\
'"
FORTRAN .••••••••••••.•.•••
601:151.171
352:132
352:171
352:192
352:172
352:193
:050.212
330:051.12
531:151.17
:050.412
:210
201:151. 17
15:101. 51
23:020.4
340:191. 122
412:164
412:193
203:183
:170.21
:060.3
:020.2
:050.217
:070.54
:170.2
:070.34
:070.54
:170.642
:120
4:050.425
:050.425
:070.54
4:070.54
:050.23
:160.44
:170.3
15:010.41
:160.41
412:164
412:193
203:163
244:011
244:162
244:183
245:162
245:163
246:162
260:161
321:162
330:162
340:162
351:161
401:001
401:162
402:001
402:162
403:162
403:185
FORTRAN characters, input-output ••
FORTRAN D, H, and J, H 200 Series.
FORTRAN subroutine library,
IBM 1620 .•••••.••.•••.•.•••
FORTRAN II, IBM 709/7090 •••.•••
FORTRAN II, language description . . .
FORTRAN II statements .•..••.•••
FORTRAN IV, differences from
FORTRAN II . . . • . • . . • . . • • • • . .
FORTRAN IV, IBM 7090/7094 .••..•
FORTRAN IV, language description .•
FORTRAN IV statements ...•.••••.
FORTRAN -A, CDC 160-A .••.•...•
FORWARD Sort/Merge Generator,
GE 225 . • . • • . . . • . • . . . . • . . • •
frequency, execution, sequence . . • • •
friction drive .•..•..•.••••.•.•
Friden Collectadata 30 System ••.•••
Friden tape punch, LGP-30 .•.•.••.
function definition, procedure,
process oriented language •..••.••
function definition routine . . . . . . . • •
functional unit, CDC 6000 Series
403:186
406:161
406:182
412:161
412:162
412:183
412:184
417:162
418:161
418:182
420:161
420:162
420:163
501:161
510:163
601:162
651:161
651:181
703:161
710:161
710:162
774:162
777:162
784:162
785:162
790:161
800:162
:070.25
510:163
412 :183.465
408:161
408:161
408:161. 4
408:162,141
408:162
408:162
408:162.142
244:161
244:182
321:151. 13
4:180.53
4:070.211
23:080.74
23:080.900
352:074
:160.54
4:160.54
260:051. 122
G
gain factor, storage •..•••..••••.
gap, block, input-output . . . . . • . • . •
GAP, General Assembly Program,
GE 225 . • • . • . • . . . • . • . • • • . . .
gap, intersection ••.••.•.•...•••
gap, section . . . • • • . • . . • . . • • . • •
gap size .••••••••.•.•••.••..•
gather-write ..•••••. " .•.••••••
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
115 . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . • • • . . • •
215 .•..•.•••.•.••.••.••••
225 .••..•••••.••••.••••••
235 •••.••••••..•••.••..•.
400 Series .•.•••.•..•.•••••
415 ••.••..••••••••.••••••
425 ••••••.•.••.••••••••.•
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
:040.292
:070.325
321:171.181
321:181
4:070.325
:070.51
:070.622
4:040.447
4:070.445
310:
320:
321:
323:
330:
332:
333:
9/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
2:100.014
GE 435 ••••••••••••••••••••••
GE 600 Series • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
GE 600 Series Core Storage Module •••
GE 600 Series Magnetic Tape Units .••
GE 600 Series Processor Module .••••
GE 600 Series Symbolic Macro
Assembler Language ••••••.•••••
GE 625 .••••••••••.••..••••.••
GE 635 .•.••••••••••••••••••••
GE 3101 Data Accumulation System .••
GE A651A1 Paper Tape System .•••••
GE CP-10 Card Punch •••.••••.•••
GE CP-11 Card Punch
GE CP-20 Card Punch
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
CP-21
CR-10
CR-11
CR-12
CR-20
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Punch ..•.••••.•••
Reader
Reader
Reader
Reader
GE CR-21 Card Reader .••••••••.•
GE D225B Card Reader ..••.••••••
GE D225 Card Reader •••••••.••..
GE DATANET communications
equipment ..••.••••..••••••••
GE DS-12 Removable Disk Storage
Unit .•.•••••.•••.•.' .••.••.•
GE DS-15 Removable Disc Storage
Drive ..•••••••••.••••.•.••••
GE DS-20 Disc Storage Unit ..•••••.
GE DS-25 Disc Storage Unit •.•••••.•
GE DSC-20 Disc Storage Controller .••
GE E225K1 Card Punch •••••••••.••
GE E225K2 Card Punch .•. ~ .••••••
GE M225B Mass Random Access
Control •••.•..•••••..••.••••
GE M640A Mass Random Access
File ...••.••.••.••.•.••.•••
GE ML-20 Multiple Tape Lister .•••••
GE MR-20 Magnetic Ink Reader/
Sorter .••.•.•••.•••....••••.
GE MS-40 Mass Storage Subsystem ...•
GE MT Series Magnetic Tape Units .••.
GE P225A High Speed Printer .•..••.
GE PR-10 Line Printer. ; .••••.••••
GE PR-20 Printer .••.••.••••••••
GE PR-21 Printer .....•••.•.•.••
GE PS-60 Programmed Peripheral
Switch .•.•..••.•.•.•.•.•.•••
GE S12B Magnetic Ink Document
Handler ...•••...•.••••.•.•••
GE SA225 Document Handler
Adapter . . . . • . . • • • . . • • . • . . . • •
GE T225A Magnetic Tape Handler ...•
GE T225C Magnetic Tape Handler .••.
GE T225F Magnetic Tape Handler ..••
GE TP-10 Paper Tape Punch •.••.•••
GE TR-lO Paper Tape Reader .•.•.••
GE TS-20 Paper Tape Reader/
Punch ..•..•.•• , •..•••••...•
GE U225 Magnetic Tape Controller .•••
GE X225A Auxiliary Arithmetic
Unit .•.•...••..••.••••••••.
334:
GECOM, GE 215/225/235 ••••••••
340:
340:041
340:091
340:051
340:171
343:
344:
23:080.75
23:080.900
321:074
330:072
340:072
310:011.074
330:072
340:072
310:011.075
310:011.073
310:011. 072
310:011.071
330:071
340:071
330:071
321:071
321:072
See DATANET
310:011.042
330:044
330:042
'340:042
330:043
340:042.4
321:073
321:073
321:042.4
321:042
330:082
330:101
330:045
330:091
330:092
340:091
340:092
321:081
310:011.082
330:081
340:081
330:081
GECOM Report Writer,
GE 215/225/235 ••••••••••••••
GECOS, GE 600 Series ••••••••••
GEFRC, GE 600 Series .••••••••.
GEIOS, GE 600 Series ..•••••••.
GEM, GE 600 Series •.••.••••••
General Comprehensive Operating
Supervisor, GE 600 Series ••••••
General Electric Company .•••••.
General File Record Control,
GE 600 Series ••.•••••.••••••
General Input/Output Supervisor,
GE 600 Series .••....•.••••••
General Internal FORTRAN
Translator, GE 600 Series .••.••
general library . • • • . • . • . • • . • • •
general library, language . • • • • • • •
General Loader, GE 600 Series .•••
General Precision LGP-30 ...••.•
General Precision RPC-4000 ...••.
General Purpose Program,
UNIVAC 1004 .••••••••••••••
General Remote Terminal
Supervisor, GE 600 Series ••••••
General Registers, High-Speed,
IBM System/360 ••••.••.••.••
generalized file proceSSing,
system performance .•••••••••
Generalized Sort/Merge Program,
CDC 3200 ••••••••••••••••.•
Generalized Sort/Merge Program,
IBM System/360 ...••••••••••
Generalized Sorting Program,
IBM 7080 .••.••••••••••.•.•
generator, cold .••.••.••••••.
generator, hot .•.••••••••••••
generators .••••••.••.•.•••••
GERTS, GE 600 Series ...••.•..•
GIFT, GE 600 Series . • • . • • . • . . .
glossary .•••••.••...••.•••.
good hand coding, definition •.••••
GOTRAN, IBM 1620 •••••••.••••
governmental rental terms,
Special Report .•.••..•..•..•
GPF, General Program Field tape ••
GPSS, IBM System/360 ....••..•
gradual release, lockout ••....•.•
grid charts, analysis techniques .•••
group, input, program translator ••.
Guard Mode, UNIVAC 494 ..••••••
321:161
321:182
321:151.14
340:191
340:191.123
340:191. 122
340:171
340:191
See GE
340:191. 123
340:191. 122
340:151.17
4:160.72
4:170.72
340:191. 124
352:
351:
770:151. 14
340:191. 125
435:051.12
:200.1
245:151.13
420:151.13
417:151.13
4:150.13
4:150.13
4:150.1
340:191. 125
340:151.17
7:100.100
4:180.54
412:163
412:192
23:090
651:182
427:161. 125
4:040.444
4:070.444
15:101. 71
:180.231
804:051. 12
H
330:106.12
321:010
321:010.4
321:091
321:091
321:091
310:011.077
310:011.076
330:073
340:073
321:091.4
321:051.12
H 120
H 120 integrated peripheral controls .
H 121 Central Processor .•..•..•
H 123 Card Reader .•••.••.••••
H 200 ..•••••.•••••••..•••.
H 200 Series •••••••••••••••••
H 201 Central Processor .••.•••••
H 204A Magnetic Tape Units ••••••
H 204B Magnetic Tape Units ...•••
H 205 Magnetic Tape Switching Unit
H 209 Paper Tape Reader .•.•••••
H 210 Paper Tape Punch .•..••••
H 212 On-Line Adapter .•••...•••
H 212-1 On-Line Adapter ••••••••
H 214 Card Units ••••••••.•••••
A.
511:
511:051. 12
511:051
510:178
512:
510:
512:051
510:091
510:092
510:102.122
510:073
510:074
510:107
510:102.121
510:077
(Contd. )
9/66
AUERBACH
'"
GENERAL INDEX
2: tOO. 015
H 215 Communication Switching
Units ..•••.•.••..•••.•••••••
H 222 High Speed Printers .•••.•..•
H 223 Card Reader .••.•••.••••••
H 224 Card Punch .•.•.•••..•.•••
H 227 Card Reader-Card Punch ...•••
H 233 MICR Control Unit . . • • . • . . • .
H 250 Mass Memory File Control .••••
H 251 Mass Memory File ..••...••.
H 252 Mass Memory File . . . . . . . • . .
H 253 Mass Memory File . . . . . . . • • .
H 256, 258, 259, and 259A
Disk Drives • . . . . . • . . . . . • • • . . .
H 270 Random Access Drum Storage ••.
H 281 Single-Channel Communication Controls . . . . • . . . . • • • . . . • .
H 286 Multi-Channel Communication Control . • . . . . • . • . . • . • • . . •
H 288 Data Station . • • . . . • . . • . . . . •
H 303 Display Station . . . • . . • . • . . • •
H 311 Display Station . . . . • . . • . . . • .
H 312 Display Station . . . . . • . • . . . • •
H 400 . • . . • . . . • . . . . . • . . . . • • . .
H 400 AUTOMATH-400 . • . . • . . • . . • .
H 400
H 400
H 400
H 400
COBOL-400 .•.•••••......•
COBOL-400 Translator ...•.••
EASY Monitor . • • . . . . . . • . . . •
EASY I & II ..•••.•..•..•••
H 400 Linear Program Package •••••.
H 400 PERT .•••.•.•••..•.••••.
H 400 Simulator, H 800 . . . . • • • • . . .
H 401 Central Processor . . . • • • . . . .
H 401A Central Processor . • . . . . . • .
H 402 Magnetic Core Storage .••••.•.
H 404 Magnetic Tape ..••..•••..•.
H 404-1 Magnetic Tape Unit .••....•
H 404-2 Magnetic Tape Unit
H 404-3 Magnetic Tape Unit
H 404-5 Magnetic Tape Unit . . • . . . . .
H 405 Magnetic Tape Switching Unit .•.
H 406 Magnetic Disc . . . . . • . . • • . . .
H 409 Punched Tape Reader . • • . . . . .
H 410 Punched Tape Punch . . . • . • . . .
H 422 -3 Printer
H 422-4 Printer
H 423-2 Card Reader .••.•••..•••.
H 424-1 Card Punch . . . . . • • • . . • • . .
H 424-2 Card Punch . • • . . . . . . . • • . .
H 424 -3 Card Punch ••••.••••.•.••
H 427 Card Reader-Punch (Reader) ..••
H 427 Card Reader-Punch (Punch) . . . .
H 436 Tape Control Unit . • . . • . . • . . .
H 460 Magnetic Disc File . . . . . . . . . .
i
\
\.
H 480 Communication Control Unit . . . .
H 481 Communication Control . . . . . . .
510:106
510.:082
510:083
510:084
510:075
510:076
510:071
510:072
510:105
510:044
510:044
510:044
510:044
H 484 Communication Control ...•.•
H 800 . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . .
H 801 Central Processor . . • . • . . . .
H 801-B Floating Point Option ..•..•
H 804 Magnetic Tape Unit ••...•..•
H 809 Paper Tape Reader
H 810 Paper Tape Punch . . . . . . . . . •
H 822 High Speed Printer . . . . • . . . .
H 822 Standard Printers . . . . . • . . . .
H 823 Card Reader
510:011.3
510:043
.•...........
H 824 Card Punch . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
H 827 Card Reader/Punch (Reader) ...
510:103
H 827 Card Reader/Punch (Punch) ..•.
510:104
510:108
510:109.121
510:109.122
510:109.123
501:
501:161
501:182
501:162
501:183
501:191
501:171
501:181
501:151. 22
501:151. 21
501:151.12
501:051
501:051
501:041
501:091
501:091
505:091
501:091
505:091
501:091
505:091
501:091
501:103
505:103
501:042
501:071
505:071
501:072
505:072
501:081
505:081
501:081
505:081
501:073
501:074
501:074
501:074
505:073
505:074
501:102
505:102
501:042
505:042
501:101
505:101
505:106
505:105
H 840 Optical Scanner .. . . . . . . • . •
H 860 Random Access Storage . . . . . .
H 1200 . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H 1201 Central Processor • • . . . . . . .
H 1400 . . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . . . • . . .
H 1400 Operator's Console . . . . . . . .
H 1401 Central Processor . . . . . . . . .
H 1402 Magnetic Core Storage . . . . . .
H 1800 • . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . .
H 1800 Control Memory . . . • . . . . . .
H 1800 Disc Storage Units ...••••..
H 1800 Magnetic Core Storage . • . . . .
H 1800 Utility Routines .•.••.•••..
H 1801 Central Processor . . . • . . . . .
H 1801-B Floating Point Facility ...•
H 2200 • . . . • . . . . . . • • . . . • . • • . .
H 2201 Central Processor . . . • . • . . .
H 4200 . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • .
H 4201 Central Processor . . . . . . • . •
H 8200 . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • • . . .
H 8201 Central Processor . . . . • . . . .
H 8201 Core Storage . . . • . . . . . . . .
H 8214 I/O Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
hand coding, definition • . . . . • . • . . .
hardware allocation, operating
environment . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . • .
hash totals . • . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . .
head . . . • . . . • • . . • . . . • . . . . . . .
head arrangement, input-output . . . . •
head arrangement, internal storage ••
heat dissipated, physical
characteristics . • . . . . • • . . . . • . .
height, unit, physical characteristics
hexadecimal, IBM System/360 ..••..
Hi-Data Tape Group, RCA 301 . . . . . .
hierarchy, process oriented language
hierarchy of controllers . . . . . . . . . .
High-Resolution Interval Timer,
IBM System/360 . . • . . . . . • . . . . .
High-Speed General Registers,
IBM System/360 . . . • . . . • • . . . . .
High Speed File Adapter,
NCR 315-100 . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
High-Speed Multiplexor Channel,
.
IBM System/360 ...••.•.•••••.
high-speed printers, Special Report ..
Honeywell . • • . • • . . . . . • . . • . . • .
Honeywell Series 200 . • • . . . . . . . . .
hopper capacity, input-output. . . . . • .
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
505:104
502:
502:051
502:051
502:091
503:091
502:071
503:071
502:072
503:072
502:081
503:081
503:082
503:082
502:073
503:073
502:074
502:074
503:074
502:075
503:075
502:102
503:102
502:043
513:
513:051
505:
505:061
505:051
505:041
503:
503:041
.503:043
503:042
503:151
503:051
503:051
514:
514:051
516:
516:051
518:
518 :051
518:041
518:111
4:180.54
:190.3
4:160.321
4:040.51
4:070.24
:070.24
:040.51
:210
:210
420:011.3
701:091
:160.316
4:070.4
435:051. 127
435:051. 12
602:071
435:111
23:050
See H
510:
:070.731
9/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
2:100.016
hopper empty, input-output ••••••••
hot generator • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
humidity range, physical
characteristics .•••••••••••.••
Hypertape Drive, IBM 7340 ••••...•
IBM 024 Card Punch .•••...•••.•.
IBM 026 Printing Card Punch .' •.•..
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
088
088
305
357
Collator ; . . . • • • . . . • • • . .
Card Reader, CDC 3600 . . . .
Simulator, NCR 315 .•••..•
Data Collection System •....
IBM 360 . • . . . . • . • • • . . • • . • . . . .
IBM 407 Accounting Machine ..•••.•
IBM 519 Card Punch, H400 . . . . . . • .
IBM 523 Card Punch . • . . • . . . . • . . .
IBM 544 Card Punch .•••••.••...
IBM 650 Simulator •...••.•••••••
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
704 . • . • . • . • • . . . • . . • . • • ; .
704 Central Processing Unit .•..
709/7090 FORTRAN II . . . . . . • .
711 Card Reader .••.. .- . . . . . •
IBM 716 Printer
IBM 717 Printer . • • . . • . • . . . . . . •
IBM 720 Printer . . • . . • . . . . . . . • •
IBM 721 Card Punch . . • • . . . . . • . •
IBM 722 Card Punch .•.•.•.•.•..•
IBM 727 Magnetic Tape Unit . • . . . . •
IBM 729 Magnetic Tape Unit
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
9/66
733
736
737
738
740
741
746
757
75,9
780
Magnetic Drum . , •.••....
Power Supply'. . • . . . . ' . . . .
Core Storage . • . . • . . . . . .
Core Storage . • . . • • . . . . .
Cathode Ray Tube Recorder .•
Power Supply ..•••. ' . . . . .
Power Distribution Unit .•••
Tape to Printer Controller ;.
Card to Tape Controller .•..
Cathode Ray Tube Display ..•
IBM 1001 Data Transmission System.
:070.56
4:150.13
IBM 1007 Accelerator Feature •••••
:210
409:092
IBM 1009 Data Transmission Unit .•.
352:075
531:075
531:076
352:075
531:075
531:076
244:102.12
247:073
601:151.11
23:080.76
23:080.900
414:103.121
See IBM
System/360
502:082
503:082
501:074
245:072
260:072
601:075
245:072
260:072 '
501:074
601:074
321:151.11
402:151.11
403:151.11
406: '
406:051
408:161
406:071
408:071
417:071
406:081
408:081
417:081
417:082
406:072
408:072
417:072
241:101.12
406:091
417:091
. 401:091
, 402:091
403:091
405:091
409:091
410:091
411:091
415:091
, 416:091
417:092
406:042
406:221
406:041
406:041
406:101
406:221
406:221
406:021. 004
406":021. 004
406:101
IBM 1011 Paper Tape Reader .•••••
IBM 1012 Paper Tape Punch •••.••
IBM 1013 Card Transmission
Terminal ...••..•..••••.••.
IBM 1014 Remote Inquiry Unit .•••.
IBM 1015 Inquiry Display Terminal ..
IBM 1030 Data Collection System .••
IBM 1038 Adapter .••••.•..••••
IBM 1040 Adapter . . • . . . • • . . • . .
IBM 1046 Adapter
IBM 1050 Data Communication
System . . • . . . . . • • • • . • . • . • .
IBM 1052
IBM 1055
IBM 1060
System
Printer-Keyboard ..••••
Paper Tape Punch •••.••
Data Communication
.••..••....•••..•••
IBM 1062
IBM 1070
System
IBM 1074
Teller Terminal .•.•.•.
Process Communication
.•.•••.....•.••..••
Control Adapter .•••••••
IBM 1130 .••.•••...•••••••••
IBM 1130 Assembler . . . . • . . • • . .
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
A ..
AUERBACH
1130
1130
1130
1130
1130
1131
1132
1134
Disk File .••••.•...•.
Disk Utility Program ..••
Monitor System .••....•
Subroutine Library •.•.•
Utility Routines .•••.•••
Central Processing Unit .•
Printer. • . . • • • . • • . . • •
Paper Tape Reader .•.•••
23:080.77 ,
23:080.900
402:041.13
402:051.12
401:101
402:101
408:103. 121
410:104
411:104
414:101. 121
415:101. 121
416:101
420:106.127
501:101.12
401:073
402:071
403:102.122
408:103.122
410:075
411:075
414:101. 122
415:101.122
416:071
401:001
401:074
414:101. 123
415:101.123
408:103.121
420:106.128
402: 102
403:102.123
408:103.123
410:105
411:105
416:102
420:011.201
23:080.78
23:080.900
414:103.122
420:106.124
410:081.4
410:091. 4
410:092.4
410:071.4
410:072.4
414:103.123
420:106.121
420:061.133
418:072
414:103.124
420:106. 122
414:102
420:106.123
410:042.4
411:042.4
418:
420:011.2
418:171
418:181
418:042
418:191.11
418:191
418:151. 17
418:151.15
418:051
418:081
418:072
(Contd. )
2: 100.017
·GENERAL INDEX
IBM 1231 Optical Mark Page Reader •••
IBM 1232 Optical Mark Page Reader •••
IBM 1285 Optical •••.•••.•••.••••
IBM 1301 Disk Storage Unit .•••.•••.
IBM 1302 Disk Storage Unit . • . . . . . . .
IBM 1311 Disk Storage Drive • . . . . . . .
IBM 1401 .•.•••.....•••..••.••
IBM 1401 Compatibility feature,
IBM 7010 .••••.•••.•.•.•.•••.
IBM 1401 Compatibility Option,
GE-400 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .
IBM 1401 Processing Unit . . . . . • . . • .
IBM 1401-G .•..••••..•..••.••.
IBM 1401-G Processing Unit ..•..••.
IBM 1401 SPS Translator,
B 100/200/300 Series . • • . . . . . • • . •
IBM 1402 Card Read-Punch . . . . . . . . .
IBM 14,02 Card Read-Punch,
Model N1 . . • . . • • • • . . . . . • . . • . .
IaM 1403 Printer . • • . . . . . . . . . • • •
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
1403
1403
1403
1404
Printer, Models 2 & 3 ..••..
Printer, Models 2 & 7 . • . . .
Printer, Model 3 . . . • . . . . .
Printer . • . . . • . . . . . . . . • .
IBM 1405 Disk Storage Unit . . • . . • . . .
IBM 1406 Core Storage . • . . • . . . • . . .
IBM 1407 Console Inquiry Station . • . . .
401:107
414:104
420:105.125
401:107
414:105
420:105.126
402:043
403:043
409:042
410:042
411:042
414:043
416:042
417:042
417:043
245:043
401:043
402:044
412:042
414:042
415:042
416:043
401:
IBM 1410 ..•••.•.••••.••••••.
IBM 1410 Simulator, IBM
704/09/7090 .•...•••...••••••
IBM 1410/7010 Simulation Program,
IBM System/360 .••••••.••••••
IBM 1411 Processing Unit •..••••.•
IBM 1412 Magnetic Character
Reader . . . . . . . • . • • . . . • . . • • .
IBM 14i2/1419 Control Program,
IBM System/360 . . . • • . . . • . . • . .
IBM 1414 Input-Output Synchronizer
IBM 1414 Input-Output Synchronizer
IBM 1415 Console . . . • . . • . • . . • . .
IBM 1415 Console I/O Printer .••...
IBM 1418 Optical Character Reader
416:051. 12
330:051.12
401:051
401:012
401:012.05
IBM 1419 Magnetic Character
Reader . . . . . . . . • . . • . . . . • • • .
201:184
401:071
401:072
402:072
402:073
410:073
410:074
411:074
411:073
415:071
415:072
416:072
416:073
502:074
502:075
503:074
503:075
505:073
601:073
IBM 1420 Bank Transit System ..••...
IBM 1421 Bank Transit Processing
Unit . • • . • . • . . . . • . • • . • . . . . •
IBM 1428 Alphameric Optical
Reader . • . . • . . . . . . . • . . • • . . •
420:071
260:082
401:081
402:081
410:081
411:081
412:011
413:011
415:052
415:081
416:081
420:081
245:082
422:011. 081
416:082
401:082
420:082
401:042
402:042
401:041
401:083
IBM 1440 . • . . . • . . • . . . • • . . • • . •
IBM 1440 Card Punch ...••••..•••
IBM 1441 Processing Unit ...•.•.••
IBM 1442 Card Punch .•..•..•••.•
IBM 1442 Card Read-Punch . • • . . . . •
IBM 1443 Printer ....••••..•..••
IBM 1445 Printer (MICR) .•...••.•
IBM 1447 Console . . . • . • • . . • . . . •
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
1448
1460
1461
1620
1620
Transmission Control Unit .•
..•••.........•..••.
Input/Output Control .•..••
Data Processing System
Model 2 Processing Unit
IBM 1620 used with IBM 1710
Control System . . . . . . . . . . • . . • .
IBM 1620 1620/1710 SPS ••.•....•.
IBM 1621 Paper Tape Reader .•..•.
IBM 1622 Card Read-Punch .•.•..••
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
1623
1624
1625
1627
Additional Core Storage .••
Tape Punch . . . • . . . . . . . .
Core Storage .••.•.•..•.
Plotter .•..••••.•..••.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
402:
402:151.12
420:151.11
402:051
401:104
402:104
414:101. 124
415:101.124
420:105.121
420:153.17
402:111.1
403:102
408:103
416:111.1
417:101
402:061
416:061
402:082
416:083
401:105
415:101.126
420:105.123
401:103
402:103
415:101. 125
420:105.122
415:052
415:052
415:101.127
420:105.124
414:
414:072
414:051
415:051
422:011.071
414:071
415:052
418:071
420:072
414:081
420:083
420:084
414:061
415:061
414:103
415:
415:111.12
412:
413:011
413:051
412:011
413:011
412:171
412:071
410:071
410:072
411:071
411:072
412:073
412:074
412:041.13
412:072
413:041
418:101
9/66
2i100.018
AUERBACH STANDARD EDPREPORTS
IBM 1710 COlltrol System .•.••••••
IBM 1800 Data Acquisition and
Control System . • • • . • • • • • • • . .' •
IBM 2020 Processing Unit, .•....•••••.
IBM 2030 Processing Unit .• '••. ~ : ~.•
IBM 2040 Processing Unit .••• , •• '.•
IBM 2044 Processing Unit .•.•• ; ..•
IBM 2050 Processing Unit ..•••••.•
IBM 2065 Processing Unit . '••••••.•
IBM .2067 Processing Unit .•••••..•
IBM 2073 Communications Adapter .••
IBM 2075 Processing Unit .•.•••..•
IBM 2150 Console .•.• : .••.• , •..
IBM 2167. Configuration Console ....•
IBM: 220~Printer .••• " ' , ' •••.•.•
IBM 2250 Display Unit .••••••.•••
IBM 2260 Display Stati.on, .,' ••...•.
IBM 2280 Film Recorder ' ..••.•• ; .• '
IBM 2281 Film Scanner ..••.••...
IBM 2282 Film Recorder/Scanner .•.
IBM 2301 Drum Storage .••.•••....
IBM 2302 Disk Storage ..•• , • '.' ...
IBM 2311 Disk Storage Drive .•.•..•
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
2314
2315
2321
2361
2400
Direct Access Storage ...•.
Disk Cartridge .•..•.•..•
Data Cell Drive .••.•..••
Core Storage .•.••••.••.
Series Magnetic Tape Units •
IBM 2415 .Magnetic Tape Uni~ .••••.•.
412:0n
435:011
422:011
423:051 '
424:051
435:051
, 425:051
426:051 "
427:051
422:011
428:051
,420:061.132,
427:0~1
4;20:085" '
, 420:101
420:102
420:109.121
420:109.122
420:109.123
420:047
,420:043
" 245:043
420:044
'710:042
420:048
4,35:041.12
330:045
420:042
420:091
420:094
420:093
420:0'94
'420:074
420:075
, 420:0,71
IBM 2501 Card Read Punch'.• ':' .. : ••
IBM 2520 Card Read Punch ,', .••. , ••
IBM 2540 Card Read Punch' .•.•.•••
IBM 2560 Multi-Function Card
420:076
Mabhine (MFCM) . . . . • . . . . • . . . .
420:073
IBM 2671 Paper Tape Reader . . . • . .
IBM 2701 Data Adapter 'Unit ........ " . , 420:106'
420:l(i1 '
IBM 2702 Transmission Control ..•.•
IBM 2703 Transmission Control .••.•
420:108.
IBM 2712 Remote Multiplexor ..••..
420:108
IBM 2740 Communicatioris Terminal '.• , 420:106.134
420:106.135
IBM 2741 Communications Terminal ••
IBM 2820 Storage Control .•....•••
420:047.13
IBM 2840 Display Control . • . . . . • . •
420:101 ,
IBM 2841 Storage Control .•.••••.• ' 420:043.13
427:031
IBM 2846 Channel Controller ...••.•
IBM 2870 Multiplexor Channel . • • • ... .' 420:1li.23
IBM 3238 Data Transmission Adapter .' . 408:103.12
414:1.01.127
IBM 3271 ,Direct Data Channel . , •. ,,'
415:101.128 '
402:042.4 '
IBM·3326 Disk Storage Control
IBM 3327 Disk Storage Control .••..
'401:042.4
IBM 3845 Expanded Serial I/O
,..,
Adapter . . . • . • . . . • • ;,' . ; ..... ;
'414:101.128
IBM 4370 Dual Synchronizer Adapter .
402:111.1
IBM 4671 Inquiry Control
'
403:1()1. 4
Synchronizer . . . . • . • • • • . . • . . .
IBM 4900 .Magnetic Character Reader
Adapter .• ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ',' ~ . , 402:10i4
IBM 5514 Paper Tape Reader Adapter.
408:103.12
IBM 5585 Print Storage .••.•.•...
401:111.1
IBM 5620 Priority Feature ..•..•.•
402:111.1
IBM 5730 Processing Overlap . . . . . .
401:111.1
402:111.1
IBM 6025 Read and Punch Column
Binary .•••.•.•.•..••.•..••.•
408:103.12
IBM 6040Read-Punch Release .•.•••
401:111.1
IBM 6136 Remote Inquiry Unit
.
..
.
Adapter .••••••....•••••.•.• , 408:103.12
A
IBM 7010 .••.••.• ~ • ',' ••.•• ~ •. " .,416:
IBM 7070 ..••.•• '.••••••••• ~ ••
403:
I~M 1070/7074 Simulation Program,
IBM Syste lD /360 •• , .•.••.•••••, . . 420:151. ,11
403:151.12
IBM 7070 Simulator, IBM 704 .• : ••
IBM 7072 .•.•.....•.••••.•.•
404:.
405:
IBM'1074 ,; •.•..•..•.••••••••
417:171
IBM 7080 Autocoder ••••••••.•••
IBM 7080 Compiling System •••••••
417:011
417:181.12
417:182.12
IBM 7080 Data Processing System ••
417:
IBM 7080'DATGEN Language ••••••
417:151.22
IBM 7080 IOCS (Input-Output
Control System) .•.••.••..••.
417:171.14
IBM 79/l0processor ..••.•.•.• ;'.
417:181
IBM 1080SerialInput/Output Adapter
401:111.12
414:101
415:101
IBM 7680 Report/File Language .•••
417:151.21
IBM 70aO Simulation Program,
IBM System/360 . . . • . . . • . • • . •
420:151.11
IBM 7086 Supervisory Control
System '.•.•.•.•.•..••.•.•. '. 417:191
IBM 7090 Console . . . • . . ; •. ' •••• ' 408:061,'
408: '
IBM 7090 Data Processing System •.
IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV ••.•••
408:162
IBM 7090 Processor for Assembling 1620/1710 SPS Programs .••
412:181. 8
IBM 7090/7094 Simulation Program,
420:151.11
IBM System/360 ..•••••. : .•••
IBM 7090/7094 Support Package,
'
IBM System/360 ...•.•••.••••
420:151.12
IBM 7094 .•••.•..••••.•.••••
409:
417:051
IBM 7102 Qentral Processing Unit ••
IBM 7164; High-Speed Processor .••.
405:051
IBM 71Q5 High-Speed Scientific
404:051
Processor .•....•••••..••••
410:051
IBM 7106 Processor . . • • . . . • • . .
411:051
IBM 7108 Instruction Processing
408:051
Unit .• '.. ' . . • . . . . • • . . • . . • • • •
408:051
IBM 7109 Arithmetic Sequence Unit .•
IBM 7114 Processing Unit .••..•••
416:041
416:051
IBM 7150 Console .•..•••..••••
403:061
403:082
IBM 7150 Console Typewriter ..•••
IBM 7150 Customer Engineering
403:061. 13
console •..•...••••••..••.•
IBM 7153' Cpntrol Console •••..•••
417:061
IBM 7155 SWitch Control Console
403:091.12
405:091. 12
408:104
IBM 7;1.84 :rape Intermix Feature
410:092.4
411:092.4
IBM 7300' Disk Storage Unit .••..••
403:042
IBM 7301 Core Storage ..•.••••••
403:041
404:041
405:041
IBM 7302 Core Storage .•..••.••.
409:041
417:041
IBM 7305 Central Storage and I/O
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
417:051
IBM7?20 Drum Storage ...••••..
420:046
IBM 7330 Magnetic Tape Unit
401:092
402:092
404:091
410:092
411:092
412:011
413:011
415:092
416:092
9/66
AUERBACH'
'"
(Contd. )
GENERAL INDEX
2:100.019
IBM 7335 Magnetic Tape Unit .•.•••.•
IBM 7340 Hypertape Drive . . . • . • . . .
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
7340
7400
7500
7501
7502
7550
Hypertape Drive, Model 3 ...
Printer . . . . . . • . . . • . . . . .
Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Card Reader •....•
Console Card Reader . . . . . •
Card Punch • . . . • • . . • . . . .
IBM 7600 Input/Output Control . • . . . . .
IBM 7601 Arithmetic and Program
Control . . . . • . . • • . . • . . . . . . . . .
IBM 7602 Core Storage Control . . . . . .
IBM 7603 Input/Output Synchronizer .••
IBM 7604 Tape Control . . . . . • . . • . . .
IBM 7605 Disk Storage Control . . . . . • .
IBM 7606 Multiplexer . • . . . . . . . . . . .
IBM 7607 Data Channel . . . . . . . • . . • .
IBM 7607 Data Channel . • • . . . . • . . . •
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
7621
7624
7625
7631
Tape Control . . . . . . • . • . . .
Power and Tape Control . . . .
Tape Control . . • . . . • . . . • •
File Control . . • . . . . . . • . .
IBM 7640 Hypertape Control . . . . . • . .
IBM 7701 Magnetic Tape Transmission Terminal . . • . . . • . . . . • • .
IBM 7702 Magnetic Tape Transmission Terminal . . • . . . • . . • . • . .
IBM 7710 Data Communication Unit
IBM 7711 Data Communication Unit
IBM 7740 Communication Control
System . . • . . . • . . . • . . • • . . . . . . •
IBM 7741 Processing Unit . . • . . . . • . •
IBM 7750 Programmed Transmission Control . • . . . • . . . • . . • . .
IBM 7770 Audio Response Unit . . • . . • .
IBM 7772 Audio Response Unit •...•••
414:091
401:093
405:092
409:092
417:093
420:092
403:081
403:071
403:073
417:073
403:072
601:074
403:071.4
403:072.4
403:073.4
403:081.4
403:082.4
IBM 7830 Tape Switching Feature ••••
IBM 7864 Telegraph Input-Output .•••
IBM 7871 Telegraph Input-Output
IBM 7875 Telegraph Input-Output .•.•
IBM 7900 Inquiry Station . . . . . • . . • .
IBM 7904 - I, II Data Channel . . . . • .
IBM 7904 - I, II Data Channel .••...
403:051
403:041.4
405:041. 4
403:071. 4
403:072.4
403:081.4
403:091.4
405:091.4
403:042.4
409:041.4
409:111
409:071.4
409:072.4
409:081.4
409:091.4
409:101
409:111
417:092.4
404:091.4
404:091.4
402:043.4
403:043.4
409:042.4
410:042.4
411:042.4
416:042.4
417:042.4
417:043.4
405:092.4
409:092.4
417:093.4
408:103.121
420:106.129
501:101.12
408:103.121
420:106.129
401:106
420:106.130
420:106.131
414:106
402:106.132
414:106
402:105
416:103
417:102
420:106.133
401:108
420:103
420:104
IBM 7907 Data Channel • . . . • . • . . . •
IBM 7908 Data Channel . . • . . . • . • • .
IBM 7909 Data Channel . . . . . . . • • • .
IBM charting technique, analysis
techniques . . . . • . • . . • . • . • . . • .
IBM System/360 . . • • . . • . . . . • . . .
IBM System/360, Model 20 .••.•••.
IBM System/360, Model 30 ..•..••.
IBM System/360, Model 40 .•..•••.
IBM System/360, Model44 .••.•.••
IBM System/360, Model 50 .••.•••.
IBM System/360, Model 60 . . . . • . • .
IBM System/360, Model 62 .•..•••.
IBM System/360, Model 64 .••.••..
IBM System/360, Model 65 . • . . . . . .
IBM System/360, Model 66 . • . . . . . •
IBM System/360, Model 67 . . . . . . . .
IBM System/360, Model 70 . . . . • . . .
IBM System/360, Model 75 . . . . . . . .
ICS, NCR 315 . . • • . . . . . . • . . • . . •
I-D-S, GE 400 Series • • . . . • . . . . . •
I-D-S, GE 600 Series . . • . . • • . • . . •
identifier, program . . • . . . . . . . . . .
"immediate" instructions,
IBM 1620 . . . • • . • . • . . • . • . . . . •
imperfect medium check . • • . • • . . • .
implicit description, data .•••....•
implied parenthesis . . . . . • • . . . . . •
implied subscript . . . . . . . • . . . . . .
improper format, translation .. •..•
incomplete entries, translation ...••
increment, index .•..•••....••••
increment, indexing instruction . . . . •
indenting, level, process
oriented language . . . • . . • • . . • • •
independent, program, loading ..•.•
independent operation, simultane0us operations . . • . . . . . • . . • • • .
independent operations . . . . . . . . • • •
independent routine .....•.••••••
index, end value . . . . . . . • • . • . . . •
index, IBM System/360 .•••..•.••
index, increment . . . . • . . . . . . • • . .
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
403:091.12
405:091. 12
402:106
403:102.124
408.103.12
416:104
402:106
408:103.12
416:104
402:106
408:103.12
416:104
403:101
410:091. 4
410:092.12
410:101
411:091.4
411:092.12
411:101
403:043.4
403:101. 12
405:092.4
417:111
409:042.421
409:092.421
409:102
409:103
15:010.513
420:
422:
423:
424:
435:
425:
426:011
426:011
420:011. 2
426:
420:011.2
427:
428:011
428:
601:192
330:151.16
340:151.16
4:160.27
412:051.12
413:051.12
4:070.8
4:160.3
4:160.413
4:160.363
4:180.7
4:180.7
4:050.2378
4:050.239
:050.2391
:160.317
:190.212
:110.12
4:110.13
4:190.21
4:050.239
420:051. 121
4:050.2378
4:050.239
4:050.2391
9/66
2: 100. 020
index, stepping • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
index step and test, instruction •••.••
index stepping instruction . • • • • • • • • .
index stepping instruction,
central processor .••••.•••.••••
indexing, cumulative .••.•..•.••..
indexing, cumulative, instruction .••..
Indexing and Store Address Register
feature, IDM 1441 .•••••.••.••••
indexing instruction . • • • • . • • • . • • • .
indexing of addresses, central
processor .•.••••••..•••.•••.
indexing rule, instruction,
central processor ..••.••.•••••.
indexing time, central processor . . . . .
indexing with indirect addressing,
central processor .••....••...••
indicator .••.•.•••••...••••••.
indirect address ..•••.•..••.••..
indirect addressing, central
processor .•..•••••.••.••.••.
indirect addressing and indexing,
central processor .••.•.••.••.••
information flow charts,
analysis techniques . • . . . • . . . . . . .
information flow requirements . • . • . • .
information process charts,
analysis techniques .••.•..•••.••
inhibited codes, LGP-30 ..••••••.••
initial strings . • • • • . • '.' . • . • . • • • .
in-line sub-routine, process
oriented language ......•••.••••
input, program translator .•••••••..
input area overflow check .••••.•.•.
Input Code Translator .•..•••..•.•
input cut-off ..••.......•••.••..
input duplication mode, RPC-4000 •••.
input media conversion,
GE 600 Series .•••.••..••.•..•.
Input Modes, Special LGP-30 ..•.•.•
input operation .••.•.•..•..•••..
input-output ...•.•••••••.•••••.
input-output, blocking control,
process oriented language . • • . • • . • .
input-output, external storage .•.•.•.
input-output allocation ••..••.••.•.
input-output area ••.•.••.••.••••..
input-output area, lockout .••...•...
input-output area, machine
oriented language. . . • • . . • . . . • . • •
input-output area, process
oriented language .•.....••.•.••
input-output areas, target
computer .•....•••....•.••.•.
input-output assignment, process
oriented language ..•...•.••..•.
Input/Output Channel, B 5500 .•..•..
input-output code .••••.••..••....
Input/Output Console, NCR 315 •••.••
input-output control, machine
oriented language .••..••.•••..•
input-output control, routine .•••..••
input-output controller ..••..••..••
Input-Output Controller, H 8200 ••...•
Input-Output Controller Module,
GE 600 Series .••••••..•..•....
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
4:050.239
:050.2395
:050.239
:050.2378
4:050.2377
:050.2377
414:051.12
415:051.12
4:050.2374
:050.237
:050.2373
:050.413
:050.2384
4:040.8
4:050.5
4:050.2362
4:050.238
:050.238
:050.2384
15:010.51
23:100.31
15:010. q:!l
352 :071. :h2
352:141 .
4:150.13
4:160.533
:180.2
4:070.8
201:074.12
4:070.51
351:011.12
351:074.12
340:191. 121
352:071.12
. :070. 521
4:070.51
:070
:160.329
:070.3
4:190.32
:040.442
4:070.444
:170.43
:160.95
4:180.512
:160.94
203:111
:140
601:071
:170.65
4:170.65
:070.4
518:111
340:111
input-output devices, comparison
chart ••••..••••••••••••••••
input-output error control,
process oriented language ••••••••
input-output errors, checks and
action .••.••..•..•..••.••.•
input-output file, space, program
translator .••..••.••••••.•••
Input-Output File Controller J,
H 200 Series ••.•.• '.' .••••••••
input-output, general ..•••••••.••
input-output instruction list • " •••••
input-output instructions .•••••••••
input-output manual control .••••••.
input-output operation .••••••••..•
Input-output Package, B5000 .••....
input-output performance .•.•••••.
input-output physical form ...•••..
Input-output Printer, IDM 1447
input-output program facilities
Input-output Programming
System, P 2000 ...•.....•.••••
input-output sectors, H 8200 .••••••
input-output sequence control,
process oriented language . • • • • • • •
input-output storage medium .•••.••
input-output typewriter •.••••••.•.
input-output unit, console .••••.•.•
input-output unit, operating
environment . • . • • • • • . • . • • • . • •
input unit, computer system report .•
inquiry, signal, operating
environment . • . • . • • . . . • • • • • • •
Inquiry Buffer Adapter, NCR
315-100 .•.••••.•••..••••••.
Inquiry Control System, NCR 315 •••.
inquiry facilities .•••..••.••••.•
inquiry processing systems .•••••..
insertion, library, process
oriented language. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
insertion of new item, library ..••..
insertion routine, library .•.•.••..
Insertion Routine, RCA 301 .•••.••.
insertions, program .•.•..••.•.•
Installment Loan Application
Package, B 100/200/300 Series .••.
instruction, address structure ..••..
instruction, indexing, central
processor ...•••.•.•.•••••••.
instruction, variable size .•.••.•..
instruction chaining, IDM 1401, 1410
instruction format, central
processor ..••..•..•••.•••...
instruction layout, central
processor .•••.....••.•••.••
instruction list .•....••.•.•••..
instruction literal . . . . • • . . • • • • . •
instruction part, central processor .•
instruction sequencing, central
processor . . . . . . . . • . • . • • • . . .
instruction stack, CDC 6000 Series .•
instruction structure ••.••.••...•
instruction time, central processor .•
instruction types, IDM System/360 .•.
integral boundary, IDM System/360
Integrated Data Store, GE 400
Series •...••....••..•••..••
Integrated Data Store, GE 600
Aseries . . . . • . . . • . . • . . • • • . • . •
11:200
:160.328
:070.8
:180.512
510:193.122
:070
:120
4:120.5
:070.72
:070.52
202:191. 12
:070.6
:070.2
414:061. 13
415:061.13
:070.5
651:151.17
518:111
:160.327
:070.311
:060.12
:060.6
:190.32
:070
:190.631
602:071
601:192
4:190.631
23:100.23
:160.751
:170.751
4:180.464
701:192.23
4:170.23
201:151.17
:050.234
:050.237
:050.231
401:051. 12
402:051. 12
:050.23
:050.232
:120
:050.235
:050.233
:050.31
260:051. 121
:050.231
:050.41
420:051.121
420:011.3
420:051. 122
330:151.16
340:151.16
(Contd. )
9/66
AUERBACH
'"
GENERAL INDEX
2: 100. 021
interchangeable ('artrldge ••••••••.•
Interchangeable Chaill Cartridge
Adapter, IBM 1403 . . . . • . . • . . • . •
Interchangeable Chain Cartridge
Adapter, IBM System/360 .•••.•.••
Interchangeable Read Feed, IBM 1402 .•
INTERCOM 1000 Language,
CDC 160-A .•.••••..•...••.••.
interference, IBM System/360 .••..••
INTER FOR . . • • . • . . . • . . . • • . . • "
interleaved recording . . . . . • . . . . . . .
interleaving, locations ....••..•••.
interleaving level, internal storage . . . .
interlock, storage . . • . . ...••.••..
interlude, machine oriented
language . • . . . . • . • . . . . • . • . • . . •
interludes, program . . • . . • . . . . • . . .
intermediate language, translator .•...
internal data code ..•. . . . . . . . . . . .
internal pass, translator .••..•..•.
internal sort routine . . • . • . • . . . . . .
internal storage . . . • . . . • • . • • . . • .
internal storage, auxiliary storage
performance . . . • . . • . . . . . . • • . • •
internal storage, basic use ..•••..••
internal storage, controller . . . .
internal storage, data capacity ..
internal storage, directly ....••
internal storage, errors, checks
and action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • •
internal storage, general . . . • . . . . . .
internal storage, medium . . . • . • . . . .
internal storage, off-line control . . . . .
internal storage, physical form . . . . . .
internal storage, potential transfer
rate . . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • • •
internal storage, recording
permanence . . . . . . . . • • • . . . • • . .
internal storage phenomenon . . . . . • . .
International Business Machines
Corp . . . . • . . . . . • . . . . • . • . . • . .
Interrupt, AutomatiC, feature,
GE 225 . . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • .
interrupt cause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
interrupt condition, central
processor . • . • . . . • . . . . . . . . • . .
Interrupt Control State,
RCA Spectra 70 . . • . • . . . • . . • . . . •
interrupt, input-output ..•••..•.•..
Interrupt Response State, RCA
Spectra 70 . . . • . . • • . . . . . . . • . • .
interrupt test . . . . • . . . . . . . . • . . • .
interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
interruption process, central
processor . . . • . • . . . • • . . . . . . . .
intersection gap . . . • • . • . . . • . . . • •
Interval Timer, IBM 7070/7074 . . . . • .
Interval Timer feature, IBM
System/360 . . . . . . • . . . . • • • . • . •
introduction, computer system
reports . . . • . • . • . • • . . . • • . . • . •
invalid address . . . . . • . • . . • • . . . . .
invalid address, check . . . . . . . • . • . .
invalid code, check . . . . . . . . • . • .
invalid data . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . .
invalid instruction procedure .•...•
invalid operation ..•...•.•.••••..
4:040.613
IOCS .••.•••••.•••••••••••••
415:081. 12
420:081
415:071.12
244:172
244:184.12
420:111.2
244:011
244:173
4:040.29
4:040.27
:040.27
4:040.8
:170.53
4:170.53
4:180.1
4:070.53
4:180.41
4:150.13
:040
:040.7
:040.12
:040.4
:040.3
:050.2361
lOP, P 2000 ..••••.•..••.••.••
lOPS, P 2000 .•••....•••..•..•
item picture . • • . . • . • . . . • . • . . . •
items, number, program translator
401:172.8
401:172.14
402:172.8
402:172.14
403:171.8
403:171.14
417:171.14
420:191. 122
420:192.122
420:193.122
651:101
651:151.17
4:160.311
:180.233
J
Job Control, IBM System/360
Job Program Mode, UNIVAC 1108 .•.
Job Scheduler, IBM System/360 ...••
job scheduling, B 5500 .••....•.••
jump, process oriented language ..•.
jump-in, loop ..•••...•••.•••••
jump-out, loop . . . • . . . . • . . . . . • •
jump registers, NCR 315 . . . • . . . • .
jump statement .•.•.••.••.•..•.
justification, process oriented
language . • . . . • . . . . • . . • • • . • •
420:192.122
420:193.122
785:051. 121
420:191. 122
203:191. 124
:160.51
4:106.567
4:160.567
601:051. 12
4:160.51
:160.345
K
:040.8
:040.1
:040.21
:040.422
:040.2
key, table look-Up . . . . . • . • . • • • . .
key word, language
4:050.218
4:160.241
4:160.27
L
:040.29
:040.24
:040.23
See IBM
321:051. 12
321:051. 33
:050.331
:050.334
710:051. 124
:070.447
710:051.124
4:040.446
4:050.33
:050.335
4:070.325
403:051. 12
405:051.12
420:051. 127
:010
4:050.5
4:040.8
4:040.8
4:070.8
4:050.5
4:190.44
4:050.5
label, language . . .
. ...... .
label, local, machine oriented
language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
label, reserved, machine
oriented language . . . . . • . . .
label, universal, machine
label adjustment, machine
oriented language .•...
label adjustment control . . . . . . . . . .
label control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
label description, process
oriented language. . . . . .
label deSignator, machine
oriented language . . . . .
label formation rule, machine
oriented language . . . . . . . . . . . . .
label restriction, machine
oriented language . . . . . . .
language, input, program
translator . . . . . . . . . . . .
language, library, process
oriented language . . . . . . .
language, machine oriented . . . . . . . .
language, object program,
program translator . . . . . . . . . . . .
language, problem oriented . • • . . . . .
language, process oriented . . . . . . . .
language, transfer to another,
process oriented language . . . .
language exemptions, translator
language extension, process
oriented language . . . . . . • . . . . . .
language of new item, library . . . . . .
language restrictions, translator
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
4:170.3
:170.33
:170.313
:170.32
:170.543
4:170.543
:170.65
:160.321
:170.315
:170.321
:170.314
:180.21
:160.752
:170
:180.311
:150.2
:160
:160.81
:180.21
:160.6
:170.751
:180.21
9/66
2:100.022
layout, data, machine oriented
language . • . • . • . . . . . . . . . • • . .
length, unit, physical
characteristics ...••..••.•••..
lengthened accumulator mode,
RPC-4000 . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . • . .
level, procedure . . • . . . . • • . • . • . .
LGP-30 Computer, Model 301 ..••..
LGP-30 Drum Storage . . . . • • . • • . .
LGP-30 High Speed Reader,
Model 341 ...•••.••......••••
LGP-30 High Speed Reader/Punch,
Model324 .••.••••••••••••••
LGP-30 Punched Card Input
Control Unit, Model 321 .•••••.••
LGP-30 Simulator, GE 225 ••••••..
LGP -30 System ••••••..••.••••.
LGP-30 Tape Typewriter,
Model360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Liberator, H 200 Series .••••••••.
Librarian, GE 400 Series .••••..•.•
Librarian, NCR 315 ••...••...••.
Librarian, UNIVAC 1107 . • . . . . . • .
library, on-line . • . • . . . . • • . . . . .
library, program loading . . . • . • . • .
library, program translator .•.•...
library contents . . • • . . . . . . . . . . .
library facilities, machine
oriented language . . . . . • . . • . • . .
library facilities, process
oriented language . • . . . . . • . . • . .
library insertions • • . . . . . . • . . . • .
library mechanism . . . . • . • . . . . . .
library routine, label, machine
oriented language. • . . . . . . . . . . . •
library sub-routine, loading ••.••..
Light Pen feature, mM System/360 ..
line of print . . • . . . . . . . '.' • • . . . .
line slot, RCA 3301 . . . . • . • . • . . • •
line space operation • . . • . . . • . . . • .
line spacing . • • • . . . . • . . • . . • . . •
Linear Program Package, H 400 .••.
Linear Programming Package, H 200
Series .•••••••...••..•...••
LINK, H 200 Series ...••••.•.•••
link, subroutine .•••.••.•••.•••
Linkage Editor, mM System/360 .•.•
Linkage Loader J, H 200 Series ••.••
LION, UNIVAC 1107 ..•..••.•.••
list, loop, process oriented
language . • . • . • . . . . • . • • . . . • •
Lister, Multiple Tape, B 322 ....••
listings, program ..•••.••••••••
listings, reports . . . . • • . . . • . • . • .
literal, machine oriented language .••
literal, process oriented language •••
literal in address part .•.••....••
literal in instruction .•.•••....••.
literal size, machine oriented
language .•.••....•.••.•.•.•
literals . . . . • . • . . . . . . • . . . • . . •
literals, language ..••..••..•••.
load . . . . . . . • . . . • • . . • . . . • . . .
load, data . • . • . . . • . • . . • . . • • • .
load and run, translator . . • . . . • . • .
9/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
load key, IBM 1620 .••.••..•••.•
:170.421
:170.431
:210
351:051. 12
4:160.242
352:051
352:041
352:073
352:073
352:074
352:075
321:151. 11
352:
352:071
352:072
352:081
510:131
330:151.16
601:151.16
784:151. 16
:190.22
:190.211
:180.46
4:160.74
:170.7
:160.7
4:160.7
4:160.75
:170.322
:190.22
420:101
4:070.511
703:101. 12
4:070.53
:080.321
501:151.22
510:152.17
510:151.15
4:160.5
420:191. 121
420:192.121
510:193.121
784:151.15
784:171.81
:160.565
201:082
4:170.544
4:150.14
:170.243
:160.35
4:050.235
4:050.235
:170.412
4:160.352
4:170.41
4:070.441
4:040.411
4:180.42
load size, input-output ...•••.••.•
load size, internal storage •••..•..
Loader Print routine, RCA 301 •.•..
loading, input error .•....•••••..
loading, input-output ••.•••••••.•
loading, internal storage .••••.••••
loading, program, operating
environment . • • . . • • . . • . • . . • . •
loading control, console .••••..•.•
loading sequence, operating
environment . • . . • . • • • • • • • • . • •
loading time, operating environment ..
loading time, routine . • . . . . • • • . . .
local identifier •..••.•.•••.••.•
local label, machine oriented
language . . . • . • • . . • . . • . . • • • .
local name ...••••...••.•..•.•
location, choice, operating
environment . • . • . • . • . • . • • • • • .
location, protected ••..••.•..•..
location, storage, data structure ...•
location delimiter ..•.•..•.•••..
lockout, area, internal storage ••••.
lockout, gradual release ..•••.••..
lockout, input-output area .••.•••..
lockout, release . • . • . • . • • . . . . . .
locks, storage . . . . • . . . • • . • • • . .
log, operation, process oriented
language . • . • . • . • . . . • • • . • . . .
log, operators . . . . • . . . . . • . • . • .
log control . . • • • . . . . • • • • • • • • • .
logging, operating environment .
logiC, structure tables, analysis
techniques ....•.•..••••..•••
logical, instruction list .••.•...•.
logical operation, process
oriented language ..••••.•.••.•
long format, mM System/360 ••••••
long multiplication ...•...•••..••
longitudinal check ....••.••..•.•
look-ahead, central processor •....•
look-up, table, operation .•••.••..
loop, paper tape ••.•••••.••••••
loop control ••••..•••.••••••••
loop delimiter •••..•••.•••••••
loops, nested • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • •
loss factor, storage ••••••••.••••
Low Speed File Adapter,
NCR 315-100 .•..••••.•••••••
lower curtate •••••...•••.. . . • .
lower-level language .••.•••.••••
LP-66, CDC 6000 Series .•••.••••
412:061.13
412:061. 26
412:073.72
:070.441
:040.72
701:151.17
4:190.44
:070.73
:040.62
:190.2
:060.26
:190.23
:190.81
4:190.81
4:160.27
:170.33
4:160.535
:160.272
:190.313
4:050.344
:020.1
4:160.348
:040.444
4:040.444
4:070.444
4:040.444
:040.16
:160.461
4:190.7
4:160.46
:190.613
:190.7
15:010.5
:120
:160.422
420:011.3
4:050.211
4:070.325
:050.32
:050.218
4:070.524
:061. 56
:160.561
:160.566
:040.292
602:071
4:070.33
4:160.81
260:151.181
M
Machine Condition, State,
RCA Spectra 70 •.•..•••.•.•••
machine-oriented language •..••.••
machine-oriented language, data ••.•
machine-oriented language, format .•
machine-oriented language, label ..••
machine-oriented language, macro
and pseudo tables .•.••..••••••
machine-oriented language,
procedures . . • . • . • • • • • . . • • . . •
machine-oriented language, special
routine .•..•.••••••.•••••..
A .,
AUERBACH
710:051. 124
:170
:170.4
:170.2
:170.3
:170.8
:170.5
:170.6
(Contd.)
GENERAL INDEX
2: 100. 023
Macro Assembly Program,
GE 400 Series .••••..••.••..
macro-code, machine oriented
language .••••••.•....•....••
macro list, machine oriented
language .•••••••........•..•
macro operation . • . . . . . . . . . . . . • •
Magnetic Card, CRAM, NCR 315 ..••.
magnetic ink character recognition,
Special Report .•..•...••.•••..
magnetic reading . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . .
magnetic tape, comparison chart . . . . •
Magnetic Tape Control Unit,
MTC1, with PB 250 . • . . . . . . . . . . .
magnetic tape handlers, Special
Report . • • • • . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . •
Magnetic Tape Printout Routine,
NCR 315 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . •
maintainer, program translator ••.•..
MANAGE, H 200 Series . . . . . . . . • . •
management reports, analysis
techniques . • . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . • .
managers, reports, analysis
techniques . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . .
manual control, input-output . . . . . . • .
manual control console • . . . . . . . . . . .
manual insertion, data . . . . . . . . . . . •
manual operator control .••.••.•.••
Manual Peripheral Switch,
GE 400 Series . • • . . • . . . . • • . . • • .
manufacturers, directory . . • • . . • . . .
MAP, charting technique, analysis
techniques . • . • • . . . . . . . • . • . . . .
MAP, GE 400 Series . • . . • . . • . . . • •
margin, external storage . . . . . . . • . .
mark operation . . • • . • . . • . . • . . . . •
Mark Reading Station, IBM 1418 ...•.•
mark sensing . . . • . . . . . . . . . • • • • •
MARION, UNIVAC 1050 . . . . . . . . • . •
marking operation, input-output . . . • . .
MARVEL, IBM System/360 • . . . . . • .
Mass Memory Files, H 200 Series
Mass Storage Resident Operating
System - Mod 1, H 200 Series .
Master Control Program, Disk
File, B 5500 . • • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
Master Control Program,
Magnetic Drum, B 5500 . • . . . • . • . .
master copies, input-output •...•.•.•
Master Group, H 8200 • . • . . . . • • . . .
master mode, GE 400 Series •.••.•.•
master mode, GE 600 Series ....•••.
Master Scheduler, IBM System/360 .. .
matched codes, input-output . . . . . . . .
Mathematical Programming Systems
(MPS), IBM System/360 .•.••.••.•
Mathpak, IBM 1130 . . • . . . . • . . . . . •
Matrix Algebra Subroutines,
NCR 315 . . . • . • • . • . • . . . . . . . . .
matrix inversion, system
performance •..•••.•.•..•.••••
matrix inversion program 1106,
CDC 160/160-A .••.•...••.••...
matrix operation, process
oriented language . • . . . • . . . • . . • .
matrix operations ••......••.••••
maximum speed, input-output •• , .••.
MCP, B 5500 . • • . . • . • . . . • . . . • • •
mechanism, drive, input-output .••.••
mechanism, library •.••••••.••••
330:172
330:182
:170; 52
:170.81
4:170.1
601:042
23:020
4:070.222
23:040.300
631:091
23:040
601:151. 15
:180.14
510:151.17
15:010.3
15:010.32
:070.72
:060
4:060.4
4:190.1
330:106.12
21:010.011
15:010.512
330:172
:070.353
:070.525
401:102.12
23:080.3
777:151. 16
:070.525
420:151.17
510:044
510:192.122
203:192
203:191
:070.233
518:051.123
330:051.12
340:051. 121
420:191.122
4:070.53
420:151. 17
418:151.19
601:151. 172
:200.3
244 :151. 175
:160.421
4:160.42
:070.624
203:191
203:192
:070.21
mechanized techniques, analysis
techniques ••••••••••••••••••
media, input, program translator
Media Conversion Service Routine,
GE 400 Series • . . . • . • . • . . . • . • •
medium, internal storage .••.••..•
medium, storage, input-output
Memory Exchange Control Unit . . . • .
Memory Lockout Register,
UNIVAC 1107 ..••...•••.••••.
Memory Power Failure Protection
Circuit, LGP-30 . . • . • . . • . . • . • .
Memory Protect feature, RCA
Spectra 70 ..•••••.•••.•...••
Memory Protection, GE 400 Series ..
memory protection, H 8200 •....••.
Memory Track Protection
Circuit, LGP-30 .•...•..•••.••
Merge 2, IBM 1401 ..••...•.••••
Merge 80, IBM 7080 .••..•••••.•
Merge 91, IBM 7070/7074 . • . • . • . . .
merge routine . • . . . . • • . . • • . . . . •
merging, data, problem oriented
facilities . . • . . . . . . • • • . . • . • • •
message switching . . . . • . . . . . • . • •
method of call, library • • • . • • . . • . •
MICR, Special Report .•••••.••••
MICR Buffer Adapter,
NCR 315-100 ..••.••....•.•••
micro-coded operations . . . . . • • • . .
Micro Magnetic Memory, RCA 3301 ..
micro-routines . . . • . • . . . . . . • • . .
MIDAS, UNIVAC 1107 .•••.••••••
Milwaukee-Matic Post-Processor,
for NUCOM Compiler ••.•...••••
Minneapolis-Honeywell .•.•.•.•..•
minus-zero . . . . . . . . • • . • • • • . . •
missing entries, translation ••••••.
mixed data class . . . . . . . . . • • • • • .
mixed verbs, language .••..•.••.•
mnemonic code, machine oriented
language . . . • . . . . . . • . . . • • . • .
mnemonic operation codes ...•.•••
Modal statements, TOPS ...••••••
mode, program translator . • . . • . . .
Model 44 Programming System,
IBM System/360 ....••.•.••.••
modems ...•••....•.•..••••••
modifier, sequence control,
central processor .••..•.•.••••
modulation-demodulation units .••.•.
module, internal storage .•••••••••
module, storage, rule for
combining . • • . . . . • . . • . • . . • • .
Monitor, H 8200 ..••..•....••.••
Monitor, IBM System/360 Model 44
monitor routine . . . . • • . . . . • • . • . .
Monitor routine, RCA Spectra 70 .•..
Monitor System, IDM 1130 .••.••.•
monotonic sequence check ••.••.••
Monrobot XI Card Punch •••••..•••
Monrobot XI Card Reader ..•.••••.
Monrobot XI Coupler, Model 24
Monrobot XI Coupler, Model 26 .••.•
Monrobot XI Edge-Punch Card
Punch ••.••••••••••.••••••.
Monrobot XI Edge-Punch Card
Reader .••..•••.•...•..••••
Monrobot XI Input-Output Buffer
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
4:160.75
4:170.75
15:010.72
:180.221
330:151.15
:040.21
:070.311
203:051
784:041.13
352:051.132
710:041.13
710:051. 125
330:051.12
518:041.13
352:051. 12
401:151.13
417:151.13
403:151. 13
4:150.13
:150.13
23:100.26
:170.753
23:020
602:071
4:050.311
703:042
4:050.311
784:151.17
162:151. 3
See H
4:050.222
4:180.7
4:160.432
4:160.433
:170.511
4:120.1
651:162.21
:180.42
435:151
23:100.45
:050.317
23:100.45
:040.31
:040.32
518:191.12
435:151. 11
4:190.1
710:191.122
418:191
4:160.327
531:076
531:075
531:075.4
531:076.4
531:074
531:072
531:111.1
9/66
2:100.024
Monrobot XI Monroe.-Card
Processor ••••••••••••••••••
Monrobot XI Paper Tape Punch .••••
Monrobot XI Paper Tape Reader .•••
Monrobot XI Photoelectric Reader •••
Monrobot XI 16-Key Keyboard .•••••
Monrobot XI System .•••.•••••••••
Monrobot XI Teletype Printer ••••••
Monrobot XI 2, 048-Word Drum •••••
MonrobotXI Typewriter . ; •• ; •••••
Monroe-Cards .••••••.••••••••
move corresponding ••.••.•.•••••
multi -file reels •.• ;' •.••••••••••
multi-font character readers .•••.••
multilith master, input-output ••••••
multi -pas's merge ••••••••••..••
Multiple Column Control feature,
IBM 1419 .•.•• '•••••.••••••••
multiple copies, input-output .••••••
Multiple Feed, NCR 340, NCR344 .••
Multiple Module Access Unit,
UNIVAC 1108 ••••..•.••.•••••
multiple output, RPC-4000 •.•• " •••
Multiple Processor Adapter,
UNIVAC 1108 .•.••.••...••••••
Multiple Utility Program, IBM 1401 .•
multiplex mode, IBM System/360 ••••
multiplexed access .•••..••.•.•••
. multiplexing, simultaneous
operations .••••••••.••.•..•••
Multiplexor Channel, IBM
Syatem/360 .••.•••.••..•••••
Multiplexor Channel, RCA Spectra 70 .
Multiplexor, IBM Model 7606 .••••••
multiplication, long . • • • . • . . • • • . ;
multiplication, short .•..•••.••••.
Multiply-Divide feature, IBM 1441 .•.
Multiprocessing, Eo 100/200/300
Series .••••.••••••.••••••••
multi-processing, multi-running .•••
multi-processing, multi-sequencing .•
multi-processing, multi-sequencing,
operating environment .•..••• ,' •.
multi-processing, operating
environment .•••.•••••••••• '••
multi-processing, UNIVAC 1108 .••••
multi-processor ..•••.••••••••••
multiprogramming ••.•.•.•••••••
multiprogramming, B 5500 ..••••••
multiprogramming, GE 600 Series' ..•
multiprogramming, UNIVAC 1108 .•..
multi-radix arithmetic .•.•••••••.
multi -reel file ..••.••.•.•.••••.
multi -reel merge routine ' .•.••.•.•
multi -result .•.•.• ; . '...•••••.•
mUlti-running ••.••••.... ' •••.••
multi-running, H 800 . • . • . . • . . . . •
multi-running, H 1800 .•••.••••••
multi-running precedence control .•••
multi-running priority .••••.•••••
multi-running priority control .•••••
mUlti-running status .•••••••••••
multi -running supervision .•.••.•.•
mUlti-sequencing .••. ~ .•..•••.••
multi-sequencing supervision .••••••
9/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
N
531:102
531:073
531:071
531:077
531:101,
531:
531:082
531:041.13
531:081
531:102
4:160.444
4:160.322
23:020.81
:070.233
4:150.13
N address •••.•••••••••.••••
n-way merge routines .•••••••••
name, process oriented language .••
name, special language .••••••••
name, universal ••••••••••••••
name, deSignator, process
oriented language .•••.•••••••
name formation, process oriented
language .•••••••••••••••••
narrow-band communications
facilities ••••..•••.••.•••••
National Cash Register Co •••••••
NCR 315 ••••••.••••••••••••
NCR 315 Central Processor •.•••••
NCR 315 Central Processor .•••••
NCR 315 Console .•.•••.•••••••
NCR 315 On-Line Savings System •••
402:103.12
:070.23
601:081.71
NCR 315 RMC ••••••••.•••••••
NCR 315 Simulator, NCR 304 •••.••
NCR 315 Simulator of IBM 305
RAMAC .••..••••..••••••••
NCR 315 Teletype Inquiry System ..•
785:051. 122
351:074.12
785:031
401:151.15.
420:111.23
4:110.17
NCR 315-100 ...•••.•••••••.••
NCR 315-100 Central Processor ••••
NCR 315-100 Console •••.•••••••
NCR 315-100 Software .•••••••••
NCR 316 Core Storage .••..•.•••
NCR 316 Rod Memory Module •••••
NCR 321-1 Central Communications
Controller •••••••••.•.•••••
NCR 324-1 Magnetic Tape
Simultaneity Controller .•••.••.
NCR 332 Magnetic Tape Handlers ••.
NCR 332-202 Magnetic Tape ••••••
NCR 332-203 Magnetic Tape •••.••
NCR 333 Magnetic Tape Handler •.••
NCR 334 Magnetic Tape Handlers •••
NCR 340 -3 High-Speed Printer •••.
NCR 340-502 Printer-Lister .•••••
NCR 340-503 Unbuffered Printer ••.
NCR 340-512 Printer-Lister •••.•.
NCR 340-601 High Speed Printer ••••
NCR 344 Multiple Feed, NCR 340 •••
NCR 353-1 Card Random Access
Memory (CRAM) •.••.••••••••
4:110.14
420:111.23
710:111
409:041.4
409:111
4:050.211
4:050.211
415:051.12
201:192
:050.34
:050.35
:190.43
:190.42
785:051.122
785:191.123
4:050.35
See multirunning
203:191. 123
340:051. 126
785:051. 121
785:191. 122
4:160.344
4:160.321
4:150.13
4:160.413
4:050.311
:050.33
502:011
503:011
4:190.23
4:050.343
4:190.632
4:190.632
4:190.76
4:190.42
:050.35
4:190.43
NCR 353-2 Card Random Access
Memory (CRAM) •••••••.•••••
NCR 353-3 Card Random Access
Memory (CRAM) .••••••••••••
NCR 361-201 Paper Tape Reader •••
NCR 362 Paper Tape Reader .•••••
NCR 371 Paper Tape Punch .•••••.
NCR 371-201 Paper Tape Punch .•••
NCR 376-2 Card Punch •••••••.••
NCR 376-7 Card Read Punch ••••••
NCR 376-8 Card Read Punch •.••••
NCR 376-101 Card Punch ••.•••.•.
NCR 380-3 Card Reader •••••••••
NCR 402-3 MICR Sorter-Reader .•..
NCR 402-4 MICR Sorter-Reader .•..
NCR 407-1 MICR Sorter-Reader .•••
NCR 420-1 Optical Reader •••••.•
NCR 435 Universal Interconnecting
Devices .•••..••••.•.••••••
A
4:050.234
4:150.13
:160.24
4:160.241
4:160.535
:160.242
:160.241
23:100.52
See NCR
601:
601:051
603:051
601:061
601:106
603:011. 104
603:
601:151.12
601:151.11
601:105
602:011.103
602:
602:011.05
602:011.06
602:011.15
601:041
603:041
601:105.12
602:091.12
601:091
601:091
601:091
601:091
601:091
601:081
601:082
601:082
601:082
601:083
601:081. 71
601:042
601:101
601:043
601:101
601:043
601:101
601:072
601:071
601:072
601:072
601:075
601:073
601:073
601:076
601:074
601:102
601:102.12
601:103
601:104
601:107
(Contd. )
AUERBACH
'"
/'
GENERAL INDEX
2: 100.025
NCR Input/Output Console • • • • • • • •
NCR On-Line Savings System ••••••
NCR Teletype Inquiry System ••••.•
nearly exhausted test •.•••••••••
NEAT Assembler, NCR 315 •.••.•.
NEAT COBOL-61, NCR 315 •••••••
NEAT Compiler, NCR 315 .••...••
negate, relation, language .•.••.••
negative number operand,
central processors ..••..••••••
nested loop . • . . • • . . • . . . • .
nested subroutine. • . . • • • • • •
nesting, parentheses .•.••••
nesting, loop, process oriented
language .•••.••••..•..
nesting, subroutine, process
oriented language . . . . • • . .
New Programming Language,
IBM System/360 • . . • . . . . .
next instruction . • . . . . • . • . .
nominal speed, input-output .•
non-local identifier .••.•••.
non-local name, process
oriented language . • . . . • . .
Non-Stop Mode, GE 400
Series . . • • • . . . • . . . . • . •
normal mode, RCA 301 ..•.••
Normal Processing State, RCA
Spectra 70 •...•••...•••••.•
NPL, IBM System/360 .....••••.
NUCOM Compiler, Burgmaster
Post-Processor .•...•.••
NUCOM Compiler, MilwaukeeMatic Post-Processor ...••
NUCOM Numerical Control
Compiler, RECOMP III ..••••.•
number, unsigned . . . . . • . • • . • . .
numeric alignment ......••••.•.
numeric literals . . . • • . . . • • . . . .
Numerical Print feature, IBM 1403 ..
numerical tool control, IBM 1620 •..
601:071
601:106
601:105
4:070.56
601:171
601:182
601:161
601:181
601:172
601:183
4:i'60.52
:050.221
4:160.566
4:160.536
4:160.413
:160.566
:160.536
420:167
4:050.234
:070.621
4:160.27
:160.273
330:051. 12
701:111.12
710:051. 124
420:167
162:151.3
162:151. 3
162:151. 3
4:160.349
4:160.345
4:160.352
402:081.12
412:151. 3
o
4:180.1
4:180.31
object program, translator
object program error, process
oriented language .•..••••••••
object program language . . . . • • . . •
object program performance,
program translator .••..••••.•
object program space, program
translator .•••...•.••••...•
object program translator .•...•.•
object routine configuration ••.•..•
off -line, controller, input-output ..•
off-line adapters .•..••...•.•••
off-line control, internal storage ...
offer options . . . • . . . . . . • . • • • •
offset, card control .••...•••••.
offset card, input-output ..•..••••
OMEGA Operating System, UNIVAC
494 . . • • . • . • . . . . . . • • • . . . . •
one-pass merge routine ...•••..•
One-Pass SPS, IBM 1620 ...•••••
on-line, controller, input-output
on-line control, internal storage .••
:160.47
4:160.81
:180.54
:180.51
:180.31
4:180.62
:070.422
4:070.422
:040.422
4:180.7
4:070.55
:070.55
804:191
4:150.13
412:172
:070.421
:040.421
on-line controllers .•••••.•••••••
on-line library ••••••••.•••••••.
On-Line Savings System, NCR 315 ..•
On-Line Teller Console .•••••.••
open file verb ...••.•..••••.•••.
Open Mode, UNIVAC 1108 .•••••••••
open routine, library •..••••••..••
operand, central processor •.••.••
operand definition, procedure,
process oriented language .••.••
operand definition routine . • • • . • • •
operand, directly addressed,
central processor ..••••••••••••
operand Size, determination,
central processor .••••.••.•..
operand special case, central
processor . • . • • . • . . • . . • . . . .
operating environment .••..••.•.
operating environment, errors,
checks, and action .••..•••••.•••
operating environment, general .•..
operating environment, hardware
allocation ...••.•••.•..•.•.•
operating environment, logging ...•••
operating environment, operator
control .•.•••••.•••.••..••••
operating environment, performance •.•
operating environment, program
diagnostic .•••••••...•..••••.
operating environment, program
loading .•.•..•.•••...••.•••..
operating environment, program
loading time ..••..••.••.•.•••.
operating environment, reserved
equipment .•.•••.•...••.•..••
operating environment, running
overhead .•••.••.•..••••••.••
operating environment, running
supervision . • . • . . . . • • • • . . . . • . .
Operating System, B 100/200/300
Series ...••.••..••.•.•..••..
Operating System, GE 225 ....•••..
Operating System, GE 400 Series ..••.
Operating System - Mod 1, H 200
Series . . • . . . . . • • . . • . • . . • • • . .
Operating System - Mod 2, H 200
Series .••••.•.•••••.•..•••..
Operating System - Mod 8, H 8200 ...
Operating System/360, IBM System/360.
Operating System/360 Assembler,
IBM System/360 .••.•.••..••..•
Operating System/360 COBOL .••.•••
Operating System/360 FORTRAN IV ..•
Operating System/360 Sort/Merge .••.
Operating System/360 Utility
Programs, IBM System/360 ..•.•••
Operating System, RCA 3301 . . . . . . . •
operating system, testable
conditions .•..•.••••..•...•..•
operation, central processor •.••••••
operation, input-output .•.••..•.
operation, logical, process
oriented language . . . • . • . • . . .
operation, restricted, simultaneous
operation .•.•..•..•..•••..
operation class, simultaneous
operation . . . . . • • • • . . . . . • . .
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
4:070.422
4:190.22
601:106
602:011.104
201:103.12
4:160.45
785:051.121
:170.761
:160.761
:050.21
:160.55
4:160.55
:050.236
:050.223
:050.22
:190
4:190.1
:190.44
:190.1
:190.3
:190.7
:190.6
:190.8
:190.5
:190.2
:190.81
:190.82
:190.83
:190.4
201:193
321:191. 12
330:191
510:192
510:193
518:191
420:191
420:171
420:164
420:161
420:151.13
420:151. 15
703:191
4:040.448
:050.21
:070.52
:160.422
:110.12
:110.3
9/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
2:100.026
operation code, direct, machine
oriented language .••••••••••••
operation code, instruction list •••••
operation instruction, instruction
list .•••.•••••••.•••••••••••
operation on array, process
oriented language .••.•••••••••
operation repertoire, process
oriented language .•••..••••.•.
operation simultaneous .•.•.•.••••.
operations, central processor .•••••
operations research studies,
analysis techniques ...••.•••.••
operations research techniques,
analysis techniques ••••••.•••.•
operator .•.•..•••.•.••••••••
operator, controls .••.••••.•••••
operator, formulae, process
oriented language .••••.••..•••
operator, view •••.•••.•.•.....
operator action, operating
environment . • . • • . . . • . • • • • • • .
operator adjustments ..•.•.••.•••
operator communication ..•.••••..
operator communication, console • ; .
operator communication operation,
process oriented language .•••••.
operator, computation, process
oriented language .•••••.•.•••.
operator console convenience ...:.. .•
operator control, operating
environment . • . . . • • • . • • •• • . • .
operator control, interrupt,
central processor .•••.••.•••••
operator controls ..••.•.•••.••.
operator decision, operating
environment . . • . . • • • • •..• • • . . • .
operator intervention . • . • • • • • • . • •
operator manual control .•.••.••••
operator option ....•••...••••••
operator option, language ..•• • . . • . •
operator sigual, operating
environment .•••.....••••.•.•
operator view, console ..•.•••••••
optical character recognition,
Special Report ..••.•••••••.•••
Optical Mark Reading feature,·
RCA Spectra 70 ••.•• " •••••.•••
optical scanners, Special Report .•••
optimization, object program .•.••••
optimizing data, progr.am
translator .••••.•••..•••.•••
optimizing statement, process
oriented language .••••.••.••••
Optionallnstruction Package, H 1200 ••
OPUS, UNIVAC 1050 •.••••••••••
OR, language .•..••.••..••.•••
ordering input, program translator .•
organization data, analysis
techniques •.••...•..•.•••..•
Organizations in the Computer Field,
. Directory . • . . • . . • . • • • . • . . • . .
orientation, language . . . . • • • • • . • •
originator, program translator .••••
Orthotronic Control, H 200 Series ..•
OSAS/OSAS-A Symbolic Language,
CDC 160/160A .•.••••••••••••
OSAS/OSAS-A Translator,
CDC 160/160-A ...•••••••••••
Oscilloscope View Box,
Monrobot XI .••.•.•••••••••••
9/66
:170.51
4:120.1
:120
:160.42
:160.4
:110
:050.21
OUP operating environment, PB 250 ••
output, program translator . • • • • • • •
Output Code Translator .•••••••••
output controller •••.•.••••••••.
output lock test . • . • • • . • • • • • • • • •
output media conversion, GE 600
Series .••••.••.•••.••••••..
output operation. • • • . • • • • • • • • • • •
Output Typewriter, mM 7040 ••••••
output unit, computer system report ••
15:010.34
15:010.74
4:060.1
4:070.7
:160.41
:060.54
:190.612
:070.7
:190.6
:060.51
:160.46
:160.431
:060.5
:190.6
:050.333
4:070.7
:190.62
4:190.612
4:190.1
4:190.611
4:160.46
:190.63
:060.54
23:020
710:071.12
23:020
4:180.43
:180.53
:160.82
513:051.12
777:151.16
4:160.525
:180.222
15:010.22
21:010
4:160.14
:180.13
510:091.12
244:171
244:181
531:061.13
over -all width . • • . . • • • . • • • • . • • •
overflow .•••..•.••.•••••.•••
overflow, address .••..••.•••.•.
overflow, input area check .•••••.•
overflow, target computer,
translation . . • • • • • . . • • • • • • • • •
overflow control .•••.••••.•••..
overflow supervision .••.••••..•.
overhead, input-output .•.••.••.••
overhead, running ..•••...••.••.
overhead, set-up .••••••...••••.
overhead, running, operating
environment . • . • • . • • • . . . • . • • .
overlapped transfers ••..•...••••
overlapping, partial, simultaneous operation. • . • • . . . . • • . . • . •
overlapping operations .•.•••••.••
overlay control routine, machine
oriented language .•••••.••.•.•
overlay segments .....•..•.••••
overpunched holes, data code .•.•..
own coding .••.••••....••••.•.
631:191
:180.3·
201:075.12
:070.4
4:070.56
340:191. 121
:070.522
410:083
:070
:080
:090
:100
4:070.351
4:050.5
4:050.2373
4:070.8
4:180.7
4:190.1
4:190.44
:070.623
:190.83
:070.7
:190.83
4:040.292
:110.12
:110
:170.63
4:180.53
4:140.23
4:150.1
/
p
P
P
P
P
210 Central Processor .••..••••
211 Central Processor ...•••.••
212 Central Processor .••.•.••.
200 Series Partition for 10 jJ-S
Core Storage ..•••.•••.••••••
P 234 Magnetic Tape .•••..•••.••
P 235 Input-Output Processor
. (90 KC) ••••••••••••••..••.•
P 236 Input-output Processor
(90 KC) •••••..••••.•....•..
P 237 Input-output Processor
(90 KC) ••••••...•••••••..••
P 238 Input-Qutput Processor
(90 KC) .•••••••..•••.••..•.
P 240 Paper Tape System ..•••••..
P 241 Paper Tape System .•••.••.•
P 252 Universal Buffer Controller •••
P 254 Printer Control Unit ••..••••
P 256 Printer .•••••••..••.•••.
P 258 Card Reader .••....•.••••.
P 272 Magnetic Drum System .•••••
P 275 Magnetic Drum System ..•••.
P 280 Universal Buffer Controller .••
P 293 Accounting Clock .••.•.••.•
P 309 Console Typewriter Buffer .•.•
P 310 series, Disc System ••.••..•
P 334 Magnetic Tape .••.•.••••••
P 336 Magnetic Tape Controller ••..•
P 338 Magnetic Tape Controller •••..
P 365 Card Punch ••••••••.••.••
P 401 Auto-Control Units ••.•.••••
P 402 Interval Timer . . • . • • • . . . . •
P 404 Auto-Control Units .••.•.••.
A
651:051
652:051
653:051
652:042
651:091
651:101
651:101
651:101
651:101
651:071
651:072
651:102
651:081.4
651:081
651:073
651:044
651:044
651:102
651:105
651:103
653:042
653:093
653:093.4
653:093.4
651:074
652:106
652:107
652:106
(Contd.)
AUERBACH
'"
/
/
GENERAL INDEX
2: 100.027
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
408 Auto-Control Units .••.•..•
2000-210 •••••••••.••••••••
2000-211 •••• '.' •••.••••.•••
2000-212 ....•.•••.•••••••.
2100 Series 1. 5 }Js Core Storage ••
2200 Series 10 IJ.s Core Storage .•
2281 Digital Incremental
Recorder ..••.••.•.•.••..••
P 2282 Digital Incremental
Recorder ..••..•.•.•.•..•••
P 2283 Digital Incremental
Recorder ....•.••...•.•••••
P 2284 Digital Incremental
Recorder . . • • . . • • • • . . . . . • • .
PACE, NCR 315 •.• -. • . . . . . . • • •
PACE, Packaged CRAM Executive,
NCR 315 .••...••..•••..•.•
Packaged CRAM Executive,
NCR 315 . . . . . . • . . . • • . . • . • •
Packard Bell PB 250 ..•••••....
packed word, process oriented
language ..•..•...••.•.••••
packing density, disc . • . . . • • . • • .
packing density, drum ..••.••.••
\
packing density, magnetic tape .••.
packing density, paper tape . . . . • • .
packing records . • . . • . . . • . • • • .
paging, IBM System/360 . . . • . . . •
PAL 1004, UNIVAC 1050 .••••.••
PAL CARD, UNIVAC 1050 .••••..
PAL DUMP, UNIVAC 1050 ••..•••
PAL JR., UNIVAC 1050 . . . . . • . . •
PAL TAPE, UNIVAC 1050 ..••.•.
PAL, UNIVAC 1050 . . . . • . . • • . . .
paper tape loop . . . . • . • • • • . . . . .
parallel arrangement, external
storage . • . . . • . . . • • . . • . . . • .
Parallel Data Adapter, IBM
System/360 . . . . • . . . . • . . . • . .
parameter, input-output . . . . . . • • .
Parameter Output Programs,
Monrobot XI ...••••...••••••
parameters, macro codes .•.•..••
parametric identifiers . . . • • • . . • .
parentheses •...•••••..••.•.•
partial overlapping . . • . . . . • . . • . •
partitioning, IBM System/360 •.••.
pass, program translator ...••.••
PAT System, IBM 7070/7074 .•...•
patching file, routine . . . . . • . • . • •
patching mode, program translator .
patching programs . . . . . . . • . . . . •
PB 250 . . . . • . . . . • • . • . • . . . • .
PC ALL, UNIVAC 1050 . . . • . . . . . .
peak data rates . . .••......••••
peak speed, input-output .•.••.•.
performance, auxiliary storage,
internal storage. • • . • . . • . • • . • .
performance, criteria, analysis
techniques . . . . . • • . . • • . • . • • .
performance, data, analysis
techniques .•. . . . . . . . . • . • • . .
performance, input-output ..•••.•
performance, object program,
translator .••.•..••.•.••.••
performance, operating environment ..•.••••...••.•..•.••
performance, program translator ...
Peripheral Adapters, NCR 315-100 ..
652:106
651:
652:
653:
652:043
651:041
651:104
651:104
651:104
651:104
601:191
601:191
601:191
631:
:160.93
:040.25
:040.29
:040.25
:040.29
:090.321
:070.321
4:160.329
427:051.121
777:171.14
777:183
777:171. 14
777:182
777:181
777:171
4:070.524
:070.322
420:106.12
:070.622
531:191.12
4:170.522
4:160.27
4:160.413
4:110.15
427:031
4:180.41
403:151.17
4:150.16
:180.424
4:180.42
631:
777:151.17
4:040.292
:070.621
:040.7
15:010.65
15:010.64
:070.6
:180.54
:190.8
:180.5
602:071
Peripheral Control System,
RCA Spectra 70 . • • • . • • • • . • • • •.
Peripheral Processing Package, PPP,
CDC 160-A . • • • . • • • . • • • • • • . •.
permanence, recording, internal
storage . . . . . . . . • . . • • . . . . • . •
permanent, data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
permanent display . . • . . . . . . . . . • •
permanent store . . . . . . . . . . . • • . •
Permuted Index Program,
GE 215/225/235 . . . . • . . . . . . . • . .
persistent error . . . • . . . • . . . . . • .
PERT, CDC 6000 Series . . . . . . . • . •
PERT, H 400 . • . . • . . • . . . . • . . . .
PERT, P 2000 . . . • . • • • . . . • • . . .
PEST System, IBM 7070/7072/7074 ..
phase, program translator ..••..•.
phase encoding, IBM System/360 . . . .
phenomenon, internal storage . . . . • .
phenomenon, recording ...•••.•.•.
phenomenon, storage, input-output . . .
Philco Corporation . . . . • . • . • . . . .
Philco General Purpose Print Reader .
photoelectric reading . • . • • • . . . . . •
PHOTO-SET, H 200 Series .•.••...
physical characteristics, computer
system reports . . . . • . • . • . . . . • .
physical form, input-output unit . . • . .
Pick subroutine, IBM 1620/1710 SPS ..
picture, item . . . . • . • • . • . . • • . . •
picture, process oriented language •..
PIT, TOPS compiler tape . . . . • . . . .
pitch, printer . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . .
Pitney Bowes National MICR
Reader, NCR 315 . . • . . . . • . . . • •
PL/I . • . . . . . . . • . • • • • . • • • . • • .
PLOT statement, IBM 1620
GOTRAN . . . • • . . . . . . • . . . . . . .
plotters, Special Report . • . . . . . . . •
PLT Maintenance System,
RCA 3301 . . . . • . . . . • • . . . . . . . •
plugboard, UNIVAC 1004 . . . . • . . • .
710:151. 15
244:151. 153
:040.24
4:040.244
4:060.3
4:040.245
321:151. 17
4:190.44
260:151. 184
501:151. 21
651:151.17
403:191
4:180.41
420:094
:040.23
:070.3
:070.312
See P
23:020.910
4:070.222
510:152.17
:210
:070.2
412:181.12
4:160.311
:160.311
651:192.12
:080.324
601:102
420:167
412:163.14
23:070
703:151.16
770:051.122
770:121. 102
:070.54
plugboard control, input-output . . . • .
plugboard programming, UNIVAC
1004 . . . • . . . • . . . • . . • . . . . . . . 770:051. 121
PLUS, H 200 Series . . • . • . . . • . • . . 510:192.12
plus-zero • . • . . . . • . • • • . . . . . . . . .
4:050.222
polyphase merge routine . • . . • . . . . .
4:150.13
POOL Users' Group (RPC-4000,
LGP-30) . • . . . . • . . . • . • . • • • . • . 351:011
352:011
POS, RCA Spectra 70 . • . . . . . . • • .. 710:191
POS Assembler, RCA Spectra 70 .•.•. 710:171
POS COBOL, RCA Spectra 70 . . . • . . 710:164
POS Report Program Generator,
RCA Spectra 70 . . . . . . • . • . • • . .• 710:151. 14
POS Sort/Merge, RCA Spectra 70 . . . 710:151. 13
POS Utility Programs, RCA
Spectra 70 . • • . . . . . . . . . • . . • •• 710:151.15
positional arrangement,internal
storage . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:070.32
post-mortem, object program . . . • . .
4:180.453
post-mortem, operating
environment . • . . . • . • . . . . . • . . •
4:190.52
Potter RAM unit . . . . . . . . . • . . • . .
23:060
power control console . • . . . . . . • . .
:060.21
precedence rule, multi-running,
central processor . . . • . . • . . . . . .
:050.343
precedence rule, sequence control,
central processor . . . . . . • . • • . . •
:050.313
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
2: 100. 028
pre-set variation ••••••••.••••.•
presumptive address .••••••••.••
price data, computer system
reports ' •••••..•••••••••••••
Primary Operating System,. RCA
Spectra 70 •..•..••...••.••••
print buffer, UNIVAC 1050 ...•••••
Print Edit, Expanded, feature •••..•
Print Editor, H 400 ..•.•.•.•.•••
print positions pitch .•.•....••••.
Print Storage feature ......•.••••
Print Storage Option, H 400
..••..•
printer .margin ..••.••.•••••••.
printers, Special Report ••..•.••••
priority, multi-running .••..•••.•
Priority Feature, IBM 1410 ..••.••
Priority Memory Access Control;
GE 225 .•......••••••.•••••
Priority Processing, .IBM 7070/
7072/7074 .•.•••...•.••..••.•
priority segments .••.•...••••••
priority sequence, routine .••..••.
private library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
private library, language ..•...••.
privileged instruction, RCA
Spectra 70 ...•..••.••.•...••
Privileged Mode, UNIVAC 1108 ..••.
problem, data processing .••...•••
problem oriented facilities .••....•
problem oriented facilities, utility
routines .•..••••.•••.•.••..•
problem oriented language ..••..•.
procedure ...•.•.•.•.•..•.••.•.
procedure, analysis techniques ..•.•
procedure, conditional, process
oriented language ...•••.•••..•
procedure, deSignation, process
oriented language .••.•..••.•••
procedure, function definition,
process oriented language ••••.•.•
procedure, label, machine
oriented language .•.••.•••...•
procedure, level . • . . . . • • . . '.' ...
procedure, loop control, process
oriented language.. • . . • • . . • . . . •
procedure, machine oriented
language .•••...•••.••.••...
procedure, operand definition,
process oriented language ••••.•.•
procedure, program translator ...••
procedure entities, process
oriented language . • . . • . . • • . . • .
procedure name, process
oriented language ....••••••..•
procedure sequence control,
process oriented language .•••••••
procedure usage ..•....••••.•••
process charts, information,
analysis techniques •..••••.••.•
9/66
4:160.332
4:050.2373
:220.
710:191
777:081. 12
777:111
401:051.12
414:081.12
501:151.14
:080.324
401:111.1
414:081.12
414:111
415:111.12
501:081.12
501:111.11
4:070.353
23:050
4:050.343
402:051. 33
402:111.1
process oriented language . • • • • • • • •
process oriented language, data
description facilities ••.•••••.••
process oriented language,
extension of the language ..••••.•
process oriented language, general .••
process oriented language,
library facilities .•....•.••.••.
process oriented language,
operation repertoire .•...••••..
process oriented language,
procedure sequence control ..••.•.
process oriented language,
program structure •.......•••••
process oriented language, target
computer allocation . • • . . . • . . . • .
process oriented language,
translator control .•..••..••.•.
processing facilities, central
processor . • • . • . . . . . • . . • . . • •
Processing Overlap feature .••••.•.
321:111.1
403:051.12
403:051. 33
404:051.12
404:051. 33
405:051.12
405:051. 33
4:160.91
4:190.23
4:160.72
4:170.72
710:051.125
785:191.121
4:160.1
:150
:150.1
4:150.2
4:160.1
15:010.5
:160.52
:160.541
:160.551
:160.54
:170.321
4:160.242
:160.56
:170.5
:160.55
:180.
:160.22
:160.262
:160.5
4:160.82
15:010.511
processing step, UNIVAC 1004 .•.•.•
processor, central. . . • • . . . . . • . . •
Processor, IBM 7080 •.••.....•••
processor, multi - . • • ••.••..••.•
Processor Operating System,
IBM 7010 .•.•••...•.•••.••••
processor performance time • • • • • • •
product, double length ••. . • • . • • • .
PROF, H 200 Series .•••.••..•••
PROFIT . . . • . . • • . . • • . ,.••.•.••
program ..•••••.•••..•..•.•.
program, diagnostic, machine
oriented language .•••••••••.••
program, object, program
translator .••..•..••••••••.•
program, segmenting, operating
environment . • . • . . . • • • . . . . • • .
program, source, operating
environment . . . • . . . • . . • . • . . . •
Program Addressable Block,
IBM 1410 .•.••..•..••.••••.•
Program Collection Tape, B 5500 .••
Program Control, Arithmetic and,
UNIVAC 4121 ••....••..••...•
Program -Controlled Interruption
(PCI) ..•••.•••.••.••.••.•.•
program correction, machine
oriented language .•.••••••••.•
program design level, IBM
System/360 .••..••..•.•••..•
program diagnostic, operating
environment . • • • • • • . . . • • • • • . •
program diagnostic, program
translator ..•••.••..••.•••..
program division! process
oriented language .•.•.•••....•
program facilities, input-output .•..•
Program Input Routine, LGP-30 ...•
program listings, translator .•••..•
program loading . • • • . . . • • • . • . . .
program loading, operating
environment ..•.•••..••.••••.
program loading time, operating
environment . • • . . • • . • • • • . • . . •
Program Monitor, GE 400 Series ••.•
program protection, multi-running,
central processor .••••••••••••
A
:160
4:160.1
:160.3
:160.6
:160.1
:160.7
:160.4
:160.5
:160.2
:160.9
:160.8
:050.2
401:111.1
402:111.1
415:111.12
416:111.4
770:051. 121
:050
417:181
4:050.35
416:011
:050.42
4:050.211
510:151.17
510:151.17
4:160.1
:170.67
:180.31
:190.311
:190.21
402:051. 12
203:191
774:051
420:111.3
420:011.5
:190; 5
:180.45
:160.21
:070.5
352:191
4:180.33
4:190.1
:190.2
:190.81
330:191. 12
:050.344
(Contd. )
AUERBACH
OJ
/
:170.23
/'
GENERAL INDEX
2:100.029
Program Reference Table, B 5500 ••
program register groups, H 8200 •••
Program Relocation System,
Monrobot XI .•••.•••••••••••
Program Status Word, IBM
System/360 .••••.••••••••..
program structure, process
oriented language ..••••••.•••
Program Test System, H-800 ..••.
program translator .•••••.•••••
program translator, alternative
translator .•..•••..•...••.•
program translator, computer
configuration ..••....••.•••.
program translator, errors, checks
and action .•.•.••.•....•••.
program translator, general ..•••.
program translator, input ..•.••.•
program translator, library . . . . • .
program translator, output .••.••.
program translator, phases and
passes .•.••...•••.•••••••.
program translator, program
diagnostic ...•••..•••.•••.•
program translator, translating
procedure .•••••..••..•••••
program translator, translator
performance . . . . • • • • . . • • • • • .
Programmed Peripheral Switch,
GE 400 Series •••••..••••••••
programmed time-sharing .••.••..
programmed time-sharing,
simultaneous operations .••.•..•
programming language . . • . • • . • . •
Programming Language I (PL/I) .•••
progress of job, report . • • . • . . . . .
progress of run .••••...•.•.•.•
PRONTO, GE 215/225/235 •••••.•
protected location .•••••.•.••••
protection characters .••..••••••
protection key, mM System/360 .•••
protection of program, multirunning, central processor ..•••.
pseudo codes ..•..••.•••.•.••
pseudo-English verbs .•.••.••.••
pseudo list, machine oriented
language ..•.•...•.•••••.••
pseudo operation .•.••..••.•.••
Punch Column Skip feature,
IBM 1442 .••....•••..•.•.••
Punch Feed Read feature,
IBM 1402 . . . . . . . • • • • . . . • . . •
punching station ..••••..••••••
purchase options, Special Report .••
pure sort routines ..••.•••••••.
push and pull tractor ....•••••..
203:051
518:051.121
531:191.12
420:051.123
:160.2
502:192
:180
:180.6
:180.7
:180.1
:180.2
:180.46
:180.3
:180.41
:180.45
:180.4
:180.5
330:106.12
4:110.17
:110.12
4:170.1
420:167
4:190.1
:190.613
321:151.17
4:050.244
4:050.217
420:051. 124
420:041.13
:050.344
4:170.54
4:160.43
:170.82
4:170.1
414:071.12
401:072.12
415:072.12
4:070.24
23:090
4:150.13
4:070.211
4:190.2
:050.321
201:082.12
4:050.211
R
Rabinow Electronics optical
scanners ••.••.••••.•••••••
Radio Corporation of America • • • • •
radix conversion ••••••••••••••
radix conversion, machine
oriented language •.••.•••••••
radix conversion operation,
central processor .•.••••..••.
radix conversion routine .•••..•••
RAM unit, Potter ..•.••.•••.•.•
RAMAC 1405 ••.••••.••..••.•
:180.8
Q
queue, loading .••...••.•••.••
queue, look-ahead, central
processor . . . . • . • . . . . • . • . • • .
Quick Cancel Memory •..•.•••••
quotient rounded •. . . • . • • • • • • • •
RACE, RCA 3488 •••••••••••••
23:020.910
RAMAC 7300, mM 7070/7074 •.•••
RANDEX Drum Storage .•••••..•.
Random Access Computer
Equipment, RCA 3488 .••••.••..
Random Access File Maintenance
Routines, RCA Spectra 70 ••..•••
Random Access General Routines,
H 200 Series .••••••.•.••..•.
random access storage devices,
Special Report ..•.••.....•••
raster unit, IBM System/360 •••.••
Raytheon PB 250 .••..•••••••.•
RCA 70/15 Processor .••.•••.••
RCA 70/25 Processor .••.•••..•
RCA 70/45 Processor .•••.•..••
RCA 70/55 Processor .••••••••••
RCA 70/97 Console .••••••.••••
RCA 70/214 Interrogating Typewriter .••••••••••••.•••.••
RCA 70/216 Interrogating Typewriter .••..••••••.•.•.•.•.
RCA 70/221 Paper Tape Reader/
Punch ••.•.••.••••••••.•••
RCA 70/232 Card Reader •••••...
RCA 70/234 Card Punch . . . • . • • . .
RCA 70/236 Card Punch ••••.••.•
RCA 70/237 Card Reader .•••..••
RCA 70/242 Printer ..•.•.••.•••
RCA 70/243 Printer .••.•••.•••.
RCA 70/248 Bill Feed Printer .••••
RCA 70/249 Bill Feed Printer .••••
RCA 70/251 Videoscan Document
Reader .•.•.•••.•••.•.••.•
RCA 70/432 Magnetic Tape Unit .•••
RCA 70/442 Magnetic Tape Unit ••••
RCA 70/445 Magnetic Tape Station ••
RCA 70/472 Magnetic Tape Controller .•••••.•.•••.•.•••.
RCA 70/551 Random Access Controller ..•...•••••.•...••.•.
RCA 70/564 Disc Storage Unit •..••
RCA 70/565 Drum Memory Unit ...•
RCA 70/568 Mass Storage Unit .•.•
RCA 70/627 Data Exchange Control .•
RCA 70/652 Communication Control .
RCA 70/653 Communication Control .
RCA 70/664 Communication Buffer
Control •••....•••...••..••
RCA 70/668 Communication
Controller - Multichannel. • . . • . .
RCA 70/672 Communication Multiplexor Channel ..•.•.•••.•.•.
RCA 70/710 Telegraph Buffer . . . . .
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
703:044
703:105
See RCA
4:050.216
:170.641
:050.216
4:170.64
23:060
401:042
402:042
403:042
771:043
703:044
703:105
710:151. 16
510:151.17
23:060
420:101.120
420:109.121
631:
712:051
713:051
710:051
715:051
710:051
716:051
710:061
710:062
710:062
710:073
710:071
710:072
710:072
710:071
710:081
710:082
710:083
710:083
710:106
710:091
710:091
710:091
710:091.4
710:042
710:043
710:042
710:044
710:043
710:105
7:1.0:101
710:101
710:102
710:102
710:102
715:111
710:103
9/66
2:100;030
RCA 70/720 Communication Buffer •••
RCA 70/721 Communication Buffer •••
RCA 70/722 Communication Buffer •••
RCA 70/728 Autodin Buffer ••••••••
RCA 301 .•••••••••••••••••••
RCA 301 Compatibility Program,
RCA 3301 •••••••••••• '.' .•••.
RCA 303 Processor .••••••••••••
RCA 304 Processor .••••••••••••
RCA 305 Processor .••••.••.••••
RCA 308 :Monitor Printer Control ••••
RCA 311 Paper Tape Reader/
Punch Control • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • •
RCA 314 Card Reader Control •.••••
RCA 315 Card Punch Control ••..•••
RCA 316 On-Line Printer Control
RCA 317 Data Record File Control .••
RCA 318 Hi-Data Tape Group
Control ...••••••••.•••..•••
RCA 321 Paper Tape Reader/Punch
RCA 322 Paper Tape Reader .•..••.
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
323 Card Reader .•..••..•.•
324 Card Reader ..••.•.••.•
328 Interrogating Typewriter ••.
329. Card Reader •••.••••••••
331 Paper Tape Punch ••••••••
RCA 332 Paper Tape Punch .••.••.•
RCA 333 On-Line Printer .•..•••..
RCA 334 Card Punch .••.•.••.•••
RCA 335 On-Line Printer ..••...••
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
338 Monitor Printer ..••••.•.
341 Dual Tape Channel .•.••.•
342 Dual Tape Channel .••••••
351 Dual Tap!,! Channel .•••.•.
352 Dual Tape Channel .•••••.
354 Processor . . . • . . . • • • • • •
355 Processor .••••.•••.•••
361 Data Record File ..••.•• : •
366 Data Disc File .•...••••.•
RCA 381 Hi-Data Tape Group ••••••
RCA 391 Data Record File Mode
Control •••••.•••.••••••••••
RCA 392 Simultaneous .Mode Control ••
RCA 393 Adapter, Magnetic Tape .•.•
RCA 394 Adapter, Magnetic Tape ••••
RCA 396 On-Line Printer Control. ..•
RCA 398 Interrogating Typewriter
Control .••••••••••••.••••••.
RCA 581 Magnetic Tape Station
RCA 582 Magnetic Tape Station •••••
RCA 681 Magnetic Tape Station •••••
RCA 3301 ••••••••.•••••.••.•••
RCA 3301, COBOL:-61 Extended •••••
RCA 3301 Console .•.•..•.••.•••
RCA 3301 Executive Control .
System (ECS) .•...•• ' .•..•• ~ •.
RCA 3301 File Control Processor
(FCP) ...•••••••.••••••••••
9/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
710:103
710:103
710:103
710:103
701:
703:151.11
. 701:051
701:051
701:051,
701:102; 12
701:071.4
701:072.4
701:073.4
701:074.4
7()1:075.5
701:081.4
701:042.4
701:091. 4
701:071
703:074
703:075
701:072
703:074
701:074
703:071
701:101
703:072
701:073.
703:075
703:075
701:081
703:081
701:075
701:082
703:081
701:102
701:092.4
701:092.4
701:093.4
701:093.4
701:051
701:051
701:042
701:043
703:043
701:091
701:042.4
701:111.12
701:111.12
701:092.4
701:093.4
701:082.4
701:101.12
701:092
703:091
701:093
703:092
703:093
703:
703:162
703:183
703:061
703:191
703:191
RCA 3301 FORTRAN IV ••••••••••
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
3301
3301
3301
3301
High Speed Memory .•• '.' •
Micro Magnetic Memory •••
Operating System •••.•••
REALCOM .••••••••••
RCA 3301 Sort/Merge System •.•••
RCA 3303 Processor •••••••••••
RCA 3304 Processor with High
Speed Arithmetic Unit •••••.•••
RCA 3376 Communications Control ••
RCA 3377 Data Exchange Control •••
RCA 3378 Communications Mode
Control' .•••.••••••.•.•••••
RCA 3428 Interrogating Typewriter
RCA 3436 Card Punch .•••••.•••
RCA 3465 Data Drum Memory ..•••
RCA 3485 Magnetic Tape Station .•••
RCA 3487 Magnetic Tape Group .•••
RCA 3488 Random Access Computer
Equipment •••••••.•••••.•••
RCA 5820
Reader
RCA 6010
RCA 6020
RCA 6050
VIDEOSCAN Document
.•••.•.••••••••••••
Communications Buffer .••
Communications Buffer .••
Video Data Terminal .••.
RCA 6051 Video Data Interrogator .•
RCA 6077 Interrogator Control •.•.•
RCA EDGE System •...•••••.•••
RCA N -2 Character Font ..•..•• ' .•
RCA Spectra 70 ••.•..•••..••••
RCA Spectra 70/15 ..••.•..••••
RCA Spectra 70/25 .•.•••••.•.•
RCA Spectra 70/35 .••.•••••••••
RCA Spectra 70/45 ••.•••••••••
RCA Spectra 70/55 ••••.•••...•
RCA Spectra 70 COBOL ..•.•••.•
RCA Spectra 70 Disk Operating
System .•••••••.•.••.•••••
RCA Spectra 70 FORTRAN ..•.•••
RCA Spectra 70 Primary Operating
System .••.••••..•••••••.•
RCA Spectra 70 Tape/DiSC Operating
System •••••••••••••••••••
RCA Spectra 70 Tape Operating
System •••••.•••.•••••••••
Read and Punch Column Binary,
IBM 6025 .••••••••••.••••••
read-back check ••••.••••••.••
read backward .•••••••••.••••
Read Binary Tape feature, IBM
7072/7074 •••••..••.•••••.•
Read-Compare feature, IBM 1404 •••
Read-Only Control Memory,
RCA Spectra 70' ..•.••••.•••.•
Read-Punch Release feature .•••••
703:161
703:182
703:041
703:042
703:191
703:171
703:181
703:151
703:051
703:051
703:103
703:102
703:101
703:104
703:073
703:045
703:094
703:095
703:044
703:105
701:103
703:101
703:101
703:106
710:104
703:106
710:104
710:104
23:080.79
23:080.900
710:106
710:
712:
713:
714:
715 .
716:
710:162
710:193
710:161
710:191
710:192
710:192
408:103.12
4:070.222
4:070.521
404:091.12
405:043.13
401:082.12
715:041
401:111.1
415:111.12
Read~Write
Cylinder feature,
IBM 130.1 .••.••..••.•••.•••
reading method, internal storage . • •
reading station ••..•.•••••.•••
Real Time Clock, GE 225 .•••••••
Real-Time Input Analyzer, H 200
.series .•••••••••.••.••.•••
fA
AUERBACH
'"
402:043.13
403:043.13
:040.282
4:070.24
321:051.12
510:152.17
(Contd. )
/
GENERAL INDEX
2: 100. 031
Real Time Processor, NCR 315 .•••
Real-Time Scanner, P 2000 . . . . • .
REALCOM, RCA 3301 ••..•..•••
REALCOM Assembly System,
RCA 3301 ••••.••.••••..•••.
reallocation control ••..•.•..•.•
reassignment, in-out units,
operating environment ..•••••••
receipt, error ...•.•••••.•••.•
receipt of data, check .••.••••.•
Recognition Equipment optical
scanners . . . . • • . • . • • • . . . . • •
RECOMP II . . • . . . . • . • . . • . . • .
RECOMP III . . . • . • . . • • . . • • . . •
re-comp1ement . . . • . . . • . • • . . • •
record description, process
oriented language . . . • • . . . . . • .
record label .•.••....•••••.••
record label, machine . • . . • . . • . .
record-mark control, IBM 7070/
7072/7074 .••.•.••••.••••••
Record Overflow feature,
IBM System/360 . . . . • • • . . . . • .
recording, interleaved . . • • . . • . . •
recording error, input-output ..••.
recording method, internal storage ..
recording of data, check •...••••
recording permanence, internal
storage . . . • . . . • . • . • . • . . • . •
recording phenomenon . • • . . . . . • .
recording system, input-output ..•.
recovery of data, check .•.•.•.••
recursion, subroutine . . • . . • . . • •
recursive, indirect addressing
central processor . . • . • . . . . • . .
redefinition .•.•.••••....•••.
redefinition, machine oriented
language . . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . .
redefinition, process oriented
language . . . . • . • • • . . • . . • • . .
reel, multi -file . . . . • . . • . . . • . . •
reel, description, process oriented
language . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • .
reel label control, machine
oriented language .•....•••.••
reel label control, routine ..••.•.
re-entrant coding, IBM System/360 .
regenerated, data • , , . . • .•• , , •.
REGENT - CARD, UNIVAC 1050
REGENT - DRUM, UNIVAC 1050
REGENT - TAPE, UNIVAC 1050
region, names, process oriented
language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , ••.
region, program . . . . . .
register, console entry .
register display, console
Register File, CDC 3200
registers, special . . . . .
reject, error . . • . . . . .
relative address . . • . . .
relation, conditional, process
oriented language . • • . . . . • . . • •
relationship, stack location ..•.•••
reload control . • . . • . . . . . . • . • . •
reloading period, input-output ••••.
relocatable routine . . . . . .••.•..
remainder, division . . . • . . . . • • • •
Remington Rand . . • . . . . •.•.••.
601:051.11
652:106.12
703:
703:171
703:181
:190.632
:190.323
4:040.448
4:040.8
23:020.910
161:
162:
4:050.4
Remote Calculator, CDC 6060 .•••.
rental terms, Special Report ••••••
repeat mode, RPC-4000 .•.••••••
repeat instructions, GE 600 Series •.
replenishment time, input-output ••.
report, management, analysis
techniques ••.••••••••••••••.
Report Description Sheets, Analysis
Techniques . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . • •
Report/File Language, IBM 7080 .••
Report Generator, GE 225 ., ••.••
Report Generator I, B 100/200/
300 Series ..••.••..••..
Report Generator A and B,
H 200 Series . . . • . , •.•...
Report Program Generator .•.
:160.33
4:170.33
:170.33
:170.325
403:091.12
420:044.13
4:040.29
:070.8
:040.281
4:040.8
:040.24
4:070.3
:070.3
4:040.8
4:160,537
:050.2381
4:160.362
4:170.423
:170.423
:160.362
4:160.322
:160.32
:170.652
4:170.65
427:161. 1
:040.242
777:151.14
777:151.14
777:151.14
:160.27
4:160.27
:060.41
:060.33
245:051.12
:050.24
4:180.7
4:170.241
:160.523
4:040.515
4:070.55
:070.734
4:190.3
4:050.211
See UNIVAC
report writer routine . . . • . • . . • • .
report writing, problem oriented
facilities . • . . • . . . • • • . • .
representation, data structure . . . • .
re-read, check . . . . • • • • . • . • . • .
re-reading control, , ••.••• , •••.
re-run supervision . • • . . . . , •...
Rescue, STEP, PACE . . • • . . • . . •
reserved equipment, operating
environment . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . .
reserved label, machine oriented
language . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
reserved storage, internal storage ..
reserved storage, target computer .•
reservoir, input-output .•.•...••
reset control, console . . . • . . . • • •
reset mode, Monrobot XI . . . . . . • .
Resident Monitor J, H 200 Series .•.
~estart, operating environment ..••
restart control, console ...•••..•
restart dump . . . . . . . • . . . • . . . •
restart facilities . . • • • • . . . . . . . .
restart supervision .••. , .•.••••
restricted operation, simultaneous
operations ....••.•..•••••••
restricted program • . • . . . . . • . . .
restricted translate, program
translator . • . • • • • . . . . . .
restriction, controller, inputoutput . . . . . . • . . • • . . . • .
result, multi- . . . . • . . . . • .
return, subroutine . • . . . . . . •
return jump, subroutine ..••.
rewind control ..•.••.•.•.
rewind verb . . • • . • • . . . • . .
REX Operating System, UNIVAC
490 Series . • . • . • • . . • . . .
RIP -3000 Interpreter,
RECOMP III . • • . . . . . • • . .
road block, GE 600 Series . . . . .•.
Rod Memory, NCR 315 RMC . . . . . •
roll-out/roll-in, CDC 6000 Series ••
roll-out/roll-in, UNIVAC 494 .
rotary floating-point switch,
IBM System/360 • . . . . • . . .
rounded, quotient . • . . . . • . .
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
260:062
23:090
351:051.12
340:051. 124
:070,722
15:010.3
15:010.31
417:151.21
321:151. 14
201:151.14
510:151.14
330:151.14
401:151.14
402:151.14
403:151. 14
414.151.14
420:151. 14
420:152.14
420:153.14
4:150.14
:150.14
:020.22
4:070.22
4:190.44
4:190.45
601:191. 12
:190.82
:170.313
:040.16
:180.511
:070.212
4:060.25
531:061.13
510:193.122
:190.45
4:060.23
4:190.451
4:190.1
:190.45
4:110.12
4:180.433
:180.433
:070.432
:160.413
:160.534
:160.5
4:070.55
4:070.55
800:191
162:131
162:171
162:192
340:191. 122
603:041. 13
260:043.13
804:191. 123
435:051. 12
4:050.211
9/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
2: 100. 032
rounding, automatic •••••••••••••
rounding, data operations,
language •••••••••••••••••••
rounding, move ••••••••.•••••••
rounding, process oriented
language .•••••••••••.•••.•••
routine, control, interrupt,
central processor ••••••••••••
routine, data editing, machine
oriented language. • • • • • • • • • • • ••
routine, diagnostic, machine
oriented language. • • • • • . • • • • • • •
routine, executive •••••.•••.••••
routine, independent. • • • • • • • • • • • •
routine, loading time • • • . . • • • • • • •
routine, monitor •••••.•••••••••
routine, overlay control, machine
orientedlanguage. • • . • • • • • • • • • •
routine, program translator .••••••
routine, relocatable •••••••••••••
routine, sorting, machine
oriented. language •.•.••.••••••
routine, speCial, machine
oriented language .•••••.•.••••
routine, supervisor .•.•...••••.•
routine library, process
oriented,language .•.••..••••••
routines, micro .••••••..••••••
routines, standard .•••••.•••.•••
routines, utility .•.•••••.••••••
row, external storage, inputoutput .•.••••.••.••••••••••
row arrangement, magnetic tape .•.•
row arrangement, paper tape ...••.
row pitch, magnetic tape . . . . . . . ; .
row pitch, paper tape • . • • • . • • • • • •
rows per inch, magnetic tape •••.••
rows per inch, paper tape . • . • • . • .,
RPC-4000 .•.....•.••••••••••
RPC-4000 COMPACT Compiler .•••.
RPC-4000 Drum Storage •••.••••••
RPC-400Q PINT Interpretive
System ..••.••.•••..•••••••
RPC-4000 ROAD Assembly System •••
RPC-4010 Computer ••••••••••••
RPC-4410 Photo Reader .•••••••••
RPC-4430 Reader/Punch
RPC-4431 Reader/Punch
RPC-4440 High Speed Punch ..•••••
RPC-4480 Typewriter .•.•••••..•
RPC -4500 Tape Typewriter System .•
RPC-460 Auxiliary Tape Typewriter System .•..•••••••.••••
RPC-47000ff-Line Tape
Typewriter . . • . • . • . • • • • . • • • • •
RPG, IBM i401 •...•••••.•••••.
RPG, IBM System/360 .•.••••••••
run progress
run progress, operating environment •
9/66
run mode, program translator ••••••
running, multi - • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
running overhead, operating
environment . • • • . • . • • • • • • • • • •
running supervision, operating
environment . • • . . • • • • • • • • • • • •
running time, logging, operating
environment . • • • . • • . • • • • . • • . •
4:050.211
4:050.212
4:160.434
4:160.445
:160.414
:160.434
:050.332
:180.422
:050.33
:190.83
:190.4
:190.75
S
:170.64
SALE, H 200 Series .••••••..•..•
SALT, UNIVAC III .•••.•.••.••••
Sample Routine, RCA 301 .••.•..•.
SAS, GE 400 Series ..•••.••..•••
satellite operation .•••••.•••••••
Scan Disk feature, IBM 1311 •••...•
:170.67
4:190.1
:190.21
:190.81
4:190.1
:170.63
:180
4:190.3
scanning, table .•.•...•.•••..••
scanning operation, process
oriented language . . . . • . . . . . • . •
scatter-read •....•....•.•••.••
:170.66
Scheduler, H 800 . . . • . . . . • . . . . •
School, College, and University
Computer Centers, Directory •.•••
Scientific Library Procedures,
B 5500 •.••.••••...••.••..•
SCOPE, CDC 3200 •.•••.•.•.•...
SCOPE, CDC 3400 •.•.•••...••.•
SCOPE, H 200 Series ..•••.•••.••
Scratchpad Memory, RCA Spectra 70 •
:170.6
4:190.1
:160.76
4:050.311
:150.1
:150.1
:070.325
:090.325
:070.325
:090.322
:070.322
:090.34
:070.34
351:
351:161
351:181
351:041
searching operation, input-output ...•
second address sequence,
GE 400 Series . . • . . . . . . • . • . • . .
Second Level Interrupt
GE 400 Series . • • • . . . . • . . . . . . .
section . • . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . • . . .
Seek Overlap feature, IBM 1311 •.•..
segment, RCA 3301 . . • . . . • . • . • . .
segmenting program, operating
environment . • • . • • . • . • • . • . • . .
segmenting routine . • . . . • • . . • . . •
segments . • . . • • . . . . . . • . . . • • . .
segments, move .•.•..•..•.•.••
segments, translation ..•.•.•.••.
Select instruction, H 400 .•...•••.•
351:172
351:192
351:171
351:182
351:051
351:072
351:074.12
351:071
351:074:12
351:071
351:074.12
351:073
351:074.12
351:074.12
351:081
351:074
Selective Stacker feature, IBM 1442 .•
Selective Tape Listing, IBM 1403 . . . .
Selective Tape Listing feature,
IBM System/360 .••••••••••...
selective tracing .•.•.•.•••..••.
selector, UNIVAC 1004 ...•.••••.
Selector Channel, IBM System/360 ••.
Selector Channel, RCA Spectra 70 . . .
Selectric I/O Console Typewriter,
IBM 1620 Model 2 . . • . . • . . . . • . .
351:074
Self Checking Number feature,
IBM 1419 .•.•••.•..•.••..•..
351:101
401:151. 14
420:151.14
420:152.14
420:153.14
4:190.73
:190.613
self -clocking . . . . . . . . . • . . . • • . .
sensing system, input-output ..•••..
sentinel description, process
oriented language . . . . . • . • • • . • .
sequence, collating .•..•.•.••••.
A
510:151.17
774:071
701:192.512
330:051.12
244:011
401:043.13
414:042.13
415:042.13
4:160.42
:160.423
:040.447
:070.445
502:191
21:035
203:151. 17
245:191
246:191
510:151.15
715:041
716:041
:070.526
330:051.12
330:051. 12
4:070.325
401:043.13
415:042.13
703:171. 14
:190.331
4:190.311
4:160.91
4:190.312
4:180.53
501:051.12
501:121.101
414:071.12
415:081.12
'.
420:081. 12
4:190.511
770:051.122
420:111. 24
710:111
/
412:061. 6
413:081
413:081.12
401:103.12
402:103.12
4:070.324
:070.22
:160.322
:050.214
(Contd. )
AUERBACH
'"
GENERAL INDEX
2: 100. 033
sequence, loading, operating
environment . • . . • • . . . • • . . • • . .
sequence, RCA 3301 . . . . • • . • • • . .
sequence check . . • . . . . . . • . . . . • •
sequence control, central
processor . • . . . . . • • . . . . • . . . •
sequence control, process
oriented language .••.••••.••..
sequence control in-out, process
oriented language . • • . • . • . • . . . .
sequence control modifier ..••.•.•
sequence control sub-sequence
counter . . • • . • . • • . . . • . . • . • . •
sequence counter . • • . . . . • . • . . . • .
Sequence Register Traffic Controller,
H 8200 . • . • . • . . • • . . • . • • • . . • .
sequencing, instruction . . . . • . . . • .
sequencing, multi- . . • . . • • . . • . . .
Sequencing By Address, PB 250 .••••
Sequencing By Time, PB 250 ..••..
serial arrangement, external
storage • . . . • . . • . . . . . . • • . . . .
Serial Input/Output Adapter •..•..••
Service Routine System, RCA 301 .••.
set, switch, process oriented
language . • • • . . . • . . • • . . . • • . •
set by name .••..••...•.••••••
set by value . • • • . . . . • . • . . . • . • •
setting switch, language . • • . . . . . . .
set-up overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . • • •
Shared Storage feature,
IBM System/360 . . . • . • . . . . . • • •
Shared Storage feature,
RCA Spectra 70 • . . . • . . . . • • . . . •
sharing, time- . • • . • . • . . . . • . • . •
sheet, coding • . . . . . . . . • . . . • • . .
shift time, central processor . . . • . . .
Short Card Feeding feature,
UNIVAC 1004 .•••...•..•.••.•
short format, IBM System/360 .•..•
short multiplication . • . . . • . • • . . • •
short translate, program translator .•
SICOM, CDC 160-A .•..•.•••.•••
\
sideways card reader •.•.•.•...••
SIFT translator .•.••••••.•...•
signal ..•••.••...•..••.••.••
signal inquiry, operating
envirorunent .•....•••..••.••
signal logging, operating
envirorunent .•..•..••••.•..••
signal, operator, operating
envirorunent .•...••.•..•••••.
signals to operator .••.••.••.•••
significant part, data code .••.•••.
SIMO modes, RCA 3301 . . . • • . • . . •
SIMO program, CDC 160-A ••.•....
SIMSCRIPT, CDC 6000 Series .••.•.
simulate alternation . . • . . • . . • . • . •
Simulation, problem oriented
facilities . • . • . . • . . . . • • • • . . • .
simulation by computer . . . • . • . • . .
Simulator, Bendix G15, on
CDC 160-A . • . . . . . . • • . • • . . • • .
Simulator, CDC 160, on
CDC 160-A • . • . . . . . . • . . • . . • . .
:190.23
703:171.14
703:191. 12
4:160.327
:050.3
:160.5
:160.327
:050.317
:050.314
:050.31
518:051.121
:050.31
:050.35
631:051.12
631:051.12
:070.321
401:111.12
404:101
415:101
701:191. 1
701:192.1
:160.514
4:160.27
4:160.27
4:160.51
4:070.7
420:041.13
710:041.13
4:110.14
:170.21
:050.418
770:071.12
420:011. 3
4:050.211
:180.433
244:011
244:172
244:192
4:070.322
784:162.14
4:040.8
:190.631
:190.71
:190.63
4:190.61
4:140.22
703:111
244:151.152
260:151.185
4:190.323
:150.12
4:150.12
244:172
244:184.12
244:151.11
Simulator, CDC 1604/1604-A,
on CDC 160/160-A ..•..••.•••..
simulator, computer . . . . • . . • • . • •
Simulator, H 400, on H 800 .•••••••
Simulator, IBM 305, on NCR 315 ..••
Simulator, IBM 650, on GE 225 .•.••
Simulator, IBM 650, on IBM 1410 . . . .
Simulator, IBM 650, on IBM 1620
Simulator, IBM 650, on IBM 7070 .••
Simulator, IBM System/360, on
IBM 7090/7094 • . • • . . . . . . . . • • . .
Simulator, IBM 705, on IBM 7080 ..•
Simulator, IBM 1401, on GE 400
Series . . . • . • . . • . . • . • . • . • . • •
Simulator, IBM 1401, on IBM
System/360 . . . • . . • • • . . . • . . . .
Simulator, IBM 1401, on RCA
Spectra 70 ••.••..•..•••.••.••
Simulator, IBM 1410, on IBM
System/360 ..••••••.••....•.
Simulator, IBM 1710 Control
System, on IBM 7090 . . . • • . . . . . .
Simulator, IBM 7070, on IBM 704 ...•
Simulator, LGP-30, on GE 225 .•..•
Simulator, LGP-30, on RPC-4000
simulator, problem oriented
facilities ••...•••..••.•..•••
Simulator, RCA 301, on RCA 3301 ...
Simulator, RCA 301, on RCA
Spectra 70 • . . . . . . • • • . . . . • • . .
Simulator, RCA 501, on RCA
Spectra 70 . . . . . . • . . . . . . . • • • .
Simulator, RCA 3301, on RCA
Spectra 70 • • . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • .
simulators of computers . . . . . • • . . •
Simultaneity Adapter,
NCR 315-100 . . . • . • . . . . . . . • . .
simultaneous data transfers . . . . . . .
simultaneous input-output . . . . . . . . .
simultaneous mode, RCA 301 ..•.•.
Simultaneous Mode Control,
RCA 301 . • . . . . • • . . . . . . • . . . . •
Simultaneous Modes, RCA 3301 .•..•
simultaneous operation . • • . . . • . . .
simultaneous operation, internal
storage .•.•.• '.' • . . • . . . • • . . .
simultaneous operation, operating
environment . • • . • . • . . • . • . . • • •
Simultaneous Sort and Print, H 200
Series . • . . . . • . . • . . . . • . . . • • •
simultaneous transfers • • . . . • . . . . •
simultaneous working, control . . . • . .
Single Character Input Mode,
LGP-30 . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . •
Single Character Mode, RPC-4000 ...
Single Disk Storage Drive,
IBM System/360 .•••...•••..•.
SIPROS, CDC 6000 Series . • . . . . • • .
Six or Eight Channel Punch,
LGP-30 . . . . • • . . • • . . . . . . • • . •
6-Level Advanced Sprocket option,
RCA Spectra 70 ...•...••••••••
skip operation . • . • . • . . • . • • . • . • .
skipping operation, input-output •.•.•
slab, NCR 315 . . • . . . . . • . • • . • • .
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
242:151.11
244:151.11
244:173.14
4:180.8
501:151.12
601:151.11
321:151.11
402:151.11
412:151.11
403:151.11
420:151. 12
417:151. 11
330:151.11
420:131
710:052
420:132
412 :151. 12
403:151. 12
321:151.11
352:151.12
352:151.11
352:151.12
:150.11
703:151.11
710:052
710:052
710:052
4:150.11
602:071
4:110.14
4:170.433
701:111. 12
701:111.12
703:111
:110
:040.52
:190.41
510:152.13
4:040.292
4:190.41
352:073.12
351:074.12
351:071. 12
351:011.12
351:081.12
435:041
260:191
352:073.1
710:073
4:070.524
:070.54
601:041.13
9/66
2: 100.034
slave mode, GE 600 Ser~es ••••••••
SLEUTH, UNIVAC 494 •••••••••••
SLEUTH I, UNIVAC 1107 ••••.••••
SLEUTH II, UNIVAC 1107 •••••••••
slewing operation, input-output •••••
SNAP I Assembler, PB 250 ••••••••
snapshot, machine oriented
language ..••.•••••••••••.••
snapshot, object program •••••••••
snapshot, operating environment .•.•
snapshot, program translator ••••••
snapshot facilities .••.•••••••...
snapshot routine •••.•••••••••••
SODA Sort/Merge, UNIVAC III ..••.
Solid-Logic Technology, IBM
System/360 ..••••.••••••••••
SOLO, H 200 Series ..•••••••••••
Soroban Engineering, Inc. high
speed punch, RPC-4000 •.•••••••
Sort I, IBM 1401 ..•••••..•••••.
Sort 2, IBM 1401 .•••••••.••••••
SORT II, EASY .••••••••.••••••
Sort II, UNIVAC 1107 •.•.••••••••
SORT III, UNIVAC III ....•..•••••
Sort 3X routine, CDC 160/160-A ••.•
Sort 5, IBM 1440 ••••••••..•••••
Sort 6, IBM 1401 .••••••••.•••••
Sort 80,· IBM 7080 •..•••••••.•••
Sort 90, IBM 7070/7074 •••••.••••
SORT, A, B, C, and C-V, H 200
Series .•••.•••••••••••.••••
Sort Generator, B 5500 •••••.••••
Sort Generator, GE 400 Series .••••
Sort Generator I,
B 100/200/300 Series .•.••••••••
Sort Generator, P 2000 •.••••••••
Sort/Merge, CDC 3200 .•••.••••••
SORT/MERGE, GE 600 Series ••••••
Sort/Merge, RCA Spectra 70 .••.•••
Sort/Merge, UNIVAC 1107 ..•••.•.
Sort/Merge, UNIVAC 490 Series ••••
Sort/Merge, UNIVAC 1108 ••••••••
Sort/Merge System, RCA 3301 .••.•
sort routine •..•••.••••••.••.•
Sort Routines, 20 word, UNIVAC III ..
sorting, system performance •••••••
sorting data, problem oriented
facilities •••••••••••••••••••
sorting routine ••••••••••••••••
sorting routine, machine
oriented language .••••••••••••
source languages, translator •••••••
source of program, operating
environment . • • . • . • • • . . • • . • • •
source program, translator .••••••
space, object program, program
translator .•••••••••••••••••
Special Input Modes, LGP-30 .••••.
special name, language . . . • . . • . . • .
special registers . . . . . • . . . . • . • . •
special routine, machine oriented
language . . . . . . . . . • • . . . • . . . .
Spectra 70, RCA . . . . . . . . . • . • . . .
Spectra 70/15 Utility Routines . . . . . •
speed, central processor •...••.•.
speed, input-output . . • • . . . . . • • . .
speed, maximum, input-output ...•.
speed, nominal, input-output . . . . • . .
speed, peak, input-output . . • . . . • • .
9/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
340:051.121
804:191.127
784:171
784:172
r070.524
631:172
631:182
:170.673
4:180.452
:190.512
:180.452
4:190.512
4:170.67
774:151. 13
420:011. 1
510:152.17
351:073
401:151.13
401:151.13
501:151.13
784:151.13
774:151.13
244:151.13
414:151.13
401:151.13
417:151.13
403:151.13
510:151.13
510:152.13
203:151.13
330:151.13
201:151.13
651:151.13
245:151.13
340:151.13
710:151.13
784:151.13
800:151.13
785:151.13
703:151
4:150.13
774:151.13
:200.2
:150.13
4:150.13
:170.66
:180.2
:190.21
4:180.1
:180.51
352:071.12
4:160.241
:050.24
:170.6
710:
710:151. 15
:050.4
:070.62
:070.624
:070.621
:070.621
Sperry Rand Corp ••••.•..•.•.•••
spirit master, input-output ••••..••
Split Field feature, IBM 1419 •••..•.
SPOOL System, IBM 7070 ..•..•.••
sprocket track .•..•.•.••.•..••
SPS, Symbolic Programming
System, IBM 1401 .••.•••.•..••
SPS, IBM 1620/1710 ...••..••..•
SPS One-Pass, IBM 1620 • • . . . . • . .
SPS to FORTRAN conversion
routine, IBM 1620 • • . . . • . . • . . . .
SPS II, IBM 1620/1710 . • . . . . • . . . .
SPURT, UNIVAC 490 Series • • . . . . .
SPURT II, UNIVAC 490 Series . . . . . .
SRS, RCA 301 . • . . • . . . . . . . . . • . .
stack . . • • • . . . . • . . . . . • . . . • . . .
Stack, B 5500 . . • . . • . . . . . . . . • . .
stack, input-output • • . • . . . . . . . • .
stack location, relationship . . . . . . . .
stack of heads . . .. . . • . . . . . ...•.
stack of heads, internal storage .•.••
stacker capacity, input-output .•..••
stacker control . • . . • • . . • . . . . • • •
stacker full, input-output .• , .•••••
stacker select, input-output .. •••••
standard configurations . . . . . • • . . •
standard problem, matrix inversion,
system performance .•.•.•.•.•.
standard problem, sorting, system
performance . • . . . . . . . • . . • • . . •
standard problem, system
performance . • . . . . • . . • . . . . . . •
standard routines . . . . . . . . . .••..
Standard Tape Executive Program,
NCR 315 • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . •
standard tasks . . . . . . • . • . • . . . • .
start new block verb • . • . . . . . . • • .
start new reel verb . • . • . . . . • . . • •.
STAT - Statistical System, P 2000 .••
statement . . • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • .
statement number, program
translator . . . . . . • . . • . . . . . • . • •
statement size, program translator .,
static display . . . . . . . . • • • • . . ; •.
station, input-output ...•.••.•.••
Statistical System, RCA Spectra 70 .•.
Statistical System - STAT, P 2000 ...
Statistics Package, H 200 Series ..••
Stat-Pack Routines, UNIVAC 1108 .••
STEP, NCR 315 . . . . • . . • . • . . . • .
step and test index, instructions ..•.
step and test instruction .....••.•..
step loop, process oriented
language . • . • . . • . . . . • . . • . . . •
step operation . • • • . . • . • . • • . . . • •
step sequence check • . . . . . . . . . . • •
step Size, loop '.' .•....••••..•• '
step size, sequence control,
central processor . . . . • • . • . . . • •
STEP, Standard Tape Executive
Program, NCR 315 . . . . • . • . . . . .
stepping control, console . • . . • . . . .
stepping index, instruction . . . . • . . .
stepping operation, input-output • . . . .
STET, H 200 Series .•....•.••.••
stop . . . • . . . • . . • . • . . . • • • • . . •
fA
AUERBACH
'"
See UNIVAC
:070.233
4:070.231
401:103.12
403:151. 15
4:070.324
401:171. 181
412:171
412:172
412:151. 174
412:181. 12
800:171
800: 181
804:191. 127
701:191. 1
701:192.2
4:040.51
203:051
:070.24
4:040.515
4:070.24
:040.511
:070.731
4:070.55
:070.56
:070.55
4:030.1
:200.31
:200.21
/
:200.1
4:150.1
601:191
4:050.4
4:160.45
4:160.45
651:151.17
4:160.22
:180.231
:180.232
4:060.3
:070.24
710:152.17
651:151.17
510:152.17
785:151.18
601:191
:050.2395
4:050.415
:160.563
:070.523
4:160.327
:160.563
/
:050.315
601:191
4:060.24
4:050.239
:070.523
510:152.17
4:040.8
4:050.5
4:070.8
(Contd. )
/
GENERAL INDEX
2: 100. 035
stop control, console • . . . . . • . . . . .
stop-start time . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . .
storage, auxiliary . • • . • . . . . • . . • .
storage, auxiliary, instruction list . . .
storage, band . . • . . • . . . . . • . . . • .
storage, central processor . . . . . . • .
storage, changeable, internal storage.
storage, entry of data, console ...••
storage, erasable . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
storage, external, input-output .•••.
storage, internal • . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
storage, reserved . . . . . . • . . . . . . .
storage, working . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
Storage Access Channel, IBM 1130 . . .
storage allocation, operating
environment . . . . . . • • . • • . • . • . .
storage changeable . . . . . . • . . . . . .
storage display, console . . . . . . • .
storage form, library, machine
oriented language . . . . . • . . . . .
storage key, IBM System/360 . . . . . .
storage level, allocation, process
oriented language . . . . . . . . . . . . .
storage library, process oriented
language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
storage location, data structure ..••.
storage locks . • • . . . • . . • . . . • . . .
storage map, object program . . . • . . .
storage medium, input-output . • . . . .
storage medium, internal storage . . . .
storage phenomenon, input-output .. .
storage phenomenon, internal
storage . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . • . .
Storage Protect feature,
H 200 Series . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . .
Storage Protection, IBM
System/360 . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . • .
storage reserved, internal storage .•.
storage space, generalized file
processing, system performance .•.
Storage-to-Storage Mode,
IBM System/360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . .
store, fixed . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . .
Store Address Registers feature
IBM 1441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Store and Fetch Protection,
IBM System/360
....... .
store size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
stored address . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stratum, RCA 301 Disc File . . . . . . .
strings, initial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
structure, data . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . .
structure of instruction ..
study, approach, analysis
techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
style, language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
subroutine, link . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
sub-routine, process oriented
language . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
subroutine, recursion . . • . . . . . • . .
subroutine, return jump . . . . . . • . . .
subroutine control, language . . . . . .
subroutine delimiter . . • . . . . . . . . . .
subroutine in-line, process
oriented language . . • . . . . . . . . .
subroutine library, loading . . . • . .
subroutine nesting, process
oriented language . . . . . . . . . • • . .
4:060.23
:070.622
4:040.1
:120
:040.25
:050.24
:040.6
:060.42
:040.241
:070.3
:040
:190.82
4:040.1
418:111.11
:190.31
:040.245
:060.34
:170.73
420:051. 124
420:041. 13
:160.91
:160.73
:020.1
4:040.16
4:180.33
:070.311
:040.21
:070.312
:040.23
510:041
420:051. 124
427:051. 123
:040.16
:200.115
420:051.121
4:040.1
4:040.241
subroutine recursion, process
oriented language .•.•.••.•••.•
subscript, data name, process
oriented language .•....•••••.•
subscript, implied . . • . • . . . . . . • • •
subscript, language . . . • . . • . • • • • .
subscript control .••..••...••
subscriptible data, process
oriented language . . . . . • . . . .
subscripted items . . • . . . . . . . .
sub-sequence counter, central
processor . . • . . . . • . . • . • . . .
supervision, running, operating
environment . . . • . . • . . . . • . .
Supervisor, IBM System/360 ...•
Supervisor-call, IBM System/360 .•..
supervisor routine . • . . . . . . . . • . . .
supervisor routine, testable
conditions . . . . . . • . . • . . . • . • . .
supervisor routines . . . • . . • . . •
Supervisory Control System
IBM 7080 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supervisory Printer, B 5500
SUPPORT III Subroutines,
UNIVAC III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SWAP, CDC 160/160-A Users'
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
swapping, tape-, control . . . . . .
switch, data . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
switch, process oriented language .. ,
switch, task time, central
processor . • . . . • . • . . . . . . • . . .
Switch Box, LGP-30 . . . . . . . • • . . .
switch statement . . • • • . . . . . . • • . .
switching time, input-output • . . • . . .
Syllable, B 5500 • • . . . • . . • . . • . . .
Symbol Controlled Move, GE 400
Series . . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . • . . •
symbol range, input-output . . . . . . . .
symbols, configuration diagrams . . . .
Symbolic Assembly Program,
Monrobot XI . . . • . . • . • . • • . • • • .
Symbolic Programming System
414:051. 12
435:051.127
:040.31
4:050.237
701:021.1
4:150.13
:020
:050.231
15:010.11
4:160.14
4:160.5
:160.53
4:160.537
4:160.5
4:160.5
4:160.531
:160.533
:190.222
:160.536
Symbolic Programming System
One-Pass, IBM 1620 . . . . . . .
Symbolic Tape I/o System,
GE 225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
synchronization, input-output ..
synchronization, internal storage ...
synchronization units, data
communications . . . . . . . . . .
SYNCHRONIZE verb . . . . . . . .
synchronized, process oriented
language . . . . . . . . . . • . . • .
Synchronizer, GE-115 • . . . . . .
Synchronous Transmit-Receive (STR)
Communication Terminals,
IBM System/360 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
synonym, machine oriented
language . . • . . . . . . . . . . . .
synonyms, language . . • . . . . . .
SYSD, P 2000 . . . • . . • . • . . . . .
System/360, IBM . • • . . . . • . . . .
system aspects, present, analysis
techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
:160.537
:160.252
4:160.363
4:160.252
4:160.56
:160.364
4:160.363
:050.314
:190.4
420:191. 122
420:192.122
420:193. 122
420:051. 123
4:190.1
4:040.448
4:160.47
417:191
203:061. 62
774:151.17
244:011
4:190.322
4:050.4241
:160.513
:050.424
352:073.12
4:160.51
4:070.623
203:051
330:051.12
:070.25
4:030.11
531:132
531:172
531:181
401:171
401:181
412:171
412:172
321:171. 65
:070.446
:040.445
23:100.44
4:160.93
:160.93
310:011.11
420:106.12
:170. :n6
4:160.253
4:170.423
651:191
·1:W;
15:010.73
9/66
2:100.036
. system configuration, computer
system reports . • • •• • • • • • • • • • •
System Controller, GE600 Series .••.
system demand, input-output ••••.••
system deSign, data communications ••
System Library Maintenance
Routines, RCA Spectra 70 •.••.•••
system performance .••.••••••••
system size, internal storage •••••.
system analysis techniques,
Selection Procedure Report ••.•.••
T
table, argument .••••••••••••••
table, constants .•••••.•.•.••••
table, logic structure, analysis
techniques •••.••••.•••••••••
table control, input~output ...•••••
table control transfers, internal
storage • . • • . • . . • . • . . • . . • . • •
Table ~Creating Language,
IBM 7080 .•.••..••..•.••••••
table description, process
oriented language . . . . . • • • • . . • •
table look~up operations, central
processor ••••.•.•..•••.•.••
table look-up task .•.••.••••..••
table look-up times, central
processor •••.•••..••..•.•••
TABSIM, H 400 ••••..•.••••..••
TABSIM A and B, H 200 Series •••.•
TAB SOL, GE 215/225/235 .•.•.•••
tabulations, reports •....••••••••
TAC, P 2000 . • . . . • . . . • . . • . . • .
. take-up drive, input-output .••••••.
tally deSignators, GE 600 Series •••.
tally register ..•.•.•..•••••••••
tape, chadless .•.••.••.••.•••.
tape, dimensions ••••..•..••.••••
tape, magnetic, comparison chart ••.
Tape Basic Programming Support
mM System/360 •.•••.•••••.••
Tape Compare Program, RCA 3301 ••
Tape Copy Program, RCA 3301 ...••
Tape/Disc Operating System,
RCA Spectra 70 .•.••••••••••••
Tape Handling Routine A (THOR)
H 200 Series •••••••••••••••••
Tape I/O A and B, H 200 Series •••••
Tape I/o Editors, H 400 ••••.•••••
Tape Intermix Feature .••••••••••
Tape Merge 30, RCA 301 .••..•.••
Tape Operating System,
GE 400 Series •••....••••.••.•
Tape Operating System, RCA Spectra
70 . . . • . . • . • • • . . • . • . . . . . • • .
Tape Program Transcriber,
RCA 301 . • • • . • • . . . . . • • • • . • .
Tape Report Program Generator,
IBM 1401 .••••••...•.•.••..•
Tape Resident Operating System Mod 1, H 200 Series .•.•••• , •••
Tape Sort, UNIVAC 1050 ..•••..•.
Tape Sort 31, RCA 301 ••.••••••.•
Tape Sort Generator, NCR 315 •••••
Tape Sort J, H 200 Series •••.••.••
Tape Sort/Merge, mM System/360 .,
9/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
tape-swapping control •••••••••••
target computer, configuration •••••
target computer overflow,
translation . • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • • •
target computer allocation, process
oriented language .••••••••••••
target computer environment,
process oriented language .•••••••
task, RCA 3301 ••••.•.••.••••••
task management, mM System/360 •.•
Task Status Index, mM System/360 •.
tasks, standard .••••.•.•••••••.
TDOS, RCA Spectra 70 •..••••.••.
Telegraph Input-Output Feature .••••
Teletype BRPE Paper Tape Punch •••
030
340041.13
070.63
23:100.3
710:151.16
:200
:040.31
15:010
4:160.363
4:170.41
15:010.5
:070.445
Teletype Inquiry System, NCR 315 .••
:040.447
Teletype Printer, Model 28 •.••..••
417:151.22
Telex Mass Memory System,
GE 225 ..•••••••.•••.•.•.••
temperature ranges, phYSical
characteristics . • . . • • . • . • • • • • •
Terminal Command Language,
mM System/360 •••.•••••.•••.
terminal eqUipment, data communications .••••.••••.•.•••.•••••
test, interrupt ..••. , . • • . • . • . . .
:160.363
:050.218
4:050.426
:050.426
501:151. 23
510:151.14
321:161.14
4:150.14
651:171
651:184
:070.214
340:051. 123
4:050.415
4:070.221
:040.223
23:040.300
test access lock . • . • . . . • • . . . • • .
test busy . . • . . . . . . . . , ••..•.••
Test Data Distribution Program,
RCA 3301 . • . • . . . . . . • • • . . . . • •
test disabled • . • . • . • . . • • . • . . • . .
test end value . . . . . • . . • " •..••••
Test for Overflow, LGP-30 ••..••••
test index, instructions ...•.••••.
test instruction . . . . . . • • • . • . . • . .
testable condition . . • . . . • . . . . . . .
testable condition, internal
storage .•.•••••••••..•...••
Testing and Operating System,
mM 7080 .••.•••.••.• , •••.•.
TESTRAN, IBM System/360 .••••••
Test Translator (TESTRAN),
IBM System/360 .•.•••.•••••..
tetrads, UNIVAC 1050 •••..•••.••
Thin-Film Memory, NCR 315 RMC ..•
Thin-Film Memory, UNIVAC 1107 ..•
THOR, H 200 Series .•.••• , •.•••
three-address instructions,
B 100/200/300 Series ••.••.•....
time, access .•..••••.•.•••.••
time, access, internal storage . . . . .
time, cycle . . . • . . . . • . • • • . . . • •
time, instruction, central
processor ..•••.•••.•..••.••
time, processor tasks ••.•.•.. , ••
time, routine, loading .••••••• ; ••
time, stop-start . • • . . • . • . • . • . . •
time, transfer . • . . . • • • • . . • • . . •
time, translation, program
translator .•.••.•.••.•••..••
time, waiting . • • . • . . . • . • . • . • • •
420:193.122
703:151. 17
703:151. 17
710:192
510:151.16
510:151.17
501:151.17
410:092.4
411:092.4
415:092.12
701:151.13
330:191
710:192
701:192.12
401:151.14
510:192.121
777:151.13
701:151.13
601:151.13
510:193.121
420:153.13
Time SequenCing, PB 250 . • • . . . . • .
A
4:190.322
:160.84
4:180.7
:160.9
:160.84
703:191. 12
420:191.122
427:191.12
4:050.4
710:192
408:103.12
244:072
502:072
503:072
770:074
784:076
601:105
602:011. 103
531:082
784:061. 13
321:042
:210
427:161.126
23:100.41
4:040.446
4:050.415
4:040.448
4:040.444
4:070.444
703:151.17
4:040.448
4:050.239
352:051.12
:·050.2395
4:050;415
:070.56
:040 .. 448
417:151. 17
420:151.1'1
420:151.17
777:051.12
603:041.13
784:042
510:151. 16
201:051
4:040.531
:040.5
4:040.531
:050.41
:050.42
:190.81
:070.622
:040.531
:180.52
4:040.29
4:040.53
631:051.12
(Contd. )
AUERBACfl
'"
,/'-----.
GENERAL INDEX
2:100.037
time-sharing .••••..••.••.•.••
time-sharing, programmed . • . . . . • .
Time-Sharing Assembler,
IBM System/360 .•.••.•••.•..•
Time-Sharing Monitor, IBM
System/360 ••••.•.••••••..••
Time-Sharing Operating System,
IBM System/360 ..•••..••...••
time-slice, IBM System/360 . . . . . . .
Timer, Interval, IBM 7070/7074 .•••
timing basis, generalized file
processing, system performance
timing basis, matrix inversion,
system performance . . . . • • . • .
timing basis, sorting, system
performance . • . . • . . . . • • • • . .
timing conflict, check . • . . . • . . . • •
timing conflict, input-output ..•••.•
timing track, input-output . . . . • . . .
TIPTOP 1 and lA, H 200 Series .•..•
TIPTOP II and III, H 200 Series .•.••
TOPS, IBM 7080 .•.•....••••.••
TOPS II, P 2000 .••••••..••••.•
TOS, RCA Spectra 70 ..••.•••••••
TOS/TDOS Assembler, RCA
Spectra 70 . . . • • . . . • . . • • • • . . •
TOS/TDOS COBOL, RCA Spectra 70 ••
TOS/TDOS FORTRAN IV, RCA
Spectra 70 . • • . . . . • . • • . . . • • . •
TOS/TDOS Report Program Generator, RCA Spectra 70 . • . . . • . . . • .
TOS/TDOS Sort/Merge Generator,
RCA Spectra 70 . . • . . . . . . • . . • . .
TOS/TDOS Utility Programs, RCA
Spectra 70 . • . . . . • . . . . . . • • • .
Total Operating System, TOPS .••.
trace, object program . • . . . • . . • • .
trace facilities . • . . . . . . . . . . . . • .
trace routine . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • .
tracing .•.••••....•..•..•.••
tracing, IBM 1620 ..•••.•.••.•••
tracing, IBM 1620 FORTRAN .•.••.
tracing, IBM 1620 FORTRAN II ..•..
track ••.•••...••.••.•..••••.
track, external storage, inputoutput •..•..•..•.•..••.•.••
track arrangement, magnetic tape .••
track arrangement, paper tape .•.•.
Track Record feature, IBM 1311 ..••
tractor, push and pull . . . • . . • . . • •
Transacter System . . • . . . . . . • . . . .
I
\
transaction recording .' . . • . . • . • • . .
transcription, data, problem
oriented facilities . • . . . . • • . • . • .
transcription routine .••...•.•.••
transfer, data, control, inputoutput . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . • .
transfer, data, instruction list .•.
transfer, table control, internal
storage ••.••••...•••...••••
transfer control, internal storage .
transfer error . • . . . . • . • • • . . . • .
4:110.14
4:110.17
427:161.121
427:191
427:191
427:191.12
403:051.12
405:051.12
:200.113
:200.312
:200.213
4:040.8
4:070.8
:070.8
:070.324
510:151. 17
510:152.17
417:151.17
651:162
651:182
651:192
710:192
710:172
710:165
710:162
710:152.14
710:152.13
710:152.15
651:162
651:172
651:182
:180.451
:190.51
:170.67
4:190.511
412:191. 511
412:183.12
412:184.12
4:070.24
:070.324
:090.324
:070.324
401:043.13
414:042.13
415:042.13
4:070.211
23:080.71
23:080.900
23:080.3
:150.15
4:150.14
:070.44
:120
:040.447
:040.44
4:040.448
transfer rate, effective .•.•••.•••
transfer rate, effective, internal
storage . . . . • . • • • • . • . . . . . . . .
transfer rate, potential, internal
storage ••.••••••.•••••••.••
transfer time ••••.••••.•...•••
transfer to another language,
process oriented language •••.••••
transient display . . . . . . . • • . • . • • .
Transitional Monitor J, H 200 Series •
translate, code, input-output . • . . . • .
translate code, operations,
central processor • . . . • . • . . . . . •
Translate feature, IBM 1440 . . . . . . •
Translate feature, UNIVAC 1004 .•••
translate mode, program translator ••
translating computer . • . . . . . . . . . •
translating computer configuration
translating procedure, program
translator . • • . • . . • . • . . . . . . . .
translation, automatic code . . • . . . . •
translation, check only •.•.•..•..•
translation, code . . • . . . . • . . • • • . •
translation, codes, process
oriented language ..•...•..••••
translation documentation . . • • • • • • •
translation instruction .•.••..••••
translation routine, code . . . . • • . . •
translation time, program
translator . . . . • . . . • . . . . • . . • .
translator, alternative . . . . • . . . . . .
translator, alternative, program
translator . • . • . . . . • • • . . . • . . .
translator, program .•.••.•••.•••
translator control, machine
oriented language .•••..•.•.••.
translator control statements ...•.•
translator control, process
oriented language . • • . . . . . . . • . .
translator environment, process
oriented language . . • . . . • . • . . • .
transmitting data collection systems,
comparison chart . . . . . • • . . • • . •
TRIM, GE 215/225/235 . . . . • . . . . •
truncation . • • . . • • . . . . • • . . . . • .
truncation, data operations,
language . . • . . • . . . . . • . .
truncation, move . . . • • . . • . .
type, data, machine oriented
language . • • . . . • . • . • . . . • . . . .
type, data structure . • . . . . • • . . • . .
4:040.73
:040.73
:040.29
4:040.531
:160.81
4:060.3
510:193. 122
:070.33
:070.53
:050.215
414:051. 12
770:051. 123
770:072.12
:180.421
4:180.8
:160.83
:180.61
:180.4
:070.53
:180.431
:050.214
:160.448
4:160.85
4:070.53
4:170.64
:180.52
4:180.8
:180.8
:180
:170.54
4:160.242
:160.8
:160.83
23:080.900
321:151.17
4:160.414
4:160.434
4:160.445
:170.442
:020.2
U
UBC, P 2000 .••••.•.••••••..•
UMAC, RCA 301 . . • . • . . • • . . • . . •
unblocking ••••..•••••.•...•.•
unblocking control .••...•••••.••
unblocking control, routine ...••..•
unblocking facilities, language .•..•.
Unbuffered Inquiry Adapter,
NCR 315-100 . • . . . • . . • . . • . . • •
unconditional jump, process
oriented language .•.••....•••.
underflow .•..•.•••••...•.••.
underpunched holes, data code ..•••.
Universal Buffer Controller,
P 2000 . . • • • . • . • • . . . . . • • . . • •
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.
651:102
701:162
701:183
4:160.329
4:190.1
4:170.65
4:160.45
602:071
:160.512
4:050.5
4:140.23
651:102
9/66
2: 100; 038
Uniservo II, SS 80/90 ••••••••••••
Uniservo nA Magnetic Tape Unit
Uniservo IIA Synchronizer ••••••••
Uniservo nIA Magnetic Tape Unit .•••
Uniservo IlIA Synchronizer ••.•••••
Uniservo mc Magnetic Tape Units .••
Uniservo IIIC Synchronizer •••••••.
Uniservo IVC Magnetic Tape Unit •.••
Uniservq VIC Magnetic Tape Unit .•..
Uniservo VIIIC Magnetic Tape Unit ••.
unit, arithmetic . • . . . • . • • . • . • • .
Unit Demand Flag, NCR 315 •...••.
UNIVAC 1/11 Simulator Program,
UNIVAC Ill •••..••..•.•••••••
UNIVAC III ..••••.•..••.•••...
UNIVAC III Card Punch
Synchronizer ..•.••••.•.•••..
UNIVAC III Card Reader
Synchronizer . . • . . . . • . . . • . • • •
UNIVAC III Paper Tape Unit •••.•••
UNIVAC 418 ..••••••••••••••••
UNIVAC 418 Central Processor •••••
UNIVAC 490 .•••••.•••••••••••
UNIVAC 490 Series .•••.••••••••
UNIVAC 491 .•..•.••••...•••.•
UNIVAC 492 . . • . • . • . . • . . . . . • . •
UNIVAC 494 •.•••..••..••.••.•
UNIVAC 494 Assembly System •.•••.
UNIVAC 600 Card Punch •.••.•..••
UNIVAC 704 Auxiliary Card Reader ••
UNIVAC 706 Card Reader ••••••••
UNIVAC 751 Printer . . • . . • • . . . . •
UNIVAC 755 Printer .•.•.•.•.•••
UNIVAC 857 Uniservo Magnetic
Tape Unit ••.••.••.•.••..•••.
UNIVAC 902 Paper Tape Reader .•..
UNIVAC 1004 Adapter, UNIVAC
1050 ••...••.••.•...••.••.•
UNIVAC 1004 I ...•.••..•.••.••
UNIVAC 1004 II . . . • • . • . . • • . . • • •
UNIVAC 1004 III ..••...••••••••
UNIVAC 1004 Card Processor .••.•.
UNIVAC 1004 Card Reader ...•••.•
UNIVAC 1004 Magnetic Tape
Processor .••••.•.••••••••..
UNIVAC 1004 Printer ..•.••.••.••
UNIVAC 1050 .•.••.••.•••.••••
UNIVAC 1050 COBOL .•••••.••.••
UNIVAC 1050 Console ..••••.••••
UNIVAC 1050 FORTRAN ..••••••••
UNIVAC 1050 Model nI Central
Processor ..•••..•••••.••..•
UNIVAc 1050 Model IV Cenfral
Processor ••..••••••••••••••
UNIVAC 1107 ••.••..•..•••••.•
UNIVAC 1108 ••..•••••••••••••
UNIVAC 1108 ALGOL ..•••.••••••
UNIVAC 1108 Assembler .••••••••
UNIVAC 1108 BEEF .•.•.•..•••••
UNIVAC 1108 Central Processor ••••
UNIVAC 1108 COBOL ..•.••.•••••
UNIVAC 1108 Executive
System
.
.,
9/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7711091
774:092
784:091
800:092
774:092.4
774:091
777:091
784:092
.800:093
77.4:091. 4
774:093
784:093
774:093.4
777:092
777:093
785:091
800:091
785:091
800:091
:050
601:051.12
UNIVAC 1108 FORTRAN .•••••••••
UNIVAC 1108 Sort/Merge .••••••••
UNIVAC 2009 Card Punch .••••••••
UNIVAC 2011 Card Punch .••••••••
UNIVAC 4121 Arithmetic and
Program Control ••.•••••••••••
UNIVAC .4122 Core Storage .•••••••
UNIVAC 4124 Console .•.•.••••••
UNIVAC 4127 80-Column Card Punch
UNIVAC .4133 80-Column Card
Reader ..•••••..••.••••••••
UNIVAC 4152 High Speed Printer •••.
UNIVAC 4182 90-Column Card Reader.
UNIVAC .4183 90-Column Card Punch
UNIVAC 4209 Uniservo nIA Magnetic
Tape Unit ••...•.•••.•••.•.••
UNIVAC 7200 Central Computer ••••.
UNIVAC 7223 Card Reader ••.•••••
UNIVAC 7224 Card Punch .••.••.••
UNIVAC 7236 Uniservo I1IC
Magnetic Tape Unit •••.••••••..
UNIVAC 7242 Uniservo IIA Magnetic
Tape Unit ••..•••..•...••••••
UNIVAC 7289 Uniservo IlIA
Magnetic Tape Unit •.•• . . • • • . • •
UNIVAC 7418 High Speed Printer ••••
UNIVAC 7423 Paper Tape Subsystem ••
774:151.11
774:
774:072.4
77.4:071. 4
774:073
790:
790:051
801:
800:
802:
802:
804:
804:191. 127
800:072
770:071
800:071
800:081
800:081
UNIVAC 7432 FH-880 Magnetic
Drum .•••••.•.•••.•••.••••
UNIVAC 7911 Card Punching
Printer .•.••••...•....••.••
UNIVAC 7912 High Speed Printer •..•
UNIVAC 7914 Synchronizer .••.•.••
UNIVAC 7915 Uniservo Magnetic
Tape Unit •.••••••.•..••••.••
UNIVAC 7935 High Speed Reader ••••
UNIVAC 7936 Read Punch .•••.•..•
UNIVAC 7945 High Speed Reader ••••
UNIVAC 7946 Read Punch .•••.•••.
UNIVAC 7957 RANDEX Drum
Storage •••••••••••••••.•••.
UNIVAC 7966 RANDEXDrum Storage.
UNIVAC 7967 RANDEX Drum Storage .
UNIVAC 8121 Printer •.••..••••.•
UNIVAC 9000 Series .•....•••••••
UNIVAC 9200 ••..•..•••.•••.••
UNIVAC 9300 •••••••••••••••••
UNIVAC Communication Terminal
Module Controller •••.••••.••.•
770:091
770:074
777:102
770:
770:
770:
770:
770:071
UNIVAC Communication Terminal
Synchronous . • . . . ; •...••..••.
770:
770:081
777:
777:161
777:061
777:162
UNIVAC Data Communications
Subsystems . . . • . . • • . • . . • . . • .
UNIVAC
Type 1
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
Type 2
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
777:051
777:052
784:
785:
785:163
785:171
785:151.17
785:051
785:161
785:191
F0585 Data Line Terminal,
.................... .
F0606 Paper Tape Punch .•.
F0611 Data Line Terminal,
••••••.••••.••.•.••.•
Fastrand MasS Storage . . • . .
Fastrand II Mass Storage .••
UNIVAC FH-220 Magnetic Drum
UNIVAC FH-330 Magnetic Drum
UNIVAC FH -432 Magnetic Drum
UNIVAC FH-880 Magnetic Drum
A
785:162
785:151.13
770:072
770:072
774:051
77.4:041
774:061
774:072
774:071
774:081
774:071
774:072
774:091
784:051
784:071
784:072
784:093
784:091
784:092
784:081
784:075
784:076
784:043
771:082
771:081
771:ill
771:091
771:071
771:072
771:071
771:072
771:072
771:043
771:043
771:043
800:081
810:
810:
ino:
785:102
800:101
785:102
800:101
785:102
800:101
770:101
770:074
770:102
790:045
785:044
800:045
790:042
790:043
785:042
800:043
790:044
800:042
(Contd.)
AUERBACH
'"
GENERAL INDEX
2: tOO. 039
UNIVAC FH-1782 Magnetic Drum .••
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
Readatron optical scanner ••
S-4 .••••.•••.•.••••.
SS 80/90 ••••••.••.••••
X-6 ••••••.••.•••••••
UNIVAC Word Terminal
Synchronous • . . . . . • . .
785:043
800:044
23:020.910
771:001
771:
771:171
771:181
785:102
800:101
Universal Character Set feature,
IBM System/360 •..•••..•.••.
universal identifier .••.•.••..•.
Universal Interconnecting Devices,
NCR 315 •...•••••..••.•••.
universality concept, IBM
System/360 ..•••••.••••••••
universal label, machine
oriented language .••.••.•...•
universal name . . . . . . . • . . • . • • •
universal name, process oriented
language . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . •
University Computer Centers,
Directory . . . . . . . . • . . • . • • • • •
unload control ••....•••.•..••.
unload verb .•••.•.•••.•..•••
unloading, input-output •••.•.•.••
unoptimized, program translator .••
unoptimized time, program
translator .••....•.••.•••..
unpacking ....•..•.•.••.•••••
unpacking records .•..•.•.•••••
unsequenced entries, translation .••
unsigned number . . . . . • . • • • . • • .
unsupervised I/O operations,
RCA Spectra 70 • • • . • • . • . . • • • .
unthread tape •..••.•..•..•••.
until clause, language .•.•••.•..
updating, file . . . . . . . . • • . • • . • •
updating mode, program translator ..
updating programs •••..•.•••••.
upper curtate .•••••...•..•.••
Uptime card reader, P 2000 ..•.••
usage, data .••.•....••••..••
usage, procedure .•.•••.••••••
usage statements, process
oriented language. • • • • . • • • . • • •
U. S. Army, charting technique,
analysis techniques .••••..•••.
User Mode, GE 400 Series .•.••••
Users' Guide ..•..••.•••••••.
utility routine, problem
oriented language . . . . • • . . • . • .
utility routines ••.•..••.•.•••.
UTMOST, UNIVAC III . . . . . • . • . .
420:081.12
4:160.27
601:107
420:011.1
:170.32
4:160.535
21:035
4:070.55
4:160.45
:070.73
:180.432
:180.523
4:160.93
4:160.329
4:180.7
4:160.349
I
\
wait on interlock .••••••.•.••••.
waiting time . . . . • • . . . . • • • • . . . •
weight, unit, phYSical
characteristics ••...•••.•••.••
What It Is - How to Use It . . . . . . . .
while operator, language . . • . • . . • .
width, external storage, input-output •
width, unit, physical characteristics .
WIZ-II, GE 215/225/235 .•.••..•••
word, arrangement, language . • . . . .
word, key, language .•••••.•.•••
Word Mode, B 5500 ..•••.••••.••
Word Processor, H 8200 .••.•••••
working areas, machine oriented
language .••.•...•.•.
working storage . . • . • . • . . .
working storage, operating
environment . • . . • . . • . . . •
workload, data processing
analysis techniques . . • . . . .
"wrap-around" addreSSing,
IBM 1620 . • . . • • • . . . . . • •
712:111
4:070.55
4:160.564
:150.16
:180.425
:180.42
4:070.33
651:073
4:160.82
4:160.82
writer, report, routine
:160.821
x
15:010.514
330:051.12
4:001. 001
:150.1
4:150.1
774:172
:160.431
4:160.241
710:104
703:106
710:106
701:103
:060.54
23:100.52
:040.243
4:040.243
201:031. 500
w
:160.271
V
variable, conditional, process
oriented language .•.••.•••.••
variable, label, machine oriented
language .•.•..•.•••..••.••
variable block size, process
oriented language . . . . • • . • . . • .
Variable Length Field Processor,
H 8200 ...••.•..••.•••••.•.
variable record size, process
oriented language .•..••••••.•
variable-size operands •••••.••.•
variation ...•.••.••.•••.••.•
variation, access time
.•••••••
verb, computation, process
oriented language •••••••••••••
verb, language •.•••.••.•••••••
Video Data Terminal, RCA
Spectra 70 ••.••••••••••••.••
Video Display Devices, RCA 3301 .•••
Videoscan Document Reader, RcA
Spectra 70 ••.•.•••••••••.•••
Videoscan Document Reader, RCA
301 ••.•...•••••••••••.•.••
view, operator, console .•••••••••
voice-band communications
facilities .•.••.•••••.•.••.••
volatile, data .••.••••••.••..••
volatile storage •..•.•...•••.••
VRC (Visible Record Computer) • . . . .
Xl, X2, X3, X4 Disc System,
P 2000 •••••.•.•••...•.
X-6 Language, SS 80/90 .•.••
X-6 Translator, SS 80/90 ..•.
XS3 Code, SS 80/90 ..•..••.
Xerox master, input-output .•.
X-y plotters, comparison chart .••.•
X-Y plotter, Special Report . . • . . . •
4:040.448
4:040.29
4:040.531
:210
1:010
4:160.564
:070.351
:210
321:163
321:183
4:160.93
4:160.241
203:051
518:051. 121
:170.42
4:040.1
:190.312
15:010.61
412:041.13
413:041. 13
4:150.14
653:042
771:042
771:181
771:142
:070.233
23:070.900
23:070
y
:160.354
yoke •.
4:040.51
4:070.24
:170.326
:160.332
518:051.12
:160.331
4:050.223
4:160.332
:040.532
z
zero, divisor procedure
zero, minus . . . • . . • . . . . • •
zero, plus . . . . . • • . . . • • . • . • . . •
zero divisor .•••.•..•••...••••
zero operand, central processor .•••
ZOOM, GE 215/225/235 •••••..•••
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
4:190.44
4:050.222
4:050.222
4:050.5
:050.222
321:172
9/66
USERS' GUIDE
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U.
s.
A.
4:001.001
STANDARD
REPORTS
DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
USERS' GUIDE AND ALL COMPUTER SYSTEM REPORTS
Following is the complete plan of organization for the Users' Guide
and each Computer System Report
INTRODUCTION
:010
DATA STRUCTURE.
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of location
Size
..
Purpose or Use
DATA FORMATS
Type of Data
Representation
:020
:020.1
:020.11
:020.12
:020.13
:020.2
:020.21
:020.22
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
:030
INTERNAL STORAGE
GENERAL.
Identity
Basic Use
Description
Availability
First Delivery
Reserved Storage
PHYSICAL FORM
Storage Medium
Physical Dimensions
Magnetic core type storage
Drum or Disc
Tape or Card
Storage phenomenon
Recording Permanence
Data erasable by instructions
Data regenerated constantly .
Data volatile
..
Data permanent
Storage changeable. .
Data volume per ban of tracks.
Bands per physical unit
Interleaving Levels
Access Techniques
Recording method
Reading method
Type of access
Potential Transfer Rates
Peak bit rates ..
:040
:040.1
:040.11
:040.12
:040.13
:040.14
:040.15
:040.16
:040.2
:040.21
:040.22
:040.221
:040.222
:040.223
:040.23
:040.24
:040.241
:040.242
:040.243
:040.244
:040.245
:040.25
:040.26
:040.27
:040.28
:040.281
:040.282
:040.283
:040.29
:040.291
©
INTERNAL STORAGE (Contd.)
DATA CAPACITY.
. ...
Module and System Sizes
Rules for Combining Modules
CONTROLLER
Identity
..
. .
Connection to System
On-Line
..
Off-Line
Connection to Device
Device per controller
Restrictions
..
Data Transfer Control.
Size of load
Input-Output area
Input-Output area access
Input-Output area lockout
Synchronization . .
Synchronizing aids .
Table control
Testable conditions
ACCESS TIMING
Arrangement of Heads
Number of Stacks
Stack movement
Stacks that can access any
particular location . .
Relationship between stacks
and locations
....
Simultaneous Operations
Access Time Parameters and
Variations
For uniform access
Variation in access time.
CHANGEABLE STORAGE .
Cartridges
... .
Cartridge capacity .
Cartridges per module.
Interchangeable
Loading Convenience
Possible loading
Method of loading
Approximate change time
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
:040.3
:040.31
:040.32
:040.4
:040.41
:040.42
:040.421
:040.422
:040.43
:040.431
:040.432
:040.44
:040.441
:040.442
:040.443
:040.444
:040.445
:040.446
:040.447
:040.448
:040.5
:040.51
:040.511
:040.512
:040.513
:040.515
:040.52
:040.53
:040.531
:040.532
:040.6
:040.61
:040.611
:040.612
:040.613
:040.62
:040.621
:040.622
:040.623
4/62
4:001.002
DETAILED TABLE OF
INTERNAL STORAGE (CONTO.)
CHANGEABLE STORAGE (CONTO.)
Loading Convenience (Contd.)
Bulk loading . . . .
:040.624
AUXILIARY STORAGE
PERFORMANCE
:040.7
Data Transfer . . . .
:040.71
Transfer Load-Size .
:040.72
Effective Transfer Rate .
:040.73
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION :040.8
CENTRAL PROCESSOR.
GENERAL ..
Identity
Description
Availability
First Delivery .
PROCESSING FACILITIES
Operations and Operands
Fixed point . .
Floating point
Boolean . . . .
Comparison .
Code translation
Radix conversion.
Edit format
Table look-up . .
Others . . . . . .
Special Cases of Operands
Negative numbers . . . .
Zero . . . . . . . . . . .
Operand size determination
Instruction Formats . .
Instruction structure .
Instruction layout "
Instruction parts
Basic address structure
Literals . . . . . . . .
Directly addressed operands
Internal Storage Type . . .
Increased address capacity
Address indexing
Number of methods .
Names . . . . . .
Indexing rule . . . .
Index specification .
Number of potential indexers
Addresses that can be indexed
Cumulative indexing . . .
Combined index and step.
Indirect addressing
Recursive .
Desigf,ltion
Control . . .
Indexing with indirect
addressing . . . . .
4/62
:050
:050.1
:050.11
:050.12
:050.13
:050.14
:050.2
:050.21
:050.211
:050.212
:050.213
:050.214
:050.215
:050.216
:050.217
:050.218
:050.219
:050.22
:050.221
:050.222
:050.223
:050.23
:050.231
:050.232
:050.233
:050.234
:050.235
:050.236
:050.2361
:050.2362
:050.237
:050.2371
:050.2372
:050.2373
:050.2374
:050.2375
:050.2376
:050.2377
:050.2378
:050.238
:050.2381
:050.2382
:050.2383
:050.2384
CO~TENTS
CENTRAL PROCESSOR (CONTO.)
PROCESSING FACILITIES (CONTO.)
Stepping . . . . . . . . . .
:050. 239
:050.2391
Specification of .increment
Increment sign. .
:050.2392
Size of increment. . . .
:050.2393
End value . . . . . . . .
:050.2394
Combined step and test.
:050.2395
Special Processor Storage.
:050.24
Category of storage . . .
':050.241
Category of storage . . .
:050. 242
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES:050. 3
Instruction Sequencing. . . . . :050.31
Number of sequence control
facilities . . .
:050.311
Arrangement. . . . . . . . . :050.312
Precedence rule . . . . . . . :050.313
Special sub-sequence counters :050.314
Sequence control step size.
:050.315
Accessibility to routines
:050.316
Permanent or optional
modifier . . .
:050.317
Look - Ahead . . .
:050.32
Length of queue
:050.321
Interruption . . .
:050.33
Possible causes
:050.331
Program control
:050.332
Operator control .
:050.333
Interruption conditions.
:050.334
Interruption process .
:050.335
Control methods .
:050.336
Multi -running . . . . .
:050.34
Method of control . .
:050.341
.Maximum number of
programs . . . . .
:050.342
Precedence rules. .
:050.343
Program protection
:050.344
MUlti-sequencing .
:050.35
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
:050.4
Instruction Times
:050.41
Fixed point . . . .
:050.411
Floating point . .
:050.412
Additional allowance for
Indexing . . . . .
:050.413
Control . . . . .
:050.414
Counter control.
:050.415
Edit
:050.416
Convert . . . . .
:050.417
Shift . . . . . .
:050.418
Processor Performance
In /.L secs . . . . . . •
:050.42
For random addresses.
:050.421
For arrays of data . . .
:050.422
Branch based on comparison :050.423
Switching. . . . . . . . . • :050.424
Format control per character: 050. 425
!
~
'IA-U-ER-BA-CH--=-{
_~J
4:001.003
USERS' GUIDE AND ALL COMPUTER SYSTEM REPORTS
CENTRAL PROCESSOR (CONTD.)
PROCESSOR SPEEDS (CONTD.)
Table look up per
:050.426
comparison.
:050.427
Bit indicators.
Moving.
:050.428
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION:050. 5
"- ,
CONSOLE .
GENERAL
Identity .
Associated Units
Permanent.
Optional.
Description
CONTROLS
Power
Connections .
Stops and Restarts.
Stepping
Resets
Loading
Special .
DISPLAY.
Alarms.
Conditions
Control Registers
Storage.
ENTRY OF DATA.
Into Control Registers
Into Storage .
CONVENIENCES
Communication
Clock.
Desk Space
View.
INPUT- OUTPUT UNIT
Identity .
Description .
Performance
:060
:060.1
:060.11
:060.12
:060.121
:060.122
:060.13
:060.2
:060.21
:060.22
:060.23
:060.24
:060.25
:060.26
:060.27
:060.3
:060.31
:060.32
:060.33
:060.34
:060.4
:060.41
:060.42
:060.5
:060.51
:060.52
:060.53
:060.54
:060.6
:060.61
:060.62
:060.63
INPUT - OUTPUT: PUNCHED TAPE
AND CARD.
:070
GENERAL
:070.1
:070.11
Identity .
Description
:070.12
Availability
:070.13
First Delivery .
:070.14
:070.2
PHYSICAL FORM
Drive Mechanism
:070.21
Drive past the head .
:070.211
Reservoirs
:070.212
Feed drive.
:070.213
Take-up drive
:070.214
©
INPUT-OUTPUT: PUNCHED TAPE
AND CARD (CONTD. )
PHYSICAL FORM (CONTD. )
Sensing and Recording Systems
Recording system.
Sensing system
Common system
Multiple Copies
Maximum number
Types of master
Arrangement of Heads
Range of Symbols
EXTERNAL STORAGE.
Form of Storage .
Medium.
Phenomenon
Positional Arrangement.
Serial by.
Parallel by
Bands.
Track use
Row use.
Coding
Format Compatibility
Physical Dimensions
Over-all width .
Length
Maximum margins
CONTROLLER
Identity .
Connection to System
On-line
Off-line .
Connection to Device .
Devices pet controller
Restrictions .
Data Transfer Control
Size of load
Input- output areas
Input-output area access
Input- output area lockout
Table control.
Synchroniza tion
Synchronizing aids
PROGRAM FACILITIES
AVAILABLE.
Blocks
Size of block .
Block demarcation
Input-Output Operations
Input
Output
Stepping.
Skipping.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
:070.22
:070.221
:070.222
:070.223
:070.23
:070.231
:070.232
:070.24
:070.25
:070.3
:070.31
:070.311
:070.312
:070.32
:070.321
:-070.322
:070.323
:070.324
:070.325
:070.33
:070.34
:070.35
:070.351
:070.352
:070.353
:070.4
:070.41
:070.42
:070.421
:070.422
:070.43
:070.431
:070.432
:070.44
:070.441
:070.442
:070.443
:070.444
:070.445
:070.446
:070.447
:070.5
:070.51
:070.511
:070.512
:070.52
:070.521
:070.522
:070.523
:070.524
4/62
4:001.004
DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: PUNCHED TAPE
AND CARD (CONTD.)
PROGRAM FACILITIES
AVAILABLE (CONTD.)
Input-Output Operations (Contd.)
Marking. . . .
:070. 525
Searching . . .
:070.526
Code Translation
:070.53
Format Control .
:070.54
Control Operations
:070.55
Testable Conditions
:070.56
PERFORMANCE.
:070.6
Conditions . . . .
:070.61
Speeds . . . . . .
:070.62
Nominal or peak speed
:070.621
Important parameters
:070.622
Overhead . . . .
:070.623
Effective speeds . . .
:070.624
Demands on System . .
:070.63
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
:070.7
Adjustments. . . . .
:070.71
Other Controls . . .
:070.72
Loading and Unloading
:070.73
Volumes handled. .
:070.731
Replenislunent time
:070.732
Adjustment time . .
:070.733
Optimum reloading period.
:070.734
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION :070.8
INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTERS
:120
:120.1
:120.2
:120.3
:120.4
:120.5
:120.6
:120.7
CODING SPEClMAN
:130
DATA CODES . . .
USE OF CODE . .
STRUCTURE OF CODE
Character Size
Character Structure
Character Code . .
:140
:140.1
:140.2
:140.21
:140.22
:140.23
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES :150
UTILITY ROUTINES . . . . . : 150. 1
Simulators of Other Computers :150.11
Simulation by Other Computers :150.12
Data Sorting and Merging .
:150.13
Report Writing . .
:150.14
Data Transcription
:150.15
File Maintenance .
:150.16
Other . . . . . . .
:150.17
PROBLEM ORIENTED
LANGUAGES . . .
:150.2
. . :080
INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC
TAPE. . .
4/62
INSTRUCTION LIST.
INSTRUCTION
OPERATION .
ARITHMETIC.
LOGIC . . . .
INPUT-OUTPUT .
AUXILIARY STORAGE.
DATA TRANSFER.
:090
INPUT-OUTPUT: OTHER
(For breakdowns see :070)
:100
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS.
SPECIAL UNITS.
Identity. . . . .' . . .
Description . . . . . .
Independent Operations .
Multiple Data Paths and
Multiplexing . . . .
Partial Overlapping . .
Restricted Operations .
Programmed Time - Sharing
CONFIGURATION CONDITIONS.
CLASSES OF OPERATIONS. .
RULES . . . . . . . . • . .
TABLE OF POSSmLE SETS OF
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . .
:110
:110.1
:110.11
:110.12
:110.13
:110.14
:110.15
:110.16
:110.17
:110.2
:110.3
:110.4
: 110. 5
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
GENERAL
Identity . .
Origin . .
Reference.
Description
Publication Date
PROGRAM STRUCTURE
Divisions . . . . .
Procedure Entities.
Data Entities . . .
Names . . . . . .
Simple name formation
Designators . . . . .
Structure of Data Names
Qualified names
Subscripts. . .
Synonyms . . .
Number of Names
All entities
Procedures
Data . . .
Equipment.
I.------,
AUERBACH / .@!J
:160
:160.1
:160.11
:160.12
:160.13
:160.14
:160.15
:160.2
:160.21
:160.22
:160.23
:160.24
:160.241
:160.242
:160.25
:160.251
:160.252
:160.253
:160.26
:160.261
:160.262
:160.263
:160.264
USERS' GUIDE AND.ALL COMPUTER.SYSTEM REPORTS
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE (CONTD.)
PROGRAM STRUCTURE (CONTD.)
Region of Meaning of Names
:160.27
Universal names
:160.271
Local names. . . . . . .
:160.272
Non-local names. . . . .
:160.273
DATA DESCRIPTION FACILITIES :160. 3
Methods of Direct Data
Description. . . .
:160.31
Concise item picture
;160.311
List by kind
:160.312
Qualify by adjective
:160.313
Qualify by phrase
:160.314
Qualify by ~ode. .
:160.315
Hierarchy by list .
:160.316
Level by indenting
:160.317
Level by cooing
:160.318
Others
:160.319
Files and Reels
:160.32
File labels. .
:160.321
Reel sentinels
:160.322
Records and Blocks
:160.33
Variable record size
:160.331
Variable block size.
:160.332
Record size range .
:160.333
Block size range . .
:160.334
Choice of record size .
:160.335
Choice of block size
:160.336
Sequence control . .
:160.337
In - out error control
:160.338
Blocking control . .
:160.339
Data Items . . . . .
:160.34
Designation of class
:160.341
Possible classes . .
:160.342
Choice of external radix
:160.343
Possible radices
:160.344
Justification .
:160.345
Choice of code
:160.346
Possible codes
:160.347
Item size . .
:160.348
Sign provision
:160.349
Data Values.
:160.35
Constants .
:160.351
Liten :s
:160.352
Figur ives
:160.353
Condil )nal variables
:160.354
Special ~escription Facilities . :160.36
Duplicate format .
:160.361
Re - definition. . . . . . .
:160.362
Table de scription '"
.
:160.363
Other subscriptible entities
:160.364
OPERATION REPERTOIRE .
:160.4
Formulae. . . . .
:160.41
Operator list
:160.411
Operands allowed
:160.412
©
4:001.005
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE (CONTD.)
OPERATION REPERTOIRE (CONTD.)
Formulae (Contd. )
Statement structure.
:160.413
Rounding of results .
:160.414
Special cases
:160.415
Typical examples
:160.416
Operations on Arrays
:160.42
Matrix operations
:160.421
Logical operations
:160.422
Scanning . . . . .
:160.423
Other Computation .
:160.43
Operator list
:160.431
Operands allowed
:160.432
Statement . . . .
:160.433
Rounding of results .
:160.434
Special cases
:160.435
Typical cases . . .
:160.436
Data Movement and Format.
:160.44
Data copy example
:160.441
Levels possible
:160.442
Multiple results .
:160.443
Missing operands
:160.444
Size of operands
:160.445
Editing possible
:160.446
Special moves .
:160.447
Code translation
:160.448
Character manipulation
:160.449
File Manipulation . . .
:160.45
Operating Communication
:160.46
Log of progress . . .
:160.461
Messages to operator .
:160.462
Offer options . . . .
:160.463
Accept option . . . .
:160.464
Object Program Errors
:160.47
PROCEDURE SEQUENCE
CONTROL . . . .
:160.5
Jumps . . . . . . . .
:160.51
Destinations allowed
:160.511
Unconditional jump
:160.512
Switch. . . . .
:160.513
Setting a switch
:160.514
:160.515
Switch on data .
Conditional Procedures.
:160.52
Designators . . . .
:160.521
Simple conditions
:160.522
Conditional relations
:160.523
Variable conditions .
:160.524
Compound Conditionals
:160.525
Alternative designator
:160.526
Condition on alternative .
:160.527
Typical examples.
:160.528
Subroutines
....
:160.53
Designation . . . .
:160.531
Possible subroutines
:160.532
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
8/62
DETAILED TABLEOF CONTENTS
4:001.006
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
PROCEDURE SEQUENCE
CONTROL (CONTD.)
Subroutines (Contd. )
Use in-line in program.
Mechanism ..
Names . . . . . . . . .
Nesting limit . . . . . .
Automatic recursion allowed
Function Definition by
Procedure . . . . .
Designation. . . . .
Level of procedure
Mechanism
Names . . . . . . .
Operand Definition by
Procedure . . . . .
Designation . . . .
Level of procedure.
Mechanism.
Names. : . . . . .
Loop Control
Designation of loop
Control by count . .
Control by step
Control by. condition
Control by list . .
Nesting limit . . . .
Jump out allowed . .
Control variable exit status
EXTENSION OF THE
LANGUAGE . • . .
LffiRARY FACILITIES
Identity . . . . . .
Kinds of Libraries. .
Fixed master. . . .
Expandable master
Private . . . . . . .
Storage Form . . . .
Varieties of Contents
Mechanism . . . . . .
Insertion of new item
Language of new item
Method of call . . .
Types of Routine. . . .
Open routines exist .
Closed routines exist.
Open -cl0sed is variable
TRANSLATOR CONTROL
Transfer to Another Language
Optimizing Information
Statements . . • • . . .
Process usage statements
Data, usage statements.
Translator Environment •
8/62
(CONTD.)
:160.533
:160.534
:160.535
:160.536
:160.537
:160.54
:160.541
:160.542
:160.543
:160.544
:160.55
:160.551
:160.552
:160.553
:160.554
:160.56
:160.561
:160.562
:160.563
:160.564
:160.565
:160.566
:160.567
:160.568
:160.6
:160.7
:160.71
:160.72
:160.721
:160.722
:160.723
:160.73
:160.74
:160.75
:160.751
:160.752
:160.753
:160.76
:160.761
:160.762
:160.763
:160.8
:160.81
:160.81
:160.821
:160.822
:160.83
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE (CONTD.)
TRANSLATOR CONTROL (CONTD. )
Target Computer Environment :·160.84
Program Documentation
Control • • • • • • • • • :160.85
TARGET COMPUTER ALLOCA:160.9
TIoN CONTROL • •
Choice of Storage Level • • • :160.91
:160.92
Address Allocation
Arrangement of Items in Words
in Unpacked Form • • • • :160.93
Assignment of Input-Output
:160.94
Devices • • • •
Input-Output Areas • • • • • :160.95
COBOL • • • • •
•
INTRODUCTION
•
• • •
COMPATffiILlTY
• ••
ELECTIVES • • •
Chapter V. Characters
and Words • • • • •
•
File Description clauses
and/or options • • ••
•
Record Description clauses
and/or options
••••
Verbs • • • • • • • • • • •
Verb options • • • ••
••
Environment Division
options • • • • •
•
Identification Division option •
Special Features • • • • • •
GENERAL DESCRIPTION • . •
General Philosophy Of COBOL
Development • • • • • • •
COBOL System Description ••
General. • • • • . • • • •
Identification Division
•
Environment Division • • •
Data Division • • •
•
Procedure Division.
•
Compatibility.
•
Objectives
• •
History ••
••••
•
Phasing • • •
• •
Maintenance
•••
Acknowledgment
REFERENCES AND
BIBLIOGRAPHY. • • • • •
4:161
4:161.1
4:161.2
4:161. 3
4:161.31
4:161.32
4:161. 33
4:161.34
4:161. 35
4:161. 36
4:161. 37
4:161. 38
4:161.4
4:161.41
4:161.42
4:161.421
4:161.422
4:161.423
4:161.424
4:161.425
4:161.426
4:161. 43
4:161.44
4:161.45
4:161.46
4:161.47
4:161. 9
MACIllNE ORIENTED LANGUAGE
GENERAL. •
Identity •
• • • •
Origin. • •
Reference
:170
:170.1
: 170. 11
:170.12
:170.13
/
4:001.007
USERS' GUIDE AND ALL COMPUTER SYSTEM REPORTS
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE
GENERAL (CONTD.)
Description . . . . .
• •
Publication Date . . .
LANGUAGE. FORMAT.
Diagram . .
Legend . . .
Corrections
Insertions
Deletions
Alterations .
Special Conventions
Compound addresses
Multi-addresses . . .
Literals . . . . . . .
Special coded addresses.
Other
LABELS
General
Maximum number of labell'l
Common label formation rule
Reserved labels .
Other restrictions .
Designators . . . .
Synonyms permitted
Universal Labels . .
Labels for procedure.
Labels for library routines
Labels for constants .
Labels for files . . .
Labels for records
Labeis for variables .
Local Labels. . . . . .
Labels for procedures .
Labels for library routines
Labels for constants . . .
Labels for files
Labels for records .
Labels for variable
DATA . . . . . . . .
Constants . . . . . .
Maximum size constants
Maximum size literals
Working Areas
Data layout
Data type . .
Redefinition .
Input-Output Areas
Data layout
Data type . . . .
PROCEDURES
Direct Operation Codes
Mnemonic
Absolute.
Others
©
(CONTD.)
:170.14
:170.15
:170-.2
:170.21
:170.22
:170.23
:170.231
:170.232
:170.233
:170.24
:170.241
:170.242
:170.243
:170.244
:170.245
:170.3
:170.31
:170.311
:170.312
:170.313
:170.314
:170.315
:170.316
:170.32
:170.321
:170.322
:170.323
:170.324
:170.325
:170.326
:170.33
:170.332
:170.333
:170.334
:170.335
:170.336
:170.337
:170.4
:170.41
:170.411
:170.412
:170.42
:170.421
:170. 42~
:170.423
:170.43
:170.431
:170.432
:170.5
:170.51
:170.511
l170.512
:170.513
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE
PROCEDURES (CONTO. )
Macro-Codes . . .
Number available
Examples .
New macros.
Interludes
Possible roles
Example
Translator Control
Method of control
Allocation counter
Label adjustment.
Annotation. . . .
Other . . . . . .
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
Special Arithmetic.
Facilities . . .
Method of call .
Special Functions
Facilities . .
Method of call
Overlay Control
Facilities . .
Method of call
Data Editing
Radix conversion
Format control
Method of call . .
Input-Output Control
File labels.
Reel labels
Blocking. .
Error control
Method of call
Sorting . . . .
Facilities. .
Method of call
Diagnostics
Dumps
.
Tracers.
Snapshots
LffiRARY FACILITIES.
Identity. . . . . .
Kinds of Libraries .
Fixed master
Expandable master
Private . . . . .
Storage Form . . .
Varieties of Contents
Mechanism . . . . .
Insertion of new item
Language of new item .
Method of call . . . .
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
(CONTD. )
:170.52
:170.521
:170.522
:170.523
:170.53
:170.531
:170.532
:170.54
:170.541
:170.542
:170.543
: 170. 544
: 170. 545
: 170.6
:170.61
:170.611
:170.612
: 170.62
: 170. 621
:170.622
:170.63
:170.631
:170.632
:170.64
:170.641
:170.642
: 170.643
:170.65
: 170. 651
:170.652
:170.653
:170.654
:170.655
: 170. 66
:170.661
:170.662
: 170. 67
:170.671
:170.672
:170.673
:170.7
: 170. 71
: 170. 72
:170.721
:170.722
:170.723
:170.73
:170.74
:170.75
:170.751
:170.752
:170.753
8/62
DI;TAllE[) TABLE OF CONTENTS
4:001.008
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE (CONTD. )
LffiRARY FACILITIES (CONTD.)
Insertion in Program .
:170.76
Open routines exist.
:170.761
Closed routines exist .
:170.762
Open- closed is optional
:170.763
Closed routines appear once . :170.764
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
:170.8
Macros.
:170.81
Pseudos
:170.82
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR
GENERAL
Identity
Description .
Originator
Maintainer
Availability
INPUT .
Language.
Name.
Exemptions
Form.
Input media
Obligatory ordering
Obligatory grouping
Size Limitations .
Maximum number of source
statements .
Maximum size of source
statements .
Maximum number of
data items
Others . .
OUTPUT.
•
Object Program
Language name
Language style .
Output media. .
Conventions
Standard inclusions .
Compatible with
Documentation. . •
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE .
Phases and Passes
Optional Modes
Translate
Transla te and run
Check only
Patching.
Up-dating
Special Features
Alter to check only
Fast unoptimized translate
8/62
:180
:180.1
:180.11
:180.12
:180.13
:180.14
:180.15
:180.2
:180.21
:180.211
:180.212
:180.22
:180.221
:180.222
:180.223
:180.23
:180.231
:180.232
:180.233
:180.234
:180.3
:180.31
:180.311
:180.312
:180.313
:180.32
:180.321
:180.322
:180.33
:180.4
:180.41
:180.42
:180.421
:180.422
:180.423
:180.424
:180.425
:180.43
:180.431
:180.432
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR (CONTD.)
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE (CONTD.)
Special Features (Contd.)
Short translate on restricted
program.
:180.433
:180.44
Bulk Translating.
Program Diagnostics .
:180.45
:180.451
Tracers.
:180.452
Snapshots
:180.453
Dumps
:180.46
Translator Library
:180.461
Identity
:180.462
User restriction
:180.463
Form.
:180.464
Contents
:180.465
Librarianship
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE. :180.5
:180.51
Object Program Space
:180.511
Fixed overhead.
Space required for each
:180.512
input- output file.
•
Approximate expansion of
:180.513
procedures.
Translation Time
:180.52
:180.521
Normal translating.
Checking only . •
:180.522
Unoptimized translating.
:180.523
:180.53
Optimizing Date .
:180.54
Object Program Performance
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS. :180.6
:180.61
Translating Computer
:180.611
Minimum configuration
Larger configuration
:180.612
advantage
:180.62
Target Computer
:180.621
Minimum configuration
:180.622
Usable extra facilities
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION : 180. 7
ALTERNATIVE TRANSLATORS :180.8
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
GENERAL
Identity .
Description
Availability
PROGRAM LOADING
Source of Programs
Libraries
•.
Independents. •
Library Subroutines
Loading Sequence
HARDWARE·ALLOCATION
Storage.
Division of program for
movement
••
•
:190
:190.1
:190.11
:190.12
:190.13
:190.2
:190.21
:190.211
:190.212
:190.22
:190.23
:190.3
:190.31
:190.311
/
USERS' GUIDE AND ALL COMPUTER SYSTEM REPORTS
(
\,,-
4:001.009
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT (CONTD.)
HARDWARE ALLOCATION (CONTD.)
Storage (Contd.)
Occupation of working storage :190.312
Choice of location.
:190.313
Input-Output Units .
:190.32
Initial assignment
:190.321
Alternation • . .
:190.322
Reassignment . .
:190.323
:190.4
RUNNING SUPERVISION
Simultaneous Working
:190.41
Multi-running . . . .
:190.42
Multi-sequencing . .
:190.43
Errors, Checks, and Action
:190.44
Restarts . . . . . . . . .
:190.45
:190.451
Establishing restart points
:190.452
Restarting process . .
:190.5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
Dynamic .
:190.51
:190.511
Tracing . .
:190.512
Snapshots .
:190.52
Post Mortem
:190.6
OPERATOR CONTROL
Signals to Operator. .
:190.61
Decision required by operator :190.611
Action required by operator
:190.612
:190.613
Reporting progress of run.
Operator's Decision
:190.62
Operator's Signals . . • . •
:190.63
Inquiry . . . . . . . . .
:190.631
:190.632
Change of normal progress
LOGGING . . . . .
:190.7
:190.71
Operator Signals. .
Operator Decisions
:190.72
:190.73
Run Progress .
Errors . . . . . .
:190.74
:190.75
Running Times . .
Multi-running Status
:190.76
:190.8
PERFORMANCE . . . .
Program Loading Time .
:190.81
Reserved Equipment .
:190.82
:190.83
Running Overhead . .
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (CONTD.)
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING (CONTD.)
Standard Problem A (Contd.)
Record sizes • . . • • .
:200.111
Figure 1: Files 1 and 2,
Record Layout.
• •• 4:200.111
Figure 2: File 3,
Record Layout •
• 4:200.111
Figure 3: File 4,
• • 4:200.111
Record Layout
:200.112
Computation
4:200.112
Worksheet 1 •
:200.113
Timing basis .
Worksheet 2 •
• 4:200.113
Chart 1: Central Timing
Loops • . • • • • •
4:200.113
Chart 2: Boxes 1 to 5
• 4:200.113
Chart 3: Boxes 6 to 9
• 4:200.113
Chart 4: Boxes 10 to 17. • 4:200.113
4:200.113
Chart 5: Boxes 18 to 23.
Chart 6: Boxes 24 to 31 • • 4:200.113
Chart 7: Boxes 32 to 42 •
4:200.113
4:200.113
Chart 8: Boxes 43 to 48 •
Graph • • • • • • • •
:200.114
Worksheet 3 • . • . •
• 4:200.114
:200.115
Storage space required
4:200.115
Worksheet 4. • •
:200.12
Standard Problem B .
:200.13
Standard Problem C •
:200.14
Standard Problem D •
:200.2
SORTING • • • • •
:200.21
Standard Problem.
:200.211
Record size
Key size ••
:200.212
:200.213
Timing basis
Graph • • •
:200.214
Standard Routines
:200.22
:200.3
MATRIX INVERSION.
:200.31
Standard Problem.
:200.311
Basic parameters
:200.312
Timing basis •
Graph • . • • •
:200.313
Standard Routine •
:200.32
:200
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Introduction • • • . •
• 4:200.01
General Qualifications
4:200.02
Problem Variations ••
• 4:200.03
Installation Configuration •• 4:200.04
4:200.05
Programming Techniques
Operating Delays • •
• 4:200.06
Faults • • . • • • • •
• 4:200.07
4:200.08
Method of Estimating
Summary • • • • • •
4:200.09
GENERALIZED FILE
:200.1
PROCESSING • •
:200.11
Standard Problem A
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL
PROCESSING • • .
: 200.4
Standard Mathematical
Problem A • . • •
:200.41
Input and Output Records •
:200.411
Computation
:200.412
Flow Chart •
4:200.413
4:200.413
Worksheet 5 •
4:200.413
Worksheet 6 •
GENERALIZED STATISTICAL
PROBLEMS • • •
:200.5
Standard Statistical
Problem A •
:200.51
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
8/62
DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
4:001.010
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (CONTD.)
GENERALIZED STATISTICAL
PROBLEMS (CONTD.)
Standard Statistical
Problem A (Contd.)
:200.511
Input Records
:200.512
Computation •
Worksheet 7
4:200.512
Worksheet 8
4:200.512
8/62
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS .
IDENTITY . . . . . . . . . .
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS .
ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS. .
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
NOTES . . .
:210
:210.1
:210.2
:210.3
:210.4
:210.5
PRICE DATA.
:220
4:020.100
Users' Guide
Data Structure
DATA STRUCTURE
§
020 .
.1
STORAGE LOCATIONS
A list is given of the major sizes and types of location that are used for instructions
and data in all parts of the computer system, internal and external storage, working
and auxiliary storage. The list is arranged in order of increasing size within hierarchy .
. 11
Name of location
The names used are, wherever possible, standard terminology for the types of location
used; otherwise, the manufacturer's terminology is used .
• 12
Size
The size of each location is specified in terms of its major parts so that the hierarchy
of location structures is emphasized .
. 13
Purpose or Use
Notes are made of any special use or purpose, of particular types of location, usually
in terms of their intended contents, or the special unit with which they are associated .
.2
DATA FORMATS
This is a list of the different types of data and instructions that may be referenced as
operands and held in the various types of locations. They are listed in order of increasing size .
. 21
Type of Data
The types range from bits through numerals, letters, instructions and words, to blocks
of data .
. 22
Representation
The representation of each type of data is specified in terms of the location or locations
it occupies in storage.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
/
4:030.100
Users' Guide
System Configuration
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
030 .
.1
GENERAL
The capabilities and price of a computer system can vary considerably depending on the
specific configuration of equipment. Throughout each computer system report, certain
specific configurations are defined as standard and are used as bases for illustrating
capabilities and prices. These configurations are typical points in the range of actual
installations which might be ordered. Standard configurations are specified below. A
standard configuration table is given for each group of machines - grouped by general
capability and application-orientation.
The standard configurations have been chosen to give a good sample of the variations
possible within a system. The configurations illustrate variations in capacity, speed,
simultaneity of operations, logical functions, etc., which can be obtained by appropriate
selections of units and optional features. These configurations are similar to ones that
should be used in specific applications.
The configurations shown for a specific computer system are those which most nearly
meet the specifications. They are shown by means of block diagrams, appropriately
annotated.
The standard configurations are:
Card Configuration
The specifications for the card configuration are typical of an average card installation. This may have more features than a card configuration quoted by a manufacturer, which is often chosen to minimize price. Configuration I, however, represents the equipment which a user is most likely to need when he has his installation in full operation.
II
4-Tape Business Configuration (Minimum Tape)
This is a minimum arrangement of equipment which permits reasonable use of magnetic tapes for files and input-output operations.
III
6-Tape Business Configuration (Average Tape)
This is a basic magnetiC tape configuration useful for a wide range of data processing applications. It makes use of facilities that provide good performance, such as
simultaneous operations and high-speed magnetic tapes.
IV
12-Tape Business Configuration (Expanded Tape, Small System)
This represents the largest reasonable configuration of a small to medium system
that takes advantage of extra units and the optional features available to extend the
system's performance.
V
6-Tape Auxiliary Storage Configuration
This is the same as III, with the addition of random access auxiliary storage. It
represents a configuration oriented to batch processing problems as well as those
requiring random acce s s facili tie s.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/62
USERS'GUIDE
4:030.1001
§
030.
VI
6-Tape Business/Scientific Configuration
This is the same as III, with the addition of internal storage and floating point arithmetic, to facilitate scientific and engineering computations.
VII 10-Tape General Configuration
This is a configuration in which the Central Processor and the input-output units
have been logically separated so that both can be used intensively. This arrangement is available either by providing a separate computer or special purpose units
to process the input-output transcription; or by providing a powerful controller
which, by use of multi-running facilities, controls the transcription separately.
These two arrangements of hardware are referred to as:
VII A Integrated Configuration
VII B Paired Configuration.
VIII 20-Tape General Configuration
This is a configuration for large volume intensive operation, and is otherwise similar to VII. It has two versions: VIII A and VIII B.
IX
Desk Size Scientific Configuration
This is a minimum configuration for use by an operator at the console. It has provision for manual input and, at least, typed output of results. It includes facilities
to punch and read programs.
X
Punched Tape/Card SCientific Configuration
This is a small configuration with moderate input-output equipment included to provide an increased volume of throughput. In addition, it can perform floating point
operations. It may also be used for limited business applications.
XI
4-Tape Scientific Configuration
This is the same as configuration X; but expanded to include magnetic tape and a
line printer, in order to cover applications in which moderately large volumes of
data and intermediate results are involved.
The configurations are standard throughout a report and are referred to by their numbers' I, II, etc.
Each standard configuration has been defined as representing a system capable of performing a typical type and level of application. The size of the working storage is
chosen to hold a certain number of instructions plus a certain amount of data. For example, in Configuration III, the working storage is required to hold the equivalent of
2,000 one-address instructions (a reasonable program for an average tape system) and
8,000 characters of data (a generous amount for input and output areas as well as for
working areas). The following assumptions are made: two-address instructions are approximately eqUivalent to 1. 5 one-address instructions and three-address instructions to
2 one-address instructions. Where variable-sized instructions are allowed, the average
number of addresses per instruction for the more common instructions is used.
The magnetic tape requirements for a configuration are stated as a number of possible
simultaneous transfers, a number of magnetiC tape units, and a peak input-output speed.
Peripheral input-output devices are specified by a peak operating speed.
The inclusion of specific hardware options is standardized. The degree of simultaneous
operations required is specified. For lower-speed systems, it is assumed that no off6/62
/--
4:030.110
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
030.
line equipment is used in any configuration. Wherever a system does not provide a unit
which meets standard requirements, the unit or option with the closest specifications is
selected .
. 11 Configuration Diagram Symbols
Arrows on the diagrams indicate the possible direction of the data flow, which may be
uni - or bi -directional. The conventional s~bol shapes used in the diagrams are given
below. Where two functions are performed by a single unit (cabinet) of equipment, the
symbols are abutted.
o
3
CJ <'-------1
5
)
1
2
3
4
is used for peripheral units which perform a storage function.
is used for peripheral units which perform an input-output function.
is a controller capable of dealing with one transfer at a time.
is a controller capable of dealing with several operations at a time, by mUltiplexing or multiway switching.
5 is a processor of data and/or instructions.
In general, the configuration diagram is arranged in the following conventional way:
- The central processor is on the left near the center of the diagram.
- Storage units are above the central processor.
- Input-output equipment is shown in a vertical list to the right, with controllers on
the left.
- The sequence of peripheral devices is, in general, from top to bottom: consoles
and inquiry stations; punched tape; punched card; printers; magnetic tape; others.
If necessary, these conventions are relaxed to make a presentation clearer .
. 12 Annotations
At the top of each configuration diagram in a report, a list is given of any significant deviations from the standard configuration resulting from the non-availability of a unit or
feature, or because certain features are not separable and must be included although not
required by the standard. If a size or speed requirement cannot be met exactly, the unit
with the closest specification is selected. These deviations may account for significant
differences in rentals for some systems' configurations.
The monthly rental for
th~
configuration, derived from standard price lists, is stated.
At the foot of the diagram is a list of those optional features that have been included in
the system but which are not obvious in the diagram.
®
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/62
USERS' GUIDE
4:030.120
§
030.
STANDARD CONFIGURATIONS FOR SMALL BUSINESS-ORIENTED SYSTEMS
I
II
Card
4-Tape
Business
6-Tape
Business
1,000
4,000
1,000
4,000
2,000
8,000
4,000
16,000
2,000
8,000
8,000
32,000
0
0
0
0
20,000,000
0
0
0
4
15,000
1
6
30,000
2
12
60,000
1
6
30,000
1
6
30,000
PRINTER
Lines per minute
1,000
500
500
1,000
500
500
CARD READER
Cards per minute
1,000
500
500
1,000
500
500
CARD PUNCH
Cards per minute
200
100
100
200
100
100
OTHER FEATURES
Simultaneous transfers
(not magnetic tape)
Floating Point
Index registers
Multiply- Divide
Console Typewriter Input
Console Typewriter Output
1
No
1
Yes
No
No
0
No
No
No
No
No
1
No
3
Yes
No
Yes
2
No
10
Yes
No
Yes
1
No
3
Yes
No
Yes
1
Yes
3
Yes
No
Yes
WORKING STORAGE
One-address instructions
(or equiv.)
Characters
AUXILIARY STORAGE
Characters
MAGNETIC TAPE
Simultaneous transfers
while computing
Units
Nominal speed, char/sec.
6/62
-
III
IV
V
VI
12-Tape
Business
6-Tape
Auxiliary
Storage
6-Tape
Business/
Scientific
4:040.100
Users' Guide
Internal Storage
INTERNAL STORAGE
§
040 .
.1
GENERAL
Internal Storage covers working storage and auxiliary storage and all locations which
have a unique identity that can be used as an instruction's address. Working storage
is all the storage that can be accessed directly for operands used in the arithmetic and
logical operations of the central processor, and the storage that can be accessed directly for instructions. Auxiliary storage is all internal storage except for working
storage and input-output buffers, which only serve as a link between working storage
and input-output units. The internal storage of a computer may consist of several different stores. A store is one unit of a particular type of storage. The stores may
also be arranged in a hierarchy of levels of increasing access time. Each store of a
different type is described in a separate part of a computer report, but different sizes
of one form of storage which may be separate stores are covered jointly in one part of
a report.
In some special cases, a storage facility may be considered both an internal and an external store. Such units are covered in both sections of a computer report from the
appropriate viewpoint of internal or external storage. The external storage is covered
in the input-output section: for example, a system such as the magnetic card CRAM
unit (made by NCR), considered as an internal store and described in this section,
would also be considered as an input-output unit. Where a unit is described in more
than one place, it is cross-referenced .
. 11
Identity
The identity of the device may take several forms: its full name; its model number; an
abbreviated name used throughout the report; and perhaps a nickname by which it is
widely known. All of these are included in the contents for the individual system and in
the general index. Where several versions of the unit have similar characteristics,
they are jointly described in one part. The different versions are distinguished by their
abbreviated names .
. 12
Basic Use
The basic use of each store is normally stated as either working storage or auxiliary
storage. Working storage is that which can be accessed directly by the central processor for instructions or operands used in arithmetic and logical operations. Auxiliary
storage is all other internal storage, except for input-output buffers. In some cases,
there may be special-purpose stores used to hold special working registers, fixed subroutines or arithmetic and control registers .
. 13
Description
This paragraph states the general characteristics of all the versions available, notes
the differences between them and any novel or outstanding features. It states whether
the unit is an adaptation of a well- known unit or has other interesting antecedents. It
also makes clear whether the unit is an auxiliary or working store or some combination
of the two. When a unit is arranged in such a way that its different uses cannot be separated, they are covered jointly in one section of the report. If any optional features
are available, their official names, abbreviations, and associated advantages are stated.
The description states the basic speeds and any important drawbacks.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
USERS' GUIDE
4:040.140
§
040 •
. 14
Availability
The first available date quoted is preferably a fully-operational date; otherwise, a date
for first pilot operation or field tests is given. In the intervening period, both dates
may be given.
"
.15
First Delivery
This is the date of first delivery to, and acceptance by, a customer .
. 16
Reserved Storage
In many computer systems, particularly those in which the central processor has sophisticated facilities or in which special input-output controllers are provided, certain
areas of. internal storage are conventionally reserved for their use, although the storage
areas can be addressed in the normal way by ordinary instructions. Different sets of
reserved storage are listed, with the purposes for which they are used. The volume
or number of locations reserved for each set is stated.
Where locks can be applied to prevent inadvertent or deliberate misuse of the areas by
routines, the"methods of providing the locks are also stated. The locks may be control
bits or indicators set by supervisor routines or by facilities built into the hardware, or
by switches on the console .
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
This paragraph states the type, size, structure, recording methods, packing densities,
access techniques and potential performance of the store .
. 21
Storage Medium
Internal storage media vary widely from computer to computer and even within a computer system. The more common media are magnetiC cores, drums, discs, delay line;s,
magnetic cards, magnetiC tapes and thin magnetic films .
. 22
Physical Dimensions
The physical dimenSions, such as diameter, thickness, length, or width of drums or
tapes, and the number of items in a store are stated. The degree of details given depends upon the relative importance and interest of the various dimensions to an analyst.
The exterior dimensions of the cabinets which house the stores are stated in Section 23 .
. 23
Storage Phenomenon
Storage phenomenon is the way in which the storage medium is used to hold data. The
most common form is the direction of magnetization in either magnetic cores, discs,
or drums .
. 24
Recording Permanence
Different varieties of stores vary widely in the degree to which they are able to retain
data once it has been recorded, even among stores which use the same storage medium
and the same storage phenomenon .
. 241 Data erasable by instructions
Erasable storage is that whose recording can be erased by instructions and replaced by
other data; therefore, it is a suitable form of storage for a working store. If recordings cannot be erased by instructions, the storage, provided that it is not volatile, is a
suitable form for a fixed store.
&
A-U-ER-BA-CH-I"'-~.
r-I
4/62
INTERNAL STORAGE
§
4:040.242
040 .
. 242 Data regenerated constantly
Many forms of storage are dynamic, and unless the data in them is constantly regenerated, as is necessary in a delay line, the recording will, more or less, rapidly deteriorate. Such a store is invariably volatile. This paragraph does not include the case
of a core store which may need regeneration only when read .
. 243 Data volatile
Volatile storage is that in which the recording is lost when its power supply is switched
off or is otherwise disconnected. There are different degrees of volatile stores. In
some, the recording is not lost if the power supply is switched off in the normal way,
but may be lost if the supply is improperly disconnected .
. 244 Data permanent
Permanent data is that. held in storage which is fixed and unalterable by the computer
system itself either by instructions or control operations of the central processor. Tne
permanent data may be in a changeable store .
. 245 Storage changeable
Changeable storage is that in which cartridges of the storage medium can be removed
from the store while retaining the data recorded upon them, and can be replaced by
others. It is used for both permanent stores and for stores such as magnetic cards or
magnetic tapes, where a potentially large library of data can be held off-line .
. 25
Data Volume Per Band
In many stores, particularly delay-lines, or other cyclic or serial stores such as strips
of tape or decks of cards, the data is recorded in sets of tracks called bands. A band is
a logical set of tracks recorded or read together. This paragraph states the data capacity of a band of tracks and the number of tracks in the band .
. 26
Bands Per Physical Unit
Where bands of data are recorded in a store, the number of bands per module is stated .
. 27
Interleaving Levels
Interleaving is the allocation of cells on a track to digits of words so that successive
digits of a particular word are separated by a specific number of intermediate cells which
may be allocated in a similar way to digits of other words. The number quoted here is
the distance apart of corresponding digits or bits of one data item. In effect, the number
of interleaving levels is equal to the number of scans of one band that would be necessary
to access all the data in the tracks of that band .
. 28
Access Techniques
The method of access to data in different stores varies conSiderably from the elementary
cases of simple core stores to the very complex systems such as those of multiple disc
stores in which numbers of arms are able to move independently of each other to different
discs and to different bands. This paragraph describes the different methods of recording and reading by an access device and the stages by which it obtains access .
. 281 Recording method
The methods of recording are stated; e. g. coincident current in core stores, or recording by a magnetic head,. or punching with dies, or the various methods of imprinting
stationery with characters from an engraved set.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
USERS' GUIDE
4:040.282
§
040 .
. 282 Readillg method
In many cases of internal storage, the method of reading is the simple inverse of the
method of recording, particularly when using magnetic heads; otherwise, reading may
be by photocell, by brush, or by sense wires in core stores .
. 283 Type of access
The method of access to individual locations in the store is stated as a series of stages
listed in the sequence in which they are carried out. Each stage of the most complex
. case is described: e. g., in a multiple -disc file, the series of stages might be:
Wait for access arm to become free.
Remove arm from current disc.
Move arm to required disc.
Move head to required band.
Wait for start of location;
Read or record.
In some instances, not all the steps are necessary. If an auxiliary store is used carefully, the total waiting time often can be reduced considerably by arranging that the data
is recorded in a way that minimizes the number of head and arm movements.
If it is possible to begin to obtain access at intermediate stages, those possible starting
stages are designated in the list. There are two kinds of starting stage: first, those in
which the hardware itself may recognize the fact that preceding stages are unnecessary
and by-pass them; and second, those for which instructions can be executed for separate
sets of stages. In the latter case, a stage may be a mandatory starting stage .
. 29
Potential Transfer Rates
By considering only such factors as the packing density and the relative speeds of the
access devices and the storage medium, or the cycling rates of a store, a potential
transfer rate is computed. This is a rate which may in many systems be attained only
for short intervals. This is because of the form of storage in which waiting times and
interleaved recording must be taken into account. The effective performance is summarized in paragraph 7 .
. 291 Peak bit rates
Where appropriate, the peak rates in bits per second are quoted. These figures are
derived either from the cycling rates of disc, drums or delay lines or the relative speeds
of the storage medium and its access devices and the packing densities, finally leading
to a rate such as bits per second per track .
. 292 Peak data rates
Although the peak speed may be stated using bits, a more useful rate is one in which the
unit of data of the computer system is used. The size of the unit in bits is quoted, and
the name of the unit of data. The data rate in units per second is stated. Any gain
factor such as the number of tracks per band, and/or any loss factor such as interleaving, is taken into consideration. A compound data rate is sometimes quoted where
the system can take advantage of simultaneous or overlapped transfers .
.3
DATA CAPACITY
The data capacities of each size or module of store available and the maximum capacity
of the store in a computer system are stated. The minimum storage is quoted as zero
only if the store is not an obligatory part of the computer system.
A
A-U-ER-BA-CH-'-:-@I]
rl
4/62
/'
INTERNAL STORAGE
§
4:040.310
040 •
. 31
Module and System Sizes
For each size of store, from the minimum storage possible to the maximum storage
possible, and all the intermediate module sizes, the following items are quoted:
identity - that is, the name or model number of the individual module; the capacity in
appropriate units such as instructions, characters, words; physical units such as drums,
discs, cards or modules; and the capacity in cartridges where a cartridge is a unit of
changeable storage which can be changed in one convenient bulk changing operation .
. 32
Rules for Combining Modules
If several intermediate capacities of storage are pOSSible, they are specified by stating
the rules that govern the way individual modules may be combined to provide one store
or storage facility .
.4
CONTROLLER
The controller of a storage device may be a part of the device or a part of the central
processor; it may be a separate unit which must always be present; or it may be one of
a variety of alternative units depending upon the extent of simultaneous operations required. In complex systems, there may be a hierarchy of controllers. Where the different controllers have an important effect upon the performance of a system, separate
replies are made for the different varieties of the controlling system. The controller
embraces all the facilities covering the flow of data to and from the internal store .
. 41
Identi ty
The identities of the various controllers are cross-referenced and indexed. The crossreferencing is particularly important where a controller may be able to control a variety
of different types of storage devices. The official name, model number and abbreviated
name are given .
.42
Connection to System
.421 On-line
Normally, there are quite rigid restrictions upon the number of controllers that can be
connected to a system in an on -line configuration. The System Configuration Section
shows some of the more popular varieties, and rules are given here for the general
restrictions .
. 422 Off-line
Many systems provide for peripheral devices to be used off-line, but this is unusual for
storage units. Where off-line operation is possible, the special equipment necessary
is also listed .
. 43
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller
The important criterion covering the connection of the individual stores to a controller
is the maximum number of stores which the controller can have connected to it at one
time. This may be as low as one, or as many as sixteen on some magnetic drum systems. On occasion, there are the special cases where several controllers may be connected to many peripheral devices, and there is no unique relationship between them.
In other cases, a controller may be able to be connected to more devices than it can
control simultaneously. Examples are given in the System Configuration Section .
. 432 Restrictions
When a controller can handle different types of peripheral devices, there may be
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:040.440
§
USERS' GUIDE
040.
restrictions on the maximum number of each. This may depend upon the configuration.
Over -all maxima are also stated where appropriate .
. 44
Data Transfer Control
The most important questions, concerning data transfers carried out by the controller,
are the sizes of the loads of data that can be transferred and the provision of synchronization that may be necessary, particularly if the storage device relies on program control of timing during transfers. Another important detail is the means of protection of
the data transfer areas. When a data transfer involves a working store and an auxiliary
store, the transfer is sometimes considered as an input or output to or from the working store .
• 441 Size of load
A load is the volume of data that can be transferred by one instruction .
. 442 Input-output area
As far as data transfer control is concerned, the Input-Output area is any location from
or to which a data transfer is made between internal stores by an instruction. Although
there may be one or more automatically controlled buffers used in a transfer, they are
not specified here. An area may be a part of working storage or a special store provided for use in transfers .
. 443 Input-output area access
The access to these areas may vary, from simple access to a special area addressed
as a single location, to the completely general access when the area is a part of the
working memory .
..444 Input-output area lockout
Any interlocks provided are specified. Because a program might inadvertently alter information in an output area before it had been copied, or might read information from
an input area before it had been filled and use it inadvertently, any checks or interlocks
that can be provided here are important. These may be of two kinds: an absolute lockout to all.the information until the input or output operation is complete, or the rather
more sophisticated gradual release of the lockout on parts of the information as it is
read or recorded. One system might allow any reading from an output area, but
writing only in locations which have been copied for output. If there are no interlocks,
the programmer must normally use a "test busy" instruction, and program the interlock .
. 445 Synchronization
Automatic provision of the synchronization implies that the programmer cannot make
any timing errors in instructions concerning this storage device. If it is not automatic,
considerable effort must be applied to provide it in each program .
• 446 Synchronizing aids
~
the synchronization is not completely automatic, it is important to show which facilities are available to the programmer to enable him to control the timing: either the
primitive form in which he has to mark time on an instruction until a lock-out is released, the intermittent testing of a busy signal, or the sophisticated use of interruption
when the busy condition disappears .
• 447 Table control
Normal data transfer operations provide for dealing with input or output areas which are
composed of a series of consecutive locations. Some sophisticated systems provide a
4/62
INTERNAL STORAGE
§
4:040.448
040
table control for input or output in which various sub-areas may be scattered throughout internal storage. In such cases, the table may specify the first location of each
sub-block together with its size, or each sub-block may contain a delimiter at its end.
Data may be gathered from many places for output in one block or scattered to many
places while input from one block .
. 448 Testable conditions
In order for a supervisor routine to be able to make efficient use of the computer and
implement an efficient operating system, it is a great convenience if the routine itself
can test for many of the conditions that will affect futUre progress of jobs. These tests
enable the supervisor to rearrange its schedule to more efficient form, to keep a log,
or to inform the operator that his attention to certain devices is required. The conditions that are most frequently provided for testing are as follow:
Disabled - Meaning that it is not possible to access the device until it has been
enabled by an operator.
Busy Device - Meaning that the device is still carrying out some operation requested
earlier but is not disabled and will be available later.
Busy Controller - Meaning that even if the device is not busy, its controller or all
possible controllers that may be used for the device are busy and therefore a wait is necessary until the device can be used.
Access Lock - Meaning that a lock is in force which prevents any access to the location.
Recording Lock - Meaning that a lock is in force which prevents any recording into
the location and only reading is permitted.
Receipt Error - Meaning that a check such as parity has been applied to data received
at the store and found to be incorrect. Sometimes a re-transmittal will
take place.
Recovery Error - Meaning that a check such as parity has been applied to data recovered from the store and found to be incorrect.
Recording Error - Meaning that a recovery of data was made immediately after recording in order to insure that the recording was satisfactory and data
was found to be incorrect.
Transfer Error - Meaning either a receipt or a recovery error .
.5
ACCESS TIMING
The performance of any internal store is largely dependent upon the arrangement of its
access devices and their relationship to the locations. A second important factor, particularly in aUXiliary stores with long waiting times, is the degree of simultaneous
operation that is possible. Finally, there are the basic timing parameters and the possible variations of times for different types of access •
. 51
Arrangement of Heads
The term ''head'' is used to refer to the most elementary unit of an access device. When
dealing with magnetiC recordings on discs or drums or tapes, a stack of heads is used
to read or record the logical block of data from or into storage on a set of tracks called
a band. When several stacks are physically associated so that they share in the .effects
of any physical change of registration between stacks and the storage medium, they are
called a yoke of stacks.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:040.511
§
USERS' GUIDE
040 •
. 511 Number of stacks
The number of stacks in a yoke module and system are described. The types of answer
will vary from examples such as one stack per system, which is frequently the provision
for core storage, to a large number of stacks per module such as a magnetic drum with
a stack of heads for each band •
. 512 Stack movement
If the stacks either as individuals or as yokes are able to move relative to the storage
medium, apart from cyclic motions of medium, the type of movement is stated .
• 513 Stacks that can access any particular location
In most stores with more than one access stack, it is conventionally arranged that any
one location in the store may be accessed by only one stack. Sometimes severallocations can be accessed by one common stack. In the cases where there is overlapping
of the access areas of different stacks, the number of stacks that can access any particular location is stated .
. 514 Accessible locations
The number of locations that can be accessed in different situations varies considerably
for different types of store, particularly auxiliary stores. This paragraph states the
number of locations that can be accessed, first by a single stack with no non -cycliC
movement - for example, all the data recorded on one band of a drum; and second, by
the number of locations that can be accessed by a single stack with all its possible
movements.taken into account - for example, all bands to which a stack can be moved.
Finally, the number of locations that can be accessed by all stacks with no movement
is quoted for some convenient unit such as a module or system .
. 515 Relationship between stacks and locations
Where the various locations are assigned to different stacks, there is often a simple
rule by which the relationship is established. The two most frequent cases are that
either the most significant digits or the least significant digits of an address specify the
access stack. In the first case, the store is logically divided into parts; in the second
case, the store is divided in an interleaved way as far as the different stacks are concerned .
• 52
Simultaneous Operations
Any simultaneous operations possible in an auxiliary store are described in a style
similar to that of the Simultaneous Operations section. First, the various possible
operations are grouped and the groups identified by the capital letters A, B, C, D, etc.
Second, a list of rules is given in which are defined all the restrictions upon the number
of simultaneous operations. The rules are given in algebraic form, usually as inequalities, and all the rules apply at anyone time. (For greater detail, see 4:110.3) When
using internal stores, the most frequently-provided simultaneous facilities are those of
being able to move one or more stacks to be ready for reading or being able to record
at the same.time as another reading or recording operation is taking place .
. 53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.531 For uniform access
Where a store has a uniform access time, such as a core store, the basic times quoted
are access and cycle times. Access time is defined as the period of time from the request by the control unit for an item of data in the store until the completion of the
transfer of that item of data; that is, the sum of the waiting time and the transfer time.
Cycle time is defined as the minimum period of time between successive accesses to
4/62
4:040.532
INTERNAL STORAGE
§
040.
anyone location of the store. This is often greater than the access time. Also specified is size of the item of data accessed in one operation .
. 532 Variation in access time
In complex stores, where the access times are variable, and in which the system of obtaining access is variable not only in times of the individual operations but in the necessity of certain of the different types of operations that are carried out, the times for
access are described in a series of steps. These correspond to those specified in paragraph 040.283. A list of the stages in an access operation is given, and for each stage,
the variation in time that the stage may take is quoted. As an example, typical time~
are also given. These are summed to give a total for a complete operation. This is
not an average time; it is used only as an illustration. The variation in time may be
quoted in one of several ways: first, a fixed time; second, a range of times; third, a
pair of times. The first is a nominal or zero time when no movement or switching is
required. A range of times may be dependent upon the particular operation, such as
the length of movement of an arm, and in some cases may be specified as a formula.
In particular, the times for the final operation - the data transfer - maybe quoted in
terms of the volume of the data transferred, where variable volumes of data can be
specified in the instructions .
.6
CHANGEABLE STORAGE
Changeable storage is a store whose recording medium can be physically removed from
the control of the computer system and replaced by other parts of the medium with different recordings upon them. It is essential that any storage parts change in this way
are fully compatible with the various units on which parts are recorded and read and the
different positions which the parts are allowed to occupy. As a special case, a fixed
store which can only be read, and can be changed, is also a changeable store .
. 61
Cartridges
A cartridge is the smallest changeable unit of storage medium .
. 611 Cartridge capacity
The cartridge capacity is a number of locations or the volume of data which can be recorded upon it .
. 612 Cartridges per module
The number of cartridges per module defines the size of the particular storage unit and
the fraction that can be altered at any time .
. 613 Interchangeable
The degree of interchangeability of the various cartridges in the various possible pOSitions in units is specified •
. 62
Loading Convenience
.621 POSSible loading
There are two convenient facilities which may be available during loading of a cartridge.
In the most inconvenient case, the whole computing system must be stopped while loading occurs. In an intermediate case, it may only be necessary to stop a particular
storage system while loading takes place. In some cases, it may be possible to load
without stopping either the computing system or the storage unit; but this is not common .
. 622 Method of loading
The method by which loading is accomplished varies from the simplest procedures
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:040.623
§
USERS' GUIDE
040.
performed by an operator to those in which a maintenance engineer is necessary. In
some cases, there may be special automatic means provided for loading, not necessarily
under the control of the central processor .
. 623 Approximate change time
The approximate time to unload a cartridge or many cartridges and replace them by
others is quoted .
. 624 Possible bulk loading
In the cases where a cartridge may be a small unit of storage containing relatively little
data, it is sometimes important to be able to make changes of large numbers of car-
tridges ina time that is less than the product of the number of cartridges and the time
to change one cartridge. Where such a bulk loading scheme is available, it is described
here .
.7
AUXIllARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE
Some of the important properties of auxiliary stores and also incidentally of working
stores in some applications, are the rates at which large blocks of data can be moved
or copied from one set of locations to another either within the same store, or with
other stores at different levels, or with input-output units or their buffers .
. 71
Data Transfer
This is a list of all the potential transfers that might be possible in a system, and shows
in each case whether the transfer is possible and how it is effected when it is possible.
One end of the transfer is the store under consideration, the other end of the transfer
may be the store itself or any peripheral unit or other store .
. 72
Transfer Load Sizes
The possible sizes of loads of data that can be transferred in a single operation are
stated for all the possible data transfers. A load may consist of one or many blocks or
even individual characters of data. In general, the important transfers are those for
large quantities of data. The sizes are quoted either as a fixed size or a range of sizes
showing the appropriate units and the variations that are possible .
. 73
Effective Transfer Rate
'The effective transfer rate is stated for all the possible transfers. The rate is stated
in some convenient unit such as characters per second, depending upon the particular
form data is held in the stores under consideration. The time stated is the effective
average transfer rate for the largest possible transfer that could be required, which is
the maximum capacity of the lesser of the two stores; that is, the time for the entire
contents of the lesser store to be copied into the larger, or for the entire contents of
the lesser store to be filled from the larger. The total time for this operation is divided
by the number of units of data transferred. The total time includes all allowances for
program looping and necessary access and switching delays. It is not necessarily performed in a single operation .
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
This shows all of the major types of error that may occur within the storage system,
and the types of checks or interlocks that are provided to detect or protect against errors.
In some cases, particular types of errors are not possible because of the mode of operationof the device. If, when the check fails, or an interlock is applied, some action
is automatically taken, this is also noted. The most usual case of action for an interlock is that the operation waits until the interlock is removed.
I
4/62
I AUERBACH I iNn
4:040.800
INTERNAL STORAGE
§
040.
There are four steps concerned with checking of data in a store:
Receipt of data - - This data may arrive with check digits and may be checked upon
receipt.
Recording of data -- Special check digits may be recorded with the data into the
store, These may in fact be the check digits received with the data but mayor may
not be checked upon receipt.
Recovery of data -- A check may be performed provided check digits were recorded.
Dispatch of data -- Check digits may be transmitted with the data. These check
digits may have been recorded with the data and passed on directly without having
been checked at recovery.
The most common types of error are as follow:
Physical Record Missing -- This means that in a changeable store, a cartridge has
not been inserted.
Invalid Address - - This means that an address has been used which is either out of
range or uses improper digits.
Invalid Code - - This occurs when some particular pattern of an internal or external,
code is not acceptable to the controller.
Timing Conflicts -- These arise when the central processor attempts to start a new
operation before the previous one has been completed.. Where automatic interlocks
are not available, it is necessary to program them using a busy signal or some
means of timing.
Particular types of action are:
Stop -- This means that equipment is immediately stopped and cannot continue until
some action is taken by another unit or by a human being.
Alarm - - This means that a light or other signal tells the operator that this check
has failed.
Signal - - This means that some automatic action is taken by the equipment, such as
re-readingamagnetic tape three times in the controller circuits themselves.
Indicator - - This is a condition that can be tested by instructions if they are so
written.
Other possible forms of action are error-correction, using redundant codes, and special branching to specific locations, which is a form of interruption. When convenient,
the method or form of the check for interlock is specified; otherwise, it may be recorded only as being present.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:050.100
Users' Guide
Central Processor
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
050 .
.1
GENERAL
A central processor is a unit which selects, interprets and initiates the execution of
instructions, and/or performs operations of computation and/or data manipulation. The
most common operations performed by a central processor are: arithmetic operations;
branching and testing operations; the control of input-output and auxiliary storage units;
the editing of data; and any necessary code or radix conversion .
. 11
Identity
The identity of a central processor may take several forms: its full name; model number; abbreviated name used throughout the report; or perhaps a nickname by which it
is widely known. All of these are included in the index for the individual system and
in the general index. Where several versions of the unit have similar characteristics,
they are described jointly. Annotations describe the differences between the various
versions, which are distinguished by their abbreviated names .
. 12
Description
This states the general characteristics of all the versions available, notes the differences between them, and any novel or outstanding features. It describes any particular
ways in which the instructions are formed and the operations carried out in the processor. Any special facilities, such as built-in operations or special bit character manipulations, are stated. The style and structure of the operands that can be manipulated
are also described, particularly when variable length facilities are available. If multisequencing or multi -running is possible, a brief description is given of the way in
which the facilities are intended to be used.
A brief summary is given of the performance times of the important characteristics
of a processor, which are qualified in more detail in the body of the report. All the
optional features are listed separately and the additional facilities which they provide
are described together with the effects that the options have upon the performance of
the processor .
. 13
Availability
The first available date quoted is preferably a fully-operational date; otherwise, a date
for first pilot operation or field test is given. In the intervening period, both dates
may be given.
.2
PROCESSING FACIUTIES
The operations available in a central processor fall into two classes - those designed
for the processing of data and those designed for the control of equipment units or
routines. In this paragraph, the data processing facilities are conSidered. The major
features are the various types of operations available, and the varieties of operands
which can be manipulated, the provisions for special cases of operands, the structure
of the instructions, and any special storage that is used by the processor .
\
. 21
Operations and Operands
This paragraph lists all the major types of operations that are commonly required and
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:050.211
§
USERS' GUIDE
050.
provided in central processors. For each operation, two statements are made: first,
the provision in this particular processor; and second, the types of operand which can
be used. The provision may be automatic, (Le., built into the hardware) or provided
by a standard subroutine. In general, any operation can be provided by a subroutine,
but subroutines are quoted only where they are standard conventions; otherwise, the
provision is stated as "none". The operands that can be manipulated are normally described by two important features - the arithmetic radix which is used, and the size of
the operands. The size may be fixed or variable. When it is variable, the range is
stated .
• 211 Fixed point
These are the conventional arithmetical fixed -pOint operations of addition, subtraction,
multiplication and division. Two types of multiplication are considered: short multiplication, in which a double length product is not developed; and long multiplication, in
which a double -length product is developed. Any automatic rounding procedure that is
incorporated in short multiplication is .quoted. Long multiplication does not require
rounding. Two types of division are considered: one with no remainder and the other
with remainder. If the quotient is automatically rounded, this is stated. Division with
remainder does not require rounding .
. 212 Floating point
In addition to the four basic operations of addition, subtraction, multiplication and division, any other special operations provided in the processor hardware are listed.
Any automatic rounding rules are also stated. The size quoted is for the two parts of
a floating point number - the exponent and fixed point part •
. 213 Boolean
Boolean operations are listed only if they are incorporated in the hardware and if they
operate on an array of bits, usually a word of many bits. The size is quoted in bits
and the radix is binary. If any two of the basic Boolean operations are prOVided, another
Boolean operation can usually be obtained by a simple combination of them .
. 214 Comparison
Comparison operations are performed upon pairs of operands and determine whether
one number is, or is not, greater than, equal to, or less than another. Only automatic
comparisons are listed. In addition to the comparison of ordinary signed numbers, it
is sometimes possible to compare absolute values of numbers. Operations are also
provided in most processors to compare items composed of letters, in which A is
"less" than B, B is "less" than C, etc. When mixed items, composed of numbers and
letters, are compared, the precedence of the various characters is important. This is
called the collating sequence, which varies from one computer to another. The set of
characters is listed in its collating sequence; for example, the letters A to Z and then
the numerals 0 to 9; or, in contrast, the numerals 0 to 9, and then the letters A to Z.
In addition, the special characters, such as &, *, and $, are also inserted in their
appropriate positions in the sequence. The collating sequence mentioned here is one
which is obtained when using the standard comparison operations. If other collating
sequences are required, code conversions or subroutines may be required •
. 215 Code translation
These are operations which take single characters or sets of characters expressed in
one code and translate them into another code, either by means of a table provided in
the hardware or by means of a table which can be set up and varied by individual programs. The provision is stated for each possible code translation: the names or descriptions of the codes from which, and into which, translation can be made; and the
range of sizes of the operands that can be translated by a single operation.
4/62
4:050.216
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
050 .
. 216 Radix conversion
These operations are ones in which numbers expressed in radices, such as decimal or
binary, can be converted from one radix to another. The headings used are: the provision; the radices from which conversion is made and into which conversion is made;
and the sizes of the numbers that can be converted by a single operation.
· 217 Edit format
These are operations which enable the processor to compose items in a form ready for
printing. The various possible facilities are listed and the availability of each is staled.
The comments note such conditions as whether the facilities are provided in single comprehensive operation or by separate operations to deal with the different set of facilities.
Floating characters are those, such as a dollar Sign, which are printed immediately to
the left of the most Significant digit of a value; i. e., they are not fixed in position but
are "floated" to a pOSition immediately left of the most Significant printed digit. Protectioncharacters are those, such as asterisks, which replace suppressed zeros in
order to make unauthorized changes to a value difficult .
. 218 Table look-up
Table look-up operations are those which scan the contents of a sequence of locations
and compare each with key value in order to determine where in a table an item with the
same key reSides, where the first item with a greater or lesser key reSides, or the location where the greatest or the least key in the table resides •
. 219 Others
Any other important operations peculiar to a particular processor are listed here.
· 22
Special Cases of Operands
· 221 Negative numbers
There are two major forms in which negative numbers are held. In one case, each
number is held with a value in absolute form together with a sign. In the other case,
negative numbers are held as some form of complement of their pOSitive counterpart.
The form of negative numbers may be important when attempting to construct editing
operations, logical operations, or subroutines for double-length working .
. 222 Zero
The form in which a value of zero is held in some processors is not unique. Sometimes
there are two distinguishable forms of zero - plus and minus. If this is the case, it is
important to know if both zeros are treated as identically equal in arithmetic, in compari sons and in control operations, such as stepping indexes.
\
.223 Operand size determination
Where variable-sized operands are used, it is important to note the method by which the
size of any operand is specified. The size may be specified by a counter in an instruction, or by delimiters in either the data itself or in the locations which hold the data .
. 23
Instruction Formats
.231 Instruction structure
Instructions may be either fixed or variable in size . The fixed size or the range of
variable sizes is stated.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:050.232
§
USERS' GUIDE
050 .
. 232 Instruction layout
A diagram of each of the major instruction formats is given, together with a name for
each. Each format is divided into its major parts and each part is labeled with a name
and its size. The names are the conventional code names used by the manufacturer .
. 233 Instruction Parts
The prirpose of the parts of the various instruction formats is stated .
. 234 Basic address structure
Instructions are normally classified into two different address types - either "N address"
or tiN + 1 address." "N" refers to the number of addresses which identify operands
used in the instruction. The form tiN + I tI is used if the location of the next instruction
in normal sequence is specified in each instruction .
. 235 Literals
Some instructions are able to specify, in their address parts, literals as operands instead of the locations of operands. This enables space to be saved that would otherwise
be occupied by address constants. The various types of instructions that may have
literals in their address parts are listed and the maximum size or number that can be
specified is quoted, usually in decimal digits .
. 236 Directly addressed operands
For each type of storage that can be directly addressed in an instruction, three figures
are quoted: first, the minimum size of operand that may be addressed; second, the
maximum size of operand that may be addressed; third, the total volume of storage that
can be addressed directly. This does not include any modification of addresses by the
use of indexes or the use of indirect addresses. Only instructions which refer to computing or comparison of numeric and alphabetic data are considered, not operations
which are concerned with the transmitting of data between various levels of storage or
peripheral units .
• 2362 Increased address capacity
When address modification, either indexing or indirect addressing, increases the volumes of storage which can be accessed by an instruction, the increased volumes are
listed against the various methods of increasing the capacity .
. 237 Address indexing
Address indexing is a facility by which a value called an index, which is often held in a
special register called an index register, is added to the address of an instruction after
it is accessed by the control unit and before it is executed. By performing arithmetic
upon indexes instead of upon the stored addresses of instructions, it is possible to
simplify the organization of a program and often to use one index to apply to many addresses in many instructions .
. 2371 Number of methods
Most computers supply only one, if any, method of indexing addresses; but additional
methods are available in some computers to extend the range of indexing .
. 2372 Names
The different modes of indexing are listed here and numbered I, il, etc. These are used
for reference later.
~
A-U-ER-BA-CH-jC-§]
'-1
4/62
4:050.2373
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
050 .
. 2373 Indexing rule
The indexing rule is that which specifies how the executed address is formed from the
presumptive address and its index, including the senses in which the signs of the various
values are interpreted and the effects of any overflow in address registers .
. 2374 Index specification
Where there is more than one index register, the method of specifying the index to be
used is stated. In general, a particular index register is specified in an indexed instruction. Occasionally the register is specified in a special indexing instruction
executed immediately before the indexed instruction; or it may be specified by the current status of indicators in the processor .
. 2375 Number of potential indexes
The number of indexes from which an instruction can choose values for the modification of its addresses is stated. This may be less than the total number of index
registers provided: e.g., when the index registers are grouped in such a way that any
particular instruction may be indexed from only one group .
. 2376 Addresses which can be indexed
When there is more than one address in an instruction, the rules for the indexing of
the different addresses are stated here. The rules for indexing addresses may also
vary among instructions which have different types of operation .
. 2377 Cumulative indexing
It is possible on some processors to apply more than one index to an address. If this
is possible, the method in which it can be done is stated together with the restrictions
on the number of cumulative indexes .
. 2378 Combined index and step
Some computers have special instructions which not only specify that an index value be
used to modify their addresses, but also that the index value be stepped by its increment at the time that the instruction is executed .
. 238 Indirect addressing
A direct address is one whose value is the location of the data being addressed. An
indirect address is one whose value is a location that contains a further address
specifying the location of the data being addressed. This is a recursive definition because the further address may be indirect. This is a useful facility in subroutines,
particularly when nesting to more than one level by using overlays of relocatable
routines .
. 2381 Recursive
Indirect addressing is said to be recursive when the address in the location referenced
by an indirect address may also be indirect and an address chain of indefinite length
may be encountered before a direct address is discovered .
. 2382. DeSignation
When indirect addresses are used, there must be a method of deSignating whether any
address is direct or indirect. There are two possible methods - either a designation
in an address itself, or in the address which references it.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
USERS' GUIDE
4:050.2383
§
050 .
. 2383 Control
When recursive direct addresses are used, there must be some particular means by
which the end of the chain is known. This may be by a designation in the address itself
or by a counter which specifies how many indirect addresses must be used before a
direct address is obtained. In some systems, a counter is automatically pre-set at a
value of one, in which case every indirect address leads immediately to a direct address .
. 2384 Indexing with indirect addressing
In some
address
er, the
dresses
computers, indexing and indirect addressing are mutually exclusive for any
or any instruction. When indexing and indirect addressing can be used togethdifferent cases and the sequence or precedence of evaluating indirect ador applying indexes are specified •
• 239 Stepping
Stepping is a facility of changing an index value in specified steps by the'value of an
item called an increment. Stepping is often associated with a particular end value.
Whenever an index is examined to determine whether it has attained or passed an end
value, it is called a test. Tests are used to control the execution of a loop of instructions .
. 2391 Specification of increments
The increment may be specified in individual stepping instructions or held in a separate
part of the index register .
. 2392 Increment sign
Some systems allow an increment to have its own sign. Others require it to have a
fixed sign; for example, when the value of the increment is implied in a stepping instruction .
. 2393 Size of increment
If the increment is held in a special register or stepping instruction, the range of values
of the increment is limited by the size of the register or the part of the instruction set
aside for it. Sometimes the increment is implied in an instruction and in these cases,
its value is normally limited to one fixed value .
. 2394 End value
The end value which is used in the test of an index may be implied as zero, held in the
index register, or specified in the test instruction .
. 2395 Combined step and test
Many computers provide a special instruction which combines the operations of stepping an index.and testing for the attainment of the end value .
• 24
Special Processor Storage
All the special registers are covered which concern the programmer; i.e., those that
are addressable and are mentioned in the instruction lists, whether addressable explicity or implicitly. For each category of storage, the number of special locations,
their size in bits, decimal digits or characters are quoted, a:nd the special use that is
made of them by the processor. The physical details of the locations in each category
of storage, including the access and/or cycle times in microseconds, are also given.
A
4/62
A-U-ER-BA-CH-I"-~
'-1
4:050.300
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
050 .
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
.31
Instruction Sequencing
There are two basic methods of controlling the sequencing of instructions. The most
frequently -used is that of a sequence counter or sets of sequence counters. The other,
frequently employed with drum or disc working stores, uses an N + 1 type of instruction in which the extra address specifies the location of the next instruction in normal
sequence. In the latter case, control is provided entirely within the individual instructions .
. 311 Number of sequence control facilities
In most computers, there is only one sequence control counter; but there are two im-
portant kinds of variation in computers with micro-coded or built-in micro-coded
operations. There may be a hierarchy of counters: one to count through the instructions in a routine; a second, perhaps, to count through special micro-routines; and
a third, perhaps, to step through micro.-operations. Alternatively, there may be a
set of counters for different programs or routines that may be running at one time,
as in multi -running •
. 312 Arrangement
Where there is more than one sequence counter, the arrangements may be either for a
hierarchy or separate ones for routines which are being run together, or separate ones
for different sub-processors .
. 313 Precedence rule
Where the counters are not arranged in a hierarchy, there may be precedence rules
which control the choice of instructions to be executed, either in favor of one counter
rather than another, or taking them in turn .
. 314 Special sub-sequence counters
These are counters which are subordinate to a main sequence counter. The number
provided and their purposes are stated .
. 315 Sequence control - step size
The sequence control usually steps in units of an instruction, but the access to storage
for the instructions may be in words which obtain two instructions, or may only be in
syllables where variable-length instructions are used so that several accesses may be
necessary for individual instructions .
. 316 Accessibility to routines
It is often useful in routines to be able to utilize the contents of the sequence counter to
form index values or otherwise modify the addresses of instructions in order to permit
convenient arrangement of relocatable codes .
. 317 Permanent or optional modifiers
In some computers, all instructions are automatically made relocatable because each
address is automatically indexed by the contents of the sequence counter; in other computers' this facility is optional.
.32
Look-Ahead
A look-ahead facility is one in which a special separate part of the sequence control
makes speculative advance access to storage for instructions and data in order to overlap access operations with computing. Such a facility maintains a queue of instructions
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
USERS' GUIDE
4:050.321
§
050.
and data and allows access and operation times to be more smoothly overlapped, particularly in the cases where computing operations vary widely from short additions to
long multiplications and access may vary due to the use of interleaved core storage.
Sometimes such speculative advance accesses are wasted because the jumps in a program cannot be accurately foretold by such a unit and because the storing of intermediate
results can sometimes prove awkward .
. 321 Length of queue
The length of the queue is specified in terms of the number of operands or instructions
- or both -' that can be held .
. 33
Interruption
Interruption is a facility built into a computer whereby certain prescribed events can
cause the normal sequence of execution of instructions of a routine to be arbitrarily
interrupted when these events occur. When an interruption occurs, it is usual for the
sequence to be jumped to a predetermined pOSition, where a master routine notes the
point of interruption, carries out any procedure required by the cause of the interruption, and then resumes the running of a routine. When the resumption of running may
be of a routine different from that which was interrupted, multi-running is taking place .
. 331 Possible causes
The events that can cause interruption in different computers vary widely, and the particular range of causes controls the ease or scope of the control that can be applied by
supervisor routines. The possible causes are grouped according to the different classes
of units that exist in computer configurations .
. 3311 In-out units
Interruptions may be caused by the fact that a unit has become free to carry out new
operations, because an error has occurred, or because special conditions, such as an
end-of-tape mark, have been set .
. 3312 In-out controllers
Interruption may occur because a controller has become free to carry out operations or
because of errors in the controller. These are normally alternative causes to those for
in -out units .
. 3313 Storage access
Interruptions caused by storage units other than those due to errors and lock-out violations are usually confined to auxiliary storage units, where the completion of data transfers and seeking operations may cause interruptions .
. 3314 Processor errors
Interruptions may be caused in the processor by the overflow or underflow of arithmetic
operations, the encountering of illegal operations or invalid addresses and other abnormal conditions. In particular, there may be different classes of interruptions and
interruption control status so that a higher-level interruption may interrupt a lowerlevel interruption status .
. 332 Program control
Instructions are often provided that enable individual programs to have some control
over the potential causes of interruption; that is, the instruction can enable or disable
certain causes of interruption.
4/62
4:050.3321
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
050 .
. 3321 Individual control
Program enabling or disabling by instructions may be either of individual specified units
or controllers, groups of causes, or the entire set of causes .
.3322 Method
The method of program control may be the setting of special indicator bits in control
registers, the use of input-output instructions which specify that the completion of the
operation will or will not cause interruption, or the setting of special indicator bits in
individual controllers for input-output units .
.3323 Restriction
Although instructions may be provided to control the enabling or disabling of interruption, there may be restrictions upon their use. In many regimes, it is possible only
for a supervisor routine which is acting in an interrupt mode to enable or disable interruption, and ordinary interruptible routines have no control.
.333 Operator control
In many systems, there are switches or console controls by which the operator can enable or disable individual causes or groups of causes of interruption .
. 334 Interruption conditions
Even when an interruption cause exists and is not disabled, there are other central control conditions that must occur before interruption is permitted. Sometimes only certain types of instructions may be interrupted, and frequently there is an interruption
mode in which the supervisor routine operates to prevent further interruptions. There
may, also, be a hierarchy of modes. Another control technique is that of setting a
mask register of bits which is compared with interruption conditions by Boolean operations before interruption .
. 335 Interruption process
The sequence of steps carried out either automatically or by a standard supervisor
routine when interruption occurs usually covers three particular features. First, there
is normally the disabling of further interruptions and the entering of an interruption
mode operation. Second, there is the saving of certain registers - in particular, the
contents of accumulators and sequence control. In many specially-constructed systems,
however, there may be separate sets of registers for different programs, so that saving does not involve any time. Third, there is the choice of destination of the jump
when interruption occurs, which may be either to a fixed location or to a variable location depending upon the cause of interruption. If the jump is to a fixed location, the
supervisor routine must first conduct an examination to discover the cause of interruption .
;'
\
. 336 Control methods
Within the supervisor routine which is executed in the interrupt mode, there are two
fundamental tasks which must be carried out. It is necessary to know what methods
the supervisor has at its disposal (1) to enable it to determine what has caused the
interruption so that it may take the appropriate action, and (2) to re-enable interruption
when a return is made to an ordinary interruptible routine .
\
\.
. 34
Multi -Running
Multi -running is the process of intermingling instructions or sets of instructions from
several different routines which have no precedence interlocks between the sets; i.e.,
they are independent routines in which the stopping of the execution of anyone routine
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:050.341
§
USERS' GUIDE
050.
does not lock progress of any other routine. Multi -running is usually effected by the
use of interruption facilities or multiple -sequence counters •
. 341 Method of control
The method of control of multi -running in the simplest case would be a set of separate
independent sequence counters, each of which is advanced in turn according to some
precedence rules. Alternatively, there may be a supervisor routine which uses the
facilities of interruption to control the various operations without excessive scattering
of test busy instructions throughout individual routines .
. 342 Maximum number of programs
The maximum number of programs may be theoretically unlimited, though in practice
there is usually a reasonable limit to the number of independent programs that may be
run. If there is a strict limit to the number of counters or sequence controls that can
be maintained at a time, this limit has subtracted from it the number required by the
supervisor and is the number available for independent productive programs •
. 343 Precedence rules
The precedence of different routines being run together may be decided by a priority
list, by their taking turns in a strict sequence, by their taking turns until each routine
is temporarily interlocked, or by some individual coding provided by individual users .
. 344 Program protection
When independent. routines are being run within a computer, it is essential in the general case to have protection of one program against corruption by another. There are
two important areas to be considered: first, the corruption of data or instructions held
in storage; and second, the illegal use of input-output files on input-output units assigned
to different routines. In addition, it may be that the number of separate sets of protectible locations or units is less than the number of routines that could theoretically
run together in a system. This depends upon the mode of protection provided. There
are three common ways of providing protectioI).. First, there is a simple marking
system in which locations or set of locations are marked as being either those of the
routine currently being processed or not part of that routine. When routines are
changed, the marks must be changed throughout the storage. Second, there is a system in which each location or set of locations is marked with a tag which is compared
with a tag held in the control unit for the particular routine. The number of values that
the tag can take may restrict the number of possible sets of program protection. The
third method involves holding a pair of addresses in control registers which are the
delimiters of the storage area assigned to the routine currently being processed. In
this case, the transfer from one routine to another is necessary only to alter the pair
of control registers •
. 35
Multi -Sequen,cing
Multi -sequencing occurs when it is possible to intermingle individual instructions or
sets of instructions from different sequences of the- same routine at one time, or operate simultaneously separate sequences of a routine. The most cOJ;tlmon use of multi sequencing is the separate control of input of data, computing on the data, and output
of results by separate processors •
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
The performance of each central processor is given by two sets of figures. In the first
set, times are given in microseconds for a representative sample of instructions, and
in the second set, times are given in microseconds for sets of instructions which perform standard tasks. The first set of times is dependent upon the construction of the
processor and, in general, a single address computer will perform addition faster than
a three-address instruction, but may not necessarily be faster in executing a task. The
!
4/62
' IA-U-ER-BA-CH-j-:-@
4:050.410
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
050.
second set of figures for different computers is more strictly comparable among computers; that is, the tasks are largely independent of computer design style. In cases
where the time to perform a task is dependent upon the sizes of the operands or the number of operands to be processed, the time is quoted as an algebraic expression in which:
D
equals the approximate number of decimal digits in each operand.
C
equals the approximate number of characters in each operand.
N
equals the number of operands manipulated during the task; e.g.,
during a table look-up operatum.
The times quoted for all instructions and tasks include reasonable allowances for access
times for both instructions and operands.
In general, it is assumed that all operands except intermediate results in the standard
tasks are held in the working store. Where there is more than one set of working stores
with different access times due to alternative working stores or because of different configurations in which different degrees of interleaving are available, separate times are
stated. It is assumed, also, that instructions are held in sequential locations except in
"n + 1" address systems and that operands are randomly placed with respect to instructions. In computers which use an n + 1 addressing system, it is assumed that only instructions can be optimally placed, but not those instructions that follow instructions
which have any modified address .
.41
Instruction Times
The times quoted in .411 and .412 are for straightforward instructions which have no
allowance for address modification or re -complementing .
.411 Fixed point
The time given for "addition -subtraction" is the average of a simple addition and a simple
subtraction, using as many operands as possible in working storage. For processors
with a variable instruction time, the time for multiplication may be dependent upon the
sizes of both multiplier and multiplicand or only the multiplier. When a first-degree
expression is stated, the number of digits is assumed to be that of the multiplier. Where
a second-degree expression is stated, it is assumed that the sizes of the multiplier and
multiplicand are equal. For division, either a first-order or second-order expression
may be used. When a first-order expression is used, it is assumed that the number of
digits developed in the quotient is the independent variable. Where a second-order expression is used, it is assumed that the sizes of the dividend, divisor and quotient are
all equal. It is assumed that no shifting or scaling is necessary in these operations .
. 412 Floating point
The times for floating pOint instructions are not normally variable because the operands
are fixed usually in size and format. Where more than one size is available, separate
times are stated .
.413 Additional allowance for indexing
The additional allowance for indexing on multi -address instructions may be an expression using a variable A, which is the number of indexed addresses in an instruction.
An additional allowance for indirect addreSSing is quoted per indirect address reference
so that when recursive indirect addreSSing is used, a multiple allowance must be taken
into account.
In some computers which hold negative numbers in a "sign and absolute" form, extra
time during computation is sometimes required to correct the absolute value part of
the number when it alters from a positive to a negative value. This process is called
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:050.414
§
USERS' GUIDE
050.
re-complementing, because it complements an unwanted complement into an absolute
value. If extra time is needed for re-complementing, the time is stated .
. 414 Control
When variable length operands are used, it is assumed that operands of equal size are
compared. Either separate times are quoted for first, a compare instruction, and
second, a branch instruction based upon indicator bits set by the comparison, or else
a time fora jOint instruction, compare and branch. It is assumed that no shifting or
scaling is necessary in these operations .
. 415 Counter control
The counters are index registers, tally registers or other counters used for controlling
loops. A step instruction increments a counter by one unit or the value of the increment.
A test instruction is one that jumps if a counter has not attained an end condition. A
step and test instruction is a joint instruction which steps the counter and tests for the
attainment of the end condition .
.416 Edit
The particular form of instruction provided for editing in individual processors varies
widely. Paragraph. 217 states the facilities covered by this instruction. The time
quoted is normally dependent upon the number of characters manipulated. Where the
operands are of a fixed size, the time is still specified in terms of characters, so that
comparisons with other systems are made easily .
. 417 Convert
Instructions to convert numbers from binary to decimal radices, from decimal to binary
radices, or similar operations, are usually dependent upon the sizes of the operands.
The size of the decimal operand in digits or characters is normally used as the independent variable .
. 418 Shift
The independent variable used in time stated for shift instructions is a number of steps.
Variables B, D and C are used to indicate steps of binary digit, decimal digit, or character positions. In many processors, there are special fast-shifting operations for long
shifts. The times quoted apply to shifts of only a few steps .
. 42
Processor Performance
The times quoted in this paragraph are intended to be directly comparable between one
processor and another. They are largely independent of the style of instruction format
and repertoire of a computer but not of its scope. The most elementary tasks frequently
required in all types of routines are used as standard tasks for timing. Other times
can be formed from them by using selected weightings appropriate to particular applications. Unless otherwise stated, floating point times are for operations using a precision of eight decimal places .
. 421 For random addresses
These are individual small tasks that occur repeatedly during the execution of a routine.
The first two cases do not require any special explanation. The third case is a situation in which a string of items is to be totaled. The total is formed in-line, not in a
loop. The time stated is the increment for each extra item which has to be totaled.
These three different cases give an over -all measure of the performance of addition in
a processor. In the first case, other things being equal, a three-address instruction
format would show to advantage, whereas in the second case, a two-address instruction
format would show to advantage. In the third case, a single-address instruction format
!
4/62
I'-~-U-ER-BA-CH--'-I~
4:050.422
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
050.
using an accumulator would show to advantage. In cumulative multiplication, it is assumed that several pairs of numbers are multiplied and the sum of the products is obtained. The time stated is the increment necessary to deal with another product and
to add to the total.
In all these cases, it is assumed that no operands are destroyed except in the second
addition task .
.422 For arrays of data
These are tasks similar to those in .421 except that they are performed in a loop, and
each task is carried out once per repetition of the loop. The times that are quoted are
for one repetition of the loop, assuming that it is carried out in the most efficient manner. In all the cases, it is assumed that, for each repetition of the loop, "a" and "c"
may be stepped by a unit of the address of their locations, but that "b" must be stepped
by some aribitary value such as 7 or 13 •
. 423 Branch based on comparison
It is assumed that an ordered table of data is held in consecutive locations of a working
store. Each location contains a key and the keys are arranged in an ascending collating
sequence. The task is to find the first point in the table at which a key equals or exceeds a stated value. A search is made for this point using a dichotomous chopping
technique. The time stated is the time per chop. Chart 1 shows the basic loop. Two
times are stated - one for numeric keys and one for alphabetic keys. In order to make
the times realistic measures of branching, each increment that is added to or subtracted from the current address is obtained from a table of increments to reduce any
bias in favor of a binary computer.
CHART 1
Assume that an ordered table of keys stored in locations starts at location A.
Assume that there is a table of increments stored in locations starting at location N. The coding in the boxes in the loop may be altered in sequence to
reduce times, but all of the functions mentioned in the loop must be carried
out.
Box 1:
Set initial address equal A plus first increment.
Box 2:
Compare table key against stated value.
Box 3:
If less, decrease address by next increment; if greater,
decrease address by next increment; if equal, exit.
Box 4:
Test end of table of increments; if not, go back to Box 2.
.424 Switching
.4241 It is assumed that an item of data is numeric in form and its value is used to select a
jump from a table of jumps and execute it. The possible values are the integers 1
through 6. This data switch is usually performed by placing a switch at a location X
in a routine and following it, in locations X + 1, X + 2, x + 3, X + 4, etc., by unconditional jumps which are to be executed if the value of the data item equals 1, 2, 3, 4,
etc. The value of the data item is used to form the address of the switch to jump to
the appropriate unconditional jump .
.4242 This is the same task as .4241 except that two checks are made to insure that the value
of the data item is within range; i.e., that the value is not less than 1 and not greater
than 6.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:050.4243
§
USERS' GUIDE
050 .
.4243 In this task, the data item may only assume one of a set of arbitrary values such as 3,
42, and 87. The value of the data item is compared with each of the possible values in
turn until a match is found; then a jump to the appropriate routine is executed. The
time for this form of switching depends upon the number of comparisons that must be
made before a match is discovered. The time is given in the form "a bN" where "N"
is the number of comparisons made .
. 425 Format control per character
Two tasks are timed - one of Unpacking input data and the other of composing output
data. In unpacking, it is assumed that a card of 80 characters has to be unpacked and
stored as nine separate numbers. In the second task, it is assumed that a line of 120
characters is composed. The times are then divided by 80 and 120, respectively. The
line of print for this task is the one that is used in standard problem A of the System
Performance Section .
• 426 Table look-up for comparison
Three different tasks are considered. We assume that a table of data similar to that
used in .423 is held in the store, and only in the third of these tasks is it necessarily
ordered. In these particular tasks, the table is scanned in sequence from one end to
the other, and many computers have special table look-up operations to enhance their
performance.. In the first task, comparisons of each key are made with the stated value
until any match is found. In the second task, a search is made through the entire table
and a note made of the address of the least or greatest key in the table. In this task,
the time stated is the average of the two cases in which a change is, and is not, made
to the current minimum or maximum. In the third task, a search is made through the
table until the first key that exceeds the stated value is formed.
The times stated are the increments required for each extra key that is examined .
. 427 Bit indicators
In a computer which has special facilities for dealing with arrays of bits in patterns,
times are stated for operations on patterns, but where these facilities are not available,
times are quoted for operations on single bits in separate locations. In this latter case,
of course, one word, or one character, is used to hold one bit of data in the most convenient way, perhaps by the values zero and non-zero .
.4271 Set bit in separate location
This is normally a simple move or store operation to put a value one or zero into a
location .
.4272 Set bit in pattern
Where tests or different values of a bit may be different, an average is taken.
·.5
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
A list is given of all of the major types of error that may occur within the central processor and the types of checks or interlocks that are provided to detect or protect
against the errors. In some cases, particular types of errors are not possible because
of the mode of operation or control of the central processor. If, when a check fails or
an interlock is applied, some action is automatically taken, this is also stated. The
most usual case for action for an interlock is that the operation waits until the interlock
is removed. The most common types of errors are as follow:
Overflow - Meaning that the size of an operand generated as a result of an operation exceeds the capacity of the location or register intended to receive it.
4/62
4:050.500
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
050.
Underflow - This is an error which occurs only with floating point operations in
which the number generated as the result of a multiplication or a normalized addition or subtraction has an exponent algebraically smaller than the smallest allowed
by the conventions.
Zero Divisor - Meaning that a division has been attempted in which the divisor is
zero and therefore the division is not meaningful.
Invalid Data - Meaning that some particular pattern of a character or digit or type
of data has been encountered, but is not permitted in the operation that is being
attempted.
Invalid Operation - Meaning that an operation code has been encountered in an instruction which does not exist in the repertoire.
Arithmetic Error - Meaning that a check of the arithmetic shows that an error ha's
occurred. The verification may consist of duplicate operation of the arithmetic
or some form of redundancy check such as casting out nines.
Invalid Address - Meaning that a request for access has occurred to an address
which cannot exist or does not exist in the system.
Receipt of Data - Meaning that an operand or instruction has been received in the
central processor from storage but that the check supplied to insure correct
transmittal of data has failed; for example, a parity check.
Particular types of action are:
Stop - Meaning that the processor is immediately stopped and cannot continue until
some action is taken by another unit or an operator.
Alarm - Meaning that a lamp or other signal indicates to the operator that this
check has failed.
Signal - Meaning that some automatic action is taken by the equipment, such as
re -computing a number or making a re -tJ;ansmittal of data.
Indicator - Meaning that this is a condition that can be tested by instructions if
they are so written in a routine.
Other possible forms of action are error correction using redundant codes or special
branching to specific locations.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:060.100
Users Guide
Console
CONSOLE
§
060 .
.1
GENERAL
The console is that part or those parts of a computer configuration provided for the use
of the operator. The console provides a display of the current status of the computer
and its contents, a means of starting, stopping and otherwise controlling its operation
manually, and channels of communication between the operator and executive routines
or operational routines .
. 11
Identity
The identity of the various consoles may take several forms: full name, model number,
and an abbreviated name used throughout the report. All of these are included in the
contents of the individual system .
. 12
Associated Units
The console cabinet or pedestal may contain several other related units which have
separate identities, such as input-output typewriters and special display units. These
are listed in two sections: those that are attached permanently to the console, and those
which are optional.
.13
Description
This paragraph states the general characteristics of the console and notes any novel or
outstanding features. If any optional features are available, it describes their advantages .
.2
CONTROLS
A list is given of the important controls provided upon the console and for each control
is stated first, how it is provided, and second, its effect. The provision of the control
may be simple on-off buttons, rotary switches, keys, multi-way switches or even calibrated dials. The controls are classified under the following headings:
.21
Power - both for individual units and the system as a whole, including an "emergency
off" control.
.22
Connections - any switches or other controls which enable the operator to set up connections between peripheral units and controllers, the identities of peripheral units, or the
on -off line switching of peripheral units .
. 23
Stops and Restarts - controls which enable the operator to halt or continue the operation
of the central processor and peripheral units .
. 24
Stepping - facilities by which the individual sequencing and stepping from instruction to
instruction or through other elementary operations is under manual control rather than
automatic control .
. 25
Resets - controls which enable the operator to remove conditions which have been set
up by errors and faults and which have usually interlocked the machine against further
operation. One particular type of reset is that of clearing the store before loading new
programs.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:060.260
§
USERS' GUIDE
060 .
. 26
Loading - any special facilities which are used for the loading of new routines - sometimes just a single button; sometimes a series of actions which have to be performed .
. 27
Special - this includes miscellaneous features such as special switches to make one
machine compatible with another, to remove interruptions, or to ignore special checks
such as overflow .
.3
DISPLAY
Display covers all those facilities by which data held within the internal store of the
computer can be shown to the operator either in a transient form on cathode ray tubes
or neon lamp and digital displays or in a permanent form as printout on typewriters.
For each type of display are stated its name, its physical form, whether it is a static
or dynamic display, and whether it is permanent or transient.
.31
Alarms
These are usually displays by single lamps which light up when particular faults occur.
It is important that these be clearly visible or audible at a distance from the console .
. 32
Conditions
These displays show under which conditions the computer is operating, such as whether
or not interruptions are being permitted, or whether or not overflow is being permitted.
These are often color-coded .
. 33
Control Registers
These are usually transient displays of the bit patterns in the accumulators and the
sequence control and sometimes other central processor registers .
. 34
Storage
The display of storage is useful in fault tracing and sometimes as a regular means of
display under program control. The important factors are the quantity that can be displayed at one time and whether the display can be static although the computer is
running .
.4
ENTRY OF DATA
Many consoles provide means by which manual insertion of data into the computer is
possible. For each of the various types of data that can be entered, the following items
are stated: first, the method by which data can be entered, such as switches for individual bits or a telephone dial; and second, the volume of data that can be inserted at
one time. Two particular types of entry are distinguished .
.41
Into Control Registers
.4 2
Into Storage
.5
CONVENIENCES
This paragraph lists the important facors which determine the general convenience of
use of a particular console .
. 51
Communication
If any special means of communication with the data preparation room or the library or
another remote place is provided by means of a special telephone or hand set, this is
stated.
4/62
4:060.520
CONSOLE
§
060 .
. 52
Clock
A logging of the progress of computer runs is a fundamental part of good control and
some consoles provide a clock for convenient reference ]Jy the operator. The clock may
be dependent upon the computer power supplies .
. 53
Desk Space
The amount of space available to the operator is stated in terms of the length and depth
of the desk, and its height above the ground .
. 54
View
The view of the operator from the control desk should not be unduly impeded. He should
be able to see all the peripheral units that may be arranged in the configuration. The
view may be described from the consideration· of an operator standing or sitting •
.6
INPUT-OUT UNIT
Where a computer console contains an input-output unit, usually for communication with
executive routines or working programs, it is described .
. 61
Identity
The identity of the various units may take several forms: full name, model number,
and an abbreviated name used throughout the report. All of these are included in the
contents of the individual system .
. 62
Description
This paragraph states the general characteristics of the unit and notes any novel or outstanding features. If any optional features are available, it describes their advantages .
. 63
Performance
These are the speeds at which the device can operate, though the actual operation of
input is usually limited by the operator's ability unless he is using such devices as prepunched tapes or cards.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and RNA Incorporated
4/62
4:070.100
Users' Guide
Input-Output
INPUT-OUTPUT
§
070 .
.1
GENERAL
Input-output embraces all the principal methods for transferring data between internal
and external storage within any computer system; i. e ., those methods where the transfer is essentially sequential as far as the external storage is concerned. For example,
a system such as the magnetic card CRAM unit (made by National Cash Register Company) would be considered as an input-output unit and described in this section. Such a
system is also covered as a random access internal storage unit. Where external
storage is used primarily as changeable internal storage, it is not reported from an
input -output viewpoint unless rapid bulk loading is practicable. When a unit is described in more than one place, it is cross-referenced .
. 11
Identity
The identity of a device may take several forms: its full name, its model number, an
abbreviated name used throughout the report, and perhaps a nickname by which it is
widely known. All of these are included in the index for the individual system and in
the general index. Where several versions of the unit have similar characteristics,
they are described in a common set of statements. Annotations, which describe differences between them, are distinguished by the abbreviated name .
. 12· Description
This paragraph states the general characteristics of all the versions available, notes
the differences between them, and notes any novel or outstanding features. It states
whether the unit is an adaptation of a well-known unit or has other interesting antecedents. It also makes clear whether the unit is an input or output unit or some combination of the two. When a unit works in such a way that input and output cannot be
separated, they are covered jointly in one section of the report. If any optional features
are available, their official names, abbreviations, and associated advantages are stated
The brief description states the basic speeds and any important drawbacks .
. 13
Availability
The first available date quoted is preferably a fully operational date; otherwise, a date
for first pilot operation or field tests is given. In the intervening period, both dates
may be given .
. 14
First Delivery
This is the date of first delivery to and acceptance by a customer .
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
The physical form section identifies the form of the drive mechanisms that control the
movement of the external storage medium; the system used for recording on the external
storage medium and for sensing the data pattern held there; the read or write heads;
the physical arrangement of these heads; and the provisions for making multiple copies .
. 21
Drive Mechanism
This section describes the mechanics provided to transport the external storage medium
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:070.211
§
USERS' GUIDE
070.
throughtheunit. In input-output devices with reservoirs, there may be three drive mechanisms. For example, in magnetic tape units there are often separate motors for the
feed and take -up spools and a third drive for taking the storage medium past the heads.
Often all three are integrated into one system, as in a card reader .
. 211 Drive past the head
The most complex cases of drives past the head occur in printers where intermittent
motion is required. Several alternative systems are used, ranging from simple friction drives used on low speed devices to duplicate push and pull traction used for accurate registration at high printing speeds. On other units, pinch or clutch operated
rollers are widely used. The recently-developed pneumatic capstan drives are used on
some magnetic tape units .
. 212 Reservoirs
The most difficult problem in building reliable high-speed input-output devices is the
need for intermittent operation in order to avoid the need to prepare all programs with
the unbearable restriction that input-output units must be run at full speed for long
periods. The mechanical problem is overcoming the inertia of the external storage
medium in any series of rapid stops and starts. Two indirect methods of reducing the
overheads involved - -off -line use and large block sizes - -are discussed later. The direct
method is use of reservoirs. They are buffers between the drive past the heads and
those for the supply and take -up locations. This means that the inertia to be overcome
by the drive past the head is small, and then high speeds and low overheads are obtainable. The control is normally a servo-mechanism using an on-off or proportion signal
method of control. SenSing of the amount of material in the reservoir is provided by
photocells, pressure sensitive devices, or other sensors .
. 213 Feed drive
Feed drive is the mechanism which (in forward running of the external storage in a
serial manner) fills the reservoir which is emptied by the drive past the heads .
. 214 Take-up drive
The take-up drive empties the reservoir filled by the drive past the head .
. 22
SenSing and Recording Systems
Even an output unit may include a sensing system in order to provide some form of
checking of a recording. Checking of recording is imperative if important results are
to be stored for some considerable time, especially if they are in a form not legible to
human beings. Many installations without an output check re -read the recording on an
input unit to verify the recording .
. 221 Recording system
The greatest variety in recording systems that affects the user occurs in printers where
the system of forming the individual characters affects both the clarity in the various
copies and the repertoire available. The method of selecting the symbol and causing it
to appear on the output medium is stated here. Recording using magnetic heads is
straightforward except that the various methods of recording patterns are not compatible; e. g., "non -return to zero" and "return to zero" representations. There is one
special method of punching tape in which the holes are not completely punched called
"chadless tape", which cannot usually be read by photoelectric readers .
• 222 Sensing system
The most important varieties of senSing arc::: the special methods of character recognition and of output checking. In character reading, there is the fundamental difference
between photoelectric reading which requires no special ink, and magnetic reading
4/62
4:070.223
INPUT.OUTPUT
§
070.
which can tolerate more creases and spurious marks. It is of prime importance to
note whether or not an output checking system actually senses the external storage
medium; for example, a magnetic tape recording check may sense the recording at a
separate head (called a read-back check), may only verify the parity of data received
from the processor, or may sense the current in the recording head (called an echo
check). An echo check cannot guarantee that the recording is accurate. A recording
on a tape with flaws may be incorrect although an echo check is satisfactory.
· 223 Common system
In some cases, a single system is used alternatively either to sense or to record, and
only one type of operation can be executed at a time, as on magnetic tape with a single
head. In other cases, such as a complex read-punch-read card unit, both sensing
and punching may be available, either jointly or separately .
. 23
Multiple Copies
This section normally refers only to printers, but it also covers the special cases
where a paper tape punch can produce duplicates by running two tapes under the dies or
where two units can be connected simultaneously to one output control to produce
duplicates .
. 231 Maximum number
The fact that multilith or spirit masters can be generated for producing multiple copies
elsewhere is not counted here. In obtaining the maximum number of copies, it is assumed that optimum supplies of raw storage medium are used, such as special quality
paper and carbons. No special setting-up procedures or adjustments are permitted,
only those that are considered standard .
. 232 Types of master
The types of reproducible masters that can be prepared are stated.
· 24
Arrangement of Heads
The arrangement of heads in an input-output device corresponds closely to the arrangement of data on the storage medium. At anyone time, a single head is associated with
some particular track, a stack of heads is associated with some particular band, and
sometimes several stacks of heads are physically united in a yoke which is associated
with a set of bands. The heads are physically located at various positions called stations in the path of the external storage medium past the heads. This section describes
the patterns, pOSition and use of each station and the heads used in each station.
The details for each station are stated separately in the sequence in which the external
storage medium passes through them.
The use may be invariant, as at a punching station, or dual-purpose record or sense,
as in some magnetiC tape systems. Where necessary, separate columns are given for
the cases of different usage.
The distance quoted is the distance from the previous station stated in convenient units,
usually of storage locations; e. g., I card or 20 rows.
Where the number of stacks is other than one, or where the heads per stack are not
equal to the number of tracks, the explanation is given under "operation." "Operation"
also explains which stacks are active during the different operations.
· 25
Range of Characters
The range of characters is important in two cases:
(1) The major case is on printers, where the standard and any alternative character
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation aAd BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:070.300
§
USERS' GUIDE
070.
sets are important. The total is based on the recognizably different characters.
If the letter "0" and numeral "0" are different, they are shown so; if not, the
numerals 0 to 9 will be counted as only nine in number. The ability of the avail-
able character sets to meet the specifications for the ALGOL, FORTRAN, and
COBOL languages is indicated. The COBOL requirements permit the use of
special alternative characters in pairs or singles, but this answer assumes no
such substitutions. Any electives included will be shown separately.
(2)
.3
This paragraph reports any special characters such as special patterns on magnetic tape that are ignored by the data circuits but recognized by control circuits .
EXTERNAL STORAGE
The "external storage" is the medium on which, or from which, data is recorded or
sensed by the input-output device. This section is concerned with the medium itself;
the phenomenon used for the recording; the arrangements or format of the data on the
medium; the coding used; whether the formats and codes are compatible with any other
special or standard systems; and any important physical dimensions .
• 31
Form of Storage
This paragraph describes the medium itself and its supporting medium where appropriate (as in magnetic tape where the magnetized medium is supported upon a plastic
tape), and the phenomenon used to indicate the various patterns of data. The phenomenon may be punched holes, or patterns of magnetization, or printing of characters on
paper, or even key depressions on a typewriter keyboard. Where a device such as the
Flexowriter is used, there may be several varieties of external storage that are not
blended together. If so, each is listed separately (for example, a keyboard, punched
tape, edge-punched cards). In such a case, reports are completed separately for each .
. 32
Positional Arrangement
The arrangements of the data on the external storage medium are closely associated
with the arrangements of the heads .
. 321 Serial by locations
Normally, rows of data succeed each other, as operated on by one stack of heads as the
medium goes past the heads .
. 322 Parallel by locations
Each row in a band is composed of a mark in each track. Exceptions in terminology
can occur; for example, a Sideways card reader, which reads the data one column at a
time, each consisting of holes in several rows .
. 323 Bands
A section of storage on the external medium is normally composed of a fixed or variable
number of rows of data recorded on one band. If there is more than one set of bands,
the total number of bands is stated and also the reason for the multiplicity of the bands.
Multipie bands may be used for simple duplication of the data or as logically separate
bands containing data which are read at different times; for example, a magnetic tape
which is divided into two bands, one of which is recorded in one direction when unwinding, the other of which is recorded in the other direction and rewinds the spool. Another example is the magnetic cards in CRAM: each has seven bands which can be read
only one at a time. Sets of tracks which are separated only for timing purposes, but
are all read together as one block of data or recorded in this way, are treated as one
band for this report, except for duplicates.
I
A-U-ER-BA-CH-'-:-@
'--1
4/62
4:070.324
INPUT-OUTPUT
§ 070 .
. 324 Track use
In most systems, individual tracks have permanent roles assigned to the data recorded
in each. On magnetic tape, a clock track is physically similar to a data track; but on
punched tape, the clock track, called the sprocket track, is normally composed of much
smaller holes than the data tracks. The major uses of tracks are for data (the patterns
that are read into the system and manipulated in computations and data rearrangements).
check bits, control signals, or clock tracks. Sometimes the information may be arranged in such a way that it is self-clocking; that is, there is at least one signal in each
row, and by mixing all tracks, a clock track is not necessary. Redundancy checks can
consist of simple parity checks or sophisticated error-correcting codes. The partictllar kind of code is noted. Some tracks may be used for special control signals, such
as addresses of blocks on pre-addressed tapes. There may be spare or unused tracks.
Where there are many bands with the same layout, the layout for one band is given .
. 325 Row use
Where the external storage is divided into fixed sections, it is possible to specify the
rows allocated to specific uses. These include the delimiters used, any longitudinal
check row positions, and the intersection gap, if it is calibrated. Where variable block
sizes determine the section size, the use is given in terms of the variable unit of block
size .
. 33
Coding
Except for printers, the marks that are made on the external medium are normally
binary, hole or no hole, mark or no mark, etc. The coding of information is an equivalence set up between printable characters or symbols and the patterns which the marks
can take. Data code tables show the characters and symbols that are equivalent to the
various patterns by breaking down the pattern into two parts, assuming that it is a
binary pattern. The binary equivalent of the code is divided into a more significant
part and a less significant part; for example, a sextet may be broken into two bits and
four bits, a punched card into punching curtates, an upper and a lower curtate, in
which there may be multiple punchings .
. 34
Format Compatibility
Compatibility involves two factors - - (a) format, and (b) code. Format compatibility
means that the patterns of data produced by this unit can be sensed or recorded in some
other system. Then, even though the coded representation may be different and a code
translation is necessary, it is possible to transmit data from one system to the other,
even if not convenient. Code compatibility means that no code translation is necessary,
and the format and patterns are equivalent in the two systems. If only formats are
compatible, a statement is made indicating whether and in what way the translation can
be provided automatically .
. 35
Physical Dimensions
The physical dimensions indicate the size of the external storage medium and whether
the sizes are any particular standard .
. 351 Over-all width
In many cases, the Width, particularly of a tape, is fixed; but paper tape may vary in
width, as may stationery on a printer. In this case, it is also important to know the
increments of width that can be accepted, as well as the minimum and the maximum
dimensions .
. 352 Length
Lengths are important on tapes, indicating whether there is a fixed size or some
variability. On printers, it is important to know the maximum and minimum lengths
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:070.353
§
USERS' GUIDE
070.
and the increments that can be handled for continuous stationery or single-sheet
feeding .
. 353 Maximum margins
On printers, it is also important to know the sizes of allowable margins. Although the
printing width can be subtracted from the maximum over-all width, the margin allowance is not always equal on both sides. Of course, extra margins can always be made
available by not using certain numbers of the left or right hand printing positions .
•4
CONTROLLER
The controller of an input-output device may be part of a device or a part of a central
processor; it may be a separate unit which must always be present; or it may be one of
a variety of alternative units depending upon the extent of Simultaneous operations required. In complex systems, there may be a hierarchy of controllers. Where the different controllers have an important effect upon the performance of the system, separate replies are made for different varieties of the controlling system. The controller embraces all the facilities covering the flow of data between the input-output area
and the external storage medium .
. 41
Identity
The identities of the various controllers are cross-referenced and indexed. The crossreferencing is particularly important where a controller may be able to control a variety
of different types of input-output devices. The official name, model number and abbreviated name are given .
. 42
Connection to System
.421 On-line
Normally, there are quite rigid restrictions upon the number of controllers that can be
connected to a system in an on -line configuration. The System Configuration Section
shows some of the more popular varieties, and rules are given here for the general
restrictions .
.4 22 Off -line
Many systems provide for input-output devices to be used off-line. Sometimes
the normal on -line controllers can be used; at other times they must be replaced
by or used in connection with special off-line adapters. Where off-line operation is
possible, the special equipment necessary is also listed .
. 43
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller
The important criterion covering the connection of the individual input-output devices
to a controller is the maximum number of devices which the controller can have connected to it at one time. This may be as low as one or as many as Sixty-four on some
magnetic tape systems. On accasion, there are the special cases where several controllers may be connected to many input-output devices and there is no unique relationship between them. In other cases, a controller may be able to be connected to more
devices than it can control simultaneously. Example are given in the System Configuration Section .
. 432 Restrictions
When a controller can handle different types of input-output devices, there may be restrictions on the maximum number of each. This may depend upon the configuration.
Over-all maxima are also stated where appropriate.
4/62
4:070.440
INPUT-OUTPUT
§ 070 •
. 44
Data Transfer Control
The most important questions concerning data transfers which are carried out by the
controller are the sizes of the loads of data that can be transferred and the provision
for synchronization that may be necessary, particularly if the input-output device relies
on program control of timing during input and output. Another important area is the
means of protection of the output or input area .
. 441 Size of load
A load is the volume of data that can be transferred by one instruction .
. 442 Input-output areas
As far as data transfer control is concerned, the 1-0 area is that location from which
the output program instruction directs data to be sent to a recording device, or the location to which the input program instruction directs it to be transferred. Although
there may be one or more automatically controlled buffers between this area and external storage, they are not specified here. It may be a part of working storage or a
special store provided especially for an input or output area .
. 443 Input-output area access
The access to these areas may vary from simple access to a special area addressed as
a single location to the completely general access when the area is a part of the working memory .
. 444 Input-output area lockout
Any interlocks provided are specified. Because a program might inadvertently alter
information in an output area before it had been copied, or could read information from
an input area before it had been filled and use it inadvertently, any checks or interlocks that can be provided here are important. These may be of two kinds: either an
absolute lockout to all the information until the input or output operation is complete,
or the rather more sophisticated gradual release of the lockout on parts of the information as it is read or recorded. One system might allow any reading from an output
annex, but only writing in locations which have been copied for output. If there are no
interlocks, the programmer must normally use a "test busy" instruction, and program
the interlock .
.445 Table control
Normal input or output operations provide for dealing with input or output areas which
are composed of a series of consecutive locations. Some sophisticated systems provide a table control for input or output in which various sub-areas may be scattered
throughout internal storage. In such cases, the table may specify the first location of
each sub-block together with its size, or each sub-block may contain a delimiter at its
end. Data may be gathered from many placed for output in one block, or scattered to
many places while input from one block .
. 446 Synchronization
Automatic provision of the synchronization implies that the programmer cannot make
any timing errors in instructions concerning this input-output device. If it is not automatic, considerable effort must be applied to provide it in each program .
.447 Synchronizing aids
If the synchronization is not completely automatic, it is important to show which facili-
ties are available to the programmer to enable him to control the timing: either the
primitive form in which he has to mark time on an instruction until a lock-out is
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:070.500
§
USERS' GUIDE
070.
released, or the intermittent testing of a busy signal, or the sophisticated use of interruption when the busy condition disappears .
.5
PROGRAM FACIUTIES AVAILABLE
This section is concerned with all the facilities available to the program to control the
movement of the external storage medium and the transfers of data between the internal
storage and the external storage medium, as well as any special facilities that are
made available to assist in this task .
. 51
Blocks
A block of data held in external storage is an item of data held in a single section. When
sections, such as punched cards, are of a fixed size, the block is usually the same
size. Occasionally on output, a block may. not fill a section, and then input may be able
to ignore the empty part of a section. This can be made possible by a block delimiter
or by an input operation with a cut-off controlled by a counter. In most.cases where
the form of the storage medium does not require a fixed section size, such as magnetic
or punched tape, section size is determined by block size, and it is only necessary to
insure that section gaps or other facilities are provided to permit separate input of
each block. In all cases, all blocks of data can be read separately in turn by a sequence of input instructions, although instructions may be able to be given to read an
incomplete set of blocks using some cut-off technique. A subsequent input would
probably begin at the start of the next block .
. 511 Size of Block
This paragraph states whether or not the size is fixed and gives the size. It also gives
the variation and limits of size for variable sized blocks. Often a block has a conventional name; for example, a line of print, a card, or even one character .
. 512 Block Demarcation
This should be specified for the two separate cases of input and output. In cases where
the size is not fixed, demarcation is normally either specified by a counter or by a delimiter such as an end-of-block character .
. 52
Input-Output Operations
This paragraph covers all the operations available for transferring data between the internal and external storage, and movement of the external storage .
. 521 Input
This paragraph lists the various input operations pos sible. In the case of variable
amounts of data that can be input under the control of the input instruction, the limits
and varieties which are possible are noted. This may be a variable number of characters, but if an input instruction may specify a single block which may itself be variable, it is noted as an invariable instruction because the variation is in the data, not
in the instruction. In some cases, there may be a cut-off applied to cause the input to
stop after a certain volume has been transferred, even if the number of blocks specified by the instructions has not been completed. For magnetic tape, it is noted whether
blocks can be read backward as well as forward .
. 522 Output
This is essentially the same as that provided for input, except that in this case the
block sizes as well as the number of blocks may be varied; the possible sizes of blocks,
however, and the method of demarcation have already been noted in §070.51 above.
It is unusual when output can be performed backward, but if it is possible, it is so
noted. Partly-filled sections are possible on outputs; for example, an output instruction might specify 100 characters through a card punch, which is interpreted
4/62
./
4:070.523
INPUT .OUTPUT
§
070.
as 2 blocks, the first consisting of 80 characters and the second of 20, the remainder
of the second card being left empty .
. 523 Stepping
Stepping is the operation of moving the external storage medium backward or forward
a specified number of locations or a specified distance. The most frequent cases are
a single backspace on a magnetiC tape or stepping the paper forward a certain number
of line spaces on a printer. It does not include the automatic stepping that is essential,
such as the feeding forward of a single card when punching. It notes the range of possibilities and whether they are separate operations or combined with inpu~ and/or
output. When they are combined with other operations, it is important to specify
whether the stepping occurs before or after the input or output operation .
. 524 Skipping
This is similar to stepping, except that the distance or number of positions that the external storage medium is moved is not explicit; but the movement forward or backward
is to some special type of marking. This may be a special control mark on a magnetiC
tape or a hole in a paper tape loop on a printer with an automatic carriage. It is important in this case that the number of alternative skipping controls available be specified. This facility also includes, as a special case, the operation of moving to a specific address, which applies when the external storage medium is divided into sectors,
each of which has an individual address permanently recorded with it on the external
storage medium. Noted particularly are those cases where stepping and skipping are
alternatives or combinations .
. 525 Marking
These are cases where special marks, not normally recognized by the ordinary data
input circuits, can be recorded ready to be sensed, for example, by a skipping facility.
This is normally confined to magnetic tape .
. 526 Searching
This is a special form of skipping usually combined with an input operation. In searching, a criterion "is provided by the program as a data pattern, which is compared with
all blocks (while moving either forward or backward in external storage) until some
particular condition exists. The normal conditions are either "equality" or else
"greater than or equal to, " enabling the external storage medium to be positioned
ready to read the next data in sequence •
. 53
Code Translation
Data in external storage is normally represented by some pattern of marks. The particular patterns in external storage are the external storage code, and this may be related to the internal storage code in one of four ways:
a.
Matched Codes
In this case, the patterns of information in external storage are the same as
those in internal storage code, and no translation is necessary. Usually there
are special or general-purpose equipments that prepare data in these patterns
if it originated externally, or else it occurred naturally as previous output of
a computer.
b.
Automatic Input Translation
In this case, the external code is standard to the computer but is different from
the internal form, and the input controller makes the translation automatically.
When the controller can deal with several external codes, it is called "variable
automatic input translation. "
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:070.540
§
USERS' GUIDE
070.
C'.
Automatic Processor Translation
In this case, the external code is different from the internal storage code. The
input controller makes no translation, but a special translation instruction is
provided in the program repertoire to make the translation to internal code. A
translation instruction which can deal with several external codes is called
"variable automatic processor translation. "
d.
No Translation
In this case, the external code is different from the internal code, and no auto-
matic translation operations are provided; therefore, they must be provided by
a programmed subroutine .
. 54
Format Control
In the simplest and most general case, there is a fixed one-to-one correspondence be-
tween locations for data in the internal storage and the external storage. Where this is
not true, format editing has been provided. This may be provided in one of two ways:
either by some form of external control panel or plug board in the controller, or by
means of some special format instructions or data that have been given to it by the program. It is important to show how many alternative formats are available for transformatfon at anyone time and whether it is possible to alter them under program control. Other important features that may be provided in addition to data rearrangement
are zero suppression,' insertion of special characters, and control of arithmetic signs .
. 55
Control Operations
These are operations which, in general, make for greater convenience in setting up
operating systems. To "disable" a device is to put it into a condition in which it is not
able to respond to further instructions until enabled by an operator. Disabling is usually used in cases where the operator is required to reload, replenish or adjust the equipment before it is used any further in the program. In particular, the operation "unload"
on a magnetic tape device disables the device, whereas "rewind" does not. To rewind
is to wind the tape back on to the supply spool in a position in which it can be read or
written again from the start. To unload is normally to carry out the operation of rewind, sometimes to unthread and then to disable the device.
Where interruption facilities are available in the central processor, it is sometimes
possible to request interruptions after a specific input or output operation is completed.
On punch card equipment, it is often possible to specify that the card which has just
been read or punched can be directed to some particular stacker under program control
or that other cards be offset in their stacker so that they may be readily recognized by
the operator .
. 56
Testable Conditions
In order to be able to make efficient use of the computer and implement an efficient
operating system, it is a great convenience if the program itself can test for many of
the external conditions that will affect its future progress. This enables it to rearrange
its schedule to a more efficient form, or to keep a log, or to inform the operator that
his attention to certain devices is required. The conditions that are most frequently
provided for testing are as follow:
Disabled - - This means that the device will not respond to instructions until it has
been enabled by an operator.
Busy device -- This means that the device is still carrying out some operation requested earlier, but is not disabled and will be available later.
4/62
AUERBACH /
BNA
4:070.600
INPUT -OUTPUT
§
070.
Busy controller - - This shows that even if the device is not busy, its controller, or
all possible controllers that may be used with the device, are busy and
therefore a wait is necessary until the device can be used.
Output lock - - This means that a lock has been applied which prevents any recording
into the external storage, and only reading is permitted.
Nearly exhausted - - This means that the external storage in the supply spool or input
hopper is nearly exhausted and that replenishment will soon be necessary.
Operating procedures often require that special sentinel and other routines be initiated. It is important to know the minimum volume of the
storage medium that remains .
.6
PERFORMANCE
This paragraph shows how different conditions, such as choice of controller, and the
peak or optimum speeds of the equipment, influence the overheads occurring in normal
use, and what are the resulting effective speeds. In addition, it lists the demands that
operation of these devices make on the other parts of the system; for example, the extent to which the internal store and central processor are prevented from doing other
work while each input-output operation is proceeding. Special overheads are indicated,
such as the processing time required to translate data which has not been automatically
translated during.input, or will not be translated during output. It does not include
times and overheads for external operations such as reloading, replenishment and
operator adjustments, which are specified later .
. 61
Conditions
When the choice of controller or other factors influence the performance of the device,
the various combinations for which separate performance figures are calculated are
given. These are normally related to the different configurations that have been shown
earlier .
. 62
Speeds
This paragraph gives the operating speeds of the equipment independent of loading and
operator adjustments. They are quoted in the normally-accepted units such as blocks
per second, lines per minute, characters per second, etc .
. 621 Nominal or peak speed
This is the instantaneous speed of which the equipment is capable, and is the usual speed
quoted in specifications, making no allowances for overheads such as stopping, starting, record gaps, etc .
. 622 Important parameters
These are the various parameters from which the overheads and effective speeds can
be computed or estimated. They include such details as gap sizes, stop-start times,
storage medium speeds, and fixed block lengths,etc .
. 623 Overhead
This paragraph shows how the overhead can be computed. The overhead is normally
related to a line, or a block of some kind, and is based upon the parameters stated
above. It may also include statements regarding the number of clutch points per cycle
on equipment such as card readers and punches. In computing the overheads for magnetic tape, allowance is made for re -reading and for all elapsed time between recording separate loads. Other overheads include: a fixed delay after a stop signal during
which a start signal cannot be given; a certain amount of switching time to be taken into
account. Switching from read to write or write to read on the same device is not taken
into account here.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:070.624
§
USERS' GUIDE
070 .
. 624 Effective speeds
Stated here is a formula or a graph showing the effective speed computed for various
load sizes or other variables. Suitable values for load sizes are 30, 100, 300, and
1,000 characters, or (when printing) I, 2, 3, 4, and 6 line spacings as well as I inch,
2 inch, and· 4 inch spacing. Also stated are all the timing criteria that must be met if
maximum speeds are to be maintained •
. 63
Demands on System.
This paragraph shows the extent to which other parts of the computer system are involved with the various operations that are carried out, such as input, output, searching' etc. The parts usually involved are the central processor, an internal store, and
the controller. Controllers are not listed here if they are used full-time with the inputoutput unit. The various types of involvement depend upon conditions such as the different controllers that are available and their options, as well as the different types of
operations that are being carried out. The time may be quoted in several ways, either
as a fixed amount of time per block or load, or as a percentage of the time involved in
a block or in a load, or as a combination of the two .
•7
EXTERNAL FACIUTIES
This paragraph lists the controls and adjustments that are provided for the operator
and shows the facilities available for holding external storage medium. It also derives
the overheads associated with operators' actions. There are two basic types of operation concerned. The'first is the simple operation of replenishment during a run in
which new supplies of storage medium must be loaded and old supplies taken off. The
second is initial loading in which, apart from the loading of new external storage
medium, it may be necessary to make adjustments because of different widths of stationery, etc .
. 71
Adjustments
This is a list of all the adjustments that may be necessary when loading new material
for a new job. The particular adjustment required is noted, the method by which the
operator makes it, such as a knob, a button or a SWitch, and finally any calibration by
which he may determine the setting other than by trial and error. Only the adjustments
that may be necessary in the course of ordinary operating are listed, not those required of a maintenance engineer from time to time .
. 72
Other Controls
This paragraph includes all special controls other than power on -off and card run -in
and card run-out that may be provided on the device for use by the operators. This includes special switches for controlling code conversion, or setting the nominal speed
of the equipment •
. 73
Loading and Unloading
This concerns the locations supplied for external storage and t.he times necessary for
typical manual operations •
. 731 Volumes handled
This paragraph shows the maximum volume of material that the device can handle without attention. The separate capacities of in,put hoppers or supply spools and output
stackers or take-up spools are stated. Where there. are multiple hoppers or stackers,
the paragraph gives the capacity of the maximum hopper and maximum stacker, showing
the others as alternatives, since the usual method of operation is movement of cards
from· one hopper to one stacker. The alternatives are generally used for exceptional
cases only. The capacity may be quoted in any. convenient unit, normally as a length
of tape on a reel, or a number of cards; but for stationery, the only convenient unit is
4/62
4:070.732
1NPUT-OUTPUT
§
070.
normally the height of the stack. It may be noted that a l2-inch stack of stationery corresponds approximately to 2,500, 1,000 or 600 sets of fanfold continuous forms for 1-,
2- or 3- part sets with interleaved carbon, respectively .
. 732 Replenishment time
This is the typical time required by an operator to replenish the input hopper of a device and empty the output stacker when no adjustments are necessary. In particular,
it is noted whether or not the device or other equipment must be stopped during this
operation .
. 733 Adjustment time
This is the time necessary for an operator to adjust the equipment for a new job in
which the storage medium has different dimensions or for any other reason. It includes
changing c;:ontrol panels, etc .
. 734 Optimum reloading period
This is a time interval which can be used together with the operating times to compute
an operating overhead. It is assumed that the computer is running in such a way that
the input-output unit is working at its maximum effective speed. This, then, is the
time interval at which replenishment is necessary if at each occasion the input hopper
is fully loaded and the output stacker emptied .
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
This shows all of the major types of error that may occur within the input-output system' and the types of checks or interlocks that are provided to detect or protect against
errors. In some cases, particular types of error are not possible because of the mode
of operation of the device. If, when the check fails, or an interlock is applied, some
action is automatically taken, this is also noted. The most usual case of action for an
interlock is that the operation waits until the interlock is removed. The most common
types of error are as follow:
Recording - - This is an incorrect recording of the output on the external storage
medium. (This error may be detected by a reading check which implies that the external storage medium has been read back for the check or by an echo check, which
is a more limited type. )
Input Area Overflow - - This may occur if a variable length block is larger than the
input area set aside to receive it. An output block size error occurs if, for example,
recording too long a line is attempted.
Invalid Code - - This occurs when some particular pattern of an internal or external
code is not acceptable to the controller.
Exhausted Medium - - This means that there is no further tape on a tape machine, or
cards in a card reader, or paper in a printer.
Imperfect Medium -- On an output device, this can be completely checked only by
rereading. Where rereading is not available, there is sometimes a limited facility
for checking certain imperfections.
Timing Conflicts - - These arise when the central processor attempts to start a new
operation before the previous one has been completed. Where automatic interlocks
are not available, it is necessary to program them using a busy signal or some
means of timing.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:070.800
§
USERS' GUIDE
070.
Particulare types of action are:
Stop - - This means that equipment is immediately stopped and cannot continue until
some action is taken by another unit or by a human being.
Alarm - - This means that a light or other signal tells the operator that this check
has failed.
Signal -- This means that some automatic action is taken by the equipment, such as
rereading a magnetic tape 3 times in the controller circuits themselves.
Indicator - - This means that this is a condition that can be tested by instructions if
they are so written.
Other possible forms of action are error-correction, using redundant codes, and special branching to specific locations, which is a form of interruption. When convenient,
the method or form of the check for interlock is specified; otherwise, it may be recorded only as being present.
!
4/62
I AUERBAC~
4:080.100
4:090.100
4:100.100
STANDARD
REPORTS
Users' Guide
Input-Output
INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTERS
MAGNETIC TAPE
: OTHER
Please note that exactly the same format is used for all reports with section
numbers :07, :08, :09 and :10.
Therefore refer to section 4:070 for the commentary
appropriate to sections 4:080, 4:090 and 4:100.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/62
4:110.100
Users' Guide
Simultaneous Operations
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
§
110.
·1
SPECIAL UNITS
Simultaneous operations are often dependent upon the inclusion of special units in a configuration. These units may be optional parts of a central processor, integral parts of
peripheral controllers, or special multiplexing or time -sharing units.
· 11
Identity
Each unit which provides simultaneous operating facilities is listed. The full title, the
model or serial number, and any abbreviated name used in the reports is stated .
. 12
Description
A general description of a configuration's basic facilities is given, followed by the effects of including each of the optional facilities. Each description emphasizes the value
and use of each facility rather than a rigorous specification of the detailed times and
interlocks.
There are five major kinds of technique which may be used to provide simultaneous
operations:
Independent Operations
Multiple Data Paths arid Multiplexing
Partial Overlapping
Restricted Operations
Programmed Time -Sharing
· 13
Independent Operations
In general, independent operations are those in which the controllers concerned are
using units which are not required by any other controller. A typical independent operation is rewinding a magnetic tape. Other typical operations are a controller searching
on magnetic tape for a block with a specific key, data input or output using a buffer
which is a separate store, and employing a buffer which is part of a store being used
by other controllers but which has its own separate access device .
. 14
Multiple Data Paths and Multiplexing
Simultaneous data transfers, usually for input-output, are possible when each uses a
separate data path. A special case exists when several paths share one cable but are
multiplexed, or intermingled, in such a way that one cable is logically equivalent to
several cables. Another common form of multiplexing is the time-sharing, or intermingling, of accesses to a store from many units. This is equivalent to multiplexing
several data paths into a store .
. 15
Partial Overlapping
In many simple systems, input-output transfers cannot be overlapped with other operations. In operations such as card reading, card punching, on-line printing, only part
of an input-output cycle is covered by data transfers. There are usually periods at the
start and end of each card cycle, or during paper movement, during which no access
to storage is required. In these cases, some systems only prevent (interlock) the
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:110.160
§
USERS' GUIDE
110.
operation of the central processor during the transfer period, and permit computing
during the other periods in input-output cycles .
. 16
Restricted Operations
In a few rare cases, an input-output operation may only partially restrict the operation
of a central procesor. One example might be the use of a special register for inputoutput transfers that is also used for multiplication. Then input-output inhibits only
multiplication .
. 17
Programmed Time -Sharing
Programmed time -sharing is possible in some systems, in which case a routine is used
to arrange data transfers for input-output in small units and these transfers must be
carefully timed. The penalty paid in central processor time devoted to this type of
activity depends upon the speed and type of facilities available. In the order of preferred facilities, there may be automatic interruption, a "test busy" facility, or nothing.
In the last case, instructions must be carefully timed by the programmer. Programmed
time-sharing simulates multiplexed access to storage .
•2
CONFIGURATION CONDITIONS
In order to define the facilities in a comprehensive way, the different conditions that
affect simultaneous operations are listed. The conditions are usually a set of possible
combinations of optional units. The various cases are labeled with Roman numerals .
.3
CLASSES OF OPERATIONS
In order to define the simultaneous operating facilities in a comprehensive way, the
various operations that can be performed are grouped into classes. Each class is
labeled with a capital letter: A, B, C, . . .
.4
/
RULES
For each condition listed in paragraph .2, a set of rules is given which defines the restrictions upon the number of possible simultaneous operations at any instant. In these
rules, the lower case letters a, b, c, d, e, ... represent the number of operations
occurring at one time of classes A, B, C, D, E ... respectively.
Examples:
a + b + c = at most 1
means that not more than one operation out of those in classes A, Band C
can be occurring at one time.
,/
a = at most N
means that the number of operations of class A occurring at one time cannot
be more than the number of operating units provided; e.g., the number of
tape units.
ab = 0
means that if one or more operations of anyone class, A or B, are occurring,
none can be occurring in the other class.
(a + b) c = 0
means, first, that if any operation of class C is occurring, none of those in
A or B can occur; and, second, that if any operations in either or both classes
A and B are occurring, none of class C can occur.
Note that at anyone time, all the restrictions must be conSidered; thus
a + b
= at most 1
a + b + c = at most 2
4/62
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
§
4:110.500
110.
mean that either one operation of class A, or one operation of class B, two operations of
class C, or one operation of class A or B and one operation of class C, are possible at
one time .
.5
TABLE OF POSSIBLE SETS OF SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
In some cases, the rules covering simultaneous operations are not straightforward; a
tabular presentation, in these instances, may assist the explanation (see example below).
A table may be given for different conditions enumerated in 2.
The rows of the table correspond to the groups A, B, C, ... of operations. Each column
corresponds to a possible mode of simultaneous operations.
A blank entry means that in that column, the operations in the group of that row are not
possible.
An entry "1" means that one operation of that group is possible in the mode represented
by its column.
An entry "N" means that the number of operations in that group is limited only by the
number of operating units provided.
An entry "N-b" means that the number of operations in that group and group B together
cannot be more than the number of operating units provided.
Example:
a + b
a
+
b
+
at most 1
at most 2
c
could be tabulated as:
CLASS
A
POSSIBLE MODES OF
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATION
1
1
B
C
1
1
2
The table enumerates several modes in each of which no further simultaneous operations
are possible. The table implies that sub-modes of simultaneous operations are allowed:
e . g., one operation of type C.
\ .... ,
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:120.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
Users' Guide
Instruction List
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
120.
A comprehensive list is given of the instruction repertoire of the computer system. The
meanings given for the operations are abbreviated and use the notation of the manufacturer. It is intended only to show the style and scope of the facilities .
. 1 ' INSTRUCTION
For each operation code is shown a symbol for each part of the instruction using the
notation explained in 4:041.223. The mnemonic operation codes are those of the most
common machine -oriented language .
•2
OPERATION
The table is arranged by groups of operations, and the meaning of each operation is
given in abbreviated form using abbreviations which are widely used and understood .
.3
ARITHMETIC
This group includes all fixed and floating point operations .
.4
LOGIC
This group includes Boolean operations, comparisons, jumps, use of indicator bits, repeat, tally and index control operations .
.5
INPUT-OUTPUT
This group includes all operations concerned with input-output units except testing of
status and other conditions which are covered in the Logic group .
.6
AUXIUARY STORAGE
This group includes all operations concerned with auxiliary storage except testing of
status and other conditions which are covered in the Logic group .
.7
DATA TRANSFER
This group includes all operations concerned with movement of data within and between
working storage and registers. It also includes editing and format control.
In some cases, extra headings may be used to improve the presentation.
In some cases, a list of unusual abbreviations is included.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:140.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
Users' Guide
Data Codes
DATA CODES
§
140 .
.1
USE OF CODE
A list is given of the stores in which the code is used .
•2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size
The size is usually expressed as a number of bits, or columns of a card. Only data
bits are considered, not parity or clock bits .
. 22
Character Structure
In order to show both the coding pattern and the collating sequence that would result
from simple subtractions or comparisons, values are quoted for each bit position in a
character. In order to present the coding patterns in a simple table, the bit pattern
of a character is divided into two parts, called the more and less significant parts.
In most six-bit data codes, the more significant part will be understood to be two bits
of values 32 and 16, and the less significant part, four bits of values 8, 4, 2 and 1.
These values indicate the collating hierarchy of the various bit positions.
In special codes, such as bi-quinary, the values of bit positions are, where possible,
chosen to agree with the values assumed for digits tn arithmetic .
. 23
Character Code
The coding arrangement is specified by entries in a table. Rows correspond to values
of less significant parts. Columns correspond to values of more Significant parts.
In the special case of codes for punched card columns, the less Significant p!),rt is
specified as the pattern of underpunched holes, and the more Significant part is specified as the pattern of overpunched holes.
Blank entries in the tables represent undefined codes.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4:150.100
Users' Guide
P. O. Facilities
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
§
150 .
.1
UTILITY ROUTINES
This paragraph covers the important standard routines with the exception of translators
and executive routines. Utility routines are those designed to work independently. They
are not subroutines, service routines or executive routines, but normally provide some
frequently-required process, such as merging or sorting or card to tape transcription,
for which it is convenient to write a standard routine to be used for many similar jobs.
For each utility routine, its identity is given, a reference where further information can
be obtained, the data on which it became, or will become, generally available in a
operatable, fully-documented form, and a brief description of its facilities. All these
routines are, to a large extent, problem-oriented; that is, they have been written to
carry out certain specific kinds of process which are designed to solve standard, often
recurring problems. They are usually controlled by parameters to control variations
in the process to match the variations in the different problems. One specialized case
of a utility routine is the simulation of another computer.
The routines may vary in their form and completeness in several ways. Some may be
permanent routines that vary in their operation only by the type of data that is fed to
them. Others may be controlled by parameters which are used to set up the routine to
operate in different ways. Yet others may be produced by generators according to a
description of the kind of data to be processed. In all of these, there may also be facilities for what is known as "own coding". Own coding is the facility of being able to write
short sequences of special coding into standard routines in order to adapt them for special cases not covered by the parameters; e. g., putting a non -standard key into standard
form for merging .
. 11
Simulators Of Other Computers
Computers are often used to simulate each other. This may be done for one of several
reasons. Suppose that machine A is being simulated by a routine in machine B. One
reason is that an installation, which now has a machine B, formerly had a machine A and
has many routines which are written for machine A which have not been translated for
machine B.
Second is that an installation currently has a machine B and is later going to use a machine A. Routines are being prepared for future use on machine A and are checked out
on the machine B. A third reason is that a person who has a machine B wants to use
routines written for a machine A, and does not want the bother and cost of translating
them into the language of machine B. A fourth reason is that machine A does not exist,
and simulations are being run on machine B to determine how machine A would behave.
In this paragraph, we are concerned with simulations by this computer of other computers. In the description, points such as restricted capacity or facilities are men-
tioned' as well as the comparable speed of running.
In a special case, the simulated computer may be an imaginary computer. A program
is accepted in a language that is not the language of any real computer and the program
is obeyed interpretively .
. 12
Simulation By Other Computers
This paragraph covers the simulation of this computer on other computers. The general
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/92
4:150.130
§
USERS' GUIDE
150.
remarks about simulation are covered under. 11. In this case, it is important to note
in the description whether there are again any restrictions on the simulation .
. 13
Data Sorting and Merging
These are often the most frequently-used utility routines in any installation. Normally
these are independent routines and operate by themselves. They may require data in a
standardized form on magnetiC tape or cards. In addition to the identity, reference, and
date available, a specific note is made of the record sizes, block sizes, key sizes, and
file sizes that can be used - whether or not they are dynamically variable, pre -set, or
fixedsizes - and the number of tapes (which may also be variable). The description
covers the method used, distinguishing between simple n-way merging, cascade or
polyphase merging, and pure sorting, which is most often used internally for small
loads of data.
Different types of routine are used for different sizes of file to be reordered. They are
of three main types - internal sorting, automatic multi -pass merging, and multi -reel
one-pass merging.
An internal sorting routine is limited in the size of file it can reorder by internal storage.
It can also be used as a preliminary phase to the reordering of larger files to increase •
the length of initial strings before using magnetic tape.
An automatic multi -pass merging routine is limited in the size of file it can reorder by
the storage capacity of the number of magnetic tapes on line. In the simplest case of
2p tapes, it merges from one set of p tapes to another and then back, repeatedly. By
suitable refinements, a capacity of 2p-l tapes can be utilized. Such a routine requires
n~ intervention by an operator in normal, fault-free running. This type of routine can
be used as a preliminary to multi -reel one -pass merging.
A multi-reel one-pass merging routine is used to handle the lar'gest files and is limited
only by the number of tapes available in an installation. It usually operates by using two
tapes as alternators for output and the rest for as-many-a-way merge as possible, and
is arranged to handle multi -reel files.
There are two baSic kind's of programs available. First, there are parametrically controlled routines. These are usually fast to set up but may be slow to run. Second, there
are generators which produce special routines to fit individual cases as they are required. There are two types of generator - hot and cold. A hot generator is one that
generates the object routine in a form ready to load and run. A cold generator is one
that generates a routine in an intermediate language whi.ch then has to be translated before loading. Generated routines are usually slow to set up, but efficient when running .
. 14
Report Writing
Report writers are utility routines that read a file of records and print some specified
report from data in the file. There are two major levels of sophistication in the reports
produced - tabulation and analysiS. Tabulations are listings, in the sequence of the file,
of the values of selected data items of all records that meet certain conditions. Subtotals and grand totals may also be listed; for example, a report might be required from
a payroll file of the ages and basic pay rates of all men over 50 years of age, with subtotals for each factory and grand totals for all factories. Tabulations are printed out in
the sequence of the file. Analyses are reports that are independent of the sequence of
the file and are built up as a run progresses. It may be possible to prepare several
analyses in one run. The number of analyses is usually limited by storage space; for
example, an analysis required for the same payroll file might consist of two tables, one
showing the number of men and women in each age group, and another showing the number of people absent on sick leave by age, sex and factory. Report writers may be
parametrically controlled and may be produced by a generator. (See conclusion of . 13. )
4/62
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
§
4:150.150
150.
, 15
Data Transcription
These are utility routines which perform pseudo off-line functions, often otherwise done
off-line, such as punched card to magnetic tape transcription or even such tasks as
magnetic tape to auxiliary store for bulk loading purposes. The routines vary from those
that are limited to straightforward copying to those in which some editing or code conversion takes place •
. 16
File Maintenance
There are two basic types of file maintenance routines. First are those which are
really a type of patching facility enabling a file to be altered in minor respects. The file
maybe a library file or a data file, The routine is used for non -routine or non -conventional changes and corrections. Typical uses are those of "patching" a file during debugging or other short-cut procedures to amend a file without the use of a proper updating routine, The other type are generalized routines for file updating and are capable
of taking amendments, insertions and deletions from a detail file, matching them against
a master file, and making changes in the master file, Since many of these master files
require some particular attention that is dependent upon their own particular form, such
routines may have provision for own coding. They may, in fact, be a skeleton upon
which a particular file updating routine for a specific file can be written,
.2
PROBLE·M ORIENTED LANGUAGES
Problem oriented languages are languages whose design has been oriented toward the
specification of a problem. They can be contrasted with process oriented languages,
which are designed to be used to specify processes employed in solving problems,
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:160.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
Users' Guide
P. O. Languaqe
PROCESS ORI ENTED LANGUAGE
§
160.
1.
GENERAL
Process oriented languages are languages whose design has been oriented toward the
specification of a data processing activity. The specification is called a program, and
describes a data processing activity designed to solve a general data processing problem. The program is independent of the particular data occurring in different specific
instances of the problem. A particular application of the process at one time is called
a run. The specification includes a set of procedures, the data structure, and sometimes details of the configurations of computers to be used for translation and running.
The set of procedures is usually in the form of operations on the data expressed in an
imperative style. Process oriented languages are largely computer-independent and
many have been designed with the express intention that they can be translated into
routines of many different computers. The compatibility of one program with many
different designs of computers is not easily achieved. In addition to the need to restrict a program to the use of the subset of common facilities of the chosen computers,
some variations among programs may still be required. To reduce the inconvenience
of these changes, the COBOL language introduced the concept of a separate division of
the program in which to specify computer-dependent details. This division is called
the Environment Division, but it has not yet completely resolved all the difficulties and
care is necessary when compatibility is required .
. 11
Identity
.12
Origin
Many process oriented languages have originated at places other than the manufacturer
of a computer with which the language may be used. In some cases, a language originated by one manufacturer is made available on the computers of another manufacturer.
Many languages are developments by universities or by independent groups of computer users. The languages so developed may be evolutions or extensions of earlier
languages .
. 13
Reference
This is a reference to a document concerning the use of the language with a particular
computer system.
.
.14
Description
The description outlines the orientation and style of the language and gives an indication
of its areas of application. The orientation may be biased toward mathematics and
scientific research, toward business and commercial applications, or toward program
translators. The two major styles being implemented at present are based on algebraic
expressions and pseudo-English, a restricted formal use of English words and English
language structure. Description also indicates both the good and bad points of the
language; for example, its simplicity or sophistication, ease of understanding and learning .
. 15
Publication Date
This is the first date of a detailed specification comprehensive enough to permit
programs to be written.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:160.200
§
USERS'GUIDE
160 •
.2
PROGRAM STRUCTURE
This section describes the way a written program is structured and logically divided, in
the same way a book is divided into Contents, Material and Index, and into Chapters,
Paragraphs and Sentences. As languages grow more sophisticated, the structure becomes more elaborate. At the same time, there is a trend toward more freedom in the
structure of individual sentences because the separation into logical divisions (as in
COBOL) and the use of key words mean that different categories of material can be
more easily recognized .
. 21
Divisions
These are the major parts of a program devoted to the specification of different subjects, such as data and procedures. The degree of separation of data description from
the procedures varies widely in different languages. In COBOL, they are completely
separate divisions; in many algebraic languages, the data description may in part be
coded in the names of variables, as in FORTRAN, or by separate sentences intermingled
with the procedures, as in ALGOL .
. 22
Procedure Entities
Procedures are often formally grouped together. This is necessary in order, at least,
to recognize subroutines. The largest group is the entire set of procedures. In many
languages, there may be levels of grouping, either to permit nesting of subroutines or
loops of procedures. Parts of programs may be designated to provide regions over
which local data names are recognized. Some categories of procedure groups have
recursive properties. As a common example, a subroutine may have some of its parts
that are subroutines, and so on. If a category is described as possibly being part of an
entity of the same category, it has a recursive property. It is not usually possible to
name any procedural entity that is less than a complete statement; i.e., an operation
and minimum set of operands .
. 23
Data Entities
The stratification of data into many levels and their division into many different items
can be complex and intricate. Such a structure may have to provide for differences at
all levels . At the highest level, there are differences between input-output, constants,
and working variables. At the lowest levels, the class of individual items may be
numeric or alphabetic. In this section, the size variations are ignored. The hierarchical and divisional structures are emphasized .
. 24
Names
The rules for giving names range from those that provide for extremely free forms to
those that restrict names to rigid formal structures. Usually there are some general
rules of structure and size, and then variations which enable kinds of entities to be
recognized by some property of their names. This section is concerned only with
simple one -word names .
. 241 Simple name formation
Normally there is a common rule for forming names. The most common restrictions
are in the alphabet used and maximum size. Minor variations, such as those used as
designators, are ignored here. There are often many words that have special meaning
in the language and must be avoided because they cannot be recognized by position.
These special key words usually include all the verbs and special names, such as
ROUTINE. When formal formation rules are fairly rigid, the rules themselves may
automatically exclude the key words. Although the upper limit on sizes of names may
be high, the translator may restrict its discrimination to the first few characters, in
which case they must be unique for each name. The most common alphabet restriction
is the exclusion of special characters. Pure numbers are usually prohibited as names
in order to simplify use of numbers as literals. Some languages do not permit any
~
I'--~-UE-R-BA-CH-/-:-~
4/62
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
§
4:160.242
160.
numerals in names. Those that do usually require that one character be a letter - often
the initial character .
. 242 Designators
For the benefit of the reader, and usually the translator, too, there are sometimes
conventions or rules by which certain important kinds of entity may be designated in
som~ particular way in their names. By using complementary rules, the kinds of entity
can be recognized from some properties of their names. All the key words are usually
recognized individually. In many cases, the designation may be made by using a compound name in which one word is a key word denoting the kind of entity. The compound
word may be formed with a hyphen to avoid confusion as separate names, as in ""FILEMASTER" . There are five kinds of entity that can normally be distinguished.
Levels of procedures - most important are the subroutines.
Classes of Data, and the special conventions used to designate literals.
Comments, which are provided only for the reader and have no effect on the
translator, usually designated by an introductory key word.
Equipment - usually designated by key words.
Translator Control .
. 25
Structure of Data Names
Data names may have two kinds of structure formation used either separately or together: qualification and subscription .
. 251 Qualified names
Apart from compounding with key words to provide deSignators, compound names are
often formed in data names. These are often related to the levels of the data structure.
They are convenient to the reader and writer because they show the data structure and
allow a basic name to be qualified in many ways; i.e., MASTER PRICE, DETAIL
PRICE. The compound names may be formed in several ways; i.e., MASTER PRICE,
PRICE IN MASTER, MASTER-PRICE. A language may require each level to be a
qualifier, but sometimes an incomplete set is allowed, provided that the set of qualifiers is sufficient to specify the data item uniquely .
. 252 Subscripts
Subscripts are used to refer to items in tables of data. The important characteristics
are:
Number - How many dimensions maya table of data have?
Application - The range of different data item types or levels that may be
subscripted.
Class - Can the subscripts be any variable or are they limited to special
variables?
Form - Subscripts can only be integers when used, but if the variable is not
an integer, then the rounding rules are important .
. 253 Synonyms
When it is possible to refer to an item by more than one name, the name is either preset in the original writing of the program or set dynamically during execution. The
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:160.260
§
USERS' GUIDE
160.
first case is elementary. The second case is rare, and is similar to setting
parameters .
. 26
Number of Names
The restrictions on the number of entities that may be named are usually upper bounds.
There may be one general limit or separate limits for different kinds of entities •
. 27
Region of Meaning of Names
For a label, a name, or any identifier to be of practical use in a program, its meaning
must be defined for each use in every place it occurs in program statements. Each
identifier, however, does not have a unique meaning for all time and for all contexts
in which it may be used. The name XYZ may mean one thing in one program and some/thing else in another. In fact, the meaning of an identifier is restricted to a region.
In the simplest case, the region of a particular meaning of any identifier is the program
in which that meaning is defined.
In many languages, the region of a meaning of an identifier, usually only a part of the
program, may be different from the entire program. Some languages have severe
restrictions on the number of identifiers allowed in one program. This may be due to
restrictions of translator space or language style. In these cases, the program can
sometimes be divided into parts in which two kinds of identifiers are used - "universal"
and "local." A universal identifier is defined as having one meaning for the whole
program. A local identifier is defined for only one part of the program. Then one
name can have a different local meaning in each part.
Some languages allow parts of progr_ams, written separately with many local identifiers,
to have statements that make certain local identifiers in different parts mean the same
thing; that is, their meaning becomes universal by the use of synonyms.
An important use of local identifiers is in subroutines. A subroutine may be written
without the writer knowing the identifiers that will be used in all the different programs
with which it may be associated. It is a common convention that all identifiers in a
subroutine are local to the subroutine or else are dynamic parameters. Local identifiers refer to variables or statements that are used only by the subroutine itsell, such
as destinations for internal jumps and working locations. Parameters are associated
at different times and for different uses, with the current inputs and outputs of the subroutine. At the time of cuing a subroutine, the parametric identifiers are stated; i. e. ,
the meanings of the parameters are defined; for example, when a program using identifiers p, q and r uses a sine routine whose parameter is named x, then at different times
x may be set to be the same as p or q or r, as required. The setting of a parameter
may be done in ~ither of two ways - by 'value or by name.
To set a parameter x by value p means that everywhere in the subroutine, identifier x
is taken as meaning the value of the item identified by p at the time the subroutine was
cued.
To set a parameter x by name p means that everywhere in the subroutine that identifier
x is used, it is taken as meaning the identifier p. In this case, it is possible that the
value of p can be altered by the subroutine, even if p is not its prime result, called a
side -effect of the subroutine.
All identifiers local to a region (such as a subroutine) must be defined for the region.
If an identifier is not defined for a region, it is called non -local. If regions can be
nested, the convention usually adopted is that a non-local identifier has the same meaning as it would have in the region in which the current region is nested. This is a recursive definition. Suppose, for example, that if identifiers A to Z are defined for a program, A to M defined for a subroutine, and A to G defined for a sub-subroutine; then
in the sub-subroutine, A to G are local and H to Z are non-local, taking the meanings
they have in the subroutine; in the subroutine, A to M are local and N to Z non-local;
4/62
PROCESS ORI ENTED LANGUAGE
§
4:160.300
160.
in the program, A to Z are all local. Note that identifiers N to Z have the same meaning everywhere - they are universal by implication; A to G are different at each level
of nesting of the regions.
An identifier universal to region X is one that may not be local to any other region
nested within region X.
Key words are universal to a language and there may be certain key words universal to
an installation. The setting up of a common data description in COBOL can produce
identifiers universal to a suite of programs.
The existence of regions and different types of parameters allow sophisticated and flexible language structures, but if used in an indiscriminate way, the results can also be
confusing, difficult to understand, or even ambiguous .
.3
DATA DESCRIPTION FACILITIES
All the data used in a program is described somewhere in the program. In process
oriented languages, the data description is usually explicit. This section shows how
many implicit descriptions have been eliminated, and the variety of data that can be
described. There are in general six basic types of answer:
None, meaning the facility is not available; e.g., multi-reel:
none, which means multi-reel files cannot be used.
Automatic, meaning that the facility is assumed to be incorporJ.ted automatically
by the translator or operating system; e.g., input-output error control is a part
of the operating system.
Indirect, meaning that the facility is implied by choices made in the use of certain procedures; e.g., rounding of results is implied unless truncation is
specified.
Own procedure, meaning that the facility must be provided explicitly; i.e., a
procedure must be written by the programmer.
Subroutine, meaning that as an alternative to "own procedure", a standard routine
is available.
Description, meaning that an explicit data description is used.
In addition, there are comments to show whether or not a facility is optional or manda-
tory, and to record any special limitations that may exist .
• 31
Methods of Direct Data Description
The method of describing data varies widely from one language to another. This paragraph shows which ones are used in the language .
. 311 Concise item picture
COBO L has a system by which a neat des cription of an item is possible; e. g. ,
AAA99
XXXXX
99.99
99v99
ZZZ9.9
three letters followed by 2 numerals.
five alphameric characters.
showing a real deCimal pOint.
showing an assumed decimal pOint.
showing where zero suppression is required.
and even more sophisticated conventions.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:160.312
§
USERS' GUIDE
160 .
. 312 List of kind
ALGOL has a system by which all integers are given in one list, real variables in another, and so on .
. 313 Qualify by adjective
In this method, a list of adjectives, such as "numeric", "signed", "zero-suppressed",
are given for each item .
. 314 Qualify by phase
This is a slightly longer method in which phases, such as "size is 4 digits", "zeroes
are suppressed", are given for items .
. 315 Qualify by code
This is similar to 313 and 314 except that a coded system is used .
. 316 Hierarchy by list
This is a method of showing the grouping of items by the sequence of listing data
items, usually an item of one level being followed by all its parts .
. 317 Level by indenting
It is convenient to the reader to use a system in which the indenting of a list of names
shows the various levels of data .
. 318 Level by coding
The most usual way for the translator to discover the level structure is by some
numerical coding .
. 321 File labels
It is usual for operating systems to require labels at the beginning and end of each file,
whether on tape or cards. Even when standard labels are provided, theJ;'e may be provision to vary the layout and nominate certain control or "hash" totals to be maintained.
When the identity procedures can be controlled, sophisticated job, file and run number
checks can be considered. When a job uses very large files, it is essent~al that the
programmer be able to specify that a file may extend over several reels - "mUlti-reel
file" .
. 322 Reel sentinels
It is usual that there be a requirement for sentinels at the start and end of each reel,
particularly where multi -reel files do not have logical groups corresponding to each
reel. They may also contain standard data about the age, size and use of the tape. It
is more convenient if they are separate from the file labels. The layout facilities
should be adaptable for different installation standards if it is not provided in an automatic way for each installation. When a large number of small files are used in an
integrated job, there can be a large saving of tape-loading time if many files can be
placed on one reel to become "multi -file reels" .
. 33
Records and Blocks
There are several important considerations in the layout allowed of records and blocks .
. 331 Variable block size
4/62
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
§
4:160.332
160 .
. 332 Variable record size
Variation may be of three types:
Fixed - none allowed.
Pre -set - meaning that the choice is made at the time of writing or loading the
program.
Dynamic - meaning that choice is made during the run and varies with the data
structure or procedure statement .
. 333 Record size range
.334 Block size range
Range is the maximum and minimum sizes allowed and intermediate steps between
sizes .
. 335 Choice of record size
.336 Choice of block size
When there is variation, it is important to note who makes the choice and, when it is
automatic, on what basis .
. 327 Sequence control
Any provision that is made to insure that data is treated in sequence and/or that none is
missed. There are two basic checks, step and monotonic. A step check uses a serial
number, which is stepped by 1 for each record or block, to see that none is missed. A
monotonic check merely insures that data is not out of sequence and that the value of a
key steadily increases or decreases. The check is weaker if made on blocks rather
than records, but a step block check is stronger than a montonic record check .
. 328 In -out error control
This is the checking that no error indicators are set for each input-output load, or
initiating and controlling error recovery procedures if errors do occur .
. 329 Blocking control
This is the organization of packing and unpacking several records held together in a
block .
. 34
Data Items
.341 Designation of class
This is the way in which the data class of an item is specified, usually by a designator
in the name or by data description .
. 342 Possible classes
If the data can be classified, it may help the translator to economize in storage space,
simplify coding and implement automatic rules such as justification .
. 343 Choice of external radix
.344 POSSible radices
These show if a language can handle more than one radix in its input-output data, which
implies either some automatic conversion or multi-radix arithmetic.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:160.345
§
USERS' GUIDE
160 .
. 345 Justification
This is usually an automatic facility in which alphameric data is left justified, whereas
numeric data is aligned by its decimal point .
. 346 Choice of code
.347 Possible codes
This covers any choice available to a programmer to specify the input-output codes used
for data. Normally, these are standardized and provided automatically for individual
installations .
. 348 Item size
The same remarks apply as for .331 and .332, with the added note that some computers
designate item sizes by counters in the instruction and others by delimiters in ~ither tqe
data or the location cells. It is usually difficult and inefficient to provide dynamic variation when translating a process oriented language, however .
. 349 Sign provision
Rules for handling signs can be complex. The comments here are limited to the cases
where provision is made to allow a number to be set as negative or positive, or to declare a number unsigned because it never attains a negative value, implying that no
space should be provided for its sign .
. 35
-Data Values
Not all the operands specified in a program are variables; some are constants whose
values are specified directly in the program. Sometimes there are conditional variabIes whose limited set of values are defined and have unique names .
. 351 Constants
Constants are data items whose values are fixed when the program is written or loaded
but are giveri names and treated in the procedures in a manner similar to that of other
data items, except that it is an err.or to designate them as the result of an operation.
Some translators scrutinize procedures to insure such errors are not ignored. When
the facility of using literals is available, the main use of name constants is in tables
of data, such as price lists, discounts or other rates referenced by subscript, e.g.,
"ADD DUTY (CLASS, GRADE) TO PRICE" or as parameters which are set at loading
time.
There may be severe restrictions on the size or types of constants allowed .
. 352 Literals
These are a special and convenient type of constant. They are used mainly in procedure
statements. Instead of being represented by their names, their values are written
directly into statement; for example, instead of
"ADD TIP TO BILL"
in which TIP is a constant, value 17 units, it may be possible to write
"ADD 17 TO BILL".
Usually, numeric literals are recognizable because they contain no letters. If alphameric literals are permitted, there must be some designation rule, because.it is difftcult to distinguish such a literal from a name; for example, does
"PRINT TIP"
4/62
PROCESS ORIENTED 'LANGUAGE
§
4:160.353
160.
cause "TIP" or its value "17" to be printed? In many languages, the possible forms of
literals are restricted in order to facilitate recognition .
. 353 Figuratives
These are special named values, usually constants, which are a part of the language,
and their names are key words; e. g., BLANKS, which might have an undefined size in
order to fit any result area; PIE, which equals 3.14159. . . to some degree of precisian in a specific computer; and DATE, which may De the current date and is a variable
rather than a constant .
. 354 Conditional variables
These are variables, each of which may have only a restricted and stated set of possible
values. Each value is given a unique name; for example, a variable called "CONDITION"
in a payroll may have four values - 1, 2, 3 and 4 - which are given the names NORMAL,
SICK, ON-LEAVE and RETIRED, respectively. Then the language allows conditional
clauses of a form such as
"IF ON-LEAVE"
or
''IF CONDITION IS ON - LEAVE"
to be written .
. 36
Special Description Facilities
This section covers any special provision in the language to reduce repetitive descriptive statements .
. 361 Duplicate format
There may often be several separate data items which have identical layouts and differ
in name, particularly if compound data names are being used, when describing inputoutput data formats. It is then convenient to be able to note that one format is the copy
of another, without repeating the details. In COBOL, this feature is called "COPY" .
. 362 Redefinition
This is a term used to refer to the facility of being able to use an area for two different
data layouts. Of course it is necessary to have different names for each use, and the
programmer himself must insure that the appropriate names are used in the procedures.
If the rules permit one area to be larger than another, there may be conditions requiring, for example, that the larger must be described first. Usually. the two areas must
be the same size and this can easily be arranged by adding dummy items to the smaller.
It is most useful if the higher levels of data formats can be re-defined .
. 363 Table description
If subscripting is to be used for tables of data, it is essential to have some method of
denoting the various levels of subscripting and the range of each subscript. Usually
there is a facility to state that one item format is to be repeated a certain number of
times. In a sophisticated system, the subscripted items may be subdivided into lower
levels and the subscript allowed to apply to them too. For example, a table of FIELDS
subscripted by AGE might each be composed of three items - RATE. DISCOUNT and
CODE - and then
"CODE (AGE)" may mean
"CODE OF FIELD (AGE)"
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:160.364
§
USERS' GUIDE
160.
A table need not necessarily be referred to by subscript. It may be allowed to specify
arguments and values .
. 364 Other subs criptible entities
A few languages allow procedure or equipment names to be subscripted .
.4
OPERATION REPERTOIRE
This paragraph deals with the various operations provided for use in the procedures
written in the language. Because of the great freedom and diversity of the syntactical
structure of these languages, it is not possible to concisely summarize their structure.
Instead, examples are selected for most groups of operands to illustrate both the general
style and any. particularly distinctive features that add to or detract from the facilities
in a significant way. With each group of operations are specified the properties of the
operands upon which they can operate. If an operation is not available, it may of course
be possible. to construct it by a subroutine. If an operation is available directly, its
form is given, together with any important qualifying remarks that are not covered by
associated entries on operands, special cases, etc .
. 41
Formulae
In algebraic languages, formulae are the prime method of describing procedures. Use
of formulae may also be included as a subset of pseudo-English languages .
.411 Operator list
This is a list of all the operators available. For simple arithmetic, addition, subtraction, multiplication and division are usually required. For more scientific use, exponentiation and other mathematical functions should be provided. In addition, there is
some conventional symbol to represent "is set equal to" or some equivalent function .
. 412 Operands allowed
Some languages restrict the kinds of numbers that can be used, some to fixed point,
some to floating pOint .
. 413 Statement structure
There are three important facilities - the use of parentheses, the limit of size of a
statement, and the ability to set several results equal to one expression. There may
be a limit on the nesting of parentheses. There is usually an implied parenthesis rule
and in general, the accepted mathematical convention imply:
a - b - c
a+bxc
a+b
a bC
c
=
=
=
(a-b)-c,
not
a-(b-x);
a (bxc),
not
(a-tb)xc;
(a b) c is preferred;
(a+b)+c is preferred;
( (a)b)c is preferred.
The size may be limited by a restriction on the complexity of expressions .
. 414 Rounding of results
Whenever the size of a result field is such that truncation or rounding is required, there
may be programmed control allowed or an automatic provision. If the automatic provision is not the one required, it may take extensive programming to alter its effect.
The control may be provided on an exception basis, in which an automatic procedure
is used unless an alternative is specified. The means of specification may be in the
data description or in the procedure. The former has the disadvantage of being in an
4/62
4:160.415
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
§
160.
inconvenient place when reading a program. The latter has the inconvenience of sometimes requiring repetitive entries, but is more flexible .
.415 Special cases
Examples are given to illustrate how the language handles some of the well-known special cases. Their individual importance varies with the sophistication and tastes of the
user .
. 416 Typical cases
These illustrate the general style and any particular characteristics of the language .
. 42
Operations on Arrays
Computations on arrays of operands are sometimes provided in specialized languages,
for matrix operations ranging from simple addition to the complex operations of establishing eigen vectors, and for statistical calculations of various kinds: Boolean or lOgical operations are sometimes provided for arrays of binary digits usually in one dimension. Less frequently found are the operations of scanning tables or lists of data,
using criteria such as least, greatest, or greater than some value. A variable step
size is an added convenience .
.43
Other Computation
This section covers the computations described by pseudo-English statements and the
operators are usually selected English verbs .
. 431 Operator list
This is a list of the verbs as written in the language and their meanings. Any important
or unusual properties are noted here or illustrated in the examples .
. 432 Operands allowed
The operands must normally be single numeric items and are sometimes restricted to
special classes, or to one class at a time; for example, it may not be possible to multiply a fixed point variable by a floating point constant .
. 433 Statement structure
The general style is illustrated by examples. This paragraph concentrates on a few
particular points:
Whether £:everal equal-valued results can be specified in one statement.
Whether any size limit is set for statements.
Whether there is a limit on the number of operands.
Whether results can be implied; e. g., in COBOL, when no explicit result is named,
the result is implied as the last named operand.
Whether different verbs can be used in one statement, not usual .
.434 Rounding of results
Whenever the size of a result field is such that truncation or rounding is required, there
may be programmed control allowed or an automatic provision. Ii the automatic provision is not the one required, it may take extensive programming to alter its effect.
The control may be provided on an exception basis, in which an automatic procedure is
used unless an alternative is specified. The means of specification may be in the data
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
USERS' GUIDE
4:160.435
§
160.
description or in the procedure. The former has the disadvantage of being in an inconvenient place when reading a program. The latter has the inconvenience of sometimes
requiring repetitive entries, but is more flexible .
.435 Special cases
Examples are given to illustrate how the language handles some of the well-known special cases. Their individual importance varies with the sophistication and tastes of
the user .
. 436 Typical cases
These illustrate the general style and any particular characteristics of the language •
. 44
Data Movement and Format
These operations are concerned with data movement within the program and only changes
to the data in the form or format in which it is held are considered, there being no computation other than that necessary for changes of radix or code .
• 441 Data copy example
This is an example of a simple copy statement setting one data item's value equal to
another and keeping the original unaltered •
• 442 Levels possible
When levels other than the lowest level can be used in a copy or move operation, it is
assumed that all the lower levels are moved as well, and the item is moved in toto.
This may be possible for complete records; it is usually not possible for complete
files.
.
.443 Multiple results
Often when copying, the problem requires that several data items be set at the same
value as one original. If this is possible in one statement without repeated copies, it
is stated here .
• 444 Missing operands
It is possible in some languages to ask for some group of items to be copied to another
group of items not necessarily of the same level, when in fact their formats are not
exactly the same. They may not match for sizes and they may not match for the individual contents of the items. In these cases, there must be conventions by which the
excess sources are ignored and the excess destinatioris are left unaltered .
• 445 Size of operands
Depending upon the sophistication of the facility provided in the language, there may be
the restriction that individual operands of the source and destination have to be the same
size so that there is no problem in the movement. If they are not exactly the same size,
and with numerical items exactly the same scaling, there must be some rules for alignment. Numbers are usually aligned by their decimal points and alphabetic information
is normally left justified, but there may be other standards in a few languages or options to allow the programmer to specify the alignment. If the destination area is
larger than the source area, there must be some rule for filling the places left over.
For numerical information, this is conventionally done with zeros, and for alphameric
information, with spaces. If the destination area is less than the source area in size,
there must be some form of truncation. For numbers, the truncation is normally determined by alignment of the decimal pOint positions and perhaps rounding the less
significant digits. The rules for the more significant digits may vary considerably.
~
4/62
i[]
,'A-U-ER-SA-CH--:-'
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
§
4:160.446
160.
In some translators, truncation of most significant digits is treated as an error. For
alpha information, there is either simple truncation or treatment as an error .
. 446 Editing possible
When a move or copy takes place, it is usually permitted that the formats of the destination items be different from the formats of the source items in order to provide the
facility of editing information, particularly for printed output; however, most languages
have some restrictions on these facilities. It is unusual to allow a general change of
class of information except perhaps between fixed and floating point and from numeric
to alphameric form. The class change from alphameric to numeric form is less ~om
mono A change of radix is not common. Although it is usual to be able to insert editing symbols, the provision for being able to delete them is usually awkward even if
available. The editing symbols that are generally available include the simple insertion of a decimal pOint, the suppression of leading zeros on numbers, the insertion of
special characters such as dollar signs for prices, the so-called "check protection"
symbols, in which non-significant digits are replaced by asterisks to make the alteration of numbers more difficult, and the sophistication of being able to "float" certain
symbols; e. g., a floating dollar sign is one in which the actual position of the dollar
sign depends upon the size of the number and is normally positioned just to the left of
the most significant digit .
. 447 Special moves
Some languages provide special types of move in which the source is not specified as a
data item but as a kind of data to be placed in the destination area. Typical of such
moves are "fill", and "clear", and implementation of them depends somewhat upon the
individual computers. "Clear" normally means setting all the character positions to
blanks or zeros for alphabetic and numeric items respectively, but "fill" is not so easily
specified in general and an explicit character is often given; e.g., "Fill with Z" .
. 448 Code translation
This details any facility that may be included to control the code in which the individual
characters of input or output operations may be coded .
. 449 Character manipulation
This covers any facilities in a language for the manipulation of individual characters,
not necessarily one -character items. This is not a common feature in conventional
languages, but is being introduced in order to assist such operations as language and
program translation by the manipulation of strings of symbols .
.45
File Manipulation
Standard file manipulation operations are becoming more common, and in this section,
those that are most frequently required are listed. The corresponding operations, if
any, provided in the language are given, together with any unusual facilities or restrictions that may be imposed. The prOVision of "open" and "close" operations implies
that a routine is automatically brought in to deal with the file labels. The facilities to
"start a new reel" or to "start a new block" are not common, but are convenient in
some operations when dynamiC control over the blocking and unblocking of files is required. Rewind and unload are sometimes provided and sometimes not.
\.
.46
Operating Communications
This paragraph covers the manner by which a routine can communicate with the operator to make a -log of its programs or to offer to the operator from time to time the
choice of different routes of proceeding during a run and be able to accept the operator's
answer when he chooses one of the options. If operations are generally available to do
such things, the details given here describe the manner in which they are available,
and any restrictions or special facilities that ar~ associated with each operation.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:160.470
§
USERS' GUIDE
160 .
.47
Object Program Errors
It may be possible for a programmer to provide in a routine some standard action that
he requires to be taken when certain kinds of errors occur in a run, even though he may
not be able to write procedures which enable his routine to discover the errors. It may
be that a master routine or a supervisor or standard routines supplied by the translator will automatically carry out the actions chosen by the programmer when certain
kinds of errors occur. If this is the case, then for each of the possible kinds of errors
in which the program can be concerned, this paragraph states how the discovery is
made as far as the program is concerned, and what kind of special actions are available to him or whether any action is restricted to whatever he can code himself out of
the ordinary operations provided in the language. The typical types of discovery are
either that each routine may make its own tests or that it cannot make any discovery at
all, and that the chosen action is entered automatically by the supervising system when
required .
.5
PROCEDURE SEQUENCE CONTROL
Although the procedures written in a program are normally obeyed one after another in
the sequence in which they are written, it is frequently necessary to arrange that the
sequence be modified using one of several methods.
One method is to insert a jump to another part of a sequence. It may be a permanent jump, or a switch which is set to different destinations from time to time by
other statements.
A second method is use of a conditional procedure; if the conditional clause is true,
the conditional procedure is obeyed. If the clause is not true, the procedure is not
obeyed. In the latter case, it may be that some alternative procedure is obeyed.
These conditional and alternative procedures may themselves be jumps.
A third method is to execute a subroutine. This is really a controlled jump, a cue,
to some other place in the program, the carrying out of a certain number of procedures at that place and then a return jump, or link, to the place from which the
original jump was made.
A fourth method is loop control, in which a given set of procedures is obeyed repetitivelya certain number of-times, depending upon counters or conditions. The set
that is obeyed may in fact be a subroutine, and the criteria that regulate the repetition may themselves be some kind of conditional clause .
. 51
Jumps
These are the most straightforward changes of sequence in a program and normally indicate a new procedure or statement to be executed immediately after the one which is
the jump. An interesting point is the particular kinds of destinations of the jumps that
are allowed. Normally these are restricted to certain levels of procedure.
An example is given of a simple unconditional jump. A switch is a jump that may be
altered from time to time by procedure elsewhere in the program. It must normally
have a name by which it can be referenced. The setting of a switch is also given as an
example. There may be a special kind of switch called a data switch whose setting
depends upon a data item which may have a variety of values. On each occasion when
the switch is encountered, the item's current value defines the destination of the jump.
For example, an item of data may have value 1, 2 or 3, and a data switch depending on
this item is set to jump to a certain place A, B or C, depending upon whether this data
item has a value of 1, 2 or 3, respectively .
. 52
Conditional Procedures
Conditional procedures are those whose execution at any time is dependent upon some
conditional clause with which they are are associated.
4/62
4:160.525
PROCESS ORI ENTED LANGUAGE
§
160.
Normally they take the form
"if (some conditional clause is satisfied), then (do this procedure)"
and, occasionally, there is added
"otherwise (or else) do this alternative procedure".
These procedures may, in fact, be "jumps". Their most important property is the way
that they are recognized. This is usually done by a word such as "if" at the beginning
of a conditional procedure.
The conditional clauses, in their simplest form, normally take the form of (one kind of
operand) - (a relation) - (another kind of operand)
such as
"A equal to B" .
The operands themselves vary in the degree of complexity allowed, from simple items
to complex expressions. The relations also may be restricted or quite complex. One
of their common properties is the ability to negate the relation by inserting the word
"not" or some equivalent symbol.
A second form of condi.tional procedure is one in which a condition of one operand is
considered, suchaswhether the sign of an item is positive or negative, or whether the
operand is numeric or alphabetic •
. 525 Compound conditionals
In many languages, a single conditional clause such as "if a equals b" is not the only
type of conditional clause. It is often possible to form compound conditions without
having to write many interconnected statements. Normally. the compound conditionals are
formed using the connectives "and" and "or". The examples given in Figures 1 and 2
illustrate this in a simple way. Figures 3 and 4 illustrate a more complex method
sometimes allowed.
Figure 1.
IF A AND B DO C
A
true
false
-'
true
B
,
C
/
t
alse
Figure 2.
IF A OR B DO C
A
false
ltrue
B
false
/
true
C
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:160.526
§
USERS' GUIDE
160.
Figure 3.
IFADOCANDIFBDOD
true
A
C
true
'B
D
/
t
false
alse
Figure 4.
IF A DO C OR IF B DO D
A
false
true
~
false
B
/
true
C
"-
D
.526 Alternative designator
A conditional clause, either simple or compound, may have an alternative procedure to
be carried out if the condition is not true; e.g., a simple case
''DO A; OTHERWISE DO B".
If this is possible, the method of designating the alternative clause is stated.
· 527 Condition on alternative
Unless the language is quite sophisticated, it is not usual to allow the alternative procedure itself to be a condition, because this may introduce complex conditionals. These
are difficult to translate and sometimes lead to ambiguities which are also difficult to
read and understand.
• 528 Typical examples
These examples illustrate the styles of various conditional clauses. They show any
important features that have not been covered in the earlier parts of the paragraph.
· 53
Subroutines
Subroutines are groups of procedure statements which are associated by a common
name or some such designator and which may be executed in place of the program different from that in which they are written; for example, there may be a procedure named
TAX, and elsewhere in the program a statement such as
"do TAX" which causes a sequence jump, called a cue, to the beginning of the
subroutine TAX. At the end of the subroutine, a return jump is made to the
place from which the cue was originally made. Cuing a subroutine means
using a statement that causes the subroutine to be executed each time this cue
is encountered at run time .
. 531 Designation
This states how a set of statements that are to be conSidered as a subroutine can be
recognized by the reader or translator.
4/62
4:160.532
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
§
160.
Usually a subroutine has a clearly-marked beginning and end; i.e., it contains its own
delimiters. In COBOL, a subroutine is defined only by the cue and any procedures can
be obeyed as a subroutine. (See also .533.)
.532 Possible subroutines
This states the different groups or levels of procedures that can be used as subroutines •
. 533 Use in-line in program
All subroutines referred to in this paragraph .53 can be used as closed subroutines. In
most languages, such procedures can be executed only by using a cue. In COBOL - and
perhaps some other languages - a set of procedures used as a subroutine is no "different
from other procedures and can be executed as an open subroutine. The procedures are
used in -line in the program. (See also . 53l.)
. 534 Mechanism
This paragraph gives key words or examples of the various forms of cues and returns.
Cues may be made with or without parameters and the number of possible parameters
may be limited.
In a language which delimits the subroutine, the return may sometimes be omitted
because it is implied as a jump immediately following the last procedure before the delimiter. If alternative returns from other places in the procedures are required, a
formal return verb may be used, but if not available, it is usual to insert a named
dummy procedure at the end of the routine and jump to that as a means of alternative
exit •
. 535 Names
When writing a subroutine which may be used in more than one program or in many
places in a program, the names of data items referred to in the suproutine may have
certain restrictions. Names may have local or universal meaning. A local name is
one which has meaning only of a certain kind within its own subroutine, and if that
same name is used elsewhere in the program, it does not refer to the same data item.
A universal name means that a name used in the subroutine will refer to exactly the
same item as it would if used elsewhere in the program. When local names are being
used, it is necessary for a subroutine entry procedure to arrange that these be treated
as parameters. The cue must specify the meaning of the parameters and other names
must refer to locations or data items used only within the subroutine. (For a more detailed discussion of the regions of meanings of names, see paragraph .27.)
.536 Nesting limit
This shows any restrictions on the degree to which subroutines may be nested inside
each other; that is, whether or not a subroutine can call another subroutine within itself .
. 537 Automatic recursion allowed
This is the property of a subroutine being able to call itself. It also incl~des the property whereby a lower level subroutine nested within some higher level subroutine is
able to call the higher level subroutine. It is not frequently available .
. 54
Function Definition by Procedure
This is a particular type of subroutine. Instead of being cued formally by a verb such
as DO or PERFORM, it has an implied cue. The subroutine is given a name (for example, SIN) which can be used as a variable in a statement; e.g.,
Z = Y +SIN(X)
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
USERS' GUIDE
4:160.550
§
160.
and whenever it is encountered, the value of SIN(X) is defined as that produced by cuing subroutine SIN and setting its parameter by using X .
. 55
Operand Definition by Procedure
This is a particular type of subroutine. It is similar to Function Definition (See . 54)
except that there are no parameters; therefore, the names used must be non -local .
. 56
Loop Control
This is the ability to be able to specify a certain set of procedures that are to be executed repetitively. The specification of the number of times that the loop is to be
excuted may be given in a number of different ways. It is usually pOSSible, at the same
time, to arrange that a subscript is stepped through a number of values as the individual repetitions of the loop are initiated. Loops may be nested within each other. It
is usualJy possible to exit from a loop before the externally-specified condition occurs
because of some alternative criteria within the loop .
. 561 Designation of loop
It is necessary to be able to show the start and the end of the series of proc'?dures that
comprise the loop. This may be done by the delimiters, by quoting a name given to the
set, or by quoting the names of the first and last procedures in the set .
. 562 Control by count
The simplest form of loop is that which is executed a certain number of times. The
number may be specified by a literal or by the value of some data item .
. 563 Control by step
This is a frequently-employed method of control when using subscripts. A control
variable is initialized at a given value and then stepped by a given increment for each
repetition of the loop until it either attains some end value or some condition exists.
The control variable may be restricted to being a special index variable or allowed to
be any variable. The step size may be restricted to integer values and sometimes is
even restricted to positive integer values. The criterion for the end of the loop is
normally that point at which the value of the control variable has attained a limit value,
or when it has exceeded the limit. Instead of one control variable, it may sometimes
be possible to step several variables in synchronism with each other, usually because
they need different sizes of step .
. 564 Control by condition
This mayor may not be combined with a stepping facility for each repetition of the loop.
It means that the end of the loop is controlled by some kind of conditional clause, usually preceded by the word "until" •
. 565 Control by list
This is a case in which the control variable takes values which are not obtained by a
series of steps of a fixed increment but is a specific list of values; e.g., x = 1, 5, 6,
42, 17 .
. 566 Nesting limit
Sometimes there are limits to the number of loops that may be nested within each other .
. 567 Jump-out of loop
In most languages, it is possible to write statements within a loop that can jump to
statements outside the loop. Some languages forbid such jump-outs. Mos} systems do
4/62
,/
4:160.568
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
§
160.
not allow "jump-ins" because then the control variable is not initialized and is undefined. Returns from subroutines are one special form of jump-in that is allowed .
. 568 Control variable exit status
Some condition finally causes the stopping of repetitions of the loop, such as th8 value
attained by the control variable. After coming out of the loop, some systems insure
that the value of the control variables is still avaiiable. Other systems make the control variables available only when a jump-out has or has not been taken. If such facilities are not provided within the loop itself, some special procedures must be written
to provide the facility where it is required .
.6
EXTENSION OF THE LANGUAGE
It is not usually possible to make changes in the language while writing programs in it.
If problems arise which can take advantage of extensions to the language, they
normally are solved by writing a subroutine for use within a particular program; however, it is possible in some languages to make additions to the language, and any available facilities are described .
.7
LIBRARY FACILITIES
A program library is a collection of open and closed subroutines, even complete programs and sometimes data descriptions which are available for use with programs
written in the language. The important features are the rights of making insertions
into the library, the entities it contains, the form of the library, and the method of call
of items from the library .
. 71
Identity
This is the name, nicknames and abbreviations by which the library is known .
. 72
Kind of Library
A library mayor may not accept insertions by programmers in general, It may be a
general library for use by any programmer or a facility for providing a private library
for individual programmers or groups of programmers .
• 73
Form of Storage
The most convenient form is magnetic tape or auxiliary internal storage such as a disc
store. A less convenient form is punch cards or paper tape. Sometimes the library
only exists in a written form and has to be transcribed by the programmer or a data
preparation system to suitable form for use with individual programs .
. 74
Variety of Contents
The most usual library contents are open and closed subroutines for incorporation in
programs. Other possible contents are complete programs for use in operating systems, diagnostic routines, supervisor systems and interpreters. Libraries can also
contain data information such as file and record layouts, conversion tables and special
format tables for input -output control .
. 75
Mechanism
This describes the general running and use of the library .
. 751 Insertion of any item
If this is done during a computer run, it is sometimes possible to do it as part of pro-
gram translation and sometimes restricted to special library runs.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
USERS' GUIDE
4:160.752
§
160 •
. 752 Language of new item
This is the way in which new items must be prepared for insertion .
. 753 Method of call
This is the mechanism which causes a copy of an item of the library to be inserted into
a program. It may be automatic when a cue or macro in the program is encountered
referring to that item, or each program may have to provide a list of calls, or it may
be that manual preparation of packs of cards is necessary .
• 76
Types of Routine
Libraries vary in the types of routines which can be held in them. Some only permit
open routines, some only permit closed routines, some may accept either provided
each routine is one or the other, a few permit a routine to be variable; i. e. ,
it can be called either as open or closed. This section states which types can be inserted' open, closed or variable •
•8
TRANS LA TOR CONTROL
These are facilities that enable a programmer to control the translation or to give information to the translator to assist the translation •
. 81
Transfer to Another Language
This facility enables a programmer to take advantage of other languages. There are two
main cases. In one case, the other language is a lower-level language, usually the
language of the object program. This enables a programmer to overcome limitations
or restrictions in a language by by-passing the translator, or to optimize a particular
routine by by-passing the translator. In the other case, the language is a similar level
but different orientation. This enables a programmer to use a mixture of languages,
perhaps ALGOL for algebraic computation and COBOL for input-output. The interfaces
between the parts of the program in different languages, moreover, must be very carefully considered .
. 82
Optimizing Information
A written program does not usually contain any Significant amount of information that
would assist the translator in optimizing the translation or the object program. Some
languages do allow special statements to overcome this. The statements divide into two
kinds: the first indicates the amount of use of groups of procedures; the second indicates the amount of use of groups of data.
The quantity of information that can be extracted from such statements varies widely,
and the use made of the information by different translators, therefore, varies even
more.
In FORTRAN, information of the first kind is given indirectly by stating the relative
frequency of taking alternative paths at its branch points. Other useful information includes the sizes of variable tables or arrays and the abandonment of parts of a program
when no longer required during a run .
. 83
Translator Environment
This enables the programmer to describe the configuration of the translating computer
so that the translator can adjust itself, or be adjusted, to the facilities available.
A
4/62
A-U-ER-BA-CH-'''''''@
"'-1
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
§
4:160.840
160 .
• 84
Target Computer Environment
This enables the programmer to describe the configuration of the target computer - the
one on which the program will be executed - so that the appropriate allocations can be
made.
· 85
Program Documentation Control
This enables the programmer to control the kinds and quantities of detail of the program
and translation documentation. By eliminating unnecessary detail, it is sometimes possible to have faster translation, but still be able at other times to produce detail in
special places.
The programmer is usually able to indicate a title to be printed at the head of all documentation.
·9
TARGET COMPUTER ALLOCATION CONTROL
This enables the programmer to make specific statements about allocation as opposed
to just describing the facilities available. Sometimes it is mandatory that the programmer make the allocation.
· 91
Choice of Storage Level
This enables the programmer to state in which level of storage segments of a routine
should be held. Sometimes his statement is limited to a priority list or preferred segments for particular levels .
. 92
Address Allocation
This enables the programmer to specify actual addresses within a level, not necessarily
in absolute form. In a multi-running system, allocation might be relative to one reference location for each program .
. 93
Arrangement of Items in Words in Unpacked Form
This is any facility similar to SYNCHRONIZE in COBOL, by which the programmer
specifies how an item must be held, rather than allows the translator to make a free
choice .
. 94
Assignment of Input-Output Devices
This enables the programmer to specify the units to be used for each file .
. 95
Input-Output Areas
This enables the programmer to allocate areas so that simultaneous operations can be
performed, or to share input-output areas for chosen files.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:161.100
STANDARD
RIPORTS
User's Gui de
P. O. Language
COBOL
§
COBOL
161.
•1
INTRODUCTION
COBOL is a language specifically oriented toward business applications. It is
intended to be used as a common programming language for many varieties of
computers, both large and small. The style is that of formal English phrases,
with the option of 'omitting certain words which only affect clarity to the reader;
e.g.,
WRITE REPORT AFTER 5
is the same as
WRITE REPORT AFTER ADVANCING 5 LINES.
The second and current official publication, known as "COBOL 61" (reference 1,
see paragraph • 9) was made available in the summer of 1961. The earlier publication is known as "COBOL 60." Meanwhile, extensions such as "report writer,"
"sort, " and table-handling functions are being considered for inclusion in 1962.
Currently, thirteen manufacturers are implementing thirty COBOL compilers in the
USA.
For each implementation of COBOL, the following details are important and are
covered in the various descriptions.
COBOL edition - e.g., COBOL 60.
Deficiencies - the "required" facilities that are not covered.
Electives - the electives that have been included.
Extensions - any additional facilities beyond those of Required and Elective
COBOL 61 that have been included.
All the required facilities should be included for general compatibility. The electives
add to the general convenience, as do the extensions. As far as compatibility is concerned, it is important to know the common sub-set of facilities of the various versions
of the language which one intends to use. It is also important to note any potential incompatibilities caused by extensions; e.g., extra key words. Some comments on compatibility are made in paragraph . 2 and the electives are listed in paragraph . 3 •
•2
COMPATIBILITY
Compatibility may be judged by the ease with which a program running on one system
can be transferred to another. The transfer involves two important factors: first, the
proportion of the program to be re-written; second, the difficulty of the re-writing.
COBOL tends to minimize both of these factors. In the first case programs should be
written to use parts of COBOL that are common to both systems, hence the existence
of "Required COBOL." Some changes are, however, inevitable where input-output and
environment are concerned. These have been gathered into separate divisions of
COBOL, and re-writing is easy because the original and revised programs both use
the same language.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
7/62
USER'S GUIDE
4: 161.300
§ 161.
However, there are some hidden differences in which the COBOL specifications are
not specific and are open to alternative implementations, or where the specifications
are ambiguous. Although several ambiguous cases are known to exist, these are not
officially published.
At present, COBOL is not a perfect common language and requires the user's careful
attention to the relevant manuals. Each implementation of COBOL varies in some way
from the others, and none of them cover all the possible facilities. During the pres~nt
phase, a sub-set of COBOL 61 called REQUIRED COBOL 61 has been defined. A
"proper COBOL compiler" is one that covers at least this sub-set of facilities. There
are two other important sets of facilities - electives and options.
Options are those facilities that a programmer mayor may not use, as he desires.
Electives are those facilities that are not part of REQUIRED COBOL 61.
Certain facilities are undefined and may be implemented in different ways. There is no
COBOL standard to show whether a letter "A" should collate "lower" than "B", let alone
whether letters collate lower than numerals and how the other characters are treated.
A second undefined feature is the OPEN REVERSED facility •
•3
ELECTIVES
The electives for COBOL 61 are numbered and listed below. The.same numbers are
used in the description of each version of COBOL. A reference to the page number of
the official Department of Defense Report (reference #1) is given for each; e. g.,
(IV-3) .
• 31
Chapter V. Characters and Words
#1
Characters Used in Formulas (V-2)
(See #22 COMPUTE)
#2
Characters Used in Relations (V-2)
The use of algebraic symbols
#3
>
Greater Than
<
Less Than
=
Equal to
Semicolon (;) (V-I)
This is used freely in all divisions as an option to separate statements for the
convenience of the reader; it is ignored by the translator; e.g.,
ADD A TO B
ADD C TO D.
is equivalent to
ADD A TO B; ADD C TO D.
#4
All literals above 120 characters in length (V-4)
#5
UPPER-BOUND (V-5)
UPPER-BOUNDS
LOWER-BOUND
LOWER- BOUNDS
These are used to represent the high and low sentinels or delimiters of sets of
data.
7/62
4:161.320
COBOL
§
161.
#6
HIGH-VALUE (V-S)
HIGH- VALUES
LOW-VALUE
LOW-VALUES
These are used to represent the high and low values of a computer's collating
sequence.
#7
The "PREPARED FOR Compute-name" option (VI-2)
These enable sets of data descriptions applicable to several computers to be
written and labelled separately. The translator may not ignore the inappropriate
ones •
• 32
The following File Description Clauses and/or options:
#8
The "integer-2 TO" option of BLOCK size (VI-6)
This enables a block size to be expressed as a range instead of a fixed number
of records or characters.
#9
The "FILE CONTAINS ••.•• " clause (VI-9)
This enables the programmer to indicate the approximate size of a file, to
assist the translator in optimization.
#10
The "data-name-l," and the "library-name IN LIBRARY" options in the LABEL
RECORDS clause (VI-lO)
This enables the programmer to insert his own label formats, or choose from
sets held in the library instead of being restricted to the choice between an
installation standard or none (see #21).
#11
The "SEQUENCED ON •••• " clause (VI-l4)
This specifies the keys on which records in a file are sequenced. It is useful
for the reader and could enable a translator to check them at run time, but it is
not required to do so ••
#12
The "data-name-4 HASHED" option in the VALUE clause (VI-IS)
This specifies that certain items in all records are to be "hash-totalled" and
checked against a total in the end-label for the file .
. 33
The following Record Description clauses and/or options
#13
The "integer-l TO" and the "DEPENDING ON •.. " options in the OCCURS clause
(VI-3I)
This enables the number of entries in a table to vary, enables the range to be
specified, and provides an optional means of knowing the number at any time.
#14
The symbol "L" and the "DEPENDING ON ••• " option in the PICTURE clause
(VI-33)
This enables items to be designated as variable length and provides an optional
means of knowing the length at any time (see also #19).
#IS
The "BITS" option in the POINT LOCATION clause (VI-36)
This enables items to be specified in a binary scale.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
7/62
4:161.340
USER'S GUIDE
§
161.
#16
The "RANGE IS ••• " clause (VI-37)
This enables the range of values of a numeric item or of the individual
character of alphameric items to be specified for the convenience of the
translator.
#17
The complete RENAMES clause (VI-39)
This enables alternative, possibly overlapping, groupings of items of data
to be specified for efficient object space.
#18
The "SIGN is data-name" option in the SIGN clause (VI-40)
This enables a separate data item to be specified, whose values represents
the sign of the data item being described.
#19
The "integer-1 TO" and the "DEPENDING ON ••••• " options in the SIZE
clause (VI-41)
This is an alternative method for that shown in #14.
#20
All of Option 2 under the VALUE clause (VI - 44)
This enables one condition name to be associated with more than one value
of a conditional variable.
#21
All of paragraph 4.1. 2 entitled "Specifications and Handling of Labels" (VI-46)
This is a facility to describe file and tape labels in detail (see #10) •
• 34
The following verbs:
#22
COMPUTE (VII-31)
This enables algebraic formulae to be used (see #1 and #32).
#23
DEFINE (VII- 32)
This enables new verbs and formats of statements using them to be defined.
#24
ENTER (Vll-36)
This is a means of changing to another language.
#25
INCLUDE (Vll-41)
This enables library routines to be called (also see # 48).
#26
USE (VII-60)
This enables "own coding" to be specified for input-output errors and file and
tape labels in addition to any standard routines •
• 35
The following verb options:
#27
LOCK option of the CLOSE verb (Vll-28)
This enables a tape to be rewound and locked.
7/62
4:161.350
COBOL
§
161.
#28
CORRESPONDING option of the MOVE verb (VU-44)
This enables moves to be made in which there are excess source or destination
items; and permits the formats of individual items to be different.
#29
REVERSED option of the OPEN verb (VU-48)
This enables a single-reel file to be opened at its file-end label and read in the
reverse sequence to the recording.
#30
ADVANCING option of the WRITE verb (VU-61)
This enables a variable amount of paper advance to be specified at each
line of print.
#31
The provisions of Note 3b under the STOP verb (VU-58)
This specifies that a translation for a target computer with n~ alpha
display must arrange and print a numeric-alphabetic item list used in
the display.
#32
All provisions regarding the use of formulas (VII-21)
See #22.
#33
With reference to all of the arithmetic verbs, the ability to handle data items
larger than ten (10) decimal digits in size. Affected are the verbs:
ADD, (VII-25)
COMPUTE, (VII-31)
DIVIDE, (VU-35)
MULTIPLY, (VII-46)
SUBTRACT, (VII-59)
#34
The following specific relation forms
IS UNEQUAL TO (VU-7)
EQUALS (VU-7)
EXCEEDS (VII-7)
#35
The following specific test form (VU-7)
IF {data-name}
-
formula
IS Nar ZERO
#36
In the composition of compound conditional sentences, the use of implied
objects with implied subjects (VU- 8).
#37
Compound conditions other than those formed from a simple condition, with a
common subject and reraTIOil{O'r test), connected to objects by either all ANDS
or all ORS (VU-B).
#38
In form 1 of VU.2.2.2, the ability to have "statement-I" be a conditional
statement, and the permitting of conditional statements in "statement-2"
beyond one level in depth (VII -1)
Form 1 is:
IF condition {statement-l
NEXT SENTENCE
©
}
{OTHERWISE}
ELSE
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
}
{ statement-2
NEXT SENTENCE
7/62
4:161.360
§
USER'S GUIDE
161.
#39
• 36
When form 2 of VII. 2. 2. 2 is not embedded in form 1, of VII. 2.2.2, the
ability to handle anything other than ON SIZE ERROR, or AT END (VII-I) •
The following Environment Division options:
#40
In Option 2 of the SOURCE-COMPUTER paragraph, all options except
"computer-name" (VIII-2)
These enable the programmer to describe a sub- set of an automatic
description rather than rely on a library routine or an unqualified automatic
description.
#41
In Option 2 of the OBJECT-COMPUTER paragraph, all options except
"computer-name" (VIII-4)
These enable the programmer to describe a sub- set of an automatic description
rather than rely on a library routine or an unqualified automatic description.
#42
All of Option 3 of the SPECIAL-NAMES paragraph (VIII-6)
This enables names to be given to parts of a console so that they can be
referred to as data names in ACCEPT, WRITE, and DISPLAY.
#43
Option I of the FILE-CONTROL paragraph (VIII-B)
This enables a library description to be used to describe a file, and thus be
common to several programs.
#44
In Option 2 of the FILE-CONTROL paragraph, the "PRIORITY IS priority"
option (VIII - 8)
This enables priorities to be assigned to files for multi-programming
situations.
#45
Option 1 of the I-O-CONTROL paragraph (VIII-IO)
This enables a library description to be used to describe the input- output,
re-run, input-output area, and multi-file techniques, and thus be common to
several programs.
#46
All of Option 2 of the I-O-CONTROL paragraph. However, each implementor
is expected to provide at least one of the specified forms of the RERUN option.
(VIII-lO)
This enables the programmer to describe his own input-output, re-run,
input-output area, and multi-file techniques.
, • 37
The following Identification Division option:
#4 7
Note 1 under the DATE- COMPILED entry (IX - 3)
This enables the programmer to have the current date printed when his program
is compiled .
• 38
The following Special Features:
#48
The discussion on the PROCEDURE DIVISION entries in the library (X-I)
This enables library routines to be called. (Also see #25.)
7/62
4:161.400
COBOL
§
161.
The entire discussion on "SEGMENTATION" (X-3j
#49
This enables the programmer to divide his program into segments and to give
them priorities, to allow a compiler to arrange efficient allocation to different
storage levels and suitable overlay procedures.
A
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF COBOL
(Reprinted from reference 1)
Al
General Philosophy Of COBOL Development
The task of the committee was that of preparing a common business oriented language. By this is meant the
establishment of a standard method of expressing solutions for a certain class of problems normally referred
to as "business data processing." The word "common" was intetpreted to mean that the source program
language would be compatible among a significant group of computers. Differences in computers relating to
size, types of peripheral equipment, and different order structure make complete compatibility impossible.
Thus, the realistic goal of achieving the maximum amount of compatibility on present day computers was the
philosophy or framework within which all work was done.
In describing a data processing problem, there are two elements involved. One is the set of procedures which
specify how the data is to be manipulated, and the other is a description of the data involved.. Furthermore,
it was recognized that certain information pertaining to the specific computer on which the problem is to be
run, and some information identifying the program were also a necessary part of the description of a problem.
The information pertaining to the computer itself, of course, would never carryover from one computer to another. However, it was felt that the advantages of having a common means of expression were sufficiently
great to warrant the development of a standard form for even those items which clearly changed from computer
to computer.
042
COBOL System Description
.421 General
The COBOL system is composed of two elements - the source program written in COBOL, and the compiler
which translates this source program into an object program capable of running on a computer. This report,
in general, considers only the source program and does not consider the second element (the compiler) directly. However, the specifications of a language obviously determine, to a large extent, the boundaries of a
compiler. Therefore, the compiler is mentioned in certain cases to facilitate the explanation of the language.
A source program is used to specify the solution of a business data processing problem. The four elements
of this specification are:
1. The identification of the program.
2. The description of the equipment being used in the processing.
3. The description of the data being processed.
4. The set of procedures which determine how the data is to be processed.
The COBOL System has a separate division within the source program for each of these elements. The names
of these divisions are:
IDENTIFICATION
ENVmONMENT
DATA
PROCEDURE
0422 Identification Division
The putpose of the IDENTIFICATION DIVISION is to identify the Source Program and outputs of a compilation.
In addition, the user may include the data that the program was written, the date that the compilation was accomplished and any other information which is desired.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
7/62
USER'S GUIDE
4:161.423
§ 161.
.423 Environment Division
The ENVIRONMENT DMSION is that part of the source program which specifies the equipment being used.
It contains descriptions of the computers to be used both for compiling the source program and for running the
object program. Memory size, number of tape units, hardware switches, printers, etc., are among many items
that may be mentioned for a particular computer. Problem oriented names may be assigned to a particular
equipment. Those aspects of a file which relate directly to hardware are described here. Because this division deals entirely with the specifications of the equipment being used, it is largely computer dependent.
.424 Data Division
The DATA DIVISION uses file and record descriptions to describe the files of data that the object program is
to manipulate or create, and the individual logical records which comprise these fild. The characteristics
or properties of the data are described in relation to a Standard Data Format rather than an equipment
oriented format. Therefore, this division is to a large extent computer-independent. So, while compatibility
among computers cannot, 'in general, be absolutely assured, careful planning in the data layout will permit the
same data descriptions, with minor modification, to apply to more than one computer .
. 425 Procedure Division
The PROCEDURE DIVISION specifies the steps that the user wishes the computer to follow. These steps
are expressed in terms of meaningful English words, statements, sentences, and paragraphs. This aspect of
of the overall system is often referred to as the "program"; in reality it is only part of the total specification
of the problem solution (i.e. the program), and is insufficient, by itself, to describe the entire problem. This
is true because repeated references must be made - either explicitly or implicitly - to information appearing in
the other divisions. This division, more than any other, allows the user to express his thoughts in meaningful
English. Concepts of verbs to denote actions, and sentences to describe procedures, are basic, as is the ,use
of conditional statements to provide alternative,paths of action. The PROCEDURE DMSION is essentially
computer independent. That is, any user of COBOL can understand the information appearing in this division
without regard to any particular computer. Furthermore, ev~ry COBOL compiler will interpret this information
in the same way .
.426 Compatibility
The amount of inter-computer compatibility throughout the COBOL system varies with the division, and the
users' effort expended to obtain this goal. In the PROCEDURE DIVISION, virtually no effort is needed to
maintain compatibility among computers. In the DATA DIVISION, some care must be taken to minimize the
loss of object program efficiency. ,In the ENVIRONMENT DIVISION, almost all information is computer-dependent and, therefore, the compatibility is based on ease of understanding rather than direct transference. ,
The IDENTIFICATION DIVISION, like the PROCEDURE DMSION, should require virtually no effort to maintain compatibility.
.427 Summary
The COBOL System is the first large scale effort in defining a single language which permits the writing of
data processing problems for many computers. That this publication is merely one step along the way, with a
great deal of additional work required before the final system can be achieved, is undeniable. However, with
the significant amount of compatibility which has already been achieved, the COBOL System provides the
user with an effective means of describing the solution of his data processing problems .
. 43
Objectives
There are hundreds of business, government, and educational organizations using a wide variety of electronic
computers in data processing operations. Some of the major users have more than one type of computer applied to the same general data processing application at different locations. The experience of these organizations to date indicates that a major problem in using computing equipment wisely and efficiently lies in
stating the data processing application in such a way that computer programs are developed and maintained
with a minimum of time and programming effort.
A COmmon ~usiness Qriented !,anguage, independent of any make or model of computer, open-ended and stated
in English, would do much to solve or reduce this problem. Such a language would also simplify and speed up
the related problem of training personnel in the design of data processing systems and the development of computer programs for such systems.
7/62
4: 161.400
COBOL
§
161.
#49
The entire discussion on "SEGMENTATION" (X-3i
This enables the programmer to divide his program into segments and to give
them priorities, to allow a compiler to arrange efficient allocation to different
storage levels and suitable overlay procedures .
.4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF COBOL
(Reprinted from reference 1)
.41
General Philosophy Of COBOL Development
The task of the committee was that of preparing a common business oriented language. By this is meant the
establishment of a standard method of expressing solutions for a certain class of problems normally referred
to as "business data processing." The word "common" was interpreted to mean that the source program
language would be compatible among a significant group of computers. Differences in computers relating to
size, types of peripheral equipment, and different order structure make complete compatibility impossible.
Thus, the realistic goal of achieving the maximum amount of compatibility on present day computers was the
philosophy or framework within which all work was done.
In describing a data processing problem, there are two elements involved. One is the set of procedures which
specify ROW the data is to be manipulated, and the other is a description of the data involved •. Furthermore,
it was recognized that certain information pertaining to the specific computer on which the problem is to be
run, and some information identifying the program were also a necessary part of the description of a problem.
The information pertaining to the computer itself, of course, would never carryover from one computer to another. However, it was felt that the advantages of having a common means of expression were sufficiendy
great to warrant the development of a standard form for even those items which clearly changed from computer
to computer.
.42
COBOL System Description
.421 General
The COBOL system is composed of two elements - the source program written in COBOL, and the compiler
which translates this source program into an object program capable of running on a computer. This report,
in general, considers only the source program and does not consider the second element (the compiler) directly. However, the specifications of a language obviously determine, to a large extent, the boundaries of a
compiler. Therefore, the compiler is mentioned in certain cases to facilitate the explanation of the language.
A source program is used to specify the solution of a business data processing problem. The four elements
of this specification are:
1. The identification of the program.
2. The description of the equipment being used in the processing.
3. The description of the data being processed.
4. The set of procedures which determine how the data is to be processed.
The COBOL System has a separate division within the source program for each of these elements. The names
of these divisions are:
IDENTIFICA TION
ENVIRONMENT
DATA
PROCEDURE
.422 Identification Division
The purpose of the IDENTIFICATION DIVISION is to identify the Source Program and outputs of a compilation.
In addition, the user may include the data that the program was wrirten, the date that the compilation was accomplished and any other information which is desired.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
7/62
USER'S GUIDE
4:161.423
§ 161.
.423 Environment Division
The ENVIRONMENT DIVISION is that part of the source program which specifies the equipment being used.
It contains descriptions of the computers to be used both for compiling the source program and for running the
object program. Memory size, number of tape units, hardware switches, printers, etc., are among many items
that may be mentioned for a particular computer. Problem oriented names may be assigne~ to a particular
equipment. Those aspects of a file which relate directly to hardware are described here. Because this division deals entirely with the specifications of the equipment being used, it is largely computer dependent.
. 424 Data Division
The DATA DIVISION uses file and record descriptions to describe the files of data that the object program, is
to manipulate or create, and the individual logical records which comprise these file§. The characteristics
or properties of the data are described in relation to a Standard Data Format rather than an equipment
oriented format. Therefore, this division is to a large extent computer-independent. So, while compatibility
among computers cannot, in general, be absolutely assured, careful planning in the data layout will permit the
same data descriptions, with minor modification, to apply to more than one computer.
. 425 Procedure Division
The PROCEDURE DIVISION specifies the steps that the user wishes the computer to follow. These steps
are expressed in terms of meaningful English words, statements, sentences, and paragraphs. This aspect of
of the overall system is often ref~rred to as the "program"; in reality it is only part of the total specification
of the problem solution (i.e. the program), and is insufficient, by itself, to describe the entire problem. This
is true because repeated references must be made - either explicitly or implicitly - to information appeac.ing in
the other divisions. This division, more than any other, allows the user to express his thoughts in meaningful
English. Concepts of verbs to denote actions, and sentences to describe procedures, are basic, as is the use
of conditional statements to provide alternative. paths of action. The PROCEDURE DIVISION is essentially
computer independent. That is, any user of COBOL can understand the information appearing in this division
without regard to any particular computer. Furthermore, ev';ry COBOL compiler will interpret this information
in the same way .
. 426 Compatibiliry
The amount of inter-computer compatibility throughout the COBOL system varies with the division, and the
users' effort expended to obtain this goal. In the PROCEDURE DIVISION, virtually no effort is needed to
maintain compatibility among computers. In the DATA DIVISION, some care must be taken to minimize the
loss of object program efficiency. ,In the ENvmONMENT DIVISION, almost all information is computer-dependent and, therefore, the compatibility is based on ease of understanding rather than direct transference.
The IDENTIFICATION DIVISION, like the PROCEDURE DIVISION, should require virtually no effort to maintain compatibility •
.427 Summary
The COBOL System is the first large scale effort in defining a single language which permits the writing of
data processing problems for many computers. That this pUblication is merely one step along the way, with a
great deal of additional work required before the final system can be achieved, is undeniable. However, with
the significant amount of compatibility which has already been achieved, the COBOL System provides the
user with an effective means of describing the solution of his data processing problems .
.43
Objectives
There are hundreds of business, government, and educational organizations using a wide variety of electronic
computers in data processing operations. ,Som'e of the major users have more than one type of computer applied to the same general data processing application at different locations. The experience of these organizations to date indicates that a major problem in using computing equipment wisely and efficiently lies in
stating the data processing application in such a way that computer programs are developed and maintained
with a minimum of time and programming effort.
A COmmon ~usi.ness Qriented !:anguage, independent of any make or model of computer, open-ended and stated
in English, would do much to solve or reduce this problem. Such a language would also simplify and speed up
the related problem of training personnel in the design of data processing systems and the development of computer programs for such systems.
7/62
COBOL
4: 161.460
§
161.
.46
Maintenance
In recognition of the fact that the task of defining a Cammon ~usiness Qriented banguage does not end with
publishing specifications, the Executive Committee has created a Maintenance Committee.
The Maintenance Committee is comprised of a Users Group and a Manufacturer Group. Its task is to give
continuing attention to the system in order to answer questions arising from users and implementors of the
language, and also to make definitive modifications (including additions, clarifications and changes). Additions, clarifications, and changes to COBOL, on which the Users and Manufacturers Groups are agreed, will
be reproduced as working papers pending the next annual publication of a revised COBOL Manual. . Proposals
for supplements to COBOL will be accepted from outside organizations or individuals by the Executive Committee, and sent to the Users and Manufacturers Groups for concurrent consideration .
.47
Acknowledgment
It is requested of all organizations who intend to implement the COBOL system, and expect to write a manual
describing the operation of their processor of the COBOL system, that the remainder of the Acknowledgment
Section be included in its entirety as part of the preface to any such publication.
"This pUblication is based on the COBOL System developed in 1959 by a committee composed of government
users and computer manufacturers. The organizations participating in the original development were:
Air Materiel Command, United States Air Force
Bureau of Standards, Department of Commerce
David Taylor Model Basin, Bureau of Ships, U.S. Navy
Electronic Data Processing Division, Minneapolis-Honeywell Regulator Company
Burroughs Corporation
International Business Machines Corporation
Radio Corporation of America
Sylvania Electric Products, Inc.
Univac Division of Sperry-Rand Corporation
In addition to the organizations listed above, the following other organizations participated in the work of
the Maintenance Group.
Allstate Insurance Company
Bendix Corporation, Computer Division
Control Data Corporation
DuPont Corporation
General Electric Company
General Motors Corporation
Lockheed Aircraft Corporation
National Cash Register Company
Philco Corporation
Standard Oil Company (N.].)
United States Steel Corporation
This COBOL-61 manual is the result of contributions made by all of the above mentioned organizations. No
warranty, expressed or implied, is made by any contributor or by the committee as to the accuracy and functioning of the programming system and language. Moreover, no responsibility is assumed by any contributor,
or by the committee, in connection therewith.
It is reasonable to assume that a number of improvements and additions will be made to COBOL. Every effort
will be made to insure that the improvements and corrections will be made in an orderly fashion, with due
recognition of existing users' investments in programming. However, this protection can be positively assured only by individual implementors.
"Procedures have been established for the maintenance of COBOL. Inquiries concerning the procedures and
the methods for proposing changes should be directed to the Executive Committee of the Conference on Data
Systems Languages."
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
7/62
4: 161.9QO
§
USER'S GUIDE
161.
"The authors and copyright holders of the copyrighted material used herein: FLOW-MAnC (Trade-mark of
Sperry-Rand Corporation), Programming for the UNIVAC ® I and II, Data Automation Systems © 1958, 1959,
Sperry-Rand Corporation; IBM Commercial Translator, Form No. F 28-8013, copyrighted 1959 by IBM, FACT,
DSI27A5260-2760, copyrighted 1960 by Minneapolis-Honeywell, have specifically authorized the use of this
material, in whole or in part, in the C::OBOL specifications .. Such authorization extends to the reproduction
and use of COBOL specifications in programming manuals or similar publications."
"Any organization interested in reproducing the COBOL report and initial specifications in whole or in part,
using ideas taken from this report or utilizing this report as the basis for an instruction manual or any other
purpose is free to do so .. However, all such organizations are requested to reproduce this section as part of
the introduction to the document.. Those using a short passage, as in a book review, are requested to mention
"COBOL" in acknowledgement of the source, but need not quote this entire section."
.9'
7/62
REFERENCES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY
# 1
COBOL- -1961: Revised Specifications for a Common Business Oriented Language.
U. S. Government Printing Office: 1961. 0-598941. -
# 2
COBOL- -1960: Initial Specification for a Common Business Oriented Language.
U. S. Government Printing Office: Apr. 1900. 0-552133.
# 3
Paine, R. M., "Automatic coding for business applications." Computer Journal
3(3), 144-149 (Oct. 1960)
# 4
Phillips, C. A., "A Common language to program computers for business problems--second report." Computers and Automation 9(10), 6-8
(Oct. 1960)
# 5
Bromberg, H., "COBOL and compatibility, " Datamation 7(2), 30-4 (Feb. 1961)
# 6
Ellis, P. V., "COBOL." Qomputer Bull. 4(4), 144 (March 1961)
# 7
Sammet, J. E., "A method of combining ALGOL and COBOL, "Proc. Western
Joint Computer Conf. (NJCC No. 19), May 1961. pages 379-88.
# 8
Makinson, T. N., COBOL: a sample problem. Communs. ACM 4, 340-6
(Aug. 1961)
# 9
Bromberg, H., "What COBOL isn't, " Datamation 7(9), 27-9 (Sept. 1961)
#10
Sammet, J. E., "A definition of the COBOL 61 Procedure Division using ALGOL
metalinguistics, " a paper presented at the ACM Meeting, Los
Angeles, Sept. 1961.
#11
Sammet, J. E., "A detailed description of COBOL, " from the Annual Review in
Automatic Programming, Vol. 2 (1961).
#12
Sammet, J. E., "General views on COBOL, " from the Annual Review in Automatic Programming, Vol. 2 (1961)
#13
"COBOL: a Critical Discussion, " Report of Working Committee of the British
Computer Society Discussion Group No.5 on Advanced Programming. Annual Review in Automatic Programming, Vol. 2
(1961) ,
#14
Willey, E. L., Tribe, M., d'Agapeyeff, A., Gibbens, B. J., and Clark, M.
"Some commercial autocodes. A comparative study, " A.P. I.C.
Studies in Data Processing No.1, Academic Press; 1961
COBOL
4:161.901
§ 161.
#15
Humby, E., "RAPIDWRITE--A new approach to COBOL readability, "
Computer J. 4(4), 301 (Jan. 1962)
#16
Longo, L. F., "SURGE: a recoding of the COBOL merchandise control
algorithm, " Communs. of the ACM 5(2), 98-100 (Feb. 1962)
#17
---------- "Goodrich runs program on 501, 225, and 1410 in a COBOL
conversion test." Datamation 8(3), 28 (Mar. 1962)
#18
Whitmore, A.
#19
Knuth, D., "The calculation of Easter," Communs. ACM 5(4), 209-10 (Apr.
1962)
#20
Shaw, C. J., Sr., "The Language proliferation, " DatamatioIj. 8(5), 34-6
(May 1962)
#21
Cunningham,
#22
Sammet,
J., "COBOL at Westinghouse, " Datamation 8(4), 31-2 (Apr. 1962)
J.
F., "Why COBOL?" Communs. ACM 5(5), 236 (May 1962)
J. E., "Basic elements of COBOL 61, " Communs. ACM 5(5), 237-53
(May 1962)
#23
Lippitt, A., "COBOL and compatibility, " Communs. ACM 5(5), 254-5 (May 1962)
#24
Siegel, M., and Smith, A. E., "Interim report on Bureau of Ships COBOL evaluation program, " Communs. ACM 5(5), 256-9 (May 1962)
#25
Berman, R., Sharp, J., and Sturges, L., "Syntactical charts of COBOL 61, "
Communs. ACM 5(5), 260 (with charts inserted) (May 1962)
#26
DonaHy, W. L., "A report writer for COBOL, " Communs. ACM 5(5), 261
(May 1962)
#27
Hicks, W., "The COBOL librarian, " Communs. ACM 5(5), 262 (May 1962)
#28
Emery,
J. C., "Modular data processing systems written in COBOL, " Communs.
ACM 5(5), 263-8 (May 1962)
#29
Kesner, 0., "Floating-point arithmetic in COBOL, " Communs. ACM 5(5),
269-71 (May 1962)
#30
Greene, 1., "Guides to teaching COBOL, " Communs. ACM 5(5), 272-3
(May 1962)
#31
Bouman, C. A., "An advanced input-output system for a COBOL compiler, "
Communs. ACM 5(5), 272-7 (May 1962)
#32
Mullin, J. P., "An introduction to a machine-independent data division, "
Communs. ACM 5(5), 277-8 (May 1962)
#33
Mullen, J. W., "COBOL matching problems," Communs. ACM 5(5), 278-9
(May 1962)
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
7/62
4:170.100
STANDARD
REPORTS
Users' Guide
M. O. Language
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE
§
170.
1.
GENERAL
Machine oriented programming'languages are those in which there is a general one-toone correspondence between the statements of the source program and the instructions
of the object program. The statements may use absolute address or relative address
or symbolic form. Frequently macro and pseudo operations are included to provide
special facilities. These languages have one additional feature distinguishing them from
process -oriented languages in that they have few or no explicit data descriptions, and
it is often necessary to control code conversion, the scaling of fixed point quantities,
alignment of alphameric items, and the structure of records and files, by the procedure
statements.
· 11
Identity
The identity of the language may take several forms: its full name, a code number, an
abbreviation used throughout the report and perhaps a nickname by which it is widely
known. All of these are included in the index for the individual system and in the general index. Where several versions may exist for different configurations of the system, they are described in one section. Any differences between them are specified in
the appropriate places and annotated with the abbreviated name .
. 12
Origin
In addition to the languages developed by the manufactu;rer of computers, many programming languages have been developed by organizations who are users of the equipment.
This does not occur very frequently for machine oriented languages in their basic form,
but does occur for adaptations and extensions introduced in order to provide macro
operation facilities or to fit in with supervisor routines and other software facilities .
. 13
Reference
This is the name and number of any document that is a formal definition or descriptive
specification of the language.
· 14
Description
This states the general characteristics of the different versions available and notes the
differences among them. It also draws attention to any novel or outstanding features or
deficiencies, and to any relationship to other languages of the same type.
· 15
Publication Date
This is the date of the first comprehensive published specification of the language of sufficient detail to enable programs to be written .
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
This paragraph is divided into two parts: a diagram of the form used for writing the
procedures and a description of its use.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:170.210
§
USERS' GUIDE
170 •
. 21
Diagram
The diagram is usually a coding sheet which is prepared in such a way that the subsequent transcription of the program onto cards, paper tape or magnetic tape is formalized.
It shows the fields available for the different parts of the statements, the layout and
sizes of fields and the notation for delimiters, if a variable format is employed .
. 22
Legend
This states the prime use in the language of each of the important fields on the diagram.
It shows the parts that are optional, the fixed size or variation allowed, and how these
parts are related to the parts of instructions in machine code. It also shows whetfier
the entries are made' in decimal, alphameric, hexadecimal, or other forms.
· 23
Corrections
While a program is being debugged, it is necessary to be able to make changes. This
section describes any special facilities available to assist in the three different types of
change: insertions of new items, deletions of items, and alterations to items. Some
languages and their translators have no special provision for corrections, and either
the relevant parts must be entirely re-written and re-translated or, to avoid re-translation, the changes may be made to the object program .
. 24
Special Conventions
The legend gives the straightforward use of the coding sheet; this section describes any
special conventions that may exist .
. 241 Compound addresses
Any method of forming a complex address by adding or subtracting values of labels and
literals is stated; e. g., a relative address composed of a base value and an adjustment .
. 242 Multi-addresses
Any method of specifying several operands in a space normally used for one is stated.
· 243 Literals
Any permitted use of literals for either the absolute or adjustment parts of an address
is stated.
· 244 Special coded addresses
Any special conventions used are stated; e. g., a symbol that means the address of the
current instruction •
.3
LABELS
Labels are the formal names given in the language to entities such as statements, routines, locations, and sometimes devices. Each label has the following important properties.
Existence
This states whether the label of some entity is optional or mandatory, or has any
special property; e.g., that it should be in some special sequence. In most languages,
it is only mandatory to label those statements that are referenced elsewhere, and
the labeling of un -referenced statements is optional.
4/62
4:170.300
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE
§
170.
Region
For a label, a name, or any identifier t<;> be of practical use in a program, its meaning must be defined fur each use in every place it occurs in procedure statements.
The name XYZ may mean one thing in one program and something else in another.
In fact, the meaning of an identifier is restricted to a "region". In the simplest
case, the region of a particular meaning of any identifier is the program in which
that meaning is defined.
In many languages, the region of a meaning of an identifier can be different from the
entire program, beingusually only a part of the program.
Some languages have severe restrictions on the number of identifiers allowed in one
program. This may be due to restrictions of translator space or language style. In
these cases, the program can sometimes be divided into parts in which two kinds of
identifiers are used: "universal" and "local". A universal identifier is defined as
having one meaning for the whole program. A local identifier is defined only for one
part of the program. Then one name can have a different local meaning in each part.
Some languages allow parts of programs which have been written separately with many
local identifiers to have statements that make certain local identifiers in different
parts mean the same thing; that is, their meaning becomes universal by the use of
synonyms.
An important use of local identifiers is in subroutines. The writer of a subroutine
may not know the identifiers that will be used in all the different programs with which
his subroutine may be associated. It is a common convention that all identifiers in a
subroutine are "local" to the subroutine or else are "dynamic parameters".
Local identifiers refer to variables or statements that are used only within the subroutine itself, such as destinations for internal jumps and working locations. Dynamic
parameters are associated with the current inputs and outputs of the subroutine. At
the time of cueing a subroutine, the meanings of the parameters are defined; for example, when a program using identifiers p, q and r uses a sine routine whose parameter is named x, at different time, x may be set to be the same as p or q or r, as required. A parameter may be set by value or by name.
To set a parameter x by value p means that, everywhere in the subroutine, identifier
x is understood to mean the value of the item identified by p at the time the subroutine
was cued.
To set a parameter x by name p means that everywhere in the subroutine that identifier x is used, it is understood to mean the identifier p. In this case, it is possible
that the value of p can be altered by the subroutine, even if p is not the principal re - I
suIt of the subroutine (called a side-effect of the subroutine).
All identifiers local to a region (such as a subroutine) must be defined for the region.
If an identifier is not defined for a region, it is called non -local. If regions can be
nested, the convention usually adopted is that, in a region x, a non-local identifier,
p, has the same meaning as p has in the region y, in which the current region, x, is
nested. This is a recursive definition. For example, suppose that identifiers A to
Z are defined for a program, A to M defined for a subroutine, and A to G defined for
a sub -subroutine; then
in the sub-subroutine, A to G are local and H to Z are non-local, taking the
meanings they have in the subroutine.
in the subroutine, A to M are local and N to Z non-local.
in the program, A to Z are all local.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:170.310
§
USERS' GUIDE
170.
Note that N to Z have the same meaning everywhere; they are universal by usage. A
to G are different at each level of nesting of the regions.
An identifier universal to region X is one that may not be local to any other region
nested within region X.
Key words are universal to a language, and there may be certain key words universal
to an installation. The setting up of a common data description in COBOL can produce identifiers universal to a suite of programs.
The existence of regions, and different types of parameters, allow sophisticated and
flexible language structures, but if used in an indiscriminate way, the results can
also be confusing, or difficult to understand, or even ambiguous.
Formation Rule
Because of the formalized nature of machine-coded languages, the freedom given to
the programmer in composing labels is usually restricted, both in the size of the
label and in the choices of the characters that may be used and their pOSitions.
Designators
Frequently the formation rules are arranged in such a way that different kinds of
entities have their labels formed so that the kind can be recognized from the label;
for example, the initial letter of a label may denote the kind of entity being labeled .
. 31
General Restrictions
These are the restrictions on labels that are necessary because of the formal nature of
the language and are often conditioned by the layout of statements on the coding sheet.
.311 Maximum number of labels
This restriction is usually caused by the storage available in the translating computer
and may be a function of the transl.ator rather than of the language. The maximum may
be coded as an over -all figure or may be coded as a series of separate figures for the
labels of the various kinds of entities such as procedures, constants and items. There
may be separate maxima for "universal" and "local" labels .
. 312 Common label formation rule
Provision is made elsewhere to describe the formation rules separately for each of the
different kinds of entities which may be labeled. If they have a common rule, there is
less restraint on the composition of labels .
. 313 Reserve labels
Often it is necessary that the labels be distinguished from certain other key words in the
language. Sometimes this is accomplished by the position of the label on the coding
sheet.
There may also be certain entities whose labels are used by master routines and library
entries. If these labels were used by the programmer in an incorrect way, confusion
could arise. This section lists the various classes of such "reserved" labels and states
how many there are .
. 314 Other restrictions
These are any other rules which are not obvious from the formation rules given below
and which must not be violated in forming labels.
l
4/62
I AUERBACH I ~
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE
§
4:170.315
170 .
. 315 Designators
This is a list of those kinds of entities of data whose labels are formed in such a way
that the class of the entity can be recognized from its label. The methods of designation
are listed .
. 316 Synonyms permitted
This states the conditions under which one entity may be referred to by more than one
label .
. 32
Universal Labels
.33
Local Labels
Where they exist, the existence, region and formation rule for the labels for each of the
kinds of entities is enumerated. In some cases, the entities as such may not be recognized in the language. Labels for files and records are likely to be found only in special routines for input-output file operations or for the blocking and unblocking of inputoutput data .
.4
DATA
There are three kinds of data in a program, and in many machine oriented languages,
there are no explicit differences among their labels. The three kinds are: Constants,
Items in Working Areas, and Items in Input-Output Areas .
.41
Constants
Constants may exist in two forms in a program: either as tables of constants which are
referred, to by their labels or as literals in the procedures, in which case they are their
own labels .
.411 Maximum sizes of constants
This states the maximum sizes of all the various types of constants that can be written
into the program .
. 412 Maximum sizes for literals
If the maximum sizes of constants that can be written as literals are different from
those held in tables, the differences are listed here .
. 413 Constants per line
When tables of constants are written, it is sometimes possible to write more than one
on a line. This states the limitations that exist for this type of packing .
.42
Working Areas
These are areas set aside for variables that are used in the procedures but which are
not covered by the input-output areas .
.421 Data layout
It is unusual for the data layout in machine oriented languages to be explicity written in
a program unless the storage is able to accept variable length items, and it is necessary
to set word marks or otherwise specify the boundaries of individual items. In general,
the layout is implied by the method of writing the procedures, although the layout may
be specified in a "comment" to assist the reader of the program .
. 422 Data type
If it is necessary or convenient to indicate the type of data to be placed in an area, e. g. ,
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
USERS' GUIDE
4:170.423
§ 170.
alphameric as opposed to numeric, it is noted here. In some systems, the translators
use this data either to make some consistency checks upon a program or to assign appropriate volumes of storage to individual items .
. 423 Redefinition
This shows if it is possible to indicate that a given set of locations may be used at different times or places in a program to hold different items of data. They may be of
different types or formats and have different labels. When the types and formats are
not different, the use of redefinition is not logically different from the use of synonyms .
• 43
Input-Output Areas
These are the areas in which a routine expects to find data after an input operation or
into which it places data before an output operation. Labels of these areas may be the
names of the input-output files or records .
.431 Data layout
The layout of input-output records and blocks may be specified by parameters to an input-output control routine; otherwise, the layout is usually implied by the method of
writing procedures, although the layout may be specified in a "comment" to assist a
reader of a program •
. 432 Data type
If it is necessary or convenient to indicate the type of data to be placed in an area, e. g. ,
alphameric as opposed to numeric, it is noted here. In some systems, the translators
use this data either to make some consistency checks upon a program or to assign appropriate volumes of storage to individual items .
. 433 Copy layout
It is often necessary to have several areas with ideJ?ticallayouts. The output area for
the master file is usually identical with the input area for the master file. In addition,
there may be multiple input-output areas used to organize simultaneous input-output
operations for the blocking and unblocking of records; therefore, a facility by which all
such areas with identical layouts can be specified only once is useful.
.5
PROCEDURES
The procedures in a machine oriented language are very closely allied to the instruction format of the computer. The labeling and/or addressing facilities are covered by
paragraphs 2 and 3, whereas this paragraph is concerned with facilities that are usually covered by the operation codes. There are three types -- direct operation codes,
macro operation codes and pseudo operation codes •
. 51
Direct Operation Codes
These are codes used in languages which have a one-to-one correspondence with the
codes in the computer instruction repertoire. For each type of code it is shown whether
or not that code exists; how many such codes there are; an example of the way a code
might be written; and whether the use of that type of code is mandatory or optional. The
optional form cannot exist, of course, when there is only one type of code for each computer operation .
. 511 Mnemonic codes
These are codes whose form is a mnemonic guide to the operation provided in the computer; e.g., SUB and MTY for "subtract" and "multiply", respectively.
4/62
4:170.512
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE
§
170 .
. 512 Absolute codes
These are codes usually given in a form which is a numeric or alphabetic direct representation of the code used in the computer instruction. They are less easy to memorize
than mnemonics .
. 52
Macro Codes
These are operation codes which introduce operations into the language which do not
exist on a one-for-one basis in the computer code. They are usually provided by calling an open or closed subroutine into the program or forming jumps into the supervisor
routine from the program .
. 521 Number available
The number of macro codes is given for each of the various classes of operations that
are provided, such as mathematical functions or input-output control. They are listed
in detail in paragraph 8 .
. 522 Examples
Two examples are given, one simple and one elaborate. A simple example is normally
indistinguishable in form from a direct operation, except perhaps for some conventional designator. On the other hand, an elaborate mcaro code may require the specification of several parameters to control the routine which provides the operation .
. 523 New macros
If it is possible for the programmer to insert new macros of his own coding into the
program or the system, the method of doing so is given .
. 53
Interludes
These are sequences of statements that are indistinguishable from the remainder of the
program except for some delimiters or designators, but which are executed at the
translation time and do not appear in the object program .
. 531 Possible roles
Interludes are frequently used with load and go translators for such purposes as modifying the translator itself in some way, or developing inserting constants which cannot be
expressed directly in the language, or because they are parameters which are not set
until loading time .
• 532 Example
This illustrates how the interlude is distinguished from conventional coding .
. 54
"
Translator Control
Although machine oriented language programs are usually written in relatively addressed
code and use labels liberally to avoid having to make the allocation of absolute addresses,
there are many occasions when it is necessary and desirable to be able to control the
allocation of absolute addresses. In general, it is assumed that allocation is made by
the translator to serially numbered locations. The control of the translator allocation
is normally provided by means of pseudo codes. These are codes which are of the
same form as and sometimes are indistinguishable from the direct or macro codes except for their actual values but in fact have no corresponding computer code or rou)jne.
Instead, they indicate to the translator that some form of translator control is required.
The main types of control concern the allocation counter, label adjustment and annotation of the program.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
USERS' GUIDE
4:170.541
§
170 .
. 541 Method of control
For each of the different types of control, the method of indicating the control to the
translator in the program is specified. This is usually by pseudo codes or reserved
labels .
. 542 Allocation counter
Except in cases where the object program is produced in a relocatable form, it is usually necessary to initialize the allocation counter. At other times, the counter may need
to be reset to a value that it had used earlier and which had been marked by some label.
It is also convenient to be able to step the counter forward or backward in order to arrange that areas of store are left for tables, working areas and input-output areas and
to reserve certain areas for use by special routines •
. 543 Label adjustment
Most labels have values assigned to them by the translator equal to the current value of
the allocation counter at the time they are encountered and these values are held in a
label table. In order to arrange the storage in a convenient way, it is often necessary
to be able to make certain labels equal in value, to set labels at specific absolute values
and to clear the label table when local labels are being used and a new region is begun .
. 544 Annotation
Many programs include information which is not necessary for the translator but is used
to help people reading the program to understand it. They consist of comments inserted into the program and titles both of which are recognized by the translator and
printed out with the listings of the program .
.6
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
Although not an integral part of the language, most programs written in machine oriented
languages can take advantage of special routines written for the purpose of being used
with the language. They are not always automatically combined into programs by a
specific library feature. Where such routines are available, a brief description of the
facilities and method of call is given .
. 61
Special Arithmetic
This covers such features as multiplication, divis ion, double -length operation and
floating point on those computers where they are not provided in the hardware. They
are usually sufficiently integrated into the language to become macros.
.62
Special Functions
These include sophisticated mathematical functions such as LOG, SIN and any business
or commercial features such as an FICA routine .
. 63
Overlay Control
These are routines provided to manipulate program and data between various levels of
storage by the use of overlay techniques .
. 64
Data Editing
These are routines prOVided to assist in the compilation of sophisticated printing layouts, code translation and radix conversion of data.
4/62
,/
4:170.650
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE
§
170 .
. 65
Input-Output Control
These are routines provided to handle the label and control procedures for files and
reels, the error control procedures of input-output operations, and the blocking and unblocking of records .
. 66
Sorting
These are routines which are embedded in a program to perform sorting of small volumes of data that are normally handled within internal storage .
. 67
Diagnostics
These are facilities, routines, or parameters that may be embedded in or carried along
with a program to assist in easy debugging of programs. It is important to note how
these facilities can be removed or inhibited when no longer required. There are three
basic types -- dumps, tracers and snapshots .
.7
liBRARY FACIUTIES
A program library is a collection of open and closed subroutines, even complete programs and sometimes data descriptions which are available for use with programs
written in the language. The important features are the ability to make insertions into
the library, the entities it contains, the form of the library and the method of call of
items from the library .
. 71
Identity
The name, nicknames and abbreviations by which the library is known are stated here .
• 72
Kind of Library
A library mayor may not accept insertions by programmers in general. It may be a
general library for use by any programmer or a private library for individual programmers or groups of programmers .
. 73
Form of Storage
The most convenient form is magnetic tape or auxiliary internal storage such as a disc
store. A less convenient form is punch cards or paper tape. Sometimes the library
exists only in a written form and has to be transcribed by the programmer or a data
preparation system to suitable form for use with individual programs .
. 74
Variety of Contents
The most usual library contents are open and closed subroutines for incorporation in
programs. Other possible contents are complete programs for use in operating systems, diagnostic routines, supervisor systems and interpreters. Libraries can also
contain data information such as file and record layouts, conversion tables and special
format tables for input -output control .
. 75
Mechanism
This describes the general running and use of the library .
. 751 Insertion of any item
If this is done during a computer run, it is sometimes possible to do it as part of pro-
gram translation and sometimes restricted to special library runs.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:170.752
§
USERS' GUIDE
170 .
. 752 Language of new item
This is the way in which new items must be prepared for insertion .
. 753 Method of call
This is the mechanism which causes a copy of an item in the library to be inserted into
a program. It may be automatic, when a cue or macro in the program is encountered
referring to that item; each program may have to provide a list of calls; or it may be
that manual preparation of decks of cards is necessary .
. 76
Types of Routine
Libraries vary in the types of routine which can be held in them. Some permit only
open routines, some permit only closed routines, some may accept either, provided
each routine is one or the other. A few permit a routine to be variable; i. e ., it can be
called either as open or closed. This section states which types can be inserted, open,
closed, or variable.
!
4/62
I AUERBACH / ~
4:180.100
Users' Guide
Program T ransl afor
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR
§
180 .
.1
GENERAL
Program translators are special routines provided to translate programs from either a
process oriented language or a machine oriented language into a machine oriented language or an intermediate language. The input, called the source program is translated
into the object program. In an integrated system, the object program is in machine
language ready for loading. Sometimes a translator is, in fact, a whole series of
smaller translators which translate the program through a series of languages before
finally arriving at tIte machine language.
· 11
Identity
The name, code number, serial number, the conventional name by which the translator
program is known, and any abbreviation by which it is referenced in these reports, are
stated .
. 12
Description
This paragraph gives an over-all view of the program translator. It states the general
orientation and style; e. g., whether the translator is designed for fast and cheap translation of one-time programs or whether it is a sophisticated translator which, although
taking a relatively long time to translate programs, produces an efficient object routine.
The translator may be biased toward certain uses of the language or toward certain environments in which the language may be used .
. 13
Originator
It is nqt unusual. in the software provided with computers, for languages to be designed
by someone other than the manufacturer. Sometimes translators are provided by user
organizations. This may be because the user organization produced a language, or variations to a language, or required a special orientation or style of translator that was
not included among those issued by the manufacturer.
· 14
Maintainer
Even though the translator may have been produced by an outside organization, it may
be that the manufacturer has assumed responsibility for the maintenance of the translator after it has become established and has been accepted into his repertoire. This
report does not necessarily restrict itself to translators which are approved by the
manufacturer; however. if the manufacturer is the maintainer, this does indicate, to a
large degree, his approval.
· 15
Availability
This indicates the dates at which a working properly-documented version of the translator is available for general use.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:180.200
USERS' GUIDE
§ 180 .
.2
INPUT
The input to a program translator is the source program, as far as the translator is •
concerned. The important facts are the languages in which it may be written, the form
in which it is held, and any restrictions, such as size limitations or special sequencing .
. 21
Languages
Usually, the name of the language is a sufficient identification of the language in which
the source program may be written; however, with a standardized or common language
that is used in many places, there may be variations in the use of the language froin '
place to place. These are usually restrictions placed upon the language as used in conjunction with different translators or different classes of target computers. The restrictions are those principal facilities of the language that are not covered by the translator but are nevertheless (optional) facilities available in other (prospective or alternative) implementations of the language. The exemptions may be listed in the description
of the language .
. 22
Form
There are three factors concerned with the form in which a source program may be presented. First, media: in any particular program translator, there is usually a restriction on the input media on which a source program can be accepted. Second, sequence:
many translators have obtained some efficiency in translation by depending upon some
particular ordering of the different parts of the program as they are presented to the
translator; for example, there may be a reqUirement that all the subroutines that are
cued in the program be listed at the beginning, or that the data description precede the
procedures. Third, grouping: often different parts of the source program are required
to be grouped together in various categories; e. g., all the procedures in one group, all
the data descriptions in one group, and so on .
. 23
Size Limitations
Some program translators have rigid restrictions on the sizes of source program they
can handle. Sometimes the restriction is on the number of source statements, but, of
course, this may depend upon the complexity Of the procedures. A figure is normally
given here in terms of elementary statements. There may also be restrictions on the
sizes of individual statements that the translator can accept and on the maximum number
of data items that may be named and handled in anyone particular program. The limitations on size for a particular translator can be unique to the translator and in the way
it is written. Other special restrictions are also included in this section .
.3
OUTPUT
The output of a program translator is the object program as far as the program translator is concerned, although it may be necessary to further translate the object program into another level of language before it becomes possible to load it onto the target
computer (in which case the pertinent details of the subsequent program translator are
also of interest). Another part of the output that is also of fundamental importance is
the documentation provided with the program translator. Good documentation makes debugging of a routine easier and permits another user to understand the program more
easily .
. 31
Object Program
There are three important properties of the object program. First, there is the language in which the output is written. Second, there is the style in which it is written;
for example, even if an object program is written in a potentially sophisticated output
language, there may be rigid restrictions in the translator on the degree of sophistication actually used in the object program. This may be designed to simplify or make
more efficient a subsequent translation. Third, there is the output media which may
~
4/62
A-U-ER-BA-CH-j-@
'-1
/
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR
§
4:180.320
180.
vary among the different kind of external storage media to be used.
· 32
Conventions
These are any particular facilities that may be included automatically in the object program, either as service routines or as entries into monitor or supervisor routines to
deal with restart procedures, the logging of run progress, input-output control, and
special operating procedures. The program may also be written to be compatible with
certain operating systems, libraries, or program collecting schemes into which it is
required to fit. All of these facilities may be organized into a sophisticated operating
environment for the general convenience and efficiency of running a particular computer installation .
. 33
Documentation
The different types of documentation that may be produced by a program translator are
varied. The output often includes listings of the source and object programs, a storage
map of the lay-out expected in the target computer; and particular details, such as lists
of checkpoints established in the program, language errors discovered in the source
program, and warnings such as an overflow of the storage capacity of the target computer. The way such output is provided may vary from translator to translator. In
some cases, there is one completely integrated output; in other cases, the source program and object programs are produced separately and cross-referenced by means of
labels. The reports and errors may either be intermingled with the source program or
listed separately. Usually the output is printed directly or written on a tape for offline printing.
·4
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
The translating procedure is a description of the way the translator goes about the
translation, including the logical way the program is organized; the different or optional
modes of translation; any special features, such as whether it is possible to translate
many programs in one run, the convenience and facilities that the translator provides
for use with program diagnostics; and the way. in which the translator uses its library .
.41
Phases and Passes
This paragraph describes the general mode of operation of the translator. Generally,
an important characteristic of any translation is the number of times the translator
works through the program data from one end to the other. These are divided into two
types - passes and scans. A pass occurs when the bulk of the program is significantly
modified or moved from one form of storage to another. It is an internal pass if both
the origin and destination are internal storage, and an input-output pass otherwise. A
scan is an examination of the program or a skeleton of the program usually made in
order to locate certain properties. When all the program cannot be held in internal
storage, a pass may have to be made that does no more translation work than does a
scan.
Where the number of passes or scans is high, they may be grouped as a phase of translation. A phase may consist of a variable number of passes. Many translators can
deal only with a limited number of identifiers at one time and with a different set of
identifiers in each pass. The number of passes then depends on the number of identifiers.
'"
· 42
Optional Mode s
It is unusual for a translator to be a primitive translator, and normally a translator includes checks on the source program and other features, such as the ability to load and
run. Load and run means that at the end of the translation, the object program is automatically loaded into the store of the target computer (which must also, therefore, be
the translating computer), and it is possible to jump straight into the object routine and
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:180.430
§
USERS' GUIDE
180.
execute it. In addition, it may be possible, when it is suspected that there are too
many errors in the source program to justify a complete translation, to restrict the
translator so that it is used only as a checking device. This saves much of the time
that would be consumed by a full translation.
There may also be special modes of running in which the translator is used only to modify a previous program. This is called patching. Patching implies that there is no particular attention paid to optimization or tidiness of the layout of the object program.
Patching is used to obtain fast translation. This may be a convenience during debugging.
The usual practice is that the original program.is patched until it is logically correct. It is then properly translated in a final translation to tidy-up the program and the
deficiencies that may have occurred because of patching. Updating is the facility of
collecting all the patches and the original translation of the program maintained in some
convenient intermediate form, and performing a sophisticated correction of the intermediate form .
. 43
Special Features
These are variations of the different modes of translation, which normally provide
some degree of optimization, either of translation time or of some other facility .
. 431 Alter to check only
During the translation of the program, it may become obvious that there are too many
errors in the source language for the object program to be of any use for debugging
runs. In this case some translators are able to alter to the mode of "checking only"
during a run, and then save the time that would otherwise be wasted by full translation .
. 432 Fast unoptimized translate
In those translators in which a large degree of opt!mization is built into the translation,
it is usually obtained at the expense of a lengthy translation time. It is possible on
some translators to indicate that an unoptimized translation is required in order to save
translation time. Note that the results may not only be a slower object routine but also
a larger object routine, taking up more space in the target computer than would otherwise be occupied. Unoptimized translation may be used for one-time programs or debugging runs .
. 433 Short translate on restricted program
In a multi-phase or a mUlti-pass translator, some of the passes may be devoted to taking care of the fact that the source program may be in an unspecified order or that certain facilities, particularly difficult to translate, have been used. It is sometimes possible to state that the source program has been properly ordered or that certain facilit~es are not being used in the program so that certain phases or passes can be eliminated from the translation .
. 44
Bulk Translating
When a large number of programs have to be translated at one time, the translator may
be designed so that they can be loaded one after another as input and translated
straightforwardly, without pausing, one after another. On the other hand, some multipass translators have to be reloaded for each of these programs. In the former case,
bulk translating is possible; in the latter case, it is not .
. 45
Program Diagnostics
Translators sometimes have the ability to incorporate facilities directly in the object
program for special kinds of diagnostics. These facilities may include complete routines within the program to carry out the diagnostics, or merely parameters and control instructions to enable the diagnostics to be more smoothly carried out. Some
4/62
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR
§
4:180.451
180.
methods possible are: integrating diagnostic routines into the programs; incorporating
certain jumps in programs in order to enter diagnostic routines held by a supervisor;
placing parameters in specified parts of the program which a standard diagnostic routine can easily find when it is used during the debugging. Incorporation of these aids in
the translator may be inconvenient when doing production runs or large scale trials because of the time and space consumed. It is therefore important to know if the facilities
can be removed or suppressed easily .
. 451 Tracers
These are diagnostic routines which provide a listing dynamically during the run of a
program to trace the path that the sequence control has followed through the program.
To do this completely would require a tabulation of all the jumps that were executed in
the program. Other tracers print out the occurrences of the sequence passing certain
checkpoirits in the program or confining the facility to certain areas of the program.
Tracers are frequently combined with snapshots .
. 452 Snapshots
Snapshots, which exist in many forms, are listings of the contents of selected registers
or other storage locations at different times during the execution of the program. Some
are like tracers in that each time the program sequence control passes through a specified checkpoint, a printout is made of selected registers and locations. The selection
may differ for each checkpoint. In an alternative scheme, it may be that certain registers and locations are marked for snapshotting and then, each time the contents of such
a register or location changes, its value is printed out. This does not provide a trace
of the program but does provide a dynamic picture of how certain quantities alter during
the progress of the program .
. 453 Dumps
Dumps are printouts of the state of a program and the contents of many of the locations
in the store at a time when a program has stopped either because the trial is completed
or has hung up. Dumps are normally on a much larger scale than snapshots. In many
cases complete dumps of the store may be taken at the end of a trial. In general, the
adjective dynamic is associated with snapshots, and the phrase post-mortem associated
with dumps. Snapshots are usually far more selective than dumps .
. 46
Translator Library
Where a library of different categories of information is available for use in programs
and is controlled by the translator, the important characteristics are its contents, the
method of insertion of the contents into the library, the mechanism of calling entities
from the library and the different types of library that can be used .
. 461 Identity
This is the particular name, if any, given to the library .
. 462 User restriction
The more common restrictions concern the ability of various classes of users to make
insertions into a library. Occasionally, there may be restrictions upon the classes of
users who may call entities from the library .
. 463 Form
The storage medium used is of major interest. The most usual medium is magnetiC
tape; sometimes, auxiliary storage. The organization includes the language and style
of entities as well as the grouping in serial access stores.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:180.464
§
USERS' GUIDE
180 .
. 464 Contents
Libraries vary widely in the kinds of entities they may contain. The most usual contents are subroutines, although complete routines, production, service, and diagnostics
are often held. With the use of process oriented languages libraries are becoming more
important, and now sometimes contain data and environment descriptions .
. 465 Librarianship
There are three facilities which the translator may be able to control. First, a mechanism for the insertion of new entities into the library is needed, This is often accomplished by a separate routine. Except for automatic inclusion of entire programs, the
source language must provide a means of designating entities to be inserted.
Second, there may be a means of altering entities in the library. Usually, only deletions are possible. Third, there must be a calling procedure. The most automatic way
is to call by noting all the cues in a routine and thence establish a'calllist. More frequently, each program must contain its own call list, especially when a cue, say for a
sine routine, is ambiguous because there are various sine routines for different degrees of preCision or ranges of the argument .
.5
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
The performance of a translator can be measured in three different ways: first, the
amount of space the object routine occupies in the target computer; second, the time
that it takes to perform the translation; and third, the time that the object routine takes
in running, compared with some standard. The performance of the translator in each
of these ways may be affected by the competence of the programmer, the environment
in which the translator runs, and the environment in which the object program is required to run .
. 51
Object Program Space
In spite of the complexity of space allocation, there are normally three particular areas
which can be considered .
. 511 Fixed overhead
In some cases, there are definite areas of storage set aside for supervisors, monitor
routines, loaders, overlay controls and other executive routines. Storage may also be
reserved for special registers, constants, or work areas for the central processor and
input-output controllers. The space for each of these, where it is significant, is
stated, as are any comments as to the variability of the space or the optional inclusion
of the feature .
. 512 Space required for each input-output file
In the cases where data is recorded on magnetic tapes in large blocks, the amount of
space that must be allocated in internal storage to maintain input and output areas, and
if necessary alternating areas to allow simultaneous input-output, may be considerable .
. 513 Approximate expansion of procedures
This may vary from the case - in simpler translators - of one to one expansion, to the
most sophisticated compilers in which it is very difficult to give any firm estimate;
however, some estimate is usually given, based on elementary statements. Such an
estimate must be interpreted as being only an indication of the order of magnitude of
expansion ratio. This estimate may be stated for different kinds of statements, where
this is possible, particularly for algebraic statements and pseudo-English statements.
~
4/62
A-U-ER-BA-CH-I.,....~
r-I
/
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR
4:180.520
§ 180 .
. 52
Translation Time
The time quoted here is for a given number of elementary statements where "s" is the
number of elementary statements. The time is given as "a + bs" where "a" is a fixed
overhead and "b" is an increment for each statement. The total units are expressed in
minutes. There are sometimes several different cases to consider, depending upon the
mode in which the translator is working. The three given here are for normal translation, checking only, and unoptimized translation .
. 53
Optimizing Data
In some languages it is possible to make statements that are useful to the translator in
improving the efficiency of the object program. A list is given here of those that are
used by the translator. Some may be ignored to simplify the translator or because they
would not be useful for the target computer. These may be statements about the procedures. The statements about procedures might give the translator some information
about the relative frequency of the execution of given procedures. These may be used
to optimize instructions or to allow the translator to make decisions about the level of
storage in which to hold different parts of the program or associated data. In some
cases, as in COBOL, the whole program may be divided into segments which are in
fact potential overlay segments and these may be arranged in some priority order which
is considered in allocating segments to the fastest areas of internal storage .
. 54
Object Program Performance
For simple assembly systems, of course, the object routine performance is largely unaffected by the translator. The evaluation of the performance of object routines produced by a compiler must usually be highly subjective, unless a large range of problems,
against which object routines of the translator can be compared, have been prepared by
standard programmers.
Estimates are given in which the performance of the translator is compared with good
hand coding based on the judgment of the editorial staff unless otherwise indicated. It
is important to note that good hand coding is not the same as average hand coding. In
general, there may be a large or small disparity between these two standards of hand
coding, depending upon the complexity and sophistication of the features available in the
computer and the particular problem under consideration. Good hand coding means
careful attention to the optimization of the object routine and a certain amount of polishing, but not at the expense of clarity in the understanding of the program by other users,
and is to be contrasted with "clever" hand coding. The rating of the program translator
is compared with the space or time that would be taken by a good hand coder, and the
following terminology is used:
Halved is about 0.5 of the space or time.
Decreased is about 0.7 of the space or time.
Unaffected is about 1. 0 of the space or time.
Increased is about 1.4 of the space or time.
Doubled is about 2.0 of the space or time.
Where possible, different estimates are given for different kinds of procedures such as
elementary algebra; complex subscripts, which may be especially difficult on certain
machines; data editing, which varies tremendously because of the particular hardware
facilities provided in the target computer; or the overlapping of operations, which also
depends to a certain extent upon the hardware facilities provided in the target computer .
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
There are two computers concerned in any translation of a program: the translating
computer on which the translation is performed, and the target computer on which the
object routine is to run. The configurations of these computers are often important
because there are at least minimum requirements for their configurations. Of course,
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:180.610
§
. USERS' GUIDE
180.
in many instances they are, in fact, exactly the same computer .
. 61
Translating Computer
This is the computer on which the program is translated. There are usually two salient
factors to consider: the minimum configuration for translation, and whether or not the
translator can take advantage of any larger configurations .
. 62
Target Compliter
This is the computer on which the object routine is to run. This may also have a minimum configuration which is more likely to be dictated by the program itself rather than
by the translator, although the translator may provide certain facilities for which it is
essential to have at least, perhaps, a typewriter input-output. If a program translator
is to be generally useful, it must be able to take advantage of all the common facilities
possible in target computer configurations, and this paragraph states the usable extra
facilities. The facilities may be stated on an exception basis such as "everything except MICR reader", when the translator has not been extended to cover such a feature.
7.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
This paragraph lists all the major types of error that may occur in the translation, and
states the types of checks or interlocks provided to detect or protect against these
errors. In some cases, particular types of errors are not possible because of the mode
of operation of the translation. If, when the check fails or an interlock is applied,
some action is automatically taken, this is also stated. The most common types of
errors are as follow:
Missing Entries - Only when all the input statements to the program translator
are serially numbered can any missing entry be noted; however, there may be a
check for missing or unspecified labels or data names which come under "incomplete entries" or "inconsistent program".
Unsequenced Entries - Where it is important that the data submitted be sequenced
in some proper order, a monotonic check on labels may be used. There may be
checks to insure that the data is in proper sequence, it may be that the data can be
accepted in any sequence and is reordered internally, so that there cannot be a
sequencing error.
Duplicate Names - It may be that by mistake several separate and unique items of
data in a program have been given the same name. Confusion would therefore
arise in the translator whenever the name was used in procedures.
Improper Format - Particularly where sophisticated syntactic construction rules
are used, it may be that a translator does not examine a program for proper format in all cases, and makes only a limited check.
Incomplete Entries - In certain syntactic arrangements, it is mandatory that certain entities be mentioned, such as three operands to go with a multiplication
statement; and the translator may check to see that they exist.
Target Computer Overflow - Due to the fact that expansion during translation is
not always easy to estimate, the translator may check that the storage space in
the object computer has not been exceeded.
Inconsistent Program - Inconsistent program errors can occur, for example,
when a data name is improperly used as a destination, floating point operations
are illegally prescribed for fixed point operands, or where references are made
to files that have not been opened;
4/62
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR
4:180.800
§180.
Particular types of action are:
Stop - The translator is stopped and cannot continue until some action is taken by
the operator. This may be used in order to let the operator resequence cards, or
because the translation must be abandoned.
Abandon - This implies that it is impossible to continue with the translation.
Continue - This may be an optional feature and implies that the program continues
either ignoring the fact that an error has occurred, or executing some built-in
rule for an arbitrary resolution of the error; or even, perhaps, leaving it undecided.
Offer Options - The translator stops and offers options to the operator from which
he may make a choice. The choice offered is usually rejecting an item in error,
continuing in spite of the error, abandoning the translation, or continuing after
some other action.
Reject - The particular item under consideration is rejected and the translation
continues, ignoring that item.
The checks or interlocks that may be applied include the following:
Not possible - This means that because of the way the translator or the language
is constructed, this type of error is not possible and therefore need not be considered.
None - This means that there is no check or interlock to discover when such an
error occurs, and its effect may, therefore, be uncertain or unusual, depending
upon the particular behavior of the translator under such conditions. Where the
behavior of the error is important and easily stated, it will be given in the action
column.
Check - Often it is not possible to describe simply a check that is provided to disThe word "check" is used either when the form of
the check is obvious from context or when there is a check whose description
would be lengthy or difficult. A check may not always be complete, but the name
of the check usually gives a good idea of its coverage. A check discovers an
error after it has occurred .
cover sophisticated errors.
.8
ALTERNATIVE TRANSLATORS
In addition to the standard translator provided to allow a given language to be translated
for a given target computer, there may be alternative translators which enable the same
target computer to be used with the same source language. These translators are
usually run on translating computers that are different from the target computer.
Sometimes the translating computers are larger computers which eruible more efficient
target routines to be produced for a small computer than might be possible using the
target computer as the translating computer. On the other hand, the translating computers may be smaller computers which enable the preparation and debugging of programs for later use on a larger computer. Sometimes a translator runs on an existing
computer to prepare routines for a computer which is not yet available. In many cases
alternative translators may also be associated with simulators of the target computer.
4/62
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4: 190.100
Users' Guide
Operating Environment
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
§
190 .
.1
GENERAL
The operating environment can be loosely defined as all the facilities that contribute to
the efficient and convenient running of routines on a computer. It covers both production runs and debugging. In the most sophisticated systems, these facilities may be
provided within the computer as a number of special purpose routines automatically
controlled by a master routine.
The important functions of operating are:
the loading of programs into the computer.
the allocation within the computer of storage, input-output and other units.
the running supervision of programs.
the simultaneous working of units.
multi -running or multi -sequencing.
the handling of errors and restart facilities and the control of program
diagnostics for trials.
the particular facilities for manual operator control (particularly where
the general supervision is being done automatically).
the communication between the operator and any automatic control.
the logging of progress showing all the important events as far as operating
is concerned.
the enhancement of the performance of the system because of the special
facilities provided for operating.
the repertoire of special problem oriented routines that are available to
assist in the running of an installation
The special routines used to help the operator in the running or debugging of routines
are called executive routines. There are three kinds - service routines, monitor
routines, and supervisor routines.
Service routines are those that provide a service to another routine. Typical examples
are overflow control, input-output blocking and unblocking, control of typewritten messages, and program loading. They are normally used as subroutines of the routine they
serve.
Monitor routines are those whose principal task is to monitor the progress of work.
One example is a trace or snapshot routine used in debugging. Another example is an
automatic log-writer.
Supervisor routines are those that control and organize the running of many routines,
either the automatic sequencing of loading, initiating, and unloading of one routine at a
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
USERS' GUIDE
4:190.110
§
190.
time, or multi -running. They should require manual action only to load and unload
input -output units, state the jobs required to be done, and intervene in unusual cases.
There are many cases in which the different kinds of executive routine are not clearly
differentiated; for example, a trace routine may have varying degrees of control - some
are almost supervisors.
· 11
Identity
These are the names and code numbers of the important executive routines referred to
in this part. Where it is appropriate, the originator, if it is not the equipment manufacturer, and the current maintainer, if it is not the manufacturer, are given, and also
any important dates, such as first pilot or first regular universal use .
. 12
Description
This is an over-all description of how the majority of the features provided are integrated
into one system - whether by a comprehensive supervisor routine or individual service
routines in each program, or by operator manipulation at the console. The description
indicates the degree to Which the system is automatic, the strong and the weak points of
the system. It should be noted that in many cases, the provision of facilities that exist
in the system may be controlled by the translator or even the data description of the program, and it is sometimes difficult to allocate the control of each of the various facilities to one authority. Where possible, cross-references are made to those facilities
which are controlled by the source program or the translator. At one level, a facility
may be automatically provided in a supervisor regardless of, or in addition to, anything
that the translator or the program may try to control. At a second level, the translator
may insert into programs either service routines or entries into a supervisor routine
to provide the individual facilities. At a third level, parameters in a program or even
special coding in a program may be allowed to control certain of these facilities .
. 13
Availability
The major executive routines are listed here together wi,th the dates on which they are
first available for regular operational use in a properly-documented form .
.2
LOADING OF ROUTINES
The three important aspects of loading are: first, the sources from which routines may
be obtained; second, the ability of being able to call a subroutine from a library. at the
time of program loading; and third, the sequence in which the routines are loaded and the
control over a queue if one exists •
. 21
Source of Routines
In general, there are two major sources from which routines may be taken to be loaded
into a computer - first, special libraries, and second, the set of independent routines
which have not been organized in any library. The various alternatives for each of these
sources are listed. The alternatives may be those of the storage media, language, or
form in which the programs are submitted, such as relocatable or absolute code. The
control that calls the particular routines is stated.
· 22
Library Subroutines
These are the library routines that are cued within. programs being run, and, in the
operating environment under discussion, are not incorporated into the routines at translation time, but are called at loading time. In typical cases, the calls may be made
automatically upon an on -line library or by operator selection from a card file.
· 23
Loading Sequence
In the simplest case, the sequence of loading routines is determined by the physical
&
4/62
Ir-A-U-ER-BA-CH-'''-'@
OPERATING
§
~NVIRONMENT
4: 190.300
190.
sequence in which the operator places them in an input hopper or in which they are recorded on a magnetic tape. When using magnetic tapes with a supervisor routine, it
may be possible to specify a priority sequence for the routines by loading control data
into the computer, and it may even be possible to make later changes. A supervisor
routine may apply ,certain rules for determining the sequence in which routines should
be loaded. When multi-running is possible, there must also be rules and procedures
for the relative precedences of routines that are to be run during the same period .
.3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
Programs are sometimes prepared in such a way that by the time they are ready for
loading the particular input-output channels, units and storage for each instruction and
item of data are already determined and fixed. It is more convenient, in many cases,
to leave a routine in what is called relocatable form. This means that a routine can be
moved, as is convenient, to different places in the storage. This flexibility is particu-;
larly useful when a routine may be used as a subroutine, because it can then easily be
moved to fit in with other routines with which it may be associated. When multi -running
is possible, it is necessary for several routines to be located together easily in the
storage .
. 31
Storage
When a routine is in relocatable form, it is possible to place its segments in oifferent
locations as required. This is useful for overlay procedures and essential for multirunning .
. 311 Segmenting of routines .
. 312 Occupation of working storage
Many routines run in computers with more than one level of storage require dynamic
allocation of storage. This means that as a routine is running, it is necessary from
time to time to allocate some storage to different parts of the program - in particular,
to each overlay segment which is moved between auxiliary storage and working storage,
There are two separate decisions to be made: first, the decision as to how to divide
the program into individual overlay segments at the time of loading; second, the decision as to which segments shall occupy working store all the time and which segments
shall from time to time be moved from one level to another .
. 313 Choice of location
In the simplest case, there is the choice of the particular locations within a level of
storage to be allocated for each routine .
. 32
Input-Output Units
If it is possible to make the allocation of the input-output units at run time instead of
when the program is written, an operating system can make choices so that an operator
can set up input and output files in advance on idle equipment, and generally can choose
the most convenient input and output units for any particular run of the job .
. 321 Initial assignment
This is the aSSignment of the individual input and output units to different files at the
beginning of a job. Such an aSSignment enables the files to be set up in advance, convenient input-output units to be chosen, and faulty input-outputs to be avoided .
. 322 Alternation
This is the technique of making dynamic changes to the allocation of the input-output
units even when the particular allocations may have been pre-set. This is sometimes
referred to as tape-swapping when it is used on magnetic tape units. The principle
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4: 190.323
§
USERS' GUIDE
190.
involved is that, instead of allocating one magnetic tape unit to a master input file, two
units are allocated. Then by the technique of mounting the second reel on the second
unit while the first unit deals with the first 'reel, it is possible to switch quickly between
units at the ends of reels to avoid having to wait f()r unloading and reloading. Alternation is normally applied only to very active files·, and may take a variety of sophisticated forms .
. 323 Reassignment
This is a general facility to change dynamically the input -output unit associated with
any file. It enables the operator to change units conveniently in the event of a breakdown or to simulate alternation if he wishes, or to over -ride a pre -set alternation if
there are not enough units available .
.4
RUNNING SUPERVISION
There are five important areas in the supervision of a running routine. These are:
(a) the organization of the simultaneous working of various units.
(b) the intermingled running of independent routines (called multi -running).
(c) the running of interdependent sequences of one routine, called multi-sequencing.
(d) the control of errors and the actions taken.
(e) the organizing of restarts in routines.
Many of these facilities may not be provided by supervisor routines but are built into
the operational routines either when writing the original source program or during
translation. There may well be some control left to a human operator, however, or an
automatic supervisor routine at running time •
. 41
Simultaneous Working
Usually the control of simultaneous working of many hardware units is a direct function
of the way the source program is written or the way the translator implements the program, unless it is possible that there be dynamiC allocation of individual channels to
input-output units, or some special form of sharing is built into the hardware that can
be dynamically controlled by a control routine. The control routine may, in fact, be
incorporated into each program by a translator .
. 42
Multi-Running
This is the running together of several independent routines in the computer in an intermingled way. There must be rules which specify whether a particular unit shall work
for one routine or another. There are usually practical limitations on the number of
routines -allowed in ·the operating system, even if in theory there are no limitations .
. 43
Multi -Sequencing
This is the ability for several processors, not necessarily of the same kind, in one
computer to operate separately on different sequences of one routine and to be interdependently interlocked at check-points in specified places .
.44
Errors, Checks, and Action
This shows all the major types of error concerned with the running of routines as opposed to unusual hardware faults or programs errors. In some cases, particular types
of error are not possible because of the mode of operation of the system. If, when a
check fails or an interlock is applied, some action is automatically taken, this is also
noted. The most common types of errors are as follow:
r-----,--,~
4/62
I AUERBACH / @[I
./
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
§
4: 190.450
190.
Loading Input Error - A loading error occurs when, for example, the wrong data
is loaded into an input unit, the data is loaded' in improper sequence, console controIs are not properly set, or certain control cards are missing or in error.
Allocation Impossible - This is an attempt to load a routine which it is not possible
to place in the computer. This may be because the other routines do not leave
enough space or because certain features are not available due to faults in them, or
because the capacity of the computer would be exceeded.
Input-Output Errors - Although input-output errors are often built into routines by
the translator or the programmer, all routines in a given installation usually use a
consistent and common set of service routines for input-output error control. There
are two cases that normally have to be considered. The first case is that of a single
isolated error which may be overcome automatically by re-reading or some such
recovery procedure. The second case is that of a persistent error which resists
automatic recovery.
Overflow - This covers the particular types of arithmetic errors that may be detected in the computer control, or in a routine, when numbers or other items exceed
the limits that have been allowed for them.
Invalid Instructions - These are invalid instructions that are encountered in the program; e.g., constants that are obeyed as instructions by mistake or an instruction
which is used that does not apply to a particular configuration because of lack of
equipment or because the optional facility which it controls is not available.
Program Conflicts - These include situations in which the following types of conflicts
may occur in the system: first, a routine, which has the responsibility of insuring
that timing is correct, does not properly cover its responsibilities - a timing conflict; second, a division operation is attempted in which the divisor is zero - a lOgical conflict.
Particular types of action which may result upon detection of an error are:
Stop, which means that the execution of the program is immediately stopped and cannot continue until action is taken by some control, usually an operator.
Alarm, which means that a light or other signal is given to the operator to indicate
a check has failed; e. g., a typewriter, buzzer, or lamp may be used to tell the
operator of an error.
Automatic Recovery, which means that there is a service routine or hardware facility which attempts to overcome the situation.
Automatic Rejection, which means a special limited kind of automatic recovery that
just rejects the incorrect item and proceeds without considering it.
These actions are not necessarily mutually exclusive .
.45
Restarts
Restarting is the ability to establish certain points during the running of a routine as
"restart points", and to be able later to abandon the work done since a restart point was
established, return to that restart pOint, and resume running from there. This enables
a faulty part of a job to be re-run with little wasted time, when only some parts of the
work are faulty. If there are no restart points, a job has to be restarted from the beginning. On a long job, a few errors could involve a large amount of unnecessary rerun time. There are two important things to control in restarts: establishing the restart pOints, and initiating the restart process when it is required.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation al1d BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:190.451
§
USERS' GUIDE
190 .
. 451 Establishing restart points
There are normally conventional rules, procedures or criteria which determine restart
points, either speCified in the source program itself, imposed by the translator, or imposed by a service routine. Sometimes the restart points are linked to logical groups
of the data used in a run which are batches of work of some kind, or they may be associated with physical properties of the file; e. g., at the start of new reels. The best
reason for having restart points at least at the beginning of each reel is to avoid changing reels when restarting. This is particularly useful when a restart is automatically
controlled. On many tape systems, it is not easy to rewind tapes to any position other
than the start except by relatively slow techniques.
When establishing a restart pOint, there may be a selective procedure for dumping important totals that are to be picked up again when a restart occurs, or there may be a
full dump in order to cover all possible cases, thus avoiding special parametric control
of the areas to be dumped .
. 452 Restarting process
This describes how a restart is initiated when it is required. There may be either an
automatic or a human deCision to restart; the latter is more common. Once the operator has decided on a restart, however, the more automatic the control, the better .
.5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
In addition to production runs in a computer installation, there is often a wide variety,
if not a large volume, of debugging runs. When there are many debugging runs and
each one may be relatively short in duration a sophistice.ted debugging system can provide substantial savings in computer time and operating ,convenience.
Diagnostic routines are an important part of an operating system. They may be built
into a routine by a translator or the programmer or they may be imposed by a supervisor routine or an operator. There are two basic types of diagnostic facilities: first,
the dynamic facilities that operate while a routine is running; second, the post-mortem
facilities that are carried out after a run has come to a halt for some reason or other .
. 51
Dynamic
There are two basic kinds of dynamic diagnostic facilities, trace and snapshot, which
are sometimes combined in different degrees. These facilities normally produce either
printed results as a run progresses or a tape for later printing off-line. The results
may sometimes be interspersed with the ordinary output of the run, and be disentangled
later by the person investigating the run .
. 511 Tracing
Tracing is a facility which shows the sequence of execution of parts of a routine. It is
usually done by indicating the jumps in sequence that occur as a run progresses. The
results may be restricted to only certain kinds of jumps, or certain specified jumps.
It may be possible to switch the tracing facility on and off dynamically as a routine is
running .
. 512 Snapshots
Snapshots are selective printings of the contents of certain registers and locations at
times when specified points in a routine are reached. The control may be set so that
the value of a certain variable is printed out each time it alters, or a set of variables
may be printed out each time a certain path or loop ih a routine is executed. To some
extent, a snapshot gives a trace of the progress of individual variables, whereas tracing
provides a picture of the logical route executed through program. In many cases, the
facility provided is a mixture of tracing and snapshots.
4/62
4:190,520
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
§
190 •
. 52
Post-Mortem
The normal post-mortem facilities are dumps; Le., print-outs or other output of large
areas of storage containing either procedures or data or both. A dump shows the state
of the routines and data when a run stops .
.6
OPERATOR CONTROL
Even when an operating system is almost completely automatic, there must from time
to time be communication between the human operator and the supervisor routine. There
are normally three kinds of communication. First, there are signals from the executive routines to the operator. Some of these signals ask for decisions to be made by the
operator. Usually the operator must make a choice from among several optiens that a
routine offers him. Second, there is the method by which the operator can signal his
choices. Third, there are the methods used when the operator wishes to signal to an
executive routine on his own initiative, at times when the executive routine is not necessarily expecting any signals from him .
. 61
Signals to Operator
The important fact is the manner in which the executive routine is able to signal each of
the kinds of messages it may want to send .
. 611 Decision required by operator
Operator decisions are necessary when an executive routine has several alternative
courses open to it, but is not able to decide for itself which alternative to take and asks
the operator to make the decision .
. 612 Action required by operator
This occurs when it is necessary for the human operator to intervene in the running of
the system in some way which an executive routine cannot itself control, but which the
routine specifies must be done before it can proceed. The most usual cases are attention to the input hoppers or output stackers of input-output units and removing of interlocks .
. 613 Reporting progress of run
This is a logging facility whereby an executive routine reports the times at whicl;1 important events occur, such as the time a run begins and finishes, errors on which automatic recovery was taken and any decisions the operator made .
. 62
Operator's Decisions
This is the method by which the operator chooses between the various operations that a
routine may have offered him .
. 63
Operator's Signals
These are the Signals given by the operator without any request from a control routine.
There are two major kinds - inquiry and change of normal progress .
. 631 Inquiry
This facility is not always restricted to the operator. It may be available to a number
of users. It is a facility by which people are able to make general inquiries about the
state of certain data or runs within the system. In a sophisticated system, there should
be special checks to insure that specific categories of data are disclosed only to those
who have the right of access to each particular category.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:190.632
§
USERS' GUIDE
190 .
. 632 Change of normal progress
These are commands from the operator to a routine to change what would otherwise be
the normal sequence of events, such as
the arbitrary abandonment of a run before its normal conclusion.
the altering of the sequence in which the routines in a queque are to be executed.
the altering of priorities in a mult-running scheme.
the reallocation of equipment for reasons of convenience or because of faults.
changes in the general progress such as the termination or initiation of the
alternation of units while a run is in progress .
.7
LOGGING
In order to control and analyze the operation of a computer installation, it is necessary
to maintain a log of the activity of the operators, the routines, and the computer itself.
This section indicates how the various types of activity are logged in the operating system. In the most primitive case, everything has to be written down by the oper.ator.
In the most automatic case, nearly everything is automatically recorded by monitor
routines .
. 71
Operator Signals
These are events in which the operator breaks into the normal progress and running of
the computer system and changes the intended sequence of events in some way or other .
. 72
Operator Decisions
U1ese are the decisions that the operator has made when asked to choose between
several options in the progress of runs .
. 73
Run Progress
These are events such as the starting of a new run, the conclusion of a run, faulty and
rejected data and statistics of the runs carried out .
. 74
Errors
These may be any kind of errors from input-output errors and overflow to operating or
loading errors .
. 75
Running Times
These are summaries of the progress of runs and may be essential for proper costing
of different routines on the computer, especially with multi -running .
. 76
Multi-Running Status
Where multi-running exists and some form of control is exercised by the human operator,
it is necessary for him to understand the current status at any time in order to make decisions about changing the situation. The more important points are:
the priorities of the runs being carried out.
the space that is, or will become, available.
the next run is progressing.
~
A-U-ER-BA-CH-,7"""@I1
r-I
4/62
4:190.800
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
§
190 .
.8
PERFORMANCE
The performance of an operating system is 'a very complex subject but certain properties of its performance can be evaluated and are important parts of the value of any
particular system .
. 81
Routine Loading Time
A large overhead can occur in the loading of routines, particularly if a computer is fast
or there are large numbers of small routines to be run, and' the supervisor, if any, is
not fully automatic. Wasted time while the operator clears the previous routine, loads
data, and loads routines is important to over-all operation. The rate at which a large
routine can be loaded can also be significant .
. 82
Reserved Equipment
One of the important factors in any operating system is the amount of storage space
that must be set aside for the various executive routines and the workiIig space needed
to carrying out the executive functions. There may be particular units that some routines reserve for themselves; e.g., the input-output console typewriter may be reserved exclusively for monitor routines .
. 83
Running Overhead
The use of the executive routines may slow down the normal performance of the computer. Normally the overhead is quite low compared with the idle time that operating
systems are capable of avoiding.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:200.001
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
200.
4:200.01
Introduction
General Qualifications
.02
Problem Variations. .
.03
Installation Configuration
.04
Programming Techniques
.05
Operating Delays
.06
Faults
.07
Method of Estimating
.08
Summary
.09
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
4:200.1
.11
Standard Problem A
Record sizes . .
Figure 1 : Files 1 and 2, Record Layout
Figure 2 : File 3, Record Layout
Figure 3 : File 4, Record Layout
Computation
Worksheet 1 :
Timing basis . .
Worksheet 2 :
Chart 1 : .
Chart 2 : Boxes
5
1 to
Chart 3 : Boxes
6 to
9
Chart 4 : Boxes 10 to 17
Chart 5 : Boxes 18 to 23
Chart 6 : Boxes 24 to 31
Chart 7 : Boxes 32 to 42
Chart 8 : Boxes 43 to 48
Graph
Worksheet 3 :
Storage space required
Worksheet 4 :
.111
.111
.111
.111
.112
.112
.113
.113
.113
.113
.113
.113
.113
.113
.113
.113
.114
.114
.115
.115
Standard Problem B
.12
Standard Problem C
.13
Standard Problem D
.14
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:200.002
USERS' GUIDE
§
200.
SORTING
4:200.2
Standard Problem
.21
Record size.
Key size
Timing basis
Graph
.211
.212
.213
.214
Standard Routines
.22
MATRIX INVERSION
4:200.3
Standard Problem
.31
Basic parameters
Timing basis
Graph
.311
.312
.313
Standard Routines
4/62
.32
AUERBACH /
..'"
BNA
'---~~
4:200.010
Users' Guide
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
200 .
. 01
Introduction
The System Performance section of a computer report is based upon estimates for specified problems on particular computer configurations that have been used in the System
Configuration section of the report. Various problems have been selected, a number of
which are based upon a typical activity such as updating a master file from a detail
file and making reports about the changes. Other problems considered are those of reordering data into some required sequence and mathematical considerations such as
matrix inversion. Where possible, timings are based upon standard available routines;
otherwise, the estimating procedures are standardized and presented below. For each
problem, the results are given in the form of graphS, using a common scale for all
computer reports so that comparisons can be made easily. Particular attention is drawn
to the remarks in paragraphs .02 to .08 .
. 02
General Qualifications
It cannot be over-emphasized that great care must be taken in drawing conclusions from
the performance measures of this section. Apart from the cases where timings of existing standard routines are used, the figures quoted here can be regarded only as guidelines. In order for the system analyst to fully appreciate all the factors which are not
included, and cannot be because they vary for every case, the major considerations are
listed below in detail, giving where possible an indication of the effects they might have.
If ,the system analyst bears these factors in mind and uses the results carefully, the
estimates can prove a good guide to system performance for him .
. 03
Problem Variations
In general, the problems that may be run upon any particular computer in an existing
or potential computer installation may differ from the standard problems used here.
Paragraphs below give specifications of the problems being considered. They include
sufficient detail for the analyst to study the differences from his own problems. and the effects of those differences. Particularly in the generalized file processing problems,
there is the effect of the distribution of the activity of the detail file over the master
file. This may vary widely and be bunched in most awkward ways for different specific
problems. In all the estimates, the activity balance has been considered to be uniform
throughout the files. Any imbalance tends to reduce the benefits of simultaneous operations on different channels and thus lengthen the time of any particular run .
. 04
Installation Configuration
Computers can be assembled in a large variety of configurations; in this section, we
consider only those enumerated in section §03. The most important considerations for
business problems are usually the number of simultaneous operations, the ability to
move data easily within the computer, and the editing of output data. Where a computer
may have a large variety of input-output devices with different speeds, the performance
can be considerably affected by the choice of one /?et of units rather than another.
.05
Programming Techniques
The running time of a sophisticated application or the efficient use of a sophisticated
computer is largely dependent upon the ability of the programming staff or the compiling
program. In this section, it is assumed that good quality programming is available to
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
USERS' GUIDE
4:200.060
§
200.
take advantage of the simultaneous operations in the computer, in maintaining queues if
necessary, and suitably blocking and packing the input-output data to take advantage of the
system. In the coding of individual routines, it is assumed that straightforward, clean,
rather than tricky, coding has been used.
, .06
Operating Delays
In addition to the time required for the computer and its peripheral units to run a pro-
gram, there will be intervals of ineffectiveness occurring in practice. These include
unavoidable delays such as reloading tape units where alternates are not being used, the
replenishment of a printer with stationery, and the time to load and unload a particular
job on an installation. These times vary widely depending upon the data load and the
operating systems available. Details are given elsewhere in the report that may assist
a user in estimating times for individual installations, but no allowance is made in this
section .
. 07
Faults
No allowance is made for faults in the system. Faults may not only cause down time,
but also wasted time and re-run time. The amount of re-run time necessary will depend
upon the operating system, and the amount of down time may well depend upon the number
of spare units made available. Delays may occur due to faults in either data; program
routines, machine hardware, or ,operator's actions .
. 08
Method of Estimating
Rarely will two people making independent estimates come to the same answer, particularly if they have not agreed in advance upon the method of estimating. In paragraph
.113 below, the estimating procedures are outlined. They have been chosen for the folJ
lowing reasons: first, they go into considerable detail in order to make the individual
elements of the estimate as independent of the estimator as possible; second, by covering as much of the detail as possible in a uniform way for all computers the over-all
estimating procedure has been simplified. Such a procedure cannot hope to cover all
the items mentioned in .02 to .07 above and, if anything, is biased toward allowing for
more overlap of operations on a computer than is justified. Any method, however, that
attempted to correct for this error, other than a full-scale simulation or trial run,
would be too subjective .
• 09
Summary
In general, it can be expected that the system performance figures taken at their face
value are conSiderable under-estimates of the over-all time that must be allowed on a
specific configuration for similar problems. This is due to inefficiencies in the equipment, its operation, the preparation of the programs, and the fact that the problem itself is not as straightforward as the standard models being used here. The figures in
general can, however, be regarded as a realistic guide-line comparison between systems .
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING PROBLEMS
These are a series of typical commercial data processing applications. One of the most
common jobs in commercial data processing is the processing of a detail file against a
master file. The detail file contains data used to update the master file by inserting
new records, deleting old records, and recording changes to records in the file. Usually there is a printed record of the activity. This type of activity occurs, for example,
in a payroll routine in which the master file is the payroll file, the detail file contains
the details from the time sheets, and the output is largely pay slips.
The application parameters which have the greatest effect on run times in generalized
file proceSSing are: record sizes; the amount of computation; the ratio of the number
transactions to master records (called the activity factor); and the distribution of transactions. All but the last parameter are considered in a series of standard problems.
4/62
4:200.110
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
200.
Standard problems A, Band C vary the record sizes for the master file. Standard problem D increases the amount of computation. Each problem is estimated for activity
factors of zero to unity. In all cases (see paragraph. 03) a uniform distribution of activity is assumed.
Low activity occurs in inventory control applications'. Moderate activity occurs in cycle
billing applications. High activity occurs in payroll applications .
. 11
Standard Problem A
In Problem A, we use a typical inventory application as a means of making a detailed
estimate of the times necessary. Problem A is a typical complete commercial data
processing application and is specified in sufficient detail to enable reliable estimates
to be made. (See paragraph . 113 below.)
The basic form of the program run is as follows:
UPDATED
MASTER FILE
OLD MASTER
FILE
COMPUTER
DETAIL
FILE
REPORT
FILE
.111 Record sizes
File 1 is the old master stock record file, and its record layout is given in Figure 1.
File 2 is the updated master stock record file.
File 3 is the detail file read from cards. A typical record layout is shown in Figure 2.
File 4 is the report file recording the activity, and a typical output line is shown in
Figure 3.
In Configuration I it is assumed that a card collator is available, and that the detail
cards can be merged with the master cards before the computer run. If the master
cards with no corresponding detail cards are deleted, the computer run corresponds
to an activity factor of 1.0. After the computer run, the unaltered and updated master
cards are merged. If all the master cards are retained and a complete new deck produced, the appropriate activity factor is used. This procedure is useful if a complete
deck is required from time to time for security, audit, or re -runs. In many cases the
times are independent of the activity factor being limited by the output of File 2. In
such cases a single point for activity 1.0 is plotted.
When considering off-line transcription, it is assumed that Files 3 and 4 contain only
one record per block.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:200.111
§
USERS' GUIDE
200.
Figure 1
FILES 1 AND 2 RECORD LAYOUT
(Master Records)
Reference
Name
AOI
Item number
8
8
A02
Description
20
15
A03
Unit price
5
4
A04
Average cost
5
4
A05
Total on hand
6
5
A06
Total on order
6
6*
A07
Automatic reorder
1
1
A08
Reorder level
5
3
A09
Reorder quantity
5
4
AlO
Total sales to date
6
5
All
Date last transaction
6
6
A12
Read time
3
3
A13
Shortage status
1
1
A14
Order number
5
5*
A15
Warehouse code
8
8
A16
Substitute
8
8*
A17
Units disbursed
previous to this period
5
5
Units disbursed
this period
5
5
108
96
Max. Size Avg. Size
(characters or digits)
Picture (numeric
unless shown
otherwise)
~-
A18
Totals
* Items occur on only 5% of cases.
4/62
/
XXXX9999
X(20)
4:200.1111
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
200.
Figure 2
FILE 3 RECORD LAYOUT
(Detail Cards)
Reference
Name
COl
Quantity
5
ZZZ9
22
'C02
Transaction code
1
9
4
C03
Item number
8
XXXX9999
HG439872
C04
Description
20
C05
Unit cost
C06
Transaction amount
C07
Date
6
999999
122662
C08
Discount code
1
9
1
C09
Order number
5
99999
01159
ClO
Warehouse code
8
XXX99999
XBXl2321
Cll
Blank
8
BBBBBBBB
C12
Card number
3
999
013
Total
©
Size
5
10
Picture
Example
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
FIREPROOF YULE LOGS
ZZZZ9
3376
ZZZZZZZZZ9
74272
80
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:200.1112
§
USERS' GUIDE
200.
Figure 3
FILE 4 RECORD LAYOUT
(Printed Reports)
Reference
Name
Size
Picture
Example
DOl
Item number
10
XXXXX99X99
HG-4398-72
D02
Description
23
B(3)X(20)
FIREPROOF YULE LOGS
D03
Warehouse code
10
B(2)X(3)9(5)
XBX12321
D04
Total on hand
9
B(3)Z(5)9
3215
D05
Total on order
9
B(3)Z(5)9
22
D06
Order number
7
B(2)9(5)
01159
D07
Unit price
10
B(2)$$$$9.99
$49.95
D08
Average cost
10
B(2) $$$$9 . 99
$32.61
D09
Total sales to date
14
B(2)$****.**9.99
$**24,945.00
D10
Total $ value
18
B(6)$****, **9.99
$*102,841.15
Total
120
Note: (a) Pictures for D07 to D10 are not legal in COBOL as stated. Estimators may treat
\
Bs as separate items or extend the floating symbols.
(b) It is not possible in one COBOL picture to state the requirement for hyphens in
DOl.
A
4/62
' IA-U-ER-BA-CH-/~~
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
4:200.112
200.
.112 Computation
The general computation is specified in Charts 1 to 8. The basic computation is covered
by boxes 26 to 42.
WORKSHEET 1
I
II
III
IV
Assignment (identity)
File 1
-
File 2
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
File 3
- - -
-
- - - -
- - - -
-
- -
-
File 4
- --
-
- - --
- - - -
- - -
-
- -
-- - -
-
-
-
Block
La~out
- - -
-
- - -
- - -
-
-
- - -
(give units)
File 1, 2 block size
-
K= records per block
-
- - -
- -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
File 3 record size
--- -
- -- -
-
- - -
- - - -
File 4 record size
- -- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - - - _.-
- -- -
- - - -
- - -
- - --
- - - -
- - - -
File 3
-- - -
-- - -
- - - -
-
File 4
- - --
- -- -
- - - -
- - - -
-
- - - -
- - - -
-
In -Out Unit Block Time (m. sec.)
File 1
File 2
- -
-
-
In -Out Unit Switching Time (m. sec.)
File 1
- - -
- -
-
File 2
-
- -
- -
- -
- - --
- - - -
File 3
- - - -
- -
--
-
--
File 4
-- - -
- - -
-
-
- - - -
---- - - -
-
C. P. Penalty J;>er Block (m. sec.)
File 1
-
- -
- - - -
- -- -
- -
File 2
- - - -
- - - -
-- - -
- - - -
File 3
- - - -
- - - -
-
-
- -
File 4
-
- - - -
-
- - -
©
-
-
- -
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
- -
--
-- - - 4/62
USERS' GUIDE
4:200.113
§
200 .
. 113 Timing basis
Each standard problem estimate is based on a detailed specification of Standard Problem
A. It is contained in Figures 1 to 3, Charts 1 to 8, and their accompanying notes.
The estimating process is separated into a series of steps and summarized on Worksheets 1, 2 and 3. At each step, separate answers. are given for configurations I, II,
III and IV. In these estimates, Configurations V and VI would give the same times as
III.
First, consider Worksheet 1.
Assignment
For each configuration, the first decisions to be made are the input-output units
on which the various files are to be handled. The preference for the master
file, (that is files 1 and 2, ) is magnetic tape and the alternative is cards. Files
3 and 4 may be on or off-line. When on-line, file 3 should preferably be on
cards, alternatively on paper tape. File 4 on -line should be on a printer.
Block layout
The layouts of files 1 and 2 are exactly the same. The first consideration must
be the block size. In general, there is a fixed number of records per block.
The number of records per block is not allowed to expand and contract as insertions and deletions occur in the file. The blocks should be chosen to be approximately 1,000 characters in size, where space can be spared for the necessary
input-output areas in the internal store, (see paragraph .115). Within each record, the data may be packed. The detailed specification of a record is shown in
Figure 1. If variable sized items are used, the appropriate delimiters must be
held. The items in the record may be rearranged for efficient working. For
80-column cards, the number of records per block is 0.5.
As far as the original data card of file 3 is concerned, the layout is rigorously
specified in Figure 2. Where paper tape is used, variable-length items and
delimiters may be used.
If the file is transcribed to magnetic tape off-line, records may not in general
be blocked; i.e., only one record per block.
The layout for a record on file 4 is rigorously specified in Figure 3. Check protection and zero suppression must be allowed for. If the records are transcribed for off-line printing, then in general there must be no blocking of the
magnetic tape.
In -out block times
The speeds of the input-output units used for a file may vary for the different
configurations. For each of the configurations I to IV, times are entered for
reading or writing one block for the various files. The times have been provided indirectly in the input-output sub-sections of the computer report. Allowances should be included for stop-start times and other delays.
Switching times
Where more than one file may share a channel or a controller, there is sometimes a delay involved when switching from one unit to another. Switching times
pertinent to each file are entered and used later, as they are needed.
4/62
4:200.1131
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
200.
c.
P. penalty times
For each of the different configurations, a penalty time per block applied to the
central processor is quoted for each file. nis is the time that the central
processor is prevented from working either because it is locked out during a
specified period or delayed for a series of short intervals during which the controller accesses the input-output area.
Second, consider Worksheet 2.
Flow chart timing
In order to provide a consistent and clear set of procedures for timing the operations of the central processor on the standard problem, the relevant parts
of the problem have been flow-charted.
Chart 1 shows the baSic flow of the central loops . Each part of the loops is
shown in detail in Charts 2 to 8. Each box on Chart I is cross -referenced to
Charts 2 to 8. To direct the estimator, notes are provided for each box.
The time in milliseconds for the boxes on each chart is summarized for each
configuration. This may vary because of any optional facilities in the central
processor; the need for unblocking in different configurations; and different input-output systems for different units.
The times are noted separately to enable these basic figures to be used with different
weights to estimate a variety of problems.
al is a time that must be weighted by the number of blocks in the master file.
a2 is a time that must be weighted by the number of records in the master file.
a3 is a time that must be weighted by the number of records in the detail file.
Third, consider Worksheet 3.
Now that the basic times have been established, many of them common to several configurations and all of them independent of the activity factor (F) and the number of master records per block (K), it is possible to make estimates for the different configurations and activity factors, using Worksheet 3.
A set of columns is used for several values of the activity factor for each configuration,
identified by a Roman numeral. Usually there are four activity factors~ La, 0.33,
0.1 and 0.0.
One column is used for each set of activities sharing one of the simultaneous facilities.
The entries in each column can then be totaled separately; e.g., in the cases where
there are no simultaneous operations, all times are added together in one column; in
the case of Simultaneous operations, one column is used for the central processor and
one for each independent channel or buffer.
The baSic time period is one block of the master file. The times are in milliseconds.
The same basic times are used in several sets of columns with different weights. The
weight is either K, the number of records per block on the master file, or K times F,
the average number of detail records per block of the master file.
aI, a2 and a3 are all charged to the central processor in one column. In the same column goes either the block time for each file, or its penalty time if the block time is in
a separate column. If several files are in one column, (Le. on one channel), switching times may have to be added.
Finally, the maximum time of each set of columns is converted to minutes per 10,000
master records, by dividing by 6K.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
11/62
USERS' GUIDE
4:200.1132
WORKSHEET 2
Configuration Number:
-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --
Flow Chart Tim ing
Blocks 1 to 5
bl
----
--- -
-- --
- ---
6 to 9
b2
--- -
----- --
-- --- --- -- - --- --- --- -----------
-- ---- -
Total
Blocks 10 to 17
b3
18 to 23
b4
Total
al
----
----- -a2
- ---- --
----
-_
........
-
Blocks 24 to 37
bS
----
----
38 to 42
b6
- ---
43
b7
-- --
44 to 46
b8
----
47 to 48
b9
----- --
----- --- --- --- --
- ---
-- --
Total
a3 + 2(bS +b9) = a4
a3
-- --- -- - --- - -- --- --- --
----
-- --
----
-- --
Note: a4 replaces a3 in Standard Problem D. where computation is trebled.
11/62
-- --
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
4:200.1133
CHART 1
Central Timing Loops
LOOK FOR
NEXT RECORD
FROM MASTER
1
IS NEW
BLOCK
REQUIRED
Chart 4: B. 10
,lOVE TO
WORKING
AREA
B.13
At this stage, a minimum of the record is unpacked
(only enough to do boxes ISto 19) on the assumption
that there will be no relevant details in File 3.
B.14
UNPACK
LEVEL 1
B.IS
This adds the identity number of the current Master
Record to a hash total as a check that all the records
output on the last occasion are read on this occasion.
Add ADI to an eight character hash total.
ADD AO!
TO EO!
B.16
This is a control total, not a hash total, and is held to
eight digits. This accumulates a grand total of items
in hand, ADS, for the whole inventory, which is
checked for overflow.
ADD AOS
TO E02
IS ADl
EARLIER
THAN C03
B.17
YES
NO
This is a comparison of the identity number of the current Master Record on File I, ADI, with the
identity number of the detail record on File 3,
CD3. Three conditions are possible. Optimized coding ascertains as quickly as possible if
AOl is less than CD3 so that a jump can occur
straight to B.IS .
...--_ _ _ _ A
4/62
I AUERBACH I ~
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
4:200.1137
CHART 5
This is exactly the same as B.lS except that output
totals are be ing accumulated.
B.18
ADD AOI
TO E03
B.19
This is exactly the same as B.16 except that output
totals are being accumulated. They are checked
for overflow.
ADD A05
TO E04
This is exactly the opposite of B. 16. It is not necessary
if B. 48 packs all the levels because the" direct path
from B.17 to B.18 does not alter a record.
PACK
B.20
LEVEL
1
See B.13. Not necessary as well as B.13 if index
registers are used in B. 24 to B. 48
MOVE TO
OUTPUT
AREA
B.21
See B.IO.
STEP TO
NEXT
B.22
RECORD
Similar to B.ll
TEST
BLOCK
B.23
FULL
NO
9
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:200.1138
USERS' GUIDE
~
CHART 6
At this stage, we allow for enough unpacking of the
record to perform the operations in boxes 25 to 37.
UNPACK
LEVEL
2
B.24
$.
IS AOl
EQUAL
TO CO}
B.25
NO
YES
VALUE
4
IS CO?
GREA.TER
THAN A1l
B.27
NO
YES
This is the first of three boxes concerned with noting
whether the date of the previous delivery on the
Master File has to be altered. The first box checks
to see whether the date of the amendment from File 3
is later than the date already held in File 1. Care
must be taken here to test the three parts with the
year in the most significant place, the month in the
next significant place, and the day in the least Significant place. It is assumed for timing purposes that
years are equal, months are equal, and that days
differ, in that sequence. Ignore the end-of-century
effects.
This is copying the previous date into a location from
which it will be printed in the report.
REPLACE
ALL BY
CO?
B.28
"greater than", this box tests for "greater than", in
which case the detail record on File 3 would -be an
insertion. For timing purposes, we assume that at
this stage there is always equality.
At this pOint in the program, there are six alternative
paths depending upon the six different types of transactions that may be on the detail file. A six-way
switch is controlled by values one to six of the transaction code C02. A check must insure that it is not
zero nor greater than six. For timing purposes we
assume that the value is four. If the best method is
to test for each value in turn, they should be tested
in the sequence 1,2,3,4,5,6. This may in some
cases be better than checking that the code lies between 1 and 6. Code 4 is a delivery to stock.
SWITCH
USING
CO2
B.26
If the test that was performed in B.17 did not deal automatically with the separate cases of "equal to" and
/
This is updating the Master File.
B.29
SET DATE
CHANGE
ITEM
B.30
TEST COl
LESS THAN
10 (AOS)
NO
TEST COl
MORE THAN
0.1 (AOS)
NO
YES
B.31
YES
4/62
¢
This is the first of two boxes concerned with verifying
that the quantity of the delivery is reasonable. In
this box, a check is made that the delivery is not
excessively greater than the re-ordering amount. In
both this box and the next a factor ten or eight may
be used, as is most convenient in the particular
computer.
In this box, a check is made that the delivery is at least
a significant portion of a re-ordering amount.
!
I AUERBACH I ~
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
4:200.1139
¢
B.32
COMPUTE
OLD
VALUE
B.33
COMPUTE
ADDITIONAL
VALUE
CHART 7
This is the first of a series of boxes which calculate a
new average cost for the stock held. This box computes the value of the stock before the delivery by
mUltiplying the quantity, A05, by the old average
cost, A04. The product is no more than twelve digits.
FAULT
OK
B.34
COMPUTE
NEW
COST
B.35
UPDATE
MASTER
B.36
TEST STILL
SHORTAGE
This box computes the additional value of stock made in
this delivery, which is the quantity, COl, times its
unit cost, COS, and checks that the product is the
same as the amount on the detail record, C06. .The
product is no more than 10 digits.
'
This computes the new average cost by dividing the sum
of the two values by the sum of the two quantities.
This box updates the master record by inserting the new
cost, increasing the total on hand, A05, decreasing
the total on order, A06, and inserting the new ordering number, C09, in A14.
YES
This box checks that having had a delivery, the quantity
on hand, A05, is now greater than the ordering level,
A08. It is assumed that the check succeeds.
NO
This box sets the shortage indicator, Al3 to zero.
B.37
CANCEL
SHORTAGE
INDICATOR
B.38
EMPTY
INPUT
BUFFER
B.39
CHECK FOR
INPUT
ERROR
YES
CHECK FOR
END
LABEL
YES
This is the first of a series of boxes which gets the next
record from File 3. They are similar to B. I to B.5
except that there is no blocking and therefore B. 5 is
not appropriate. For this box, see B. 1.
See B.2.
NO
B.40
See B. 3.
NO
B.41
READ
NEXT
DETAIL
B.42
UNPACK
NEXT
DETAIL
See B.4
I n this box any conversion, de-editing and unpacking
that may be necessary is performed on the next rec-
ord from File 3.
9
CD
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
4:200.11310
USERS' GUIDE
CHART 8
B.43
FORM
LINE OF
PRINT
B.44
CHECK
PREVIOUS
OUTPUT
This is the first of a series of boxes dealing with the
output on File 4. In this box, a line of print is formed. Note that many items can be copied from File 3,
with no editing required. This can be assumed to
have been done before B. 38.
NO
This is the first of a series of boxes similar to boxes
B.6 to B.8. This one corresponds to B. 6.
OK
See B. 7.
FILL
B.4S
BUFFER
This one corresponds to B.8 and the necessary line
spacing is set at one inch.
B.46
OUTPUT
B.47
IS AOl
EARLIER
THAN C03
This is exactly the same as B. 17 and allows for the fact
that it is necessary to check that there are no further
details for this Master Record.
YES
B.48
PACK
LEVEL
2
There being no further details, it is necessary to repack all the parts of the Master Record that were
unpacked in B. 24 and have subsequently been altered.
...--_ _ _ _ A
4/62
I AUERBACH I ~
4:200.114
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
200 •
. 114 Graph
The estimated times, quoted in minutes and plotted on a graph against the activity factor, are for a master file of 10, 000 records. The activity factor is the ratio of the
total number of records in the detail file to the total number of records in the master
file. Separate plots are made for each computer configuration.
WORKSHEET 3
K==
PROBLEM:
Config.
Activity F
Unit
al
1
a2
K
a3 or a4 KF
File 1
1
File 2
1
File 3
KF
File 4
KF
m. sec/block
minutes/file
Config.
Activity F
Unit
al
1
a2
K
a3 or a4 KF
File 1
1
File 2
1
File 3
KF
File 4
KF
m • sec/block
minutes/file
Config.
Activity F
Unit
al
1
a2
K
a3 or a4 KF
File 1
1
File 2
1
File 3
KF
File 4
KF
m. sec/block
minutes/file
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
11/62
USERS' GUIDE
4:200.115
§ 200 •
. 115 Storage space required
An estimate, elaborated below, is made of the working storage required to carry out
Problem A. The appropriate units may be words or characters. Separate estimates
may be required for different configurations as they make use of large blocks, and to
allow for any subroutines to be used instead of some optional facilities.
Standard routines
Allowance is first made for standard routines. If any lengthy routine is used, it
is assumed that it is stored once as a closed subroutine, and is not counted in
the parts of the program. Unless known to be otherwise, the following estimates
are used for the routines in terms of single address instructions:
Input-Output Control:
Multiply:
Divide:
150.
30.
45.
Two- and three-address instructions are treated as equivalent to 1.5 and 2.0
single address instructions, respectively.
Fixed overheads
These are areas set aside for operating procedures or special registers.
Program
An estimate of the total space required by the program is obtained from a count
of the instructions used for timing in paragraph. 113 after removing subroutines.
Allowance is made for six detail transaction procedures and three times the
space counted for the other procedures.
Data areas
For each of the input-output files, there will be areas of storage that have to be
set aside. Areas must be set aside for the current input block and the current
output block that is being formed. There may also have to be areas for the next
input block and for the previous output block to be held while simultaneous inputoutput operations are in progress. If several files have to share one inputoutput channel, it may be necessary to have a short queue of blocks in order to
obtain properly overlapped operations. The storage needed for input-output and
working areas may severely limit the possible block sizes on some configurations.
11/62
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
4:200.1151
WORKSHEET 4
Unit of measure:
Configuration
Standard Routines
Input-Output Control
Multiply
Divide
Editing
Fixed Overheads
Program
(Boxes 1 to 23) times 3
(Boxes 24 to 48) times 6
Data areas
File 1
File 2
File 3
File 4
Working
Sums
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
11/62
4:200.120
§
USERS' GUIDE
200 •
. 12
Standard Problem B
This problem is one in which the master record size is only half the size of that in
problem A. No block sizes are changed and Wo;r!.csheet 3 is used with all values of K
(the number of master records per block) doubled .
• 13
Standard Problem C
This problem is one in which the master record size is double that in problem A. No
block sizes are changed and Worksheet 3 is used with all values of K (the number of
master records per block) halved •
• 14
Standard Problem D
This problem is one in which the computation is trebled in order to represent the amount
of work carried out in a typical payroll run. The time for a3 is replaced by a4 .
.
•2
SORTING
Times are presented for typical gorting problems which are estimated by standard procedures and also, if available, as quoted for existing standard sorting routines.
Discrepancies between standard estimates and quoted times for standard routines usually indicate either the general accuracy of the esti~ates, or the advantages of sophisticated routines. The standard estimates allow for no advantage in internal sorting or
polyphase and other techniques.
Standard estimates facilitate comparison of potential equipment performance of computer systems .
• 21
Standard Problem
Times are estimated for straightforward merging on magnetic tapes. Two-way merging on Configuration II and 3 -way merging on Configurations ill and IV. Times for Configurations V and VI would be the same as that for Configuration ill.
• 211 Record sizes
A record size of 80 characters is used in the standard problem. For large volumes of
data the times as-estimated would be in direct proportion to record size .
. 212 Key size
A key size of eight alphabetic characters is used in the standard problems. Key size is
not usually a significant factor for reasonable sizes of the key .
• 213 Timing basis
The times are based on the details obtained in Standard Problem A. The basic time is
taken for the case of activity factor 0.0. This is taken as the time for one merge pass
of 10, 000 records. This time is multiplied by one plus the integer value of the logarithm
of the number of records to base p, where there is a p-way merge.
For a 2-way merge, multiply the basic time by 10.4 and 0.74 for 10,000 and 1,000 records, respectively.
For a 3-way merge, multiply the basic time by 6.7 and 0.52 for 10,000 and 1,000 records, respectively.
11/62
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
4:200.214
200 .
. 214 Graph
A graph of tim~ in minutes against number of records is plotted for Configurations II,
III and IV. These are straight lines.
In general the estimates are probably within 10 per cent of a straightforward standard
routine, with no own coding .
. 22
Standard Routines
Times are presented for any standard routines which are available and whose times are
known.
Discrepancies between standard estimates and quoted times for standard routines usually
indicate either the general accuracy of the estimates, or the advantages of sophisticated
routines. The standard estimates allow for no advantage in internal sorting or polyphase
and other techniques .
.3
MATRIX INVERSION
Two types of times are presented, first as estimated by a standard procedure, and second as quoted for standard routines.
Discrepancies between the two types of times usually indicate either the general accuracy
of the estimates, or the advantages of sophisticated routines.
Standard estimates facilitate comparison of potential equipment performance of computer systems .
. 31
Standard Problem
A straightforward inverse is required of a non-symmetric, non-singular matrix .
. 311 Basic parameters
Elements are held in floating point form to a preCision of at least 8 decimal digits .
. 312 Timing basis
The time for the central loop is taken from the Central Processor performance (see
:051.42). The time used is either that for cumulative multiplication 'or for addition and
multiplication added together. The central loop time is multiplied by (N + 1)3, where
N is the size of the matrix. This allows for overheads .
. 313 Graph
A graph is plotted of time in minutes against size of matrix. The straight line plot is
probably within 10 per cent of a straightforward standard routine .
. 32
Standard Routines
Times are presented for any standard routines which are available and whose times are
known.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
8/62
4:200.400
§
USERS' GUI DE
200 •
•4
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
.41
Standard Mathematical Problem A
This is a straightforward application in which there is one stream of input data .. a
fixed computation to be performed and a stream of output results.
The input is a series of records. Each record contains 10 numbers:
The basic computation is to form
5
Zi =
e.g •• Z2
=
>j=O
AO
AjxI
+
A 1X 2
+
A 2X 22
+
g
AgX2
+
4
A4X 2
+
5
ASX2
and
W
j@5
=
~
i=l
(Ziflij
The output is a series of records. Each record contains 10 numbers:
Zg
The time quoted is for one input record.
Two variables are introduced to demonstrate how the time for a job varies with different proportions of input, computation, and output. First, the computation per input
record is varied from 0.1 T to lOOT where T is the time required to compute W.
Second, there are three separate curves on the graph. They correspond to the cases of
one output record for each, every tenth, and every hundredth input record.
The times are normally quoted for single-length floating point operations. Where
floating point is only provided by slow subroutines, fixed point times are also given.
Where single-length precision is less than eight decimal digits, double length times
may be given •
. 411 Input and OutPut Records
Each record must be separate from the others, either on separate cards, or on
separate lines of print, or delimited on punched tape.
Each number may be up to eight digits in size but the average size is only five digits.
Editing style is not critical; the provision of minus signs is essential, but nonsignificant zeroes do not need to be suppressed.
8/62
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
4:200.412
200 .
. 412 Computation
The computation procedure is shown in the flow-chart. When operating in fixed point
it can be assumed that:
all the input items are less than one in absolute value and of the
form .91, .00734, etc.;
the absolute values of Zi are less than 100, and W lies between 5 and 20 .
. 413 Flow Chart
~,
Records may not be blocked. Input
error checks should be performed.
Advantage should be taken of simultaneous operations. Use standard
routines for radix conversions.
READ
NEXT
RECORD
B. 1
~,
The routine is written to handle
values of i up to 10. For timing,
i is assumed to be 5.
SET
COUNTER
FOR
i
B. 2
.
.....
~
~
B. 3
~
TEST
END OF
i LOOP
NO
B. 4
FORM
Zi
+
B. 5
FORM
W
"
B. 6
B. 7
TEST
PRINTED
RECORD
REQUIRED
YES
NO
COMPOSE AND
PRINT A
RECORD AND
RESET
COUNTER
©
.
Use a counter to control an output
each 1, 10, or 100 input records.
Use a rapid output, often off-line
printing where significantly advantageous; but for Configuration IX print
on-line.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
11/62
4:200.413
§
USERS' GUIDE
200.
WORKSHEET 5
BASIC PARAMETERS
Standard Mathematical Problem
Configuration
A.
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Input Unit
-----
-----
-----
-----
Output Unit
-----
-----
-----
-----
Input
-----
-----
-----
-----
Output
-----
-----
-----
-----
Fixed/Floating
Assignment ~identity)
Record Size (give units)
Record In-Out Time (m.sec.)
Input
TI
-----
-----
-----
-----
Output
T2
-----
-----
-----
-----
C.P. Penalty Times (m. sec.)
Input
Tg
-----
-----
-----
-----
Output
T4
-----
-----
-----
-----
Computing Time (m. sec.)
Box Bl
Boxes B2 to B6. counted
the appropriate number
of times per record. T6
Box B7
11/62
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
.4: 200.4131
200.
WORKSHEET 6
EFFECTIVE TIMES
Standard Mathematical Problem A
Configuration
Fixed or Floating
Precision
R = Output Ratio
Times in Seconds Per Input Record
Central Processor
Input
Output
C=O.l
Tl
Tg
R(T2)
R(T 4 )
TS
C(T6 )
R(T7)
------
C=l.O
C=lO.O
C=lOO.O
~/
/
/
/
/
~~
~
~ ~
/
~~
~~
~~
Totals
Effective Time
For one value of R (0.01, 0.1, or 1.0), enter input-output record time in left hand columns
and central processor penalty and computing times in right hand columns for each value of
C. Sum right hand columns for effective time unless input-output time is greater.
C = weighting factor, computation/input.
R = weighting factor, output/input.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
11/62
4:200.500
§
USERS' GUIDE
200 •
•5
GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROBLEMS
.51
Standard Statistical Problem A
Problem A is a computer run that reads a file of records and compiles a number (N)
of cross-tabulation tables. Each input record is one set of 2-digit numerically-coded
answers numbered 1 through 30 to 30 questions used in a survey.
At the start of a run the number of tables N is input and, for each table, the identity
of the pair of questions concerned, A and B, and the identity of the question to be used
as a weighting C.
The file of answers has been pre-edited and if necessary converted and all answers
coded into integers less than 100; e.g., day of week into the numbers 1 to 7.
If the largest-possible answers to questions Ai and Bi are X and Y. then a series of
locations is allocated to hold XY values, considered as a table of X rows and Y columns.
If for any record the answers to the three questions A, B, and C for a particular table
are x, y, and r, then it is required to add the weight r into the location in column y
row x of the table.
As a check, each weight is added into a check total for each table •
• 511 Input Records
Each input record consists of thirty 2-digit numbers: the answers to thirty questions.
Items may be packed and records may be blocked into convenient arrangements •
• 512 Computation
It is assumed that negligible time is consumed at the start of a run to generate a
sequence of instructions to update each table for any record.
The procedure is to add the answer to question C(r) to the location·
(x-I)
+ X(y-I)
positions from the start of the table and to another fixed location.
Each table entry must be able to hold a value of 10,000.
The performance is quoted as a time per input record. The only variable is the number of tables produced in one run.
11/62
4:200.512
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
200.
WORKSHEET 7
BASIC PARAMETERS
Standard Statistical Problem A
Configuration
Assignment (identity)
Input unit
Block Size
Input~Time
per Block
(m.sec.)
TI
C.P. Penalty (m.sec.) Tg
Computing Time (m.sec.)
Get next block
Get next record
Update next table
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
11/62
4:200.5121
§
USERS' GUIDE
200.
WORKSHEET 8
EFFECTIVE TIMES
Standard Statistical Problem A
Configuration
Fixed or Floating
Precision
Times in Seconds Per Input Block
Central Processor
Input
N=l
Tl
T3
TS
B( T 6>
BN(T7 >
~
~
N=lO
N=lOO
L / / /
/
/
Totals
Effective Time
B = records per block
N ;:: tables per run
11/62
N=lOOO
4:210.100
SfANDARD
E
REPORTS
Users' Guide
Physical Characteristics
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
§
210.
The physical characteristics of the units of the system are summarized in a table which
provides details of the over-all physical size of the system and permits estimates of the
site requirements to be made .
.1
IDENTITY
Each unit available within the system is identified by its name and model number .
.2
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
The dimensions of each unit are given in inches. The weight of each unit is given in
pounds to facilitate shipping and floor loading estimates. The restriction on cable lengths
among units is given to assist in developing feasible equipment layouts .
.3
ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS
In this paragraph, the thermal and atmospheric conditions are summarized. The heat
dissipated in BTUs per hour may be converted into preliminary estimates of cooling requirements by the following formula:
tons of air conditioning required
= total BTUs
per hour/12, 000.
Permissible temperature and humidity ranges for storage of equipment and for working
conditions are given .
.4
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
This entry in the table summarizes the requirements of voltage, frequency of the power
supply, the type of connection, the regulation requirements, and the electrical load .
.5
NOTES
Certain over-all system requirements in relation to physical environment are specified.
The maximum floor loading gives for typical configurations, th~ maximum loading that
the floor must support. This assists the user in choosing the location site ..
With magnetic-tape systems in particular, the dust in the computer room must be
limited. If available, the type of filtering required or the permisSible maximum particle
size and density are stated.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/62
GLOSSARY
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
7: 101.001
STANDARD
REPORTS
Glossary
Table of Contents
STANDARD EDP REPORTS 'GLOSSARY
Table of Contents
Editor's Note
Cross - Reference Table
:102
:103
General.
Concepts
Structure
Communication
Language .
Logic . . .
Computation
:ll1
:ll2
:ll3
:ll4
:ll5
:ll6
:ll7
Signals . .
Data
Data Description
Transfers
Codes
....
Encoding
Number Representation
:121
:122
:123
:124
:125
:126
:127
Processors
Processes .
Processing
:131
:132
:133
Analysies .
:141
Programming
:151
Equipment.
:161
Input-Output
Card Feeds
Paper Tape Units
Printers • • . .
Magnetic Tape Units,
:171
:172
:173
:174
:175
Auxiliary Equipment
:181
. .
Stores . .
Storage .
Registers
Heads.
Media • .
Punched Cards
Punched Tapes
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
:191
:192
:193
:194
:195
:201
:202
5/62
7:101.002
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
Table of Contents-Contd.
5/62
Coding.
:211
Routines
Instructions
:221
:222
Check Out
:231
Operations
Data Operations •
Arithmetic Operations
Logical Operations
:241
:242
:243
:244
Working •
:251
Reliability
Errors
Checks
:261
:262
:263
7:102.101
•
_
STAliOARO
EDP
REPORTS
Glossary
Editor's Note
EDITOR'S NOTE
•1
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this Glossary is to define in as precise a manner as possible the meanings of words and phrases as used in Standard EDP Reports. The definitions are particularlyapplicable to the Computer System Reports and are amplified and supplemented by the User's Guide •
•2
BACKGROUND
The extremely rapid growth of the computer industry has resulted in a great diversity
in the usage of words. Not only have series of synonyms appeared for one concept,
but often one word is chosen at different times to represent similar, but distinctly different, concepts. In order to prepare standardized reports, it has been necessary to
choose and publish a consistent set of terms for use in the Reports. The introduction
to the mM Glossary (ref. 2) describes the more general problem •
.3
GENERAL PRINCIPLES
In compiling this glossary, we have considered our particular needs first. Second, we
have consulted the authoritative English dictionaries (refs. 4 and 5) and then considered
the general usage of terms by the industry. Our requirements are that all definitions
given in the Glossary be mutually consistent, that each of the concepts we wish to discuss in
the Reports have an adequate vocabulary, and that the Glossary be immediately available. While we would prefer to use accepted international standards, these are not
presently available.
Whenever possible, our usage has been made to conform with Webster's and O. E. D.
For example, a word such as "system, "which is used in many different ways in EDP
(e. g., Business System, Computer System and Operating System) has been defined in
a particularly wide sense, to embrace all these different concepts. Any particular
kind of system should then be qualified by an adjective or by its context. Therefore,
we have also defined the meanings of such words as "concept," "idea" and "thing" in
the way in which they are used both within the Reports, and in particular within the
Glossary as the basis of other definitions.
Having satisfied our own particular needs and conformed to "preferred" English usage,
we have avoided conflicts with general EDP usage where they would cause confusion to
the reader •
.4
ORGANIZATION
The terms in the Glossary have been arranged in logical groups in order to keep related
terms close together. A Cross-reference table at 7:103 provides a list in alphabetical
sequence of the words and phrases and may be used as an index to the Glossary.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporatea
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:102.102
Edi tor's Note - Contd •
•5
SOURCES
Our prime sources have been the Draft Standard Glossary produced by B. S. I. (ref. 1),
the mM Glossary (ref. 2), and those working papers of the IFIP Committee TC-l that
have been available to us. A list of our most useful sources is given below.
1.
BS! Subcommittee eds.
Glossary of Terms Used In Automatic Data Processing
British Standards Institute, Oct., 1960.
.
2.
Reference Manual, Glossary for Information Processing
International Business Machines, April, 1962.
3.
IFIP Terminology Technical Committee TC-l
Working Papers, 1961 - 62.
4.
Webster's New International Dictionary, Second Edition,
Merriam, 1961.
5.
Shorter Oxford English Dictionary,
Oxford University Press, 1936.
6.
McCracken, D. D., Weiss, H. and Lee, T.
Programming Business Computers,
John Wiley and Sons, 1959.
7.
Huskey, D. H. and Korn, A. K. eds.
Computer Handbook,
McGraw Hill, 1962.
8.
ACM Committee on Nomenclature eds.
First Glossary of Programming Terminology,
Association for Computing Machinery, June, 1954.
9.
IRE Subcommittee eds.
IRE Standards on Electronic Computers-Definitions of Terms,
Institute of Radio Engineers, July, 1956.
10.
RCA Service Company
The Language and Symbology of Digital Computer Systems,
RCA Service Company, 1959.
11.
Gregory, R. H. and Van Horn, R. L.
Automatic Data-Processing Systems,
Wadsworth, Jan., 1961.
12.
Von Handel, P.
Electronic Computers: Fundamentals, Systems, Applications,
Prentice Hall, March, 1961.
13.
Weik, Martin H.
A Glossary of Computer Engineering and Programming Terminology.
Ballistic Research Labs., Aberdeen Proving Ground, April, 1957.
NOTE: Reference 3 contains an extensive bibliography of national
and international glossaries •
•6
COPYRIGHT
AUERBACH/BNA has no proprietory interest in the definitions set forth in this Glossary
and permission to use or reproduce them is hereby freely granted.
5/62
7:103.101
Glossary
Cross-Reference Table
GLOSSARY CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE
A
absolute address
absolute coding
absolute error
access time
accumulator
accuracy
acoustic delay line
acronym
active
activity ratio
addend
addition operation
address
address modification
address part
A.D.P.
alarm
algebraic language
algorithm
algorithmic language
alphabet
alphabetic
alphabetical code
alphameric
alphanumeric
alternation
analog computer
analysis
analyst
annotate
application
area, input-output
area, working
argument
'---
arithmetic instruction
arithmetic operation
arithmetic register
arithmetic shift
arithmetic unit
array
assembler
assembly routine
asynchronous working
augend
autocode
automatic carriage
automatic check
automatic coding
automatic data processing
automatic programming
automation
auxiliary equipment
auxiliary storage
availability
awaiting repair time
7:222.15
7:211.03
7:262.05
7:191.04
7:193.05
7:262.09
7:191.30
7:111.01
7:133.06
7:133.07
7:243.92
7:243.02
7:222.13
7:211.09
7:222.08
7:133.03
7:263.19
7:115.11
7:141.07
7:115.12
7:121.06
7:121.07
7:125.02
7:121.14
7:121.14
7:211.44
7:131.05
7:141.01
7:141.02
7:111.02
7:132.03
7:171.04
7:211.43
7:117.04
7:132.11
7:222.22
7:243.01
7:193.04
7:243.06
7:161.07
7:117.02
7:221.25
7:221.25
7:251.06
7:243.02
7:211.07
7:174.10
7:263.12
7:211.02
7:133.03
7:151.03
7:111.03
7:181.01
7:192.06
7:261.27
7:261.18
B
,
"-
backspace
7:171.14
7:262.04
7:194.09
7:127.06
7:113.05
7:133.05
7:123.14
7:262.08
7:127.10
7:127.15
7:127.11
7:127.14
7:127.11
7:242.05
balanced error
band
base
basic
batch processing
begin
bias
binary
binary digit
binary notation
binary number
binary scale
binary search
binary-coded decimal
representation
biquinary code
bit
black box
blank
block
block diagram
blocking
Boolean operation
bootstrap
bore
borrow
branchpoint
7:125.04
7:125.07
7:127.16
7:131.02
7:121.16
7:122.25
7:116.09
7:122.24
7:244.02
7:221.16
7:195.19
7:243.09
7:211.27
7:222.31
7:211.28
7:191.10
7:263.12
7:124.12
7:141.10
breakpoint
buffer store
built-in check
bus
business system
C
7:242.17
7:191.21
7:195.07
7:201.01
7:172.06
7:172.01
7:201.09
7:122.21
7:201.04
7:172.03
7:172.02
7:181.04
7:172.09
7:172.06
7:201.05
7:121.18
7:243.07
7:195.04
7:243.07
7:111.04
7:113.08
7:191.20
7:191.19
7:191.12
7:161.06
7:202.02
cancel
capacitor store
capacity
card
card bed
card feed
card field
card image
card leading edge
card punch
card reader
card stacker
card track
card trailing edge
caret
carry
cartridge
cascaded carry
category
catena
cathode-ray tube
cathode-ray tube store
cellar
central processor
chadless tape
chain code
chain printer
chaining
changeable store
channel
chapter
character (+)
character (++)
character printer
character reader
character recognition
character set
check
check bit
check digit
check sum
check total
checking routine
checkout
clJ.eckpoint
chip
circulating store
clause
clear
clock
clock pulses
clock signal
clock track
closed shop
closed subroutine
clutch cycle
clutch pOints
coalesce
code
coding
coding, own
coding, skeletal
coincident-current
selection
collator
column split
common language
communication
comparator
comparator, tape
compare
compiler
compiling routine
complete operation
compress data
computation
computer
computer code
computer configuration
computer department
computer installation
computer instruction code
computer oriented
language
computer system
7:125.18
7:174.08
7:122.22
7:191.40
7:124.15
7:114.05
7:121.03
7:121.04
7:174.02
7:161.32
7:171.08
7:121.02
7:263.01
7:263.05
7:263.04
7:263.14
7:263.14
7:231.10
7:231.01
7:211.29
7:172.04
7:191.34
7:114.03
7:241.20
7:242.16
7:161. 25
7:251.07
7:251.07
7:251.07
7:195.16
7:131.13
7:221.19
7:171.12
7:171.13
7:242.23
7:125.01
7:211.01
7:221.32
7:221.11
7:191.28
7:181.06
7:172.13
7:115.04
7:114.01
7:161.26
7:181.11
7:244.03
7:221.26
7:221. 26
7:241.08
7:242.09
7:126.09
7:117.01
7:131. 03
7:125.20
7:131.06
7:131.11
7:131.10
7:125.20
7:115.07
7:131.07
l
I AUERBACH I ~
5/62
7:103.102
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
concatenate
concept
conditional jump
instruction
configuration, computer
console
constant
content
control field
control holes
control panel
control punchings
control sequence
control total
control unit
control word
convert
converter
copy
core
core store
corrective maintenance
count
counter
C.R.T.
cybernetics
cycle time
cyclic shift
cyclic store
cue
cumulative indexing
curtate
curve follower
cut-off
7:132.12
7:112.01
7:222.27
7:131.06
7:161.10
7:122.06
7:222.14
7:201.14
7:201.13
7:161.09
7:201.13
7:241.17
7:263.14
7:161.05
7:211.35
7:126.03
7:161.27
7:124.05
7:191.24
7:191.23
7:261.03
7:211.10
7:241.22
7:191.20
7:111.05
7:191.07
7:244.06
7:191.34
7:151.07
7:211.12
7:201.08
7:161.33
7:171.09
D
data
data compression
data delays
data delimiter
data logger
data operation
data pass
data processing
-data reduction
data scan
dating routine
datum position
debatable time
debug
decimal notation
deck
decode
decoder
delay line
delay line store
delimiter
density, packing
department, computer
description
designator
designation punchings
destructive reading
destructive readout
detachable plugboard
detail file
device
diagnostic routine
dichotomizing search
dichotomy
5/62
7:122.01
7:126.09
7:261.16
7:123.13
7:161.30
7:242.01
7:132.14
7:133.01
7:132.06
7:132.13
7:221. 31
7:127.02
7:261.24
7:231.03
7:127.06
7:201.07
7:126.02
7:161.28
7:191.29
7:191.22
7:123.08
7:195.10
7:131.11
7:114.06
7:123.07
7:201.13
7:191.41
7:191.41
7:161.21
7:122.13
7:111.06
7 231.04
7 242.05
7113.01
dictionary
difference
digit
digit period
digit plane
digit pos ition
digit time
digital computer
digitize
diminished radix
complement
directory
disable
disc
display
dividend
division operation
divisor
double punching
drum
dummy instruction
dump
7:121.26
7:243.03
7:121.10
7:241.15
7:191.27
7:127.02
7:241.15
7:131. 04
7:126.06
7:127.22
7:222.19
7:171.16
7:191.16
7:171.07
7:243.05
7:243.05
7:243.05
7:201.11
7:191.15
7:222.30
7:211.38
7:231.09
7:242.02
7:111.18
7:211. 26
dyadic operation
dynamiC
dynamiC stop
effective instruction
electronic
electrostatic store
enabling signal
encode
encoder
end
end value
end-around carry
endwise feed
end -around shift
entity
entry condition
entry pOint
equipment
equivalent binary digits
erase
erase character
erasable store
error
error correcting code
error detecting code
even parity
excess-three code
execute
executive routine
exit
exponent
expression
external delays
external storage
extract
facility
fast store
fault
feed, card
feed holes
ferro-electric materials
ferro-magnetic materials
Fibonacci search
figure
figurative
file
file maintenance
fixed -length record
system
fixed-point representation
fixed routine
fixed size
fixed store
floating character
floating-point
representation
flow chart
flow diagram
force
form
E
E 13 B type font
echo checking
edge, card leading
edge, card trailing
edge-notched card
edge-punched card
edit
F
7:125.24
7:263.16
7:201.04
7:201.05
7:201.02
7:201.02
7:126.07
7:242.11
7:211.08
7:111.20
7:191.18
7:241.23
7:126.01
7:161.29
7:123.15
7:133.16
7:211.15
7:243.08
7:172.01
7:244.06
7:112.02
7:151.09
7:151.08
7:161. 01
7:127.17
7:191.14
7:242.16
7:121.22
7:191.37
7:262.01
7:125.15
7:125.14
7:263.08
7:125.05
7:241.03
7:221.06
7:151.10
7:127.25
7:117.11
7 261.23
7192.04
7 242.07
formal logic
format
function
function holes
functional design
functional diagram
functional symbol
7:111.07
7:191.11
7:251.02
7:172.01
7:195.23
7:111.22
7:111.22
7:242.05
7:121.09
7:122.08
7:122.10
7:132.08
7:133.09
7:127.24
7:221.10
7:113.09
7:191.39
7:126.12
7:127.25
7:141.04
7:151.04
7:'141.04
7:151.04
7:241.25
7:114.08
7:195.24
7:116.02
7:122.17
7:222.06
7:132.11
7:201.13
7:116.05
7:116.08
7:121.20
G
gang punch
gap, inter- section
generated address
generating routine
generator
7:181.08
7:195.09
7:222.18
7 :221. 27
7:131.15
7:221. 27
7:121.27
7:221.33
7:121.05
7:125.12
7:123.10
7:122.11
7:195.22
7:195.15
glossary
go, load and
graphic
gray code
group mark
grouped records
guide edge
guide margin
H
halt
Hamming distance
hand punch
hard copy
hardware
hash total
head
hesitation
heuristic
hierarchy
highway
hit-on -the-fly printer
7:133.17
7:125.08
7:181.13
7:191.42
7:131.08
7:263.14
7:194.01
7:251.09
7:141.08
7 113.02
7124.12
7 174.05
GLOSSARY CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE
7:124.06
7:122.23
7:172.05
7:211. 22
7:161.14
7:115.02
hold
home record
hopper
housekeeping
hub
human language
idea
identifier
identify
idle time
ignore character
image
immediate access store
incidentals time
increment
independent operation
independent routine
independent variable
index
index point
index register
indicator
indirect addressing
infinite loop
information
information processing
inhibiting signal
initialize
input
input area
input routine
input-output
input-output area
inquiry station
installation, computer
installation time
instruction
instruction address
instruction code
instruction format
instruction register
instruction time
instruction word
interface
interlace
interleave
interlude
internal storage
interpolator
interpreter
interpretive language
interpretive routine
inter-section gap
in-line processing
isolated locations
item
7:112.03
7:123.01
7:il1.16
7:261.17
7:121.22
7:195.03
7:191.08
7:261.14
7:211.13
7:251.12
7:221.04
7:117.04
7:211.11
7:172.12
7:193.03
7:161.08
7:222.20
7:211.24
7:122.02
7:133.02
7:241.24
7:133.08
7:171.02
7:171.06
7:221.13
7:171.01
7:171.04
7:171.15
7:131.10
7:261.25
7:222.01
7:222.12
7:125.19
7:222.05
7:193.07
7:241.09
7:241.06
7:113.07
7:195.14
7:195.13
7:221.21
7:192.03
7:181.06
7:221.28
7:222.21
7:221.28
7:195.09
7:133.04
7:195.06
7:122.07
J
jack
job
jump
jump instruction
justify
7:161.14
7:133.15
7:222.24
7:222.25
7:242.14
K
key
7:123.04
7:103.103
keyboard perforator
key punch
keyboard punch
7:181.12
7:181.02
7:181.12
L
label
language
latency
leading end
leapfrog test
length, register
length, word
letter
level
library routine
line printer
linear optimization
linear programming
line-at-a-time printer
link
list
literal
load
load and go
load key
load of data
loader
loading routine
location
location delimiter
lock-out
logic
logic design
logic diagram
logic element
logic symbol
logical comparison
logical instruction
logical operation
logical shift
logger, data
look-up table
loop
7:123.03
7:115.01
7:191.02
7:195.20
7:261.10
7:193.01
7:241.05
7:121.08
7:113.11
7:221.03
7:174.03
7:117.14
7:117.14
7:174.03
7:210.21
7:241.10
7:123.06
7:122.20
7:221.33
7:241.13
7:124.11
7:221.15
7:221.15
7:195.05
7:123.12
7:251.19
7:116.01
7:116.04
7:116.07
7:116.06
7:121. 21
7:244.04
7:222.23
7:244.01
7:244.06
7:161.30
7:132.11
7:151.11
7:211.23
7:211. 25
loop stop
M
machine
machine instruction
machine language
machine oriented language
machine word
machine-spoiled work
time
macro code
macro instruction
magazine
magnetic cell
magnetic core
magnetic disc
magnetic drum
magnetic head
magnetic store
magnetic tape
magnetic tape reader
magnetic tape store
magnetic tape unit
main routine
7:111.26
7:222.02
7:115.03
7:115.07
7:241.04
7:261.20
7:125.22
7:222.03
7:172.05
7:191.26
7:191.24
7:191.16
7:191.15
7:194.02
7:191.13
7:191.17
7:175.03
7:191.17
7:175.01
7:221,17
major cycle
mantissa
manual input unit
marginal testing
mark
mark scanning
mark senSing
mask
master clock
master file
mathematical logic
matrix
matrix printer
medium, storage
memory
mercury delay line
merge
message
MICRcode
microprogramming
microsecond
millisecond
minimal latency coding
minimum delay coding
minimum -distance code
minor cycle
minuend
misfeed, card
mistake
mixed radix notation
mnemonic
mode
modify
module
modulo
modulo 'N' check
monitor
monitor routine
monitor unit
multiple address
multiple length
multiple punching
multiplexed operations
multiplexing
multiplicand
multiplication operation
multiplier
multi -address
multi-processing
multi - running
multi - sequenc ing
7:191.06
7:127.27
7:161.12
7:261.08
7:123.09
7:172.14
7:172.14
7:242.18
7:161.23
7:122.14
7:116.03
7:117.03
7:174.07
7:195.01
7:192.02
7:191.31
7:24?.22
7:114.01
7:125.24
7:251.14
7:111.13
7:111.12
7:211.40
7:211.40
7:125.16
7:191.05
7:243.03
7:172.11
7:111.08
7:127.08
7:111.09
7:111.11
7:211.08
7:161.03
7:117.05
7:263.11
7:111.10
7:221.23
7:161.11
7:222.09
7:211.41
7:201.1?
7:251,13
7:124.16
7:243.04
7:243.04
7:243.04
7:222.09
7:251.16
7:251.17
7:251.15
N
N address instruction
N-plus-one address
name
nanosecond
nestable
nested
nesting store
nickel delay line
non -erasable store
normalize
number
number representation
numeral
numeric
numerical code
7:222.10
7:222.11
7:123.02
7:111.14
7:113.04
7:113.03
7:191.12
7:191.33
7:191.38
7:117.12
7:126.13
7:122.04
7:127.01
7:121.11
7:121.12
7:125.03
A
I AUERBAC~J
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:103.104
a
object language
object program
object routine
odd parity
off-line working
one address instruction
on -line working
one-pIus-one address
open shop
open subroutine
open-ended
operand
operating delays
operation
operation part
operator
operator options
operator symbol
optimum coding
optional stop instruction
options, operator
output
output area
output punch
output routine
output table
overflow
overlapping, partial
overlay
overwrite
own coding
7:211.49
7:211.48
7:211. 48
7:263.08
7:133.11
7:222.10
7:251. 08
7:222.11
7:131.12
7:221. 20
7:113.06
7:242.01
7:261. 15
7:241. 01
7:222.07
7:241. 02
7:133.20
7:121. 28
7:211.40
7:222.29
7:133.20
7:171. 03
7:171.05
7:173.03
7:221. 14
7:161. 34
7:243.10
7:251.11
7:211. 17
7:124.08
7:221. 32
P
pack
packing density
padding
page printer
paper slew
paper tape
paper tape codes
paper throw
paragraph
parallel
parameter
parenthesis -free notation
parity bit
parity check
parity check bit
partial carry
partial overlapping
patch
patchboard
patchcord
patchplug
partial overlapping
pecker
perforated tape
perforator
peripheral equipment
permanent store
picosecond
pinboard
pitch, row
pitch, track
plant
plotting table
plug
plugboard
5/62
7:242.09
7:195.10
7:122.19
7:174.04
7:174.11
7:202.01
7:202.03
7:174.11
7:114.04
7:251. 03
7:117.06
7:115.05
7:263.10
7:263.08
7:263.09
7:243.07
7:251. 11
7:211. 42
7:161. 19
7:161. 17
7:161. 17
7:251.11
7:173.01
7:202.01
7:181. 13
7:161. 04
7:191. 38
7:111.15
7:161. 19
7:195.11
7:195.12
7:211. 33
7:161. 34
7:161.13
7:161.19
pocket
polish notation
position, datum
position, digit
. positional notation
positional representation
post-edit
post-mortem routine
precision
prefix notation
preserve
presumptive instruction
preventive maintenance
pre-edit
pre-store
print member
printer
problem
problem oriented language
problem statement
procedure oriented
language
process
processor
processor, central
product
production routine
productive time
program
program development time
program step
program testing
programming
proof total
propogate, carry
protected locations
protection character
proving
proving time
pseudo code
pseudo instruction
pseudocode
pseudo - English language
pseudo -off -line working
pulse
pulse repetition rate
punched card
punched tape
punching positions
punching station
push -down store
7:172.10
7:115.06
7:127.02
7:127.02
7:127.02
7:127.02
7:242.13
7:231. 05
7:262.10
7:115.05
7:124.06
7:211. 08
7:261. 04
7:242.12
7:211. 32
7:174.09
7:174.01
7:112.05
7:115.09
7:141. 06
7:115.08
7:132.01
7:131. 01
7:161. 06
7:243.04
7:221. 05
7:261. 12
7:151. 02
7:261.13
7:241. 07
7:231. 02
7:151. 01
7:263. 15
7:243.07
7:195.06
7:126.11
7:261. 07
7:261.11
7:125.23
7:222.04
7:211.06
7:115.10
7:133.12
7:111. 23
7:111. 24
7:201. 01
7:202.01
7:201. 06
7:172.07
7:191.12
range
range of error
read
read head
reading head
reading station
read/write head
real-time
rearrange
reasonableness check
receiver
recognizer
record
record head
record layout
recursive process
reduction, data
redundancy check
reflected binary code
regenerative store
register
register length
relative address
relative coding
reliability
relocate
relocatable routine
remainder
removable plugboard
repair time
repetition rate, pulse
report generation
report generator
rerun
rerun point
reservation
reservoir
reset
residue check
restart
result
rewind
round off
rounding error
routine
routine library
routine maintenance
routine maintenance time
run
row pitch
S
Q
quantisation
quantity
quartz delay line
quasi -instruction form
quick-access store
quotient
7:126.05
7:122.03
7:191.32
7:211. 34
7:191. 11
7:243.05
R
radix
radix complement
radix notation
radix point
radix scale
random access store
random numbers
7:117.07
7:262.02
7:124.02
7:194.04
7:194.04
7:172.08
7:194.05
7:251. 04
7:242.08
7:263.18
7:172.09
7:131. 16
7:122.09
7:194.03
7:122.18
7:132.02
7:132.06
7:263.03
7:125.12
7:191. 35
7:193.01
7:193.02
7:222.16
7:211.04
7:261.01
7:211.19
7:221. 09
7:243.05
7:161. 21
7:261. 19
7:111. 24
7:132.09
7:221. 29
7:133.14
7:211. 30
7:251. 18
7:171.10
7:241. 20
7:241. 21
7:263.11
7:133.18
7:242.01
7:171. 11
7:117.13
7:262.07
7:221. 01
7:221. 30
7:261. 05
7:261. 21
7:133.13
7:195.11
7:127.06
7:127.20
7:127.06
7:127.09
7:127.06
7:191. 09
7:117.09
scale
scale, binary
scale, factor
scale, radix
scale of two
scalefactor
scaling
scaling factor
scan of data
scanner
scheduled maintenance
search
section
seek
segment
select
7:211. 36
7:127.11
7:211. 37
7:127.06
7:127.11
7:211. 45
7:211. 46
7:211. 37
7:132.13
7:161. 31
7:261. 05
7:242.04
7:195.08
7:242.03
7:211.18
7:221. 12
7:242.06
7:103.105
GLOSSARY CROSS· REFERENCE TABLE
selective trace routine
self-resetting loop
sense
sensing station
sentence
sentinel
sequence
sequence control register
sequence counter
sequential control
serial
service
service routine
serviceability
servo- mechanism
set
shift
shift register
shifting register
sideways feed
sign bit
sign digit
signal
signal distance
significant digits
significant figures
simulation
simulator
simulator routine
simultaneous working
single-step operation
single sheet feeding
skeletal coding
slew, paper
snapshot
socket
software
solid - state compenents
sonic delay line
sort
sorter
source program
source routine
space
span
span of error
special character
specification
sprocket holes
stack
stacker
standard form
standard routine
standardize
standarize
statement
static magnetiC cell
station
step
stop
storage
storage core
storage medium
store
string
stylus printer
subroutine
sub-sequence counter
subtraction operation
subtrahend
7:231.07
7:151.12
7:124.02
7:172.08
7:114.02
7:123.11
7:242.20
7:193.08
7:193.08
7:241.18
7:251.02
7:111.17
7:221.07
7:261.27
7:111.19
7:241.19
7:244.05
7:193.06
7:193.06
7:172.01
7:127.19
7:127.18
7:121.01
7:125.08
7:127.04
7:127.04
7:132.04
7:131.14
7:221.28
7:251.10
7:241.14
7:174.12
7:221.11
7:174.11
7:231.08
7:161.14
7:131.09
7:111 .21
7:191.30
7:242.21
7:181.05
7:211.47
7:211.47
7:121.17
7:117.08
7:262.03
7:121.13
7:114.07
7:195.17
7:195.23
7:194.06
7:172.09
7:127.26
7:221.02
7:242.19
7:126.13
7:151.06
7:191.26
7:195.02
7:211.14
7:133.19
7:192.01
7:191.25
7:195.01
7:191.01
7:122.12
7:174.07
7:221.18
7:193.09
7:243.03
7:243.03
sum
7:243.02
7:243.03
sum check
7:263.06
sum -check digit
7:263.07
summary check
7:263.06
summary punch
7:181.08
7:221.22
supervisor
supervisory routine
7:221.22
supplementary maintenace 7:261.06
supplementary maintenace
7:261.22
time
switch statement
7:211.31
symbol
7:121.19
7:222.19
symbol table
7:222.17
symbolic address
symbolic coding
7:211.05
symbolic logic
7:116.03
synchronous working
7:251. 05
synthetic address
7:222.18
system
7:141.09
systems analysis
7:141.03
systematic error
correcting code
7:125.17
systematic error detecting
code
7:125.17
truck
true complement
truncate
truncation error
two addre&s instruction
two-out-of-five code
two-plus-one address
7:124.12
7:127.20
7:117.10
7:262.06
7:222.10
7:125.06
7:222.11
U
unattended time
unconditional jump
instruction
underflow
unipunch
unit-distance code
unit of equipment
unload
unpack
unset
unwind a loop
update
utility routine
7:261.26
7:222.26
7:243.11
7:181.13
7:125.11
7:161.02
7:171.17
7:242.10
7:241.20
7:211.39
7:132.07
7:221.08
V
T
table
table control
table look-Up
table look-up instruction
tabulate
tabulator
tag
tally
tape comparator
tape controlled carriage
tape core
tape punch
tape reader
tape-to-card
tape transport
tape unit
tape verifier
target computer
task
test
test routine
thing
three address instruction
three-plus-one address
throw, paper
trace routine
tracer
track
track pitch
trailing end
transcribe
transducer
transfer
transfer check
transfer of control
transfer time
transform
translating routine
translation
translator
transmit
trigger
7:122.15
7:241.12
7:132.11
7:222.28
7:241.11
7:181.07
7:123.05
7:211.10
7:181.11
7:174.10
7:195.18
7:173.02
7:173.01
7:132.10
7:175.02
7:175.01
7:181.10
7:211.50
7:112.06
7:211.16
7:261.09
7:112.04
7:222.10
7:222.11
7:174.11
7:231.06
7:231.06
7:194.08
7:195.12
7:195.21
7:126.04
7:111.25
7:124.01
7:263.13
7:222.24
7:191.03
7:124.10
7:221.24
7:132.05
7:221.24
7:125.08
7:211.20
validity check
variable
variable independent
variable -length record
system
variable size
verge-perforated card
verge-punched card
verifier
verify
vocabulary
volatile store
7:263.17
7:122.05
7:117.04
7:133.10
7:114.1O
7:201.03
7:201.03
7:181.03
7:263.02
7:121.25
7:191. 36
W
waiting time
wheel printer
wire printer
word
word length
word time
working
working area
working storage
wreck, card
write
write head
writing head
7:191.02
7:174.06
7:174.07
7:121.24
7:241.05
7:241.16
7:251.01
7:211.43
7:192.05
7:172.11
7:124.04
7:194.03
7:194.03
Y
yoke
7:194.07
Z
zero
zero compression
zero suppression
zero suppression
zeroize
zone
7:127.23
7:126.10
7:126.08
7:242.15
7:242.17
7:201.10
5/62
7:111.010
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
REI'ORTS
Standard EDP Reports
Glossary
GLOSSARY
III
GENERAL
.11
.01
acronym
n. a word formed from the first letter or letters of
the words in a name, term or phrase; e. g.,
SAGE from semi -automatic ground environment,
and ALGOL from algorithmic language.
mode
n. 1. A method of operation; e. g., the binary mode,
the interpretive mode, the alphameric mode,
etc.
n. 2. The most frequent value in the statistical
sense.
· 12
annotate
v. Add explanatory notes and comments.
millisecond
n. One thousandth of a second .
.13
microsecond
n. One millionth of a second.
.14
nanosecond
n. One thousand millionth of a second.
.15
pico second
n. One million millionth of a second.
.16
identify
v. Attach a unique code or code name to an entity.
.17
service
n. Assistance given to another; work performed for
a master or superior.
.18
dynamic
a. Pertaining to change, as contrasted with static.
· 19
servo-mechanism
servo
n. A control device automatically actuated by the
difference between the measured and desired
values of the controllable quantity, and containing
a power amplifier .
· 20
electronic
a. Related to that branch of science which deals with
the motion, emission and behaviour of currents
of free-electrons (and, by extension, of certain
ions), especially in vacuum tubes or phototubes
and in semiconductors and superconductors.
Note: Electronic is often contrasted with electri- - cal, but this distinction is simply a matter
of usage, and precise rules cannot be laid
down. Equipment would not normally ,be
described as electronic unless it depended
essentially for its operation on the use of
one or more of: thermionic valves, gas
tubes, phototubes, cathode-ray tubes or
such solid- state equivalents as crystal diodes, transistors, etc .
. 21
solid-state components
n. In data processing, loosely used to denote components that depend on electric or magnetic phenomena in solids; e. g., in semiconductors and
ferrites.
Note: Used to distinguish such components from
- - those depending on phenomena in a vacuum
or a rarefied gas.
. 02
.03
automation
n. Originally formed by contracting "automatization", this term now denotes intensive mechanization comprising the co-ordinated automatic
control of machine systems, and the automatic
transport testing and treatment of materials and
products throughout a sequence of operations. It
also includes automatic data processing when
this is employed to monitor and regulate a group
of linked activities.
Note: "Automation" is commonly used to represent
(1) the theory, art and techniques of automatic systems for industry or commercial use.
(2) the processes of investigation,· design,
and conversion to automatic methods.
. 04
category
n. 1. A natural classification.
2. A logical grouping of associated documents.
. 05
cybernetics
n. The science of exploring the parallelism between
organic and machine processes.
.06
device
n. 1. That which is devised, invented or formed by
design.
2. A mechanical contrivance or appliance.
. 07
facility
n. A ready ability.
.08
mistake
n. Incorrect programming, coding, data transcription, manual operation, etc. Syn.: human error.
. 09
mnemonic
a. Pertaining to a technique used to assist the human
memory. A mnemonic code resembles the
original word and is usually easy to remember;
e.g., mpy for multiply and acc for accumulator.
.10
monitor
v. Warn of faults or inform of duty'.
5/62
7:111.220
.22
5/62
ferro-magnetic materials
.23
n. 1. Materials having a permeability considerably
greater than that of a vacuum, and varying
with the flux density, as in the case of iron.
Note: Certain ferro-magnetic materials can
be permanently magnetized; e. g., by
.24
passing a signal current through a coil
of wire surrounding the material. The
magn~tization remains after the removal of the signal but can be cancelled or
reversed by applying large enough signals in the opposing sense. The se are
often referred to as "hard".
.25
n. 2. Electrical insulating materials which can be
permanently electrically polarized; e. g .. , by
applying a signal voltage across a pair of electrodes attached to the material. The polariza.26
tion remains after the removal of the signal,
but can be cancelled or reversed by applying
large enough signals in the opposing sense.
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
pulse
n. An electrical disturbance whose duration is short
in relation to the time scale of interest and whose
initial and final values are the same.
pulse repetition rate (P. R. R. )
n. The average number of pulses in unit time.
Note: When the pulse repetition rate is indepen- - dent of the interval of time over which it is
measured, it may be called the pulse repetition frequency (P. R. F. ).
transducer
n. A device which converts signals from one kind of
energy into another.
machine
n. A device consisting of a framework and various
fixed and moving parts for doing some kind of
work.
GLOSSARY
7:112.010
112
CONCEPTS
.04
. 01
concept
n. A generalized idea of a class of entities, or potential entitie s .
thing
n. An entity that has physical existence .
.05
entity
n. That which has real and individual existence, in
reality or the mind.
problem
n. A situation or question proposed for solution or
consideration .
.06
task
n. A logical part of a problem .
. 02
. 03
idea
n. An entity that has existence only in the mind.
\
!D
I
-AU-ER-BA-CH-;-"'
'-1
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:113.010
113
STRUCTURE
. 01
dichotomy
n. A division into two subordinate classes; e. g. ,
all white and all non-white, or all zero and all
. non-zero.
. 02
hierarchy
n. A specified rank or order of items. A series of
items classified by rank or order.
. 03
nested
a. Pertaining to a structure which is contained within another structure of the same form.
.04
nestable
a. Describing a structure that may be nested.
.05
basic
a. Referring to the concept of a structure that is the
innermost part of a nested structure; e.g., a
statement is a basic form of a procedure, but a
procedure is nestable.
5/62
.06
open-ended
a. Having the capability of being extended or expanded.
· 07
interface
n. A common boundary; e.g., the boundary between
two systems or two devices .
.08
catena
n. A chain, a series, especially a connected series .
· 09
fixed size
n. A size that may not vary.
· 10
variable size
n. A size that may be varied within a system.
.11
level
n. The property of a class of entities of equal rank
in a hierarchy: e.g., levels of nesting, recursion, subroutines, loops, etc.
GLOSSARY
7:112.010
112
CONCEPTS
.04
. 01
concept
n. A generalized idea of a class of entities, or potential entities.
thing
n. An entity that has physical existence .
.05
entity
n. That which has real and individual existence, in
reality or the mind.
problem
n. A situation or question proposed for solution or
consideration .
.06
task
n. A logical part of a problem .
. 02
. 03
idea
n. An entity that has existence only in the mind.
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:113.010
113
STRUCTURE
. 01
dichotomy
n. A division into two subordinate classes; e.g.,
all white and all non-white, or all zero and all
non-zero.
. 02
hierarchy
n. A specified rank or order of items. A series of
items classified by rank or order.
. 03
nested
a. Pertaining to a structure which is contained within another structure of the same form.
.04
nestable
a. Describing a structure that may be nested.
.05
basic
a. Referring to the concept of a structure that is the
innermost part of a ne sted struct ure; e. g., a
statement is a basic form of a procedure, but a
procedure is nestable.
5/62
.06
open-ended
a. Having the capability of being extended or expanded.
.07
interface
n. A common boundary; e.g., the boundary between
two systems or two devices .
.08
catena
n. A chain, a series, especially a connected series .
. 09
fixed size
n. A size that may not vary.
.10
variable size
n. A size that may be varied within a system.
.11
level
n. The property of a class of entities of equal rank
in a hierarchy: e.g., levels of nesting, recurs ion , subroutines, loops, etc.
GLOSSARY
116
LOGIC
.01
logic
n. In ADP technology. The systematic scheme
which defines the interactions of signals in the design of an ADP system.
. 02
formal logic
n. The study of the structure and forms of valid
argument without regard to the meaning of the
terms in the argument.
. 03
symbolic logic
mathematical logic
n. 1. The study of formal logic and mathematics by
means of a special written language which
seeks to avoid the ambiguity and inadequacy of
ordinary language.
n. 2. Mathematical concepts, techniques and languages originating or used in the study of
logic, whatever their particular application or
context.
. 04
logic design
logical design
n. The specification, derived from the logic of the
working relations between the parts of the equipment, without primary regard for the forms of
circuit that could be used.
7:116.010
.05
functional design
n. The practical specification of the working relations among all parts of the system, taking account of the equipment used and of the logic design.
· 06
logic element
n. A device which from the present or previous value of a specific number of input signals determines the value of one or more output signals and
which serves, with other logic elements, a particular logic design. The relation between the
input and output signal values is usually simple
and can be briefly and conveniently specified;
e. g., an adder.
· 07
logic diagram
logical diagram
n. A graphical representation of the logic design.
· 08
functional diagram
n. A graphical representation of the functional design .
.09
block diagram
n. A conventional drawing of a system, instrument,
computer or program in which all portions are
represented by annotated boxes.
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:117.010
117
COMPUTATION
.01
computation
n. A process mainly involving arithmetical operations.
.02
array
n. An arrangement or pattern of things.
.03
matrix
n. In mathematics, a two-dimensional rectangular
array of quantities which is manipulated according to defined rules. By extension, any two-dimensional rectangular array. By further extension, any multi-dimensional array of items of
any kind.
. 04
argument
n. In computation, an independent variable; e. g., in
looking up a table, the key (or any of the keys)
which identifies the location of the required result.
. 05
modulo
n. A mathematical operator which yields the remainder function of division. Thus 39 modulo
6 = 3.
.06
parameter
n. A quantity that is a constant within a system but a
variable outside the system.
.07
range
n. All the values which a quantity may have.
.08
span
n. The difference between the highest and lowest
values in the range of a variable.
.09
random numbers
n. 1. Numbers obtained entirely by chance.
n. 2. A sequence of numbers which satisfies various
statistical tests which are thought to be appropriate.
n. 3. A sequence of numbers which does not simulate the effects of any unwanted causes or hypotheses. (See Note 2).
Note 1: Sequences of random numbers are re- - quired in various types of calculation;
e. g., simulation by calculation of real
situations containing an element of uncertainty, methods of integration
which use formulae derived from statistical theory (sometimes called
Monte Carlo or Random Walk method).
Note 2: The "unwanted" effects are those
which might bias the result of the calculation. Thus, in this sense, a sequence of numbers may be satisfactorily random for one type of calculation but not for another; e. g., a slight
tendency for a very small !lllmber in
the sequence to be followed by a large
one may affect the result only in some
types of calculation .
.10
truncate
v. Omit certain terms of an expression. In computation, for example, it is common to omit terms
at the end of a series, or digits of a number, in
positions the significance of which is less than
some assigned value .
. 11
expression
n. A collection of symbols representing a quantity.
.12
normalize
v. Multiply a variable or one or more quantities occurring in a computation by a numerical coefficient in order to make an associated quantity assume a nominated value; e. g., maximum member
of a set of quantities equal to unity.
.13
round-off
rounding- off
n. Any method of reducing the bias introduced by a
process of truncation; e. g., to round off the last
figure to be retained of a result, one-half of the
radix may be added into the next (less significant)
digit position before truncation.
.14
linear optimization
linear programming
n. Any procedure for locating the maximum or minimum of a function of variables which are subject
to linear constraints and inequalities.
/'
5/62
7: 121.010
GLOSSARY
121
SIGNALS
.01
~
· 14
alphanumeric
alphameric
a. Pertaining to both numeric and alphabetic things.
.16
blank
n. A character (+) used to denote the presence of no
data rather than the absence of data.
.17
space
n. One or more blanks .
.18
caret
n. A symbol (1\:) used to indicate the location of a
decimal point.
.19
symbol
n. A character or word taken as the conventional
representation of some entity: e. g., letters or
mnemonics representing operations in an instruction; II representing a blank.
· 20
functional symbol
n. A symbol used in a functional diagram.
.21
logic symbol
n. A symbol used in a logic diagram.
.22
ignore character
erase character
n. A symbol used to indicate either
1. that the character (++) itself is to be ignored,
2. that a preceding or following item be ignored,
or
3. that sO}lle specified action is not to be taken.
.24
word
n. An arrangement of characters (++) which has at
least one assigned meaning in a language.
.25
vocabulary
n. The set of words of a language.
.26
dictionary
n. A vocabulary together with the meanings of the
words arranged in alphabetical sequence.
.27
glossary
n. A vocabulary, with annotations, for a particular
topic .
· 28
operator symbol
n. A physical entity representing data.
. 02
.. 03
character set
n. A set of quantized, mutually distinct, signals,
used to form words in a system of communication.
character (+)
n. A member of a character set.
Note: This particular meaning of the word char- - acter and the one following are important
and distinct. Within this glossary, the
meaning of each use of the word character
is distinguished by the suffix (+) or (-H-).
. 04
character (-H-)
n. The occurrence of a character (+), as in characters per second .
. 05
graphic
a. Representing a particular character (+) in a
printed, or similar, form legible to humans.
.06
alphabet
n. Those characters (+) in a character set that are
used in the written representation of spoken
words.
.07
alphabetic
a. Pertaining to an alphabet.
.08
letter
n. A,n alphabetic character (+); a member of an
alphabet.
.09
figure
n. A numeric character (+).
.10
digit
n. The occurrence of a figure; usually, when unqualified, a decimal digit.
.11
numeral
n. A word representing a number.
.12
numeric
a. Pertaining to numbers.
. 13
special character
n. A character (+) that is neither a letter nor a
figure.
n. A symbol representing an operation .
•
@
A-U-ER-BA-CH---'-/
'-1
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:122.010
122
DATA
.13
.01
data
n. A representation or a record, using known conventions, entities, especially magnitudes of quantities, but also for example, instructions, descriptions, or messages. The representation
may be more suitable either for human interpretation (e. g., printed text) or for interpretation by
equipment (e.g., punched cards or electrical
signals).
detail file
n. A temporary reference file of records, usually
containing current data to be processed against a
master file.
.14
master file
n. A main reference file.
.15
table
n. 1. One or more lists containing organized data.
n. 2. A collection of data, each item being uniquely
identifiable by a combination of one or more
keys.
.17
format
n. A predetermined arrangement of characters,
fields, lines, punctuation, page numbers, etc.
.02
information
n. The meaning for a human assigned to data by the
known conventions used in its representation.
· 03
quantity
n. An entity that has the property of being measurable or being expressed in numbers.
.04
number
n. The mathematical idea of a number; e. g., an
integer, a rational number, a real number.
· 05
variable
n. A quantity whose value may vary .
· 06
constant
n. A quantity whose value does not vary.
. 07
item
n. An arbitrary quantity of data, treated as a unit.
· 08
figurative
n. A data item that is descriptive of its value and
undefined in size, code, or format; e.g., five,
four hundred and three, zero, ones.
.09
record
n. A collection of related items.
. 10
file
n. A collection of related records.
.11
. 12
5/62
· 18
record layout
n. The arrangement, regarding both sequence and
size, of the items in a record.
.19
padding
n. A technique used to fill out a section of storage
with dummy items.
.20
load
n. The quantity of data transferred in a single inputoutput operation .
· 21
card image
n. A representation in storage of a punched card;
e. g., a copy of the original card matrix where
one represents a punch and zero represents a
no-punch.
· 22
chaining
n. A system of storing records in which each record
belongs to a set or group of records and has a
linking field for tracing the chain .
.23
grouped records
n. Two or more records contained in one group, and·
usually identified by a key associated with all of
the records.
.24
string
n. A set of records which is in ascending (or descending) sequence according to a key contained
in each record.
.25
home record
n. The first record in a chain of records used with
the chaining meth.od of file organization.
blocking
v. Combining two or more records into one block .
block
n. The data held in a section of a store.
/'
7:123.010
GLOSSARY
123
DATA DESCRIPTION
. 01
identifier
n. A thing by which an entity may be identified.
This may be a unique name, a location in which
the entity exists, or the name of a parameter
which has the value of that entity, or an indirect
address which will lead to that entity.
. 02
. 03
.04
.05
.06
.07
designator
n. A property of an entity, or a part of an entity
which classifies the entity .
.08
delimiter
n. An item that marks an end of a string of items,
and therefore cannot be a member of the string.
.09
mark
n. A character (+) used as a delimiter .
· 10
label
n. A name attached to or written alongside its
entity. For example, a label record on a tape or
a label written alongside a statement on a coding
sheet.
group mark
n. A delimiter of a group .
· 11
sentinel
n. A data delimiter usually marking the end of a file
or the end of a group of records in a file, or the
last record on a reel.
~
· 12
n. An item of data in a record which for a certain
specified process is used to classify the various
records in a file; e. g., an item on which records
in a file are to be sequenced, or the key to be used
in a table look-up operation.
location delimiter
n. A delimiter which is a part of a store.
. 13
data delimiter
n. A delimiter which is a data item.
tag
n. A key or classifier attached to an item of data.
.14
begin
literal
n. A data item that is its own identifier.
.15
name
n. A direct identifier.
n. A procedure delimiter in ALGOL.
end
n. A procedure delimiter in ALGOL.
!
I AUERBACH I @D
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:124.010
124
TRANSFERS
. 10
. 01
transfer
v. Copy, exchange, read, record, store, transmit,
transport or write data.
transform
v. Change data in representation or layout without
significantly affecting the meaning.
.11
load of data
n. The volume of input or output data that can be
read or recorded as a single operation. It may
be specified as a number of units of data, or
marked by a delimiter. A load of input or output
may be many blocks. When a partly-full section
is read, some systems may arrange to cut off
the empty part from the input area.
.12
highway
trunk
bus
n. A major path along which signals travel from one
of several sources to one of several destinations .
.15
channel
n. A path or aggregate of related paths for carrying
signals between a source and a destination.
Note: In data transfer in which the elements of
- - each item are sent in parallel, a channel
comprises several parallel paths.
.16
multiplexing
v. Division of a transmission facility into two or
more channels.
.02
read
sense
v. Extract or copy data from a record or signal.
.04
write
v. To record data in a store.
.05
copy
v. Reproduce data in a new location or other destination, leaving the source unchanged. The representation remains the same.
. 06
preserve
hold
v. Retain data in one location after transferring it to
another.
.08
transmit
overwrite
v. Reproduce data in a new location or other destination, destroying whatever data was previously
there.
5/62
7:125.010
GLOSSARY
125
CODES
.01
code
n. An agreed representation of a character set or a
vocabulary.
. 02
alphabetical code
n. A code whose characters (+) are letters.
. 03
numerical code
n. A code whose characters (+) are numerals.
.04
binary-coded decimal representation
n. A method of number representation in which each
decimal numeral is represented by some designated binary number.
Example: In the 8-4- 2-1 binary-coded decimal
notation, the number 21 is represented
by 0010: 0001 standing for 2 and 1 respectively.
.05
.06
excess-three code
n. A binary-coded decimal representation in which
the decimal numeral "n" is represented by the
binary equivalent of n+3.
Note: In this notation, the nines complement of a
decimal digit is simply formed by changing
all ones to zeros and all zeros to ones.
The generation of carries is also simplified.
.12
To construct an (n+l)-bit reflected binary code
from an n-bit reflected binary code, write the nbit code twice in sequence, first in forward and
then in reverse sequence of code words. Prefix
an extra bit to each word, taking the value 0 for
the forward version of the n-bit code, and the
value 1 for the backward version.
.14
error detecting code
n. A code in which each representation of a character conforms to specific rules of construction, so
that for certain errors the mutilated representation corresponds to no valid character; the presence of these errors can be detected without reference to the original message. .
Note 1: Such codes require more than the mini- - - mum number of code elements to be detected which could represent the message.
Note 2: When an error ocrurs which the code has
not been designed to detect, the error
may escape detection.
.15
error correcting code
n. An error detecting code which uses additional
code elements so that for certain errors the
mutilated representation resembles more closely
the original dun any other valid representation.
This enables these errors to be corrected.
Note: When an error occurs that the code has not
been designed to correct, the "correction"
may be erroneous.
.16
minimum - distance code
n. A code in which the characters of an alphabet are
represented by words such that the signal distance between any two words does not fall below a
specified minimum value.
Note: If the minimum distance is (2e+l), then
errors in up to 2e digit places in a word can
be detected; alternatively, errors in up to
e digit places can be corrected.
.17
systematic error detecting or correcting code
n. A form of minimum distance code in which a valid representation comprises a set of "data digits"
just sufficient to identify and distinguish the rep- .
resentation, and a set of "check digits" arranged
to give the required minimum signal distance between any two valid representations.
Example 1. A systematic error-detecting code
for detecting single-bit errors may
be derived from a binary positional
representation by appending a parity
bit to each character.
Example 2. Table 3 shows a systematic error detecting or correcting code for two
ternary data digits (a and b). The
two check digits (c and d) are respectively the sum and difference of
the data digits (modulo 3).
two-out-of-five code
n. A binary-coded decimal representation in which
a decimal numeral is represented by five binary
digits of which, for example, two are ones and
three are zeros.
.07
biquinary code
n. A code in which a decimal numeral "n" is represented by the pair of numbers a and b where
n=5a+b
in which a = 0 or 1 and b = 0,1,2,3 or 4.
.08
signal distance
Hamming distance
distance
n. 1. The number of places in which the corresponding digits of two binary words of the same
length are different.
2. By extension, the number of places in which
the corresponding digits of two words of the
same length in any radix are different. For
example, the signal distance between 21415926
and 11475916 is three.
Note: If the two n-bit words in definition 1 are
taken as the co-ordinates of two points
of an n-dimensional hypercube of unit
size (in signal space), the signal distance is then the geometrical distance
between the pOints, measured along
edges of this cube. This model is not
serviceable, however, for the concept
of definition 2.
.11
unit-distance code
n. An arrangement in a sequence of some or all of
the words of a given length, such that the signal
distance between consecutive words in the sequence is 1.
reflected binary code
gray code
n. A type of cyclic unit-distance binary code built up
from the four-word two-bit unit-distance code
(00, 01, 11, 10) according to the following rule:
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7: 125.180
· 18
chain code
n. An arrangement in a cyclic sequence of some or
all of the different n-bit words, in which adjacent
words are linked by the relationships that each
word is derived from its neighbor by displacing
the bits one place to the left (or right), dropping
the leading bit and inserting a bit at the end. The
value of the inserted bit needs only to meet the
requirement that a word must not recur before
the cycle is complete.
· 19
instruction code
n. A code used to represent the elementary operations of a process .
. 20
computer instruction code
computer code
n. A code used for representing the basic instructions that a computer has been built to execute.
· 22
macro code
n. An operation code that designates a macro instruction.
· 23
pseudo code
n. An operation code that designates a pseudo
instruction.
5/62
. 24
MICR code
n. Magnetic Ink Character Recognition code. A set
of 10 numeric symbols and 4 special symbols
standardized as Font E-13B of the American
Bankers Association. These characters.are imprinted by standard printing techniques and are
readable visually and by magnetic sensing heads
in Magnetic Character Recognition equipment.
The special symbols are: amount, on us, transit
number, and dash. Refer to ABA Publication 147
and 149.
/
GLOSSARY
.07
edit
v. Arrange, delete, select, or add to a record to
conform to the style and conventions of a later
process, particularly input or output operations.
.08
zero suppression
n. That part of editing concerned with the elimination of non-significant zeros to the left of a prescribed point .
convert
v. Change data from one representation to another.
.09
transcribe
v. Reproduce data in a new location or other destination, with a change of representation: e. g., a
transcription of typescript into punchings on a
tape.
data compression
n. A process that reduces the number of locations
required to hold a message.
. 10
zero compression
n. A data compression technique that eliminates the
storage of non-significant leading zeros.
quantization
n. A process in which the range of values of a variable is divided into a finite number of distinct
sub-ranges (called quanta), not necessarily equal,
each of which is represented by an assigned or
"quantized" value within the sub- range; e. g., a
person's age is quantized for most purposes with
a quantum of one year.
. 11
protection character
n. A character (+) which replaces a suppressed
zero, usually an asterisk.
.12
floating character
n. A character (+) which is positioned in the position
one place more significant than the otherwise
most significant character.
digitize
v. Obtain from an analog representation of a
physical quantity a digital representation of the
value of the quantity.
. 13
standardize
normalize
v. Replace any given floating- point representation
of a number with the representation in standard
form: that is, to adjust the exponent and fixedpoint part so that the new fixed-point part lies
within a prescribed standard range.
126
ENCODING
.01
encode
v. Apply a code.
.02
decode
v. Apply a code so as to reverse some previous encoding.
. 03
· 04
· 05
· 06
7:126.010
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:127.010
.09
127
NUMBER REPRESENTATION
.01
number representation
n. Any system for the representation of numbers.
.02
positional representation
.10
positional notation
n. Number representation by means of an ordered
set of digits, such that each digit makes an independent additive contribution to the number represented.
Note 1: The different sites in the ordered set
.11
- - - where digits are located are known as
digit positions, and are distinguishable
from each other by reference to a datum
position.
Note 2: The contribution from a digit having the
.14
- - - value 1, in a given pOSition, is known as
the significance or weight of the position.
The contribution from a digit having
another value is -in proportion to that
value.
Note 3: The digit positions are usually ordered in
- - - increasing or decreasing significance.
.15
significant digits
significant figures
n. 1. Digits which contribute to the precision of a
number.
n. 2. That part of a radix notation which expresses
the number as a multiple of the smallest ·unit
.16
appearing in it; i. e., a sequence of adjacent
digits of a number starting at the most Significant position occupied by a non-zero digit and
proceeding either for a predetermined number
of digits or to the limit of accuracy or of required precision.
Example 1. Jf the last two digits are consid.17
ered irrelevant or inaccurate, the
representation 73524 may be replaced with 73500 to three significant digits.
Example 2. In a system where all numbers are .18
carried to two significant digits,
product of 1200 and 0.0012 is 1.4.
.04
.06
.08
5/62
radix notation
radix scale
n. A positional representation in which the ratio of
the Significance of a digit position (n) to the Significance of the previous digit position (n-l) has
the same integral value for each pair of adjacent
.. 19
digit positions. This ratio is called the radix or
base of the notation, and the significances of successive positions are successive integer powers
.20
of the radix.
Note 1: In the radix notation known as decimal notation, the radix is ten and 5762, for example, represents:5 x 103 + 7 x 102 + 6 x 101 + 100
mixed radix notation
n. A positional representation in which more than
one radix is used.
radix point
n. In a number expressed in a radix scale, the location of the separation of the digits associated
with the integral part of the number from those
associated with the fractional part.
binary
a. Of, or appertaining to, two.
n. A characteristic or property involving a selection, choice or condition in which there are two
possibilities.
binary notation
binary scale
scale of two
n. A radix notation with radix two.
binary number
n. The representation of a number expressed in
binary notation.
Example: The binary number 10011 represents
nineteen (i. e., 1 x ~ + 1 x 21 + 1 x
20 ).
binary digit
n. 1. A digit in the representation of a number in
binary notation; i. e., 0 or 1.
n. 2. A digit from any two-character alphabet;
e. g., 0 or 1.
bit
n. 1. An abbreviation of binary digit.
n. 2. The unit of selective information; i.e., the
amount of information derived from knowledge
of the occurrence of one of two equiprobable,
exclusive and exhaustive events.
equivalent binary digits
n. The number of binary digits needed to represent
a given number of digits in some alphabet.
sign digit
n. A digit, normally located at one end of a digit sequence, which is used to indicate the algebraic
sign of the number represented by the digit sequence.
Note 1: The name is also applied to the digit in
- - - the most significant position in binary
numbers in which negative numbers are
expressed as their complements.
sign bit
n. A binary sign digit.
true complement
radix complement
n. A number whose representation is derived from
the representation of another in a radix notation,
by subtracting each digit from one less than the
radix, then adding 1 to the least significant digit,
executing all carries required. Thus 830 is the
true complement of 170 in a decimal number representation using three digits.
GLOSSARY
.22
. 23
diminished radix complement
radix-minus-one complement
n. A number whose representation is derived from
the representation of another in a radix notation,
by subtracting each digit from one less than the
radix; e. g., 829 is the nines complement of 170
in a number representation using three decimal
digits.
Note 1: In many computers, the absolute value of
- - - a negative number is represented as a
complement of the corresponding positive
number.
Note 2: The term radix-minus-one complement
- - - is a general term and is seldom used.
The normal usage is, e. g., nines complement (decimal notation), and ones
complement (binary scale).
zero
n. 1. Nothing.
n. 2. A numeral normally denoting zero magnitude.
Note: In some computers, there are distinct
- - and valid representations for positive
zero and for negative zero.
7:127.220
.24
fixed-point representation
n. Radix notation in which each number is represented by a single set of digits, the position of
the radix point being implied by the manner in
which the numbers are used;
.25
floating-point representation
n. A number representation using two sets of digits,
of which one (the fixed-point part) represents the
significant digits and the other (the exponent) indicates the position of the radix point; the number
represented is equal to the fixed-point part multiplied by the radix raised to the power of the exponent. Algebraically, the relationship is
x = a(rb)
where x is the number represented, a.and bare
the fixed-point part and exponent, and r is the
radix (not represented explicitly) .
. 26
standard form
n. A floating point representation in which the fixed
point part has a value within some prescribed
standard range.
. 27
mantissa
n. The positive fractional part of the logarithm of a
number.
.
5/62
GLOSSARY
7:131.010
131
PROCESSORS
· 10
.01
processor
n. A system able to accept data, perform processes
upon the data, and output the results.
computer installation
n. A computer configuration and the procedures and
programs used with it.
· 11
computer department
n. One or more computer installations together with
the ir staff.
.12
open shop
n. A computer installation which is operated by
people who are not on the staff of the associated
computer department.
.13
closed shop
n. A computer installation which may not be operated by anyone not on the staff of the associated
computer installation or department.
· 14
simulator
n. 1. A device or processor that is arranged to perform simulation.
n. 2. A computer so arranged that there exists a
direct correspondence between the units and
interconnections of the physical system being
studied and the units and interconnections of
the computer.
.15
generator
n. A processor which produces a result by following
an algorithm.
· 16
recognizer
n. A processor used for deciding if a thing or its
description satisfies a specification.
· 02
.03
.04
black box
n. A generic term used to describe a processor
which performs a specific process but whose detailed operation is unspecified.
computer
n. A processor which can input, store, execute, and
modify its routines. A computer without a routine is a trivial processor.
digital computer
n. A computer in which digital representation is
used.
.05
analog computer
n. A computer in which analog representation is
used.
.06
computer configuration
n. A specific set of equipment units arranged
together to form a particular computer.
.07
computer system
n. The complete repertoire of things from which a
given computer installation is selected.
· 08
hardware
n. A colloquial term for the things in a system that
are units of equipment.
· 09
software
n. The things in a computer system that are not
units of equipment; e. g., programs; routines;
services and facilities.
I~----~
AUERBACH / ~,I
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:132.010
132
PROCESSES
.01
process
n. A system of operations designed to solve a
problem.
.02
recursive process
n. A process that contains itself as a part of itself:
e.g., a recursive subroutine contains a cue to
itself.
. 03
application
n. The problem to which a process is applied.
.04
. 05
. 06
.07
5/62
simulation
n. The representation of one system by means of
another. In particular, the representation of
physical phenomena by computers, other eqUipment or models, to facilitate the study of such
systems or phenomena, to train operators, etc.
translation
n. The process of changing a message from one
language to another without affecting the meaning.
. 08
file maintenance
n. The updating of a master file because of the nonperiodic changes; e.g., changes in number of dependents in a payroll file; the addition of new
checking accounts in a bank.
'. 09
report generation
n. A technique for producing complete data processing reports given only a specification of the desired content and format of the output reports,
and a description of the input file .
. 10
tape-to-card
a. Pertaining to eqUipment or methods which transfer data directly from tape to cards, usually
off-line.
.11
table look-up
n. A process of using a known value (the argument)
to locate an unknown value (the function) in a
list or table .
.12
concatenate
v. To unite in a series. To link together. To
chain .
data reduction
n. The process of transforming masses of raw test
.13
or experimentally-obtained data, usually gathered
by automatic recording equipment, into a useful,
condensed or simplified form.
.14
update
v. To modify a master file according to current
data, often that contained in a detail file.
scan of data
n. A process in which only some items in a
collection of items are examined.
pass of data
n. A process that involves the input of a complete file.
GLOSSARY
133
PROCESSING
.01
data processing
n. A systematic ·sequence of operations performed
on data; e. g., merging, sorting, computing or
any other transformation or rearrangement with
the object of extracting information, of revising
it or of altering the representation.
.02
information processing
n. The processing of data representing information
and the determination of the meaning of the
processed data.
.03
automatic data processing
n. A. D. P. - Data processing largely performed by
automatic means.
. 04
in-line processing
n. The processing of data without preliminary editing or rearrangement; real-time operation is one
form of in-line operation.
.05
batch processing
n. A process in which a file of records is processed
as a batch for operating convenh;!llce and efficiency.
.06
active
a. Pertaining to a record in a file which is used,
modified, or referred to.
7:133.010
. 11
off-line wor~
n. The performance of part of a data-processing
procedure by equipment not connected to the main
part of the system. For example, data on pun.:hed
cards may be transferred off-line to magnetic
tape on an off-line card-to-magnetic-tape transcriber and subsequently read on-line into the main
system from an on-line magnetic-tape reader.
Note: Off-line working may avoid spending the
time of a large system on an operation that
could be performed by a much smaller one.
.12
pseudo-ofi-line working
In a multi-running system, the performance of a
peripheral operation, using equipment connected to
the main system, by a separate routine, possibly
running concurrently with another stage of the processing. For example, the operation concerned
might be the transfer of data from punched cards to
magnetic tape for subsequent use by another routine .
.13
run
n. A specific performance of a process by a computer on a given set of data .
. 14
rerun
v. Make another attempt to complete a job by
executing all or part of the process again with
the same or corrected inputs.
.15
. 07
. 08
.09
.16
.17
initialize
v. To set the values of the variable items of a process at initial values before the process is
initiated.
.18
variable-length record system
n. A system in which the number of characters in a
record is not fixed.
halt
n. An occasion when a processor pauses in its
progress.
v. Cause a halt to occur .
restart
v. Resume a process from a halt.
.19
stop
n. An instant when a process ceases in such a
way that it is unable to restart.
v. Cause a process to come to a stop.
.20
.10
end
n. The proper completion of a process .
activity ratio
n. When a file is processed, the ratio of the number
of records in that file that have activity to the
total number of records in that file.
fixed-length record system
n. A system in which all records contain the same
number of characters, and by extension, a system offering.a choice between a few pre-determined record lengths.
job
n. A completed run without unresolved errors.
operator options
n. The set of alternative sequences of operations
from which an operator must choose at a halt
before a process restarts.
5/62
GLOSSARY
141
ANALYSIS
.01
analysis
n. Resolution of any whole into its parts to discover
their nature, proportion, function, relationship,
etc.
.02
analyst
n. One skilled in analysis.
.03
systems analysis
n. The analysis of a system, usually a processing
system.
. 04
flow diagram
flow chart
n. A conventional drawing of a program or process
intended to l.llustrate the sequence of individual
steps.
. 06
problem statement
n. A specification for a process.
7:141.010
. 07
algorithm
n. A procedure or process for the solution of a
problem in a finite number of steps; e. g., a full
statement of an arithmetical procedure for evaluating sin x to a stated precision.
. 08
heuristic
a. Describing an exploratory method of tackling a
problem, in which the solution is discovered by
evaluations of the progress made toward the final
result in contrast with a purely algorithmic
method; e. g., guided trial and error.
.09
system
n. A set or arrangement of entities to form, or be
considered as, a unity, or organic whole.
.10
business system
n. A collection of operations and procedures, men
and machines, by which business activity is
carried on.
\
5/62
GLOSSARY
151
PROGRAMMING
· 01
programming
n. The act of producing a program.
. 02
program
n. A message formally describing a structure of
procedures to solve a problem and the structure
of the data involved.
· 03
automatic programming
n. The use of an automatic data processing system
to perform some stages of the work directly involved in preparing a program.
· 04
flow diagram
flow chart
n. A conventional drawing of a program or process
intended to bring out the sequence of individual
steps.
· 06
statement
n. A basic procedure.
.07
cue
n. A statement containing a key which initiates
entry to a closed subroutine at a specified entry
point.
7: 151.010
. 08
entry point
n. The identifier of the first obeyed statement in a
routine or program. A routine may have anumber of different entry points, each of which corresponds to a different function .
.09
entry conditions
n. The conditions to be specified (e. g., location of
operands) before entering a sub-program or subroutine.
.10
exit
n. The last obeyed statement of a routine. A routine may have more than one exit.
.11
loop
n. A sequence of statements which may be obeyed
repetitively; each repetition is called a cycle.
Cycling is interrupted when a specified criterion
has been satisfied; e. g., when a counter has returned to zero or when an iterative process has
converged.
. 12
self- resetting loop
n. A set of statements, including a loop, such that
at each entry to the loop, any altered items have
been initialized.
5/62
GLOSSARY
161
EQUIPMENf
. 01
equipment
n. Those things that are available to be used in performing work or providing a service.
.02
unit of equipment
n. 1. A part of a data processing system consisting
of a physically separate set of hardware or a
logically distinct set of hardware; e. g., magnetic tape unit, arithmetic unit, auxiliary
storage unit.
n. 2. One of the things from which a computer configuration may be composed.
7:161.010
.13
~
n. A device usually connected to the conductors of a
flexible cord and used to make connection to a
socket.
.14
socket
~
jack
n. A device used generally for terminating the permanent wiring of a circuit, access to which is obtained by the insertion into the socket of a plug.
Note: The term "hub" is restricted to punched
- - card machines and "jack" to telecommunication.
.03
module
n. A standard measure, usually the sizes or increments in the sizes that are available for a specific store or any other unit that is composed of a
variable number of similar sub-units or modules.
.17
patchcord
patchplug
n. In ADP, a connector used to interconnect the
sprockets of a plugboard. The patchcord may include passive electrical elements.
.04
peripheral equipment
n. All the input-output units and auxiliary stores of
a computer system.
. 19
.05
control unit
n. Equipment that directs the sequence and timing
of operations, and stimulates the proper circuits
to execute the instructions.
. 06
central processor
n. A unit of a computer system which selects, interprets and initiates the execution of instructions,
and/or performs operations of computation
and/or data manipulation.
.07
arithmetic unit
n. A section of a computer where arithmetic opera tions are performed.
plugboard
patchboard
n. A component of some data processing machines,
similar in prinCiple to a manual telephone exchange switchboard. The input and output terminals of the units in the machine are permanently connected to sockets on the plugboard, and the
interconnections between units dictated by the
problem or job are made by patchcords or by
short-circuiting plugs (termed cordless plugs) .
Note 1: In some punched card usage, the term
- - - "control panel" is used for this component.
Note 2: Where the interconnections are made by
cordless plugs in the form of pins, the
term "pinboard" is used.
. 21
detachable plugboard
removable plugboard
n. A plugboard which allows the removal for storage
and subsequent refitting of all patchcords and
cordless plugs without disturbing their positions.
This allows the machine to be quickly changed
from one job to another.
.23
master clock
n. The unit which generates clock signals.
.25
clock
.08
. 09
indicator
n. A device which may be set into a prescribed state
according to the results of a previous operation
and which subsequently may be used by the routine to determine a selection from alternative operations. For example, an overflow indicator is
one which is set when overflow occurs. The
state of an indicator mayor may not be displayed
control panel
n. An assembly of displays, manual controls, etc.,
for use by the operator of a computer.
.10
console
n. A desk incorporating a control panel.
. 11
monitor unit
n. Equipment used to observe the state of a system
and indicate significant departures from the
norm .
. 12
manual input unit
n. A set of manual controls in which an operator can
set a word for input.
n. 1. A timing device used for automatically recording and controlling the usage of ADP
equipment.
n. 2. ~ timing device used to regulate the operation
of ADP eqUipment in accordance with a defined
time scale. (This is also called a digital
clock). For example, when a digital computer is used as a logger, the clock serves to
initiate operations at the required time intervals.
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7;161,260
.26
. 27
.28
. 29
5/62
comparator
n. 1. A device for comparing two different transcriptions ·of the same data to verify the accuracy of transcription.
n. 2. A device for comparing two signals and giving
an output dependent upon some relation between them; e.g., of numerical quantities,
whether one is larger than, equal to, or less
than, the other.
converter
n. A unit which changes the representation of data
from one form to another to make it available or
acceptable to another machine; e. g., a unit which
changes data punched on cards to data recorded
on magnetic tape. A converter may also edit the
data.
decoder
n. 1. A device capable of decoding a group of signals and generating other signals which may
initiate an operation.
n. 2. In data-processing equipment. A device with
a number of input and output lines in which a
specified combination of input signals causes a
particular output line to give a signal.
encoder
n. In data-processing equipment. A device with
several inputs in which only one input is excited
at a time and each input produces a specified
combination of outputs.
.30
data logger
n. A device which records events and physical conditions automatically, usually with respect to
time.
.31
scanner
n. In data-processing. A device which automatically samples the state of various processes or
physical conditions and transfers the quantities
obtained to a recorder or control device .
.32
character reader
n. In ADP, a device which converts data represented
in one of the fonts or scripts read by human beings into machine language.
.33
curve follower
n. A device for reading data represented in the
form of a graph.
.34
plotting table
output table
n. A unit for recording the relationship between two
variables (e. g., the output from a simultaneous
computer) in the form of a graph. The variables
are used to control the displacements of a wiring
point in Cartesian or other co-ordinates .
GLOSSARY
171
INPUT - OUTPUT
. 01
input- output
n. A term which may be interpreted as either "input", "output", "input or output", or "input and
output".
. 02
input
v. To transfer data from an external store or
peripheral equipment to an internal store.
n. The data that is being input.
.03
output
v. To transfer data from an internal store to an external store or to peripheral equipment.
n. The data that is being output.
.04
input- output area
n. An area of internal storage into which input data
is written from other storage or from which output data is transmitted into other storage not accessible to instructions. There are two major
cases, the first in which the areas are parts of
working storage or auxiliary storage and the second in which the areas are special stores
addressable only as a single location in an inputoutput instruction.
. 05
output area
n. A storage area used for the release of output;
the area occupied by output data at the time when
an output instruction is initiated.
. 06
input area
n. An internal storage area used for the receipt of
input data as the immediate result of an input
instruction.
.07
display
n. A special form of output in which the recording is
intended to be read and acted upon, or answered
before some future action is taken during the
current run; e. g., a reply to query made by the
operator of any inquiry station. It is often of a
transient nature and not recorded in a permanent
form; e. g., an illuminated panel or screen.
.08
character recognition
n. The act of reading, identifying and encoding a
printed character by optical. or other means.
7: 171.01 0
.09
cut-off
n. A facility provided in input-output operations to
limit the volume of data transferred should it
otherwise exceed a pre-set limit; e. g., to prevent an overflow from an input area or to cut off
any characters after the first 80 when punching a
card .
.lO
.11
reservoir
n. A buffer on an input-output device which holds a
variable volume of external storage medium. It
enables the feed or take-up drive to be loosely
linked to the drive past the heads, and is usually
found on devices that handle a continuous strip of
external storage medium.
rewind
v. Return to the beginning of a magnetic tape or
punched tape, ready to read or record from its
beginning.
.12
clutch cycle
n. The time interval in a clutch-operated input-output device between basic input-output operations
on fixed size sections when running at maximum
speed.
. 13
clutch points
n. The number of instants in a clutch cycle at which
it is possible to engage the clutch. Thus in a 5point clutch which has a cycle time of O. lO secs.
it is possible to operate with one clutch cycle
every O. lO, 0.12, 0.14, 0.16, 0.18, 0.20 . . .
sees., instead of only O. lO or 0.20 secs. with a
I-point cycle .
.14
backspace
v. Move a tape or other medium backwards by a
unit distance; e. g., a punched tape by one row, a
magnetic tape by one record .
. 15
inquiry station
n. An input and output unit used by a human to request specific low volumes of data to be displayed or recorded for his use.
.16
disable
v. Put a unit into a condition in which it is
unable to respond to signals from its control unit.
.17
unload
v. Rewind and disable, sometimes by unthreading.
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7.172.010
172
CARD FEEDS
.01
card feed
n. The mechanism which causes punched cards to be
transferred from the hopper to the card track.
Note: Various terms are used to indicate the
attitude in which a card is placed in the
hopper and enters and traverses the card
track. Examples of mutually-exclusive·
pairs are vertica,l feed and horizontal feed,
face-up feed and face-down feed, endwise
feed and sideways feed, 9-edge leading and
Y-edge leading.
. 02
card reader
n. A machine that senses the holes in a punched
card.
.03
card punch
n. A machine which punches holes in a card.
.04
chip
n. A piece of cardboard that used to be where the
hole is in punched cards.
.05
hopper
magazine
n. That part of a machine where the punched cards
are placed immediately prior to being fed into
the machine.
. 06
card track
card bed
n. That part of a machine which moves and guides
the punched card during its passage through the
machine.
.07
punching station
n. That part of a card track where a punched card
is punched .
. 08
sensing station
reading station
n. That part of a card track where the data on a
punched card is sensed.
5/62
. 09
card stacker
receiver
n. A part of a machine where cards are deposited
after passing through the machine.
.10
pocket
n. One of the card stackers in a sorter ..
.11
misfeed
n. The failure of a punched card to pass through a
machine in the manner specified. This may result in holes being incorrectly sensed or punched
or in damage to cards (card wreck) .
.12
index pOint
n. In certain punched card machines containing rotation machinery driven by a main shaft, one of a
number of equally-spaced reference positions of
the main shaft. These reference positions are
usually chosen to include those at which successive card rows or columns are opposite the sensing or punching station; one or more extra positions may be required to allow for the gap between cards traversing the card track. An index
point is commonly named after the row or column,
if any, to which it corresponds.
.13
column split
n. A facility provided on some punched card machines to read a column in two parts and to treat
the two parts independently .
.14
mark sensing
n. Of punched cards, a process in which data represented by marks on a card is automatically
sensed and converted into punchings in that or
another card.
Note: When the sensing is performed optically,
- - the process may be termed "mark scanning".
GLOSSARY
173
PAPER TAPE UNITS
. 01
tape reader
n. A machine which senses the rows of holes in a
paper tape and moves the tape as necessary.
Note: When the sensing is performed mechani- - cally, the sensing member is sometimes
called a pecker.
7: 173.010
. 02
tape punch
n. A machine which punches holes in tape .
. 03
automatic tape punch
output punch
n. A tape punch which automatically transcribes
coded electrical signals into rows of holes in a
tape and moves the tape as necessary.
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:174.010
.07
.01
printer
n. A machine which produces a printed record of the
data with which it is fed.
stylUS printer
matrix printer
wire printer
n. A printer which forms each printed character by
a pattern made by a stylUS or selected styli.
.02
.08
character printer
n. A printer in which only a single character is composed and determined within the device prior to
printing.
.09
line-at-a-time printer
line printer
n. A printer which prints a line of print during each
cycle of its action. The whole line may appear
instantaneously or it may be assembled by
a processor spread over the cycle.
.10
chain printer
n. A hit-on-the-fly printer in which the type is carried on a chain or belt moving across the paper.
174
PRINfERS
.03
.04
page printer
n. A printer in which an entire page of characters is
composed and determined within the device prior
to printing .
. 05
hit-on-the-fly printer
n. A printer in which the type does not stop moving
during the impression; at a time in its movement
appropriate to the desired character, the paper .
and type are forced together.
.11
. 06
wheel printer
n. A printer which prints its characters from the
rim of a wheel, (the print wheel) around which is
disposed the type for the alphabet available.
.12
5/62
print member
n. A generic term for the component responsible for
the form <;>f the printed character; e. g., print
bar. type bar. print wheel. An interchangeable
type bar is a print member which allows the operator to change the alphabet available.
automatic carriage
tape controlled carriage
n. A stationery guiding or holding device which is
automatically controlled by program and data to
feed forms or continuous paper to a set of print
members and to provide 1be necessary movements; e. g .• spacing. ejecting or tabulating.
paper throw
paper slew
n. The movement of paper in a printer. without
printing. through a distance greater than the
normal line spacing. The speed of movement is
usually greater than in a Single-line feed .
single - sheet feeding
n. The use of a printer to produce results on separate sheets of stationery either by automatic or
manual feeding of each sheet.
GLOSSARY
175
MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
. 01
tape unit
magnetic tape unit
n. A tape transport mechanism together with reading
and writing heads and associated electrical circuits used with magnetic tape .
. 02
tape transport mechanism
tape transport
n. A mechanism for the controlled movement of
tape.
Note: This mechanism is commonly used to move
- - magnetic tape past a reading or writing
head or for automatic rewinding .
. 03
magnetic tape reader
n. A tape transport mechanism together with a reading head and associated electrical circuits used
for reading magnetic tape.
7:175.010
5/62
/
7:181.010
GLOSSARY
181
AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
.01
auxiliary equipment
n. Equipment not under. direct control of the central
processing unit.
· 02
key punch
n. A card punch controlled by keyboard operation.
· 03
verifier
n. A machine for checking the accuracy of a transcription of data usually by comparison with a
retranscription.
· 04
card reader
n. A machine which senses the holes in a punched
card.
.05
sorter
n. A machine having sensing facilities and several
pockets. According to the data sensed, the card
is fed to the corresponding pocket.
· 06
collator
interpolator
n. A machine which feeds and compares two packs
of punched cards in order to match or to merge
them or to check their sequence. The cards
which match can be separated from those that do
not match, thereby making it possible to select
as well as file cards automatically.
· 07
tabulator
n. A machine which reads data from a medium e. g., cards, punched tape, magnetic tape - and
produces lists, tables or totals.
· 08
summary punch
n. A card punch which is directly connected to and
controlled by a tabulator, and which punches
certain data processed by the tabulator. So
called because originally such a machine punched
a summary of part of a tabulation for carryforward purposes.
· 09
gang punch
n. A machine having a single card track with a
punching station followed by a sensing station.
It is used to copy punching from the first card of
a pack into all the succeeding cards. As each
card passes the sensing station, it is used to
control punching into the succeeding card, which
is at that time passing the punching station.
· 10
tape verifier
n. A verifier for checking the accuracy of a paper
tape in which the data recorded is automatically
compared, row by row, with a second manual
punching of the same data as this second punching proceeds.
· 11
tape comparator
n. A machine which automatically compares two
supposedly identical paper tapes row by row and
stops when there is a discrepancy.
.12
keyboard punch
keyboard perforator
n. A tape punch provided with a bank of character
keys, such that the manual depression of anyone
key causes the holes representing the corresponding character to be punched in one row of a tape
and moves the tape as necessary.
· 13
hand punch
perforator
unipunch
n. A tape punch operated directly by hand, which
may also include facilities for tape splicing .
..-----.,-~
I AUERBACH / ~
5/62
7: 191.010
GLOSSARY
191
STORES
.01
store
n. 1. A device into which data can be inserted, in
which it can be retained and from which it can
be obtained when desired.
n. 2. A specific, usually homogeneous, storage
facility.
v. To record data in a location.
.02
waiting time
latency
n. (Of a store). The time interval between the instant the control unit calls for a transfer of data
to or from the store and the instant the transfer
commences.
· 03
transfer time
n. (Of a store). The time interval between the instant the transfer of data to or from the store
commences and the instant it is completed.
.04
access time
n. (Of a store). The time interval between the instant the control unit calls for a transfer of data
to or from the store and the instant this operation
is completed; thus the access time is the sum of
the transfer time and the waiting time.
Note: In some kinds of store, the access time de- - pends upon the location specified or upon
preceding events.
.12
push-down store
nesting store
cellar
n. A store which works as though it comprised a
number of registers arranged in a column, with
only the register at the top of the column connected to the rest of the system. As data is transferred into the store, each word in turn enters
the top register and is then "pushed down" the
column from register to register to make room
for subsequent words as they arrive. As a word
is transferred out of the store, again only from
the top register, other data in the store moves
back up the column from register to register to
fill the space vacated.
· 13
magnetic store
n. A store using remanent magnetization for the
representation of data.
Note: The term embraces two categories of
stores: those in which there is relative
movement between the head and the magnetic medium (e.g., magnetic drum store)
and those in which there is no relative
movement (e.g., core store).
.14
erase
v. (In a magnetic store). Obliterate stored data by
returning the magnetic state of a cell to a uniform null condition.
.15
magnetic drum store
magnetic drum
drum
n. A magnetic store in which the magnetic medium
is on the curved surface of a rotating cylinder.
· 16
magnetic disc store
magnetic disc
disc
n. A magnetic store in which the magnetic medium
is on the surface of a rotating disc.
· 17
magnetic tape store
n. A magnetic store in which the magnetic medium
is carried by a moving tape or ribbon called a
magnetic tape.
· 05
minor cycle
n. 1. In serial operation, usually synonymous with
word time.
n. 2. In parallel operation, the standard least operation time of which the equipment is capable.
.06
major cycle
n. In a cyclic store, the time interval between successive occurrences of a given digit.
Note: A major cycle is usually an integral
number of word times.
· 07
cycle time
n. The minimum time interval between the starts
of successive accesses to it location.
.08
immediate access store
n. A store consisting of one or more locations
whose waiting time is negligible in comparison
with other operation times.
· 18
electrostatic store
n. A store using electric charges for the representation of data. Examples are cathode-ray-tube
store and capacitor store.
.09
random access store
.19
cathode-ray tube store
n. An electrostatic store where the charges are
disposed on an insulating surface within a
cathode-ray tube.
.20
cathode-ray tube
C.R.T.
n. An electronic tube in which a well-defined and
controllable beam of electrons is produced and
directed on to a surface to give a visible or
otherwise detectable display or effect.
· 21
capacitor store
n. An electrostatic store in which an individual
capacitor is provided for each bit.
n. A store designed to reduce the effect of variation
of access time for an arbitrary sequence of addresses.
\
.10
buffer store
n. A store used to compensate for a difference in
rate of flow of data or time of occurrence of
events, when transmitting data from one device
to another.
· 11
fast store
quick-access store
n. An imprecise .term referring to a store whose
access time is relatively short.
!
@II
Ir-A-U-ER-BA-CH-_-'
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:191.220
· 22
delay line store
n. A cyclic, regenerative store using a delay line.
The delay line output is fed back to the input
through a signal regeneration circuit, so that the
signals circulate indefinitely without progressive
change.
.30
acoustic delay line
sonic delay line
n. A delay line in which signals are carried by
mechanical waves. The frequencies used for
this purpose are commonly in the ultrasonic
range.
· 23
core store
n. An array of storage cores used as a magnetic
store .
.31
mercury delay line
n. An acoustic delay line in which mercury is used
to carry the waves.
. 24
core
magnetic core
n. A small piece of magnetic material, often
toroidal in shape.
.32
quartz delay line
n. An acoustic delay line in which quartz is used to
carry the waves.
.33
storage core
n. A core of magnetic material with a high ratio of
residual to saturated flux density, and a threshold
value of magnetizing force below which switching
does not occur.
.34
nickel delay line
n. A magnetostrictive delay line .in which nickel or
a nickel alloy is used in the transducers and in
carrying the waves.
.25
.26
.27
.28
• 29
5/62
magnetic cell
static magnetic cell
n. A binary storage cell in which the two values of a
binary digit are represented by different magnetic
flux configurations, and in which means of setting
and sending the contents are stationary with respect to the magnetiC material.
A magnetic cell may consist of one or more
cores, or of small regions of a larger piece of
perforated ferromagnetic material (termed an
aperture plate), other small regions of which
constitute other cells.
Note: A transfluxor is a core with more than one
- - hole.
digit plane
n. In an array of cells ordered in three dimensions,
the plane containing corresponding bits of every
word.
coincident-current selection
n. In an array of magnetic cells, the selective
switching of one cell in the array by the simultaneous application of two or more drive pulses
to the array which have an additive effect in one
cell only (the selected cell).
Note 1: In coincident-current selectic;:m, each cell
- - - of the array must have a threshold value
of magnetizing force below which switching does not occur. It is then possible to
arrange that the magnetizing force exceeds the threshold only in the selected
cell. Other cells 1n the array, which
.undergo a change of magnetizing force but
are not switched, are termed partially
selected cells.
Note 2: Coincident-current selection may also be
- - - used in arrays of switch cores.
delay line
n. A component or circuit specifically designed to
introduce a desired delay in the transmission of
a signal.
.35
.36
cyclic store
circulating store
n. A store in which access to any. given location is
only possible at speCific, equally-spaced times.
Examples are magnetic drum store, delay line
store.
regenerative store
n. A store in which data are retained for as long as
required, by periodic signal regeneration. This
compensates for undesirable changes which would
otherwise ensue.
Note 1: For example, in a delay line store,
- - - pulses are attenuated and distorted, ana
in electrostatic stores, the charges decay.
Note 2: In a regenerative store using a track on a
- - - magnetic drum, regeneration is used to
improve access time.
volatile store
n. A store whose content is lost when the power supplies are removed. An example is a delay line
store .. A non-volatile store is one that retains
its content when the power supplies are switched
off normally, but the content may be lost if power
failure occurs.
.37
erasable store
n. A store whose content can be changed because the
. storage medium can be used repeatedly. For example, magnetic tape is erasable.
.38
permanent store
non-erasable store
n. A store which is not erasable, that is, one in
which the stored data is changed (infrequently) by
replacing the storage medium with new medium
bearing the new data. For example, a store using microfilm.
.39
fixed store
n. A store, the content of which cannot be changed
automatically by a routine but which may be
changed by an alteration to the construction of the
store. For example, a store in which data is rep-·
resented by the presence or absence of magnetiC
cells.
GLOSSARY
.40
changeable store
n. An internal store, parts of whose medium and the
data recorded thereon can be removed and replaced by other parts, and on which the data is
not destroyed .
. 41
destructive reading
destructive readout
n. A reading process which inherently destroys the
record of the data which has been read; e. g., in
some core stores, reading changes the state of
the core to some prescribed (normally reset)
state .
. 42
7: 191.400
hard copy
n. An external storage system that is tangible, is
permanent and can be sensed by humans: e.g.,
printed pages or punched cards as contrasted
with magnetic tape recording or transient displays.
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:192.010
192
STORAGE
.01
storage
n. 1. The retention of data for subsequent reference.
.04
external storage
n. Storage that may during normal operation of a
computer be made accessible or not, at the
choice of the operator. Access is usually via
input-output units but may also be changeable
internal storage.
. 05
working storage
n. Any locations that can be accessed directly for
instructions or operands used in arithmetic and
logical operations.
.06
auxiliary storage
n. Internal storage that supplements the working
storage.
n. 2. The collection of stores in a system.
. 02
memory
n. A non-physical organization of storage elements,
primarily for the retrieval of data on demand.
Examples are list memory, tree memory,
assoc.iative memory, etc.
. 03
internal storage
n. Storage within the computer whose locations are
addressable by instructions.
5/62
7:193.010
GLOSSARY
193
REGIS~ERS
· 01
register
n. A store, usually of one-word capacity and intended for some special purpose or purposes in a
computer.
· 02
register length
n. The capacity of a register.
· 03
index register
n. A register which holds an index.
· 04
arithmetic register
n. A register associated with an arithmetic unit
which holds the operands of arithmetical and
other operations.
. 05
accumulator
n. 1. A device including an arithmetic register
which stores a number (the augend) and which
on receipt of a second number (the addend),
adds them and store s the sum in place of the
augend.
n. 2. More loosely, an arithmetic register holding
one operand, with means for performing various operations involving that operand and
(where appropriate), another; the result does
not necessarily remain in the accumulator.
.06
shift register
shifting register
n. A register adapted to perform shifts; e. g., a
delay line register whose circulation time may be
increased or decreased to shift the content; or a
register composed of binary cells in which bits
are transferred from one cell to the next by the
application of a pulse common to all cells.
.07
instruction register
n. A register in the control unit which stores the
current instruction of a routine so that it may be
interpreted by the control unit.
.08
s!'!quence ·control register
sequence counter
n. A register from the content of which the address
of the next instruction is derived .
.09
sub- sequence counter
n. A counter subordinate to a sequence counter. It
may be used to step through micro-operations.
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:194.010
194
HEADS
.06
.01
head
n. A device for recording data on a storage medium,
or for reading data so recorded.
.07 yoke
· 02
magnetic head
n. A device for recording electrical signals on a
magnetic medium, usually moving, and for reading signals so recorded.
• 03
writing head
write head
record head
n. A head used to write.
· 04
· 05
5/62
reading head
read head
playback head
a. A head used to read.
read/write head
n. A head used to read or write.
stack
n. Several heads used together to record or sense
one band at a time.
n. Several stacks of heads rigidly connected to each
other and moved together when access by anyone
stack to a chosen band needs movement of the
stack. Usually the arrangement associates only
one stack with any band but allows one stack to
access many bands.
.08
.09
track
n. That part of a storage medium that is influenced
by (or influence s) one head; e. g., the ringshaped portion of the surface of a drum associated with one head.
band
n. A logical group of tracks, usually read or
recorded together.
7:195.010
GLOSSARY
195
MEDIA
.01
storage medium
n. The form of material upon which data is stored.
.02
station
n. That place at which a storage medium resides
while data is written on it or sensed from it.
. 03
image
n. An exact logical duplicate stored in a different
medium.
· 04
cartridge
n. The smallest changeable unit of medium of a
changeable store.
· 05
location
n. A position in a store which holds a word or part
of word. A register is also a location.
· 06
protected locations
isolated locations
n. Locations whose contents are protected against
accidental alteration; e. g., due to program
errors in routines or certain machine faults.
. 07
. 08
· 09
· 10
capacity
n. The number of digits, or words of a store, that
can be stored.
section
n. A portion of external storage arranged so that the
block of data that it contains is physically separated from other data in order to permit each
block to be treated as a single load; e. g., a card,
a line.
· 13
interleave
v. 1. Assign successive addresses to locations separated physically or in time by other locations.
v. 2. Allocate digits to cells on a track so that cells
allocated to successive digits of a particular
word are separated by a specific number of
intermediate cells which may be allocated
Similarly to the digits of other words .
.14
interlace
v. Assign adjacent tracks to separate bands.
· 15
guide margin
n. The distance, measured across the tape, between the guide edge and the center of the nearest track.
· 16
clock track
n. A track upon which a pattern of marks has been
recorded, to provide a'means for recognizing
rows of data.
· 17
sprocket holes
n. Holes punched in a tape to enable it to be driven
longitudinally by a toothed wheel or other mechanism, and to provide a clock track for data recorded on the tape .
· 18
tape core
n. A cylinder on which a spool of tape may be
wound .
.19
bore
n. The diameter of a hole.
· 20
leading end
n. 1. The outer end of a spool of paper tape.
n. 2. The first end of a tape to be processed.
intersection gap
n. The distance between sections on a tape. The
tape can be stopped and brought up to speed again
in this distance, and reading or writing is not
permitted in the gap because the tape speed may
be changing.
· 21
trailing end
n. The end of a tape opposite the leading end.
· 22
packing density
n. The number of storage cells per unit length of
track.
guide edge
n. In some tape equipment, the edge of a tape which
is used to determine its transverse position.
.23
feed holes
sprocket holes
n. Holes punched in a tape to enable it to be driven
or indexed longitudinally.
.24
form
n. A printed or typed document which usually has
blank spaces for the insertion of data items.
· 11
row pitch
n. The distance, me,asured along the tape, between
the centers of adjacent rows.
.12
track pitch
n. The distance between corresponding points on
adjacent tracks.
!IJ
~IA-U-ER-BA-CH-=-:-'
I
5/62
7:201.010
GLOSSARY
201
PUNCHED CARDS
.01
punched card
card
n. A card of known dimensions capable of being
punched with a pattern of holes or notches.
. 02
.03
edge-notched card
edge-punched card
n. A card in which notches representing data are
punched around the edges. It is usually associated with manual systems.
verge-perforated card
verge - punched card
n. A card in which holes, similar to those for
punched tape, are punched near one edge.
· 04
card leading edge
n. That edge which is leading when the card passes
along the card track.
· 05
card trailing edge
n. The edge of a card opposite the leading edge.
· 06
punching positions
n. The sites on a punched card where holes may be
punched.
Note 1: A card is divided parallel to its longer
edges into a number of card rows, and
parallel to its shorter edges into a number of card columns. The intersection
of a row and a colump. defines a punching
position.
Note 2: In order to describe the location of
- - - punching positions on the card, conventions must be adopted which have precise
meaning only in relation to a particular
installation; thus the major surfaces of
the card are distinguished as the card
face and the card back, and the longer
edges are distinguished by naming them
after the nearest rows.
Note 3: A given row or combination of rows is
- - - usually associated with a specific character (+); a single character (+1-) is
usually represented by one or more
holes punched in a single column.
.07
deck
n. A collection of punched cards bearing data for a
particular run.
.08
curtate
n. A horizontally-divided portion of a punched card.
See zone .
· 09
card field
n. A group of adjacent card columns (or parts of
columns) whose pun,chings represent an item.
For example, a field having three columns, each
capable of representing one decimal digit can
bave punchings which are representative of numbers from 0 to 999 inclusive.
zone
n. A group of characters (+) chosen by the punching
in the upper curtate of a punched card; the final
choice of an individual character within the zone
is made by the punching in the numeric part of
the card; i. e., the lower curtate.
.10
· 11
double punching
n. The punching of two holes in a card column.
Note: The double punching may be intentional or
may arise from a fault condition.
· 12
multiple punching
n. The punching of three or more holes in a card
column.
· 13
designation punchings
control holes
control punchings
function holes
n. Punchings which determine flow the data on a
punched card is to be treated within a machine,
or which functions the machine is to perform.
· 14
control field
n. The field in the punched cards of a deck according to whose punchings the cards have been placed
in sequence. For a given deck, this is not always
the same field; e.g., a deck with fields for man
number, labor cost and job number would be in
man number sequence for wages calculation but
in job number sequence for job costings.
5/62
7:202.010
202
PUNCHED TAPES
.01
paper tape
punched tape
perforated tape
n. A tape of known dimensions in which data may
be recorded by means of a pattern of holes .
. 02
chadless tape
n. Tape which has been punched in such a way that
the holes are only partially perforated, the chads
or cuttings remaining- attached to the tape as
hinged li<;ls.
Note: Chadless perforation is used to make the
full surface of a perforated tape available
for printing; e. g., to print the characters
(+) represented by the punching .
. 03
paper tape codes
n. Codes used to represent data on paper tape, each
character normally occupying one row.
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
,/
5/62
7:211.010
GLOSSARY
. 15
end value
n. A value which is compared with that of an index,
count, or control variable to determine if the
end value has been attained and/or passed by the
variable .
automatic coding
n. A technique by which a machine tranSlates a
program into machine instructions.
.16
test
v. Examine an index or count to determine if it has
attained or exceeded its en.d value.
· 03
absolute coding
n. Coding which uses machine instructions.
.17
.04
relative coding
n. Coding which uses machine instructions in which
relative addresses are wholly or- partly employed
overlay
v. Transfer segments of routines into working storage .from auxiliary storage for execution, so that
several segments will occupy the same locations
at different times.
.18
.05
symbolic coding
n. Coding which uses symbolic addresses or a symbolic representation of other parts of the instruction.
segment
v. Divide a routine into parts so that each part can
be stored completely within the internal store of
the computer and contains the necessary instructions to jump to the next part. These parts are
called segments.
· 06
pseudocode
n. Any code in which a routine may be written but
which is not a computer code.
.19
.07
autocode
n. A pseudocode intended to simplify coding.
relocate
v. Move a rootine from one location in storage to
another, changing addresses so that the routine
can be executed in its new location.
.20
~
.08
~
211
CODING
.01
coding
n. The process of translating a program into a routine for a particular model of computer.
. 02
v. Initiate operation of a routine, for example, by
means of a manually-controlled jump to the entry
point. If a routine is so arranged that its operation commences automatically as soon as the
routine has been placed in the computer, it is
said to be a self-triggering routine.
v. Alter an instruction (called the presumptive
instruction or unmodified instruction), in a prescribed way to produce the instruction actually
executed (called the effective instruction or the
actual instruction.)
.09
address modification
.21
link
n. An instruction or address for leaving a closed
subroutine on its completion in order to return
to some desired point in the routine from which
the subroutine was entered.
. 22
housekeeping
n. Operations in a routine which do not contribute
directly to the solution of the problem but do
contribute directly to the operation of the computer.
loop
n. A coding technique whereby a group of instructions is repeated with modification of some of the
instructions in the group and/or with modification
of the data being operated upon. This technique
usually consists of the following steps:
(1) Loop Initialization: The instructions immediately prior to a loop proper which set
addresses, counts, and/or data to their desired initial values.
(2) Loop Execution: Those instructions of a loop
which actually perform the primary function
of the loop, as distinguished from loop initialization, modification, and testing, which are
housekeeping operations.
(3) Loop Modification: Those instructions of a
loop which alter instruction addresses,
counts, or data.
(4) Loop Testing: Those instructions of a loop
which determine when the loop has been completed.
n. Modification in which only the address part of the
presumptive instruction is modified. This is the
only form of automatic modification in many computers.
· 10
count
tally
n. An integer variable that has associated with it
a special operation to either add or subtract
the value 1, to or from, the count.
.11
index
n. An integer variable that is used to indicate the
value of a control variable in a loop. It often
has special operations associated with it to step
its value.
v. To modify an address by adding an index to the
address.
· 12
cumulative indexing
n. The addition of more than one index to an address.
· 13
increment
n. A quantity to be added to or subtracted from an
index.
.14
step
v. 1. To add 1 to, or subtract 1 from a count.
2. ~~ i~~~:~ increment to, or subtract it from,
.23
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:211.240
· 24
infinite loop
n. A loop from which there is no final exit other
than by manual intervention.
· 25
loop stop
n. A small closed loop usually used to indicate an
error or for operating convenience.
· 26
dynamic stop
n. A loop stop consisting of a single jump instruction
.27
branchpoint
n. A point in a routine where one of two or more
choices is selected under control of a routine;
e. g., a conditional transfer or conditional jump.
.28
breakpoint
n. A point in a routine at which special action is
taken, such as a stop or a jump, either as the
result of the insertion of a special instruction
or the setting of a console switch. Usually used
in debugging.
.29
checkpoint
n. A point in a routine at which the results of a
number of checks are examined.
. 30
rerun point
n. A point in a routine at which sufficient information can be stored to permit rerunning the
routine from that point.
.31
.32
. 33
.34
.35
. 36
5/62
switch
n. An instruction or number planted in a routine
to select one of a number of alternative paths.
The selection, OIice made, persists until altered, in contrast to that made at a branchpoint,
where the selection is made at each passage.
pre-store
v. Store data required by a routine before the
routine is entered.
plant
v. Place an instruction, or other item which has
been formed during the operation of a routine,
in a location so that it will be effective at some
later stage in the operation.
.37
scale factor
scaling factor
n. A numerical coefficient used in scaling to multiply
one or more quantities occurring in a calculation.
.38
dump
v. Preserve by storage elsewhere the contents of a
set of locations which are temporarily required
for another purpose.
.39
unwind a loop
v. State explicitly and in full, without the use of
counts, modifiers, etc., all the instructions in
the repeated execution of a loop of instructions.
.40
minimum delay coding
minimal latency coding
n. A method of coding for those computers in which
the waiting-time for a word depends on its location: locations for instructions and data are so
chosen that access-time is reduced or minimized.
.41
multiple-length working
mUltiple -length arithmetic
n. The use of two or more words to represent a
number to enhance precision; hence, doublelength working, triple-length working, etc .
.42
~
v. Correct or change the coding at a particular
location by inserting transfer instructions at that
location and by adding elsewhere the new instructions and the replaced instructions. Usually used
during checkout.
.43
working area
n. Locations used by routines for temporary storage;
e. g., of intermediate results.
.44
alternation
n. A technique in which one or more extra input-output
units are used in a run so that loading and unloading of the units do not hold up progress of the run .
.45
scalefactor
n. A coefficient that relates the problem value of
a quantity to the machine value.
.46
quasi -instruction form
n. The representation of data in the form of instructions.
.47
Note: Quasi -instruction form is convenient for the
- - representation of small amounts of data occurring in a routine; e.g., parameters,
which may thus be read as if they were
instructions, although they are subsequently .48
treated as data.
scaling
n. The process of determining scalefactors.
control word
n. 1. A word containing the values of one or more
parameters which specify the action of the
subroutine, or
2. A word containing the address of such value.
n. The routine or program composed by a translator
corresponding to the source routine or program.
scale
v. Alter the units in which a quantity is expressed to
bring all magnitudes within the capacity of the
equipment or method being used.
.49
source program
source routine
n. The program or routine that is translated.
object routine
object program
object language
n. The language in which the output of the translator
is composed •
.50
target computer
n. The computer configuration on which a routine
is to be run.
7:221.010
GLOSSARY
221
ROUTINES
.01
routine
n. A message describing a structure of operations,
for a class of processors, that performs a particular process.
.02
standard routine
n. A routine which conforms to a standard or whose
use within another routine insures that the latter
routine conforms to a certain standard.
· 03
library routine
n. A routine which is a member of a routine library.
. 04
independent routine
n. A routine which can be run on a computer other
than as a subroutine.
.05
production routine
n. A routine designed to perform a process for a
customer outside the computer department.
.16
bootstrap
n. A form of loader in which simple preset computer
operations are used to read in the loader, which
in turn causes further instructions to be read until
the complete routine is loaded.
· 17
main routine
n. A term used to distinguish those parts of a rou-·
tine that do not comprise subroutines or other
self-contained sections.
· 18
subroutine
n. A part of a routine that is used at more than one
point in a particular routine or that is available
for inclusion in other routines .
· 19
closed subroutine
n. A subroutine whose entry conditions determine
the point at which the routine using it is re-enter~
ed.
.20
open subroutine
n. A subroutine which has fixed .re-entry pOints
into the routine using it.
.21
interlude
n. A small routine designed to do some preliminary
computation or organization; e.g., to calculate
the value of a parameter or to c:lear parts of the
store. It is normally overwritten when it has
served its purpose.
· 22
supervisor
supervisory routine
n. A routine designed to organize and regulate the
flow of work in an automatic data processing
system, e. g., such a routine might change over
automatically from one run to the next and record
times of runs.
.06
executive routine
n. A supervisor, or service or monitor rQutine.
· 07
service routine
n. A routine that provides a service to another
routine, usually as a subroutine, often as a
standard routine: e.g., an overlay routine;
input-output control routine; loading routine.
.08
utility routine
n. A standard production routine.
.09
relocatable routine
n. A routine designed so that it can be relocated.
· 10
fixed routine
n. A routine that cannot be modified by the computer
.23
skeletal coding
n. The outline of a routine that is used as a framework by a generator.
monitor routine
n. A routine designed to indicate the progress of
work in an ADP system.
· 24
translator
translating routine
n. A routine which translates a program or a routine,
into another language, or into machine instruction code without executing it.
Note: There are several classes of translating
- - routine; terms have been coined or adapted
for the various classes, but there is no
generally-agreed precise meaning for each
term. The definitions below represent an
attempt by B.S.I. based on current usage
to introduce an element of standardization .
· 25
assembler
assembly routine
n. A translating routine which accepts or selects
required subroutines, assembles parts of a
routine and makes the necessary adjustments to
cross-references.
.11
.12
segment
n.One of the parts into which a routine is divided
for the purposes of transfer from auxiliary to
working storage for execution of one segment at
a time.
· 13
input routine
n. A routine, sometimes stored permanently in the
computer, to control the input of data.
. 14
output routine
n. A routine which organizes the output process of
a computer; e.g., starts the output equipment,
presents data to it at suitable intervals of time,
and specifies format.
loader
IOOdiiig routine
n. An input routine for reading programs.
.15
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:221.260
.26
.27
. 28
5/62
. 29
report generator
n. A routine that performs the process of report
generation.
.30
routine library
n. A collection of coded routines with descriptive
material, especially a systematic collection of
tested routines for a particular model of computer made generally available to its users.
.31
dating routine
n. A routine -that computes and/or stores, where
needed, a date such as current day's date, expiration date of a tape, etc.
.32
own coding
n. Instructions that are incorporated into standard
routines to modify or extend the routine to cover
particular tasks of an otherwise "standard" problem .
interpretive routine
.33
interpreter
n. A routine which executes a routine in a pseudo
language by translating each pseudo language
expression separately into maChine instruction
code immediately before execution.
Note 1: A characteristic of an interpretive
routine is that where instructions or expressions are repeated, as in a loop,
the translation is performed once for each
execution. This contrasts with the operation of a translating routine in which the
translation of each expression is perform ed once only, irrespective of the number
of repeated executions either of-the loop
or of the whole program.
Note 2: An interpretive routine that allows
routines written for one type of computer to be run on a different type is
called a simulator routine.
load and go
n. A computer operation and compiling technique in
which the pseudo language is directly converted
to machine language and run without an output
machine language routine being created.
compiling routine
compiler
n. Any complete translating routine. The operations
of a compiling routine may include code-conversion assembly and the adaptation of parts of the
routine according to the requirements of-the
original specification of _the program.
generating routine
generator
n. A translating routine, or part of such a routine,
often part of a compiler, designed to construct
other routines for performing particular types
of operation; for example, sortingroutine genera tor , output routine generator. The generator
may select among various broad methods of performing a task such as sequencing data, and adjust the details of the selected method to provide
the most efficient routine for the characteristics
of the data to be handled by the generated routine.
7:231.010
GLOSSARY
231
CHECK OUT
.01
check out
v. Apply diagnostic or testing procedures to a routine or to equipment.
. 02
program testing
n. Running a routine on a computer in order to discover errors in its program.
.03
debug
v. Colloquially, trace and eliminate errors from a
routine. The process is usually assisted by a
trace or post-mortem routine.
. 04
diagnostic routine
n. A routine designed to locate either a fault in the
equipment or an error in a program or a routine.
.05
post-mortem routine
n. A diagnostic routine that is used after a run has
stopped .
. 06
trace routine
tracer
n. A routine designed for demonstrating the operation of a routine. Its output is' arranged in the
sequence in which the instructions are executed,
and may include instructions of the routine which
is being checked and immediate results of those
instructions.
.07
selective trace routine
n. A trace routine that considers only a selection
of the instructions executed: e. g., only jump
instructions.
.08
snapshot
n. A dynamic printout of selected data in storage
at specified times or points in the running of a
routine.
.09
dump
v. Record the contents of a store as a part of computer-operating technique rather than as part of
an operational routine; e. g., for check -out or
rerun purposes .
. 10
checking routine
n. A routine that examines a routine for obvious
errors, such as mis-punching, without executing the routine itself.
5/62
7:222.010
GLOSSARY
222
INSTRUCTIONS
. 01
instruction
n. A statement that specifies one of the operations
which can be performed by a computer either
directly or by a programming system, such as
an interpretive routine.
.14
content
n. The data held in a location .
.15
absolute address
n. (Of a location.) An address inherent in the design
of the computer.
.16
relative address
n. An address that indicates the excess of the absolute address over a particular absolute address
which is being used as a reference point. The
reference point is often the address of the first
word in the routine.
· 17
symbolic address
n. An address, in a form chosen for convenience
by a programmer, which requires conversion
into an absQlute address before it can be used
in the computer.
· 18
synthetic address
generated address
n. An address generated by instructions in the
routine in which it is used.
· 19
directory
symbol table
n. A list of addresses used as reference points
in a routine; for example, in relative coding.
.20
indirect addressing
n. A method of addressing where an instruction
contains the address of a location where a
further address is stored; the location designated
by this second address may contain either the
operand or a third address.
.21
interpretive language
n. A language used in writing a routine for execution
by an interpretive routine.
· 22
multiple address
multi-address
n. An instruction containing more than one address.
arithmetic instruction
n. An instruction in which the function part specifies
an arithmetic operation .
• 23
one. two •.... , N address instruction format
n. An instruction format containing one, two •....•
N address parts.
logical instruction
n. An instruction in which the function part specifies
a logical operation .
.24·
one-pIus-one. two plus-one •....• N-plus-one
address instruction format
n. An instruction format' containing two, three ...
(N + 1) address parts respectively. the "plusone" address being that of the instruction to be
obeyed next. in normal sequence.
jump
triiIlsfer of control
n. A departure from the normal sequence of obeying
instructions in a computer.
.25
jump instruction
n. An instruction that may cause a jump.
.26
unconditional jump instruction
n. An instruction that always causes a jump.
.27
conditional jump instruction
n. An instruction that may cause a jump dependent
on the result of some arithmetic or logical
operation or on the state of some indicator(s).
· 02
machine instruction
n. An instruction which can be obeyed by the computer directly.
.03
macro instruction
n. In a computer instruction code an instruction
written that has no equivalent operation in the
computer, and is replaced in a routine by a
predetermined set of machine instructions.
· 04
.05
· 06
pseudo instruction
n. A group of characters having the same general
form as an instruction.
instruction format
n. The allocation of the characters comprising an
instruction between the component parts of the
instruction; e. g., the address part, operation
part.
function
n. Any operation for which the computer instruction code provides; e.g., multiplication. transfer of data to store.
.07
operation part
n. The part of an instruction that specifies the
operation to be performed.
.08
address part
n. The part of an instruction that normally specifies
the address of an operand or of the next instruction.
Note: An instruction may have several address
- - parts.
. 09
. 10
.11
.12
.13
instruction address
n. The address of the location where an instruction
word is stored.
address
n. An expreSSion, usually numerical. that designates
a particular location in the store or some other
data source or destination.
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:222.280
.28
table loole-up instruction
n. An instruction to facilitate reference to systematically arranged data; e. g., to search for a
specified argument in a table.
.29
optional stop instruction
n. An instruction which includes the possibility
of stopping the execution of instructions immediately before or after the instruction is
obeyed, there being some means of enabling or
inhibiting this facility as required.
5/62
.30
dummy instruction
n. An instruction which has no functional or organizational significance. It is generally used to
provide scope for future changes in a program or
to fulfill some prescribed condition; e. g., the
completion of a blocle of instructions.
.31
branchpoint
n. An instruction that may cause a change of sequence.
GLOSSARY
231
CHECK OUT
.01
check out
v. Apply diagnostic or testing procedures to a routine or to equipment.
.02
program testing
n. Running a routine on a computer in order to discover errors in its program.
.03
debug
v. Colloquially, trace and eliminate errors from a
routine. The process is usually assisted by a
trace or post-mortem routine.
. 04
diagnostic routine
n. A routine designed to locate either a fault in the
equipment or an error in a program or a routine.
.05
post-mortem routine
n. A diagnostic routine that is used after a run has
stopped .
. 06
trace routine
tracer
n. A routine designed for demonstrating the operation of a routine. Its output is arranged in the
sequence in which the instructions are executed,
and may include instructions of the routine which
is being checked and immediate results of those
instructions.
7:231.010
.07
selective trace routine
n. A trace routine that considers only a selection
of the instructions executed: e. g., only jump
instructions.
.08
snapshot
n. A dynamic printout of selected data in storage
at specified times or points in the running of a
routine.
.09
dump
v. Record the contents of a store as a part of computer -operating technique rather than as part of
an operational routine; e. g., for check -out or
rerun purposes .
.10
checking routine
n. A routine that examines a routine for obvious
errors, such as mis-punching, without executing the routine itself.
5/62
7:241.010
GLOSSARY
241
OPERATIONS
.13
.01
operation
n. A well-defined act performed by a machine or
a human.
load key
n. A manual control whose operation initiates the
input of a routine and data into a computer.
.14
single-step operation
n. A method of operating a computer manually in
which a single instruction or part of an instruction is obeyed in response to a single operation
of a manual control.
Note: Single-step operation is used mainly in
detecting faults .
.15
digit period
digit time
n. The time interval between the occurrence of successive digit signals.
.16
word time
n. The time interval between the occurrence of
digits occupying corresponding positions in
succes sive words.
. 17
control sequence
n. The normal order of selection of instructions
for execution. In some computers, one of the
addresses in each instruction specifies the control sequence; in others, the sequence is consecutive except where a jump occurs.
.18
sequential control
n. A method of operation of a computer permitting
instructions to be stored In the sequence in which
they are normally obeyed.
.19
set
v. 1. Place a binary storage cell in the state representing 1.
2. Place a binary storage cell in a prescribed
state.
.20
reset
unset
clear
.02
operator
n. A human directly operating various controls and
controlling the insertion or extraction of external
storage medium into or from a data processor.
. 03
execute
v. Carry out an instruction or an operation.
.04
machine word
n. A quantity of data which is commonly treated
as a unit; e. g. items for the purpose of data
transfers.
.05
word length
n. The size of the machine word.
.06
instruction word
n. A word, part or all of which is obeyed by the
computer as an instruction.
.07
program step
n. The execution of a single instruction.
.08
complete operation
n. The operation of fulfilling a machine instruction
completely. This includes obtaining access to
the instruction word and operands.
.09
instruction time
n. The time taken to select, prepare and initiate
an instruction, and step on to the next instruction, including access to storage for both instruction and data.
Note: The over-all time to complete the operations
- - initiated by an instruction may be related
only indirectly to the instruction time; for
example, the interval between initiating
successive instructions may be much less
than the operating time.
.10
.11
.12
v. 1. Place a binary storage cell in the state representing O.
2. Place a binary storage cell in the alternative
state to the set state.
list
v. Print every relevant item of input data on the
general.basis of one line of print per record.
.21
tabulate
v. Print totals, differences, or like information on
the general basis of one line of print per group
of records.
reset to N
reset
v. Return a counting device to an initial
state representing N.
.22
counter
n. A logic element, register or storage location
for storing numbers, permitting these numbers
to be increased by unity or by an arbitrary constant, and often capable of being reset to zero;
e . g ., a device with several stable states which
may be triggered from one state to the next, or
a cyclic store associated with a half-adder.
Note 1: Where the number stored in a counter
can be increased or decreased according
to a control signal, the term "reversible
counter" is used.
Note 2: Where the number stored in a counter reverts to zero in the sequence of counting
after reaching a maximum value N, the
counter is said to count modulo N.
table control
n. A method of specifying a volume of data that is
held in many locations, not necessarily sequential.
It is used for special input-output operations such
as scatter-read and gather-write. The table contains the locations of the various parts of the
data. Sometimes the size of each part is also held
in the table, sometimes in the data, and sometimes
implied by a delimiter. The data is addressed indirectly via the address of the first location holding the table.
,
A-U-ER-BA-CH-_"""/~
'I
5/62
7:241.230
. 23
enabling signal
n. A signal which allows an operation to take place
or a state to exist.
. 24
inhibiting signal
n. A signal which prevents an operation which might
otherwise take place.
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
.25
force
v. To intervene manually in a routine and change
the normal sequence of computer operations .
GLOSSARY
242
DATA OPERATIONS
.01
data operation
n. The derivation of an item or items, called the result, from one or more given items, called
operands, according to defined rules which
specify the result for any permissible combination of values of the operands.
Note: The term operands is also used collectively
- - for both operands and results, since the
results will often be operands in subsequent
operations.
. 02
dyadic operation
n. An operation on two operands.
Note: The operands and result need not be two- - state variables.
.03
seek
v. Examine a set of items for any that have a desired property.
. 04
search
v. Examine a set of items for any that have a de sired property.
.05
. 08
extract
v. Choose from a set of items a subset including
all those that meet some criterion; e. g., to
obtain certain specified characters from a
machine word.
.09
unpack
v. Recover the original data from packed data.
pre-edit
v. To edit input data prior to processing.
. 13
post-edit
v. Edit output data from a previous process .
.14
justify
v.I. Adjust the position of words on a printed
page so that the left or right hand margin
is regular.
2. By extension, shift an item in a location so
that the most or the least significant character is at some specified position in the register .
.15
zero suppression
n. The elimination of zeros which have no significance; e. g., those to the left of the integral
part of a number.
.16
clear
erase
v. Delete all data in a store by bringing all its cells
to a prescribed state.
. 17
zeroize
cancel
v. Replace the content of a store with the representation of zero .
.18
mask
n. A word of characters used for the purpose of
selecting or eliminating parts of other words.
v. Extract a selected group of characters from a
word.
.19
standardize
v. Replace any given floating-point representation
of a number with the representation in standard
form .
. 20
seq uence
v. Arrange items so that they are in the sequence
defined by some criterion of their keys. Often
the keys are groups of numbers or letters and
the items are arranged so that the keys of successive items are in numerical or alphabetical
sequence.
pack
v. Compress data in a store by taking advantage of
known Characteristics of the data in such a way
that the original data can be recovered: e. g. ,
to include two or more items in one or more
machine words by allocating groups of characters to the individuals items; to store only the
non-zero items of a table, those not stored
being assumed to be zero.
.10
.12
rearrange
v. Change the sequence of the items in a collection.
edit
v. Prepare data for a later operation. Editing may
involve the rearrangement or addition of data, the
deletion of unwanted data, format control, code
conversion, the application of standard processes
such as zero-suppression, and the control of layout for printing.
select
v. Take one of two or more alternative devices or
courses of action, perhaps according to the result of some test.
.07
.11
dichotomizing search
n. A search in which a numerically sequenced set
of items is divided into two parts, one of which is
rejected, and the process repeated until the items
with the desired property are found. If the number of items in the set is made even and then
divided into two equal parts, the search may ·be
known as a binary search; division of the set in
accordance with a Fibonacci series produces a
Fibonacci search; etc.
. 06
7:242.010
.21
sort
v. Segregate items into groups according to the
keys used to identify them or according to some
definite rules. "Pigeonholes", pockets or storage
locations are assigned in advance, and used to
collect items having like keys.
Note: Sorting does not in itself involve sequenc- - ing, for the "pigeon holes" may have any
arrangement whatsoever, but sorting is a
common prerequisite to sequencing.
5/62
STANDARD fDP REPORTS
7:242.220
.22
merge
v. To form
or more
Note 1:
Note 2:
. 23
a single sequenced file by combining two
similarly sequenced files.
See also Coalesce.
Repeated merging, splitting and remerging can be used to put items into sequence;
this process is sometimes called a
MERGING SORT but ought more strictly
to be called "sequencing by merging" .
See also Sequence and Sort •
coalesce
v. Combine two or more files into one file.
Note: See also Merge.
5/62
GLOSSARY
243
ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS
.01
arithmetic operation
n. An operation performed according to arithmetic
rules.
. 02
addition operation
n. In addition, the operands are the addend and the
augend; the result is the sum. The addend and
augend are distinquishable if the result appears
in the storage location previously occupied by
one of the operands; in this case, the displaced
operand is the augend and the surviving operand
is the addend.
.03
subtraction operation
n. In subtraction, the subtrahend is subtracted from
the minuend to form the difference.
.04
multiplication operation
n. In multiplication, the operands are the factors
or the multiplier and the multiplicand; the result
is the product. The multiplier and multiplicand
are distinguished in some methods of performing
multiplication by the fact that the product is
formed by repeated addition of the multiplicand
(or simple mUltiples of the multiplicand) in
accordance with the value of digits of the multiplier.
Note: The term multiplier is also used to mean
- - a device for performing multiplication.
.05
.06
division operation
n. In division, the dividend is divided by the divisor
to give the quotient and the remainder.
Note: There are differences in detail among the
- - results produced by different division
processes; although quotient and remainder
are always linked by the relationship
"dividend = divisor x -quotient + remainder"
their exact values are determined by the
precision required in the quotient, the rule
for terminating it (i. e ., whether truncated,
rounded-off, etc.) and the rules governing
the sign of the remainder. Thus quotient
and remainder may be regarded as less
precise terms than sum, difference or
product.
arithmetic shift
n. In radix notation, the displacement of the digits
of a word relative to the radix point, the sign
of the number being preserved, and round-off
being provided as required.
7:243.010
.07
.08
carry
n. 1. A signal, or expression, produced as a result of an arithmetical operation on one digit
position of two or more numbers in positional representation, and transferred to the
next more significant position for processing
there .
2. A signal or exprebsion as in 1 which arises
in adding when the sum of two digits in the
same position equals or exceeds the radix
of that position of the number representation
in use.
3. The signal which initiates the forwarding of
a carry.
4. The action of forwarding a carry.
Note 1: When a carry into a digit position results
in a carry-out of the same position, and
the normal adding circuit is bypassed
when generating this new carry, it is
called a high - speed carry, ripple - through
carry or, where appropriate, standingon-nines carry. When the normal adding circuit is used in such a case, it is
called a cascaded carry.
Note 2: When a carry reSUlting from the addition
of carries is not allowed to propagate,
it is called a partial carry. When it is
allowed to propagate, it is called a complete carry.
end-around carry
n. A carry that is sent directly from the most Significant digit position to the least significant
position; e.g., when using diminished radix
complements.
.09
borrow
n. In direct subtraction, a signal or expression as
in carry which arises when the difference between
the digits is less than zero.
. 10
overflow
v. In an arithmetical operation, generate a quantity
beyond the capacity of the register or location
which is to receive the result.
. 11
underflow
n. A generated quantity that is smaller than the
accepted minimum; e.g., floating point underflow.
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:244.010
244
LOGICAL OPERATIONS
_.01
logical operation
n. 1. An operation in which the operands and result are single digits; e. g., a comparison
operation on the 3 -state variables A and
B (each represented by -1, 0 or+ 1) which
yields -1 when A is less than B, 0 when A
equals Band +1 when A is greater than B.
2. By extension, an operation with operands
and result of any number of digits so that
each digit of the result depends on not more
than one digit of anyone operand. Usually
the same operation is performed on all
corresponding digits of the operands.
.02
5/62
Boolean operation
n. An operation depending on the application of
Boolean axioms. By extension, any operation
in which the operands and results take either
one of two values or states; i.e., any logical
operation on single binary digits.
Note: A Boolean operation may involve any
number of operands.
.03
compare
v. Examine the representations of two quantities to
discover identity or relative magnitude.
.04
logical comparison
n. The comparison of two words, character by
character.
.05
shift
v. Displace the characters of a word according to
some set of rules.
.06
logical shift
n. A non-arithmetical shift, e.g.:
1. A cyclic shift in which the characters that
leave from one end of a word are returned
to the other in a circular fashion.
2. A shift similar to an arithmetical shift
but in which the sign digit does not receive
special treatment and no round-off is provided.
7:251.010
GLOSSARY
251
WORKING
· 10
.01
working
n. The mode of execution of operations.
.02
serial
a. Dealing with the elements of a message, one
after another, in the same device.
.03
parallel
a. Dealing with the elements of a message concurrently, each element at its own site.
. 04
real- time
a. Operation of a processor which proceeds
1. at the same speed as events being simulated,
or
2. at sufficient speed to analyze, control or be
controlled by external events happening concurrently.
. 05
.06
. 07
.08
synchronous working
n. The performance of a sequence of operations
controlled by clock signals.
Note: A sequence of operations controlled
- - synchronously may form one of a sequence
of larger operations working asynchronously.
asynchronous working
n. The performance of a sequence of operations
such that each operation starts as a result
of a signal that the previous operations have
been completed or that the equipment required
for the next operation is now available.
Note: See note to synchronous working.
clock signal
clock pulses
clock
n. The basic repetitive signal used to control the
timing of all synchronous operations.
· 12
independent operation
n. An operation in a system that does not inhibit the
operation of any unit not directly concerned in
the operation.
· 13
multiplexed operations
n. Simultaneous operations that share the use of a
common unit in such a way that they can be considered as independent operations .
.14
microprogramming
n. A method of working in the control unit of a computer in which each instruction, instead of beihg
used to initiate control signals directly, is first
interpreted by a "program" (the microprogram)
which is inherent in the construction of the control unit (e. g., by the wiring of a ferrite core
matrix holding the microprogram.) This results
in the generation of control signals corresponding to the instruction.
.15
mUlti-sequencing
n. The simultaneous execution of several parts of
a routine by separate central processors .
.16
multi-processing
n. The operation of a computer configuration
using more than one central processor.
· 17
multi -running
n. A technique for handling numerous routines
simultaneously by overlapping or interleaving
their execution.
.18
reservation
n. The allocation of part of a system exclusively
to one of several routines in such a way as to
inhibit its use by any other of the routines.
Note: The parts of a system most commonly
- - reserved are peripheral units and locations •
.19
lock-out
n. An inhibition of any other reference to a particular part of an equipment during an operation
which uses that part. For example, during an
independent peripheral transfer, the locations
concerned may be locked out to prevent reference
to them until completion of the transfer.
on -line working
n. Operation of a unit of an automatic data processing system which is connected to the main part
of the system and which accepts the output of
another unit substantially as soon as that output
becomes available.
Note: The term is usually applied to peripheral
- - units and operations.
. 09
.11
hesitation
n. A brief suspension of a sequence of operations in
order to perform all or part of an operation from
another sequence. For example, during an
autonomous peripheral transfer of a block of data,
the periodic suspension of the operation of a
simultaneous routine in order to transfer each
word of the block in turn to or from the store.
simultaneous working
n. Any method of working an ADP system in which
more than one operation or sequence of operations
is executed at the same time.
Note: The term is applied only to the working
- - of a connected system; that is, one within
which all data flow is automatic.
partial overlapping
n. A restriction on one unit so that it cannot perform
simultaneous operations during specified intervals
of the operation of some other particular unit.
!
I AUERBACH I @
5/62
7:261.010
GLOSSARY
261
RELIABILITY
.01
reliability
n. The ability af a campanent, device, unit af equipment ar functianal sectian af a system to. perfarm to. a specified standard when required, withaut remedial actian.
Nate 1: Great care is needed when discussing
reliability to. insure that camparisans
are valid.
.09
Nate 2: Reliability may be measured as the prabability af no. failure in a specified periad,
with the usual difficulties af applying a
statistical measure to. an individual.
Nate 3: Reliability is sametimes appraised in
terms af the mean time between failures
and the mean repair time.
.10
.02
fault
n. The failure af a campanent, device, unit af equipment ar functianal sectian af a system to. perfarm
in the manner required aver the specified range
af enviranmental canditians.
. 03
carrective maintenance
n. Tests, measurements, replacements, adjustments and repai.rs effected to. clear a fault.
. 04
preventive maintenance
n. Tests, measurements, replacements, adjustments and repairs carried aut with the intentian
af preventing faults fram accurring during
subsequent aperatian.
.05
rautine maintenance
scheduled maintenance
n. Maintenance wark carried aut in accardance with
an established timetable; far example, preventive
maintenance.
Nate: Rautine maintenance is essentially periadic;
it is nat intended to. include accasianal
periads af maintenance wark dane to. fill
idle time ar to. carrect trends taward
paar perfarmance. (See supplementary
maintenance) .
.06
.07
supplementary maintenance
n. Maintenance wark, ather than carrective maintenance, dane autside the periads af rautine
maintenance by priar arrangement with the aperatar.
Nate: Supplementary maintenance is cammanly
- - dane either in time that wauld atherwise
have been classified as idle time ar after
narmal haurs, and is aften used to. intraduce minar madificatians aimed at improving reliability.
praving
v. Demonstrating either that a machine is free fram
faults ar that it is capable af perfarming particular tasks, usually by running a test rautine.
.08
.11
marginal testing
v. Testing narmally carried aut either as a part af
preventive maintenance ar as an aid to. fault
finding, where the aperatian af a piece af equipment is tested with its aperatian canditians altered to. decrease the safety margin against
faults; e. g., an amplifier may be required to.
give a certain minimum gain with reduced
heater valtage.
test rautine
n. A rautine designed to. reveal the presence af
faults.
Nate: Same test routines are also. diagnastic
rautines.
leapfrag test
n. A test rautine stored in locations' which are pragressively changed by the rautine itself in order
to test the stare.
proving time
n. Time spent in proving .
Nate 1: Time spent in proving after fault repair
shauld be included in repair time.
Nate 2: Time scheduled far praving (e.g., ance
a day) shauld be included in rautine
maintenance time .
Note 3: Any other praving time (e. g., by aperators prior to a run) may, for example,
be counted as incidentals time. (See
also Note 1 of "awaiting repair time. ")
.12
praductive time
n. Time spent in processing wark withaut faults o.r
errars.
Nate 1: This category does not include time spent
an the development af routines and operating pracedures, ar an training and
demonstratians.
Nate 2: See also. "operating delays" and "machine -spailed work time. "
.13
pragram develapment time
n. Time used in pragram testing, to. debug a rautine,
ar far trials af new ape rating procedures.
.14
incidentals time
n. Time used for training, demonstratians and
similar useful but not directly productive purposes ather than pragram development.
Nate: See Nate 3 to. "proving time."
. 15
ape rating delays
n. Time last due to. mistakes by aperatars ar users
afthe system: e.g., aperatars' mistakes.
.16
data delays
n. Time last due to errars in data due to mistakes
in the preparation ar arigin af the data.
\
'5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:261.170
· 17
· 18
· 19
. 20
. 21
5/62
idle time
n. Time when A.D.P. equipment is switched on but
not in use, and there is no reason to suppose
that a fault is present.
Note: A test routine may be run during idle time
- - to warn the operator should a fault occur.
awaiting repair time
n. The interval between the operator reporting a
suspected fault to the maintenance authority and
the engineer starting to trace and repair it, plus
a substantial period when the engineer is waiting
for materials, equipment, assistance, or advice.
Note 1: When investigation shows the computer
to have been free of faults, the time lost
should count as an operating delay.
Note 2: When no engineer is on duty, the time
from the occurrence of the fault until
the engineer reports for duty should
count as unattended time.
repair time
n. Time spent outside the periods allocated to routine maintenance and supplementary maintenance
in diagnosing and clearing faults, equipment
testing and maintenance.
Note: See Note 1 of "awaiting repair" and Note 1
- - of "proving time. "
--machine-spoiled work time
n. Time wasted on runs that are spoiled by faults.
Faults may not halt a run, but merely hamper it,
ca1,lsing it to over-run its schedule; any such extension of running time is also machine-spoiled
work time.
Note 1: See Note 2 of "awaiting repair time."
Note 2: The time lost in a run spoiled by a fault
depends on the program (e. g., frequency
of programed restarts) as well as on the
equipment, and so it may be convenient
to limit the contribution of anyone fault
event to machine-spoiled work time, say
to 30 minutes, any remainder being
counted under operating delays .
routine maintenance time
n. Time spent in routine maintenance.
Note: See Note 2 of "proving time."
. 22
supplementary maintenance time
n. Time spent in supplementary maintenance.
Note: See Note 2 of "installation time."
.23
external delays
n. Time lost due to circumstance outside the
reasonable control of the operator or maintenance engineer; for example, failure of the
public power supply, ambient conditions outside
the prescribed range, tampering, fires not due
to an EDP equipment fault.
.24
debatable time
n. Time lost due to unknown causes, for example,
where there is insufficient evidence to show
whether a transient fault, a program error, or
an operating mistake is responsible.
.25
installation time
n. Time spent in installing, commissioning testing,
and approving equipment intended to add facilities.
Note: Time spent in modifying existing equipment
- - to improve its reliability without adding to
the facilities offered is supplementary
maintenance time.
.26
unattended time
n. Time during which the equipment is switched
off and is not attended by maintenance engineers .
Note: See Note 2 of "awaiting repair time. "
.27
serviceability
n. An assessment of the reliability of A.D.P.
equipment.
Note 1: Use is often made of the serviceability
ratio which is the ratio of serviceable
time to the sum of serviceable time and
fault time, or of the availability ratio
which is the ratio of serviceable time to
the sum of serviceable time, fault time,
routine maintenance time and supplementary maintenance time.
7:262.010
GLOSSARY
262
ERRORS
. 01
error
n. 1. A qualitative discrepancy between an item or
.07
quantity and the correct version; e"g., one
due to the mutilation of a message m transmission.
,08
2. The quantitative discrepancy by which a calculated or measured result differs from the
true value.
Note 1: An error may be due to a fault.
Note 2: In statistics, the term "error" and derived terms are used in various closely
defined senses which are beyond the scope
of this glossary .
.06
truncation error
n. That part of an error due to truncation .
rounding error
n. That part of an error due to round-off.
bias
n. 1. An unbalanced error, that is, an error having
an average value that is not zero. Examples
are results produced by a shrunken measuring tape or, in computation, by a process of
truncation.
2 , A measure of the unbalance of errors.
3. The non-randomness of a distribution or sequence; e.g., of a file.
. 02
range of error
n. All possible values of the error of a particular
result.
. 09
accuracy
n, Size of error or of range of error. High accuracy
implies small error.
.03
span of error
n. The difference between the highest and lowest
in the range of the error.
.10
, 04
balanced error
n. 1. A range of error in which the maximum and
minimum possible errors are opposite in
sign and equal in magnitude.
2. A range of error of which the average value
is zero.
,05
absolute error
n. The magnitude of the error, irrespective of sign.
precision
n. The degrees of discrimination or amount of detail with which a quantity is stated; e, g., a 2decimal-digit result discriminates between one
hundred possible results.
Note: A result may have more precision than it
has accuracy; e. g., the true value of "
to eight decimal figures in 3.1415927; the
expression" = 3.1415249 is preCise to
eight figures but accurate only to about
five significant figures,
A
,..-A-U-ER-BA-CH-_-:-'~
5/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
7:263.010
263 . CHECKS
.01
check
n. A partial or complete test for:
1. the absence of errors in a set of data, or
2. the correct performance of a group of
machine operations.
v. Determine whether data or a process passes a
test.
. 02
verify
v. Check data, especially after a transfer or
transcription involving manual processes.
. 03
.04
redundancy check
n. A check that uses extra check digits, which do not
themselves fully represent the data concerned.
.11
· 12
.13
transfer check
n. A check, usually an automatic check, of the transfer of data, e. g., by temporarily storing, retransmitting and comparing.
.14
control total
check total
check sum
n. A total of a set of items used as a check.
Note: The term check total is usually reserved
for totals which have some significance
independent of the checking process; e.g.,
in payroll, the totaled tax deductions for
a group of employees. When a control total has no such independent significance,
it is called a "hash total"; e.g., in payroll,
the sum of the employees' pay numbers •
· 15
proof total
n. One of a number of control totals which can be
combined with others to check consistency, e. g. ,
in payroll, the total gross pay of a group of employees' their totaled deductions and their total
net pay may be derived as three separate control
totals, and also used as proof totals by checking
that total gross pay less total deductions equals
total net pay.
.16
echo checking
n. A method of checking the accuracy of transmission
of data.in which the received data are returned to
the sending end for comparison with the original
data, which are stored there for this purpose.
· 17
validity check
n. A checking technique based on known limits for
data; e. g., a man cannot work 400 hours in one
week, there is no day 32 in a month •
.18
reasonableness check
n. A checking technique based on reasonable limits
for data; e. g., a man's age is unlikely to be
greater than 70 years on a payroll record •
alarm
n. A signal made to an operator to warn him of an
interlock or check failure that has occurred;
e. g., a warning lamp or buzzer.
check digit
n. A digit associated with a word or part of a word
for the purpose of checking the absence of error.
.05
check bit
n. A binary check digit.
.06
summation check
sum check
n. A check in which groups of digits are summed,
usually without regard for overflow, and the result compared with a previously-computed value
called the check sum.
. 07
sum -check digit
n. A check digit produced by a summation check.
. 08. parity check
n. A summation check using modulus two; e.g., a
check which tests whether the number of ones
in a group of binary digits is odd.
Note 1. The number of zeros may be used in
place of the number of ones.
Note 2. Alternatively, the number of ones (or
zeros) may be required to be even.
Note 3. When the numbers of ones (or zeros) is
required to be odd, the check is called
an odd parity check, and when even, an
even parity check.
.09
parity check bit
n. A check bit used in a parity check.
. 10
parity bit
n. A bit appended to an array of bits to make
the sum of all the bits either odd or even, as
nominated.
.
. 19
5/62
residue check
modulo 'N' check
n. A check of numerical data or arithmetical operations in which each number 'A' is divided by 'N',
and the remainder'S' accompanies A as a check
digit or digits; e.g., in a modulo 4 check, Swill
be either 0, 1, 2 or 3, and if the remainder when
A is divided by 4 does not equal S, an error is
indicated.
Note: The well-known arithmetical method of
'casting out nines' is a modulo 9 check .
automatic check
built-in check
n. Any facility provided in the equipment for performing a check automatically .
COMPARISON CHARTS
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
-
~
11:001. 001
Sf ......
~'EDP
AUERBAC~
COMPARISON CHARTS
CONTENTS
REruTS
~
COMPARISON CHARTS
CONTENTS
Quick Reference Index to the Charts. . • • . • • • • • . . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••
11:001. 002
Configuration Rentals. . • . . • . • • • • • • • • . • . • • . . • • • . • • . • • . . • • • . • • ••
11:010.101
Hardware Characteristics Central Processors and Working Storage. . . •
Auxiliary Storage and Magnetic Tape. • • • . • •
Punched Card and Punched Tape Input-Output.
Other Input-Output Equipment .'.... • • • • • .
••
••
••
••
11:210.101
11:220.101
11:230.101
11:240.101
System Performance ...•••.••..••••••••••••••..•••.•..••.•••.
11:400.101
.
.
•
•
.
•
.
•
.
.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
.
.
•
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
.
.
•
.
•
•
•
•
.
.
.
•
•
.
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
•
(
"
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
-1.
11:001. 002
S1"''''
.fIQ,~ EDP
-
COMPARISON CHARTS
QUICK REFERENCE INDEX
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
~
QUICK REFERENCE INDEX TO THE COMPARISON CHARTS
The table below will guide you quickly to the exact pages on which you will find all the entries
describing the hardware characteristics and system perform~nce of any of the computer systems
currently included in the AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports Comparison Charts. (Note that the
Configuration Rentals for all systems are on Pages 11:010.102 and 11:010.103.)
System Identity
Central
Processor and
Working
Storage
Auxiliary
Storage and
Magnetic
Tape
Punched Card
and
Punched Tape
Input-Output .
Other
Input-Output
Equipment
System
Performance
Comparisons
Burroughs B 100/200/300
Burroughs B 5500
Burroughs B 2500/3500
CDC 160-A
CDC 1604-A
11:210.102
11:210.102
11:210.103
11:210.104
11:210.104
11:220.102
11:220.103
11:220.103
11:220.104
11:220.104
11:230.102
11:230.102
11:230.102
11:230.103
11:230.103
11:240.102
11:240.102
11:240.102
11 :240.103
11:240.103
CDC 3000 Series
CDC 6000 Series
GE-115
GE-200 Series
GE-400 Series
11:210.104
11:210.106
11:210.107
11:210.108
11:210.109
11:220.105
11:220.106
11:220.109
11:220.109
11:220.109
11:230.103
11:230.104
11:230.104
11:230.104
11:230.105
11:240.103
11:240.104
11:240.104
11:240.105
11:240.105
11:400.102
11:400.102
GE-600 Series
Honeywell Series 200
Honeywell 400/1400
Honeywell 800/1800
IBM 1130
11:210.107
11:210.110
11:210.111
11:210.111
11:210.113
11:220.108
11:220.109
11:220.109
11:220.110
11:220.110
11:230.105
11:230.105
11:230.106
11:230.106
11:230.106
11:240.105
11:240.106
11:240.106
11:240.106
11:240.108
11:400.104
11:400.104
11:400.104
11:400.104
11:400.106
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
360, Mod 20-75
360, Mod 44
360, Mod 67
704/709
1400 Series
11:210.112
11:210.113
11:210.113
11:210.114
11:210.114
11 :220.110
11 :220.110
11:220.110
11 :220.112
11 :220.112
11:230.107
11:230.108
11:230.107
11:230.108
11:230.109
11:240.107
11:240.108
11:240.107
11:240.109
11:240.109
11:400.104
11 :400.104
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
1620
7010
7040/7044
7070/7072/7074
7080
11:210.116
11:210.117
11:210.117
11:210.118
11:210.119
11:220.113
11:220.113
11:220.114
11:220.114
11:220.114
11 :230.112
11:230.110
11:230.110
11:230.111
11:230.111
11 :240. III
11:240.111
11:240.111
11:240.112
11:240.112
11:400.106
11:400.106
11:400.106
11:400.106
11:400.106
IBM 7090/7094
LGP-30
Monrobot XI
NCR 315 Series
PB 250
11:210.119
11:210.120
11:210.120
11:210.121
11:210.121
11:220.115
11:220.115
11:220.115
11:220.116
11:220.116
11:230.111
11:230.112
11 :230.112
11:230.113
11:230.113
11 :240.112
11:240.113
11:240.113
11:240.114
11:240.113
11:400.106
11:400.106
11:400.106
11:400.106
11:400.106
Philco 2000
RCA Spectra 70
RCA 301/3301
RPC-4000
UNIVAC SS 80/90
11:210.122
11:210.123
11:210.124
11:210.125
11:210.125
11:220.116
11:220.117
11:220.117
11 :220.118
11:220.119
11:230.114
11:230.115
11:230.114
11:230.116
11:230.116
11:240.114
11 :240.115
11:240.115
11:240.116
11:240.117
11:400.108
11:400.108
11:400.108
11:400.108
11:400.110
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
11:210.126
11:210.126
11:210.127
11:210.126
11:210.127
11:220.119
11:220.120
"11:220.121
11:220.122
11:220.122
11:230.116
11:230.117
11:230.118
11:230.117
11:230.117
11:240.117
11:240.117
11:240.118
11:240.118
11:240.118
11:400.110
11 :400.110
11:400.110
11:400.110
11:400.110
11:210.128
11:210.128
11:210.128
11:220.122
11 :220.123
11 :220.120
11:230.118
11:230.118
11:230.119
11:240.119
11 :240.119
11:240.119
11:400.110
11:400.110
III
418
490 Series
1004
1050
UNIVAC 1107
UNIVAC 1108
UNIVAC 9000 Series
9/66
IA
AUERBACH
'"
11:400.102
11:400.102
-
11:400.102
11:400.102
11:400.102
11:400.102
-
-
11:400.106
11:400.106
-
/
-.&.
11:010.101
IA
-
.
AUERBAC~
"''''10
COMPARISON CHARTS
CONFIGURATION RENTALS
EDP
REruns
CONFIGURATION RENTALS, DOLLARS PER MONTH
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:010.102
COMPARISON CHARTS
CONFIGURATION RENTALS, DOLLARS PER MONTH
Card
SYSTEM
IDENTITY
Burroughs B 100
Bur.....gh. B 200
Burroughs B 300
Burroughs B 2500
Burroughs B 3600
Burroughs B 5500
CDC 160-A
CDC IG04-A
CDC 3100
CDC 3200
CDC
CDC
CDC
CDC
CDC
2,510
4,526
Business
4-Tape
8-Tape
Dualne8s
12-Tape
BuafDes8
D
DI
IV
4,690
5,896
I-Tape
AuxUJary
Storage
V
8,840
10,070
12,260
23,340
10,042
25.250
6-Tape Buslnes8/Sclent1fic
Iategrated
Paired
VI
vm
4,796
9,485
5,980
8,280
3300
3400
3600
6400
13,385
13,925
12,852
34,525
10.885
12.695
33.895
30,565
8.325
12,805
15.120
35.107
25,555
58.599
6600
CDC 6800
GE-U5
2,175
4,885
5.115
GE-215
GE-225
GE-235
GE-415
GE-425
6.250
7,450
ll,870
16,620
18.385
10,075
12,855
14.590
7,375
10,155
4.625
5,875
6,350
7,610
7,900
8.850
11,350
13,385
14,335
16.835
9.950
10.900
13.400
3,630
3,885
4,745
3.415
4,785
6,645
6,030
7,145
7,570
8,545
15,565
13,925
14,125
15,305
21,250
8.150
8,575
9.550
16,570
7.615
U,150
9,805
12,290
20,980
GE-435
GE-625
OE-G3S
Honeywell 120
Honeywell 200
Honeywell 1200
Honeywell 2200
Honeywell 4200
Honeywell 8200
Honeywell 400
Honeywe111400
Honeywell 800
Honeywell 1800
Model
Model
Model
Model
25.329
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
360,
360.
360,
360.
360.
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
360. Model 65
360, Model 75
704
709
1130
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
1401
1401-0
1410
1440
1460
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
1620-1
1620-U
7010
7740
7044
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
7070
7072
7074
7080
7090
M~el
20
30
40
44
50
IBM 7094-1
LOP-3D
Monrobot Xl
NCR 315
NCR 315-100
2,300
4,005
3,475
4,600
6,890
301
3301
Spectra 70/15
Spectra 70/25
Spectra 70/35
RCA Spectra 70/45
RCA Spectra 70/55
RPC-4000
UNIVAC SS 80/90-1
UNIVAC SS 80/90-D
10,085
11.300 .
11,215
20,565
U,005
14.530
20,329
30,100
11.100
10.315
14,785
28,450
1.275
4,330
2,376
6,115
3,295
5,920
10,830
11.540
13.330
8,415
4.050
12,240
5,920
11.736
19,080
15,365
7,970
13,975
15,790
19,175
27,225
22.220
22,175
20.715
19,400
24,785
23.450
24,700
29,860
34,175
64,060
69,960
800
5,700
5,000
6,925
4.350
4,271
5,084
3,400
4,700
6,865
6,305
4,830
4,325
7,125
8,640
UNIVACm
UNIVAC 418
UNIVAC 490
UNIVAC 491/492
UNIVAC 494
1004
1050
ll07
1108
9200
1,800
3,470
UNIVAC 9300
1,860
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
6,685
7,800,
14,785
NCR 315 RMC
PB 250
PhUco 2000-210
Phllco 2000-211
Phllco 2000-212
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
12,715
10,085
2,726
6,030
8,145
19,290
9,795
ll,345
20,490
12,995
9.687
11,390
20,290
18.940
12,777
14,865
6,465
6,905
12,265
9,255
9,005
8,450
13,430
13.950
18,330
11,275 16,255
10,250
13,430
7,400
9.540
15,940
9,900
11,140
13,040
19,000
7,125
19,780
13,345
26,765
20,400
6,860
18,270
12.880
14,265
11.426
25,830
18,345
31.015
12,500
39,740
1,235
4,476
Note: The Indicated rentals were those In effect when the Computer System Report on each system was last revised. Some of the older
computer systems are now offered at lower prices; consult manufacturers I representatives for details.
9/66
fA
AUERBACH
'"
(Contd.)
11:010.103
CONFIGURATION RENTALS
I\
CONFIGURATION RENTALS. DOLLARS PER MONTH (CONT'D.)
"-
la-Tape General
SYSTEM
IDENTITY
20-Tape General
Integrated
Paired
Integrated
Patred
Desk Size
Scientific
VUA
VUB
VnlA
VniB
IX
Punched
Tape/Card
Scientific
X
4-Tape
Scientinc
XI
Burroughs B 100
Burroughs B 200
Burroughs B 300
Burroughs B 2500
n 3500
15,410
Burroughs B 5500
30,995
28,705
16,030
38.637
15.885
Burroughs
CDC 160-A
CDC 1604-A
CDC 3100
2,902
4,212
54,265
CDC 3200
18,310
17.715
CDC 3300
INA
CDC 3400
CDC 3600
30,930
INA
31.859
CDC 6400
34,000
CDC 6600
58,050
47.145
71,195
CDC 6800
57.740
70,885
49,330
73.tl0
61.899
GE-115
GE-215
GE-225
GE-235
GE-41S
14.630
15,780
GE-425
GE-435
\
'-.
(
,
'--
GE-625
19,180
34.105
GE-635
34.755
Honeywell
Honeywell
Honeywell
Honeywell
Honeywell
120
200
}2oo
2200
4200
Honeywell
Honeywell
Honeywell
Honeywell
Honeywell
8200
400
1400
800
1800
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
360,
360.
360,
360,
360,
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
360, Model 65
360, Model 75
704
709
1130
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
1401
1401-G
1410
1440
1460
23.560
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
1620-1
1620-ll
7010
7040
7044
28,355
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
7070
7072
7074
7060
7090
29,755
32.915
40,465
51.745
66.770
45,030
49.890
72.840
79.325
89,215
IBM 7094-1
LPG-30
Monrobot XI
NCR 315
NCR 315-100
72.395
95.065
-
.'
i
\
"---....
15,080
17,515
21,590
15,125
16,925
21.165
20
30
40
44
50
36.079
37.050
28.475
37.575
13,730
18.775
20,885
32,525
46,315
43.600
49.700
301
3301
Spectra 70/15
Spectra 70/25
Spectra 70/35
34,895
48.655
36.830
54.000
56,900
9,320
49.'Z90
62.130
33,835
46,175
48.157
53.770
28,150
63,300
33,765
38.315
52,315
21.265
1.100
885
1.365
1,675
2.455
1.750
2.450
4,745
12.930
25.000
17.875
31.270
23.715
32,715
48,120
41.915
47.165
47.990
45.245
58.395
1004
1050
1107
1108
9200
3.580
4,275
21.604
m
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
2.455
3,fl90
53.025
64,475
87,145
13,775
16.830
418
490
491/492
494
69,045
47,145
56.645
27,190
36.690
RCA Spectra 70/45
RCA Spectra 70/55
RPC-4000
UNIVAC SS 80/90-1
UNIVAC S8 80/90-U
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
46.925
56,025
1.080
NCR 315 RMC
PB 250
Philco 2000-210
Philco 2000-211
PhUco 2000-212
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
~,
49,165
49.915
15.700
19.080
32.945
36.730
61.890
UNIVAC 9300
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
-1.
11:210.101
STm .. ,
fI£;1~ EDP
AUERBAC~
~
UPOll5
COMPARISON CHARTS
HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS:
CENTRAL PROCESSORS AND
WORKING STORAGE
HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS COMPARISON CHARTS
CENTRAL PROCESSORS AND WORKING STORAGE
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:210.102
COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
,
Burroughs B 5500
201:
201:
203:
Binary Bits
6 + parity
6 + parity
48 + parity
1
1
14
Characters
1
1
8
Radix
-------
Floating Point
Representation
Fraction Size
Exponent Size
B 160, 170, 180, 250, 251,
260 270 280
Model Number
---
Binary
---
39 bits + sign
---
6 bits + Sign
B 263, 273, 275, 283, 300
B 5281
Arithmetic Radix
Decimal
Decimal
Binary, decimal
Operand Length. Words
1 to 12 char
1 to 12 char
lor 2 words, or 1 to 63 char
Instruction Length, Words
12 char
12 char
1/4
Addresses per Instruction
3
3
lor 0
c =a +b
690
414
17
c =ab
6,270
3,762
44
c = alb
14,630
8,802
76
c = a +b
-----
44
Parity
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
Times, /lsec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
./
---
-------
Checking of Data Transfers
Parity
Parity
Program Interrupt Facility
None
None
Yes, with priority scheme
Number of Index Registers
None
None
3 (non-conventional)
Indirect Addressing
None
None
One level
Special Editing Capabilities
Good
Good
Good
Boolean Operations
None
None
AND, INC OR, EXC OR
Table Look-up
None
None
Good
Console Typewriter
None
Optional
Yes
Input-Output Channels
1 integrated nonsimultaneous channel
1 integrated nonsimultaneous channel
1 to 4 "floating" among
peripheral device control units
Features and Comments
Most input-output
units are buffered
Most input-output
units are buffered
B 5500. is faster, expanded
version of original B 5000
Model Number
B 160, 170, 180, 250, 251,
260 270 280
B 263, 273
275 or 283
B 300
B460
B 461
Type of Storage
Core
Core
Core
Core
Core
Minimum
4,800
4,800
4,800
4,096
4,096
Maximum
4,800
19,200
19,200
32,768
32,768
Decimal Digits
4,800
19,200
28,800
458,752
458,752
Characters
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, p.sec
c = ab
c =a/b
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
Burroughs B 200/300 Series
6-/lsec Processor
Decimal Digits
Word Length
DATA
STRUCTURE
Burroughs B 100/200 Series
10-/lsec Processor
17
76
Number of Words
Maximum
Total Storage
WORKING
STORAGE
4,800
19,200
19,200
262,144
262,144
Cycle Time, /lsec
10
6
6
6
4
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
48,000
80,000
80,000
353,000
444,000
Checking
Parity
Parity
Parity
Parity
Parity
Storage Protection
None
None
Yes, using limit registers
B 300 uses optional Data
Compress Instruction to pack
decimal digits
Each of up to eight 4, 096-word
modules operates independently
of the others
Features and Comments
* WIth optIOnal eqUIpment.
(s) Using subroutine.
9/66
A
AUERBACH
5,857,000
max.
Read and write Read and write
Interleaving
improves
sequential
access rate
Features and Comments
9/66
COMPARISON CHARTS
I
Interleaving
improves
sequential
access rate
CENTRAL PROCESSORS AND WORKING STORAGE
11:210.113
IBM System/360 Model 44
IBM System/360 Model 67
IBM 1130
435,
427:
418,
32 + 4 parity
8 per byte
16 +parity
9.2
2 per byte
4.3
4
1 per byte
2
Binary
Binary
Binary
24,32,40,48 or 56 bits
24 or 56 bits
23 or 31 (s)
Fraction Size
7 bits
7 bits
8 (s)
Exponent Size
2044
2067
1131
Binary
Binary, decimal
Binary
1 or 1/2 word
Variable
lor 2
Operand Length, Words
lor 1/2 word
2, 4 or 6 bytes
lor 2
lnstruction Length, Words
.
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Binary Bits
Word Length
Decimal Digits
Characters
DATA
STRUCTURE
Radix
Floating Point
Representation
Model Number
2
0,1 or 2
1
13.0; 7.0*
4.2 or 9.7
23.2
26.3; 20.5*
7.7 or 33
44.5
41. 0; 33.8*
12 or 48
98.4
18.8 or 11.6*
5.4 or 5.5
460 (s)
Arithmetic Radix
Addresses per lnstruction
c
c
73.6 or 21.8*
6.8 or 10.4
560 (s)
137. 5 or 31. 0*
10.0 or 16.9
766 (s)
Parity
Parity
Parity
Yes, 5 classes
Yes, 5 classes
Yes,
~ab
~
c
c
+b
~a
alb
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
Times, Ilsec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
a +b
~
c
~
ab
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, IJsec
I/o only
16
25 max.
3
None
Yes; 8-register
associative memory
One level
Restricted
Good
None
AND, INC OR, EXC OR
AND, INC OR, EXC OR
AND, INC OR, EXC OR
None
None
None
Standard
Optional
Standard
1 multiplexor channel with
64 subchannels; l*or 2*highspeed multiplexor channels
1 to 4 Channel Controllers;
up to 7 sele ctor or multiplexor channels per
controller
1 or 2 are standard,
depending on processor
model; a 3rd is optional
c
~
alb
Checking of Data Transfers
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
Program lnterrupt Facility
Number of lndex Registers
lndirect Addressing
Special Editing Capabilities
Boolean Operations
Table Look-Up
Console Typewriter
lnput-Output Channels
Limited program compatibility Special hardware facilitates
with other System/360 models time-sharing operations
Most instructions can be in
either I-word or 2-word format
2044
2067
1131
Model Number
Core
Core
Core
Type of Storage
Features and Comments
8, 192 4-byte words
262, 144 bytes
4,096
Minimum
65, 536 4-byte words
2,097,152
8,192
Maximum
524,288
4,194,304
36,800
Decimal Digits
262,144
2,097,152
16,384
Characters
1. 0 per 4-byte word
0.75 per 8 bytes
3.6
Number of Words
(,
Maximum Total
Storage
Cycle Time, IlSe C
121,200 max.
4,760, 000 max.
92,500
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
Parity
Parity
Parity
Checking
Read* and write*
Read and write
None
Standard general registers are
in extended core storage; High- 1 to 8 independent 262K
modules per system
Speed Registers are optional
Some processor models include
an integral 512, OOO-word
Disk File
WORKING
STORAGE
Storage Protection
Features and Comments
',--
* With optional equipment.
(s) Usirig subroutine.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:210.114
COMPARISON CHARTS
IBM 704
IBM 709
IBM 1401
406:
407:
401:
Binary Bits
36
36
6 + parity + word mark
Decimal Digits
10.5
10.5
1
Characters
6
6
1
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Word Length
DATA
STRUCTURE
Floating Point
Representation
Radix
Binary
Binary
Decimal
Fraction Size
27 bits + sign
27 bits + sign
8 digits (s)
Exponent Size
8 bits
8 bits
2 digits (s)
Model Number
704
709
1401
Arithmetic Radix
Binary
Binary
Decimal
Operand Length, Words
1
1
1 to N char
Instruction Length, Words
1
1
1 to 8 char
Addresses per Instruction
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
Times, Ilsec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
Likely Floating
Point Execution
1
1
2
72
72
437
ab
288
238
21, 216(s); 2, 280*
alb
288
288
27, 730(s) ; 2, 784*
156 ± 24
125
8,800(s)
252
218
8,600 (s)
c
~
a +b
c
~
c
~
c
~a
c
~ab
c
~
+b
Times, ,",sec
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
alb
264
264
12,700 (s)
Checking of Data Transfers
None
None
Parity, char validity
Program Interrupt Facility
Yes, limited
Yes
None
Number of Index Registers
3
3
3'
Indirect Addressing
No
One level
None
Special Editing Capabilities
None
None
Good; excellent'
Boolean Operations
AND, OR, NOT
AND, INC OR, EXC OR, NOT
None
Table Look-up
None
None
None
Console Typewriter
No
No
Optional
Input-Output Channels
1 integrated simultaneous channel
1 to 6, plus 2 integrated
channels for drum and
CRT devices
1 integrated non-simultaneous channel; buffered
printing*
Features and Comments
No longer In production
No longer in production
ProceSSing Overlap' Feature
permits 1 II 0 operation
while computing
Model Number
737-1,
n7-2
Type of Storage
737-1,
17!l7-?
738
738
1401 & 1406
Core
Core
Core
Core
Core
Minimum
4,096
32,768
4,096
32,768
1,400
Number of Words
Maximum
Total Storage
WORKING
STORAGE
Maximum
4,096
32,768
4,096
32,768
16,000
De cimal Digits
43,008
344,064
43,008
344,064
16,000
Characters
24,576
196,608
24,576
196,608
16,000
12
12
12
12
11. 5
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec. , 125,000 max.
125,000 max.
125,000 max.
125,000 max.
43,500
Checking
None
None
None
None
Parity
Storage Protection
None
Cycle Time, Ilsec
Limited, using ESNT instruction None
Features and Comments
* With optional equipment.
(s) Using subroutine.
9/66
IA
.,
AUERBACH
!
/
CENTRAL PROCESSORS AND WORKING STORAGE
IBM 1401-G
IBM 1410
11:210.115
IBM 1440
System Identity
401:
402:
414:
6 + parity + word mark
6 + parity + word mark
6 + parity + word mark
1
1
1
Decimal Digits
Characters
Computer System Report No.
Binary Bits
1
1
1
---
Decimal
Decimal
-----
8 digits (s)
8 digits (s)
Fraction Size
2 digits (s)
2 digits (s)
Exponent Size
1401-G
1411
1441A
Word Length
DATA
STRUCTURE
Radix
Floating Point
Representation
Model Number
Arithmetic Radix
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
1 to N char
1 to N char
1 to N char
Operand Length. Words
1 to 8 char
1 to 12 char
1 to 8 char
Instruction Length, Words
2
2
2
Addresses per Instruction
437
226
422
21,216 (s)
1,206
20,500 (s); 2,200*
27,730 (s)
2,440
26,800 (s); 2,690*
c =a +b
c =ab
c =a/b
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
Times, /lsec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
---
3,999 (a)
8,500 (s)
c =a +b
---
5,430 (a)
8,300 (s)
c =ab
---
8,790 (s)
12,250 (s)
c =a/b
Parity, char validity
Parity, char validity
Parity, char validity
Checking of Data Transfers
None
Yes, * with priority scheme
Program Interrupt Facility
None
15
Only for 1448 Transmission
Control Unit
3*
None
None
None
Good; excellent*
Excellent
Good; excellent *
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, ",sec
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
Number of Index Registers
Indirect Addressing
Special Editing Capabilities
None
None
None
Boolean Operations
None
Good
None
Table Look-up
None
Yes
Optional
1 integrated non-simultaneous
channel
1 integrated non-simultaneous
channel is standard; a second
is optional, as Is Processing
Overlap
1 integrated non-simultaneous
channel; buffered prlnting*
Program-compatible with
IBM 1401, except input-output
Speeds are about 23% higher
with Accelerator feature
Console TYPewriter
Input-Output Channels
Features and Comments
Model Number
1401-G
1411
1441A
Core
Core
Core
1,400
10,000
2,000
Minimum
Type of Storage
Number of Words
\
4,000
80,000
16,000
Maximum
4,000
80,000
16,000
Decimal Digits
4,000
80,000
16,000
Characters
11. 5
4.5; 4.0*
11. 1
43,500
111,000
45,000
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
Parity
Parity
Parity
Checking
None
None
None
Maximum Total
Storage
Cycle Time, /lsec
WORKING
STORAGE
Storage Protection
Features and Comments
* WIth optlOnal eqUlpment.
(s) Using subroutine.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:210.116
COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Word Length
DATA
STRUCTURE
Floating Point
Representation
IBM 1620 Modell
IBM 1620 Model 2
415:
412:
413:
Binary Bits
6 + parity + word mark
4 + parity + flag
4 + parity + flag
Decimal Digits
1
1
1
Characters
1
0.5
0.5
Radix
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Fraction Size
8 digits (s)
2 to 100 digits
2 to 100 digits
Exponent Size
2 digits (s)
2 digits
2 digits
Model Number
1441B
1620 Modell
1620 Model 2
Arithmetic Radix
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
oPerand Length, Words
1 to N char
2 to N digits
2 to N digits
Instruction Length, Words
1 to 8 char
12 digits
12 digits
Addresses per Instruction
2
2
2
228
920
280
c =ab
11,100(s) ; 1,190*
5,320
1,350
c = alb
14,500(s); 1,450*
66,900(s); 17,700*
3,638
c =a +b
4,600(s)
28, 500(s); 1,760*
541*
c = ab
4,500(s)
S6, 700(s); is,100*
S,295*
c = alb
6,600(s)
88, 700(s) ; 41, 700*
8,960·
Checking of Data Transfers
Parity, char valldlty
Parity
Parity
Program Interrupt Facility
Only for 1448 Transmission
Control Unit
None
None
Number of Index Registers
3*
None
None
Indirect Addressing
None
Yes·
Yes
Special Editing Capabilities
Good; excellent *
None
None
Boolean Operations
None
None
None
Table Look-up
None
None
None
Console Typewriter
Optional
Yes
Yes
Input-Output Channels
1 non-simultaneous channel;
Processing Overlap and
buffered printing*
1 'integrated nonsimultaneous
channel
1 integrated nonsimultaneous
channel
Features and Comments
Program-compatible
with IBM 1401
Model Number
1441B
1620, 1623
1625
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
Times, !,sec (5
Digits Min.
Precisio.n)
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, flsec
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
IBM 1460
c =a +b
Type of Storage
Core
Core
Core
Minimum
8,000
20,000
20,000
Number of Words
Maximum
Total Storage
WORKING
STORAGE
Maximum
16,000
60,000
60,000
Decimal Digits
16,000
60,000
60,000
Characters
16,000
SO,OOO
SO,OOO
Cycle Time, !,sec
6.0
20
10
Effective Transfer Rate, char I sec.
83, SOO
12,500
3S,300
Checking
Parity
Parity
Parity
Storage Protection
None
None
None
2 digits represent 1
alphameric character
2 digits represent 1
alphameric character
Features and Comments
* WIth optIOnal eqUIpment.
(s) Using subroutine.
9/66
A ..
AUERBACH
/
CENTRAL PROCESSORS AND WORKING STORAGE
11:210.117
IBM 7010
IBM 7040
IBM 7044
416:
410:
411:
6 + parity + word mark
36 + parity
36 +parity
1
10.5
10.5
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Binary Bits
Word Length
De cimal Digits
1
6
6
Decimal
Binary
Binary
8 digits (s)
27 or 54 bits
27 or 54 bits
Fraction Size
2 digits (s)
8 bits
8 bits
Exponent Size
7114
7106
7107
Characters
DATA
STRUCTURE
Radix
Floating Point
Representation
Model Number
Arithmetic Radix
Decimal
Binary
Binary
1 to N char
1
1
Operand Length, Words
1 to 12 char
1
1
Instruction Length, Words
2
1
1
Addresses per Instruction
56
48
12
c =a +b
431
72
32
c =ab
925
94
48
c =a/b
Like Iy Fixed
Point Execution
Times, /lsec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
1,590 (s)
56*
19*
c =a + b
2,175 (s)
67*
28*
c = ab
3,495 (s)
88*
44*
Parity, char validity
Parity
Parity
Checking of Data Transfers
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, IJsec
c = alb
Yes, with priority scheme
Yes, with fixed priorities
Yes, with fixed priorities
Program Interrupt Facility
15
3*
3*
Number of Index Registers
None
One level
One level
Excellent
None
None
None
AND, INC OR, EXC OR, NOT
AND, INC OR, EXC OR, NOT
Good
None
None
Octal pushbuttons
Octal pushbuttons
1 channel is standard; a
se cond is optional
o to
4; most low-speed I/O
devices operate in buffered
mode
o to 4; most low-speed I/O
devices operate in buffered
mode
Program-compatible with
IBM 1410
Can be directly coupled to
an IBM 7090 or 7094
Program -compatible with
IBM 7040
7114
7106
7107
Model Number
Core
Core
Core
Type of Storage
40,000
4,096
8,192
Minimum
100,000
32,768
32,768
Maximum
100,000
344,064
344,064
Decimal Digits
100,000
196,608
196,608
Characters
2. 4 (per 2 characters)
8.0
2.0
356,000
375,000
1,200,000
Parity
Parity
Parity
None
Yes*
Yes*
Yes
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
Indirect Addressing
Special Editing Capabilities
Boolean Operations
Table Look-up
Console Typewriter
Input-Output Channels
Features and Comments
Number of Words
I
Cycle time was 2. 5 /lsec
prior to April 1, 1964
Maximum Total
Storage
Cycle Time, /lsec
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
WORKING
STORAGE
Checking
Storage Protection
Features and Comments
"-* WIth optIOnal eqUIpment.
(s) Using subroutine.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:210.118
COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
IBM 7070
Computer System Report No.
IBM 7074
403:
404:
405:
Binary Bits
50 + 3 sign
50 + 3 sign
50 + 3 sign
Decimal Digits
10 + sign
10 + sign
10 + sign
Characters
5
5
5
Radix
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Fraction Size
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
Exponent Size
2 digits
2 digits
2 digits
Model Number
7601
7105
7104
Arithmetic Radix
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Operand Length. Words
1 to 10 digits
1 to 10 digits
1 to 10 digits
Instruction Length. Words
1
1
1
Addresses per Instruction
1
1
1
156
36
24
84
72
Word Length
DATA
STRUCTURE
Floating Point
Representation
Like ly Fixed
Point Execution
Times. !,sec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
c
~
c
~ab
660
c
~
1,820
115
103
c
~a
324*
44
32*
c
~
ab
1,150*
84
72*
c
~a/b
2,540*
110
98*
Checking of Data Transfers
Fixed count
Fixed count
Fixed count
Program Interrupt Facility
Yes, with priority scheme
Yes, with priority scheme
Yes, with· priority scheme
Number of Index Registers
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, JJsec
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
IBM 7072
a +b
alb
+b
99
99
99
Indirect Addressing
None
None
None
Special Editing Capabilities
Fair
Fair
Fair
Boolean Operations
None
None
None
Table Look-up
Excellent
Excellent
Excellent
Console Typewriter
Yes
Yes
Yes
o to 4; most low-speed
1 or 2 ; typewriter and
card reader are not
buffered
o to 4; most low-speed
devices operate in
buffered mode
Input-Output Channels
devices operate in
buffered mode
Features and Comments
Floating point optional;
three accumulators
Floating point standard;
program-compatible with
IBM 7070
Floating point optional;
program-compatible with
IBM 7070
Model Number
7301
7301
7301
Type of Storage
Core
Core
Core
Minimum
5,000
5,000
5,000
Maximum
9,990
30,000
30.000
Decimal Digits
99,900
300,000
300,000
Characters
49,950
150,000
150,000
Number of Words
Maximum
Total Storage
WORKING
STORAGE
Cycle Time. !,sec
6.0
6.0
4.0
Effective Transfer Rate. char/sec.
209,000
416,500
625,000
Checking
Fixed count
Fixed count
Fixed count
Storage Protection
None
None
None
/'
Features and Comments
* With optional equipment.
(s) Using subroutine.
9/66
fA
AUERBACH
to
CENTRAL PROCESSORS AND WORKING STORAGE
11:210.119
IBM 7080
IBM 7090
IBM 7094
417:
408:
409:
6 + parity
36
36
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Binary Bits
1
10.5
10.5
1
6
6
Decimal
Binary
Binary
8 digits (s)
27 bits + sign
27 or 54 bits + sign
Fraction Size
2 digits (s)
8 bits
8 bits
Exponent Size
7102 & 7305
7108 & 7109
Model I
Decimal
Binary
Binary
1 to 255 char
1
lor 2
5 char
1
1
Word Length
Decimal Digits
Characters
DATA
STRUCTURE
Radix
Floating Point
Representation
Model Number
Model II
Arithmetic Radix
Operand Length, Words
Instruction Length, Words
Addresses per Instruction
1
1
1
32
13.08
10
7.0
c =a +b
134
34.01
16
9.8
c =ab
285
39.24
20
14.0
c = alb
----
22.67
12
8.4
32.70
16
11.2
37.06
22
14.0
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
Times. I-Isec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
c =a +b
c =ab
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, f.l.sec
c =a/b
Parity
None
None
Checking of Data Transfers
Yes
Yes, with priority levels
Yes, with priority levels
Program Interrupt Facility
None
3
7
Number of Index Registers
One level
One level
One level
Good
None
None
None
AND, INC OR, EXC OR, NOT
AND, INC OR, EXC OR, NOT
None
None
None
Yes
No
No
o to 10, 4 of which can
be used only by lowspeed devices
1 to 5; also a special data
communications channel
with 32 subchannels
1 to 5; also a special data
communications channel
with 32 subchannels
Indirect Addressing
Special Editing Capabilities
Boolean Operations
Table Look-up
Console Typewriter
Can operate in
IBM 705-compatible
mode
7302
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
Input-Output Channels
Features and Comments
7302
Model I
Model Number
Model II
Type of Storage
Core
Core
Core
80,000
32,768
32,768
Minimum
160,000
32,768
32.768
Maximum
160,000
344,064
344,064
Decimal Digits
160,000
196,608
196,608
Characters
2.0
2.18
2.00
1. 40
2, 500, 000 max.
1,380. 000 max.
3,000,000
max.
4,300,000
max.
Number of Words
Maximum Total
Storage
Cycle Time, }lsec
Effective Transfer Rate. char/sec.
Parity
None
None
None
Checking
None
Limited, using ESNT
instruction
Limited, using ESNT
instruction
Storage Protection
Can access 1, 5 or 10
characters per cycle
Single bank
Dual banks
with overlapped access
WORKING
STORAGE
Features and Comments
* With optional equipment.
(s) Using subroutine.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:210.120
COMPARISON CHARTS·
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Word Length
DATA
STRUCTURE
Monrobot XI
352:
531:
Binary Bits
31 + spacer
32
Decimal Digits
9
9
Characters
56-bit
56-bit
Radix
Binary (s)
Binary (s)
Fraction Size
25 bits & others (s)
24 bits (s)
Exponent Size
Floating Point
Representation
6 bits & others (s)
8 bits (s)
Model Number
301
Monrobot XI
Arithmetic Radix
Binary
Binary
Operand Length, Words
1
1
Instruction Length, Words
1
0.5
Addresses per Instruction
1
1
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
Times, /lsec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
c =a +b
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, ILsec
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
LGP-30 (Control Data Corp.)
52,000 avg.
35,100 avg.
c = ab
69,000 avg.
58,500 avg.
c = alb
69,000 avg.
323,000 (s)
c =a +b
866,000 (s)
443,000 (s)
c =ab
716,000 (s)
523,000 (s)
c =a/b
749,000 (s)
623,000 (s)
Checking of Data Transfers
None
None
Program Interrupt Facility
None
None
Number of Index Registers
None
None
Indirect Addressing
None
None
Special Editing Capabilities
None
None
Boolean Operations
AND
AND
Table Look-up
None
None
Console Typewriter
Yes
Yes
Input-Output Channels
1 integrated non-simultaneous
channel
4 single-character channels
standard; 2 additional
channels optional
Features and Comments
No longer in production
Model Number
Part of 301
General
Fast Access
Type of Storage
Drum
Drum
Drum
Minimum
4,096
1,017
7
Maximum
4,096
2,041
7
Decimal Digits
36,864
18,369
63
Number of Words
Maximum
Total Storage
WORKING
STORAGE
Characters
20,480
10,205
35
Cycle Time, /lsec
16,667
11,700
730
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
60
70
---
Checking
None
None
None
Storage Protection
Switches prevent writing*
None
None
Regenerated
loops
Features and Comments
* With optional equipment.
(s) Using subroutine.
9/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
/
CENTRAL PROCESSORS AND WORKING STORAGE
11:210.121
NCR 315 and 315-100
NCR 315 RMC
PB 250 (Raytheon)
601: and 602:
603:
631:
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
12 + parity
12 + parity
22 + parity + guard
3
3
6.3
Binary Bits
2
2
3 6-bit
Decimal
Decimal
Binary (s)
11 digits
11 digits
22 bits & others (8)
Fraction Size
3 digits
3 digits
22 bits & others (s)
Exponent Size
315-3 thru 315-5, 315-101
315-501
PB 250
Decimal
Decimal
Binary
1 to 8
1 to 8
lor 2
2 or 4
2 or 4
1
Instruction Length, Words
1
1
1
Addresses per Instruction
144
16.2
9,252 & 4,744 avg.
690
38.2
12, 336 & 4,766 avg.
c =ab
1,602
128.6
12, 336 & 4, 766 avg.
c =a/b
Decimal Digits
Word Length
Characters
DATA
STRUCTURE
Radix
Floating Point
Representation
Model Number
Arithmetic Radix
Operand Length, Words
c =a +b
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
Times, /lsec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
1,232 (s)
33.6
19,488 & 7, 188 (s)
c =a +b
3,132 (s)
217.6
19,176 & 6, 876 (s)
c = ab
3,332 (s)
397.6
19, 284 & 6,980 (s)
Parity
Yes, I/O only; processor
malfunction *
Parity
Yes, I/O only; processor
malfunction *
Parity
Checking of Data Transfers
None
Program Interrupt Facility
30
30
1
Number of Index Registers
None
None
None
Indirect Addressing
Good
Good
None
Special Editing Capabilities
None
None
AND, INC OR
Fair
Fair
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 integrated non-simultaneous
channel; optional tape read/
write/compute facility
1 integrated non-simultaneous
channel; optional tape read/
write/compute facility
1 integrated non-simultaneous
channel
Multiply/divide is standard
in 315, optional in 315-100
Program compatible with
NCR 315 and 315-100
Times are based on
2 different sequence
control methods
316
316-502, 316-504
Delay Line Memory
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, #lsee
c =a/b
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
Boolean Operations
Table Look-up
Console Typewriter
Input-Output Channels
Features and Comments
Model Number
Core
Thin film
Nickel delay lines
Type of Storage
5,000
20,000
2,320
Minimum
40,000
80,000
15,888
Maximum
120,000
240,000
100,100
80,000
160,000
47,664
6
0.8
3,072
83,000
1,244,000
247,956
Parity
Parity
Parity
None
None
None
Entire working storage is
thin-film "Rod Memory"
Access times based on
standard 256-word loops
Number of Words
(
Decimal Digits
Characters
Maximum Total
Storage
Cycle Time, /lsec
Effective Transfer Rate. char/sec.
WORKING
STORAGE
Checking
Storage Protection
Features and Comments
'"
* With optional equipment.
(s) Using subroutine.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:210.122
COMPARISON CHARTS
Computer System Report No.
Word Length
DATA
STRUCTURE
Floating Point
Representation
Pbilco 2000 - 212
651:
652:
653:
48
Binary Bits
48
48
Decimal Digits
14
14
14
Characters
8
8
8
Radix
Binary
Binary
Binary
Fraction Size
35 hits + sign
35 hits + sign
35 bits + sign
Exponent Size
12 bits
12 bits
210
211 with
10 LIsee store
Model Number
12 bits
211 with
1. 5 Llsec store
212
Arithmetic Radix
Binary
Binary
Binary
Operand Length, Words
1
1
1
Instruction Length, Words
J/2; 1 for I/o
li2; 1 for I/o
J/2; !for I/o
Addresses per Instruction
1
1
1
c =a +b
45.0
45.0
8.0
4.65
c =ah
122.2
83.0
48.9
7.60
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
Times, !,sec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
c = alb
123.3
84.7
50.0
12.90
c =a +b
51.9*
46.1*
12.0*
4.65
c =ab
99.9*
72.9*
38.8*
7.60
c = alb
103.8*
74.7*
40.6*
15.40
Checking of Data Transfers
None
None
Parity
Program Interrupt- Facility
None
Yes*, flexible
Yes*, flexible
Number of Index Registers
8, 16, or 32
8, 16, or 32
8
Indirect Addressing
None
None
Yes; recursive
Special Editing Capabilities
None
None
None
Boolean Operations
AND, INC OR, EXC OR
AND, INC OR, EXC OR
AND, INC OR, EXC OR
Table Look-up
None
None
None
Console Typewriter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Input-Output Channels
1 Input-Output Processor
with 4 subchannels; 1 to 4
UBC channels; and 1 nonsimultaneous channel
1 Input-Output Processor
with 4 subchannel s ; 1 to 4
UBC channels; and 1 nonsimultaneous channel
2 Input-Output Processors, each
with 4 subchannels; 1 to 4 UBC
channels; and 1 non-simultaneous channel
Features and Comments
Can repeat either 1 or
-2 indexed instructions
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, Ilsec
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
Pbilco 2000 - 211
Phllco 2000 - 210
System Identity
Look-ahead feature; can
repeat up to 4 indexed
instructions
Model Number
2200 Series
2200 Series
2100 Series
2100 Series
2000 Series
Type of Storage
Core
Core
Core
Core
Core
Minimum
8,192
8,192
8,192
8,192
16,384
Maximum
32,768
32,768
32,768
32,768
65,536
Decimal Digits
458,752
458,752
458,752
458,752
917,504,·
Characters
262,144
262,144
262,144
262,144
524,288
1.0
Number of Words
Maximum
Total Storage
WORKING
STORAGE
Cycle Time, !,sec
10.0
10.0
1.5
1.5
Effective Transfer Rate, charlsec,
380,000
380,000
888,888
5,333,333 max,
Checking
None
None
Parity
Parity
Storage Protection
None
None
Features and Comments
Not overlapped
Not overlapped
* With optional equipment,
(s) Using subroutine,
9/66
fA
AUERBACH
OJ
None
Overlapped
access to
each bank
Overlapped access to
each bank
11:210.121
CENTRAL PROCESSORS AND WORKING STORAGE
NCR 315 and 315-100
NCR 315 RMC
PB 250 (Raytheon)
601: and 602:
603:
631:
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
12 + parity
12 + parity
22 + parity + guard
3
3
6.3
Binary Bits
2
2
3 6-bit
Decimal
Decimal
Binary (s)
11 digits
11 digits
22 bits & others (s)
Fraction Size
3 digits
3 digits
22 bits & others (s)
Exponent Size
315-3 thru 315-5, 315-101
315-501
PB 250
Decimal
Decimal
Binary
1 to 8
lto 8
lor 2
2 or 4
2 or 4
1
Instruction Length, Words
1
1
1
Addresses per Instruction
144
16.2
9,252 & 4,744 avg.
690
38.2
12, 336 & 4, 766 avg.
c =ab
1,602
128.6
12, 336 & 4,766 avg.
c =a/b
Decimal Digits
Word Length
Characters
DATA
STRUCTURE
Radix
Floating Point
Representation
Model Number
Arithmetic Radix
Operand Length. Words
c =a +b
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
Times, /lsec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
1,232 (s)
33.6
19,488 & 7, 188 (s)
c =a +b
3,132 (s)
217.6
19,176 & 6,876 (s)
c =ab
3,332 (s)
397.6
19,284 & 6,980 (s)
Parity
Yes, I/O only; processor
malfunction*
Parity
Yes, I/O only; processor
malfunction*
Parity
Checking of Data Transfers
None
Program Interrupt Facility
30
30
1
Number of Index Registers
None
None
None
Indirect Addressing
Good
Good
None
Special Editing Capabilities
None
None
AND,INC OR
Fair
Fair
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
writel compute facility .
1 integrated non-simultaneous
channel; optional tape read/
1 integrated non-simultaneous
channel; optional tape read/
write/ compute facility
1 integrated non-simultaneous
channel
Multiply/divide is standard
in 315, optional in 315-100
Program compatible with
NCR 315 and 315-100
Times are based on
2 different sequence
control methods
316
316-502, 316-504
Delay Line Memory
Core
Thin film
Nickel delay lines
5,000
20,000
2,320
Minimum
40,000
80,000
15,888
Maximum
120,000
240,000
100,100
80,000
160,000
47,664
6
0.8
3,072
83,000
1,244,000
247,956
Parity
Parity
Parity
None
None
None
Entire working storage is
thin-film "Rod Memory"
Access times based on
standard 256-word loops
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, /lsec
c =a/b
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
Boolean Operations
Table Look-up
Console Typewriter
Input-Output Channels
Features and Comments
Model Number
Type of Storage
Number of Words
Decimal Digits
Characters
Maximum Total
Storage
Cycle Time, /lsec
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
WORKING
STORAGE
Checking
Storage Protection
Features and Comments
• Wlth optlOnal eqUIpment.
(s) USing subroutine.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:210.122
COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Word Length
DATA
STRUCTURE
Floating Point
Repre sentation
Phllco 2000 - 210
Philco 2000 - 211
Philco 2000 - 212
651:
652:
653:
Binary Bits
48
48
48
Decimal Digits
14
14
14
Characters
8
8
8
Radix
Binary
Binary
Binary
Fraction Size
35 bits + sign
35 bits + sign
35 bits + sign
Exponent Size
12 bits
12 bits
Model Number
210
211 with
10 usec store
12 bits
Arithmetic Radix
Binary
Binary
Binary
Operand Length, Words
1
1
1
211 with
1. 5 usec store
212
Ins.truction Length, Words
112; 1 for I/o
112; 1 for I/o
112; 1 for I/o
Addresses per Instruction
1
1
1
c =a +b
45.0
45.0
8.0
4.65
c =ab
122.2
83.0
48.9
7.60
lJkely Fixed
Point Exe.cution
Times, /-tsec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
c = alb
123.3
84.7
50.0
12.90
c =a +b
51.9*
46.1*
12.0*
4.65
c =ab
99.9*
72.9*
38.8*
7.60
c = alb
103.8*
74.7*
40.6*
15.40
Checking of Data Transfers
None
None
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, IJsec
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
Parity
Program Interrupt Facility
None
Yes*, flexible
Yes*, flexible
Number of Index Registers
8, 16, or 32
8, 16, or 32
8
Indirect Addressing
None
None
Yes; recursive
Special Editing Capabilities
None
None
None
Boolean Operations
AND, INC OR, EXC OR
AND, INC OR, EXC OR
AND, INC OR, EXC OR
None
None
None
Console Typewriter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Input-Output Channels
1 Input-Output Processor
with 4 subchannels; 1 to 4
UBC channels; and 1 nonsimultaneous channel
1 Input-Output Processor
with 4 subchannels; 1 to 4
UBC channels; and 1 nonsimultaneous channel
2 Input-Output Processors, each
with 4 subchannels; 1 to 4 UBC
channels; and 1 non-simultaneous channel
Features and Comments
Can repeat either 1 or
·2 indexed instructions
Model Number
2200 Series
Table Look-up
Type of Storage
Minimum
Look-ahead feature; can
repeat up to 4 indexed
instructions
2200 Series
2100 Series
2100 Series
2000 Series
Core
Core
Core
Core
Core
8,192
8,192
8,192
8,192
16,384
Number of Words
Maximum
Total Storage
WORKING
STORAGE
Maximum
32,768
32,768
32,768
32,768
65,536
Decimal Digits
458,752
458,752
458,752
458,752
917,504
524,288
1.0
262,144
262,144
262,144
262,144
Cycle Time, /-tsec
10.0
10.0
1.5
1.5
Characters
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
380,000
380, 000
888,888
5,333,333 max.
Checking
None
None
Parity
Parity
Storage Protection
None
None
Features and Comments
Not overlapped
Not overlapped
* With optional equipment.
(s) Using subroutine.
9/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
None
Overlapped
access to
each bank
Overlapped access to
each bank
CENTRAL PROCESSORS AND WORKING STORAGE
RCA Spectra 70
Spectra 70/35
11:210.123
System Identity
Spectra 70/45
Spectra 70/55
714,
715:
716,
8 per byte
8 per byte
8 per byte
Binary Bits
2 per byte
2 per byte
2 per byte
Decimal Digits
1 per byte
1 per byte
1 per byte
Characters
Binary
Binary
Binary
24 or 56 bits
24 or 56 bits
24 or 56 bits
Fraction Size
---
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
Exponent Size
70/15
70/25
70/35
70/45
70/55
Binary, decimal
Binary, decimal
Binary, decimal
Binary, decimal
Binary, decimal
Spectra 70/15
Spectra 70/25
712,
713,
8 per byte
8 per byte
2 per byte
2 per byte
1 per byte
1 per byte
---
-----
-----
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
4 or 6 bytes
2, 4 or 6 bytes
2, 4, or 6 bytes
2, 4, or 6 bytes
2, 4, or 6 bytes
Computer System Report No.
Word Length
DATA
STRUCTURE
Radix
Floating Point
Representation
Model Number
Arithmetic Radix
Operand Length, Words
Instruction Length, Words
0, 1, or 2
0, 1, or 2
0, 1, or 2
0, 1, or 2
0, 1, or 2
62
53
51
25
7.8
? (s)
454
163
82
17.9
? (s)
660
243
111
25.0
---
81 or 116
37 or 53
13.4 or 19.0
c = a +b
203 or 536
68 or 212
24.2 or 53.1
c = ab
---
-------
446 or 1282
101 or 305
28.6 or 83.8
c =a/b
Parity
Parity
Parity
Parity
Parity
Checking of Data Transfers
Yes, limited
Yes, 4-level
Yes, multi-level
Yes, multi-level
Yes, multi-level
Program Interrupt Facility
None
15 max.
16 max.
16 max.
16 max.
Number of Index Registers
None
None
None
None
None
Indirect Addressing
Special Editing Capabilities
---
Fair
Fair
Good
Good
Good
AND, mc OR,
EXC OR
AND, INC OR,
EXC OR
AND, mc OR,
EXC OR
AND, mc OR,
EXC OR
AND, mc OR,
EXC OR
None
None
None
None
None
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
1 with 6 subchannels, 3 of
which can operate
simultaneously
4 to 8 selector
channels; 0 or 1
multiplexor
channel
o to 2 selector
channels; 1 multiplexor channel
o to 6 selector
o to 3 selector
channels; 1 multi- channels; 1 multiplexor channel
plexor channel
No multiply or
divide
instructions
Multiply-divide
in decimal
radix only
Program com patible with IBM
System/360; uses
integrated circuits
Program compatible with IBM
System/360; uses
integrated circuits
Program compatible with IBM
System/360; uses
integrated circuits
70/15
70/25
70/35
70/45
70/55
Core
Core
Core
Core
Core
Addresses per Instruction
c =a +b
c =ab
c = alb
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
Times, J.Lsec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, J.l.sec
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
Boolean Operations
Table Look-up
Console Typewriter
Input-Output Channels
Features and Comments
Model Number
Type of Storage
4,096 bytes
16,384 bytes
16, 384 bytes
16, 384 bytes
65, 536 bytes
Minimum
8,192 bytes
65,536 bytes
65, 536 bytes
262, 144 bytes
524, 288 bytes
Maximum
Number of Words
,
16,384
131,072
131,072
524,288
1,048,576
8,192
65,536
65,536
262,144
524,288
2. 0 per 1 byte
1. 5 per 4 bytes
1. 44 per 2 bytes
1. 44 per 2 bytes
O. 84 per 4 bytes
250,000
1,333,333
695,000
695,000
1,136,000
Decimal Digits
Characters
Maximum Total
Storage
Cycle Time, J.Lsec
\
'-
\
Parity
Parity
Parity
Parity
Parity
None
None
Write only*
Write only*
Write only*
No generalpurpose
registers
15 general16 generalpurpose registers purpose registers
in core storage
in core storage
16 generalpurpose registers
in fast scratchpad
memory
16 generalpurpose registers
in fast scratchpae
memory
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
WORKING
STORAGE
Checking
Storage Protection
Features and Comments
* With optional eqUIpment.
(s) Using subroutine.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
COMPARISON CHARTS
11:210.124
RCA 301
RCA 3301
RECOMP II (Autonetics)
701:
703:
161:
Binary Bits
6 + parity
6. + parity
40
Decimal Digits
1
1
12
58-bits
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Word Length
DATA
STRUCTURE
Floating Point
Representation
Characters
1
1
Radix
Decimal
Decimal
Binary
Fraction Size
8 digits
8 digits
39 bits
Exponent Size
303,304, 305
Arithmetic Radix
Decimal
Operand Length. Words
1 to 44 char
Instruction .Length. Words
10 char
Addresses per Instruction
2
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
Times, /Lsec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, p.sec
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
2 digits
Model Number
+b
2 digits
354, 355
3303
Decimal·
IHor1to
44 char
Decimal
Binary
1 to 44 char
lor 2
10 char
10 char
0.5
2
2
1
~a
294
166
45
13
36, 540 & 740 avg.
c
~
ab
8,400(s)
434
562
25
43,070 & 14,110 avg.
c
~
alb
18,OOO(s)
441
1,650
41
45, 230 & 16,270 avg.
c
~a
35,OOO(s)
196
---
13
37,970 & 6,550 avg.
c
~
ab
9,200 (s)
476
26
44,690 & 15,730 avg.
c
~
alb
18,800(s)
483
-----
41
46,350 & 17,890 avg.
+b
Checking of Data Transfers
Parity
Parity
None
Program Interrupt Facility
None
Yes, ·flexible
None
Number of Index Registers
3
3
None
Indirect Addressing
Yes
Yes; recursive
None
Special Editing Capabilities
Fair
Good
None
Boolean Operations
AND, INC OR, EXC OR
AND, INC OR, EXCOR
AND
Table Look-up
Single char only
None
None
Console Typewriter
No input; output optional
Yes
Yes
Input-Output Channels
1 integrated non-simultaneous
channel; 2 additional slmultaneous operations *
2 standard, a 3rd optional;
also, 1 Communications
Control for up to 160 devices
1 integrated non-simultaneous
channel
Features and Comments
Models 354 and 355 contain
high speed arithmetic
circuits
Model 3304 processes
10-character operands
very efficiently
Floating Point standard.
Automatic decimal-tobinary conversion
Model Number
303, 304, 305
3361
Main Memory
Fast Memory
Core
Core
Disc
Disc
Minimum
10,000
40,000
4,080
16
Maximum
40,000
160,000
4,080
16
Decimal Digits
40,000
160,000
48,960
192
Characters
40,000
160,000
32,640
Cycle Time. /Lsec
7.0
1.5 or 1.93
17,000
128
1,080 read
2,160 write
Effective Transfer Rate. char/sec.
67,600
1,290,000
1,456
---
Checking
Parity
Parity
None
None
Storage Protection
None
None
None
None
Features and Comments
Optional 4.8 ILsec memory
reduces execution times by
31%
200-character control
memory has 0.214 ILsec
cycle time
Number of Words
Maximum
Total Storage
* With optional eqnipment.
(s) Using subroutine.
9/66
D4A-AB
c
Type of Storage
WORKING
STORAGE
39 bits
3304
A
AUERBACH
Regenerated
loops
,/
CENTRAL PROCESSORS AND WORKING STORAGE
11:210.125
UNIVAC SS 80/90
RECOMP III (Autonetics)
RPC-4000 (Control Data Corp.)
162:
40
Model I
Model II
351:
771:
772:
32
41 + parity
44 + parity
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Binary Bits
Decimal Digits
Word Length
12
9
10
11
58-bit
56-bit
10 char. per
2 words
20 char. per
3 words
Binary
Binary (s)
---
Radix
31 bits
32 bits & others (s)
-----
---
Fraction Size
8 bits
32 bits & others (s)
---
---
Exponent Size
D4-F
4010
Model I
Model II
Model Number
Binary
Binary
Decimal
Decimal
Arithmetic Radix
Characters
DATA
STRUCTURE
Floating Point
Repre sentation
1
1
1
1
Operand Length. Words
0.5
1
1
1
Instruction Length, Words
1
1 +1
1+1
1+1
36,540 & 6, 580 avg.
16,700 avg.
833
136
43,070 & 17,350 avg.
23,400 avg.
1,800
979
c ;ab
23,400 avg.
1,800
979
c ;a/b
165,000 (s)
---
---
c;a +b
45,320 & 17,510 avg.
37,160 & 7,360 avg.
*
Addresses per Instruction
c;a +b
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
Times, !,sec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
Likely Floating
Point Execution
43, 880 & 18, 160 avg.
*
145,000 (s)
---
---
c ;ab
46,040 & 20,320 avg.
*
152,000 (s)
---
---
c ; alb
None
None
Parity
Parity
Checking of Data Transfers
None
None
Yes, I/O only
Yes, I/O only
Program Interrupt Facility
Number of Index Registers
Times, Ilsec
1
1
3
9
None
None
None
None
None
None
Zero suppress
Zero suppress
AND
AND, Masked Merge
AND, INC OR
AND,INC OR
None
Fair
None
None
Yes
Yes
Numeric only
Numeric only
1 integrated non-simultaneous
channel
1 channel; limited
simultaneous operations
1 for tape
and drum
2 for tape
and drum
Main Memory
Disc
Indirect Addressing
Fast Memory
Main Memory
Fast Memory
Disc
Drum
Special Editing Capabilities
Boolean Operations
Table Look-up
I/O devices other than
tape and drum are buffered
Floating Point optional
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
Console Typewriter
Input-Output Channels
Features and Comments
Model Number
Type of Storage
Drum
Drum
Core
Drum
4,080
16
8,000
8
2,400
1,280
2,400
Minimum
4,080
16
8,000
8
9,200
1,280
8,800
Maximum
48,960
192
72,000
72
92,000
14,080
96,800
Decimal Digits
20,400
80
40,000
40
46,000
9,386
64,566
Charact.ers
17
Number of Words
I
'-.
3,400
Maximum Total
Storage
17,000
2,160
16,667
2,080
3,400
910
---
1,200
---
4,600 or
53,944
18,500
Up to
73,000
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
None
None
None
None
Parity
Parity
Parity
Checking
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Regenerated
loops
Dual access
heads on
2 bands
Regenerated
loop
Cycle Time, !,sec
WORKING
STORAGE
Storage Protection
Features and Comments
* With optional equipment.
(s) Using subroutine.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:210.126
COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
UNIVAC
UNIVAC 418
UNIVAC 1004
774:
790:
770:
Binary Bits
25 + 2 check
18 + parity
6
Decimal Digits
6
5.3
1
Characters
4
3
1
Radix
-------
-------
-------
Model Number
4121
418 Mod I
418 Mod II
1004 I
Arithmetic Radix
Decimal
Binary
Binary
Decimal
Operand Length, Words
1 to 4
1
1
1 to N char
Instruction Length, Words
1
1
1
Plugboard wired
Addresses per Instruction
1
1
1
2
Computer System Report No.
Word Length
DATA
STRUCTURE
Floating Point
Representation
Fraction Size
Exponent Size
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
Times, ).Isec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
1004II,
1004 m
c =a +b
24
24
12
224
182
c = ab
92 to 140
54
27
3,800(S)
3,100(s)
6,000(s)
c = alb
88 to 164
c =a +b
-------
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, Jlsec
c = ab
c = alb
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
m
72
36
7,100(s)
561(s)
280(s)
---
775(s)
387(s)
---
795(s)
397(s)
---
Parity
Checking of Data Transfers
Modulo 3 check
Parity
Program Interrupt Facility
Yes, with priority scheme
Yes, with priority scheme
None
Number of fudex Registers
15
8
8
None
Indirect Addressing
Yes: recursive
None
None
None
Special Editing Capabilities
None
None
None
Good
Boolean Operations
AND, INC OR
Table Look-up
None
AND, INC OR, AND, INC OR,
INC OR
EXC OR
EXC OR
None
None
None
Console Typewriter
Yes
Input-Output Channels
13, 5 of which are
reserved for magnetic
tape operations
8, 12, or 16
1 integrated channel
permits some 1/0
overlapping
Features and Comments
Four accumulators
Models I and II are programcompatible; primarily for
real -time applications
Programmed by
plugboard wiring
Model Number
4122
418 Mod I
418 Mod II
1004 I
Type' of Storage
Core
Core
Core
Core
Minimum
8,192
4,096
4,096
961
Maximum
32,768
16,384
65,536
1,922
Decimal Digits
196,608
86,835
347,340
1,922
Characters
131,072
49,152
196,608
1,922
2.0
8.0
6.5
76,700
"
Optional
Optional
None
None
Im!~T
,/
Number of Words
Maximum
Total Storage
WORKING
STORAGE
Cycle Time, ).Isec
4.0
4.0
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
400,000
62,500
125,000
62,400
Checking
Modulo 3 check
Parity
Parity
None
Storage Protection
None
None
None
None
Core storage is used
only for data
Features and Comments
• With optional eqUipment.
(s) Using subroutine.
9/66
A .,
AUERBACH
r/
CENTRAL PROCESSORS AND WORKING STORAGE
11:210.127
UNIVAC 490 Series
UNIVAC 1050
UNIVAC 490
UNIVAC 491/492
UNIVAC 494
777:
801:
802:
804:
6 + parity
30
30
30 + parity
1
8.7
8.7
8.7
1
5
5
5
-----
---
-------
Binary
-----
--Model III
Processor
Decimal
Model IV
Processor
8188 thru 8199
Binary
8187 -88 thru
8187-99
Binary
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Binary Bits
Decimal Digits
Word Length
Characters
DATA
STRUCTURE
Radix
48 bits + sign
Fraction Size
11 bits
Exponent Size
Floating Point
Representation
Model Number
3012-99
Binary
Arithmetic Radix
1 to 16 char
1
1
lor 2
5 char
1
1
1
Instruction Length. Words
1
Addresses per Instruction
1
Operand Length. Words
1
1
337
94
36; 29*
9.6
2.3
c ; a +b
1,566*
563*
85; 68*
29.8 to 68.2
8.7
c ; ab
2,912*
753*
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
Times, /lsec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
110; 88*
69.1
8.7
c ; alb
---
---
9.6
c;a +b
---
---
-----
18.1
c ;ab
---
---
---
18.4
c ;a/b
Parity
None
None
None
Checking of Data Transfers
Yes, 3 priority levels
Yes, multi-level
Yes, multi-level
Yes, multi-level
Program Interrupt Facility
7
Number of Index Registers
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, IJsec
7
7
7
None
None
None
None
Indirect Addressing
Excellent
None
None
None
Special Editing Capabilities
AND,INC OR
AND,INC OR,
EXC OR
Good, via repeat
mode
AND,INC OR,
EXC OR
Good, via repeat
mode
AND,INC OR,
EXC OR
Good, via repeat
mode
Boolean Operations
Yes
Yes
Yes
Console Typewriter
491 has 8;
492 has 14
12, 16, 20, or
24 general-purpose
channels
None
Optional
3 to 8 fixedpurpose
3 to 8
generalpurpose
8 or 14
Model III and IV
Processors are
program -compatible
Model ill
Processor
Core
Model IV
Processor
Core
8188 thru 8199
Core
Difference in number of I/O channels
distinguishes 491
from 492
8187-88 thru
7005-95 thru 7005-99
8187-99
Core
Core
Table Look-up
Input-Output Channels
Features and Comments
Model Number
Type of Storage
4,096
8,192
16,384
16,384
16,384
Minimum
32,768
65,536
32,768
65,536
131,072
Maximum
32,768
65,536
245,760
491,520
983,040
Decimal Digits
32,768
65,536
163,840
327,680
655,360
Characters
4.5
2.0 per
2 characters
1,000,000
max.
6.0
4.8
0.750
415,000
520,000
2,222,000
None
None
Parity check
None
Yes, in 1,024word hlocks
Yes, in 64-word
hlocks
222,000
Parity
Only by software
Accelerator feature
reduces cycle time
to 4.8 /lsec
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
Number of Words
Maximum Total
Storage
Cycle Time, /lsec
Effective Transfer Rate. char/sec.
WORKING
STORAGE
Checking
Storage Protection
Features and Comments
* WIth optlOnaI eqUIpment.
(s) Using subroutine.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:210.128
COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
DATA
STRUCTURE
Floating Point
Representation
UNIVAC 9000 Series:
·UNIVAC 9200 & 9300
784:
785:
810:
36
36 bits + 2 parity bits
8 per byte
10.5
10.5
2 per byte
Characters
6
6
1 per byte
Radix
Binary
Binary
Fraction Size
27 bits + sign
27 or 60 bits + sign
Exponent Size
8 bits
8 or 11 bits
-------
Model Number
Type 7200
3011-99
9200
Aritbmetic Radix
Binary
Binary
Decimal
Operand Length, Words
1
lor 2
1 to 31 digits + sign
Instruction Length, Words
1
1
4 or 6 bytes
Addresses per Instruction
1
1
0,1, or 2
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
Times, /lsec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
Likely Floating
Point Execution
Times, #lsec
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIVAC 1108
Decimal Digits
Binary Bits
Word Length
UNIVAC 1107
c =a +b
12.0
2.3
187.2
c =ab
20.0
3.9
'.?
c = alb
9300
93.6
?
I
39.3
11.6
?
c =a +b
22.0
3.3
c =ab
21.3
4.1
-----
c =a/b
34.7
9.8
-------
None
None
Parity
Parity
Checking of Data Transfers
./
?
---
Program Interrupt Facility
Yes, multi-level
Yes, multi -level
Yes, I/o & processor errors
Number of Index Registers
15
15
8
8
Indirect Addressing
Yes; recursive
Yes; recursive
None
None
Special Editing Capabilities
None
None
Good-
Good
Boolean Operations
AND, INC OR, EXC OR
AND, !NCOR, EXCOR
AND,OR
AND,OR
Table Look-up
Good
Good
None
None
Console Typewriter
Yes
m
Yes
to 5 1108 Processors and
o Controllers In an 1108-II;
up to 16 I/o channels in each
Processor and I/o Controller
None
None
Integrated controls for simultaneous operation of basic card
reader, punch, and printer; 1
8-way multiplexor channelMultiply, divide, and edit Instructions are optional features
with the 9200 Processor
Input-Output Channels
16, 1 of which is
reserved for the system
console device
Features and Comments
16 arithmetic registers;
partial word capabilities
A single-processor 1108
can contain 8, 12, or 16
I/O channels
Model Number
7230-7234
7200
7005
9200
9300
Type of Storage
Core
Thin-film
Core
Plated-wire
Plated-wire
Minimum
16,384
128
65,536
8,192 bytes
8,192 bytes
Maximum
65,536
128
262,144
16,384 bytes
32,768 bytes
Decimal Digits
688,128
1,344
2,752,512
32,768
65,536
32,768
(
"
Number of Words
Maximum
Total Storage
WORKING
STORAGE
393,216
768
1,572,864
16,384
Cycle Time, /lsec
4.0
0.667
0.75
1.2/byte
0,60/byte
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
750,000
750,000
4,000,000
60,000
120,000
Checking
None
None
Parity check on each half-word Parity
Parity
Storage Protection
Yes, write
only
Yes, write
only
Read and write, in
.512 word blocks
None
Features and Comments
Overlapped
access to
each hank
Characters
/
Used for index, Up to 8 independent
arithmetic,
memory modules
and I/O
registers
- With optional equipment,
(8) Using subroutine.
9/66
fA
AUERBACH
'"
None
Data structure and most
instructions are IBM
System/SGO-compatible
-1.
11:220.101
ST ......
/AEDP
-
AUERBAC~
•
UPBIIS
COMPARISON CHARTS
HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS:
AUXILIARY STORAGE AND
MAGNETIC TAPE
HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS COMPARISON CHARTS
AUXILIARY STORAGE AND MAGNETIC TAPE
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:220.102
COMPARISON CHARTS
Burroughs B 100/200 Seriel!
10-l'sec Processor
Burroughs B 200 Series
6-l'sec Processor
Burroughs B 300
201:
201:
201:
Model Number
B 475
B 475
Type of Storage
Discs
Discs
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Units On-Line
Maximum
Number
10
10
Read/Write
Operations
1
1
Seek Operations
0
0
Number of
Words per
Unit
Minimum
9,600,000
9,600,000
Maximum
48,000,000
48,000,000
Maximum
Decimal Digits
480,000,000
720,000,000
Characters
480,000,000
480,000,000
Total
Storage
AUXILIARY
STORAGE
Waiting
Time,
msec.
Minimum
0
0
Average (Random)
20
20
Maximum
40
40
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
62,000
Transfer Load Size, char.
1 to 19,200 by
96,240, or 480
1 to 19,200 by
96, 240, or 480
Checking
Multiple character check
Multiple character check
Features and Comments
No auxiliary storage is
available ,for these processor
models,.
Model Numher
B 421
Maximum
Number
of Units
62,000
Optional Data Compress
instruction permits packing
of decimal digits.
B 422
B 423
-
B 424
B 425
On-Line
6
6
6
6
6
Reading/Writing
1
1
1
1
1
Searching
1
1
1
1
1
Rewinding
6
6
6
6
6
Reading/Writing
100
100
100
100
100
Starting/Stopping
100/0
100/0
100/0
100/0
100/0
Peak
50.0
24.0
66.0
66.0
72.0
1,000-char hlocks
29.6
19.0
38.5
39.8
41. 9
100-char blocks
6.3
6.6
8.0
8.7
8.8
Data Tracks
6
6
6
6
6
Data Rows per Block
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Data Rows per Inch
200,556
200
200,556
800
200,556,800
IBM 729 Compatible
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Demands on
Processor,
%
Transfer
Rate, Kilochar/sec.
MAGNETIC
TAPE
Reading
~~;c:a~~
~~;c:a~g,
~~;c~a~rg,
~~;c~a~rg,
~~;c~a~
Writing
Read
after write
Read
after write
Read
after write
Read
after write
Read
after write
Checking
Features and Comments
A maximum of 4 tape units
can be attached to a B 100
Series processor
*With optional equipment.
9/66
A
.,
AUERBACH
B 200 Series 6-1' s ec
processor can also USe B 421
and B 423 tape units
B 300 Processor can utilize
all B 400 Series tape units.
AUXILIARY STORAGE AND MAGNETIC TAPE
11:220.103
Burroughs B 2500 & B 3500
Burroughs B 5500
210:
203:
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
9370
9372
B 430
B 475
Model Number
Disc
Disc
Drum
Discs
Type of Storage
2/channel
25/channel
2
100
l/channel
l/channel
2
2
Read/Write
Operations
2/channel
5/channel
2
2
Seek Operations
Units On-Line
Maximum
Number
1,000,000
10,000,000
32,768
1,200,000
Minimum
2,000,000
10,000,000
32,768
6,000,000
Maximum
8 x 10 6/ch.
500 x 106/ch,
917,504
1,680 x 106
524,288
960 x 106
20
°
8.3
0
20
Average (Random)
34
40
16.7
40
Maximum
286,000
200,000
122,880
80,000
100
100
8 to 8,124
240 to 15, 120
Parity
Parity
Parity
Multiple char.
Checking
Fixed heads, one per track
Fixed heads, one per track
Fixed heads,
one per track
Features and Comments
9381
9391
B 422 B 423
B 424 B 425
Model Number
4 x 106/ch.
250 x 106 /ch.
0
0
17
Decimal Digits
Characters
Number of
Words per
Unit
Maximum
Total
Storage
AUXILIARY
STORAGE
Minimum
Waiting
Time,
msec.
9382
9390
9392
9393
Effective Transfer Rate,
char/sec.
Transfer Load Size, char.
On-Line
4 per channel
10 per channel
16
16
16
16
1 per channel
1 per channel
4
4
4
4
Reading/Writing
0
0
0
0
0
0
Searching
4 per channel
10 per channel
16
16
16
16
Rewinding
Varies
Varies
oto 3.3
Oto3.2
°to 3.3 oto3. 6
Varies
Varies
0
0
0
0
66.0
24.0
66.0
72.0
Peak
36.0
72.0
50.0
72.0
24.0
30.2
35.5
44.6
49.
6.5
7.2
9.5
10.1
12.2
8; 6*
8; 6*
6
Variable
72.0
°
8
6
144.0
Reading/Wri ting
Starting/Stopping
73.4
64.4
63.5
64.4
68.9
1,000 -char blocks
13.0
14.8
32.3
14.8
18.0
100-char blocks
8
Variable
200,
556
200, 556,
800
200,
800
200,800, 220,
556
1600
Yes'
Yes*
Yes
Yes
No
No
%
Transfer
Rate, Kilochar/sec.
200
MAGNETIC
TAPE
Data Rows per Block
Variable
200or800
1600
Demands on
Processor.
Data Tracks
6
200,
800
Maximum
Number
of Units
800
200,
556,80(
Data Rows per Inch
IBM 729 Compatible
Yes
Track and row parity
Track and row parity
Track and row parity
Reading
Read after write
Read after write
Read after write
Writing
Can read backward;
optional 7 -channel
recording
Can read backward
Can read backward
Features and Comments
Checking
'With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:220.104
COMPARISON CHARTS
CDC 160 & 160-A
CDC 1604
CDC 1604-A
242: & 244:
241:
243:
Model Number
8951
818
818
Type of Storage
Drum
Discs
Discs
Units On- Line
1
28
28
Read/Write
Operations
1
1
6
Seek Operations
1
6
6
Number of
Words per
Unit
Minimum
32,864
4,194,304
4,194,304
Maximum
32,864
4,194,304
4,194,304
Maximum
Total
Storage
Decimal Digits
108,400
938 x 106
938 x 106
Characters
65,728
938 x 106
938 x 106
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Maximum
Number
AUXILIARY
STORAGE
Minimum
0
0
Average (Random)
146
146
Maximum
226
226
98,000 max
98,000 max
Transfer Load Size, char.
8 to 32,768
8 to 32,768
Checking
Check characters
Check characters
Features and Comments
Individually positionable
access arm serves
each disc
Individually positionable
access arm serves
each disc
Waiting
"Time,
msee.
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
Model Number
Maximum
Number
of Units
Demands on
603
CDC 1607 mM729n
mM 729 IV
CDC 606
8
8
24
24
24
48
Reading/Writing
1
(2* in 160-A)
1
(2* in 160-A)
6
2
2
6
Searching
0
0
0
0
0
0
Rewinding
8
8
24
24
24
48
Reading/Writing
100
100
.
180* in 160-AI . 183* in 160-AI
5.4
7.8 max
11.3 max
3.3 max
0
0
0
0
Starting/Stopping
Peak
41.7
83.4
30.0
41.7
62.5
83.4
l,OOO-char blocks
24.7
49.0
27.4
27.3
40.3
49.0
100-char blocks
5.4
10.4
10.2
6.7
9.6
10.4
Data Tracks
6
6
6
6
6
6
Data Rows per Block
Variable
Variable
Variable Variable
Variable
Variable
Data Rows per Inch
200,556
200,556
200
200,556
200,556
200,556
IBM 729 Compatible
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Transfer
Rate, Kilochar/sec.
MAGNETIC
TAPE
606
On-Line
Processor,
%
64,000 max
Reading
I~ty
Track & row parity
Checking
Writing
Row
parity
Read after write
Row parity
Read after write
Read after write
./
./
Features and Comments
*With optional equipment.
9/66
Row parity
./
A
AUERBACH
11:220.105
AUXILIARY STORAGE AND MAGNETIC TAPE
CDC 3100/3200/3300
CDC 3400
CDC 3600
245:
246:
247:
828
828
Discs
Discs
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Model Number
Type of Storage
Units On-Line
4
16
2
4
Read/Write
Operations
2
8
Seek Operations
8.5 x 106
4.25 x 10 6
Minimum
8.5 x 106
4.25 x 10 6
Maximum
132 x 106
528 x 106
Decimal Digits
132 x 106
528 x 106
Characters
0
0
236
236
Average (Random)
369
369
Maximum
98,000 max
98,000 max
256 to 131,072
256 to 262, 144
Parity
Parity
Dual-channel controllers
are standard
Dual-channel controllers
are standard
604
607
604
607
CDC 606
128
128
512
512
256
8
8
4
4
16
0
0
0
0
0
Searching
128
128
512
512
256
Rewinding
7.6 max
15 max
4.5
8.9
1.5
Reading/Writing
0
0
0
0
0
Starting/Stopping
60.0
120.0
60.0
120.0
83.4
Peak
Maximum
Number
Number of
Words per
Unit
Maximum
Total
Storage
Minimum
Waiting
Time,
msec.
AUXILIARY
STORAGE
Effective Transfer Rate,
char/sec.
Transfer Load Size, char.
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
On-Line
Reading/Writing
36.0
64.0
36.0
64.0
49.0
1,000-char blocks
6.8
12.4
6.8
12.4
10.4
100 -char blocks
Maximum
Number
of Units
Demands on
Processor,
%
Transfer
Rate, Kilochar/sec.
Data Tracks
6
6
6
Variable
Variable
Variable
200,556,800
200,556,800
200,556
Yes
Yes
Yes
Track & row parity
Track & row parity
Track & row' parity
Reading
Read after write
Read after write
Read after write
Writing
2, 3, and 4-channel
controllers available
1, 2, 3, and 4-channel
controllers available
MAGNETIC
TAPE
Data Rows per Block
Data Rows per Inch
i
!
\
IBM 729 Compatible
Checking
I
I
\
Features and Comments
*WIth optional eqUIpment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:220.106
COMPARISON CHARTS
. Control Data 6000 Series
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Model Number
Type of Storage
Maximum
Number
Number of
Words per
Unit
Maximum
Total
Storage
260:
6400/6600
6800 Ex!
Extended
tended Core 6603
Core Storal(El iStorage
Core
Core
6607/6608
852
853
854
Disc
Disc
Disc
Disc
Disc
Units On-Line
or 8
~~~ie~r16 4modules
8
8
S
8
8
Read/Write
Operations
1
1
l/ch
l/ch
l/ch
l/ch
llch
Seek Operations
-
-
l/ch
l/cb
l/cb
l/cb
l/ch
Minimum
131,072
524,288
S x 106
42,000
1.49 x 106
2. 048 x 106
4. OS6 x 106
84,000
1. 49 x 106
2.048 x 106 4.086 x 106
294,000
5.21 x 106
7.168 x 106 14.3x106
M~imum
2,097,152
1,048,576
S x 106
37, 02S, 736
144 x 106
Decimal Digits
37,028,736
Characters
20,571,520
10,485,760 .80 x 106
168,000
23.860 x 106
32. 768x 106 65.536 x 106
Minimum
.0032
.0016
0
0
0
0
0
Average (Random)
.0032
.0016
153
23.3
77.5
70
70
Maximum
.0032
.0016
186
152.5
185
170
170
80 x 106 to
100 x 106
320 x 106 to 2 to
400 x 106
1,195,297
1,666,666
69,840
193,750
193,750
Transfer Load Size, char.
10 to
1,200,000
10 to
1,310,00
2to
88,376
5,120 to
81,912
2 to
20,000
2 to
40,960
2to
40,960
Checking
None
None
Parity
Parity
Parity
Parity
Parity
AUXILIARY
STORAGE
Waiting
Time,
msee.
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
Compatible
with;IBM
1311
Features and Comments
600 Series
Model Number
On-Line
Maximum
Number
of Units
Demands on
Processor,
%
Transfer
Rate, Kilochar/see.
MAGNETIC
TAPE
600 Series
l!i92
603
604
606
6/ch
6/eb
6/ch
6/ch
6/eb
8/eh
1607
l!i94
8/eb
9-Track
ln9!i
8/eb
626
14-Track
8/eh
Reading/Writing
l/ch
l/eb
l/eb
l/ch
1/cb
l/eh
l/cb
l/ch
1/cb
Searching
l/cb
l/ch
l/ch
l/ch
1/ch
l/cb
l/ch
l/ch
l/ch
Rewinding
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
Reading/Writing
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Starting/Stopping
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Peak
20.85
47.7
60.0
S3.4
120.0
30.0
60.0
90.0
240.0
1,000 -char blocks
14.8
29.6
37.2
59.2
74.4
20.4
40.8
61. 2
10.8
100-char blocks
3.9
7.9
S.4
15.8
16.8
5.1
10.2
15.3
lS.24
7
7
7
7
7
9
9
9
14
Data Tracks
Data Rows per Block
Variable Variable
Variable Variable Variable
Data Rows per Inch
200,
556
200,
556,
SOO
200,
556
200,
556
200,
556,
SOO
Variable Variable
Variable Variable
SOO
800
Yes
Yes
No
Reading
Track and row parity
Track, row, & eycli c parity
Writing
Read after write
Read after write
Parity
Read after write
IBM 729 Compatible
Checking
Features and Comments
*With optional equipment.
9/66
7-Track
601
IA
AUERBACH
~
/
AUXILIARY STORAGE AND MAGNETIC TAPE
11:220.107
System Identity
GE-215
GE-225
GE-235
320:
321:
323:
M640A
M640A
M640A
Model Number
Discs
Discs
Discs
Type of Storage
4
32
28
1
1
1
4
32
28
6,290,000
6,290,000
6,290,000
Minimum
6,290,000
6,290,000
6,290,000
Maximum
Number of
Words per
Unit
138.4 x 10 6
1,107 x 10 6
968 x 10 6
Decimal Digits
Maximum
75.5 x 10 6
604 x 10 6
528 x 10 6
Characters
0
0
0
225
225
225
Average (Random)
357
357
357
Maximum
60,000
60,000
60,000
192 to 3,072 by 192
192 to 3,072 by 192
192 to 3,072 by 192
Parity
Parity
Parity
Programmed error
correction is
possible
Programmed error
correction is
possible
Programmed error
correction is
possihle
MTH680
MTH680
MTH690
MTH680
Computer System Report No.
Units On-Line
Read/Write
Operations
Maximum
Number
Seek Operations
Total
Storage
AUXILIARY
STORAGE
Minimum
Waiting
Time,
msee.
Effective Transfer Rate,
char/sec.
Transfer Load Size, char.
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
MTH690
On-Line
8
64
64
56
56
1
8
2
7
4
0
0
0
0
0
Searching
Rewinding
Reading/Writing
Maximum
Number
of Units
8
64
64
56
56
18
9
25
3
8.3
Reading/Writing
0
0
0
0
0
Starting/Stopping
15.0
15.0
41.6
15.0
41. 6
Peak
12.7
12.7
29.0
12.7
29.0
l,OOO-char blocks
5.3
5.3
6.9
5.3
6.9
6
6
6
6
6
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Data Rows per Block
200
200
200, 556
200
200, 556
Data Rows per Inch
Yes
Yes
Yes
Track & row parity
Track & row parity
Track & row parity
Reading
Read after write
Read after write
Read after write
Writing
Can read backward
Can read backward
Can read backward
Features and Comments
Demands on
Processor,
%
Transfer
Rate, Kilochar/sec.
lOO-char blocks
Data Tracks
MAGNETIC
TAPE
IBM 729 Compatible
Checking
-With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
COMPARISON CHARTS
11:220.108
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
340:
330:
Modei Number
DS-15
DS-20
DS-25
MS-40
DS-20
MDS-200
Type of Storage
Discs
Discs
Discs
Mag. strips
Discs
Drum
Units On-Line
8/cbannel
4/cbannel
4/channel
8/cbannel
4/channel
l/channel
Read/Write
Operations
l/channel
l/cbannel
l/cbannel
l/cbannel
l/channel
l/channel
Seek Operations
8/channel
4/channel
64/cbannel
8/cbannel
l/unit
l/unit
Number of
Words per
Unit
Minimum
2.0 x 10 6
1. 5 x 106
25.2 x 106
13.3 x 10 6
983,000
768,432
Maximum
2.0 x 10 6
5.9 x 10 6
50.3 x 106
133 x 10 6
3,925,000
768,432
Maximum
Total
Storage
Decimal Digits
62.9 x 10 6 /ch
94 x 106/ch
805 x 10 6/ch
4,262x10 6/ch
94 x 10 6/cb.
7.90x10 6/ch.
Characters
62.9 x 10 6 /ch
94 x 10 6/ch
805 x 10 6/ch
4,262x10 6 /ch
94 x 10 6/ ch.
4.55 x lO6/ch.
0
0
0
0
116
550
225
17.0
MaXimum
Number
AUXILIARY
STORAGE
Minimum
0
Average (Random)
95
Maximum
150
357
172
600
357
33.4
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
190,600
50,000
195,500
43,700
69,500
300,000
Transfer Load Size, char.
1 to 98,304
240 to 7,680
1 to 98,304
1 to 53,280
240 to 7,680
1 to 262,144
Checking
Check char
Parity,
check char
check char
Parity, check
character
Parity
Features and Comments
Uses changeable disc
cartridges
Optical Fast
16 independent
Access featur, access arms
uses fixed
in each unit
Cyclic check
code
mM 2321
Data Cell
Drive uses
changeable
"data cells"
Waiting
Time,
msec.
'0
225
access arm.s
Model Number
On-Line
MaXimum
Number
of Units
Demands on
Processor,
%
MT Series (7-track)
MT Series (9-track)
MT Series
(7-track)
MT Series
(9-track)
8/cbannel
8/cbannel
16/cbannel
16/channel
Reading/Writing
l/cbannel
l/cbannel
l/channel
l/cbannel
Searching
0
0
0
0
Rewinding
all
all
all
all
Reading/Writing
3.5to23.2
4.8t031.0
0.35t04.0
0.47t05.4
Starting/Stopping
0
0
0
0
Peak
20.9 to 120
28 to 160
26.9 to 120
28 to 160
14.6 to 73.5
17.7 to 86.6
14.5t070
17.7 to 86.5
100-char blocks
3.9 to 16.3
4.1 to 16.8
3.9 to 14.7
4.1 to 16.8
Data Tracks
6
8
6
8
Data Rows per Block
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Data Rows per Inch
200, 556 or
200, 556, 800
200, 556 or
200, 556, 800
200, 556 or
200, 556, 800
200, 556 or
200, 556, 800
IBM 729 Compatible
Yes
No
Yes
No
Ji:i~& row
Read after
write
Ji:i~& row
Read after
write·
6 models,
varying in
tape speed
and densities
6 models,
varying in
tape speed
and densities
Reading
Track and row parity
3-way parity
Writing
Read after write
Read after write
6 models, varying in tape
speeds and densities
6 models, varying in tape
speeds and denSities;
compatible with mM 2400
Series Tape units
Checking
Features and Comments
*With optional equipment.
9/66
Optional fast
An adaptation
access feature of the UNIVAC
uses fixed
FH-880 Drum
access arms
I,OOO-char blocks
Transfer
Rate, Kilochar/sec.
MAGNETIC
TAPE
GE 600 Series
GE 400tSeries
A
AUERBACH
'"
/
./
11:220.109
AUXILIARY STORAGE AND MAGNETIC TAPE
System Identity
GE-1l5
Honeywell Series 200
Honeywell 400 & 1400
310:
510:
501: & 505:
DS-12
251,252,253
270
460
Disc
Mag. strips
Drwn
Discs
6/controller
~('t'i,)ilI\,:~r
~ft'i,~~~r
1
Units On-Line
1
l/channel
l/channel
1
Read/Write
Operations
l/transport
0
1
Seek Operations
590, OOO/surface
15.8 x 106 char
2.6 x 10 6 char 1,572,864
590, OOO/surface
317 x 10 6 cbar
2.6 x 10 6 char 12,582,912
3.5 x 106
~r~3t~"J2u /
20. 8 x fiR6/
pro t ru s
150 x 106
3.5xl06
2,536 x 106 /
pro trunks
~~:8t~~/
10 x 106
0
0
0
95,150, or 225
25
129
Average (Random)
135,190, or265
42,300
50
197
Maximum
(peak rate: 95,000)
l?,~gg
94,800
27,800 to 75,000
1 to 1,024
1 to 968 cbar
Variable
512
Parity
Parity
Parity
445
Uses changeable single-disc
cartridges; only 1 surface
is accessible at a time
Type of Sto rage
Minimum
Number
Maximum
Number of
Words per
Unit
Decimal Digits
Maximum
Total
Storage
AUXILIARY
STORAGE
Minimum
Waiting
Time,
msce.
Effective Transfer Rate,
char/sec.
Transfer Load Size, char.
Checking
Features and Comments
204B Series
Model Number
404-3
404-1
404-2
8 (16 on
H-1400)
2
Reading/Writing
0
Searching
8/pair trunks
8/pair trunks
~~~~o"O~
l/channel
l/channel
2
2
0
0
0
0
All
All
Mi~oo~
~~i~o'b'i ~~i~o'b'i
On-Line
Varies widely
Varies widely
100
100
100
0
0
100/0
100/0
100/0
Starting/Stopping
32.0 to 88.8
13.3 to 96.
32.0
64.0
89.0
Peak
23.7 to 59.7
10.7 to 60.
23.5
47.0
59.0
1,000 -char blocks
7.1 to 15.1
3.8toI3.7
6.8
13.6
14.5
100 -char blocks
8
6
8
8
8
Variable
Variable
18 to N
18 to N
18 to N
533,740
200,556,800
400
400
555
No
Yes*
No
Track and
row parity
Track ~d
row parlty
Read after
write
Tr~tromc
& rpws~~m~,
Or
sse
Only four
13KC units
can be attached
to a pair of
trunks
None
Maximum
Number
of Units
Rewinding
Reading/Writing
Compatible
with H-400/
1400/800/1800
tapes
Maximum
Characters
8 (16 on
H-1400)
None
No magnetic tape equipment
announced to date.
Model Number
Uses
changeable
cartridges
204A Series
\
Computer System Heport No.
Demands on
Processor,
%
Transfer
Rate, Kilochar/sec.
Data Tracks
MAGNETIC
TAPE
Data Rows per Block
Data Rows per Inch
IBM 729 Compatible
plus
Reading
Checking
Writing
Features and Comments
*With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:220.110
COMPARISON CHARTS
Honeywell 800 & 1800
mM1l30
502: &. 503:
418:
mM System/360
Model 44
435:
ModEll Number
860
1131 2A and 2B Processors
2315
Type of Storage
Discs
Disc
Disc
Units On-Line
8
1 per unit
1
1-
2/channel
Read/Write
Operations
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Maximum
Number
Seek Operations
1 per unit
1
2/channel
Number of
Words per
Unit
Minimum
6,291,456
512,000
1. 1 x 106 bytes
Maximum
100,663,296
512,000
1. 1 x 106 bytes
Maximum
Total
Storage
Decimal Digits
1,208 x 106
2
4.4 x 106
Characters
805 x 106
1. 024 x 106
2.2 x 106
Minimum
0
0
0
Average (Random)
40
790
70.0
Maximum
197
1,560
140
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
85,000
70,000
90,000
Transfer Load Size, char.
512
2 to 640
1 to 2, 720 bytes
Checking
Parity
Cyclic check code
Cyclic check code
1130 Disk File is an
integral part of tbe 1131
2A and 2B Processing Units
Model 2311 Disk Storage
Drive can also be used; see
Comparison Charts, page
,11:220.111
AUXILIARY
STORAGE
Waiting
Time,
msec.
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum
Numher
of Units
Demands on
Processor,
%
Transfer
Rate, Kilochar/sec.
MAGNETIC
TAPE
l/channel
804-3 804-1
804-2
804-4
On-Line
64
64
64
64
Reading/Writing
8+8
8+8
8+8
8+8
Searching
0
0
0
0
Rewinding
Reading/Writing
64
64
0.8 to 1.6 to
7.5
15.0
64
2.2 to
20.0
64
3.3 to
30.0
Starting/Stepping
0
0
0
0
Peak
32.0
64.0
89.0
124.0
1,000-char blocks
23.5
47.0
59.0
83.0
100-char blocks
6.8
13.6
14.5
20.6
555
777
Data Tracks
8
Data Rows per Block
Variable
Data Rows per Inch
400
400
>
See comment below
/
IBM 729 Compatible
No
Reading
6~t:t~:i~ws~:~~,
Writing
None
Checking
PIUS
No magnetic tape
equipment announced
Features and Comments
*With optional equipment.
9/66
A
AUERBACH
The ffiM 2400 Series
magnetic tape units, Models
1 tbrough 6, can be connected;
see Comparison Cbarts, page
11:220.111
AUXILIARY STORAGE AND MAGNETIC TAPE
11:220.111
roM System/360
System Identity
420:
Computer System Report No.
Model Number.
2361
2302
2311
2321
2314
2301
Core
Discs
Discs
Mag. strips
Discs
Drum
4
32/channel
64/channel
64/channel
8/channel
8/channel
Units On-Line
l/channel
l/channel
Read/Write
Operations
64/channel
l/channel
Seek Operations
Type of Storage
1
l/channel
l/channel
l/channel
-
64/channel
64/channel
64/channel
1. 05 x 10 6 byte
112 x 10 6 bytes
7.25x10 6 bytes 40 x 10 6 bytes
25.9 x106bytes 4.10 x 10 6 bytes
Minimum
2.10 x10 6 bytes
224 x 10 6 bytes
7.25x10 6 bytes 400 x 10 6 bytes
207 x 106 bytes
4.10 x106bytes
Maximum
16.78 x 10 6
14,352 x 10 6/ch
928 x 10 6 /ch.
51,200x10 6/ch . 3,312x10 6 /ch.
66 x 10 6/ch •
Decimal Digits
8.39 x 10 6
7,176xl0 6 /ch
464 x 106/c h.
25,600 x106/c h. l,656x10 6/ch.
33 x 106/ch.
Characters
0.008
0
0
0
0
0
0.008
182
97.5
550
87.5
8.6
0.008
214
170
600
165
17.2
500,000
132,000
104,000
25,800
222,000
1,170,000
1 to 255
1 to 224,280
1 to 36,250
1 to 40,000
1 to 129,384
1 to 20,486
Cyclic
check code
Parity
Directly
addressable;
for Models
50-75 only
Cyclic
check code
Cyclic
check code
Cyclic
check code
Cyclic
check code
2 or 4 access
arms per
unit
Changeable
"Disk Pack"
storage
medium
10 changeable
"Data Cells"
per drive
8 on-line
disc drives
per 2314
For Models
50-75 only
2415 Series
7340 Mod. 3
48/channel
64/channel
2400 Series
Mod. 1
Mod. 2
Mod. 3
Mod. 5
Mod. 4
Transfer Load Size, char.
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
On-Line
Reading/Writing
l/channel
l/channel
0
0
0
Searching
64 per channel
64 per channel
48/channel
64/channel
Rewinding
Reading/Writing
Starting/Stopping
Varies
Varies
Varies
Varies
Varies
340.0
AUXILIARY
STORAGE
Effective Transfer Rate,
char/sec.
1 per channel
Varies
Waiting
Time,
msec.
Maximum
0
Varies
Maximum
Total
Storage
Average (Random)
1 per channel
Varies
Number of
Words per
Unit
Minimum
Mod. 6
64 per channel
64 per channel
Maximum
Number
Maximum
Number
of Units
Demands on
Processor,
30.0
60.0
90.0
60.0
120.0
180.0
15.0 or 30.0
20.3
40.5
60.8
30.6
61. 2
91. 8
10.1 or 15.3
5.2
10.3
15.5
5.6
11.3
16.9
2.6 or 2.8
Peak
1. OOO-char blocks
%
Transfer
Rate, Kilochar/sec.
100 -char blocks
8 (6 with Compatibility option)
8 (6 with Compatibility option)
8 (or 6*)
8
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Data Rows per Block
800 (200 or 556 with
Compatibility option)
1600 (800/556/200 with
Compatibility option)
800 (or
200-556*)
1,511 or
3,022
Data Rows per Inch
Yes'
Yes'
Yes'
No
Track. row, and diagonal parity
Vertical parity check bit
Read after write
Read after write
Dual-channel controllers and tape SWitching units are available;
backward reading and error correction facilities are standard
Dual-row
Same as 2400's parity
Read after
Read after
write
write
Models 1, 2,
and 3 lack the'
error correction feature.
Cartridgeloaded; can
read backward.
Data Tracks
MAGNETIC
TAPE
IBM 729 Compatible
Reading
Checking
Writing
Features and Comments
'With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
COMPARISON CHARTS
11:220.112
System Identity
mM 704 & 709
mM 1401 & 1460
mM 1410
406: & 407:
401: & 415:
402:
Model Number
733
1311
1405
1301 Mod. 1,2 1311
Type of Storage
Drum
Discs
Discs
Discs
Discs
Units On- Line
4
5
1
5
10
Read/Write
Operations
Computer System Report No.
Maximum
Number
1
1
1
2
2
Seek Operations
0
lor 5*
lor 3*
10
2 or 10'
Number of
Words per
Unit
Minimum
4,096
2,000,000
10,000,000
28,000,000
2,000,000
Maximum
4,096
2,980,000*
20,000,000
56,000,000
2,980,000*
Maximum
Total
Storage
Decimal Digits
172,032
14.9 x 106
20 x 106
280 x 106
29.8 x 10 6
CIuiracter s
98,304
14.9 x 106
20 x 106
280 x 10 6
29.8x10 6
Minimum
0
0
0
0
0
Average (Random)
12.5
270 or 170'
600
177
170
Maximum
47.7
432 or 288*
800
214
288
Effective Transfer Rate, char/sec.
60,436
33,800 or
38,200*
8,420
42,000 or
82,000*
38,200
Transfer Load Size, char.
6
100 to 20,000
by 100
200 or
1,000
1 to
112,000
100 to 20,000
by 100
Checking
Timing
Parity,
write check
Parity,
write check
Parity,
write check
Parity,
write check
Changeable
storage
medium
Not available
with 1460
systems
1302 can
also be
used
Changeable
storage
medium
AUXILIARY
STORAGE
Waiting
Time,
msec.
Features and Comments
727
729 I
7330
729
Series
7340
Mod. 2
7330
729
Series
7340
Mod. 2
On-Line
10
48
6
6
4
20
20
8
Reading/Writing
1
6
1
1
1
2
2
2
Searching
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Rewinding
6
4
20
20
8
100
1000rll 100to 22"
?
54 or 0"
34.0
20.0
20.2
14.2
4.4
4.0
Model Number
Maximum
Number
of Units
10
48
6
Reading/Writing
36/21
4 max.
1000r23* 100
Starting/Stopping
0
38 or O·
Peak
15
20.0
1,OOO-char blocks
12.9
14.2
lOO-char blocks
5.5
4.0
Data Tracks
6
6
6
6 or 8
6
6
6 or 8
Data Rows per Block
Variable
1 to N
1 to N
1 to N
1 to N
1toN
1 to N
Data Rows per Inch
200
200, 556
200, 556,
800
1511
200, 556
200, 556
800
1511
IBM 729 Compatible
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Track & row parity
D"B;lt;0W
parl
Track & row parity
~~tt:°"
Demands on
Processor,
%
Transfer
Rate, Kilochar/sec.
MAGNETIC
TAPE
Reading
Track & row parity
Checking
Writing
None
Read after
write
Features and Comments
*With optional equipment.
9/66
fA
AUERBACH
Variahle Variable
Variable
125, 250 1000
200, 556
No
Row
Darity
None
No
Row
I Darity
Yes
~;:iJ
Read after write
Can read Can read
backward backward
11:220.123
AUXILIARY STORAGE AND MAGNETIC TAPE
UNIVAC 1108
System Identity
785:
Computer System Report No.
Model Number
Fastrand II
FH-432
FH-1782
Drum
Drum
Drum
8/channel
9/0"annel
8/channel
Units On-Line
l/channel
l/channel
l/channel
Read/Write
Operations
8/channel
l/channel
l/channel
Seek Operations
22,020,096
262,144
2,097,152
Minimum
176,160,768
2,097,152
16,778,216
1,850 x 106 /ch
22.1 x 106 /ch
174.3 x 106 /ch
1,057 x 106/ch
12.6 x 106/ch
99.7 x 106/ ch
5.0
0
0
Type of Storage
Maximum
Decimal Digits
Characters
Maximum
Number
Number of
Words per
Unit
Maximum
Total
Storage
AUXILIARY
STORAGE
Minimum
Waiting
93.0
4.25
17.0
155.0
8.5
34.0
148,200
1,422,000
1,362,000
6 to 393,204
6 to 393,204
6 to 393,204
Parity, phase
Word parity
Word parity
Dual-channel
controller
available
Dual-channel
controller
available
Can be intermixed
with FH-432 on
same controller
Uniservo VIC
Uniservo Ville
16/channel
16/channel
Average (Random)
Time,
msce.
Maximum
Effective Transfer Rate,
char/sec.
Transfer Load Size. char.
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
On-Line
l/channel
1/channel
Reading/Writing
1/channel
l/channel
'Searching
All
All
Maximum
Number
of Units
Rewinding
0.43 max
1.2 max
Reading/Writing
0
0
Starting/Stopping
8.5 to 34.0
24.0 to 96.0
Peak
21.1 to 29.6
59.5 to 79.7
1,000 -char blocks
4.76 to 13.6
13.4 to 38.4
100 -char blocks
Demands on
Processor,
%
Transfer
Rate, Kilochar/sec.
Data Tracks
6
6 to 393,204
Data Rows per Block
200,556,800
Data Rows per Inch
MAGNETIC
TAPE
IBM 729 Compatible
Yes
Track and row parity
Reading
Read after write
Writing
Dual-channel controllers available;
9-track, IDM 2400 Series compatible
versions available
Features and Comments
Checking
*With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
~ III"'"
~EDP
AUEflBAC~
•
I(PDII:IS
11:230.101
COMPARISON CHARTS
HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS:
PUNCHED CARD AND
PUNCHED TAPE INPUT-OUTPUT
HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS COMPARISON CHARTS
PUNCHED CARD AND PUNCHED TAPE INPUT-OUTPUT
\.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9 '66
11:230.102
COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
Burroughs B 100/200/300
Series
Burroughs B 5500
201:
203:
B 2500 & B 3500
210:
B 122
B 123; B 124;
B 129
2
2
2
l/ch.
l/ch.
475; 800; 1400
200
475; 800; 1400
200
800; 1400
2.5; 4.3; 7.5
0.04
0.16
?
?
Automatic
Automatic
Validity
Validity
Model Number
B 122
B 123;
124; or 129
Maximum Number On-Line
2
Peak Speed, cards/min.
200
Demands on Processor, %
0.7
9110
9111;9112
Code Translation
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Checking
Validity,
photocells
Validity,
photocells
Validity
Validity
Features and Comments
Maximum of 1 reader with
B 100 Series; B 200/300
6-l-'sec processor Is necessary for use of B 129
Reads Hollerith or column
binary code
Model Number
B 303
B 304
B 303
B 304
9210
9211
Maximum Number On-Line
1
1
1
1
l/ch.
l/ch.
Peak Speed, cards/min.
100
300
100
300
100
300
0.03
?
?
Reads Hollerith or column
binary code
Demands on Processor, %
2.5
7.4
0.01
Code Translation
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Checking
Read
compare
Read
compare
Read compare
Read compare
Features and Comments
Binary card punching is
possible with B 300 Series
processor only
Punches Hollerith or
binary code
Punches Hollerith or
binary code
Model Number
B 141
B 141
9120
Maximum Number On-Line
2
2
l/channel
Peak Speed, char/sec.
500 or 1,000
500 or 1. 000
500 or 1.000
Demands on Processor, %
1. 5 or 3.1
?
?
Code Translation
Automatic
Programmed; automatic*
Automatic
Checking
Parity
Parity
Parity
Features and Comments
Available for use only with
B 200/300 6-l-'sec processor
Model Number
B 341
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, char/sec.
Optional Input Code
Translator provides full
code translation capability
B 341
9220
1
2
l/channel
100
100
100
Demands on Processor, %
0.3
?
?
Code Translation
Automatic
Programmed; automatic*
Automatic
Checking
None
None
None
Features and Comments
Available for use only with
B 200/300 6-l-'sec processor
*With optional equipment.
9/66
Burroughs 500 Systems
A
AUERBACH
ill
Optional Output Code
Translator provides full
code translation capability
,/
./
PUNCHED CARD AND PUNCHED TAPE INPUT·OUTPUT
CDC 160 & 160-A
CDC 1604 & 1604-A
11:230.103
System Identity
CDC 3000 Series
242: & 244:
241: & 243:
245: etc.
167
1610 (IBM 088) 1617
405
1
3
3
Many
Maximum Number On-Line
250
1,300
250
1,200
Peak Speed, cards/min.
0.4 max.
<0.2
None
Automatic or
matched
Automatic
At half speed
None
Dual read*
100 (1. 1 in 160-A*)
Programmed (Automatic*)
None
Computer System Report No.
Model Number
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
Checking
A number of other IBM units
can be used
Full card buffer and dual
read controls optional
170
1609 (IBM 521)
CDC
415
1
3
Many
100
100
250
100 (1. 0 in 160-A*)
0.06 max.
<0.1
Programmed
Matched or instruction
Automatic
None
None
Optional; depends on
controller
A number of other IBM units
can be used
Full card buffer and dual
write controls optional
350
CDC 350
350
1
1
Many
350
350
350
I
IBM
523
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
Features and Comments
I
IBM
544
Model Number
Minimum Number On-Line
1100
100
0.06 max.
<0.1
Programmed
Matched
Programmed
None
None
Parity
1 250
Peak Speed, cards/min.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, char/sec.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
I
'-
BRPE-11
BRPE
BRPE-11
1
1
Many
110
110
110
100
0.16 max.
<0.1
Programmed
Matched
Programmed
None
None
Parity
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, char/sec.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
*With optional equipment.
C 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:230.104
COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
Control Data 6000 Series
GE-115
GE 200 Series
260:
310:
320: etc.
Model Number
405
CR-I0
CR-11
CR-12
D225B
D225C
Maximum Number. On-Line
Many
65
65
65
1
1
Computer System Report No.
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
Peak Speed, cards/min.
1.200
300
300
600
400
1. 000
Demands on Processor, %
0
80 max.
54 max.
54 max.
0.3 to 2. 0
1. 3 to 7.5
Code Translation
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Checking
Dual read*
?
None
Read check
Features and Comments
Full-card buffer and
dual read controls are
optional
CR-ll and CR-12 have
3 program -selectable
stackers
Decimal or 10- or 12-row
binary formats
Model Numher
415
CP-ll
CP-21
E225K
Maximum Number On-Line
Many
64
64
1
1
Peak Speed, cards/min.
250
60 to 200
300
100
300
2.9toI7.3
Demands on Processor. %
0
?
?
1.0t05.8
Code Translation
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Checking
Optional; depends on
controller
?
Hole count
Double
punch.
blank col.
Features and Comments
Full-card huffer and
dual write controls are
optional
Model Number
3691
Maximum Number On-Line
Decimal or 10- or I2-row
binary formats
3694
TR-10
Paper Tape System
Many
Many
64
1
Peak Speed. char/sec.
350
1.000
400
250 or 1. 000
Demands on Processor, %
0
0
?
0.9to11.0
Code Translation
Programmed
Programmed
Programmed
Programmed
Checking
None
Character
parity
Parity or read compare
Parity
Reads square-hole or
round-hole tape
Model Number
3691
3694
TP-ll
Paper Tape System
Maximum Number On-Line
Many
Many
64
1
Peak Speed, char/sec.
110
110
100
110
Demands on Processor, %
0
0
?
0.4 to 2.4
Code Translation
Programmed
Programmed
Programmed
Programmed
Checking
None
Character
parity
None
None
Square-hole and round-hole
versions are available
Features and Comments
*Wlth optional equipment.
9/66
Hole count
Speed depends
upon no. of
.columns
punched per
card
Features and Comments
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
E225M
A
AUERBACH
lIP
PUNCHED CARD AND PUNCHED TAPE INPUT·OUTPUT
GE 600 Series
GE 400 Series
\
\.
11:230.105
System Identity
Honeywell Series 200
Computer System Report No.
330:
340:
510:
CR-21
CR-20
214-2
223
7
10 per I/O Controller
l/trunk
l/trunk
900
900
400
800
0.8 to 1. 4
0.72 max.
Varies
Varies
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Validity. photocells
Validity. photocells
Validity
Validity
Can read intermixed
Hollerith and binary
cards
Can read intermixed
Hollerith and binary
cards
CP-I0
CP-20
CP-I0
7
7
10 per I/O Controller
l/trunk
l/trunk
100
300
100
300
100 to 400
50 to 270 or
80 to 360
1.1to1.8
0.29 to 0.42
0.96 max.
0.24 max.
Varies
Varies
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Code Translation
Hole count
Hole count
Row parity
Row parity
Check on
punching dies
activated
Hole count
Checking
Row buffer
only
Full cardimage buffer
Full cardimage buffer
Speed depends
upon position
of last column
punched
Speed depends
upon no. of
columns
punched
CP-20
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, cards/min.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
214-1, 2
224
TS-20
TS-20
209
7
10 per I/O Controller
1/trunk
500
500
600
0.34 to 0.56
0.30 max.
Varies
Programmed
Programmed
Programmed
Parity
Parity
Parity (by program)
Combination reader/punch
unit; can be used off-line
Combination reader/punch
unit; can be used off-line
TS-20
TS-20
210
7
10 per I/O Controller
1/trunk
110
110
110
0.07 to 0.12
0.07 max.
Varies
Programmed
Programmed
Programmed
None
None
None
Model Number
Minimum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, cards/min.
Demands on Processor, %
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed. char/sec.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, char/sec.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
*With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:230.106.
COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
Honeywell 400 & 1400
Honeywell 800 & 1800
IBM 1130
501: and 505:
502: and 503:
418:
423-2
827
1442
Model 6
427
Maximum Number On-Line
1
1
64
1
1
Peak Speed, cards/min.
800
650
800
300
400
Demands on Processor, %
60 or 2*
57
0.1 max.
Varies
Code Translation
Automatic
Instruction
Automatic
By subroutine
Cbecking
Hole count,
validity
Hole count
Hole count, validity
Dual read
Features and Comments
IBM 1402
Card Read
Punch
IBM 088
collator
Model Number
427
424-1
424-2
827
1442
Model 6
1442
Model 7
Maximum Number On-Line
1
1
1
64
1
1
49 to 202
91 to 355
Reader-punch
has single feed
Peak Speed, cards/min.
250
100
250
250
Demands on Processor, %
70 or 2*
83
74
0.03 max.
Varies
Code Translation
Automatic Instruction
Automatic
By subroutine
Checking
Hole
count
Echo
Hole count
Echo
Features and Comments
IBM
1402
Card
Read
Punch
Usable for
off-line gang
punching
Model Number
409
809
Maximum Number On-Line
3
8
1
Peak Speed, char/sec.
1,
1,000
60
Serial-by~column
000
Demands on Processor, %
100
2.0 max.
Varies
Programmed
Programmed
By subroutine
Checking
Parity
Parity
None
Mode I 1 reads strips only;
Model 2 reads strips or
spooled tape
Model Number
410
810
1055 Modell
Maximum Number On-Line
2
8
1
Peak Speed, char/sec.
110
110
14.8
Demands on Processor, .%
100
0.66 max.
Varies
Code Translation
Programmed
Programmed
By subroutine
Checking
None
None
None
Punches one-inch
8-track paper tape
Features and Comments
*With optional equipment.
9/66
punching
1134
Code Translation
Features and Comments
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
1442
Model 7
Model Number
A
AUERBACH
~
./
/
PUNCHED CARD AND PUNCHED TAPE INPUT·OUTPUT
11:230.107
IBM SYSTEM/360
Model 20
Models 30 thru 75
422:
423: thru 42a:
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
2501
2501
2520
Model Al Model A2 Model Al
2560
MFCM
1442 Mdl
N1, N2
1
1
1
1
a/channel a/channel a/channel a/channel a/channel
600
1,000
500
500
400
600
12.0
20.0
10.0
4.1
Varies
Varies
2501
Mdl B1
2501
Mdl B2
1.000
2520
Mdl B1
2540
Mdl1
500
1.000
Varies
Varies
Automatic
Automatic Automatic
Automatic Automatic
Validity, circuit checks
Dual
read
Validity
Dual
read
All use solar cells and read serially
by column; 2520 Al is a combination
reader/punch unit; 2560 is a combination
reader/punch/interpreter/ collator unit.
Readerpunch
has
single
feed
Readerpunch
has
single
feed
Reader
and punch
are independent
1442
Model 5
2520 Mdl 2520
Model A3
AI. A2
2560
MFCM
1442 Mdl
N1, N2
1
1
a/channel a/channel a/cbannel a/channel
Dual read
Single-access
clutch
2520 Mdl
B1, B2
1
1
91 to 360 500
300
91 to 360 91 to 360
500
Varies
9.5
3.1
Varies
7.5
Varies
2520
Mdl B3
300
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, cards/min.
Demands on Processor t %
Code Translation
Checking
Features and Comments
2540
Modell
300
Varies
Model Number
Minimum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, cards/min.
Demands on Processor, %
Automatic
Automatic Automatic
Automatic
Code Translation
Echo
Echo
Hole count
Checking
Echo
1442 punches serially by column,
Serial
others by row; 2520 Al is a combination by
Row-by-row
reader/punch unit; 2560 is a combination column
parallel punching
reader /punch/interpreter / collator unit.
punching
Column Binary
and Punch Feed
Read options
available
a/channel
Varies
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, char/sec.
Demands on Processor, %
Programmed
Code Translation
Parity
Spooling facilities are optional
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
Features and Comments
2671
1,000
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, char/sec.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
Checking
\,
Features and Comments
*With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:230.108
COMPARISON CHARTS
Syste m Identity
Computer System Report No.
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
IBM System/360 Model 44
IBM 704 & 709
435:
406: & 407:
Model Number
1442
Model Nl
Maximum Number On-Line
8/channel
8/channel
8/channel
8/channel
1
Peak Speed, cards/min.
400
600/1,000
500
1,000
250
2501
Models Bl. B2
2520
Model Bl
2540
Modell
711
Demands on Processor, %
Varies'
Varies
Varies
Varies
27 with 704; < 1 with 709
Code Translation
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
None
Checking
DUBI read·
DUBI read
Validity
Dual read
Possible
Features and Comments
Readerpunch has
single
feed
Singleaccess
clutch
Reader-punch
has single
feed
Reader and
punch are
independent
Reads binary image
of 72 out of 80
columns
Model Number
1442
Models Nl. N2
2520
Models B1, B2
2520
Model B3
2540
Modell
721
Maximum Number On-Line
8/channel
8/channel
8/chaimel
8/channel
1
Peak Speed, cards/min.
91 to 360
500
300
300
100
Demands on Processor, %
Varies
Varies
Varies
40 with 704; < 1 with 709
Code Translation
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
None
Checking
Echo
Echo
Hole count
None
Features and Comments
Serial-bycolumn
punching
Row-by-row parallel punching
Column Binary
and Punch Feee Can be used to
gang punch
Read options
available
Model Number
2671
Maximum .Number On-Line
8/channel
Peak Speed, char/sec.
1,000
Demands on Processor, %
Varies
Code Translation
Programmed
Checking
Parity
Features and Comments
Spooling facilities are optional
/
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed. char/sec.
/
Demands on Processor. %
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
Code Translation
Checking
/
Features and Comments
·With optional equipment.
9/66
A
AUERBACH
I!I
PUNCHED CARD AND PUNCHED TAPE INPUT·OUTPUT
11:230.109
IBM 1401 & 1460
IBM 1401-G
IBM 1410
401: & 415:
401: 012
402:
1402 Mod. 1
1402 Mod. 4 or 5
1402 Mod. 2
1
1
2
System Ident! ty
Computer System Report No.
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
800
450
800
87 to 16'
84 or 58*
1
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Hole count, validity
Hole count, validity
Hole count, validity
Column binary fonnat
is optional; three
stackers
Three stackers
Three stackers
1402 Mod. 1
1402 Mod. 4 or 5
1402 Mod. 2
1
1
2
250
250
250
Peak Speed, cards/min.
Demands on Processor, %
Peak Speed. cards/min.
Demands on Processor. %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
Minimum Number On-Line
91 to 7*
91 or 75*
0.4
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Code Translation
Hole count
Hole count
Hole count
Checking
Column binary format
is optional; three stackers
Three stackers; optional
read station
Tbree stackers
1011
1011
1011
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
Features and Comments
Model Number
1
1
2
500
500
500
Peak Speed. char/sec.
100 or 0.6*
100
0.5
Demands on Processor, %
Plugboard wiring
Plugboard wiring
Plughoard wiring
Parity
Parity
Parity
Maximum Number On-Line
Code Translation
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
1012
1
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
150
Peak Speed, char/sec.
100
Demands on Processor. %
Code Translation
Programmed
Read compare
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
*With optional eqUipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:230.110
COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
IBM 1440
IBM 7010
IBM 7040 & 7044
414:
416:
410: & 411:
Model Number
1442 Mod. 1
1442l>iod. 2,4
1402 Mod. 2
1402 Mod. 2
1622
Maximum Number On-Line
2
2
2
1
1
Peak Speed, cards/min.
800
800
250
300
400
Demands on Processor, %
21 to 73
21 to 73
0.32
O. 4 max.
0.2 max.
Code Translation
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Checking
Dual read
Hole count, . validity
Hole count
Dual read
Features and Comments
Models 1 and 2 are combination
read/punch units
Three stackers
Reads binary images or BCD
Model Number
1442
Mod. 1
1442
Mod. 2
1444
1402 Mod. 2
1402 Mod. 2
1622
Maximum Number On-Line
2
2
1
2
1
1
Peak Speed, cards/min.
50 to 270 88 to 360
250
250
250
125
Demands on Processor, %
83
91
0.1
0.3 max.
0.1 max.
Code Translation
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Checking
Echo
Hole count
Hole count
Read compare
Features and Comments
1442 speed depends on
number of columns
punched
Three stackers
Punch~s
Model Number
1011
1011
1011
Maximum Number On-Line
1
2
5
Peak Speed, char/sec.
500
500
500
Demands on Processor, %
100
0.144 min.
0.1 max.
Code Translation
Plugboard wiring
Plngboard wiring
Plugboard wiring
Checking
Parity
Parity
Parity
76
Hole
count
Features and Comments
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
/
Model Number
1012
Maximum Number On-Line
1
Peak Speed, char/sec.
150
Demands on Processor, %
100
Code Translation
Programmed
Checking
Read compare
/
Features and Comments
*With optional equipment.
9/66
BCD or binary image
fA
AUERBACH
®
!."
PUNCHED CARD AND PUNCHED TAPE INPUT·OUTPUT
11:230.111
IBM 7070/7072/7074
IBM 7080
IBM 7090 & 7094
403: etc.
417:
408: & 409:
7501
7500
714
7502
711
1
3
10
1
1
60
500
250
60
250
100
5 max.
100
100
<1
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
None
Double punch,
blank column
Read compare, Hole count
char. validity
Validity
Possible
Reads
numeric
codes
only
No longer
in production;
not usable
on 7072
Reads binary image of
72 out of 80 columns
7550
722
721
3
10
1
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, cards/min.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
Checking
Fea1ures and Comments
Model Number
Minimum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, cards/min,
250
100
100
2.5 max.
100
<1
Automatic
Automatic
None
Code Translation
Double punch, blank column
Hole count, validity
None
Checking
No longer in production;
not usable on 7072
No longer in production
Can be used to gang punch
Demands on Processor, %
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, char/sec.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, char/sec.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
Checking
(
Fea1ures and Comments
'*With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:230.112
COMPARISON CHARTS
Syste m Identity
Computer System Report No.
Model Number
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
IBM 1620
LGP-30 (Control Data)
Monrobot XI
412: & 413:
352:
531:
1622
IBM 024 or 026
IBM 024 or 026
Maximum Number On-Line
1
1
1
Peak Speed, cards/min.
250
(20 col/sec.)
(16 col/sec.)
Demands on Processor, %
1.4
100
4.6
Code Translation
Automatic
Programmed
Matched or programmed
Checking
Dual read, parity
None
Parity
Model 321 Control Unit
required
Model 24 Coupler required
Features and Comments
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
Model Number
1622
IBM 024 or 026
Maximum Number On-Line
1
1
Peak Speed, cards/min.
125
(16 col/sec.)
Demands on Processor, %
0.7
4.6
Code Translation
Automatic
Matched or programmed
Checking
Read compare
None
Features and Comments
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
Model 26 Coupler required
Photoelectric
Reader
1
1
3
3
10
200
20
300
100
5.8
?
360
Maximum Number On-Line
1
Peak Speed, char/sec.
150
Demands on Processor, %
100
100
Code Translation
Automatic
Matched or programmed
Matched or programmed
Checking
Parity
None
Parity
The 360, a modified Flexowriter, is basic LGP-30
I/O device
,/
Model Number
1624
360
342
Paper Tape Punch
Maximum Number On-Line
1
1
1
3
Peak Speed, char/sec.
15
10
20
20
Demands on Processor, %
100
2.4 to 100
5 to 100
5.8
Code Translation
Automatic
Matched
Matched
Matched or programmed
Checking
None
None
None
None
,/
/
Features and Comments
*With optional equipment.
9/66
Paper Tape
Reader
1621
Features and Comments
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
341, 342
Model Number
A
AUERBACH
@
PUNCHED CARD AND PUNCHED TAPE INPUT·OUTPUT
11:230.113
NCR 315, 315-100, 315 RMC
PB 250 (Raytheon)
601:, 602:, 603:
631:
376-7
376-8
380-3
472-2, -3
2
2
1
1
300
400
2,000
400
73 max.
73 max.
80 max.
84 max.
Automatic
Automatic
Programmed
Dual read
Validity
None
IBM 1442 Card Read Punch
units; not available witb 315
RMC systems
376-7
376-8
376-2
Computer System Report No.
CR 2
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, cards/min.
Demands on Processor,
376-101
Card Punch Coupler
2
4
4
88 to 360
100
250
83 max.
77 max.
<1
<1
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Echo
Echo
?
IBM 1442 Card Read Punch
units; not available with
315 RMC systems
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
Checking
No firm specifications
available
2
%
Code Translation
Not available
with 315 RMC
systems
50 to 270
System Identity
Features and Comments
Model Number
Minimum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, cards/min.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
Checking
No firm specifications
available
Features and Comments
472-1, 472-3
361-201
Flexowriter
Reader
HSR-1
1
1
1
2
1,000
600
10
300
Peak Speed, char/sec.
100
Demands on Processor, %
100
100
6 to 100
Programmed
Programmed
Matched or programmed
Parity
Parity
None
Code translation can be
performed during time
between characters
Code translation can be
performed during time
between characters
472-1, 472-3
371-201
Flexowriter
Punch
1
1
1
?
110
120
15
110
100
100
22 to 37
0.05 to 100
Programmed
Programmed
Matched or programmed
None
None
None
Code translation can be
performed during time
between characters
Code translation can be
performed during time
between characters
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Code Translation
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
HSP-1
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, char/sec.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
*With optional eqUipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:230.114
COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
Philco 2000 Series
RCA 301
RCA 3301
651: etc.
701:
703:
Model Number
258
323
324
329
Maximum Number On-Line
28
2
2
2
Peak Speed. cards/min.
2.000
600
900
1,470
Demands on Processor, %
0.33 max.
80 to 13*
0.1
0.2
Code Translation
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Checking
Dual read
Hole count, validity
Char. validity
Features and Comments
May be any of 7 units on
a UBC
Reject stacker
Photocells are tested during
each card cycle
Model Number
265
334
3436
Maximum Number On-Line
28
1
2
Peak Speed. cards/min.
100
100
300
0.02 max.
100 to 1*
<0.1
Code Translation
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Checking
Read after punch
Hole count. validity
Hole count
Features and Comments
May be any of 7 units on a
UBC
Model Number
Part of 240
Part of 241
321
322
321
322
Maximum Number On-Line
1
28
1
1
2
2
Peak Speed. char/sec.
1,000 & 500
100
500 or 1.000
100
1,000
Demands on Processor I %
0.1 max.
100 to 0.1*
100 to 0.4*
<0.1
0.2
Code Translation
Matched
Matched
Programmed
Checking
Parity
Parity
Parity
Features and Comments
Separate
direct
connection
May be any
of 7 units on
a UBC
Model Number
Part of 240
Part of 241
Maximum Number On-Line
1
28
Peak Speed. char/sec.
60
Computer System Report No.
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
/
, Demands on Processor. %
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
Punches Hollerith or
column binary code
,/
321, 331
321. 331
1
2
2
100
100
300
<0.1
Demands on Processor, %
0.1 max.
100 to 0.1*
<0.1
Code Translation
Matched
Matched
Programmed
Checking
None
None
Echo
Features and Comments
Separate
direct
connection
May be any of
7 units on a
UBC
·With optional equipment.
9/66
A
AUERBACH
®
332
It'
11:230.117
PUNCHED CARD AND PUNCHED TAPE INPUT-OUTPUT
UNIVAC 418
UNIVAC 1004
UNIVAC 1050
790:
770:
777:
UNIVAC 1004 Card Reader
1004 I
1004 II,
1004 III
0706-00
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
16
1
1
4 or 8
4 or 8
400 or 615
400
615
800/900
600
0.1 to 0.4
100
94
0.6 max.
0.3 max.
Automatic
Automatic
automatic on 0column models
Circuit checks
Proper photocell
functioning only
Hole count
1004 is used on-line
with 418 to handle
card I/O
Auxiliary 400 cpm reader
can be added to any
1004 system
900 cpm rate is attained
when only 72 columns
per card are read
UNIVAC 1004 Card Punch
2009, 2011
0600-00
0600-12
16
1
4 or 8
4 or 8
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, cards/min.
Demands on Processor. %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
Checking
200
200
300
200
<0.1
<1
5.1 max.
3.4 max.
Automatic
Automatic
automatlc on
80-column models
Hole count
Hole count
Hole count
1004 is used on-line
with 418 to handle
card I/O
Available for 80 or 90-column
cards; read station is
optional
Can punch binary
images
Paper Tape Subsystem
0902
0903-00
Fea1ures and Comments
Model Number
Minimum Numher On-Line
Peak Speed, cards/min.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
Checking
Fea1ures and Comments
Model Number
?
1
1
3 or 8
3 or 8
200
400
1,000
500
<0.1
100
0.5 max.
0.3 max.
Programmed
Programmed
Programmed
Parity
Parity
Parity
Combination reader/punch
unit
Model Number
0706-01
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, char/sec.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
Checking
Fea1ures and Comments
Paper Tape Subsystem
F0606
0606-01
1
1
3 or 8
110
110
110
<0.1
<1
0.05 max.
Programmed
Programmed
Programmed
None
None
None
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, char/sec.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
Checking
Fea1ures and Comments
*With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:230.118
COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Model Number
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
UNIVAC 1107
UNIVAC 1108
800:
784:
785:
490 Punched Card Subsystem
Type 7223
1108 Punched Card Subsystem
Maximum Number On-Line
1 per chamel
15
1 per channel
Peak Speed, cards/min.
800/900
600
900
Demands on Processor, %
O. 032 to O. 25
0.15 max.
0.016 max.
Code Translation
Automatic on 80-column
models
Automatic (or matched)
Automatic
Checking
Hole count
Dual read
Hole count
Features and Comments
Higher rate when reading
only 72 columns; row and
column binary optional
Model Number
490 Punched Card Subsystem
Type 7224
Type 7266
1108 Punched Card Subsystem
Maximum Number On-Line
1 per chamel
15
15
1 per channel
Peak Speed, cards/min.
300
150
300
300
Demands on Processor, %
0.011 to 0.084
0.04 max.
0.08 max.
0.005 max.
Code Translation
Automatic on 80-column
models
Automatic (or matched)
Automatic
Checking
Hole count
Read compare
Full card image check
Features and Comments
Binary card images
can be punched
(240 holes max. )
Only Type 7266 is suitable
for binary punching
Binary card images
can be punched
(240 holes max.)
Model Number
490 Paper Tape Subsystem
Type 7423
1108 Paper Tape Subsystem
Maximum Number On-Line
1 per chalUlel
15
1 per channel
Peak Speed, char/sec.
400
400
400
Demands on Processor. %
0.06 to 0.48
0.16
0.03 max.
Programmed
Programmed
Programmed
Checking
None
None
None
Features and Comments
Parity check can be
programmed
Parity check can be
programmed
Parity check can be
programmed
Model Number
490 Paper Tape Subsystem
Type 7423
1108 Paper Tape Subsystem
Maximum Number On-Line
1 per channel
15
1 per chalUlel
Peak Speed. char/sec.
110
110
110
Demands on Processor %
0.016 to 0.13
0.04
0.008 max.
Code Translation
Programmed
Programmed
Programmed
Checking
Verify punch activation
Verify punch activation
Verify punch activation
Features and Comments
*With optional equipment.
9/66
Row binary and column
binary reading optional
Code Translation
t
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
UNIVAC 490 Series
A
AUERBACH
~
11:230.117
PUNCHED CARD AND PUNCHED TAPE INPUT-OUTPUT
UNIVAC 418
UNIVAC 1004
UNIVAC 1050
790:
770:
777:
UNIVAC 1004 Card Reader
1004 I
1004 II,
1004 III
0706-00
0706-01
16
1
1
4 or 8
4 or 8
400 or 615
400
615
800/900
600
0.6 max.
0.3 max.
94
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
0.1 to 0.4
100
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic on 80column models
Circuit checks
Proper photocell
functioning only
Hole count
1004 is used on-line
with 418 to handle
card I/O
Auxiliary 400 cpm reader
can be added to any
1004 system
900 cpm rate is attained
when only 72 columns
per card are read
UNIVAC 1004 Card Punch
2009, 2011
0600-00
0600-12
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, cards/min.
Demands on Processor I %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
Checking
16
1
4 or 8
4 or 8
200
200
300
200
<0.1
<1
5.1 max.
3. 4 max.
Automatic
Automatic
au oma 1C on
80-column models
Hole count
Hole count
Hole count
Features and Comments
Model Number
Minimum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, cards/min.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
Checking
..
1004 is used on-line
with 418 to handle
card I/O
Available for 80 or 90-column
cards; read station is
optional
Can punch binary
images
Paper Tape Subsystem
0902
0903-00
1
1
3 or 8
3 or 8
200
400
1.000
500
<0.1
100
0.5 max.
0.3 max.
Programmed
Programmed
Programmed
Parity
Parity
Parity
Combination reader/punch
unit
Paper Tape Subsystem
Features and Comments
Model Number
?
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, char/sec.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
F0606
0606-01
1
1
3 or 8
110
110
110
<0.1
<1
0.05 max.
Programmed
Programmed
Programmed
None
None
None
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, char/sec.
Demands on Processor %
I
Code Translation
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
*With optional equipment.
9/66
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
/,;.;.
11:230.118
COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
UNIVAC 490 Series
UNIVAC 1107
UNIVAC 1108
800:
784:
785:
Model Number
490 Punched Card Subsystem
Type 7223
1108 Punched Card Subsystem
Maximum Number On-Line
1 per channel
15
1 per channel
Peak Speed, cards/min.
800/900
600
900
Demands on Processor, %
O. 032 to O. 25
0.15 max.
0.016 max.
Code Translation
Automatic on 80-column
models
Automatic (or matched)
Automatic
Checking
Hole count
Dual read
Hole count
Features and Comments
Higher rate when reading
only 72 columns; row and
column binary optional
Model Number
490 Punched Card Subsystem
Computer System Report No.
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
/
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
Row binary and column
binary reading optional
Type 7224
Type 7266
1108 Punched Card Subsystem
Maximum Number On-Line
1 per channel
15
15
1 per channel
Peak Speed~ cards/min.
300
150
300
300
O. 04 max.
0.08 max.
0.005 max.
o. 084
Demands on Processor, %
0.011 to
Code Translation
Automatic on 80-column
models
Automatic (or matched)
Automatic
Checking
Hole count
Read compare
Full card image check
Features and Comments
Binary card images
can be punched
(240 holes max. )
Only Type 7266 is suitable
for binary punching
Binary card images
can be punched
(240 holes max.)
Model Number
490 Paper Tape Subsystem
Type 7423
1108 Paper Tape Subsystem
Maximum Number On-Line
1 per channel
15
1 per channe I
Peak Speed, char/sec.
400
400
400
Demands on Processor, %
0.06 to 0.48
0.16
0.03 max.
Code Translation
Programmed
Programmed
Programmed
Checking
None
None
None
Features and Comments
Parity check can be
programmed
Parity check can be
programmed
Parity check can be
programmed
Model Number
490 Paper Tape Subsystem
Type 7423
1108 Paper Tape Subsystem
Maximum Number On-Line
1 per channel
15
1 per channel
Peak Speed, char/sec.
110
110
110
..
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
Demands on Processor, %
0.016 to 0.13
0.04
0.008 max.
Code Translation
Programmed
Programmed
Programmed
Checking
Verify punch activation
Verify punch activation
Verify punch activation
Features and Comments
*With optional equipment.
9/66
A
AUERBACH
II>
/
11:230.119
PUNCHED CARD AND PUNCHED TAPE INPUT-OUTPUT
UNIVAC 9000 Series: Models 9200 and 9300
BI0:
0711-00
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
0711-02
1001 Card Controller
1
1
1
400
600
2,000
<1
1
1.6
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Proper photocell
functioning
Proper photocell
functioning
Proper photocell
functioning
Used with
UNIVAC 9200
only
Used with
UNIVAC 9300
only
Two card feeds and seven
stackers permit collating;
can be used off-line
0603-04
0604-00
1
1
75 to 200
200
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, cards/min.
Demauds on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
CARD
INPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
Minimum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, cards/min.
Demands on Processor, %
<1
<1
Automatic
Automatic
Code Translation
Echo
Hole count
Checking
Punches serially by
column; has 2 850card stackers
Punches serially
by row; has 2
I, OOO-card stackers
PUNCHED
CARD
OUTPUT
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, char/sec.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
TAPE
INPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, char/sec.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
PUNCHED
TAPE
OUTPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
\
'With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
1. "". "
IA
AUERBAC~.,
EDP
RfPOIiTS
~_"'-'-----J
11:240.101
COMPARISON CHARTS
HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS:
OTHER INPUT-OUTPUT
EQUIPMENT
HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS COMPARISON CHARTS
OTHER INPUT·OUTPUT EQUIPMENT
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9 66
11:240.102
COMPARISON CHARTS
.System Identity
Burroughs B 100/200/300
Series
Burroughs B 5500
Burroughs 500 Systems:
B 2500 & B 3500
201:
203:
210:
Model Number
B 320 ;321 ;328
B 325;329
B 320;B 321;
B 328
B 325; B 329
9240
Maximum Number On-Line
2
2
2
2
1 per channel
Single Spacing
475;7QO;1040
700 ;1040
475 ;700 ;1040
700 ;1040
700
I-inch Spacing
370 ;500 ;595
500;595
370 ;540 ;648
540;648
540
Demands on Processor, %
1.0;1.5;2.2
1.5;2.2
0.1
0.1
?
Number of Print Positions
120
132*
120
132
120; 132*
Checking
Parity,
timing
Parity,
timing
Parity, timing
Features and Comments
B 100 Series
can use only
1 printer
132 print
positions are
standard on
B 300 Series
Model Number
B 106, 107
B 102, 103,
104, 116
Computer System Report No.
9241
9242
9243
1,040
815
1,040
648
620
648
Speed,
lines/min.
PRINTED
OUTPUT
Parity, timing
9240 and 9241 are buffered;
9242 and 9243 are unbuffered
9130; 9131; 9132
Maximum Number On-Line
1 per channel
Peak Speed, documents/min.
1,200
1,560
1565
Demands on Processor, %
4.0
5.2
?
Code Translation
Automatic
Automatic
Checking
Validity, signal level
Validity, signal level
Features and Comments
All models usable for off-line I
sorting; B 116 has 16 stackers;
all others have 13
Model Number
B401
B 5480
3351
Name
Record Processor
Data Communication Control
Unit
Single-Line Communications
Control
Peak Speed
44 Active ledgersl min
30,000 char/sec
Model Number
B 322,323,326,332,333
B 487
3353
Name
Multiple Tape Listers
Data Transmission Terminal
Unit
Mnlti-Line Communications
Control
Peak Speed
I, 600 lines/min
38,400 bits/sec
Can control up to 36 line
adapters
Model Number
B 248
9244-1, 9244-2
Name
Data Communications Control
Multiple Tape Listers
MICR
READER
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
Peak Speed
30, 000 char/sec between
A
?
1565 lines/min
Control and Processor
*With optional equipment.
9/66
9130 is an off-line unit;
9130 and 9131 have 13
stackers; 9132 has
16 stackers
.,
AUERBACH
OTHER INPUT-OUTPUT EQUIPMENT
11:240.103
CDC 160 & 160-A
CDC 1604 & 1604-A
CDC 3000 Series
242: & 244:
241: & 243:
245: etc
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
1612
166
1612
3253
3655
501
1
1
24
many
many
many
500
150
667
300
1,000
1,000
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Single Spacing
Speed,
lines/min.
500
130
500
241
500
?
1
0.2
2.8 max
<0.1
<0.3
<0.3
Demands on Processor, %
120
120
120
120
120
136
Number of Print Positions
None
None
None
Timing
None
?
Increased speed is possible
with restricted character set
Dual-channel controller
provided with 501
Higher speeds possible
when restricted character
sets are used
I-inch Spacing
PRINTED
OUTPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number on-Line
Peak Speed, documents/min.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
MICR
READER
Checking
Features and Comments
1605
3681
Control unit for various IBM
units working in BCD
Data Channel Converter
Depends upon units connected
Connects a CDC 160-A to a
3000 Series system
1610
3682
Control Unit for various IBM
units working in column binary
Satellite Coupler
Depends upon units
connected
Ltnks two Control
Data computers
Model Number
Name
Peak Speed
Model Number
Name
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
Peak Speed
Model Number
Name
Peak Speed
*With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:240.104
COMPARISON CHARTS
Control Data 6000 Series
System Identity
GE-115
260,
Computer System Report No.
310,
Model Number
1403
3152
501
505
PR-10
PR-ll
Maximum Number On-Line
8/ch
l/ch
S/ch
S/ch
65
65
Single Spacing
1100
150
1000
500
300
600
I-inch Spacing
750
150
571
375
220
220
Demands on Processor, %
0
0
0
0
80 max
80 max
Number of Print Positions
132
120
136
136
104,120, or 136
Checking
Echo, validity
Echo
Echo
Echo
Parity
Speed,
lines/min.
PRINTED
OUTPUT
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, documents/min.
Demands on Processor t %
MICR
READER
Code Translation
Checking
Features and Comments
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
Model Number
3276
DATANET-10
Name
Communication Terminal Controller
Communications Control
Peak Speed
Up to 2400 bits/sec, depending upon terminal unit used
2,000 bits/sec (1 line)
Model Number
6600 Series
DATANET-l1
Name
Data Set Controllers
Communications control
Peak Speed
40,800 bits/sec
2,400 bits/sec (1 line)
Model Number
6411
Name
Input-Output Buffer and Control
Peak Speed
Doubles input-output capability of a 6000 Series system
*With optional equipment.
9/66
A
.,
AUERBACH
11:240.105
OTHER INPUT·OUTPUT EQUIPMENT
GE-200 Series
320: etc.
GE-400 Series
GE-600 Series
330:
340:
P215E
(GE-215)
P225A
(GE-225 & 235)
PR-21
PR-20
3
8
7
10 per I/o Controller
450
900
1,200
949/1,200
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Single Spacing
Speed,
lines/min.
1-inch Spacing
360
601
665
640
2
2 max
1.9 to 3.1
1.3 max
Demands on Processor, %
120
120
136
136
Number of Print Positions
PRINTED
OUTPUT
""--
Receipt of
data, timing
Receipt of
data, timing
Validity
Receipt of data
On/off-line
models available
64 printable characters;
listed speed is based on a
restricted, 48-character set
1, 200-1pm speed is based on
uae of 46 of the 64 printable
characters
Sl2A
(GE-215)
S12B, S12C
(GE-225 & 235)
MR-20
1
3
7
750 (550 on
demand)
1,200 (600 on
demand)
1,155
1
Variable
?
Checking
Feafnres and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number on-Line
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Validity
Validity
Validity
12 stackers;
usable for
off-line
sorting
12 stackers;
usable for
off-line
sorting
12 stackers; usable for offline sorting
Peak Speed, documents/min.
Demands on Processor J %
Code Translati on
MICR
READER
Checking
Features and Comments
Datanet-15
ML-20
Datanet-30
Data Transmission
Controller
Multiple Tape Lister
Data Communications
Processor
2,400 bits/sec
2,000 lines/min
2,400 bits/sec; up to
128 lines
DATANET-20, -21, -25,
-30, -70
Data communications
equipment
Varies with model
Model Number
Name
Peak Speed
Model Number
Name
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
Peak Speed
Model Number
Name
Peak Speed
*With optional equipment .
. © 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
COMPARISON CHARTS
11:240.106
System Identity
Honeywell Series 200
Honeywell 400 & 1400
Honeywell 800 & 1800
510:
501: & 505:
502: & 503:
Model Number
222
422-3, 422-4
822
Maximum Number On-Line
l/trunk
1
8
Computer System Report No.
: Single Spacirig
450,
or 950
900
900
I-inch Spacing
381, 465, or 640
560
560
Demands on ·Processor, %
Varies
79 or 2*
0.3 max
Number of Print Positions
96, 108, 120, or 132*
120
120
Checking
Timing
Echo
Echo
422-4 can print in any
120 of 160 print positions
Prints 1.20.of 160 positions,
as selected by plugboard
6~O,
Speed,
lines/min.
PRINTED
OUTPUT
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, documents/min.
Demands on Processor, %
MICR
READER
Code Translation
CheCking
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
Features and Comments
An adapter permits on-line
use of Burroughs or IBM
MICR Sorter/Readers
Model Number
281
480
840
Name
Single-Channel Communications Control
Communications Control Unit
Optical Scanner
Peak Speed
up to 5,100 char/sec
150 char/sec
312 documents/min
Model Number
286
436
Name
Multi-Channel Communications Control
Tape Control Unit
Peak Speed
up to 300 char/sec;
up to 63 lines
(controls IBM 72911)
Model Number
288
Name
Data Station; controls
remote I/o devices
Peak Speed
up to 120 char/sec
"With optional equipment.
9/66
A
AUERBACH
~
OTHER INPUT·OUTPUT EQUIPMENT
11:240.107
IBM SYSTEM/360
Model 20
Models 30-75
422:
423: thru 428:
1403
1403
2203
1403
1403
Model 2, 7 ModelNl Model Al Model 2,7 Model 3
8/channel
1403
1404
ModelNl Model 2
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
1443
1445
Model N1 Model N1
Model Number
8/channel 8/channel 8/channel
8/channel 8/channel
Maximum Number On-Line
240 (600 190 (525
numeric) numeric)
Single Spacing
I-inch Spacing
1
1
1
600
1,100
350 (750
600
numeric)
1,100
755
755
480
190
150
Varies
Varies
Varies
Varies
Varies
Demands on Processor, %
Number of Print Positions
480
755
265
2.0
3.6
21. 5 max Varies
480
1,100
600
132-Md12
120
120-Md17
120 (or
144')
132-Mdl2
120-Md17
132
120
132
120 (or
144*)
113
Echo
Print
synch.
Echo
Echo
Echo
Echo
Print
synch.
Print
synch.
Horiz.
train of
type
slugs
Has
Can print
on
punched
cards
Horiz.
chain
printer
Echo
Uses
train of
type
slugs
Horiz.
Horiz.
typebar; chain
13,39,52, printer
or 63
chars.
acoustical
cover
Horiz.
Can print
typebar; MICR
13,39,52, chars.
or 63
chars.
1419 Modell
1412 Modell
1419 Modell
1
1
2
1,515
950
1,515
Varies
Varies
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Validity, timing
Validity, timing
Validity, timing
Can be used for off-line
sorting
For Model 30 only
For Models 30 & 40 only
#2073
1418
2701
2250
Communlcations Adapter
Optical Character
Reader
Data Adapter
Unit
Display Unit
75 to 600 char/sec over a
single line
413 doc/min
40,800 bite/sec
over 4 lines max.
approx. 60,000
pointe or char/sec.
2560
1428
2702
2260
Multi-Function Card Machine
Alphameric
Optical Reader
Transmission
Control Unit
Display Station
Reads 500 cpm; punches 160
col/sec; prints 140 col/sec*
400 doc/min.
200 bite/sec over
31 lines* max.
2,560 char/sec.
1285
2703
7770 and 7772
Optical J ourna!
Tape Reader
Transmission
Control Unit
Audio Response
Unite
2, 500 lines/ min.
180 bite/sec. over
176 lines max.
--
Speed,
lines/min.
PRINTED
OUTPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number on-Line
Peak Speed, documents/min.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
MICR
READER
Checking
Features and Comments
(
Model Number
Name
Peak Speed
Model Number
Name
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
Peak Speed
Model Number
Name
Peak Speed
*With optional equipment.
\
"
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.
9/66
COMPARISON CHARTS
11:240.108
IBM System/360 Model 44
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
IBM 1130
435:
418:
Model Number
1403
Model 2,7
1403
Model 3
1403
Model N1
1443
Model N1
1132
Maximum Number On-Line
8/channel
8/channel
8/channel
8/channel
1
Single Spacing
600
1,100
1,100
240 (600
numeric)
110
I-inch Spacing
480
755
755
190
62
Demands on Processor, %
Varies
Varies
Varies
Varies
Varies
Number of Print Positions
132-Mdl 2;
120-Mdl 7
132
120
120 (or 144*)
120
Checking
Echo
Echo
Echo
Print
synch.
Synchronization
Features and Comments
Horizontal
chain
printer
Horizontal
train of
type
slugs
Has
acoustical
cover
Horizontal
typebar;
13, 39, 52,
or 63
characters
Peak speed is 82 LPM
when printing alphanumeric
data; uses a print drum
Speed,
lines/min.
PRINTED
OUTPUT
Model Num ber
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, documents/min.
Demands on Processor, %
MICR
READER
Code Translation
Checking
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
Features and Comments
No MICR equipment available
Model Number
2701
2702
1627 Modell
Name
Data Adapter
Unit
Transmission
Control Unit
Plotter
Peak Speed
40, 800 bits/ sec
over 4 lines max.
200 bits/sec over
31 lines* max.
18,000 X-Y steps/min.
Model Number
2250
2260
1627 Model 2
Name
Display Unit
Display Station
Plotter
Peak Speed
approx. 60,000
pOints or char/sec
2, 560 char/sec
12,000 X-Y steps/min.
Model Number
1801 and 1802
2280, 2281, and 2282
1130
Name
Processor-Controller
Film Devices
Console Printer/Keyboard
Peak Speed
--
102 to 408 IJsec
per line recorded
15.5 char/sec
*With optional equipment.
9/66
A
AUERBACH
OTHER INPUT·OUTPUT EQUIPMENT
11:240.109
IBM 704 & 709
IBM 1401
IBM 1401-G
System Identity
406: & 407:
401
401:012
716
1403 Mod. 1, 2
1403 Mod.
4 or 5
1403 Mod. 6
1
1
1
1
75 to 150
600 (1,285 numeric*)
465
340
Single Spacing
75 to 150
480 (838 numeric*)
390
300
1-inch Spacing
20 in 704;
< 1 in 709
84 to 2*
87
?
Demands on Processor. %
120
100 or 132
100 or 132
120
Number of Print Positions
Programmed echo
Echo, validity
Echo, validity
Computer System Report No.
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Speed,
lines/min.
Maximum of 72 characters
per print cycle
\
Horizontal-chain print
mechanism
Horizontal-chain print
mechanism
1412
1419
1412
1
1
1
950
1,600
950
76.4
74.7 or
14.1*
76.4
Automatic
Automatic
Validity, timing
Validity, timing
13 stackers; usable for
off-line sorting
13 stackers; usable for
off-line sorting
740
1404
1418
CRT Recorder
Printer (cards or
forms)
Optical Character Reader
7,000 points/sec
400 cards or 600 lines/min.
415 documents/min.
780
1418
1285
CRT Display
Optical Character Reader
Optical Journal Tape Reader
7, 000 points/sec
415 documents/min.
2, 500 lines/ min.
1428
1009
Alphameric Optical Reader
Data Transmission Unit
400 documents/min.
up to 300 char/sec.
PRINTED
OUTPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number on-Line
Peak Speed, documents/min.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
MICR
READER
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
Name
Peak Speed
Model Number
Name
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
Peak Speed
Model Number
Name
Peak Speed
*With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
.11:240.110
COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
mM 1440
402:
414:
mM 1460
415:
Model Number
1403 Mod.
1, 2
1403
Mod. 3
1443
Mod. 1
1443
Mod. 2
1403
Mod. 2
1403
Mod. 3
Maximum Number On-Line
2
2
1
1
3
3
Single· Spacing
600 (1,285
numedc-)
1,100·
150 (430
numeric)
240 (600
numeric)
600 (1,285
numeric·)
1,100
1. ~inch Spacing
480 (838
numeric*)
750
132
196
480 (838
numeric·)
750
Demands on Processor, %
1to3
2.6
94 or 0.6·
90 or 1.0·
84 to 1 *
1.8
Number of Print Positions
100 or 132
132
120 or 144*
132
Checking
Echo, validity
Print synch.
Echo, validity
Speed,
lines/min.
PRINTED
OUTPUT
mM 1410
Interchangeable horizontal
typebar: 13, 39, 52, or 63
characters *
Features· and Comments
Model Number
1412
1419
1412
1412
1419
Maximum· Number On-Line
2
2
1
1
1
Peak Speed, documents/min.
950
1,600
950
950
1,600
Demands on Processor, %
76.4 (or
8.4*)
74.7 (or
14.1*)
?
Code Translation
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Checking
Validity, timing
Validity, timing
Validi ty, timing
Features and Comments
13 stackers; usable for
off-line sorting.
13 stackers; usable for
off -line sorting
13 stackers; usable for
off-line sorting
Model Number
1009
1448
1009
Name
Data Transmission Unit
Transmission Control Unit
Data Transmission Unit
Peak Speed
300 char/sec
up to 60 char/sec
300 char/ sec
Model Number
1014
7740
1418
Name
Remote Inquiry Unit
Communication Control System
Optical Character Reader
Peak Speed
15.5 char/sec
2,400 bits/sec;
up to 84 lines
420 documents/min
Model Number
7750
1231
1428
Name
Programmed Transmission
Control
Optical Mark Page Reader
Alphameric Optical Reader
Peak Speed
1,200 bits/sec
2,000 documents/hr
400 documents/min
MICR
READER
?
?
..
/
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
·With optional equipment.
, 9/66
A ..
AUERBACH
11:240.111
OTHER INPUT·OUTPUT EQUIPMENT
IBM 1620
412: & 413:
Modell
Model 2
I/O Typewriter
ruM 7010
ruM 7040 & 7044
416:
410: & 411:
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
1403 Mod. 1,2
1403 Mod. 3
1403 Mod. 1,2
1403 Mod. 3
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
1
1
2
2
2
2
(10 char/sec)
(15.5 chari
sec)
600 (1,285
numeric')
1,100
600 (1,285
numeric')
1,100
Single Spacing
--
480 (838
numeric')
750
480 (838
numeric')
750
1-inch Spacing
100
0.3 to 0.84
0.73
0.7 max
1.3 max
Demands on Processor, %
85
100 or 132
132
100 or 132
132
Number of Print Positions
None
Echo, validity
--
PRINTED
OUTPUT
Cbecking
Echo, validity
Also usable for keyboard
input. See also 1443
Printer, helow.
Speed,
lines/min.
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number on-Line
Peak Speed, documents/min.
Demand!i on Processor, %
\
Code Translation
MICR
READER
Checking
Features and Comments
560-R
1009
1009
Calcomp Digital Recorder
Data Transmission Unit
Data Transmission Unit
200 increments/sec
300 char/sec
300 char/sec
1443 Model 1 or 2
1014
1014
Printer
Remote Inquiry Unit
Remote Inquiry Unit
150 or 240 alphameric
lines/min
15.5 char/sec
15.5 char/sec
7750
7740
Programmed Transmission
Control
Communication
Control System
1, 200 bits/second
Controls up to 84 low and
4 high-speed lines
Model Number
Name
Peak Speed
Model Number
Name
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
Peak Speed
Model Number
Name
Peak Speed
·With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:240.112
, COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
IBM 7070/7072/7074
IBM 7080
IBM 7090 & 7094
403: etc.
417:
4.08: & 409:
Model Number
7400
717
720
716
Maximum Number On-Line
3
10
10
1
Single Spacing
150
150
500
75 to 150
i':inch Spacing
150
150
400
75 to 150
Demands on Processor, %
105m""
100
100
< 1
Number of Print Positions
120
120
120
120
Checking
Validity, timing
Echo
Features and Comments
No longer in production;
not usable with 7072
No longer in production
Maximum of72 characters
per print cycle
Model Number
7900
1014
1414 Model 6
Name
Inquiry Station
Remote Inquiry Unit
Input-Output Synchronizer
Peak Speed
10 char/sec
15.5 char/sec
Communication equipment
Computer System Report No.
Speed,
lines/min.
PRINTED
OUTPUT
. Synch.
\
Programmed echo
Model Number
MaXimum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, documents/min.
Demands· on Processor, %
MICR
READER
Code Translation
Checking
Features and Comments
,.
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
Model Number
1414 Model 6
7740
7740
Name
Input-Output
Synchronizer
Ciommunicati4l'l
Control System
Communication
Control System
Peak Speed
10 to 500 char/sec
2,400 bits/sec; up to
84 lines
2,400 bits/sec; up to
84 lines
Model Number
7750
Name
Progriumned
Transmission Control
Peak Speed
I, 200 bits/sec; up to
112 lines
*With optional equipment.
9/66
A ..
AUERBACH
/
OTHER INPUT·OUTP.UT EQUIPMENT
11:240.113
LGP-30 (Control Data)
MonrobotXI
PB 250 (Raytheon)
352:
531:
631:
360 (Flexowriter)
Typewriter
Teletype
Printer
1
3
3
1
(10 char/sec)
(10 char/sec)
(10 char/sec)
(10 char/sec)
Flexowriter
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Single Spacing
Speed,
lines/min.
--
--
--
-
2.4 to 100
2.9
2.9
30 to 100
Demands on Processor, %
180 rna." •
180 max •
85 max
llOmax
Number of Print Positions
None
None
None
None
Includes tape reader,
punch, and keyboard
Also ussble for keyboard
input
-
Includes tape reader,
punch, and keyboard
1-inch Spacing
PRINTED
OUTPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number on-Line
Peak Speed, documents/min.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
MICR
READER
Checking
Features and Comments
--
- 16-Key Keyboard
Manual
Digital Graph
Recorder
200 increments/sec
--
20 char/sec
\
Name
Peak Speed
Model Number
Edge-Punched Card Reader
(
Model Number
--
Name
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
Peak Speed
Model Number
Edge-Punched Card Punch
20 char/sec
Name
Peak Speed
*With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:240.114
COMPARISON CHARTS i
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Philco 2000 Series
610: 602:, 603:
651: etc.
Model Number
340-3
340-502,
340-512
Maximum Number On-Line
4
4
4
4
28
Single spacing
690 (940)
numeric)
650 (805
numeric)
805
1,000
900
1-inch Spacing
407
400
400
520
600
Demands on Processor, %
1.4 max
81 max
81 max
2.0 max
0.22 max
Number of Print Positions
120
120
120
120
120
Cbecking
Validity
Validity
Validity
Validity
None
Features and Comments
340-512 can operate as a
24- position numeric lister
at 1,850 Ipm
Listed speeds are based
on use of a restricted,
42-character set
Model Number
402-3
407-1
Maximum Number On-Line
4
4
Peak Speed, documents/min.
750
1,200
Demands on Processor, %
0.9
1.6
Code Translation
Automatic
Automatic
Checking
Validity, timing
Validity, timing
Features and Comments
12 stackers: usable for
off-line sorting
18 stackers; usable for
off-line sorting
Model Number
420-1
2280 series
Name
Optical Reader (for numeric journal tapes)
Digital Incremental
Recorder
Peak Speed
832 char/sec
300 point plots/ sec
Model Number
356-1
209
Name
Central Inquiry Buffer
Console Typewriter Buffer
Peak Speed
10 char/sec; controls up to 128 lines
--
Speed,
lines/min.
PRINTED
OUTPUT
NCR 315, 315-100, 315 RMC
340-508
340-601
2256
May be any of
7 units on· a UBC
MICR
READER
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
/
Model Number
321-1
293
Name
Central Communications Controller
Accounting Clock System
Peak Speed
varies; controls up to 100 lines
--
*With optional equipment.
9/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
OTHER INPUT·OUTPUT EQUIPMENT
11:240.115
RCA Spectra 70
RCA 301
710:
701:
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Model Number
70/242
70/243
70/248
333
335
l/trunk
l/trunk
l/trunk
2
2
600
1,000/1,250
600
800 to
1,000
835 to
1,075
Single Spacing
1-inch Spacing
Maximum Number On-Line
Speed,
lines/min.
450
667
480
500
572
Varies
Varies
Varies
85 to 22'
84 to 32-
Demands on Processor, %
132 or 160·
132
132
120
160
Number of Print Positions
None
None
None
None
Can print
on punched
cards
Higher speeds with
restricted sets of
47 chars.
Higher speed
based on use
of 48 of the
64 characters
Checking
Features and Comments
Burroughs Corp. B 102
1
1,560
?
Model Number
Maximum Number on-Line
Peak Speed, documents/min.
Demands on Processor, %
Automatic
Code Translation
Validity
Model 70/272 Sorter-Reader Controller permits
use of Burroughs, IBM, and NCR Sorter-Readers
13 stackers; usable
for off-line sorting.
70/251
70/510
328
Videoscan Document Reader
Audio Response Unit
Interrogating
Typewriter
1,300 documents/min.
up to 189 word
vocabulary
10 char/sec
70/653
6050
338
Communication Control
(Single Channel)
Video Data Terminal
Monitor Printer
5,100 char/sec
180 char/sec max.
10 char/sec
70/668
70/820
5820
Communication
Controller-Multichannel
Videocomp
Videoscan Document
Reader
6,000 bytes/sec
over 48 lines max.
600 chars. of text/
second
1,500 documents/min
PRINTED
OUTPUT
MICR
READER
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
Name
Peak Speed
Model Number
Name
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
Peak Speed
Model Number
Name
Peak Speed
.With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:240.116
COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
RCA 3301
RECOMP IT & ill (Autonetics)
RPC-4000 (Control Data)
703:
161: & 162:
351:
Model Number
333
335
Typewriter
(RECOMP II)
Flexowrlter
(RECOMP III)
4480 (Typewriter)
Maximum Number On-Line
2
2
1
1
22
Single Spacing
800
800
(10 char/sec)
(10 char/sec)
(10 char/sec)
i-inch Spacing
540
540
--
--
--
Demands on Processor, %
<0.1
<0.1
100
100
1 to 100
Number of Print Positions
120
160
110 max
110 max
180 max*
Checking
None
Echo
None
Platen strike
Features and Comments
1, 000 lpm with restricted
set of 47 characters
Also usable
for keyboard
input
Includes tape
reader,
punch, and
keyboard
4500 Tape Typewriter
System includes 4430
Reader/Punch
3378
--
4700
Name
Communications Mode Control
RECOMP X-Y Plotter
Off-Line Tape Typewriter
Peak Speed
Controls up to 160 buffered
lines
200 Increments/sec
10 char/sec
Model Number
3376
Name
Communications Control
Peak Speed
Controls one Une at up to
5,000 char/sec
Model Number
3377
Name
Data Exchange Control
Peak Speed
Links two cO~iiuters at up to
276 000 char sec
Computer System Report No.
Speed,
lines/min.
PRINTED
OUTPUT
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, documents/min.
Demands on Processor, %
MICR
READER
Code Translation
Checking
Features and Comments
. Model Number
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
.With optional equipment.
9/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
OTHER INPUT-OUTPUT EQUIPMENT
11:240.117
UNIVAC SS 80/90
UNIVAC ill
UNIVAC 418
771: & 772:
774:
790:
7912
4152
UNIVAC 1004
Printer
High Speed
Printer
1
8
16
8
600
700 (922 numeric)
400 to 600
700
(922 numeric)
Single Spacing
430
480 (670 numeric)
340 or 380
472
(563 numeric)
I-inch Spacing
14
0.165 to 0.22
0.2 to 0.7
0.2toO.7
Demands on Processor, %
100 to 130
128
132
132
Number of Print Positions
Echo
None
None
None
No form control loop
No form control loop
1004 can be
used on-line
with 418
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Speed,
lines/min.
PRINTED
OUTPUT
Checking
Features and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number on-Line
Peak Speed, documents/min.
Demands on Processor, %
Code Translation
MICR
READER
Checking
Features and Comments
CLT Series
Model Number
Communication Line
Terminals
Name
Up to 4,800 bits/sec
Peak Speed
Model Number
Name
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
Peak Speed
Model Number
Name
Peak Speed
*With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:240.118
COMPARISON CHARTS
System Identity
Computer System Report No.
UNIVAC 1004
UNIVAC 1050
UNIVAC 490 Series
770:
777:
800:
Model Number
1004 I
1004 n,
1004m
Maximum Number On-Line
1
1
4 or 8
4 or 8
l/channel
Single Spacing
400
600
600/750
700/922
700/922
I-inch Spacing
340
380
422
468
472/484
Demands on Processor, %
100
100
0.6 max*
0.7 max
0.051 to 0.41
Number of PTint Positions
132
128
132
Checking
None
Validity
None
Features and Comments
Indicated speeds are based
on use of 47 of the 63
printable characters
The higher rates are attained
with restricted character
sets·
Different models used with
various members of the 490
Series; higher speeds with
restricted character set
Model Number
DLT-1 snd DLT-2
CLT Series
CTM Series
Name
Data Line Terminals
Communication Line Terminals
Communication Terminal
Modules
Peak Speed
250 to 300 char/sec
Up to 4,800 bits/sec
4,800 bits/sec per line
0755-01
0755-02
0751, 0755, 8121
Speed,
lines/min.
PRINTED
OUTPUT
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Peak Speed, documents/min.
Demands on Processor, %
MICR
READER
Code Translation
Checking
Features and Comments
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
Model Number
WTS
Name
Word Terminal Synchronous
Peak Speed
40,800 bits/sec
Model Number
CTS
Name
Communication Terminal
Synchronous
Peak Speed
40,800 bits/sec
*With optional equipment.
9/66
A
AUERBACH
II>
11:240.119
OTHER INPUT-OUTPUT EQUIPMENT
UNIVAC 9000 Series
•UNIVAC
9200
UNIVAC 1107
UNIVAC 1108
784:
785 :
810:
810:
System Identity
UNIVAC 9300
Computer System Report No.
7418
7400
7299-03
3030-00
3030-02
15
15
4/channel
1
1
600
700 to 922
700/922
250; 500*
600; 1,200*
Single Spacing
424
475
472/484
220
451
I-inch Spacing
0.09
0.12 max
0.025 max
13
31
Demands on Processor, %
128
100 to 130
132
96; 132*
120; 132*
Number of Print Positions
None
None
None
Timing
Timing
No vertical form control loop;
higher printing speeds achieved
with restricted character set
Printers are integrated into
Processor cabinet; they use
horizontal oscillating typebars
No form control loop
Model Number
Maximum Number On-Line
Speed,
lines/min.
PRINTED
OUTPUT
Checking
Featores and Comments
Model Number
Maximum Number on-Line
Peak Speed, documents/min.
Demands on Processor, %
I
'"
Code Translation
MICR
READER
Checking
Featores and Comments
CTM Series
Communication Terminal
Modules
4,800 bits/sec per line
WTS
40, 800 bits/sec
CTS
"'.
Peak Speed
Name
OTHER
INPUTOUTPUT
DEVICES
Peak Speed
Model Number
Communication Terminal
Synchronous
40,800 bits/sec
(
'"
Name
Model Number
Word Terminal Synchronous
I
Model Number
Name
Peak Speed
*With optional equipment.
..
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11:400.101
A
AUERBACH
nAlUID
EDP
IIfPUfS
COMPARISON CHARTS
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE COMPARISONS
AND MONTHLY RENTALS
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE COMPARISONS
AND MONTHLY RENTALS
\
(
\.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
COMPARISON CHARTS
11;400.102
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE COMPARISONS
SYSTEM
IDENTITY
CONFIGURATION
(See Users'
Guide
4:030.100)
MONTHLY
RENTAL
$
GENERAUZED FILE
PROCESSING PROBLEM A
(See Users' Guide 4:200.100)
SORTING
(See Users' Guide 4:200.200)
Activity
10,000 80-Char. Records
0.0
0.1
1. a
Standard
Estimate
Minutes per 10,000 Records
Burroughs B 200
I
II
In
-
-
4,525
5,895
8,840
2.2
1.4
2.9
2.8
67.
26.
26.
19.
19.
17.
1.8
-
22.
9.5
-2.9
Available
Routines
Minutes
-
14.
-2.8
Burroughs B 5500
In
V
VIlA
VIIB
23,340
25,250
30,995
28,705
1.2
1.2
0.55
0.55
2.0
2.0
1.7
0.69
2.9
2.8
CDC 6400
VIlA
VIIIA
34,000
47,145
0.38'
0.19'
0.38'
0.19'
2.0'
1.0'
2.5
1.3
-
CDC 6600
VIlA
VIllA
58,050
71,195
0.38'
0.19'
0.3S'
0.19*
2.0'
1.0'
2.5
1.3
-
CDC 6800
VIlA
VIllA
57,740
70,885
0.38'
0.19'
0.38*
0.19*
2.0*
2.5
1.3
1.0'
-
--
-
-
-
-
-
-
41,207
46,127
0.95
0.95
0.45
4.0
1.2
0.65
40.
2.8
2.3
VlIIB
34,525
35,107
38,637
54,265
0.40
0.15
0.15
0.58
0.24
0.19
CDC 3100
VI
VIIB
10,865
15,885
0.47
0.36
2.7
0.56
27.
2.4
3.1
2.4
CDC 3200
VI
VlIB
12,695
17,715
0.47
0.36
2.7
0.56
27.
2.4
3.1
2.4
CDC 3300
VI
VIIB
INA
INA
0.47
0.36
2.7
0.56
27.
2.4
3.1
2.4
CDC 3400
VI
VIlA
VIIB
VIlIB
25,445
34,600
34,679
52,395
0.56
0.56
0.56
0.29
1.96
1.62
0.77
0.33
16.
16.
2.6
1.0
3.7
3.7
3.7
1.8
--
CDC 3600
VIB
VIIB
58,599
61,899
73,910
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.28
0.28
0.19
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.4
2.0
1.4
-
3.7
3.7
3.7
-
VI
4,885
6,220
7,375
8,325
I
II
III
IV
VI
5,115
7,450
10,155
10,320
12,805
3.7
1.6
0.80
1.6
GE 235
In
IV
VI
11,870
18,385
15,120
1.5
0.77
1.5
GE 415
I
II
III
IV
VIlA
4,625
6,360
7,000
13,385
14,630
2.4
1.8
0.47
0.47
I
II
III
IV
VIlA
5,875
7,610
8,850
14,335
15,780
2.4
1.8
0.47
0.47
2.4
1.8
1.4
1.4
III
IV
VIlA
11,350
16,835
19,180
1.8
0.47
0.47
1.8
1.4
1.4
CDC 160
CDC 160-A
IX
X
2,152
2,152
-
IX
2,902
4,212
X
CDC 1604
CDC 1604-A
VI
VIB
VIIB
VI
VIB
vIis
vllm
GE 215
I
II
III
GE 225
GE 425
GE 435
43,7~5
-
-
-
-
-2.6
0.90
0.90
3.7
2.5
1.8
2.5
67.
25.
26.
18.
25.
37.
10.
5.3
10.
2.5
1.7
2.5
25.
17.
25.
10.
5.
10.
-
75.
15.
15.
15.
15.
24.
13.
3.
3.
2.4
1.8
1.5
1.5
-
2.3
1.7
1.7
3.2
6.5
3.2
37.
25.
25.
-
-
-
-
67.
28.
28.
28.
5.4
3.7
3.7
-
-
-
61.
15.
15.
-
-
-
la.
15.
25,
13.
3.1
3.1
15.
15.
15.
13.
3.1
3.1
-
-
-
-
-24.
14.
8.5
14.
----
----
Note: Tbe indicated rentals were those In effeot when the Computer ayltem Report on each system was last revised. Some of the older oomputer
systems are now offered at lower prices: consult manufacturers' representatives for dstaUs.
* indicated time Is fer the tape-to-tape main processing run cnly; It Is asawned that the required on-line oard-to-tape and tape-to-prlnter transcriptions will be performed concurrently with these or other programs.
9/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
/'
/'
11:400. 103
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE COMPARISONS (CONTO.)
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
IDENTITY
(See Users'
Guide
4:030.100)
MATRIX INVERSION
(Bee U.ers' Guide 4:200.300)
MONTHLY
RENTAL
Standard Estimate
AvaJlable Routine.
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL
PROBLEM A
(See Users' Guide 4:200.400)
Array Size
$
Computation Factor
for 10% Out lut
1
10
100
10
40
-
--
-
-
---
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
74.
74.
74.
9.5'
13. *'
10
40
Minutes
Burroughs B 200
I
II
III
-
Milliseconds
-
-
74.
74.
330.
330.
330.
330.
III
V
VUA
VUH
23,340
25,250
30,995
28.705
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.006
0.006
0.006
0.006
VIlA
VIllA
34,000
47,145
0.00022
0.00022
0.011
0.011
--
CDC 6600
VilA
VlIlA
58,050
71,195
0.00003
0.00003
0.0014
0.0014
---
13.*
6.2*
-
13 ...
6.2*
13. '"
6.2*
13. *"
6.2*
CDC 6800
VIlA
VillA
57,740
70,885
0.000007
0.000007
0.0003
0.0003
-
-
--
13.'
6.2*
13 .•
6.2'
13 ....
6.2*
CDC 160
IX
Burroughs B 5500
CDC 6400
X
CDC 160-A
IX
X
CDC 1604
44.
44.
3,000.
1,300.
8,500.
7,500.
67,000.
2,902
4,212
0.47
0.070
19.
3.7
1.0
44.
3,000.
700.
8,500.
1,500.
63,000.
9,200.
-
-
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.12
0.12
0.12
VI
VIB
VUB
VlIlB
34,525
35,107
38,637
54,265
0.0013
0.0013
0.0013
0.0013
0.075
0.075
0.075
0.075
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.12
CDC 3100
VI
VUB
10,865
15,885
0.012
0.012
0.63
0.63
--
CDC 3200
VI
VIIB
12,695
17,715
0.0009
0.0006
0.048
0.048
--
CDC 3300
VI
vua
INA
INA
0.0006
0.0006
0.025
0.025
CDC 3400
VI
VIlA
VUB
VIlIB
25,445
34,600
34,679
52,395
0.0004
0.0004
0.0004
0.0004
0.026
0.026
0.026
0.026
CDC 3600
VIB
VIIB
VUIB
58,599
61,899
73,910
0.0003
0.0003
0.0003
0.017
0.017
0.017
I
GE 225
I
II
III
IV
VI
GE 235
III
IV
VI
GE 415
I
II
III
IV
VIlA
GE 425
I
II
III
IV
VUA
GE 435
III
IV
VJIA
13 ...
6.2"
1.0
1.0
0.075
0.075
0.075
III
VI
6.2*
18.
18.
0.0013
0.0013
0.0013
II
39.'
0.4
0.4
43,795
41,207
46,127
GE 215
74.
2,152
2,152
VI
VIB
VUB
CDC 1604-A
(,
-
4,525
5,895
8,840
-
4,885
6,220
7,375
8,325
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.07
33.
33.
33.
3.2
-
5,115
7,450
10,155
19,320
12,805
0.31
0.31
0.31
0.31
0.033
15.
15.
15.
15.
1.7
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.030
11,870
18,385
15,120
0.07
0.07
0.005
4,625
6,360
7,900
13,385
14,630
-
--
0.0029
--
5,875
7,610
8,850
14,335
15,780
0.0021
11,350
16,835
19,180
0.0016
--
3.5
3.5
0.22
-
--
0.17
-
-
0.12
--
0.09
---38.
38.
38.
38.
1.9
--
-
---
-
-----
---
---
-
9.5
12.
-7.8
-
34.
34.
-
67,000.
-
270.
270.
-
30.
30.
30.
280.
300.
200.
-
--
--
50.
11.
50.
31.
260.
260.
50.
11.
50.
19.
160.
160.
65.
65.
12.
9.9
65.
65.
23.
23.
145.
145.
145.
145.
6.5
6.5
6.0
6.0
6.0
-
-
-120.
---
6.5
6.5
6.5
--
---
61.
61.
61.
-
--
--
280.
--
1,800.
--
-
-
-
100.
240.
1,400.
--
190.
--
1,300.
74.
-
-
/
l
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
11 :400. 104
COMPARISON CHARTS
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE COMPARISONS (CONTD.)
SYSTEM
IDENTITY
CONFIGURATION
NUMBER
(Bee Users'
Guide
4:030.100)
MONTHLY
RENTAL
GENERALIZED FILE
PROCESSING PROBLEM A
(See Users' Guide 4:200. 100)
SORTING
(See Users' Guide 4:200.200)
Activity
10,000 80-Char. Records
$
0.0
0.1
1.0
Standard
Estimate
Minutes per 10, 000 Records
GE 625
VIlA
VillA
41,700
57,705
0.47'
0.26'
0.70'
0.26'
2.8'
1.4'
3.1
1.7
GE 635
VIlA
VillA
44,700
61,045
0.47'
0.26'
0.70* ,
0.26*
2. B'"
1. 4*
3.1
1.7
Honeywell 120
I
II
III
Honeywell 200
I
II
III
IV
Honeywell 1200
I
II
4.0
2.1
3,885
4,785
7,145
13,925
3.4
0.9
0.39
4,745
5,645
7,570
14,125
-
-
3,630
3,415
6,030
6.4
4.7
-
-
3.4
2.1
1.7
-
-
190.
28.
27.
41.
14.
160.
21.
21.
17.
33.0
6.8
2.5
-
-
3.4
2.1
1.7
2.1
2.1
0.5
-
160.
21.
21.
17.
21.
21.
2.
33.0
6.8
2.5
6.8
2.5
2.5
AvailabJe
Routines
Minutes
-
-
-
7.9
2.8
-
VI
VIlA
VIIB
10,085
15,080
15,125
3.4
0.9
0.39
0.9
0.39
0.39
III
IV
8,545
15,305
17,385
16,940
0.9
0.39
0.39
0.39
2.1
1.7
2.1
0.5
21.
17.
21.
2.
6.8
2.5
2.5
2.5
VilA
VIIB
VIIIB
15,565
21,250
21,590
21,165
34,895
0.9
0.39
0.39
0.39
0.30
2.1
1.7
2.1
0.49
0.30
21.
17.
21.
2.
1.1
6.8
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.1
VIlA
VillA
37,155
52,340
0.35'
0.28'
0.35'
0.28'
II
7,615
9,805
15,580
11,005
2.0
2.0
1.1
2.0
4.0
3.0
2.4
3.0
24.
20.
20.
20.
12.
8.9
5.2
8.9
VI
11,150
12,290
20,980
14,530
1.6
1.6
0.57
1.6
3.7
2.8
1.9
2.8
24.
20.
20.
20.
9.5
8.0
4.4
8.0
VI
VIlA
VIlB
VillA
VmB
20,329
36,070
28,475
54,000
46,925
0.60
0.34
0.30
0.20
0.20
2.0
2.0
0.42
2.0
0.42
17.
17.
3.1
17.
3.1
6.3
2.4
2.4
1.5
1.5
VI
VIlA
vIm
VlIlA
VIIIB
30,100
37,050
37,575
56,900
56,025
0.33
0.33
0.22
0.22
II
2,300
3,475
6.0
7.0
I
II
III
V
4,005
4,600
6,686
10,085
3.7
3.7
1.5
-
II
III
V
VI
6,890
7,800
11,300
11,100
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
IBM 360, Model 44
V
VI
VIlA
XI
11,215
10,315
13,730
9,320
1.6
1.5
0.38
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
5.0
20.
20.
20.
50.
IBM 360, Model 50
III
VIlA
VlIB
14,785
20,665
18,775
20,885
1.5
0.38
0.38
0,27
2.0
1.5
2.0
0,41
20,
15.
20.
2.0
9,7
2.3
2,3
2.3
IBM 360, Model 65
VIIB
VIlIB
33,836
49,790
0.40
0.22
0,69
0,22
2.0
1.1
2,4
1.8
--1,2
-
IBM 360, Model 75
VIIB
vlIm
46,176
62,130
0,40
0.22
0.59
0.22
2.0
1.1
2.4
1,8
0,73
0,73
III
IV
Honeywell 2200
VIlA
VIIB
Honeywell 4200
III
IV
Honeywell 8200
Honeywell 400
III
IV
VI
Honeywell 1400
II
III
IV
Honeywell 800
Honeywell 1800
IBM 360, Model 20
IBM 360, Model 30
IBM 360, Model 40
I
IV
-
-
1.8
0.33
1.8
0.22
-
-
-
18.
1.5
18.
1.5
67.
21.
2.3
1.8
---61.
-
2.0
67.
20.
20.
40.
9.7
2.0
2.0
20.
20.
13.
9.7
-
-
0.43'
0.33'
-
20.
-
-
9.7
66.
66.
28.
56.
7.1
2.7
2.8
2.8
-
-
-
---
-
-
--
-
-
--
--
-
, indicated time Is for the tape-to-tape main processing run only; It Is assumed that the required on-line card-to-tape and tape-tc-prlnter transcrlpticns will be performed ccncurrently with these or other program..
.
9/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
11:400.105
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE COMPARISONS (CONTO.)
SYSTEM
IDENTITY
CONFIGURATION
NUMBER
(See Users'
Guide
MATRIX INVERSION
(See Users' Guide 4:200.300)
MONTHLY
RENTAL
Standard Estimate
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL
PROBLEM A
(See Users' Guide 4:200.400)
Array Size
$
4:030.100)
Available Routines
10
40
10
40
---
-
--
--
1
Computation Factor
for 10% Out lUt
10
100
Minutes
GE 625
VIlA
VillA
41,700
57,705
0.0005
0.0005
.028
.028
GE 635
VIlA
VIllA
44,700
61,045
0.0004
0.0004
• 021
• 021
Honeywell 120
I
n
1II
Honeywell 200
I
II
1II
IV
3.630
3,415
6,030
3,885
4,785
7,145
13,925
vim
4,745
5,645
7.570
14,125
10,085
15,080
15,125
1II
IV
VIlA
VIIB
8,545
15,305
17,385
16,940
m
IV
VIlA
VIlB
VlIIB
15,565
21,250
21,590
21,165
34,895
Honeywell B200
VIlA
VlIIA
37,155
52,340
Honeywell 400
II
1II
IV
VI
Honeywell 1200
I
II
1II
IV
VI
VIlA
Honeywell 2200
Honeywell 4200
Honeywell 1400
Honeywell 800
Honeywell 1800
-
-
-
0.0043
0.23
0.0043
0.0043
0.23
0.23
-
-
-
-
0.0028
0.0028
0.17
0.17
0.002
0.10
0.002
0.10
0.0002
0.0002
0.012
0.012
7,615
9,805
15,580
11,005
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.15
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
II
1II
IV
VI
11,150
12,290
20,980
14,530
0.16
0.16
0.16
0.035
8.5
B.5
8.5
2.0
VI
VIlA
VIIB
VillA
VlIIB
20,329
36,070
28,475
54,000
46,925
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.17
0.17
0.17
0.17
0.17
VI
VIlA
VIlB
VlIIA
30,100
37,050
37,575
56,900
56,025
0.0013
0.0013
0.0013
0.0013
0.0013
0.0066
0.066
0.066
0.066
0.066
vllm
-
-
IBM 360 Model 20
I
II
2,300
3,475
IBM 360, Model 30
I
II
1II
V
4,005
4,600
6,585
10,085
0.025
0.025
0.025
0.025
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
IBM 360, Model 40
II
1II
V
VI
6,890
7,800
11,300
11,100
0.0071
0.0071
0.0071
0.0071
0.39
0.39
0.39
0.39
IBM 360, Model 44
V
VI
VIlA
XI
11,215
10,315
13,730
9,320
0.0017
0.0017
0.0017
0.0017
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
IBII! 360, Model 50
1II
IV
VilA
VIm
14,785
20,565
18,775
20,885
0.0017
0.0017
0.0017
0.0017
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
IBII! 360, lI!odel 65
VIm
VlIIB
33,835
49,790
0.00022
0.00022
0.012
0.012
IBII! 360, lI!odel 75
VIIB
VlIIB
46.175
62.130
0.00016
0.00016
0.0089
0.0089
MIlliseconds
-
----
---
-
-
--
13. 8.-
18. 18. '
149.'
149.'
13••
8 ••
14. '
14••
113 ••
113 ••
-
--88.
--88.
88.
18.
88.
80.
-
-
88.
15.
-
-
-
-
88.
58.
-
-
-
-
-
no.
no.
720.
-
490.
490.
-
88.
5.1
88.
21.
-
200.
200.
75.
75.
75.
75.
75.
75.
-
-
-
-
--
-
-
-
-
-
--
90.
90.
90.
90.
600.
600.
-
-
--
----
-
-
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
72.
-
-
--
-
-
90.
-
75.
75.
130.
6.7
75.
5.9
14.
75.
14.
130.
130.
130.
-
-
-
-
100.
100.
100.
100.
480.
480.
480.
480.
4,230.
4,230.
4,230.
4,230.
100.
100.
100.
100.
150.
150.
150.
150.
2,000.
2,000.
2,000.
2,000.
100.
100.
100.
100.
100.
100.
100.
100.
280.
280.
280.
280.
100.
100.
100.
9.7
100.
100.
100.
31.
400.
400.
400.
280.
600.
-
9.7
6.5
9.7
6.5
64.
64.
9.7
6.5
9.7
6.5
35.
35.
9/66
11:400.106
COMPARISON CHARTS
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE COMPARISONS (CONTD.)
SYSTEM
IDENTITY
CONFlGURATION
(See Users'
Guide
4:030.100)
GENERALIZED FILE
PROCESSING PROBLEM A
(See Users' Guide 4:200. 100)
MONTHLY
RENTAL
SORTING
(See Users' Guide 4:200. 200)
Activity
$
0.0
10,000 BO-Char. Records
0.1
1.0
Standard
Estimate
Minutes per 10,000 Records
IBM 1130
I
IX
IBM 704
VI
VIIB
2B,450
4B,157
IBM 709
VIIB
VIIIB
53,770
69,045
IBM 1401
I
II
III
4,330
5,920
10,830
11,540
IV
IBM 1401-G
I
IBM 1410
I
II
III
2,375
VI
VIIB
6,115
B,415
12,240
19,060
15,790
23,560
I
11*'
111*'
3,295
4,050
5,920
IV
IBM 1440
1,275
925
--
---
-
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
-3.7
-7.5
2.4
2.0
4.2
2.6
-2.7
-
1.4
1.0
1.4
0.85
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.2
-3.8
-
2.9
BO.
20.
20.
20.
20.
3.3
-
41.
15.
12.
30.
9.0
6.0
9.0
40.
26.
9.1
-
--
-
-
2.0
1.3
2.0
0.96
20.
13.
20.
3.2
B.5
3.8
8.5
4.B
2.3
20.
11,735
IX
X
2,455
3,5BO
-
IBM 1620-11
IX
X
3,090
4,275
--
IBM 7010
III
VI
VIIB
19,175
27,225
22,175
2B,355
VI
VIlA
VlIIB
20,715
27,190
47,145
-
-
VIlA
VlIIB
36,690
56,645
-0.39
-0.39
IBM 7070
III
VIIB
VIIIB
19,400
29,755
45,030
1.3
0.45
0.3B
IBM 7072
VIIB
VIIIB
32,915
49,890
IBM 7074
VIIB
VIIIB
IBM 7080
--
-
Routines
19.
35.
13.
10.
-
--
9.7
6.0
7.0
7.0
---
-
-
-
1.9
2.7
1.9
-
6.7
O.BO
O. BO
67.
4.5
4.5
8.5
3.0
2.4
5.7
2.0
2.0 :
1.2
1.2
1.7
1.7
5.7
5.7
B.3
B.3
-
40,465
72,840
0.45
0.18
0.6
0.18
2.2
1.7
3.0
1.2
1.5
1.2
VIIB
VIIIB
51,745
79,325
0.42
0.18
0.58
0.2
2.
1.4
2.6
1.3
1.2
0.42
IBM 7090
V1IB
VIIIB
66,770
89,215
0.47
0.21
0.61
0.21
1.9
1.6
3.2
1.5
--
IBM 7094-1
VIIB
VIIIB
72,395
95,065
0.47
0.21
0.61
0.21
1.9
0.96
3.2
1.5
IBM 7040
IBM 7044
LGP-30
IX
X
Monrobot XI
I
IX
NCR 315
I
II
III
IIIC
IV
NCR 315-100
NCR 315 RMC
PB 250
1,100
1,365
BOO
885
5,700
5,925
8,145
8,250
19,290
I
II
IIIC
5,000
4,350
7,750
III
IIIC
11,345
11,550
20,490
IV
IX
X
1,675
2,455
1.4
0.33
0.75
-
-
-
2,700.
2,000.
3,000.
2,300.
-
5.5
-
6,000.
4,800.
15.
3. B
2.2
-
30.
-3.3
-5.1
1.3
1.5
0.4
3.0
3.7
1.9
-3.6
-7.8
1.6
3.B
80.
53.
25.
1.2
1.3
0.25
2.3
2.3
1.9
23.
23.
19.
14.
-2,6
-
-
--
-
•• Using 1311 Disk Storage Drives in place of magnetic tape.
9/66
100.
40.
26.
20.
11.
4.7
3.6
III
IV
9.4
9.4
10.7
5.1
IBM 1620-1
1.4
0.56
1.4
0.64
---
135.
73.
4B.
IBM 1460
1.4
-
139.
-3.2
Available
Minutes
A
AUERBACH
'"
80.
29.
26.
24.
lB.
14.
-2.6
-
30.
-
--
--
26.
7.9
-2.6
--
-
11:400. 107
SySTEM PERFORMANCE
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE COMPARISONS (CONTD.)
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
'IDENTITY'
(See Users'
Guide
4:030.100)
MATRIX INVERSION
(See Users' Guide 4:200.300)
MONTHLY
RENTAL
Standard Estimate
AvaUable Routines
Array Size
$
10
40
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL
PROBLEM A
(See Users' Guide 4:200.400)
Computation Factor
for 10% Output
100
10
'1
10
40
-
-
640.
2,800.
1,300.
3,400.
6,700.
8,900.
--
180.
57.
300.
160.
1,700.
1,500.
35.
35.
190.
190.
1,800.
1,800.
520.
5,000.
50,000.
520.
5,000.
50,000.
Mllliseconds
Minutes
IBM 1130
I
IX
1,275
925
0.045
0.045
IBM 704
2.6
2.6
VI
VIIB
28,450
48,157
--
IBM 709
VIIB
VIIIB
53,770
69,045
0.009
0.009
0.58
0.58
IBM 1401
I
II
III
IV
4,330
10,830
11,.540
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
-
IBM 1401-G
I
2,315
-
-
IBM 1410
I
III
IV
VI
VIIB
6,115
8,415
12,240
19,060
15,790
23,560
0.17
0.17
0.17
0.17
0.17
0.17
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
I
II'
I1I*
3,295
4,050
5,920
---
---
IBM 1450
III
11,735
0.17
IBM 1620-1
IX
2,455
3,580
1.2
0.35
55.
18.
---
3,090
4,275
0.25
0.08
15.
5.0
--
--
IV
VI.
VIIB
19,175
27,225
22,175
28,355
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.06
3.5
3.4
3.4
3.4
---
-
IBM 7040
VI
VIlA
VIIIB
20,715
27,190
47,145
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.10
0.10
0.10
IBM 7044
VIlA
VIllB
36,690
56;645
0.001
0.0010
0.068
0.068
--
IBM 7070
III
VIIB
VIIlB
19,400
29,755
45,030
0.037
0.037
0.037
2.1
2.1
2.1
IBM 7072
VIIB
VIIIB
32,915
49,890
0.0037
0.0037
0.24
0.24
IBM 7074
VIIB
VIIlB
40,465
72,840
0.003
0.003
0.17
0.17
IBM 7080
VIIB
VIIlB
51,745
79,325
IBM 7090
VIIB
VIIIB
66,770
89,215
0.001
0.001
0.062
0.062
--
IBM 7094-1
VIIB
VIrnB
72,395
95,065
0.0004
0.0004
0.029
0.029
-
IBM 1440
n
X
IBM 1620-II
IX
X
IBM 7010
LGP-30
m
IX
X
Monrobot XI
I
IX
NCR 315
I
II
m
mc
IV
NCR 315-100
I
II
mc
NCR 315 RMe
m
mc
IV
PB 250
IX
X
5,920
-
1,100
1,365
37.
37.
800
885
23.
23.
-
5,000
4,350
7,750
0.09
0.09
0.09
-2.0
2.0
--
-
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.09
1,675
2,455
-
-
5,700
5,925
8,145
8,250
19,290
11,345
11,550
20,490
-
-5.
-0.3·
0.3
0.3
190.
190.
-0.055
0.055
0.055
--
18.
18.
0.077
0.077
0.077
0.077
0.077
---
----
3,700.
1,000.
20,000.
7,500.
70,000.
1,800.
480.
4,200.
1,800.
30,000.
18,000.
-
3.6
3.6
3.6
--
-
-4.
-
--
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
-
----
--
-
.--
-
-20,000.
-
-
--
-
100.
17.
16.
150.
150.
150.
1,300.
1,300.
1,300.
47.
47.
450.
400.
13.
7.7
-
-
-
-
63.
63.
600.
600.
6,000.
6,000.
25.
25.
45.
45.
400.
400.
11.
11.
37.
37.
350.
350.
--
-
-
8.5
7.7
30.
30.
270.
270.
7.7
7.7
17.
17.
140.
140.
58,000.
50,000.
-
46,000.
380,000.
370,000.
-
350,000. 3,300,000.
23.
32.
32.
32.
23.
190.
200.
200.
200.
190.
2,000.
2,000.
--
---
--
200.
200.
200.
1,600.
1,600.
1,600.
25,000.
200,000.
45.0
45.0
45.0
10,000.
-
-
2,000.
2,000.
2,000.
-
9/66
COMPARISON CHARTS
11:400. 108
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE COMPARISONS (CONTD.)
SYSTEM
IDENTITY
CONFIGURATION
NUMBER
(See Uaers'
Guide
4:030.100)
MONTHLY
RENTAL
GENERALIZED FILE
PROCESSING PROBLEM A
(See Users' Guide 4:200. 100)
SORTING
(See Users' Guide 4:200.200)
Activity
10,000 80-Char. Records
$
1.0
0.1
0.0
Standard
Estimate
Minutes per 10,000 Records
Available
Routines
Minutes
--
Phllco 2000-210
VIm
VInB
33,765
53.025
0.18
0.18
0.60
0.60
4.8
4.8
1.4
1.4
Phllca 2000-211
VIIB
VIllB
38.315
64,475
0.19
0.19
0.55
0.20
4.5
1.9
1.4
1.4
Phllca 2000-212
VIIB
VIIIB
52,315
87.145
0.19
0.073
0.38
0.095
2.0
0.95
0.75
0.50
RCA Spectra 70/15
I
II
3,400
4,700
1.8
2.2
-
66.
22.
19.
-
15.
II
IV
5,865
6.465
12,265
1.4
1.4
0.7
2.2
2.2
1.3
22.
22.
13.
15.
10.
2.5
15.
10.
2.5
I
II
III
VIlA
4,830
6,305
6,905
12,930
1.4
1.4
0.7
2.2
2.2
1.3
-
64.
22.
22.
13.
15.0
10.0
2.5
nr
VI
VIlA
VIm
8,450
13,950
10,250
13,775
15,700
1.4
0.36
1.4
0.36
0.36
2.2
1.3
2.2
2.2
0.52
22.
12.
22.
22.
2.1
9.4
2.4
9.4
2.4
2.4
--
RCA Spectra 70/55
In
IV
VI
VIlA
VIm
VIllB
13,430
18,330
13,430
16,830
19,080
32,945
1.4
0.36
1.4
0.36
0.36
0.18
2.2
1.3
2.2
2.2
0.52
0.18
22.
13.
22.
22.
2.1
0.85
9.4
2.4
9.4
2.4
2.4
1.2
---
RCA 301
I
II
III
IV
VI
4,271
5,084
9,687
20,290
12,880
nr
11,390
18,940
14,265
21,265
21,604
RCA Spectra 70/25
RCA Spectra 70/35
RCA Spectra 70/45
m
IV
RCA 3301
IV
VI
VIlA
VIIB
Recamp II
IX
X
Recamp III
IX
X
RPC-4000
IX
X
2.495
3,095
1,495
2,175
1,750
2,450
-
-
5.7
10.1
1.5
1.5
1.5
4.3
4.3
4.3
0.61
0.37
0.61
0.29
0.29
1.9
1.9
1.9
1.9
0.29
18.
18.
18.
18.
1.3
----
----
--
200.
49.
32.
32.
32.
-
-
-
-
60.
15.
13.
15.
4.0
2.7
4.0
1.9
1.9
-
--
-
-
-
-----
-
-
-
• Indicated time Is far the tape-to-tape main processing run only; It Is assumed that the required on-line card-to-tape and tape-to-prlnter
transcriptions will be performed concurrently with these or other programs.
,/
9/66
fA..
AUERBACH
'"
11:400.109
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE COMPARISONS (CONTO.)
SYSTEM
IDENTITY
CONFlGURATION
NUMBER
(See Users'
Gulde
4:030.100)
MATRIX INVERSION
(See Users' Guide 4:200.300)
MONTHLY
RENTAL
$
Standard Estimate
AvaUable "Routines
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL
PROBLEMA
(See Users' Guide 4:200.400)
Array Size
10
10
40
40
'1
Computation Factor
for 10% Output
10
100
Minutes
PhUco 2000-210
VllB
Vllm
33,765
53,025
0.0014
0.0014
0.075
0.075
PhUco 2000-211
Vim
VIllB
38,315
64,475
0.001
0.0007
0.08
0.055
PhUco 2000-212
VIm
VIllB
52,315
87,145
0.0002
0.0002
0.010
0.010
RCA Spectra 70/15
I
II
3,400
4,700
--
RCA Spectra 70/25
II
III
5,865
6,465
12,265
-
---
1V
RCA Spectra 70/35
I
II
III
VIlA
RCA Spectra 70/45
III
1V
VI
VIlA
Vim
RCA Spectra 70/55
III
1V
VI
VllA
VIIB
vmB
RCA 301
I
II
In
1V
VI
RCA 3301
nr
IV
VI
VIlA
VIIB
-
4,830
6,305
6,905
12,930
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
8,450
13,950
10,250
13,775
15,700
0.0053
0.0053
0.0053
0.0053
0.0053
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
13,430
18,330
13,430
16,830
19,080
32,945
0.0015
0.0015
0.0015
0.0015
0.0015
0,0015
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
4,271
5,084
9,687
20,290
12,880
0.37
0.37
0.37
0.37
0.020
11,390
18,940
14,265
21,265
21,604
--
0.0010
0.0010
0.0010
20.
20.
20.
20.
1.0
-
-
0.040
0.040
0.040
Milliseconds
0.002
0.002
0.10
0.10
-
--
---
--
-
-
-
-
--
--
-
-
---
-
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.19
11.
11.
11.
11.
-
-
-
7.4
7.4
400.
400.
-
-
-
Recomp II
IX
X
2,495
3,095
1.2
1.2
Recomp III
IX
X
1,495
2,175
1.0
42.
2.2
150.
IX
X
1,750
2,450
6.8
6.8
180.
180.
-
-
RPC-4000
-
30.
30.
-
-
-
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6.0
6.0
40.
40.
400.
400.
7.2
1.1
22.
8.0
200.
80.
13.
5.8
13.
5.8
40.
30.
-
-
--
--
--
47.
47.
47.
47.
350.
350.
350.
350.
3,300.
3,300.
3,300.
3,300.
47.
42.
47.
47.
9.5
100.
100.
100.
100.
100.
1,150.
1,150.
1,150.
1,150.
1,150.
47.
280.
280.
280.
280.
280.
280.
47.
42.
47.
47.
9.5
4.8
--
-
42.
47.
47.
29.
29.
-
300.
---
590.
3,700.
-65.
-65.
-210.
65.
26.
210.
210.
1,700.
1,000.
9,900.
9,900.
B9,OOO.
89,000.
12,000.
1,300.
47,000.
8,000.
400,000.
75,000.
14,000.
12,000.
56,000.
50,000.
470,000.
470,000.
65.
8.3
---
9/66
COMPARISON CHARTS
11:400.110
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE COMPARISONS (CONTD.)
SYSTEM
IDENTITY
CONFlGURATION
NUMBER
(See Users'
Guide
4:030.100)
MONTHLY
RENTAL
$
GENERALIZED FILE
PROCESSING PROBLEM A
(See Users' Guide 4:200. 100)
SORTING
(SOO Users' Guide 4:200.200)
Activity
10,000 SO-Char. Records
0.0
0.1
1.0
Standard
Estimate
Minutes per 10,000 Records
UNIVAC 5S SO/90-I
-
-
-
Available
Routines
Minutes
-
II
In
4,325
7,125
7,400
3.0
3.0
4.6
4.6
130.
24.
24.
29.
19.
UNIVAC 5S SO/90-II
II
In
IV
8,640
9,540
15,940
2.7
2.7
1.4
2.9
2.9
2.2
24.
24.
24.
29.
19.
10.
UNIVAC In
III
VI
VIIA
VIIm
19,000
20,400
25,000
3S,730
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.19
2.1
2.1
2.1
0.19
20.
20.
20.
1.5
1.7
1.7
1.2
1.2
UNIVAC 41S
III
VIIA
7,125
17,S75
1.6
0.42-
2.4
0.68-
24.
3.7*
11.
2.S
-
UNIVAC 490
III
VIlA
VIllA
19,780
31,270
48,120
2.3
0.270.27-
2.3
0.420.42-
21.
2.42.4-
15.
1.7
1.7
-
UNIVAC 491/492
III
VIlA
VIllA
13,345
23,715
41,915
0.82
0.320.32-
2.2
0.500.34-
22.
2.2'
2.2-
5.1
2.1
2.1
-
UNIVAC 494
III
25,765
32,715
47,165
0.82
0.320.32*
2.2
0.500.34-
20.
1.91.7'
5.1
2.1
2.1
-
I
VIlA
VIllA
UNIVAC 1004
-
2.9
I
Il
1,800
2,725
3.2
I
IV
3,470
5,030
6,660
18,720
1.0
0.82
0.53
UNIVAC 1107
VI
VIlA
VIllB
39,740
47,990
61,890
2.4
0.28
0.28
2.4
2.4
0.28
UNIVAC 1108
VIlA
VIllA
45,245
58,395
0.270.27-
0.430.27-
UNIVAC 1050
II
III
-
5.3
100.
27.
2.4
2.1
100.
24.
24.
21.
24.
2.4
1.4
1.51.3*
10.
5.5
3.6
16.
1.8
1.8
1.9
1.9
-
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
-
-
-
-
--
--
-
, Indicated time Is for the tape-to-tape main processing run only; It Is assumed that the required on-line card-to-tape and tape-ta-prlnter transcriptions will be performed concurrently with theBe or other programs.
/
9/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
11:400.111
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE :COMPARISONS (CONTO.)
\
SYSTEM
IDENTITY
CONFIGURATION
NUMBER
(See Users'
Guide
4:030.100)
MATRIX INVERSION
(See Users' Guide 4:200.300)
MONTHLY
RENTAL
Standard Estimate
Available Routines
Array Slze
$
10
10
40
40
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL
PROBLEM A
(See Users' Guide 4:200.400)
Computation Factor
for 10% Output
10
100
1
MinuteB
UNIVAC SS 80/90-1
I
II
1lI
4,:i25'
7,125
7,400
UNIVAC SS BO/90-11
II
III
B,640
9,540
15,940
-
UNIVAC In
In
VI
VIlA
VIIIB
19,000
20,400
25,000
3B,730
0.024
0.024
0.024
0,024
UNIVAC 41B
III
VIlA
7,125
17,B75
-
UNIVAC 490
III
VIlA
VIllA
19,7BO
31,270
4B,120
0.023
0.023
0.023
1.0
1.0
1.0
UNIVAC 491/492
nI
VIlA
VIllA
13,345
23,715
41,915
0.018
0.018
0.018
O.B
O.B
0.8
UNIVAC 494
III
VIlA
VIllA
25,765
32,715
47,165
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.05
0.05
0.05
UNIVAC 1004
I
IV
UNIVAC 1050
\
UNIVAC 1107
UNIVAC 110B
-
--
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
-
-
Mllliseconds
-
--
-
-
----
0,0007
0.0007
0.0007
0.040
0.040
0.040
---
0.00017
0.00017
0.00B9
0.00B9
-
II
1,800
2,725
I
II
m
IV
3,470
5,030
6,660
lB,720
--
VI
VIlA
VmB
39,740
47,990
61,B90
VIlA
VnIA
45,245
5B,395
-
--
~
--
--
-
-
-
-
-
-
25.
25.
25.
250.
250.
250.
2,500.
2,500.
2,500.
100.
55.55,-
290.
290.
290.
3,400.
3,400.
75.
45.45.-
290.
290.
290.
2,700.
2,700.
2,700.
-
75.
7.3'
7.3'
100.
100.
8.6
7.07.0'
-
75.
7.37.3"
-
-
--
100.
100.
18.
7.07.0'
-
3.400.
75.
58. *
58 ••
-
100.
130.
120.
21. *
21.
*
/'
I,
/
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9/66
DIR.ECTORIES
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
21 :001.001
Directories
Contents
DIRECTORIES
CONTENTS
Roster of Organizations in the Computer Field . . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . 21:010.001
Buyers' Guide for the Computer Field . • . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • 21:020.001
Roster of Electronic ComputingandData Processing Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21:030.001
Roster of School, College, and University Computer Centers . . . . . . . . • . . • . . . 21:035.001
Annotated Directory of Periodicals for the Computer Industry •.••••••.•...• 21:040.001
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
- 1..
.
21 :01 0.001
SlUDUn
Directories
AEDP
-
AUERBACH
RHUlIS
ROSTER OF ORGANIZATIONS
IN THE COMPUTER FIELD
Reprinted with permission from COMPUTERS AND AUTOMATION's "Computer Directory and Buyers' Guide", June, 1966. @ 1966. pUblished by Berk('i<.'\'
Enterprises, Inc., 815 Washington Street, Newtonville 60. Mass.
.
(Cumulative, information as of April 15, 1966)
The purpose of this Roster is to report organizations in the computer field: organizations making or
developing computing machinery or data-processing
machinery, and organizations supplying significant components used in the computer field if related to the field
(for example, ferrite cores would be such a component).
Organization Entry Form
The form to be completed for an entry in the
Roster of Organization follows:
Fbr listings of organizations supplying services in
the computer field, please see the following surveys and
rosters, elsewhere in this Directory: Roster of Electronic Computing and Data Processing Services; Survey
of Consulting Services; Survey of Software Suppliers; and
Roster of School, College, and University Computer
Centers.
1.
Entries. Each Roster entry if complete contains:
Name of the organization, its address / Telephone number / Description of its main activities, main products
in the field, any comments / Size (expressed in number
of employees) / Year established. In cases where we do
not have complete information, we put down what we have.
3.
Your organization's name?
2. Streetaddress? ________________________________
Telephone number: area code?
4. City, state, zip code?
5.
Accuracy. We have tried to make each entry
accurate to the extend of information in our possession.
We shall be grateful for any more information or additions or corrections that anyone is kind enough to send
us. Although we have tried to be accurate and complete,
we assume no liability for any statements expressed or
implied.
--------
-------------
Types of computers, data processors, computer
components, data processing supplies or services,
etc., that you produce or offer?
----------
6. Approximate number of your employees? ___________
Abbrev iations
7. Year organization was established?
-------
The key to the abbreviations follows:
\
"'--.
8.
Listings for three of your executives:
S - Size (number of employees)
Presidentl ___________________________________
E - Established (year of establishment)
Public Relations Director:
*C 'Ihis organization has kindly furnished us with information expressly for the purpose of the Roster and therefore our report is likely to be more complete and accurate than otherwise might be the case. (C for Checking) /
66: information furnished in 1966 / 65:information furnished in 1965 / etc.
Advertising Manager: __________________________
-----------
lhis data supplied by_________________
TiUe____________ Date__________
AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
8/66
DIRECTORIES
21 :010.002
ROSTtli
Abacus Information Management Co., P,O. Box 399,
New York, N. Y. 10008/ - / OC 65
Technical and managerial guidance for civilian
and military systems. Functions served include appraisal. audit, professional.criticism,
review, crystallization of procedures and
standards, and financial valuation I S 2/ E
1962
~3L Inc., P.O. Box 11193, Palo ~lto, Calif. / - /
lilt: 65
Engineering and consulting service in the processing of analog, audio, digital and optical
signals / S 2 / E 1961
The Acratod Co., 2708 Bagby (P.O. Box 66841) ,
Houston, Texas 77006/ 713-JAckson 4-3111 / OC 65
Punched card and tape handling equipment and
supplies, including control panels, wires,
magnetic tape, ribbons, binders, etc. Used
D.P. machines / S 10/ E 1939
A.C Spark Plug Div. General Motors Corp., 7929 S.
Howell Ave., Milwaukee, Wis. 53201 -; 414-762-7000
/ OC 65
Design, development and production of general
purpose and special purpose digital computers
for space and airborne systems and other applications I 5 7600 I E 1948
Adage. Inc., 1079 Commonwealth Ave., Boston, Mass.
U2215 / 617-783-1100 / OC 66
Hybrid stored-program Signal-processing computer linkage, DAC's, AOCls, multiplexer, operational amplifiers / S 270 / E 1957
ADD Institutet (Scandinavian Automatic Data Processing Institute), Chalmers University of Technology,
Gibraltargatan 5, Gothenburg 5, Sweden I 031200410 I OC 64
University training in automatic data processing. Consulting, progranuning, coding and
running problems on Alwac III E (Wegematic
1000) and SAAB 027 computers for industries in
Scandinavia I S 25 I E 1957
Adcom Corp., 20945 Plummer St., ChatsllDrth, Calif.
I 213-341-4635 / OC 65
Design and manufacture of computer data acquisition systems employing high-speed A to D
converters, D to A converters, digital multi;plexers, analog memories, and hybrid interfaces / 5 58 / E 1964 .
Addo-X, Inc., 845 Third Ave., New York, N.Y. 10022
/ 212-Pla.. 3-6600 / OC 66
Addo-X data capture 6- control equipmenti AddoX tape reader; Addo-X optical font adding
machinej Addo-X 990 key data collection system: check digit verifier Mod. 7-11 IS? I
E 1947
Advanced Circuitry Div., Litton Industries, 4811
Kearney St., Springfield, Mo. / 417-ON 9-1006 /
OC 65
Custom printed circuits, multiplanar interconnects, weldable circuits and packaged
assemblies / S lOO / E 1943
Advance Data Systems, 9261 W. Third St .. Beverly
Hills, Calif. 90213 I 213-273-7650 / OC 66
Special purpose computers, computer operated
revenue control devices, i.e., money machines,
gates, etc. Magnetic cards and tickets. Consulting services / S 150 / E 1961
Advanced Scientific Instruments, Div. of Em., 8001
Bloomington Freeway, Minneapolis, Minn. 55420 /
612-080-9581 I "C 65
Diyital computers / S 200 / E 1961
Aero Geo Astro Div., Keltec Industries, Inc .•
Edsall and Lincolnia Rds., Alexandria, Va. 22314
/ 703-354-2000 / OC 65
Special purpose computers, radar prograrmners,
coordinate digital converters, data loggers,
data acquisition systems of all types for industry and government, special computer interface products / 5 700 / E 1958
Aetna Products Co., Inc., 11 Conmercial St., P.O.
Box 438, Hicksville, N.Y. / 516-WE 1-3120 / OC 65
Inked ribbons for computers, data proceSSing,
etc. IS? / E 1941
Aircraft Armaments, Inc., York Rd .• Coekeysville,
Md. 21030 I 301-666-1400 / OC 66
Special purpose computers, simulators, training systems, test equipment, instrumentationj
special purpose devices for missiles I space
vehicles and other military weapons systems,
air traffic eontrol, anti-submarine warfare,
etc. I based on custom specifications I S 1250
/ E 1950
Airpax Electronics, Inc., P.O. Box 8488, Fort lauderdale, Fla. 33310 / 305-587-1100 / OC 66
Telemetry, electronic tachometry / 5 400 I E
1947
Aladdin Electronics, 703 Murfreesboro Rd., Nashville, Tenn. 37210 I 615-242-3411 / OC 66
Pulse and wideband transformers / 5 200 I E
1925
:t'he William C. Allen Corp., 1875 Connecticut Ave .•
N.W., WaShington, D.C. 20009/- / OC 65
Management consultants I S '( IE?
Alliea/Egry Business Systems, Inc., 429 East Monument Ave., Dayton, Ohio 45402 / 513-223-3133 /
OC 66
Continuous forms / 5 1000 / E 1893
American Bosch Arma Corp., ARMA. Div., Roosevelt
Field, Garden City, N.Y. 11532/516-742-2000 /
OC 66
Data management systems, digital computers,
gyro compasses. gyros, accelerometers, ASW sYI-
8/66
tems, sonics equipment, ground support equip'ment, displays, heading references I S 845 I
E 1918
American Data Services, Inc., 0110 S.W. Bancroft St.,
Portland, Ore. 07201 / 503-226-6851 / OC 65
System deSign, programming, data processing
and machine services provided business, governmental and scientific groups. Computers used
are Burroughs 205 and IBII 1401 / 5 20 / E 1959
American Hydr.oD1Bth Co. I 24-20 Jackson Ave. I Long
Island City, N.Y .. IHOI / 212-Ex 2-4242 / OC 65
Mechanical and electro-mechanical analog computer: special purpose slide r.ules, quality
control computer, mechanical nomographs I 5 10
/ E 1940
American Telephone & Telegraph Co. and Associated
Bell System Telephone Companies, (Hei) 195 Broadway, New York 7, N. Y. / - / "<- 65
Complete conununications services for data proceSSing systems / S 735,000 / E ?
AMP Inc., Eisenhower Blvd., Harrisburg, ·Pa. 17105
/ 717-564-0101 / OC 66
Solderless terminals, Wiring devices, capacitors, power su.pPl1es, converters, pulse forming networks / 5 7000 / E 1941
AMpex Corp., 401 Broadway, Redwood City, Calif.
(HOl / 415-367-2011 I OC 66
Researcb, development, production by several
divisions includes Videofile System, recording
systems, tape recorders (all types), recording
heads, servomechanisms, scanners, and magnetic
tapei converters, core memories, tape handling
systems / 5 ? / E ?
Ampex Corp., Computer Products Div. I 9937 W. Jefferson Blvd., Culver City, Calif. 90230 /213-8365000 / OC 66
Core memories. tape handling systems / 5 900
/ E 1960
Amphenol-Borg Electronics Corp., 2001 S. 25th Ave. t
Broadview, Ill. 60155 / 312-261-2000 / OC 65
Connectors of all types, coax cable, multiconductor cable, RF connectors. coax switches,
precision potentiometers, integrated circuits,
harness assemblies / 5 over 5OO.J E 1958
Amplifier Corp. of America, 75 Frost St., l'Jestbury,
N.Y. 11590 1 516-333-9100 / OC 66
Tape recorders, tape decks, tape cartridges,
transistorized electronic modules and plug-in
boards, transistorized power supplies, transistorized amplifiers; flutter meters, demagnetizers; instruments to order / S 25 (affiliate of Keystone Camera Co .• Inc. i additional
personnel and facilities readily available)
1 E 1936
AmTz:on Inc., 14631 5 Waverly Ave., Midlothian, Ill.
/ 264-5835 / OC 65
Andog and digital electronic controls for procesS application in industrial plants I 5 50 I
E 1959
Andersen Laboratories, Inc., 501 New Park Ave.,
West Hartford, Conn. / - / OC 66
Delay line memories / 5 ? / E ?
Anelex Corp., Anelex Bldg., 150 Cause:wsy St.,
Boston, Mass. 02114/ 617-742-4585 I OC 66
Printers and printer systeDlJi,' disk file memories, electronic communications devices for
data processing and cOl'IIRuriications industries
/ 5 1100 / E 1952
API Instruments Co., 7100 Wilson Mills Rd., Chesterland, Ohio 44026 / 216·-423-3131 / "C 66
Indicating and controlling instruments used as
safety devices and "balance wheels" to prevent
drift of electronic circuits in computers and
to warn of malfunctioning / S 600 / E 1945
Applied Control Corp. I 293 Fairview Ave., Cedar
Grove, N. J. 07009/201-239-3851/ OC 65
Tes't eqUipment, digital, in circuit, non loading, visual indication of computer component
contents, bench tester and panel mounting versions / 5 10 / E 1950
Applied Data Research. Inc., Route 206 Center,
Princeton, N.J. 08540 / 609-921-8550 / OC 66
Data proceSSing consultants; computer systems
analysis & prograJm!ing services; software systems developmenti information retrievali data
processing systems evaluation for management
information controls / 5 60 / E 1959
AppUed Magnetics Corp. I 749 Ward Drive, Santa Barbara, Cal if. 93105 1 005-967-<1l23 / OC 66
Custom. designed preCision magnetic recording
heads for computer and instrumentat ion applications / 5 325 / E 1957
Approved Business Machines Co., Inc., 16 Hudson
St., Ne.. York 13, N.Y. / WAlker 5-9813 / OC 65
Used business machines, including punch card
machinesi scannerSi adding macltinesi analog,
digital and special purpose computers; data
processing machinery; forms handling equipment
15?/E?
Argonaut ASsoci~tes, Inc., P.O. Box K, Beaverton,
Ore. / 503-CY 2-3149 / OC 66
Analog computers, function generators Is 17
/ E 1959
Aries Corp., Westgate Research Park,' McLean~ Va.
2.2101 / 703-093-4400 / OC 66
.
.
Systems consultants, analysts, and program-.
mers providing professional support to com
puter users for management information systems, software development and modification,
scientific problems, statistical analYSiS,
information retrieval .. real-time applications
and data conversion / S 125 / E 1962
Ark!1Y Engineering, Inc., 11000 ~. OlympiC Blvd.,
Los Angeles 64, Calif. / GRanite 9-0028 / OC 65
Engineering and consulting services. Experienced in deSigning and shipping hardware.
fA.
AUERBACH
~
Semiconductor circuits, data systems, automatic checkout and control, complete computers, telemetry, instruments, value analYSis,
proposals / S 12 / E 1956
ARMA. Div., American Bosch Arma Corp. '- name
changed to American Bosch Arma Corp., ARMA Div.,
which see
Th~11~n~Mn7~~~;~~~g_~~i ~.~ :~x G, Marengo,
Magnetic materials / S 750 I E 1936
The Artronic Instrument Co., 11232 Trianole Lane,
Silver Spring, Md. 20902/301-949-1131 I "C 65
Delay lines, encapsulated circuit modules,
magnetic core memory devices, pulse transfOl'inerS, shift registers IS? / E 1959
Arvey Corp., Lamcote Div., 3500 N. KimIJaU Ave.,
Chicago, Ill. 60618 / 312-463 1400 / OC 66
Perforator tapei Mylar reinforced pdper, foil,
and metallized foil combinations I 5 300 I E
1905
ASI Computer Div.· f Electra-Mechanical Research
Inc. -- name changed to Electro-Mechanical
Research Inc., ASI Computer Div., which see
As~.rodata, Inc .• 240 E PaIais Rd., Anaheim, Calif.
92803 / 714-772-1000 / OC 66
Analog computers, digital computers, data processors, data acquisition systems, telemetry
systems, timing systems. amplHiers, AID and
O/A converters. multiplexers, signal conditioning equipment, discriminators, oscillators,
silDulators, decommutators time code lJenerators, trunslators, displays, tape search systems, power supplies, computer interface systems / S 1100 I E 1961
Audio Devices, Inc., 235 East 42nd St., New York,
N.Y. / 212-6870600 / OC 66
Magnetic computer tape / S 400 I E 1937
Audio Instrument Co., Inc. 220 E. 23rd St. t New
YorIo, N.Y. 10010 / 212-MU 9-5510 / OC 65
An:dog time delay devices; logarithmic coove .... ters; autocorrelation recorder / 5 9 / E
1949
Auerbach Corp., 121 N. Broad St., Philadelphia, Pa.
19107 / 215-491-0200 / *I; 66
Full range of EDP consulting services and publication of analytic reference services for
computer users / 5 2GO / E 1957
Auer~ach Corp., 1634 Arch St., Philadelphia, Pa.
19103 / 215-LD 3-7737 / OC 65
Consulting services in system engineering,
computer programming, bUSiness information
systems, product and market planning, programmed teaching, computer analysis (Auerbach
standard EDP reports) / 5 175 / E 1957
Autographic Business Forms, Inc., 45 E. Wesley St.,
S. Hackensack, N.J. 07606.J 201-409-6500 / "C 65
Cou"dnuous business forms I S 400 I E 1883
Automated Business Forms Corp., 24 Forge St.,
Jamesburg, N.J. / - / OC 66
Continuous tabulating forms IS? IE?
Automated Data Processing Services, Inc., 1104
Sp[ing St., Silver Spring, Md. / 301-779-5500 /
OC 66
Service Bureau operations i all type of data
proceSSing and conversion servicesj IBlIt 1440,
16K, 2-tape, 2 disk, 1403 printer, 2 card read/
punches, NCR 420-1 optical scanner / 5 35 / E ?
Automated Syste.ms International Ltd., P.O. Box 5201 t
Seven Oaks Station, Detro it, Mich. 48235 I 313933-9701 / "C 66
Parts inventory control and replenishment systems service and operation for automotive
parts i accounting and management reporting
systems for automative dealers I S 20 / E 1960
Automation Dynamics Corp., 35 Industrial ParkW / 312-FRanklin 2-1728 / OC 66
Broad range of computer services including
computer and hardware systems deSign, installation management, computer feasilJility, applications, systems analysiS, software deSign,
data processing, and scientific computation /
5 525 / E 1955
Booz, Allen & Hamilton Inc., 135 S. LaSalle St.,
l..hicauo, 111. 6v('{)3 (oU ices also 1Il New York,
Wlishinuton, D. COl Cleveland, Uetroit, San Francisco, and Los Angeles) / 3l2-Flmwcial 6-1900 /
0(; 66
Management consulta.nts, technical and management services in electronic and automatic data
processinu for integrated management information and control systems for industry, commerce, gO\lernment, and institutionsj feasibility studies, system design, equipment selection, implementation, systems converSion, EDP
audit and review I S 400 / E 1914
Bonner & ~toore Associates, Inc., 500 Jefferson Bldg.,
1I0u>1on. Tex. 77002 / 713-CAp i tol U-0071 / 0(; 66
Consult ing firm special iz ing in computer technology and management sciencesj services ranging from conceptual system design and development through implementation, installation and
project management / S 40 / E 1956
Howmar Instrument Corp., 0000 Bluffton Rd., Ft. Wayne,
Ind. i Acton Laboratories, Inc. (subsidiary), Acton,
Mass. j TIC of Calif. (subsidiary), Newllury Park,
Cali!. / 219-747-3121 10(; 65
Precision servo components and assemblies,
counters, electronic devices, measurement and
test instruments, solid state digital computer
readouts / S 1000 (including subsidiaries) /
E 1951
t!. II. llrady Co., 727 \J. Glendale Ave., Milwaukee,
\'I isc. 53209 / 414-332-0100 / 0(; 65
Tab machine labels, key punch cQrrection seals,
computer tape control tabs, tape reel labels,
file folder labels, pert symbols (aU selfadhesive) / s ? / E 1914
Brandon Applied Systems, Inc. I 3-') E. 42nd St., New
York, N.Y. lOOl7j 1130 17th St., N.lV" Washington,
D.C. 2003b / New York: 212-Yukon 6-1510i Washington: 202-296-0670 / 0(; 66
A data processing consulting firm providing
wide range of services, including programming,
systems deSign, equipment selection, technical
writing, hardware systems engineering. BASI
also publisheB, with Moody·s, the Moody's Como.
puter Industry Survey. and conducts training
courses J S 35, including Lond"n office I E
1964
The Bristol Co., \qaterbury, Conn" 06720 / 203-7564451 / 0(; 66
Special purpose computersj data recordingj high
speed printers; scanners; servo mechanismsj
systems engineeringj and telemeters / S 1000
/ E 1889
Brooks lnstrwnent Div. I Emerson Electric Co
407
w. Vine 5t .• Hatfield, Pa. / 215-855-5174) 0(; 65
F~ow ~ters, variable area, turbine, and positlVe dlSplacement with associated readout and
control equipment / S 250 J E 1946
Charles Bruning Div., Addressograph Multigraph Corp
1800 W. Central Rd., Mt. Prospect, Ill. 60058/ .,
312-CL 5-1900 / 0(; 65
~ry diazo t moist diazo and electrostatic copIers for use in communi cat inn computer printout by reproduction methods / S 3000 / E 1897
Bryant Computer Products, Div. of Ex-CeU-o Corp
850 Ladd Rd., Walled Lake, lIich. 40088 / 313-624
4571 / 0(; 66
Computer storage devices, rotating drum and
disc file, random access, mass dataj and related electroniC interfaces J S 600 I E 1953
Bulova Watch Co., Inc., Systems and Instruments Div
62-10 Woodside Ave .• Woodside, N.Y. 11377/212- ••
NE 9-5700 / 0(; 65
Timers and timing devices i development of automatic fabrication and control processes and
machinerYi research and development of specialpurpose electro-optical and electromechanical
,e;i~~j /p~e~~;~on manufacturing and assembly
The Bunker-Ramo Corp .. 277 Park Ave., New York, N.Y.
10017 / 212-826-7171 / 0(; 66
Digital computers for military use; input/
output devicesj on-line EDP services Unformation utility or data bank} i bank automation
equipment and systems; integrated circuitsj
systems study, research and development / S
2500 / E 1928
The Bunker-Ramo Corp., Defense Systems Di v.. B433
Fallbrook Ave •• !"anoga Park. Calif. 91304 / 213346-6000 / 0(; 66
Militarized general-purpose digital computersj
computer/display devices; display consoles;
hybrid thin-film microcircuits / 5 1300 / E
1964
J. H. Bunnell & Co., 920 Essex 5t •• Brooklyn IN. Y.
11208 / 212-NI 9-1717 / "C 65
Tape punch / 5 45 / E 1873
Burlingame Associates, Ltd., 510 S. Fulton Ave., Mt.
Vernon, N.Y. 10550 / MO 4-7530 / 0(; 65
Analog computers, computing ampUf iers and
power supplies, analog recorders, anal0'j-todigital converters, digital voltmeters
S 40
/ E 1928
Burr-Brown Research Corp., 6730 5. Tucson Blvd. t
Tuc.on. Ariz. 85706/ 602-294-1431 / OC 66
Proprietory and custom analog computers and
simulators, all silicon DC operational and
instrwnentation amplifiers, analog and hybrid
function modules, power suppUes and accessories / 5 185 / E 1956
BUTroughs Ann Arbor Lab., P.O. Box 1307, Ann Arbor,
Mich. / 313-426-4621 / 0(; 65
DeSign, development, and prodUction of digital display equipment and systems. Demonstrated capability in 'IV scan conversion, computer driven microfilm recorders, multiple station inquiry systems, direct view command and
AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
control consoles, human factor Simulators,
-5432 I "C 65
Code generators and translators I S 30 I
E 1962
Cognitronics Corp., 549 Pleasantville Rd., Briarcliff Manor, N, y, 1 914-RO 9-7900 1 "C 66
Full line of ·composing room computers; remote
optical scanners; digital to audio devices "Speechmaker" units I 5 35 1 E 1961
Cohu Electronics, Inc., Box 623, San Diego, Calif.
92112 ! 714-277-6700 1 .C 66
Data amplifiers, analog to digital converters,
digital couplers, input scanners, digital
voltmeter/ratiometers / S 240 I E 1944
Collins Radio Co .• Dallas, Tex. 15207 I 214-Adams
5-9511 1 "C 66
Complete line of eouipment and systems for
communication, computation and control I
5 18,000 I E 1933
Collins Radio Co., Information Science Center, 19700
San Joaquin Rd., Newport Beach, Calif. I KImberly
9-2911 I ·C 65
Collins Kineplex data communications systems
for transmission of punched card, magnetic
tape and other digital information over telephone line, radio circuit or other voice channels. Commercial and military communication
and data processing systems and equipment including airborne data systems, teletype and
other message switching systems / S 1000/
E 1950
Colorado Instruments, Inc., Garden Office Center,
Broomfield, Colo. 80020 1 303-466-7333 1 "C 65
Digital data aCQuisition systems (specialpurpose, designed to meet customer reauirements) and computer data entry keyboards
(C-Dek) / 5 25 I E 1961
Columbia Ribbon & Carbon Mfg. Co., Inc., Herb Hill
Rd., Glen Cove, N.Y. 1 516-0R 6-2730 I "C 66
Fabric and film base ribbons for high speed
8/66
printers; carbon paper and film base ribbons
for MeR systems: continuous spirit and offset
duplicating masters I 5 500 1 E 1905
Columbia Technical Corp., 50 St. at 25 Ave., Woodside, N, Y. 11377 I 212-932-0800 1 "C 66
Delay networks for use in computeTS: hybrid
cermet networks for use in computers; HUMISEAL
line of insulating coatings for protection of
electronic assemblies against environmental
stresses I 5 124 I E 1950
COlrCOR, tnc., 1335 S. Claudina St., Anaheim, Calif.
92803 I 714-772-4510 I "C 66
Analog computers; hybrid computers: operational
amplifiers: plug-in computing c.omponents;
maintenance services I S 225 I E 1959
Commerce Clearing House. Inc .• 4025 W. Peterson Ave.,
Chicago, II!. b0646 I 312-C0 7-9010 I "C 66
Loose leaf automation reporter I S 1800 /
E 1913
Components Corp., 106 Main St., Denville, N.J.
07834 I 201-627-0290 I "C 66
Decade counting units, DIGI-KLlPS @(printed
circuit connepors), DIGI-GUIDES (printed
circuit guide rails) I 5 10 1 E 1943
Computer Applications Inc., 555 Madison Ave., New
York, N,Y. 10022 I 212-PLaza 9-1310 1 "C 66
Computer service and consulting, data processi ng services, service bureau equipment: laM
'1410, 1401, CDC 160A, GL ACD Plotter, SC 4020 1
5 1100 1 E 1960
Computer ASSOCiates, Inc., Lakeside Office Park,
Wakefield, Mass. 018BO I 617-245-9540 1 "C 66
Comput Ing services; consul ti ng services; programming services / S 50 I E 1961
Computer Co. of America, 121 Gill Rd., Haddonfield,
N,J. 08033 I - I "C 66
Desktop computers / S ? / E ?
Computer Control Co., tnc., Old Connecticut Path,
Framingham, Mass. I 617-879-2600 I "C 66
Computers and special-purpose digital systems
for space, engineering, training, scientifiC
and business applications. Digital modules,
test instruments. magnetic core memories.
Space vehicle instrumentation, simulation and
data handlers; information storage and retrieval; missile tracking and positioning; signal
processing and time compression; language
translators; industrial process and machine
tool control; business data proceSSing; pulse
pattern and range time code generation; computer training devices / S 1500 / Ii: 1953
Computer Devices Corp., 6 West 18th St. I Huntington
Sta., N, Y. 11746 / 516-AR 1-0666 I "C 65
Serial memories (wire sonic delay line type);
other delay lines for trim and time adjustment:
word generators / S 30 / E 1961
Computer Fulfillment, 225 East St., WinChester, Mass.
01890 I 617-729-4650 I "C 66
Specialized services and data processing for
the publishing industry: subscription fulfillment, circulation file maintenance and analysis;
reader inauiry processing, consulting IS? I
E 1963
Computer International Sales Co., 2708 Bagley (P.O.
. Box 66847), Houston, Tex. 77006 I 713-JA 4-3111 1
"C 66
Sell used computers on commission for owners /
5 8 1 E 1964
Computer Logic Corp., 1528 20th St., Santa Monica,
Calif. 90404 I 213-451-9754 I "C 66
Digital logic cards: associated hardware and
software, such as power supplies and chassis /
5 15 I E 1960
Computer Sciences Corp .• 650 N. Sepulveda Blvd., El
Segundo, Calif, 90245 I 213-678-0592 I "C 66
Wide range of capabilities in the Information
Sciences; programmi n9, analysis and consul tation services to manufacturers and users of
computing and peripheral equipment: emphasis
is given to production of compiler feasibility
analyses and consultation with manufacturers
to assess the direction of integrated hardwaresoftware packages / S 1400 (approx.) I E 1959
Computer Systems Institute, Inc., 300 Sixth Ave.,
Suite 275, Pittsburgh, Pa, 15222 I 412-261-6110 1
"C 66
Training of computer proyrammers on RCA 301,
IBM 1401-1410 systems 1 5 12 1 E 1962
Computing & Software, Inc., TSI Division, 8155 Van
Nuys Blvd., Panorama City, Calif. <)1402/ 213781-7960 1 ·C 66
Computing and programming services. Equipment
includes 3-IBM 7094's, a #85000, IBM 7044,
IBM 7040; a Univac 1108; 5DS 9300, 505930,
SDS ()to; an IBM 1440, 4-IBM 1401's, 2-IBM
1620's; aGE 235; a microwave high-speed date
link, 5-Electronic Associate 231-R Analog
Computers; several automatic telemetry data
reduction systems, plus wide variety of
scientific raw data optical data measurement
systems I 5 600 I E 1947'
Computron, Inc., Member of the BASF Group, 122
Calvary St., Waltham, Mass. 02154/617-899-0880
"C 66
Magnetic tape for computers and instrum·entation
152501 E 1960 (Computron, Inc.); 1865 (BASF)
COMRESS, Inc., 2120 Bladensburg Rd., N.E., Washington,
D.C. 20018 1 202-529-0360 1 .C 66
Systems design, software development, hardware/
software evaluation. Developers of SCERT
(Systems and Computers Evaluation and Review
Technique), a simulation system used in hardware/software evaluation and management;
TRANSIM, a machine-to-machine 100% translator:
DOPIC, a documentation program used in program
A
AUERBACH
~
debugging, flow charting and documentations I
5 59 1 E 19b2
Connecticut Technical Corp., 3000 Main St., Hartford,
Conn. 06120 I 203-522-6167 1 "C 66
Input-output typewriters, keyboards, tape
perforation systems, data logging typewriters,
tape listing printers. special card perforators
and readers, and services to design computer
peripheral equipment / 5 25 / E 1960
Consolidated Avionics, 800 Shames Dr., Westbury,
N, Y. 11590 1 5Ib-ED 4-8400 I "C 65
Transistorized power supplies, automatic test
equipment, digital systems, logic modules,
magnetic card readers, engine generator control modules I 5 150 1 E 1957
Consolidated Electrodynamics Corp., 360 Sierra
Madre Villa, Pasadena, Calif. 91109.' 213-7969381 I "C 66
Electronic instruments for measurement, analysis and control; instrumentation for dynamic
testing; amplifiers: analog and special purpose
computers; automatic control equipment; data
processing, data recording and data reducUon
equipment; information retrieval devices:
input-output devices: electronic multipliers;
regUlated power suppl ies; magnetic tape recorders, readers, storage sys terns and reels, tape
handlers; magnetic tape: recording papers;
research: telemetering systems: transducers /
5 3000 1 E 1937
Continental Connector Corp., 34-63 56th St., Woodside, N, Y. 11377 1 212-TW 9-4422 1 "C 66
Precision electronic connectors for computers
and data processing eauipment: printed circuit,
rack and panel, power, special designs, microcircuit module sockets I S 525 / E 1952
Control Data Corp., 8100 34th Ave. 50., Minneapolis,
Minn. 55440 I 612-888-5555 1 ·e66
General purpose and speCial purpose digital
computers and systems, hybrid computer
systems. all types of peripheral equipment,
magnetic tape certifiers, certified magnetic
tape, micro-miniature digital computers,
automatic check-out systems, lasers, computer
components. all types of software, and data
centers I S 11,000 / E 1957
Control Data Corp., Control Systems Div., 4455
Miramar Rd .• La Jolla, Calif. 92037 / - / *C 66
Electronic data processing and systems design
consulting services of all kinds I S 315 /
E 1956
Control Data Corp., Data Display DiY., 2401 N.
Fairview Ave., St. Paul, Minn. 1612-631-0550 I
"C 66
Control Data 280 microfi 1m recorder & di splay
system; Control Data 210 in'1uiry retrieval
display system; Control Data 250 multistation
display system 1 5 372 1 E 1958
Control Data Corp., Government Systems Div., 3101
E. 80th 5t., Minneapolis, Minn. 55440 1 -I "C 66
Special purpose digital computers and systems I
5 ? IE?
Control Equipment Corp., 1<) Kearney Rd., Needham
Heights, Mass, 02194 1617-444-7550 I "C 66.
Digital logic modules, custom digital systems,
digital instrumentation including multiplexers,
AID converters, output buffers, data loggers,
similar data processing instrumentation I S 25
1 E 1956
Control Logic, Inc •• 3 Strathmore Rd., Natick, Mass.
I 617-655-1170 I "C 66
Digital circuit modules, digital circuit cards,
microcircuit logic cards, programmable digital
enuipment, special purpose digital systems /
5 40 1 E 1961
Controlomag Laboratories, 2459 Susquehanna St.,
Roslyn, Pa, 19001 1 215-884-8098 1 "C 65
Custom digi tal counters and controls / S 18 /
E 1959
Control Science Corp., 5150 Duke St., Alexandria,
Va. I 703-354-9000 1 ·C 65
Decoders, encoders; act i ve solid-sta te fi lters;
displays, electronic and electro-meehanical;
telemetering systems / S 35 / E 1961
Control Systems Div., Control Data Corp. - name
changed to Control Data Corp., Control Systems
Div., which see
Control Technology, Inc., 1232 Belmont A\'e., Long
8each, Calif. 90804 1 213-433-3360 I "C 66
Computer software: digital, analog and hybrid
simulation studies and services; consulting
services; courses; research studies: structural
design and drafting software / 5 20 I E 1960
Cook Electric Co., Data 5tor Di\'., 6401 W. Oakton,
Morton Grove, Ill. 60053.1 312-<)61-6600 / -c 66
Systems engineering assistance; computer
peripheral equipment including photoelectric
paper tape readers, incrementa 1 and cont i nuous
digital magnetic tape transports with read ann
write capability: magnetic drum recJrders;
recorder development, design and manufacture
capability 1 5 1500 1 E 1897
Cornell-Dubtlier Electronics, Div. Federal Pacific
Electric Co., 50 Paris St., Newark, N.J. 07101 /
201-624-7500 1 "C 66
Full line of capacitors for computer appl ication; delay lines / S 3300 I E 1920
Corning Glass Works, 3<)00 Electronics Drive, Raleigh,
N.C. 1 919-828-0511 1 "C 65
Microcircuits, capacitors, resistors., glass
memory delay lines, printed circuit boards /
5 ? 1 E ?
Cree9 & Co. Ltd., Hollingbury, Brighton, Sussex,
England I BRighton 507111 1 "C 66
Teleprinters and range of paper tape equipment
21 :01 0.005
ROSTER OF ORGANIZATIONS
r"C
for tB.pe preparation, duplication, editing.
translation and verification / S 2850 / E 1912
Crystalonfcs, Inc •• 147 Sherman St •• Cambridge 40,
Mass. 1617-491-1670 I "C 65
Semiconductors, solid circuits / 5 100 I E 1959
James Cunningham Son & Co" Inc •• 10 Carriage St.,
Honeoye Falls, N.Y. /716-624-2000/ "C 66
Computer components: scanners, switch matrix,
automatic controls keyboards, systems engfneerI ng I 5 125 I E IB38
Cybernetics General Co., ,1247 Park Blvd., San Diego,
Calif. 92103 I 714-297-4593 / "C 65
Technical services in programming, systems
engineering and computer and data processing
requirements analysis I 5 11 / E 1963
eyber-tronics, Inc .• 915 Broadway. New York, N.Y.
10010 / 212-oR 4-9150 / "C 65
All computers and punch-card machines; rental
and sale
I S 130 / E 1961
Cybertype Corp., 80 E!fth Ave. I New York, N. Y. 10011
/ - / "C 66
Consultants and engineers supplying computer
systems, applications, programs and data
processing / 5 ? / E ?
Cybetronics Inc., ]32 Calvary St., Waltham, Mass.
02154 / 617-89.-0012 / "C 66
Magnetic tape rehabilitation services, tape
certifiers, cleaners and rewinders: magnetic
tape testers, magnetic tape cleaner, digital
system for controls, consulting services,
special-purpose computer and peripheral mel!!.0ry
systems / S 30 / E 1960
CYCle Eouipment Co., 130-8 E. Sunnyoaks Dr.,
Campbell, Calif. 95008; mail address: P.O. Box
307, Los Gatos, Calif. 95030/ 40B-370-4220 /
"C 66
Perforated tape winders, unwinders, feeders,
tape transports, reelS, tape supply indicators
/ S 10 I E 1948
(",
DA-PEX Company, 334 Francis Bldg., Louisville, Ky.
40202 I 502-451-7457 or 585-5454 / "C 66
(]sp.d computer broker - consul t and advise
owner-users buying or selling used computers
and punched card machines / 5 ? / E 1960
Data-American Eouipment Co., 333 No. Michigan Ave.,
Chicago, Ill. 60601 I 312-CE 6-2525 / ·C 65
Data-Vault, a safe and vault for the protection
of computer tapes, disc packs and microfilm
from fire, explosion and moisture / S? /
E 1961
Data Communications, Tnc., Church Rd., P.O. Box 29,
Moorestown, N. J. 08051 / 609-235-6650, 51, 52 /
"C 66
Digital communication and terminal enuipment.
Data transmission terminals: time division
multiplex terminals: high speed teleprinters;
and cryptic devices I 5 25 plus manufacturing
/ E 1962
The Data Corp. 4050 Wilshire Blvd., Los Angeles,
Calif. 90005 / 213-385-9255 / "C 65
Consultants. methodS analysts, systems analysts, programmers for major computer manufacturers. In house IBM 1460/360, 50S 910,
Philco and REI Optical scanners. Representation in principal cities / S 150/ E 1962
Data Display Div., Control Data Corp., - name
changed to Control Data Corp., Data Display Div.,
which see
Data Dynamics, Inc .• 305 Webster St., Monterey,
Calif. 93940 I 408-375-4133 I "C 65
Mathematical, operations and systems analysis
and programming / 5 110 / E 1962
Data-Link Corp., 4546 El Camino Real, Los Altos,
Calif. 94022 / 415-327-2616 / "C 66
D-L 40 Splicer-Guage-Punch-punched tape splicer
with tape registration guoge, manual code hole
punch: D-L 35 and D-L 71 Winders, electric 35
or 70 C.P.S. with split reels or demountable
reels: D-L 45 Unwinder, center feed; Splice
and Correct tape, self adherring, tor 5, 6, 7
& 8 channel punched tape I 5 20 / E 1964
Data Machines, Inc., 1590 Monrovia Ave., Newport
Beach, Calif. 1714-646-9371 I "C 65
DATA 600 series general purpose, stored program
scientifiC computers I S 6 / E 1964
Datamation Assistants Co., Inc., Ninianne Blvd. &
Rt. I, Princeton, N.J. 08540 / 609-452-2211 / "C 66
Consultation hardware/software, service bureau
job processi.ng, keypunch/opti.cal scanning
conversions, information retrieval and total
management system specialists / S ]60/ E 1965
Datamec Corp., - name changed to Hewlett-Packard Co.,
Dntamec Div., which see
Data Processing Ermipment Exchange Co., - see
DA-PEl( Co.
Data Processing Management Assoc., 505 Busse
Highway, Park Ridge, Ill. 60068 / 825-8124 / "C 66
The association representing the management
level data processing user group I S 25 I E 1951
Data Products Corp., 8535 Warner Dr .• Culver City.
Calif. 90321 / 213-837-4491 I. ~ 66
High-speed LINE/P~TERS
random access
memory DISC FILES Q!); on-line and off-line
print stations I S 500 / E 1962
Datapulse Inc., Datapulse Div., 509 Hindry Ave .•
Inglewood, Calif. 90306/213-671-4334, 678-4275 I
"C 66
Pulse generators. data generators, word, frame
and character generators / S 100 / E 1962
Data~"lse Inc., KRS Instruments Div., 780 S. Arroyo
Parkway, Pasadena, Calif. 91105/ 213-792-4142,
®;
681-7416
66
Data recording instrumentation utilizing continuous-loop magnetic tape cartridges / 5 50 /
E 1962
Data Systems Analysts, Inc •• 5900 Westfield Ave.,
Pennsauken, N.J. 08110 / 609-665-6088 I "C 66
Development of computer controlled communication systems and message switching programs I
S 30 I E 1963
Data Systems Oiv. of Litton Industries - see
Litton Industries, Data Systems Div.
Data Systems Tnc .. 10700 Puritan Ave., Detroit,
Mich. 48238 / 313-341-6900 I "C 65
Design, develop and manufacture digital computers and systems for computer communications
and information converters / S 50 / E 1961
Data Trends, Inc., 1259 Route 46, ParSippany, N.J.
201-334-1515 I "C 66
Computer/communications systems; remote I/O
terminal devices; data collection systems;
optical scanners (hand printed) "/ S 28/ E 1963
Davidson Electronic Development Co., 2211 Peninsula
Dr., Erie, Pa. 16505 / 814-833-9818 / "C 66
Front end speCialists (parameter measurements,
scanning, data reduction and SejenCing for
computer input, tape or cards)
S 20 / E 1951
Dayton Electronic Products Co., Inc., 117 E. Helena
St., Dayton, Ohio 45404 / 513-224-1416 / "C 65
250 KC and I AC logic circuits, custom circuits,
control systems, data acquisition systems and
digital logic training devices I 5 95 / E 1951
Oed si on ContrOl, Inc., 1590 Monrovia Ave., Newport
Beach, CaliCo /714-646-9371 I -C 65
Coincident current core memory systems, logic
modules, digital systems / S 50 / E 1956
Decision Systems Inc. t 1490 Queen Anno Rd., Teaneck,
N.J. 07666 / 201-833-2690 / "C 66
Systems development, computer pragrams and
programming systems, analog and digital data
proceSSing services, cO'l1puter application Rnd
feasibility studies, systems anl1ysis, information retrieval. and automatic programming
development / S 60 I E 1960
Delco Radio Div., General Motors Corp., 700 E
Firmin St., Kokomo, Ind. I 312-{;L7-8461 I "C 65
(Semiconductors) sHicon and germanium power
transistors, silicon rectifiers, digital
circuits and support equipment: data format
converters; data acquiSition and recording
systems: digital circuit modules to 10 m.c.
speeds; special purpose digital systems: solid
state industrial control systems / 56000 I
E 1936
Dennison Manufacturing Co., Machines Systems Div.,
300 Howard St •• Framingham, Mass. 01702 /
617-873-3511 / "C 66
Cummins-Dennison Dat-A-Read I S 3800 I E 1844
Design Automation, Tnc •• <1 Tyler Rd., Lexington,
Mass. 02173 I 617-862-8998 I "C 66
Computer analysis of electronic circuit performance: electronics consulting for design
review: and electronics consulting for design
I s 3 / E 1965
The G. C. Dewey Corp., 202 E. 44 St., New York,
N.Y. 10017 I 212-MU 2-7369 I "C 65
Digital, analog computers / S 125 / E 1955
Dialfght Corp .• 60 Stewart Ave., Brooklyn, N. Y.
11237 I 212-HYaclnth 7-7600 / "C 65
Indicator lights, pilot lights, ultra-miniature
indicator lights ("Datalites") for computer and
automation fields. Data-Strip and Data-Matrix
for computers, etc. Telephone light strips and
indicator lights: transistorized indicator
lights. Illuminated pushbutton switches. Oiltight indicator lights for heavy-duty industrial
applications. Single plane numeric readout /
S 250 / E 1937
D1altron Corp., 203 Harrison PI., Brooklyn 37, N.Y.
/ HYacinth 7-7600 / "C 65
Time delay relays for computers, data processing and automation eqUipment / S 230 / E 1938
Diamonite Products Mfg. Co., McConkey 5t. Ext.,
Shreve, Ohio / 216-547-4211 / "C 65
Computer components of alumina ceramics, high
strength, low lOSS, high density, electrical
insulating, vacuum tight, readily metallized.
Sizes available, subminiature through normal
size reqUirements / 5 175 / E 1940
DI/AN ContrOlS, Inc., 944 Dorchester Ave., Boston,
Mass. 02125 / 617-288-7700 / "C 66
Computer keyboard, lister-printers, magnetic
core memories, core tra nsistor logic modules,
digital magnetic cards (shift registers,
binary counters, logic, etc.) / S 250 / E 1958
Dian Laboratories, Inc., 611 Broadway, New York 12,
N. Y. / VI 6-4155 I "C 65
D.C. analog computers - analog computing
services. Ana log computing services; genera I
purpose analog computers. Design and construction of special purpose computers. simulators,
and trainers / 5 10 I E 1955
The Diebold Group, Inc. 430 Park Ave., New York,
N. Y. 10022 / 212-PLaza 5-0400 I "C 65
Full range of integrated services in the fields
of modern management and management science.
Areas of specialization include automation,
automatic data processing, programming, information technology, product and business planning analyses. Subsidiary companies in 13
cities on two continents / S 150 / E 1 t Teledata O data tr~nsmiit--;;r/recei,;er·i
Selectadata O selective reader; code converter;·
Add-punch· adding machine/tape punchi remotely
controlled input-output devices and printers j
special Flexowriter writing maChines. Equip
ment for reading, punching, verifying. converting, regenerating and transmitting paper, tape,
edge-punched cards or tabulating cards. Supplies used with data processing equipment.
Adding machines. 10-key and special type style
for optical reader. Electronic and rotary
desk calculators. orrademark / 5 11,600 / E
Incorporated 1934
G-E Communication Products Dept., Lynchburg, Va.
703-V I 6-7311 / OC 65
ltlS-91 Data Communications / 5 ? / E ?
General Atronics Corp., 1200 E. Mermaid Lane, Philadelphia, Pa. 19118 / 215-246-3700 / OC 66
Memory systems, electronic; Automa~ic counting & sorting systems; Photoeleciric readersi
Oscilloscopes & cameras for recording data /
5 250 / E 1956
General Computers, Inc., 5990 W. Pico Blvd., Los
Ango1es, Calif. 90035 / 213-939-7687/ OC 66
AnalOG computers and analog computing components I 5 50 / E 1957
General Devices, Inc., Box 253, Princeton, N.J.
08540 / 609-924-2500 / "C 66
Digital data acquisition systems. tape to
tape translators, computer input devices,
te1emetering systemB 7 5 75 / E 1953
General Dynamics/Electronics, 3302 Pacific Highway,
P.O. Box 127, San Diego 12, Calif. / 714-296-4641
/ ·C 65
Computer readout devices, high speed electronic printers, high speed communications printers, microfilm recorders, plug-in and potted
circuits, digital devices for display of computer information, inpub..and visual output
devices (the CHARACmON® shaped beam tube) ,
faCSimile systems / 5 1200 / E 1955
General Dynamics/Electronics. 1400 North Goodman
St., Rochester, N.Y. 14601 / 716-FI 2-6000 / *C 65
Digital computers, process control computers,
statistical analog computers, data transmission
oyotems, data logging systems / 5 4000 / E 1694
General Electric Co •• Capacitor Dept., P.O. Box 156,
Irmo, S.C. 29063 / 803-253-3830 I OC 65
CapaCitors for computers / 5 750 / E 169B
General ElectriC Co., Computer Dept., 13430 N. Black
Canyon Highway, Phoenix, Ariz. 85001 / 602-9412900 / OC 65
GE-1l5, 205, 215, 225, 235, 415, 425, 435, 625,
635. Complete data-proceSSing systems, includ-
21:010.007
ROSTER OF ORGANIZATIONS
jny full line of peripherall.
\
"'-.
Computer serv-
ices offered non-computer customers through
six Information Processing Centers in major
metropolitan areas / S 4400 I E 1956
GeneTtI} F.lectric Coo, Electronic Components Sales
Operation, 1 River Rd., Schenectady, N.Y. 12305
/ 5lU-FRanklin 4-2211 / 'C 66
Sells electronic components and devices to
electric and electronic product manufacturers
/ 5 250,000 / E 1892
General Electric Co. I Laminated Products Dept. ,
Coshocton, Ohio / MAin 2-5310 / If(: 65
Flooring for free-access floors J S 100 /
E ?
GCrJeral Electric Co. I Process Computer Business
Section, 2255 W. Desert Cove Rd., Phoenix, Ariz;.
85002 / 602-941-2900 / 'C 66
Process computers and systemsj remote scannersi data Ioggersj explosion-proof ID card
readerj network analyzer; contract progranninU / S7 / E ?
The General Fireproofing Co., E. Dennick Ave.,
Youngstown, Ohio 44501 / 216-746-7271 / 'C 6S
nata processing accessory equipment I 5 2600
/ E 1902
General Instrument Corp., Defense & Engineering
Products Group. Radio Receptor Div., Andrews Rd.,
Hicksville, N.Y. 11802 / 511HlVerbrook 1-4300 /
'C 66
General and special purpose computational
and data processing systems and eqtdpment
utilizing conventional modular and/or microelectronic packaging I S 9000 I E 1922
General Instrument Corp., Magne-Head/Systematics Div.,
13040 S. Cerise Ave., Hawthorne, Calif. 90250 /
213··679-3377 / 'C 66
Tape to card converters. card to tape converters, data cOlDDlunication equipment I S 300
/ E 1955
General Instrument Corp. Radio Receptor Div •• 100
Andrews Rd., Hicksville, N.Y. 11802 / 516-68143JO / 'C 66
Custom designed general support equipment,
automated test equipment, special purpose
computer components and computer systems,
digital systems using small-medium goneral
pUlpose computer. / 5 600 I E 1922
General Precision, Inc., GPL Div., Bedford Rd.,
Pleasantville, N.Y. 10570/ 914-H0 9-5000/ 'C 66
PARD (Precision Annotation & Retrieval Display) systemsj microtelivisorj character vector generatorj airborne computers for use with
dopplar radar systems; lenticolor (real-time
color display using black and mite film or
1V source); 1V hard copy printer I 5 1000 I E
1946
General Precision. Inc., Kearf'ott Products Div.,
1150 McBride Ave., Little Falls, N. J~ 07424 I
201-256-4000 / ·C 66
Analog, dig! tal, and hybrid computers. Programmed measurement and checkout equipment.
Digital data communication, high-speed logic,
and range instrumentation systems. Data acquisition and recording systems. Analog to digital
converters. Servomechanisms and systems. Digital electroluminescent solid state readout devices (alpha-numeric). Resolvers, trnnsoivers,
synchros, servo motora:, motor t8ch generator.,
servo amplifiers, QR circuits, dc power supplies,
choppers, mag-amps, signal coerparator. and
sensors, and summing-holation amplifiers I
Generi16~~~c{s1o~:1 Inc.,
Llbrascope -Group.-1J(fS
Western Ave., Glendale, Calif. 7 213-240-2117 I
'C 66
Military computers and datu-processing systems;
mass memoriesi peripheral computer' disc memories; optical systemsj encoders / S 2000/ E
1937
General Precision, Inc., Link Group, Colesville Rd.,
Binghamton, N.Y. 13902 I 607-772-3100 / 'C 66
Aircraft and missile simulators, video and
photographic storage/retrieval and proceSsing
systems, space information systems, rap.ae timing and instrumentation systems, graphic data
convers ion systems, special purpose analogi
digital computing systems and ancillary equipments, computer simulation, and scientific
prograDDning .ervice. I 5 4000 I E 1935
General Badia Co., 22 Baker Ave., W. Concord, Masi.
01761 / 617-EM 9-4400 I 'C 66
Electronic measuring and test instruments, including frequency counters, digital-to-analog
converters and printers I 5 1000 I E 1915
Genisco Technology Corp., Systems Div., 18435 Susana Rd., Compton, Calif. 90221 I 213-774-1850 /
'C 66
Tape recording and y.l!producing systems; telemetry checkout equipment / 5 450 / E 1947
Geo Space Corp., 5803 Glenmont Drive, Houston, Tex.
/ 713-/.1'J 6-1611 I 'C 66
Digital photographic plotters; 21 channel to
System/360 format controller; geophysical
data proce.sing eqUipment I 5 600 I E 1957
The Geotechnical Corp., 3401 Shiloh Rd., Garland,
Tex. 75040 i 214-276-6102 I 'C 65
Slow-speed, lOW-frequency analog magnetic tape
recorder/reproducers I 5 6S0 I E 1936
The Gerber Scientific Instrument Co .. 83 Gerber Rd.,
South Windsor, Conn. (P.O. Box 305, Hartford.
Conn.) I 203-644-1551 I 'C 66
Plotters (plotting boards), automatic drafting
machines, graphic to digital converters, digital to graphic converters, data reduction
eqUipment, scanners / S 275 I E 1946
Giannini Controls Corp., 1600 S. Mountain Ave.,
Duarte, Calif. 91010 I 213-661-2311 /\l= 65
Data acquisition deVices, encoders, numerical
controls; measurement and control devicest instruments, timing devices; ultrasonic devices;
nucleonic devices I 5 2000 / E 1945
Giannini Scientific Carp., Flight Research Div.,
P.O. Box I-F, Richmond, Va., 23201/703-7374163 / OC 66
Photo instrumentation, syatems and analog to
digital converters / 5 60 / E 1948
Government SyatellUl Div., Control Data Corp. -- lee
Control Data Corp., Government Systems Div.
GPs Instrument Co., Inc., 188 Needham St., Newton,
Man. 02164 / 617-969-9405 I 'C 66
High-speed, high-accurecy repetitive analog
computers, statistical and iterative types;
computer center and 1:srvicos rentalj computer components, function and noile generators,
multiplier/divider, etc. Is 40 I E 1951
Graphic Contr01:l: Corp., 189 Van ReDS.selaer St.,
Buffalo, N.Y. 14210 /853-7500 I 'C 65
GC data processing fOrm:Jj continuous, manifold data proces.ing forms / S 360 I E 1957
H. J. Gruy & Associates, Inc., 2501 Cedar Springa
Rd., Dallas, Tex. 75201 I 214-RI 2-1421 I 'C 66
Petroleum engineering consultantsi equipment
includes 1620 II-4OK, 1443 printer, 1311 disc
drive, calcomp plotter with SPS & Fortran
compiler. / 5 70 / E 1959
The Gi1iEX Corp., 3003 Pennsylvania Ave., Santa
Monica, Calif. / 213-EXbrook 3-0462 I "C 6S
Computer input systems (high speed data procca~or:;;); tir:.a 8r, plastics, metal and
other induatriaa I 5 550 I E 1950
Informatica, Inc •• 5430 Van Nuys Blvd., Sberman Oaks,
Calif. 91401 I 213-783-7500 7 'C 66
Specialists in o.n-l1ne real-time time sharing
software appUc:;utlons, Implementation and ana~
IfSlsi provide design, analysis, prograll'llling
and Implementation of computer-based systema
for government and industry I S 250 / E 1962
Information Dillplays, Inc" 102 E. Sandford Blvd ••
lit. Vernon, N.Y, 10550 I 914-OW 9-5515 / 'C 66
CRT display systems -- ,computer aided 'graphics
I 5 40 / E 1946
8/66
21 :01 0.008
Information lor Industry, Inc., 1000 Connecticut
Ave., N.W., Washington, D.C. 20036/202-296-4936
/ *C 66
Sale owners of data base covering all U.S.
chem.ically related patents issued since 1950
to date. Prograllll available for ~BMI ,Burroughs and CDC equipment / 5 6 / E. 1955
Information International Inc., 200 Sixth St., Cambridge, MalS. 02142 / 617-868· 9810 / *C 66
Automatic progralllll8ble film readers, applications prograDllling.for PFR systems, software
development (compiler I assembler., etc.) / S
38 / F. 1962
Information Processing System., Inc .• 200 W. 51th
5t., New York, N.Y. 10019/ 212-CI 6··2267/ *C 66
Brokerage of used computer systemsi consultin9
on purchases and sales of ,EDP .equipment ; leases
on EAM and EDP systems / 5 ? / E 1963
Information Products Corp .• Subsidiary of Benwell
Industries, New Ludlow Rd., So. Hadley FaUs,
Mass. / 413-536-1800 / *C 65
Random access file interrogators, computer input and display equipment, data editing equipment / 5 ? / E ?
Information Retrieval Corp., 1000 Connecticut Ave.,
N.W., Washington, D.C. 20036/202-296-4936/ *C 65
Information retrieval devices; information
services, and information engineering I S 20
/ E 1961
Infotran, Inc., 860 Fifth Ave., New York, N.Y. 10021
/ 212-LE 5-7724 / *C 66
Special purpose computers I data communications
and control systems; planning, deSign and development of total information systems; new
product developmenti educational services I
5 6 / E 1964
Innovation Consultants, Inc., 4 E. State St.,
Doylestown, Pa. 18901 / 215-FIllmore 8-2324 / *C 66
Management consulting, systems design. programming, management education I S 160 (including associated entities) / E 1960
Institute for Computing Sciences, Preston Forest
Tower, P.O. Box 30245, Dallas. Tex. 75230/ AD 11012 / "C 66
Educa tiona I programs for mana.gement i career
training / 5 15 / E 1965
Intectron, Inc., 2300 Washington St .• Newton Lower
Falls, Mass. 02162/617-969-9311 /'C 65
Microphotometric instruments, granularity com.puter, analog multiplier, optical correlation
analyzer, optical fourier transformer, analog
computers / 5 10-20 I. E 1960
.
International Accountants 50~iety, Inc., Business
Electronics Div., 209 ~'J. Jackson Blvd., Chicago,
Ill. 60606 / HArrison 7-5322 / *C 66
Ho~ study courses in programming for computers,
and applications of business problems to computers / S 100 / E 1955 (division)
International Business Machines Corp., Data Processing Div., .112 E. Post Rd., White Plains, N.Y. 10601
/ 914-lm 9-1900 / "C 65
Complete line of data processing syst'ems and
equipment, including the IBM Systeml360, the
IBM RAMAC 305 (model 2), 1401-G, 1401, 1440,
1460, 1410, 1620, 1620 (model 2), 7010, 7040,
7044, 7070, 7072, 7074, WOO, 7090, 7094, 7094II,
data proceSsing systems; 7100 data acquisition
system; 1420 bank transit system; 1240 bank data
proceSSing system; 1062 teller terminal; 1230
optical mark scoring reader; 1231 0RUcal mark
page reader; 1262 optical reader card punch;
1418 optical character reader: random access
disk and drum storage units; 7770 audio response
unit; 1070 process conmunication system, 2321
data cell drive; 1015 inquiry display terminalj
2250 display console; 2671 paper tape reader;
1710 control system; magnetic character inscribing and sensing equipment; airline reservations
systems; Tele-processing dev~ce. and systems
including data collection and t.ransmission
equipment; Hypertape; mark sensing equipmenti
and a full line of punched card equipment,
including the low-cost Series 50 line. Also
printers, Micro-proceSSing, punched cal:ds, magnetic tape, magnetically encoded paper checks
and other supplies used with data proceSSing
equipment / 5 116,000 I E 1911
International Business Machines torp., Federal Systems Div., 326 E. Montgomery Ave., RoCkville, Md.
/ 301-GA 4-6700; 301-HA 7-4110 / *C 65
Electronic information handling and <;antrol
systems for U.S. government space, defense,
and Civil programs. Systems mana~ement, systems development, research, engineering, production, installation, and field support 7
5 ? / E 1955
International Computers and Tabulators, Ltd. I 839
Stewart Ave., Garden City, New York, N.Y. 11533
/ 516-CH8-5656 / OC 66
I.C.T. 1900 series of digital computers. Computer peripheral and ancillary equipment for
O.E.f.!. /520,000 / ~ 1959
International Computers ~nd Tabulators., Ltd" I.C.T.
House, Putney, London.$.W. 15, England I Putney
7272 / *C 65
Punched card equipment and electronic ~igital
computers, card t6 paper tape converters, paper
tape to card converters, data collection and
recording eqUipment, magnetic drums,. inputoutput devices, memory systems, office equipment,
line-a-time high speed printers, magnetic character, paper tape and punch card readers, IUgnetic tape filing systems, readers, and recorders / 5 20,000 / E 1959
International Data Corp., 355 \'lalnut St., Newtonville.
Mass. 02160 / 617·332-8840 / *C 65
8/66
DIRECTORIES
Market reaearch and publilhing activity in computer field / 5 10 / E 19M
International Diode Carp" 90 Forrelt St., Jersey
City, N.J 07304 / 201-432-7151 / *C 66
Fast switching computer diodes with high forward conductance. 7 5 13 / E 1959
International Electro-ilagneticl, Inc., Eric Drive &
Cornell Ave., Palatine, Ill. 60067 I 312-358-4622
/ *C 65
Magnetic record, playback and erase heaM for
computers, telemetering, data recording, video
and audio eqUipment / 5 25 / E 1959
International Electronic Research Corp., 135 W.
Maonolia 81vd., Burbank, Calif. 91502 / 213-8492481 / "C 66
'Analog to digital converters / 5 350 / E 1950
International Rectifier, 233 Kansas St., El Segundo,
Calif. 90246 / 213-676-6281 / *C 66
Zener voltage regulators, controlled rectifiers,
trans ient protectors, photolectric readouts /
5 1100 / E 1947
International Resistance Co., 401 N. Broad St.,
Philadelphia, Pa. 19108 / 215-WA 2-8900 /.C 66
Resistors (composition, film, power and precision wire wound and special application) i
potentiometers, displacement transducers; low
pressure cell i rectifiers i pressure transducers, diodes, frequency and time standards /
5 2500 / E 1927
Invac Corp., 26 Fox Rd., Bear Hill Industrial Park,
Waltham, Mass. 02154 / 617-899-2380 / *C 66
Tape punches. tape readers: typewriter transmitter/receiver, photoelectric keyboards, reperforation, verification data communications,
and Similar systems / 5 75 / E 1959
It::s~~~om~~2'!~0~a1"~e ~d.,
Lexington 73,
Research, development and manufacture of dig1.ta1 computers, graphic to digital converters,
information retrieval devices, mass memory systems, high speed printers, film readers, scanners, translating equipment, and visual output
devices I. 5 2100 / E 1957
ITI Electronics. Inc., 369 Lexington Ave., Clifton,
N.J / ~ / ·C65
IT-271 remote cathode-ray indicator; IT-284
high level video amplifieri IT-277 large screen
cathode-ray indicator; cua.tom manufacturing I
rrr
5
?/
E
?
Data Services, a division of International Telephone and Telegraph Co:rp., P.O. 4G2, Rt. 17 &
Garden 5tate Pkwy., Paramus, N.J. / 201-262-8700
/ *C 66
Full range of data proceSSing services (scientific and commercial) including programming,
computational services and data center management / 5 550/ E 1965
IlT Federal Laboratories, a diVe of International
Telephone and Telegraph Corp., 500 Washington Ave ••
Nutley, N.J. 07110/ 201-284-0123/ "C 65
Medium and large scale real time data proces
sors for on-line applications; ITl' 025 data
processor, I'IT 525 Versatile Automatic Data
Exchange / 5 lIT, 173,000; IITF!., 5,000/ E
1920
lIT General Controls, 801 Allen Ave., Glendale,
Calif. 91201 / 213-842-6131 / *C 65
Automatic controls for product or process.
~:~~~e~:l:::, c:;~~!:t::v~es~l:~~:~;~:~u~~g
r:!~:~:~s ~c~~!~~;, s!~:~~!!~a~l~~:;~~!~ ~d
snap-acting switches, time switches (sequency),
transformer-relays, contactors, limit controls
(temperature) / 5 3000 / E 1930
Janus Control Corp., 296 Newton St., l'laltham, Mass.
02154/-/0(;66
Electronic decade and instrument counters and
counter··related products; numerical diSplays
/ S 30 / E 1963
Jay-·El Products, Inc., 1659 W. 169th St., Gardena,
Calif. 90247 / 213-323-7130 / *C 65
Illuminated push button SWitches, indicator
. lights, time ~lays, time delay relays. flashers, color coated lamps / 5 45 / E 1956
JB Electronic Transformers Inc .• 2310 W. Armitage
Ave., Chicago, Ill. 60647 / 312-276· 0444 / "C 65
Computer components / 5 100 / E 1959
Jonker Corp., 26 N. Sumit Ave., Gaithersburg, Md.
20760 / 301-948-9440 / *C 66
Information and data retrieval equipment based
an the principal of optical coincidence or
superimposable cards; equipment for drilling
holes into cards and reading out holes from
the cardsj manual and automatic hardware / S
70 / E 1960
KeBrfott Products Div., General Precision, Inc. -name changed to General Precision, Inc~, Keartott
Products Div., which see
George Kelk Ltd., 46 Lesmill Rd., Don Mills,
Ontario, Canada / 416-445-5650 / "C 66
Special purpose computers for on line industrial control i shaft to digital converters /
5 45 / E 1953
Keystone Computer Associates, Inc., 409 N. Easton
Rd., Willow Grove, Pa. 19090 / 215-657-0400 /
"C 66
A
AUERBACH
It
Specialize in systems deSign, systems analYSiS,
and computer programming; offer services in
scientific, engineering .and data processing
applications, as well as management consulting
/ 5 40 / E 1965
Walter Kidde & Co., Inc., Aerospace Div. -- see
Douglas Randall, Inc., a subsidiary of Walter
Kidde & Co., Inc.
A. Kimball Co., Div. at Litton Industries - name
changed to Kimball Systems, Inc.-- Div. of
Litton Industries, which see
Kimball Systems, Inc., Div. of Litton Industries,
215 Daniel 5t., Farmingdale, N.Y. 11735/516MYrtle 4-7300 / *C 65
.
High-speed punched tag reader, PM "75" machine, hard pack / 5 450 / E 1876
Kleinschmidt Div., SCM Corp., Lake-Cook Rd., Deerfield, Ill. 60015 / 312· 945-1000 / OC 65
Com.nunications and data proceSSing hardware,
including high- and medi wn-speed printers,
tape perforators, and systems IS? IE?
Kyros Corp, 5428 Lake Mendota Drive, P.O. 406,
Madison, liis. / 608-238 3587 / *C 66
Kyread tape developer; Kysolve specialty
sol vents for "stripping" computer tapes:
conBul ting services / 5 3 / E 1961
Leach Corp., Controls Div., 717 N. Coney Ave.,
Azusa, Calif. / 213-334-6211 / "C 66
Data recording systems for aerospace and industrial applications; specializing in lightw~ight, portable, high environmental applications; compatible with all computer formats /
5 450 / E 1960
Lear Siegler, Inc., Power Equipment Div., P. O.
Box 6719, Cleveland, Ohio 44101 / 216-662-1000
/ "C 66
Magnetic particle clutches or brakes / S 1200
/ E 1940
Ledex Inc. I 123 Webster St., Dayton, Ohio 45402 /
513-224-9691 / *C 65
Research, development, deSign, and production
of remote switching and actuating components
and subsystems, such as intervalometers, automatic checkout. mode selectors, programmers,
sequence controlS, positive/negative circuit
seaTChing, pulsing devices, guidance contrOl.
power transfer, switching and/or Q,ctuating
subsystems to meet extreme envi ronments.
Standard products inClude: rotary and medium
stroke linear solenoids, protected silicon
bridge rectifiers, transient controls, stepping
and servostep motors. open and hermetically
sealed switches for multi-circuft switching,
arc suppressors / S 340 / E 1942
Leeds & Northrup Co .• Sumneytown Pike, North Wales,
Pa • 19454 / 215-699-5353 / .c 66
Industrial computer control systems- digitally
directed analog mode and direct digital
control, LN 4100, LN 4200-also, a line of
industrial data loggers, LN WOO, LN .1500 /
•
.
5 3100 / E 1899
Lenkurt Electric Co., Inc. 1105 County R·d., San
Carlos, Calif. 94070/ 415-591-8461 / *C 65
Microwave, Multiplex and data transmission
systems / 5 2500 / E 1943
[FE Electronics, 1075 Commonwealth Ave .• Boston,
Mass. 02215 / 617-254-4233 / "C 66
BatCh-fabricated core memories; CRT displays;
delay line memories / S 1050 / E 1946
Librascope Group, General Precision, Inc. - sec
General Precision, Inc., Librascope Group
Licon Div •• Illinois Tool Works Inc., 6615 W.
Irving Park Rd., Cbicago, Ill. 60634 / 312AV 2-4040 / *C 65
Full line of precision snap-::Action switches,
illuminated pushbutton switches, environmentfree switches / 5 150 / E 1955
Link Group, General Precision, Inc., Systems Div .•
8inghamton. N. Y. 13902 / 607-RA 3-9311 / "C 65
GP-4 digital computer, wave-form display analyzer. and graphic d~splay systems / S 2900
/ E 1935
Lipps, Inc., 1630 Euclid St., Santa Monica, Calif.
90404 / 213-1lX3-0449 / "C 66
Complete line of instrumentation and audio
beads for professional equipment - magnetic
recording heads / 5 50 / E 1947 .
Liskey Aluminum, Inc., P.O. Box 580, Glen Burnie,
Md. 21061 / 301-796-3300 / "C 66
Raised flOOring, modular air conditioning,
partitions, design and engineering for planning computer room / S 250 / E 1958
Litton Industries, Data Systems Div., 8000 Woodley
Ave., Van Nuys, Calif. 91406 / 213-781-6211 /
*C 66
Air data computers; general purpose microelectronic computer; data linksi IFF decoders;
microelectronic power suppliesi command and
control system engineering, development and
productioni automated test equipment; displays;
tape recorders I 5 3200 / E 1961
Litton Industries, Monroe DATALOO Div., 343
Sansome, San Francisco, Calif. / - / trc 66
The Monroe DATAUXi ultra high speed optical
prl nter / 5 ? / E ?
Litton Industries, Triad Distributor Div., 305 N.
Briant 5t., Huntington, Ind. 46750 / 219-3566500 / "C 66
Transformers, filter reactors, integrated
circuit cards. card extractors, component
lead benders / 5 5OOf- / E 1947
ROSTER OF ORGANIZATIONS
Litton Industries, USa::O div •• 13536 Saticor St.,
Vnn Nuys, Calif. I 213-786-9381 I 'C 66
Termina Is. hand les. knobs I pushbutton switches
?~C~~!2maChined Bnd molded products I 5 200
21 :010.009
Memorex Corp., 1100 Shulman Ave •• Santa Clara, Calif.
95052 I 408-248-3344 I .C 66
Precision magnetic computer tape and tape
accessories / 5 475
I E 1960
"
\,
Li tton Industries. Winchester Electronics OlY .•
Main St. & Hillside Ave •• Oakville, Conn. I
203- 274 -889 1 I 'C 66
Connectors and accessories i round, rectangular
miniature, subminiature, printed circuit.
coax, crimp contact; specht application
types,' S 500 I E 1941
Litton Systems, Jnc., Mellonics Systems Developm~nt Div., 100) W. Maude Ave., Sunnyvale. Coll!.
",1086 I 408-245-0795 I 'C 66
Data systems engineering lind computer programming services in the analysis, desion Bnd development of corrm8nd and control syltelll,data
handling networks; scientific Bnd conunercial
data processing systems; jn.f'.ormation mflnage-
ment systems; digital computer simulation
systems I 5 80 I E 1961
Lockheed Electronics Co .• 6201 E. Randolph St., Los
Angeles, Calif. I 213-722-6810 I 'C 66
Printed ciTcuit boards. etched. plated. plated
through holes. flush commutators, transduceu.
core memory products I S 700 / E 1959
Logitek, Jnc., 42 Central Dr., Farmingdale, L.I.,
N. Y. 11735 I 516-MY4-3080 I 'C 66
Time code generators, magnetic tape sCllrch and
control, time code translators, digital clocks
I
I
5 55
E 1961
Loral Electronic Systems, a division or Loral Corp ••
825 Bronx River Ave., Bronx, N.Y. 10472/ TI 29500 / 'C 65
Special purpose digital and analog computers
I 5 2255 I E 1948
Lurkin Research Laboratories, 210 W. 13lst St., Los
Angeles, Calif. 90061 I 213-321-6283 I 'C 66
Digital magnetic tape recorders; tape-ta-tape
converters; magnetic tape readers / S 35 /
E 1963
Mac Panel Co., 2060 Brentwood St., High Point, N.C.
27262 I 919-882-8138 / 'C 65
Magnetic computer tape, control panels, wires,
plugboard programming systems /'5 100 / E 1958
Magn"ecraft Electric Co .• 5575 N. Lynch Ave., Chi-
I 312-AV 2-5500 I ·C 65
High speed relays for computers / 5 125 /
E 1951
Magne-HeadlSystematics Div. I General Instrument
Corp. - see General Instrument Corp., "agne-Head/
Systematics Div.
Magnetics Inc .• Butler, Pa. 16001 / 412-285-4711 /
'C 66
powder cores, tape wound cores, ferrite cores,
isolation amplifier / S 400 / E 1949
Management Systems Corp., 209 Grillin St. Dallas,
I
Tex, 75202
I
214-RI 2-8251
I
'C b6
Data processing consultants in systems and
applications; installation management; contract
programming; computing services and time sales:
complete bureau services / 5 20 / E 1964
F. L. llannix & Co .• Inc., Suite 1132, Park SmJare
Bldg .• Boston, Mass. 617-542-5033 I 'C 65 '
Executive and technical placement in the field
of data processing. Consultants in wage and
salary programs: organization and personnel
administration / s ? / E ?
Mardix, 1160 Terra Bella Ave., Mountain View. Calif.
i-I
·C 65
Marksmen, Inc •• 21 West 10th St., Kansas City, Mo.
64105 I 816-842-4150 I 'C b6
Data collection and conversion systems; incremental, block and digital recorders interfaced
with typewriter, adding machine, badge reader
or time recorder; data recorded on 14" magnetic
tape cartridges
I
f E 1964
5 25
Massey Dickinson Co., Inc., 9 Elm St., Saxonville,
Mass. 01706 / 617-877-2511
I 'C 65
PrograUllling and data acquisition equipment for
behaviora I, phys iolOQica 1. psychological, and
visual research
(
"'-
..
I
5 25 / E 1957
Mast Development Co., 2212 E. 12th St., Davenport,
Iowa 52603 I 319-323-9729 / 'C 65
Random access projectors I 5 40 I E 1945
Mathematischer Beratungs- Dnd Programmierungsdfenst
GmbH., Kleppingstr. 26. Dortmund, Gennany /
528697 I 'C 65
ElectrolO1Jica Xl
I 5 65 I E 1957
McDonnell Automation Center. P.O. Box 516, St. Louis.
Mo. 63166
I
314-731-2121
I
'C 66
A complete data processing service center
offering consulting, systems design, programming. administrative data processing and
scientific computing services / 5 over 1000 I
E 1960
Melcor Electronics Corp., 1750 New Highway. Farmingdale. N.Y, /516-694-5570 I 'C 65
Amplifiers and power supplies for analog computers
I 212-442-4900 I
"C 66
Visual control systems / 5 25 / E 1852
II-H Standard Corp., 400 Heaton St., HamUton. Ohio
45011 I 513-894-7171 / 'C 65
Palletflo and Versarack, components for computer controlled live storage racks I S 50 / E?
IUcro-Lectdc, Inc . .' 19 DebevolJe Ave., Roosevelt,
L. J,. N. y, 11575 I 516-FR 8-3222 I 'C 65
Precision wiTe-wound potentiometers, linear
and non-linear, sine cosine / S 19/ E 1951
Nicronetic Corp., 3121 Colvin St., Alexandria.
Va. 22314 I 703-549-3033 I 'C b6
Magnetic tape / S 30 / E 1965
Uicrosonics. Inc., 60 Winter St., Weymouth, Mass.
02188 I 617-337-4200 I 'C 65
Delay lines memory systems up to 20 me; Quartz
crystal computer clocks / S 50/ E 1957
Microspace, Inc., 110 S. Van Brunt St., Englewood,
N.J. 07631
I 201-567-7454 I 'C 65
Information discs, analog to digital conversion
encoders, energy coupled encoder, visual readout equipment, light sources I S 21 / £ 1962
MICRO SWITCH. • Div. DC Honeywe 11, 11 W. Spring
St., Freeport. Ill. 61032
I
815-232-1122
I
'C 66
Precision snap-action swltchesj mercury switChes; lighted and unlighted pushbuttons; pushbutton assemblies; toggle switches i keyboards i
multi-lighted Coordinated llanual Controls
equipped with dry-eircuit or electronic duty
contact blocks: microsecond "one shot" circuits
(electronic package)
IS? I
E 1935
Midwestern Instruments, Subsidiary of Tele Corp.,4ht
and Sheridan. Tuls., Okla., 74101 / 918-627-1111
I 'C 66
Tape transport systems / S 300+ / E 1951
"issQuri Research Laboratories, Inc., 2109 Locust
St., St. Louis, Mo. 63103 f 314-241-7875 I 'C 66
Binary-to-decimal converter/display, digital
interface, digital address selector I 5 400 /
E 1946
!!
F. B. Maclaren & Co., Inc., 15 Stepar PI., Huntington su., L.I., N.Y. 11746/ S16-HAmilton 3-4433
I 'C 66
Spec ia 1 purpose ana log computers / 5 15 /
E 1950
cago. Ill. 60630
Island, N. Y. 10305
I 5 85 I E 1960
MeUonics Systems Development, Div. of Litton
Systems, Inc. -- see Litton Systems, Inc.,
Mellonics Systems Development Div.
Mohawk Data Sciences Corp., Harter St .• Herkimer,
N. y, 13350 I 315-866-6800 I 'C 66
Model 700 buffered tape unit I 5 250 / E 1965
Honarch Metal Products, Inc., IIBcArthur Ave •• New
Windsor. N.Y. 12550
I
914-562-3100 / 'C 66
Data processing accessory equipment including
items for filing. sorting. storage and moving
of punched cards, control panels, disk packs
and magnetic tape reels / 5 85 f E 1945
Monroe Computer Systems Division, 550 Central Ave.,
Orange. N.J. I 201-673-6600. llxt. 469 / 'C 66
Konroe XI, a desk sized general purpose digital
computer tor business, eru.Jineerlng and educational use and other computers for special
purposes; the magnetic Monro-Card System. an
optional supplementary storage system for
Monrobot XI / S 1000
I E 1964 (diviSIon)
Monroe DATALOG Div. of Litton Industries - see
Litton Industries, Monroe DATALOO Div.
Monroe Dato Processing Inc., 550 Central Ave.,
.Orange. N.J. I 201-673-6600 / 'C 66
Nationwide data processing services offered
through accountants to sma 11 and medium sized
businesses: process all paperwork neoessary for
geneml business accounting and financial
statenents: deliver sales analysis fOT management guidance; also DATATAX, a computerized
personal income tax preparation service / 5 100+
I
E 1960
Monroe International, Inc. Division Litton Industries, 550 Central Ave., Orange, N.J. 07051 /
201-673-6600 I 'C 65
MonTobot XI desk-sized electronic computer ror
scientific and business use, Monro-Card Processor for additional high-eapacity storage.
Electro-mechanical and electronic office
machines
IS? I
E 1912
Moog Inc., Industrial Div., 44 Hambul'9' St., East
Aurora. N.Y. 1716-652-0220 I 'C 66
Memory access servo components and systems I
5 50 / E 1950
Uoore Associates, Inc •• 893 American St., San Carlos,
Call!. 94070 / 591-5363 I ·C b6
Telemetering and data transmission systems /
5 50 I E 1957
l(aore Business Forms. lac •• Research Div., 1001
Bullalo Ave., Niagara FallS, N.Y.; Denton, Tex. i
Emeryville, Calif.: park Ridge. Ill.; Toronto,
Ont.; Winnipeg, Manitoba / - / OC 65
Business forms and systems, data proceSSing
forms-systems, forms handling equipment I
5 10.000
I
E 1882
F. L. Moseley Co., 409 No. Fait' Oaks, Pasadena,
Calif. I SY 2-1176 I OC 64
X-Y recorders (with time base); strip chart
recorders, logarithmic amplifiers, curve followers, computer accessories / 5 300 ! E 1951
The Mosler Safe Co •• 320 Park Ave., New York, N.Y.
10022 / 212-Pla .. 2-4500 I OC 65
Protection. for data proceSSing tapes, disk
packs, etc., (Tom fire, smoke. moisture:
mechanized card file. / 5 2200
I
E 1848
Uotorola Selliconductor Products, Inc., 5005 E.
l/c80well Rd •• Phoenix. Ariz. B5008 / - / 'C 66
Computer components / 5 6600
I
E 1955
Ray Myers Corp., 1302 E. Matn St., Endicott, N.Y.
13760 / 607-PI8-0424. P18-4273
I
Nosh and Harrison Ltd., 1355 "ellington St., Ottawa
3, Ont"
Methods Research Corp., 105 Willow Ave., Staten
·C 66
Data processing accessory equipment. Systems
development and production programs (or input!
output departments in data handling. Complete
floor plan service / 5 5D / E 1955
AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
Canada
I
613-722-6544
I
'C 66
Digital, process control computers designed
around standard modular components which may
be adapted to a wide variety of control applications. Spechl deSigns and consulting services quoted on request / 5 12 / E lq51
Natel Engineering Co .• Inc., 7129 Gerald Ave., Van
/5T 2-4161 I 'C 65
AC. DC, frequency signal conditioning components
Nuys, Calif,
for automatic controls, handling, monitoring
and alarm systems I 5 35 I E 1959
National Blank Book Co., Water St., Holyoke, Mass.
01040 I 413-539-9811 I 'C 66
Data processing accessories / 5 1000 / E 1643
The National Cash Register Co., Main & K Sts.,
Dayton, Ohio 45409 I 513-449-2000 I 'C 66
Wide range of business machines and systems for
businesses of B11 sizes: large and sma 11 diglta I
computer systems. cash. registers, adding machines, accounting maChines, and supplies I
5 73,000 / E 1884
National Computer Analysts, Inc., U.S. Hghwy I,
Lynwood Dr., Princeton, N,J. OB540 I 609-452-2800
I 'C 66
Consulting, programming and computing services
I 5 40 I E 1962
National Physical Laboratory, Mathematics Div.,
Ted~i:gt~:, Kiddx, England / TEDdington Lock 3222
Computing service using ACE and KDFq I 5 bO I
E 1945
Nen' Era Ribbon & Carbon Co., Inc .• 1228 Cherry St.,
Philadelphia. Pa. 19107 I 215-LO 3-1973-4 I 'C 65
All types of computer and tabulator ribbons /
5 15 I E 1959
Simon M. Newman, 1411 Hopkins St., N.W •• Washington,
D.C. 20036 I 202-387-4672 I 'C 66
Documentation consulting-indexing and information retrieval, including application of automation to retrieval problems / S ? / £ 1961
Nexus Research Laboratory, Inc., 480 Neponset 5t.,
Canton, Mass, 02021 I 617-828-'/000 I ·C 66
Solid-state encapsulated d-c operational
amplifiers, logarithmiC modules and related
components for analog applications; low-profile
cases (.375" high) for card rack mounting;
analog computer bu:llding blocks. Applications
department to assist customers with special
des"igns / 5 160 I E 1962
Non-Linear Systems, Inc., Del Ksr Airport. Del Mar,
Calif. 92014 f 714-755-1134 I 'C 65
Digital voltmeters, ohmmeters, ratiometers;
electronic measurement instruments for mi ssile,
nuclear, scient:ltic and manufacturing fields;
digital readouts, data processing and recording
eauipment, scanners, visual output devices,
analog to digital converters, digital to analog
converters, digital clocks. binary to decimal
converters, AC and DC amplifiers (precision),
statistical digital voltmeters, digital telemetering, digital counters I S 350 I E 1952
Norden Dlv. of United Aircraft Corp., Helen St.
Norwalk, Conn. 06852 / 203-838-4471 I ~ 65
Sense amps. differential amps, servo amps,
gates. custom analog and digital circuits, all
fabricated 8S monolithic integral circuits;
TO-5 or flat package I 5 2100 I E 1928
North Atlantic Industries, Inc., 200 Terminal Dr.,
PlainView. -rty. 11603/ 516-661-8600 I 'C 66
Resolver/synchro computer interface equipment
I 5 125 I E 1956
Northrop Corp., Nortronics Div., 2301 W. 120th 5t..
Hawthorne, Calif, /213-757-5181 I 'C 66
Airborne digital computers, input/output devices, support equipment, software, programming,
systems integration and test I S 4200 (division)
I £ 1939 (Northrop £st.), lq57 (Nortronics Di v.)
Norton Associates, Inc., 240 Old Country Rd.,
Hioksvllle, N.Y. 11801 I 516-0V 1-6181 I OC 66
Standard and special magnetic record, playback, and erase heads in single and multitrack arrangements for magnetic tape, fi 1m,
drum, and magnetic ink character recognition /
5 under 50 I E 1955
Nortronics DIv., Northrop Corp., 1 Research Park,
Palos Verdes Peninsula, Calif. 90214 / 213FRontier 7-4811 I 'C 65
Automatic checkout equipment. airborne and
other digital and analog computers, display and
information systems, astro-inertial and inertial
guidance systems / 5 16,033 (Northrop Corp.):
6000 (Nortronics Div.) I E 1939 (Northrop Corp.);
1957 (Nortronics Div.)
Nortronics. A Div. of Northrop Corp., Precision
Products Dept. t 100 Morse St., Norwood, Mass. /
617-762-5300 I 'C 65
Precision gyroscopes, gyro systems, inertial
components, inertial sensor test facilities,
standards laboratories, accelerometers /
5 1200 / E 1948
Novatronics, Inc., 500 N. Andrelt's Ave., Ext., P.O.
80x 878. Pompano Beach, Fla. 33061 I 305-942-5200
I 'C 65
Res.earch, development and manufacture of telemetry systems and components, airborne
electronic instrumentation, electronic ground
support and control equipment, special elec'"
tronic test sets, automatic checkout eauip-"
ment, instrumentation vans, preCision electronic devices such 8& highly regulated power
supplies and military ordnance and logic eauipment, baluns, filters, multiplexers, transformers, vibration analysis equipment, spectrum
analyzers / 5 75 I E 1965
8/66
DIRECTORIES
21:010.010
Philco Corp., CORlllunications & Electronics Div.,
3900 Welsh Rd., Willow Grove, Pa. / 215-OL 9-7700
!1.
Edward Ochman Systems. Box 141. Fairrield~ Conn.
I
259-1927 / OC 65
llanulacturers and sellers of control panels
and whes for IBM and Reaington Rand Equipment;
also data processing accessories and computer
tape storage equipment / 5 15 / E 1949
Ohio Envelope Co •• Box 19086, Cincinnati. Ohio
45219 / 513-961-6698 / OC 66
File folders. filing supplies for storage of
paper, tape and other, EDT information I S 23 /
E?
Oki Electronics or America Affiliate/Oki Elec. Ind.
Co. Ltd., 202 East 44th St., New York, N.Y. 10017
/ 212-MU 2-2989 / OC 66
Peripheral equipment / S 10,000 / E 18.81
Otani-Data, Div. of Borg-Warner Corp .• 511 N. Broad
St., Philadelphia, Pa. 19123/ 215-WA ,5-4343 I
OC66
Digital communication systems, communication
terminal enuipment, photo-electr.ic tape
readers, recorders and displays IS· 38,000
(Borg-Warner Corp.) / E 1960
Omnitronics, Inc., Subsidiary of Borg-Warner Corp.,
511 N. Broad St., Philadelphia, Pa. 19123 / 215925-4343 / OC 65
Digital communication systems; space electronic
devices and systems; digital 'data handling
eauipment such as checkout e~ipment, small
special purpose computers, tape-to-tape converters, editors, and butfeTing equipment.
Communications terminal equipment such as highspeed photoelectric tape readers, recorders.
and displays / S 30,000, Borg-Warner Corp. /
E 1960
Opto-Electronic Devices. Inc., subsidiary Sigma
Instruments, Inc., 170 Pearl St., Braintree,
Mass. 02185 / 617-843-5000 / OC 65
Opto-electronic translators / S 1000 I E 1963
(subsidized)
OPTOmechanisms Inc., 40 SkyUne Drive. Plainview.
N.Y. 11803 / 516-433-8100 / OC 66
Photographic type processors: special cameras:
photographic devices: photometric, devicesj
optical tachometers; projectors: optical
trackers; stereo viewers; satellite detectors;
measuring interferometers; stereo comparators;
linear measuring tables; neg. to pos. fUm
viewers / S 120 I E 1951
Pacific Data Systems, Inc •• 1058 E. First St .• Santa
Ana, Calir. 92701 1714-547-9183 / OC 66
General purpose digital computer / S 50,/
E 1963
Pacific Electro Magnetics Co., tnc. 942 Commercial
St., Palo Alto, CaUf. 94303/ 415-321-1177 / OC 65
Ultra-portable instrumentation magnetic tape
recorders and related 'equipme'nt / S 26 / E 1959
Packard Bell Computer, a div. of Packard Bell Electronics- see Raytheon Computer
PAKTRON Div. Illinois Tool Works Inc., 1321 Leslie
Ave., Alexandria, Va. 22301 / 703-548-4400 /
OC 66
Electronic components, capacitors / S 425 /
E 1954
Paper Manufacturers Co., 9800 Bustleton Ave., Phila.
Pa. 19115 / 215-673-4500 / OC 66
Perforator tape in rolls or .tanfolded available
in wide variety of colors, diameters and
widths. Compositions available are: paperi
fibre; paper/mylar/paper; mylar/aluminum
roil/mylar; and mylar I S 450 / E 1905
Parzen Research, Inc., 48 Urban Ave., Westbury, L. I .•
N. Y. 11590 / 516-Ell 4-3900 / OC 65
Precision timing systems; ultn-stable frequency combiners, freouency comparators, frequency generation eauipment; special data
handling. telemetry, and tone-signaling systems
/ S 25 / E 1962
Pastoriza Electronics, Inc., 385 EIUot St., Newton.
Mass. 02164 / 617-332-2131 I OC 66
Analog to digital tape formatters and systems:
A-D converters, D-A convertersi amplirter
manifOlds, amplifiers, multiplexers; hybrid
and special purpose computers; portable analog
computer I S 25 I E 1960
L. A. Pearl Co., 801 Second Ave., New York, N.Y.
10017 . 212-otl 9-6535 / .C 65
mY computers and peripherals bought for cash
/ S I I E 1945
Pergamon Press, Inc., 44-01 21st St.', Long Island
City, N.Y. 11101/ 212-EM 1-7900 / OC 65
BoOk·S / S 75 / E 1953
Pers':lective, Inc .• 4400 7th Ave. So., Seattle, Wash.
9l.108 / 206-MA 4-7800 / OC 66
The IllustrolMt "1100". a computer-direc~ed
graphics instrument whose funeti on is to produce visually and mechanically accurate perspective .drawings from any viewing distance and
angle; it makes mechanically accurate axonometTic drawings or projections from orthographic prints / S 19 / E 1953 (Incorporated)
Phllbrick Researches. Inc .• 34 Allied Drive at
Route 128, Dedham, ..... 02026 / 617-329-1600 I
OC 66
.
Analog computers. operational amplifiers. nonlinear transconductors, power supplies I S 220
/ E 1946
8/66
I
1h~~CO
2000, Phllco 1000, Philco 3100 proce ..
controller, Philco 1700 message and data switching system. Phllco general purpose; print/reader. ZIP-code readers, mall storage systems.
peripheral equipment, displays, Phllco 1100
plant monitor system. computer service bureau
/S5OOO/E?
PhUCD Corp •• Subsidbry of Ford Motor Co., Lansdale
Dlv., Church Rd., Lansdale, Pa. 19446/ 215-8554681 / OC 66
Integrated circuits: microwave components;
diodes (switching, mixer. pin. baCkward,
tunnel); infrared components; microwave devices
and components / S 1500 / E 1966
Philips Electronic Instruments. 750 S. Fulton Ave .•
Nt. Vernon, N.Y. 10550 / 914-JIOunt Vernon 4-4500 /
·C 65
X-ray diffractometers, spectrographs. cameras,
detectors. industrial radiographic equipment,
X-ray, electron microscopes, gauges, process
control instrumentation. electron probe microanalyzer, automatic X-ray spectrometer which
may be linked with computers to read directly
in any prescribed units of measurement I
S 350 / E 1942
Photocircuits Corp., 31 Sea CliU Ave., Glen Cove,
N.Y. / 516-OR 6-8000 / OC 66
Tape readers and spoolers, militarized tape
reader / S 450 / E 1951
Photo Magnetic Systems, 1800 R St., N.W .• Washington, O. C. 20009 / - I OC b5
Information storage and retrieval IS? / E ?
Photomechanisms. Ine., 15 StepBr Place, Huntington
Sta., N. Y. 11746 / 516-HA3-4411 / ·C 66
Photographic c.omputer input-output equipment,
hard copy generating syltems on and off-line
utilizing rapidly procened silver halide film.
and paper and electroltatic paper. / S 55 /
E 1952
Photon, Inc., 355' Middlesex AYe., Wilmington, Mass.
011161 / 617-933-7000 / OC 66
Computer-driven phototype setting _Chines.
photographic computer printers. tape merger
machl nes / S 300 / E 1940
Pickering & Co., Inc., Sunnyside Blvd •• Plainview.
N. Y. 11803 / 212-0V 1-0200 I OC 66
"gnetlc drum heads / 5 160 I E 1946
Planning Research Corp., HOO Glendon Ave., Los
Angeles, cpur. 90024 / 213-GR 9-7725 / OC 65
Analysi~, design and implementation of prograllllling systems for electronic computers /
S 510 / E 1954
Potter Instrument Co., Inc., 151 'Sunnyside Blvd.,
Plainview, N. Y. 11803 / 516-oVerbrook 1-3200 I
OC 66
Peripheral equipment for electronic data processing, magnetic tape transports, magnetic
record/playback heads for digital recording,
perforated tape readers and spoolers for military and commercial applications, high speed
printers and systems. random access memory
systems, complete line of accessot'les / 5 650
/ E 1942
Prestoseal Mfg. Corp •• 37-12 lOath St.-, Corona.
N.Y./ 212-IL 7-5566/ OC 66
Splicer for punched paper tape, 5-8 channel./
S 50 / E 1947
Procedyne Corp., 221 Somerset St., New Brunswick.
N.J. 08903 / 201-249-8347 / OC 65
Fourier transform computer, frenuency response
analyzer, signal generators, converters and
transducers. phase meters. culibration equipment / S 12 / E 19M
Profimatics, Inc., 7060 Owensmouth Ave., Canoga
. Park, Calif. 91303/ 213-883-6530 / OC 66
Consulting services related to industrial
process control and automation. including
technical and economic feasibility studies,
process simulation,' specUication writing and
bid evaluation, system design, prograllllling,
installation, training and project management
/ S 7 / E 1965
Prograftllatics Inc., 12011 San V'tente Blvd •• Los
Angeles, CaUf. 90049 / 213-476-1956 / ·C 66
Systems analysis and delitn, feasibility studies,
management control Iy.tems. Iystems progl'8lIIlIing,
buliness and scientific applications / 5 14 I
E 19b3
Programmi ng & Sys tems, Inc.. 33 W. 42nd St., New
York, N.Y. 10036 I 212-LW 4-0530 / OC 66
Complete SOP education and service bureau work
/ S 50 / E 1959
P'rograllllllng Service, Inc., 18455 Burbank Blvd.,
Tarzana, CaUr. 91356 / 213-881-1672 / OC 66
Analysis, design. development. implementation of
computer: information storage and retrieval
systems; scientific, process control, cOl1lllercial programming / S 25 / E 1965
2
Quest Manufactul'ing Co., 220 W. Monroe St., Chicago,
Ill. 60606 / 312-782-7838 / OC 65
Inked ribbons for all computer/data processing
and machine accounting eQUipment I S 30 / E 1917
Quindar Electronics Inc •• 60 Fadem Rd •• Springfield.
N.J. 07081 / 201-379-7400 / OC 66
Communications systems and modules for data
transmission. manufacturer of analog and
digital telemetering systems and .!canners for
all types or Industry / S 135 I E 1960
A
AUERBACH
~
!!.
Randolph Computel\ Corp., 200 Park Ave. t New York.
N.Y. 10017 / 212-986-4722/ OC 66
Acquiring and leasing mp eqUipment, specializing In mM's Systems 360 / S 8 / E 1965
The Rapids Standard Co., Inc. 825 Rapistan Bldg.,
Grand Rapids, Mich. 49502 / 616-451- 2081/ OC 65
Manufacturers of materials handling equipmentj
conveyors, storage ncks etc. / S 300 / E ?
Raytheon Computer. 2100 S. Fairview St., Santa Ana,
Cali£. 92704 / 714-546-7160 / OC 66
Digital computers and computer systems. hybrid
computer systems. linkage systems, multiverters, analog-to-digital converters, digital-toanalog. converters, digital circuit modules,
BJAX memory products / 5 325 / E 1958
RCA Electronic Data ProcessiD9, Cberry Hill. Camden
8, N.J. / we 3-8000 / OC 65
Full range'or digital computers, components,
supplies and services / S ? I E 1955
Recognition Equipment Inc., 4703 Ross Ave., Dallas.
Tex. 75204 / 214-TA3-8194 / OC 66
Optical character recognition systems / 5 375
/ E 1961
Records Reserve Corp •• 751 Clay Rd., Rochester,
fl. Y. 14623 / 716-334-3644 / OC 65
Computer accessories: aluminum reels for magnetic tape, plastic reel cases. tape stoppers,
shielded magnetic tape carryi ng and shipping
cases, storage cabinets for panel boards and
magnetic tape, and auxiliary tape racks /
I
Redco~ ~~r'. ~ ~?~ Deering
Ave., Canoga Park, Calif.
91304 / 213-348-5892 / OC 65
Data acquisition system; A-D and D-A convertersj
digital logic modules / S 220 / E 1956
Reeves Instrument Co., 100 East Gate Blvd •• Garden
City, N.Y. 11532/ 516-PI 6-8100 / OC 66
Analog computer, capable of expansion to powerful hybrid facility; computation center for
seientiti£ analysis and simulation / 5 1150 /
E 1943
Reeves Soundcraft Corp. I 15 Great Pasture Rd .•
Donbury, Conn. 06813 / 203-743-7601 / OC 66
Magnetic tape for computers I S 350 / E 1950
Rese Engineering Inc .• A & Courtland Sts •• Philadelphia, Pa. 19120 / 215-GLS-9ooo / OC 66
Magnetic core memories; special digital
systems / S 40 / E 1952
Rheem Electronics, 5250 W. £1 Segundo Blvd.,
Hawthorne, Calir. 90250 / 213-772-5321 I OC 66
Photoelectric punched tape readers and matching
spooler systems / S 10.000 (incl. parent org.)
/ E 1960
Hixon Electronics. Inc .• 2121 Industrial Pkwy.,
Silver Spring, Md. 20904 / 301-622-2121 / OC 65
Data Modems. teletype and computer input data
multiplexers. special purpose electro-mecbanical peripheral equipment for computer systems /
S 200 / E 1953
RMS Associates, DiY. of Information Displays, Inc.name changed to Information Displays, Inc.,
which see
The Roback Corp., Huntingdon Valley, Pa. 19006 /
215-oR 6-4000 / OC 65
Digital logic modules. Facitogic
digital
breadboards, low cost digital solid stat~ voltohm meters. A/D and D/A converters, multIplexers. data processors, computer formatting and
buHerlng equipment / S 100 / E 1962
Robertshaw Controls Co .• Aeronautical & Instrument
Div., Santa Ana Freeway It Euclid St., Anaheim,
Callr. 92603 / 714-535-8151 / OC 66
Manufacturers of process control instrumentation including direct digital devices, recorders, controllers, trapsmi tters, level measurement, and now Integrators / S 300 / E 1950
Robins Data Devices, Inc .• 15-58 127th St .• Flushing.
N. Y. / 212-445-7200 / OC 66
Splicers. winders. encoders, reels, centerfeed
unwtnders, unwind cans, data tape folders,
envelopes and holders. bulk tape erasors and
splicing patches / S 15 / E 19b1 (dlv.)
Rotron Mfg. Co., Inc., Hasbrouck Lane, Woodstock.
N. Y. 12498 / 914-679-2401 / OC 66
.
CooUng devices and high pressure/vacuum au
sources specifically designed for the computer
industry ..• Mufnn Fan, Sprite, Skipper, Centtlmax, Spiritl, 'Duplex Spiral, Feather Fan, etc. I
S 550 / E 1947
®
Sage Electronics Corp., 1212 Pittsford-Victor Rd.,
Pittsrord, N.Y. 14534 / 716-U16-8010 / OC 66
Resistors / 5 170 / E 1948
Sanders Associates. Inc., 95 Canal St., Nashua,
N.H. 03060 I 603-883-3321/ OC 65
Computer driven information displays. character generators. digital logiC circuitry and
special computers / S 3000 / E 1951
I. Savage Co., 1340 COlllllonwealth Ave .• Boston. Mass.
02134 /. 617-734-4569 / OC 66
Software and EDP consulting / S I / E 1964
The Scam Instrument Corp •• 7401 N. Hamlin Ave.,
Skokie, JlI. 60076 / COrneila 7-8300 / OC 65
Design and manufacture digital data scanners,
loggers. digital controllers, recor~ing annunciators, graphic control panels, special
purpose digital computers. Also G.P. programming services / S 230 / E 1953
ROSTER OF ORGANIZATIONS
21 :01 0.011
Thl Sundord R'g! 'lfr Co., DIYlon, ohl. 45401 I
51~-223-6IBl I OC 66
BU.lnlll torml, continuoul: diU collection
equipment, electronicj luxtlilry lorm. hlndling eoulpm •• t, meeh.nlcal I S 3900 I E 1912
Statlltlcll Tlbuilting Corp., 104 S. Michigan Ave.,
Chicago, III. 60603 I 312-0E2-2464 I "C 66
Nine dau-proeeulng and computer service
centerS containing IBU 1400 series cord and
tape systems, 5ystems/3bO, and Honeywell 1I200
tape systems. Plus peripheral equip. Admin18trative management, scientittc management,
engineering and general data-processing,
programming. Iy.tems analysts, consultation
and temporary personnel. Dlvhlon.! Datiprocelling, Talk Force, CAM, Dita-lln./ 5 ?
E?
Stellarmetrics, Inc., 210 E. OrteQa St., Santa
Barbara. Calif. 93101 I 805-963-3566 I "C 66
Airborne and around telemetry systems and
components, including soUd state conunutators.
decommutators, A to D converters. space-borne
programmers (tntervalometers) ,I S 75 / E 1961
Straza Industries, 790 Greenfield Drive, El Cajon,
Call f. 92021 I 714-4~2-3451 I "C 66
Mic rott 1m prt nters/p lotters, di splay /prfnters,
display systems, symbol generators, line generators I 5 110 / £ 1963
stromberg-C8r150n Corp., Data Products Div. t 1695
Hancock St., San Diego. Calif. 92112/714-2966331 I "C 66
High speed micTofilm recorders, electronic
printers. direct view displays and computer
tnquJry and retrieval systems / S 310 / E 1955
Sunshine ScientHic Instruments, 1810 Grant Ave.,
Phlladelphla. Pa. 19115 I 215-QR chard 3-5600 I
"C 65
Testing and measuring equipment, calibration.
certification. Analog field plotter, prototypes, precision electromechanical assemblies,
mechanical components / S 30 / E 1941
Sylvania Electronic Systems, 40 Sylvan Rd., Waltham,
Wa.s. 02154 I 617-694-6444 I "C 65
Special purpose data proceSSing system /
5 10,000 I E 1905
System Development Corp., 2500 Colorado Ave., Santa
Wonlca, Calif. 90406 / 213-393-9411 I "C 60
mw 360/50: mM 7094: Phllco 2000-210: CDC
3bOO; specializing in the desiun and development ot information management systems for
military, governmental, scientific and educet10n.1 opplicatfon. I 5 3000 I E 1957
Systemat, 1107 Sprjng St., Silver Spring, Md. /301567 -4200 / "C 65
ProfeSSional placement of computer personnel /
S 10 I E 19b0
Systems Engineering Laboratories, Inc., P. O. Box
9146, 6901 W. Sunrise Blvd., Fort Lauderdale,
Fla. 33310 I 305-567-2900 I "C 66
Low level, high level, slow speed, high speed
digital data acquisition systems and computers
/ 5 431 I £ 1961
Systems Sales Co., a div. of Systems Mfg. Corp., 13
Broad St., Binghamton. N.Y. 13904 I 607-723-6344 I
"C 45
Tabulating and computer accessories / Sunder
300 I £ 1945
Systems SCience Corp., 1104 Spring St., Silver
Spring, Md., 400 E. Third St., Bloomington, Ind.
47403 I 301-779-5500 (Md.): 612-332-1720 (Ind.) I
"C 66
Specialists in real time, on-line automation
of police activities: perform feasibility
studies; devel'lpment of hardware specifications: systems and applications: software
de,I9n and programmln9 I S 15 I E 1961
Systron-Donner Corp., 868 Galindo St., Concord,
Calif. 94520 I 415-662-6161 I "C 66
... tOO volt jesk top analog computers. all solid
IIohllvlu-Bytrox C.rp., 223 Cro ... nt St ...... hlm,
Mill. 021S4 I 6lT-899-S600 I OC 6S
El8ctrontc weighing and me. lUring IYlum ••
Itrain gage devlcn; IOld, pru.ure and torque
transducer. and .yltem. I 5 10 / E 19~7
Scienttttc Control Corp., 14006 Dlnr1butlon Way,
Dalla •• T.... 75234 I 214-GH.p.l 1-21\1 I OC 66
Gene-ral purpose dati Pl'OCUIOl'l I 5 40 I E lqb4
Sclent1flc Data Systems, lnc., 1649 Sevonteenth St.,
Santo Uonlca. Collf. 90404 I 213-671-0960 I "C 66
Generol-purpolO dioital computers lind datil
proeuslng sf'Ums; .pechl-purpole digital
computers; computer-controlled dlta systems;
data-acquhition systemlj analog and digital
system components and module.: Iynam. eng! n•• rln9 .. rvlc .. I S 2500 I E 1961
SclentU'tc gducIUonal Products Corp. I 30 E. 42nd
St., New York. N.Y. loon I 212-667-9460 I "C 66
Idlntvac and NordiC dl'liul computer trainers
lor use in computer educltion program& in educatlond institutions and Industrial concerns
5 ? " E Iq62
\
"'-..
Seismograph Serdce Corp., Box 1590, (6200 E. 41st
St. 1. Tul.a, Okla. 701102,' 918-NA 7-3330 I "C 05
Optical analog computer / S 500 (Tulsa); }bOO
(world-wide) / E 1931
Serendipity Associates, '1160 Cozycroft, Chatsworth,
Coli!. q1311 I 213-341-0033 I "C 66
Research development 1 n computer application
and technology as related to systems engineering and human factors. Specialized capabilJties include problem definition, design of
solutll,11 algorithms, programming, documentatjon, debugging and checkout for simulation
models for stochastic systeml, mathematical
modelS for cost-effectiveness evaluation,
management information systems and scientific
application programming I S 55 / E 1961
The Service Buresu Corp., 425 Park Ave., New York,
N. Y. 10022 / 212-PL 1-5600 I "C 66
Co,nplete range of data processing and computer
programming services tor business, government,
science and education. IBM 1401, 7094, System
360 I 5 2200 / E 1957
Shepard Laboratories, Inc., 480 Morris Ave., Summit,
N.J. " 201-GR 3-5255 I "C 65
Small and large high-speed typers for data processing field / S 40 / E 1940
S-I Electronics, Inc., 103 Park Ave., Nutley, N.J.
07110 I 201-6b7-0055 I "C 66
Digital magnetic tape transports, digital
magnetic tape transport read and write heads /
S 55 / E 1960
Sigma Instruments, Inc., 170 Pearl St., Braintree,
Mass . ./ - .' -C 65
Cyclonnme, single phase, high toraue, synchronous stepping motor IS? IE?
Simulators, Tnc., 1856 Walters Ave., Northbrook,
Ill. 60062 " 312-272-6310 ,I "C 66
General purpose analog computers / S 11 /
E IQ65
Soch!te d'Electronlq'te & D'Automatlsme, l1-IQ, rue
du Moulin des Bruyeres, BP Nolll, 92 Courbevole,
France I 333-41.20 I "C 66
SEA 3900. SEA 4000. CINA, CAB 1500 (digital),
NADAC 20. NADAC 100 (analog): perlpheral
eCJuipment (highspeed printers, tape perforators, optical tape readers, magnetic units);
analogical modules, various components / S 900
/ E 1946
Solid Sute Electronics Corp., 15321 Rayen St.,
Sepulveda. Calif. ,I 364-2271 I "C 65
Line of solid state Silicon digital logic
modules; 10 megacycle speed, -55OC to +125OC;
microminiature. Logic modules available include: J-K flip-flop (109lc), flip-Clop,
counter/shift register, "and-or" gates, Schmitt
Trigger, inverting amplifier, non-inverting
amplifier, slave clock, clock oscillator, tree
running multlvibruor, one-shot multlvlbntor /
S 10 / E 1958
Soroban Engineering, Inc., Port Malabar Industrial
Park-Palm Bay, P.O. Box 1690, Melhourne, Fla.
32902 / 305-723-7221 I "C 66
Paper tape eouipments, punch card equlpments,
printers, keyboards / S 255 / E 1954
ltate. with plug-in digital logic modules. SO
10/20 computer has 20 amplifier capacity: SD
40/80 computer has 64 ampUlier capacity: both
u.e lame plug-In computing modules / S 450 /
E 1957
SOllthern Computer Service, 260 TV Rd •• P.O. Box'
100, Dothan, Ala. 36302 I 794-3166 I "C 65
EDP servJce bureau, cormercia) data procell1ng /
S 8 / E 1962
Spear, Inc., 335 Bear Hill Rd., Waltham, ilia •.
02154 I 617-699-4800 I "C 66
specill. and general purpou digital computers
tor general scientific Ipd reulrchar llboratory procelling with heavy emphlsll on biomedical research and cl1n!cal appl1cltiona /
5 20 I E 1964
Sperry Farragut Co., Dlv. of Sperry Rind Corp.,
Brlst.l, Tonn. 37622 I 615-966-1151 I "C 6S
Ampl1t1era; packaged computer circuits, pluQ1n circuitsj printed circuit.: computer type
colli: ani log computer.: computer campanlnn:
IJrft control eQUipment: Iy.teml engine.rino /
S 1000 I E 1951
Sperry Gyro.cope C•. , D!v. Sperry Rind C.rp., Gr .. t
Nock, N,Y. 11020 I SI6-Ul4-1270 I OC 66
SIILlIl mleroclreulud real-time gen.rll purpo ••
computer., ... octated Inllog to diaitll and
digiti I to Inl10g convertersj microcircuiud
CRT dl.plly co",ol .. I S 8000 I I t
SUndord Producn Corp., BS6 Mlln St., New Rochelle,
N. Y. I - I OC 66
lOO!1 nylon computer-prl.tor unlnk.d lobrlc
rlbbo", / 5 ? IE?
TAB Products Co., 550 Montgomery 5t;, San Francisco,
Collf. 94126 I 415-961-6160 I "C 66
Data pl'oc8sslnv equipment including card liles,
open reference files, .toraways. trucks, unit
lpacet1nder card files, control panel cabinets.
Computer room equipment including tape reel
racks. tape cabinets, disc pack racks, disc
pack cabtnets, torns handling equipment /
S 100 / E 1950
Tally Corp., 1310 Wereer St., Se.ttle, Wash. 98109
I 206-624-0760 I OC 66
Buainu. digital dUI communtcatlon IYltems
utllllift9 high .peed plp.r tlpe rold." Ind
p.rforltoro I t .pe.d. from 60 to 120 chlr/uc
with automatft errar rftCDvery routlnell card
Ind mlonetlc tape dltl termlnll.a: plptr upe
.. Idero and pertoruoro I S 300 / E 1946
Tape C.rt!th .. , Inc., 1604 W 1391h St .. Gorde .. ,
Calll. 90249 I 2\3-321-6846 I ac bS
Wagnetlc upe certification .nd re-c.rtlflelUon for computer and telemetry applicationl
Ind Up. con.u!tlnQ I 5 19 I E 1964
Toch SI .. I ••. , S4S1 Holla.d Drive, B.H.vfll., Md.
2070S I 301-474-2900 I OC 6S
Tran.htorhed digital logic .lomentl and divtUl .y.um. I S 4S I E 1959
AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
T.ehnl.,l r.to .... ll0 • • rO.... I.,. 1103 N. "lIhln;ton St., WhIU •• , Ill, 60187
313-668-6131 I
"C6b
Technical prognlllDing in Ire.. of englnaortnQ
de.ign, _the.UCI and ltaUnSCI / 5 :2 / F.
1965
Technical lIIellUrlllllnt Corp., 441 II'QlhJngton Ave.,
North Haven. Conn. 06473 I 203-239-2501 I OC 66
Signal averaging compuUrI, correlation computerl, pulse height analyzers / 5 700 I E
1955
Technical y'ellurftment Corp., Telemetrics DIv.,
28305. y.lrvle. St •• Sont. Ani, Collf. 92704 I
714-546-4500 I "C 66
Automatic tohmetry prOCeIiOTl, tel.metry
syateml and eouipmont, input/output devices,
butt'TI, Iynchronhera, .tmulatotl / 5 240 /
£ 19S9 (Telomotrle. Dlv.)
Technl-rite Electron1cs, Inc., 65 Centerville Rd.,
Warwick, R. r. I 401-737-2000 I "C 65
Data recording equipment, oscillographs /
5 65 I E 1959
Technitrol Inc., 1952 E. Allegheny Ave., Philadelphia. Pa. 19134 I 215~A6-9105 / "C 66
Component parts - pulse transformers, electromagnetic delay Unes, shtit registers / S 1100
I E 1'147
TELautograpn Corp., 8100 Bellanca Ave., Los Angele.,
Calif. 90045 I 213-QR 6-4756 I "C 65
Graphic cOl1lTlunicotions systClr:ll/equlpment faT
transmisSion of handwriting (Instantaneous) or
fac.lmlle (pag.-.-mlnute) I 5 250 I E 1866
Telecomputations, Inc., 1104 Spring St., Sflver
5prl nQ, Hd. I 301-779-5500 I "C 66
TeleproceSSing services on IBM 300/40: packaged or speciDl1zed programs; 24-hour real
time service. On order: mM 36()/61 wi t'h
dual processors / S 25 / E 1964
Te-Jecomputing Services, Inc. -- see Computing &
Software, Inc., TSIDlv.
Telemetries Dlv .• TechnJcal Meuurement Corp. __
see Technical Measurement Corp., Telemetrics Div.
Telemetrics, Inc., 2830 Fairview St., Santa Ana,
Calif. 92704 I 714-546-4500 I "C 65
(i.eneral and special purpose computers, telemetry data processors, signal conditioners,
synchronizers / S 500 / E 1962
Teleregi ster Corp. -- name changed to The Bun1c.erRamo Corp., which see
Teletype Corp., 5555 Touhy Ave., Skokie, Ill. 60076
/ 312-676-1000 I "C 66
Page pl"inters; paper tape reaI1t"fs; paper tape
punChes; high-speed tape-to-tape equipment;
automatic data :.wlh:hlng systems / S noon I
E 1930.
M. Ten Bosch, Tnc., M Wheeler Ave., Pleasantville,
N. Y. I QI4-RO 9-3000 I "C 05
Ampliflcrs, autolTl8tlc controls, servo mechanI'm' I 5 60 I E 1950
Texas Instruments, Inc., Industrial Products Group,
3609 Buffalo Speedwuy, Houston, Tex. 77006 /
713-JA 6-1411 I "C 66
A-D and D-A converters: multiplexers.; pulse
generators: tape transports for recording
digital data: data collection, proceSSing and
display systems optimIzed (or digital Stdsmlc
data handling / S 1000+ / E 1930 (Parent
company)
Texas Instruments, Inc., Semiconductor Components
Dlv .• P.O. Bo. 5012, D.lIa., Tex. 75222 I 214AD5-31ll I "C 66
Complete Une of nemiconductor (fevlces including special computer diodes, transistor Bod
lntegrated-circult ampltfiers, and military
and Industrial digital networks / S 25,000 /
E 1930
Theta Instrument Corp., Saddle Brook, N. J. 07663
201-467-3506 / ·C 65
Analog-digi tal converters / 5 150 / E 1956
Kerle Thomas Corp. I State Nationlll Bank Bldg.,
Sui te 410, 10400 Connecticut Ave., Kensington,
Md. 20795 / 301-933-4410 I .C 66
ADP consul ting service.: consul ting services
to business, industry, government, In application of automatic data procesting to business
systems; engineering applications: feasibility
studiesj computer center / S 15 I E 1962
3 M Co., Instrument Dept., 12909 S. Cerise Ave.,
Hawthorne, Calif, I 213-772-5141 I ·C 65
311-201 contrDl computer systems, 3 H-110 data
acqulsltlon· .yotems, 3 11-220 direct digital
controla IS? I E 1963
3 W Co., Rev.re-Hlncom Dlv., 300 S. Lowll Rd.,
Camarillo, Calif. I 605-4B2-1911 I ·C 65
Magnetic recorders tor analog, frequency modulation, pulae code modulation 88 used in
I.Hrumonting ml"lle rangea, etc, I 5 500 I
E?
Torotel, Inc., 5S12 I. 1l0th St., Kin ... City, U••
64137 I 616-S0uth 1-6314 I
6S
Magnotlc Implltlafl, dIllY 11 ... , pull. tnnltcrm... I S 100 I 1 1956
.
Tow.on Llborotorl .. , In.,, 3S00 Plrkd.l0 Avo.,
aaltlm.ro, Md. 21211 I 301-367-4001 I 'C 66
AID cony.run, ml.ll tipllxal'l for modular
dah aoquloltlon .yotem.. Analog t. Ulotypewriter convertlrl, TIlIlIlltlring .y.tem.,
PCM .n •• d.... 5y •• hro to dlg!tli and d!gltll
to Iynchro oonvtrler! I S 2S I E 19S9
•
Trl« !Ie.tronl .. C•• , In.,, S9 Dlnbury Rd., Wilton.
C.nn. 06897 I 203-762-SS21 I ·C 66
lIol'lI-to-te.leprinUr code converUl'Il DIGISTORI, uynchronoul magnotic tape raad/wri tI
unit I S 9S I ! 1947
.c
8/66
DIRECTORIES
21:010.012
Transistor Electronies Corp. I Box 6191. IUnne_poU.,
Minn. 55424 / 612-'141-1100 / ·C65
Digital readouts. indicators, swl lehes .and
information display panels for, CIBputers,
control, guidance and other soUd Ita.te
systems / S 280 / E 1957
Transi tel International Corp.-, 615 Winters Ave ••
Paramus, N.J. 07642 / 201-262-8200 / ·C 66
Solid state su.pervisory control· and data
acquisition systems / S eo I E 1958
Transkrit Corp., 704 Broadway, New York,:N.Y. 10003
/ 212-0R3-2200 / ·C 66
Continuous forms (spot carboni~ed), magnetic
ink imprinting / S 100 / I 1938
Triad Distributor Div., Litton ~ndustries -- see
Litton Industries, Iriad Distributor Di.v.
Tri ton Electronics, Inc. t 62-05 30th Ave., Woodside
77, N.Y. /212-721-7500 t.C 65
Computer and instrumentation ~ape / S 75 / E
1939
TRW Systems Group, 1 Space Park, 'Redondo Beach,
Calif. 90278 / 213-679-8711 / .C 66
General purpose computers, digital data processors, special purpose computers, memory
systems, design code and checkout of real
time digital computer programs, SE and 10
for all data systems applications / S 11,000
/ E 1954
.!!
OareD Inc., W. County Line Rd., Barrington, Ill.
I 381-4030 / ·C 65
All types of bus iness forms and forms handling equipment / 5 2700 / I 1894
Ul tronic Systems Corp .• 7300 N. Crescent Blvd ••
Pennsauken, N.J. 08110 I - / .C 66
Data pumps. encoding keyboards, magnetic
tape transmission terminals, character
multiplex / 5 over 500 / E 1960
Unimation Inc., 16 Durant Ave., Bethel, Conn. I
203-744-1800 I ·C 66
UNIMATE - industrial robot:
teachable
m3lterial transfer machine, performs manual
labor. Weight handling capacity of 75 Ibs
/ S 40 / I 1962
Union Switch 8. Signal Div. of Westinghouse Air
Brake Co., Pittsburgh, Po. 15218 / 412-242-5000
/ .C 65
"Headall" readout instruments, miniature and
sub-miniature relays, remote control systems
for railroads and pipelines; control and
conrnunication systems for industrYi remote
controls for locomotives and vehicles / S
1500 / E 1681
United Data Processing, 100] S.W. 10th, Portland,
Ore. I - / .C 65
Key punch trainer machine and programj service bureau with 2 tape 1401's, teleprocessing, punched tape, key punch, etc., providing general business computing / 5 65 / E ?
U.S. Navy Marine Engineering Laboratory, Computer
Div., Annapolis, Md. 21402 / 301-268-7711,
Ixt. 8514 / .C 66
Mathematical analysis and research; design,
development. and validation of mathematical
models simulating complex naval shipboard
machinery systems and auxiliary systems;
design and development or management information systems; computer progranming Bnd data
processing services / S 700 Uab), 25 (div.)
/ E 1903 (lab), 1964 (div.)
UNIVAC Div. of Sperry Rand Corp., 1290 Ave. of
Americas, New York, N.Y. 10019/212-956-2121 /
.C 65
Digital electronic computing systems, data processing services / S ? / E ?
UNIVAC Div. of Sperry Rand Corp., 10924 Ave. J East,
Grand Prairie, Tex. / AN 2-3511 / .C 65
Complete IIICR bank processor systems including
high-speed doeument sorters, audit Usters, and
Central Processor witll accumulating and dictionary look-lip capabilities. IICH document encoding devices to print the amount, account number,
and transit number fields. Optical character
reeoan! tion systems for automation of accounts
receivable and inventory control, including
Reodatron Card Punch and Charge Soles Recorders
/ S 150 / E 1957
Uptime Corp •• 15910 West 5th Ave., Golden. Colo.
80401 / 303-279-3351 / .C 66
Punched card readers Bnd punches I S 90 I I
1958
URS Corp •• 1811 Trousdale Drive, BurUngame, CaUt.
94011 / 415-697-1221 / .C 66
Data processing services, simulation and mathematical modeUng, operations research. prograrmling aids and languages, computer education, management information systems, com8nd
8/66
control systems, cOlIIDunications requirementl.
scientific and engineering cOlllputatlou, log1lttel reselrch; lervice bureau with· ml 1440
Ind (2) ·1311 dllko I S 175 I B 1951
Useco Div. ,. Litton Industries, 13536 SaUeoy St.,
Van Nuys, CaUf. / 213-ST 6-9381 or 213 -'III 3-3520
/·C65
.
Electronic hardware. terminals, ter.inll board.,
molded products, headerl, encapsulaUon CUPI.
screw .... hln. I S 125 / E 1943
.!
Vector Electronic Co., Inc., 1100 Flower St •• Glendlle, CaUf. 91201 / 213-245-8971 / .C 65
Pre-progrilBli~g, patchboards, patch cordi,
plug-in cards, breadboard kit. / S 85 / E 1'147
Veeder":'Root. 70 Sargeant St., Hartford. COnn. 06102
/ 203-527-7201 / OC 66
Counting/recording/controllIng devices I S
1200 / E 1866
.
Victor Comptometer COrp., Business lachines Group,
3900 North Rockwell St., Chicago, Ill. 60618 /
312-KE9-8210 / .C 66
Solenoid controlled digital printers, accumulaiors, listers, calculators, time-da~8 printers / S 3800 / E 1918
Virginia Electronics Co., Inc .• River Rd. (;. Band
o Railroad, Washington, D.C. 20016 / 301-654-6680
/ .C 65
Communication control systems, intercolllllunfcation systems. circuit programming systems
(patchboards), etc. / S.90 / E 1951
Waber Electronics, Inc., 2000 N. Second St., Philadelphia, Pa. 19122 / 215-Nlbraska 4-3200 / .C 66
Master power controls, electrical outlet boxes,
instrument carts and lab mobile carriers I S
70 / E 1958
Paul G. Wagner Co •• 1227 S. Shamrock Ave., Monrovia,
CaUf. 91016 / 213-357-1992 / .C 66
MICRo-PIJNOI 461, a portable, printing key
punch / S ? / E ?
The Walkirk Co., 10321 S. La Cienega, Los Angeles,
CaUf, 90045 / 213-776-0323 / .C 66
Design, assembly and functional testing of
circuit modules using either 3D cordwood encapsulation techniques or open prInted circui t boards; utilizing production pr hand
soldering and component preparation / S 50 /
E 1948
Wang Laboratories, Inc., 836 North St •• Tewksbury,
lass. 01876 / 617-851-7311 / .C 66
LOCI desk-t~p digital computer for "on-line"
and "off-line" use in scientific computations;
data acquisition systems; universal, preset,
and bidirectional counters, punched tape
block readers / S 140 / E 1951
Werren Associates, 433 Putnam Ave., Cubridge.
lass. / OL 5-2097 (Natick, lIa ... ) / .C 65
Software, consul ting service. correspondence
courses / 5 5 / E 1964
Washington AluminulD Co •• Inc., Knecht Ave. and P.R.
R., Bal tillore, Id. 21229 / 301-242-1000 / .C 65
Computer flooring (raised, free access, steeU
/ S 250 / E 1947
F. S. Webster COa, InterchelDical Corp •• Copying
Products Div., I Amherst St" Cambridge, lass.
02142 / 617-KI 7-2300 / .C 65
Inked ribbons Cor all computers / S 225 / E
1889
West Eleven. Inc •• 11836 San Vicente Blvd., Los
Angeles, Calif. 90049 I 213-477-1039 / .C 66
Analog computers and analog computer components
(distributor in USA and Canada Cor Hatachll
/ S ? / E 1%1
Westgate Laboratory, Inc., 506 s. High St .• YelloW'
5prlng., Ohio 45387 / ROckwell 7-7375 roayton,
Ohio - VIctor 9-1330) / OC 65
Research. development. prototype, and small lot
production in electronics, physics, optics and
photography; X-Y plotters and vehicle position
displays, controls, Industrial instrumentatio",
eye movement cameras, X-Y recorders I S 58 /
I 1956
Westinghouse Electric Corp •• Advanced D8t8 Systems.
700 Braddock Ave., East Pittsburgh, Pa. 15112 /
-/OC66
Consulting service: systems and operations
research; data systems deSign and development;
data retrieval systems and package. IS? /
E?
Westinghou.1 Electric Corp., Blectro.I~& Splclalty
Products Group, Gateway Bldg ••3, Pittsburgh, Po.
15230 / 412-391-2800 / OC 66
A
AUERBACH
~
Allpllfilrl, plug boardl, 00lllPuter packaged
cbcuiU. computing .ervice., conlulUng .ervioe., Inllog: to digital converterl. digital
to analog convertel'l, elect:ronic countol'l,
indicator llghu, diode Ind electronic lIulti-
pliers, sbUt reg1lt.1'I, res.arch, IcaRaers,
tel_tering .yltllll, trlnlfol'll8rt, vilua1
output devl.,. I S 25,000 / E 1962 (Group)
W'oton-Boonlhatt Ind rucb., Hatboro laduurl,1 Pk.,
Hatboro, Pa. I 21S-OS 2-1240 / OC 65
Sine, transient and random computer analyzers.
servo computer •• control synems, statistical
compute.. I S lOll / E 1959
Weston Instruments, Inc •• 614 Frellnghuysen Ave.,
Newark, N.J. 07114/ 201-243-4700 / OC 65
Instruments and components; indicating. display
and controlling inltruEnts; product resolvers.
input-output device., 1DU1UpUers, calibrators.
relay., Ind reslltors / 5 2000 / E 1888
Ibeeldex, Inc., 1000 N. Dlvhion St. Peekskill,
N.Y. 10567 / 914-737-6800 / OC 66
Continuous plnfeed card forms in slnole and
multiple widthl: record retrieval equipment
a .. oelated with R.D.P. / 5 ISO / E 1931
Whittaker Corp •• Technical Products Div., 9601
Canowa Ave., Chatsworth, CaIlC. 91311 / 213-3410800 / OC 66
Electromechanical counter / 5 9SO / I 1939
John Wiley" Son., Inc., 605 3rd Ave., New York 16,
N.Y. / TN 7-9800 / OC 65
Technical books / 5 500 / I 1807
G. C. WIl.on & Co., 1035 26th 5t., Huntington, W.
. Va. 25703 / 304-523-5149 / OC 65
Timing controls and time delay relays / S 10 I
E 1945
Wincbester. Electronics Div., Litton Industries, lIain
5t. I> Hillside Ave., oakville, Conn. / 203-2748891 / OC 65
Connectors, terminals, and accessories /
5 375 / I 1941
Whtek Products Co., 14750 Keswick St. Van Nuys,
Calif. 91405 / 213-ST 0-8265 / OC 65
Breadboard kits tor electronic deSigners working on research and development in semiconductor
circuitry, computers, and data processing systems / S 3 / I 1948
WaI! Research & Development Corp. P.O. Box 36,
Baker Ave., West Concord, lass. 01781 I 617-3692111 / OC 66
Mathematical analysis and progranuning services;
computer consulting in the f'ie1ds DC aerospace.
information retrieval. geodesy, electronics and
management systems I S 300 I E 1954
Wright Engineering Co., Inc. 160 E.CaUfornia
Blvd., Pasadena, CaIiC. 91101 / 213-MV 1-2651 /
OC 65
Magnetic digital logic components and systems:
buffers and storage systems; aerospace timers;
magnetic tape transports / S 10 I E 1950
Wright Line Division, Barry Wright Corp., 160 Gold
Star Blvd., Worcester, Mass. 01606 / 617-791-0933
/ OC 66
Products for the handling, storage and filing
of punched cards, magnetic tape, paper tape
and disk packs / S 300 / E 1934
Wyle Laboratories, 128 Maryland St., El Segundo,
CaIiC. 90245 / 213-678-4251 / OC 66
Computers, digital, desk-top and rack-mounted
wi th expandable memories and expandable programmers. Punch card readers, keyboard-display units, other peripherals. Circuits, two
complete lines of module cards, one utilizing
germanium discrete components, the other
principally sllico. IC's / 5 550 / E 1949
I
I
I
Xerox Corp., P.O. Box 1540, Rochester, N.Y. 14603
/ 716-546-4500 / OC 65
Document copyIng and reproduction equipment /
5 10,000 / E 1906
Ed Younger & Assoc., 8 S. Michigan, Chicago, Ill.
60603 / - / OC 66
Recruit and select computer personnel for corporate clients on nationwide sea Ie I S 5 I E 1962
li
ZlSI KG, lehneberger Str. 4,643 Bad Hersfeld.
Germany (We.t> / 2751 (06621) / Telex 04/93 329
/ OC 65
Progranned controlled digital computers, automatic plotters, data handling equipment I
5 1200 / E 1949
.
- IND -
/
-/IfJ:,.,~
21 :020.001
SI ......
.
"U£RBAC~
E DP
.f'lIl1S
Directories
BUYERS' GUIDE FOR THE COMPUTER FIELD:
PRODUCTS AND SERVICES
FOR SALE OR RENT
Reprinted with permission from COMPUTERS AND AUTOMATION's "Computer Directory and Buyers' Guider!, June. 1966.
Entl'rpris('s. Inc .• 815 Washington Street, Newtonville 60. Mass.
©
1960, publlshl'd by Bcrkl'il'Y
(Cumulative, information as of April 1, 1966)
The purpose of this roster "The Buyers' Guide for
the Computer Field: Products and Services for Sale or
Rent" is to give information about the existence and in
many cases the properties of every product or service in
the computer field that is offered for sale or rent and
about which we have received information in 1966 - with
certain exceptions as noted below. This is the tenth cumulative edition of this roster.
Kinds of Entries. There are three kinds of entries
in this list: full entries; cross reference entries; and
name entries. A full entry contains or should contain the
following information:
Name of supplier and address / name or identification of product or service / DESCR: a brief description of the product in about 25 words or more /
USE: how it is used / price range, and whether
for sale or rent.
Every entry is subject to editing.
Survey of Consulting Services;
Survey of Software Suppliers;
Descriptions of General Purpose Digital Computers;
Characteristics of General Purpose Analog Computers:
Survey of Special Purpose Computers; and
Roster of School, College, and University Computel'
Centers.
Questionnaire. Many of the entries in this roster
have been derived from answers to questionnaires which
we sent out to over 800 suppliers. The entries have been
mainly derived from answers given on the "Product Entry
Form, " which follows:
Px:oduct Entry Form for
THE COMPUTER DIRECTORY and BUYERS' GUIDE, 196G
1.
Name or identification of product (or service)? _ __
2. Brief description? _______________
Cross-reference entries show that a product listed
under one product heading is described more fully under
another product heading.
3. How is it used?
Name entries consist of just the name of the organization, listed under the product class.
4.
5.
Corrections. We have tried to make each entry
correct to the extent of information in our possession.
But it is inevitable that at least some errors have occurred, and we shall be glad to publish corrections.
,
(
Exceptions. Certain products and services in the
computer field and their descriptions are either not included or only partially included in this Buyers' Guide.
For these, please see the following lists located elsewhere in this Directory:
Roster of Electronic Computing and Data Processing Services;
Price range? Between
and-:.,.-~:__-Under what particular heading should it be listed?
(See the list of 142 headings)_-'-_ _ _ _ _ _ __
Note: Up to 25 words (subject to editing) will be. published
FREE. If you want more than 25 words published, the
charge for up to 50 words (still subject to editing) is $15.
( ) Please give us 50 words. Enclosed is $15.
Organization ___________________
Address ___~~~-------------------------__
This data supplied by ____________________
Title ________---------...;Date------
LIST OF HEADINGS
/
l
".
(
\,
As a guide to the products and services offered in the computer field,
please refer to the following list of headings under which products and services
may be classified. There is some overlapping among these headings; it may
be necessary or desirable to look under more than one heading.
!:.:
B:
C:
Al
Adding Machines
Amplifiers
_A2
Analog Computers (SEE Computers, Analog)
Bl
Boards - Plotting
B2
- Plug
C1
Cameras ....
- Data Recording
Cards (SEE ALSO Punch Cards)
- Magnetic
Circuits.
- Computer, Packaged
Communications Systems(Computer Types)
AUERBACH Corporation ond AUERBACH Info, Inc.
C2
C3
C4
C5
CG
C7
---
8/66
21 :020.002
DIRECTORIES
Computers (SEE ALSO specific types)
C8
Computers, Analog
_C9,
Computers, Digital
_ClO,
Computers, Special Purpose
Cll
Computers, Test Equipment
C12
Computer Components (SEE ALSO
specific types)
C13
C14
Computing Services
C15
Consulting Services
C16
Controls.
C17
- Automatic
- Sorting and Counting
CIB
Converters, Information.
C19
- Analog to Digital '
C20
- Card to Magnetic Tape
_C2l
C22
- Card to Paper Tape
- C23
-'- Code
C24
-Digital to Analog
- Digital to Graphic
C25
- Graphic to Digital
_C26
- Magnetic Tape to Card
C27
- Magnetic' Tape to Paper Tape
C28
- Magnetic Tape to Magnetic' Tape
C29
- Paper Tape to Card
C30
C3l
- Paper Tape to Magnetic Tape
Cores.
C32
_C33
- Ferrite
- Magnetic
_C34
Counters • . . .
_C35
C36
- Electronic
- Mechanical
C37
Courses by Mail (Computer Field)
C38
Data Processing Accessory Equipment
D1
Data Processing Machinery (SEE ALSO
specific types)
D2
D3
Data Recording Equipment
D4
Data Reduction Equipment
D5
Delay Lines (Computer Types)
D6
Desk Calculators
D7
Differential Analyzers
Digital Computers (SEE Computers, Digital)
Discs, Magnetic
DB
D9
Drums, Magnetic
Economic Research
EI
Education (SEE ALSO Courses)
E2
Facsimile Equipment
_Fl
Floors
_F2
Forms, Continuous
F3
: F4
Forms Handling Equipment
Generators, Function.
_01
_G2
- Electronic
- Mechanical
_G3
Heads, Magnetic.
_,H1
- Reading
_,H2
- Recording
_H3
Information Engineering
_Il
Information Retrieval Devices
12
Integrators . . .
_13
- Electronic
_14
- Mechanical
_15
- Inventory Systems
_16
Keyboards
_Kl
Lights, Indicator
_Ll
Magnetic Ink Imprinting
MI
Memory Systems
M2
Multipliers. . .
M3
Q:
E:
'~Line-a-time
B:
..
D:
E:
F:
9:
!!:
!;
15:
b:
M:
8/66
-Diode
-Electronic,
"":':"Servo
Office' Machines
Op'erations Research
Panels.
-Jack
-Relay Rack
Paper lape
Patch Cords
Plotters(SEE ALSO Boards - Plotting)
Plugboards
Printers.
-High Speed
' -Keyboard
Programming Services
Publications
Punch Card Accessories
Punch Card Machines
Readers.
-Character
-Film
-Magnetic Card
-Magnetic Ink
-Magnetic Tape
-Paper Tape
-Photoelectric
-Punch Card
'Recording Papers
Registers, Shift
Relays (Computer Types)
Research
Resolvers . .
-Coordinate Transform
-Product
-Sine-Cosine
Robots
Ribbons, Data Processing
Scanners
Servomechanisms
Simulators
Storage Systems.
-Magnetic
Switches.
-Stepping
Synchros
Systems Engineering
Tape Handlers
Tape, Magnetic.
-Filing Systems
-Readers
-Rl;lcorde:rs,
-Reels
Tape, Paper.
-Filing Systems
-Punches
-Readers
Telemetering Systems
1Jlin-films, Magnetic
Timing Devices
Transformers. .
-Pulse
Translating Equipment
Typewriters, Electric, Controlled
Visual Output Devices
..
~:
1':
y:
A,
.
AUERBACH
..
-
M4'
M5 "
M6
01
02
- PI
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
PIO
Pll
- PI2
_,PI3
PH
_,PI5
RI
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
_R8
R9
RlO
Rll
R12
RI3
RI4
RI5
RI6
R17
R18
_'_'R19
Sl
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8,
S9
Tl
, T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
TlO
Tll
- Tl2
- Tl3
TI4
Tl5
_,_Tl6
Tl7
VI
-
-
-
-
/
BUYERS' GUIDE
ROSTER
AI.
AUOING MACHINES
Addo-X, Inc •• 845 Third Ave •• New
York, N. Y. 10022 " Addo-X opt ieal (ant adding machine I
type font to supply, inpur data for IBM 1285 optical
reader at speeds up to 3000
lines per min. t list 12, total
l3!-/-/Al
Friden. Inc .• a subs idtary of The
Singer Co., 2350 Washington Ave.,
San L!;JIndro, Calif. 94577 I ADD-
OEseR:
1'1lNCH~ adding machineltape
punch / OESeR:
performs same
funct ions as adding machine
plus punched paper tape containing all or part of printed infannation; tape may be converted
to tab cards: tape processed by
bureau or own computer / USE:
sales analyses, inventory control and account.s receivable
aging reports / $2000 to $3000
/ Al
Friden. Jnc .• a subsidiary of The
Singer Co •• ·8 / AFY adding machine / OESeR: lO-key addingmultiplying; ~atural Way keyboard; check dials show each
entry before being printed:
extra column totaling, plus
regular 10 I - / $290 to $350 I
Al
Friden. Inc .• a subsidiary of The
Singer Co •• *a / 0105 Natural
Way adding machine / OESCR:
special type style compatible
with IBM 1285 optical reader,
Model I: reference numbers.
amounts and total! appear on
tape; cheek window prevents
entry errors / USE: business
repcrts such as payroll. inventory control and general aecounti n9 / $350 to $400 I Al
A2.
(
AMPLIFIERS
Adage. Inc., 1079 Commonwealth
, Ave., Boston, Mass. 02215 / ADIBLOC modules / DESCR: operational amplifiers, sample-andhold ampl ifiers, DAC switches,
multiplexer switches, comparators, axis-crossing detectors.
Offset stabi Ii ty, linearity,
noise all .01% or better I - /
$50 to $500 I A2
Burr-Rrown Research Corp., 6730 S.
Tucson Blvd., Tucson, Ariz.
85706 ! amplifiers / DESCR:
broad line of all silicon DC
operational amplifiers and
instrumentation. Amplifiers
featuring new FET input amplifiers and FET chopper stabilized
units I USE: instrumentation,
control, computing and measurement applications / $39 to $295/
stock uni ts / 12
Cohu Electronics, Inc., Box 623,
San Diego, Calif. 92112 / ll4C
differential DC amplifier /
DESCR: provides high common
mode rejection, stability and
low drift and noise. Operates
wi th balanced or unbalanced
transducers and other input
circuitry I USE: designed for
thermocouple and strain gage
measurements where transducer,
amplifier and output device are
grounded at different location"
/ $995 I A2
Cohu Electronics, Inc., *a / 112A
wideband DC data amplifieT /
DESCR: provides accurate amplification of low level signals
from DC to 40 kc--allowing
simple. reliable measurement of
strain, temperature, vibration.
flow. displacement / USE: with
strain gages, thermocouples and
other transducers to test missiles. aircraft, bridges,
buildings, ships, guns, beavy
machinery / $530 to $680 / A2
COMCOR. Inc.
Engineered Electronics Co. -- see
Co
General Computers, Inc., 5990 W.
Pica Blvd., Los Angeles, Calif.
90035 / operat ional ampli fier /
IE'&:R: solid state operational
amplifier provides!" 100 VDe
output at 40 ma / - I $195 / A2
General Electric Co., Electronic
Components Sales Operation
General Instrument Corp., Defense
and Engineering Products Group,
Radio Receptor Div., Andrews
21 :020.003
Rd., llick.vllle, N. Y. 11802/
amplifiers IDESCR: include IF.
Rr. pulse, video, distribution,
isolation, limiting modulator,
narrow band, wideband and general purpose I USE: Variety ot
applicatiOns I $1000 to $15,000
I A2
General Radio Co., 22 Baker Ave.,
W. Concord, Mass. 01781 I amplifiers /DESCR: audio, DC. IF.
power, RF. tuned I - I $95 to
$1250 / A2
Genisco Technology Corp., Systems
Div .• 18-135 Sunna Rd., Compton.
Calif. 90221 I tape recording
and reproduce systems / OESeR:
ruggedized systems for collecting information under adverse
conditions I USE: high environment applications: adverse field
conditions; laboratory environments I $4000 up I A2
F. B. Maclaren (7 Co., Inc .• 15
Stepar Pl., lIuntington Sta.,
L. I., N. Y. 11746 / packaged
servo amplifiers / DESCR: vacuum tube and transistorized,
plug-in units employing MS components for military and industrial applications requiring exceptional reliability, performance and I He I USE: in precision custom designed servo
mechanisms with AC or DC error
signal. / $100 to $3500 I A2
MelcoT Electronics Corp., 1750
New Highway, Farmingdale, N. Y.
11735 / amplifiers I DESCR:
solid state ac and dc amplifiers
and power supply modules for
analog and digital instrumentation / USE: power amplification,
impedance matching, conversion I
$20 to $1000 / A2
Nexus Research Laboratory, Inc.
Philbrick Researches, Inc., 34
Allied Drive at Route 128,
Dedham, Mass. 02026 I operational amplifiers I DESCR: widest
selection of performance and
physical configuration / USE:
computing, process control.
instrumentation, simUlation,
active mathematics I $20 to
$300 I A2
Scientific Data Systems. Inc.,
1649 Seventeenth St.. Santa
Monica, Calif. 90404 I amplifiers: operational: analog input I DESCR: low- and highlevel: accept analog inputs tor
subsequent conversion to digital form / USE: AID conversion
and analog computing devices /
$60 to $500 / A2
Texas Instruments. Inc., Semiconductor-Components Div., P.O.
Box 5012, Dallas, Tex. 75222 I
integrated-ci rcuit amplifiers I
DESCR: operational/differential
high-frequency, general-purpose,
low-level audio, and thermalfeedback video amplifiers operate from _55 0 to +125 0 C.: packaged ins tandard TO-84 and TO89 flat packages / USE: in
high-reliability electronic
system. I $25 to $145 / A2
B1. BOARDS, PLOTTING
Discon Corp. -- see P6
Methods Research Corp., 105
Willow Ave., Staten Island,
N. Y. 10305 / magnetic visual
control systems / OESCR: magnetic boards (plain or gridded)
On which a wide variety of magnetic card holders. magnets,
arrows, write-on strips is
placed I USE: controlling production, personnel, sales,
machine loading, trucking, etc.
/ $30 to $3000 I 81
B2. BOARDS, PLUG
AMP Inc" Eisenhower Blvd.,
Harrisburg, Pa. 17105 I pat.chcoTd
prograrrrning devices / DESCR:
panel mount, rack mount, antivibration, fixed programming
systems / USE: multiple switching I - I 82
Digital Equipment Corp., 146 Main
St., Maynard, Mass. 01754 I
Digital Logic Laboratory /
DESCR: training device and
design tool built around a line
of computer circuit packages
with both integrated and discrete components I USE: desktop unit allows deSigners or
students .to build a complete
operating digital system I $850
to $1000 I 82
Litton Industries, Triad Distributor Div. -- see C3
Cl.
CAMERAS
General Atronics Corp., 1200 E.
Mermaid Lane, Philadelphia, Pa.
19118 I cameras, oscilloscopes /
DESCR: automatic controh,
lorting & counting: electronic
counters: memory systems; photoelectric readers; systems engineering / USE: quality control
inspections j automatic counting
& sorting / - I CI
Giannini .Scientific Corp., Flight
Research Div., P. O. Box I-F.
RichlJl.!lnd, Va .. 23201 I MULTIDATA~ camera / DESCR: photographic recorders electronically
controlled fOT higb resolution,
high speed recording -- 16, 35
and 70 mm fi 1m sizes I USE:
computer display recording,
oscilloscope and television display recording I $1700 to $5000
/ CI
Houston Fearless Corp., llOOl
Olympic Blvd., Los Angeles"
Cal if. 90064 / filmcard cameraprocessor I DESCR: makes microfiche while you wait; finished
4 x. 6" COSATI filmcards containii1g 60 microimages and full size
typed title one minute after
exposure I USE: microfiche production; libraries, archives,
business and industry / price on
request / Cl
C2.
CAMERAS, DATA RECORDING
Giannini Scientific Corp., Flight
Research Di v. -- see Cl
Houston Fearless Corp. -- see Cl
OPTOmechanisms Inc., 40 Skyline
Drive, Plainview, N. Y. 11803 /
Sentinel IV 35 rr.m recording
instrumentation camera I DESCR:
pulse or cine operated: capable
recording data from cathode 'Tay
tube, may be synchronized, remote
controlled between 2 or more
cameras; single and double frame
exposure / USE: in conjunction
with cathode ray tube display /
$1800 to $3500 I C2
C3.
CARDS
OJ/AN Controls, Inc., 944 Dorchester
Ave., Boston, Mass. 02125/ logic
and control cards I DESCR: digital magnetic cards featuring low
impedance circuitry, non-VOlatile
storage, low power, high radiation resistance, small and lightweight packaging / USE: binary
counters, shift registers. ring
counters, digi tal delays, parallel
to serial converters, sorters,
pseudo-random code generators /
$50 to $125 I C3
Jonker Corp. -- see 03. CIS, Pl3
Litton Industries, Triad Distributor
Div., 305 N. Briant S1., Huntington. Ind. 46750 ! circuit cards /
DESCR: universal plated, extender,
integrated, pre-punched, plug-in,
card extractors / - / $1.40 to
$12.50 / C3
Wheeldex, Inc. -- see F3
C5.
CIIICUITS
The Bunker-Ramo Corp., Defense
Systems Div., 6433 Fallbrook
Ave •• Canoga Park, Calif. 91304 /
hybrid thin-film microcircuits /
DE9;R: thin-film passive elements combined with active devices in chip form I USE: AID
converters: computer cf rcuits:
voltage regUlators; active filters: resistor ladder networks;
threshold logic circuits; etc.
/ quote on request I C5
Columbia Technical Corp., 50 St.
at 25 Ave., Woodside, N. Y.
11377 / custom hybrid circuits
/ DESCR: flat packs or plug in
configurations / USE: in both
analog and digital systems /
$10 to $150 I C5
Continental Connector Corp.
Digital Equipment Corp., 146 Main
St., Maynard, Mass, 01754 I
digital system modules /DESCR:
over 400 different types solid
AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc,
state digital circuit modulesj
3 compatible freQuencies __
500 KC, 511:, lOll(;: specially
packaged I USE: systems design,
test, construction applications
/ $30 to $348 / C5
Digital Equipment Corp., .0 I
FLIP CHIP modules I DESCR: integrated and discrete components
packaged on ~ by ~ inch pri nted
circuit boards; low cost due to
automated production facilities
I USE: simple counters and adders
to full scale digital computing
systems / $5 to $100 I C5
Digital Equipment Corp., -a I
laboratory and educational modules
/ OESeR: full coordinated series
of transistorized digital computer
circuits packaged in "building
block"' form; 3 compatible frequencies: 500 KC, 5MC, 101IC /
USE: educational and industrial
training; practical digital systems test and design work .I $41
to $160 / C5
Engineered Electronics Co., 1<141
E. Chestnut St., Santa Ana, Calif.
92702/ digital logic modules and
circuit cards / DESCR: complete
line offers almost any desired
circuit combination / USE: piugin or permanent circuit modules
for use in data processing and
related eouipment / $4/module to .
$150/modulc I C5
Litton Industries, Winchester Electronics Dfv.
Lockheed Electronics Co., 6201 E.
Randolph St., Los Angeles, Calif.
I printed circui t boards / DESCR:
etChed, plated, plated through
holes. flush commutators, multilayer / USE: all printed circuit
applications / 50~ to $500 ea. I
C5
Philco Corp., Subsidiary of Ford
Hotor Co., l..ansdale Div., Church
Rd .• Lansdale, Pa. 19<146 I
microelectronic integrated circuits;
hybrid circuits I - I USE: broad
range of digital and linear applications I $2.55 000-999) quantity
and $43.50 000-999) quantity /
C5
Texas Instruments. Inc., Semiconductor-Components Dtv., P.O.
Box 5012. Dallas, Tex. 75222 I
digital integrated circuits I
DESCR: silicon monolithic circuits available in 0 0 to+ 70 0
and -55 0 to +"12SOC operating
ra nges. Packaged in TO-84
and TO-89 flat package. I
USE: in high-reliability equipment ranging from guidance systems to hearing aids I $5 to
$35 / C5
Wyle Laboratories, 128 Maryland
St., El Segundo. Calif. 90245
/ circuit cards / DESCR:
two complete lines of module
cards, one utilizing germanium
discrete components, the other
principal silicon Ie's / USE:
for assembling computers and
other digital electronic systems
$13 to $100 / C5
C6.
CIRCUITS, COMPlITER, PACKAGED
Adage, Inc. -- see MS, A2
Computer Control Co., Inc., Old
Connecticut Path. Framingham,
Mass. I circuits, computer, packaged I DESeR: single source
capability for digital logic
mo~ules.
Broad logic lines, 200
KC to 20 MG, from germanium
to silicon, from discrete to
comprehensi ve new integrated
circuit packages / - / - I C6
Computer Logic Corp., 1528 20th
St" Santa Monica, Calif. 90404
/ digital logic cards I DESCR:
discrete and integrated logic
cards comprised of various logic
function, (flip flops, gates,
multivibrators): associated
hardware and software I USE:
build digital data systems I $23
to $315 per card / C6
Control Equipment Corp., 19 Kearney
Rd., Needham Heights. Mass. 02194
/ Series 600, 700, 800, 900
digi tal logic modules I OESCR:
saturated circuits and Clamped
loads; high fan-out capabi lity
and high noise rejection: inputs
diode-coupled and represent
standard load; NAND and inverter
logiC available I - I $10 to
$100 / C6
8/66
DIRECTORIES
21:020.004
Control Logic, Inc., 3 Strathmore
Rd., Natick, Mass. / digital
circui t modules / OESeR:
welded encapsulated; several with
silicon and germanium semiconductors--operating ranges up to
50 Me. Each product family contains logic elements, level converters. lamp and indicator
drivers / - / $10 per flip flop
to $90 per flip' flop / C6
Control Logic r Inc., -8 / microcircuit digital circuit cards I
DESCR: plug-in circuit cards
utilizing microcircuits for logic
operation and counting up to 20
MC. Over 30 different card type.
and standard mounting accessories.
Complete systems readily canst ructed / - / $40 per card to
$150 per card / C6
DY/AN Controls, Inc •• 944 Dorchester
Ave., Boston, Mass. 02125 / core
transistor logic modules / DESCR:
perform logic functions; feature
high logic power, max.imum noise
immunity, low power, non-volatile
storage, high reliability, smalltough-light weight packaging /
USE: primarily designed for space
applications / $15 to $100 /
C6
Digital Equipment Corp. -- ,s·ee C5
Lockheed Electronics Co. -- see C5
MICRO SWITCH, a Oiv. of Honeywell,
11 W. Spri ng St., Freeport I Ill.
61032/ circuits, computer
packaged / DEseR: 401 Ell Series
of Microsecond "one-shot" circuits
-- produce single pulse voltage
from 0.1 to 3.0 usee depending
upon device; contain a resistor,
capaci tor, magnetic square loop
core and diode / USE: in printed
circui t boards or other applications in which circuit is at
a remote location from controlling switch or load / - / C6
Motorola Semiconductor Products,
Inc., 5005 E. McDowell Rd.,
Phoenix, Ariz. 85008 / circuits.
logical / O~R: id\tegFB~d clrill>
~;!~)b /~i:' ::~;s: ~~p-h::;,
half-adder, bias regulator. gate
expander / $2 to $45 / C6
Nexus Research Laboratory, Inc.
Philco Corp., Subsidiary of Ford
Motor Co .• Lansdale Div. -see C5
Raytheon Computer, 2700 S. Fairview, Santa Ana, Calif. 92704 /
digital circuit modules / DESCR:
sUicon and germanium for operation at 200KC, INC, 5NC, 20NC;
module breadboard kit for oigital
system development / USE: digital
data ,ystem, / $34 to $425 (ln
ouantity of 1-10) / C6
Scientific Data Systems, Inc.,
1649 Seventeenth St., Santa
Monica, Calif. 90404 / circuits. computer, packaged /
DESCR: all types of digital
computer circuits and modules
/ USE: primarily for interface
between analog processes and
digital computers; also custombuilt digital systems / $45 to
$150 per module I C6
The Walkirt Co., 10321 S. La Cienega,
Los Angeles, Calif. 90045/ electronic module manqfacturing /
DESCR: Mechanical design (including art work) 3D Cordwood encapsulated modules, and/or
component asse~ly onto printed
circuit boards using producUon
flow and/or hand sol~ring,
plus functional module testing /
USE: assembling complex circuits into economical and/or
small volume systems / bid
basis I C6 '
The Walkirt Co . •a / Integrated
Circuit Carriers and Breadboard / DESCR: carriers recessed
for welding I.C. 's in place.
14 pins on carrier backside; welded
I.C. becomes small plug-in module,
mates with breadboard & allows
plug-in of 6 carriers. / USE:
prototype and/or limited production integrated circuit sub
systems / $1.18 to $2.50 / C6
Wyle Labs -- see C5
C7.
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Adage, Inc., 1079 Commonwealth Ave.,
80ston, Mass. 02215 / 710 hybridcomputer linkage system / DESCR:
internal command set; 85 kc word
rate; self-test frees digital
8/66
computer during analog and
II nkage checkout / - / $30,000
to $150,000 / C7
The Bunker-Ramo Corp., 277 Pa rk
Ave., New York, N, Y. 10017 /
Series 200 date display, updating
and retrieval /DESCR: consoles
contain CRT screen and alphanumeric keyboards, many different
configurations; usually connected
to computer system through control unit and communication lines
/ USE: query and update a computer
memory / $1100 to $14,000 / C7
CAE Industries Ltd., P.O. Box 6166,
Montreal 3, Quebec, Canada / telepath auto":call / DESCR: on-line
character generators automatically
genera te poll i ng sequences for
selecting outstation data and
teleprinter eqUipment / USE:
telegraph and data networks /
$1000 to $3000 / C7
CAE Industries Ltd., .8 / telepath
selectors / DESCR: on-line outstation control and selection
equipment to control teleprinters,
tape reperforators. transmitter
distributors·, other on-line equipment I USE: . telegraph and data
networks operating with computer
switching and automatic polling
systems / $500 to $1500 / C7
Collins Radio Co., Dallas, Tex.
75207 / communication systems,
computer type / DESCR: computercontrolled, store-and-forward
digital message switching system
for handling 32-1000 circuits /
USE: control of high density
message traffic and message
process i ng / - / C7
Data Conununications, Inc., Church
Rd., P.O. Box 29, Moorestown,
N. J, 08057 / DATABANK I DESCR:
magnetic tape terminal designed
to store data, transmit previously
stored data ot' simultaneous storage and transmission / - / $2950
andup/C7
Data Communications, Inc., -a /
DATAGUARD / DEseR: portable
transmitting/receiving deviee
which encrypts/decrypts data
through a myriad of variations
in the custom coding program /
USE: in areas where security is
of the utmost importance /
$165/month rental / C7
Data Communications, tnc., *8 /
TELEMUX-I / DEseR: solid
state, synchronous, full duplex,
time division multiplexing
terminal compatible with CCITT
standards / - / $29,000 plus /
C7
Data Systems Analysts. Inc.
Data Trends, Inc., 1259 Route 46,
ParSippany, N,J. / TP-1O
printer system I OESCR: compact, noiseless electronic strip
printer 1 USE: in conjunction
wi th touch-tone telephone; pro1_
vides hard copy record of inquiries and responses / depends on
configuration / C7
Dig1 tronits Corp., I Albertson
Ave., Albertson, L. I., N. Y.
11507 I Diato-verter data terminals IOESCR: transmits and
receives magnetic tape. paper
tape or punched card data over
standard telephone lines / USE:
centralized processing, inventory control, data collection /
$7500 to $61,225 / C7
Electron Ohio, Inc., 1278 W. 9th
St., Cleveland, Ohio 44113 / data
collection system / DESCR: piece
count, productive and down times
electrically transmitted to control center; punched cards are
produced / USE: centra 1 time
keeping; production control /
$lOO/machine connected to $500/
machine connected I C7
Executone, Inc .• 47.;..37 Austell
Place, Long Island City; N. Y.
11101 I electronic communication
systems I OESeR: intercom. sound,
signalling, voice paging and
pocket page systems / USE: instant internal 'communication to
help speed work flow, increase
productivity / '- / C7
General Electric Co., Process
Computer Business Seetion -- see
CIO
G-E Communications Products Dept.
General Instrument Corp., Defense
and Engineering P~oducts Group,
Radio Receptor Div., Andrews Rd.,
Hicksville, N. Y. 11802 / communi cations systems / DESCR: wide
variety of communications systems
utilizing anaiog and/or digital
information / USE: for any
custom application· / various / C7
General Instrument Corp .• lIagne-Head/
Systematics Div., 13040 S. Cerise
Ave., Hawthorne, Calif. 90250 /
telepunch / DESCR: transmi 15 and
receives IBM cards via Model 33
or Model 28 teletypewriters; 10
characters/second; attaches to
IBM 24 card punch / USE: data
transmiss..ton systems / $3150
($140/mo.) to $4250 ($175/mo.)
/ C7
General Instrument Corp., Radio
Receptor Oi v. -- see S9
Hewlett-Packard Co., Datamec Div .•
345 Middlefield Rd., Mountain
View, Calif. 94041 / D-Ill data
entry system / DESCR: mark
sense readers transmi t via DataPhone to editing, formatting buffer. Buffer output suppUed as
required / USE: capture small
amounts of data from many sources
/ $700/mo. rental to $7000/mo.
rents 1 / C7
Honeywell, Inc., Electronic·Data
ProceSSing Div'., 60 Walnut St.,
Wellesley Hills, Mass. 02181 /
data station / DESCR: remote
·connnunications terminal with
paper tape, keyboard, printing,
punell card, optical reading
options / USE: data communications line terminal/ $9000 to
$30,000 / C7
Honeywell, Inc., Electronic Data
Process i ng 01 v., *a / tape
transmission terminal / DESCR:
cormnunications terminal for
data transmission from or to
magnetic tape / USE: remote
terminal / $60,000 to $120,000
/ C7
Lenkurt Electric Co., Inc., 1105
County Rd., San Carlos, Cal it.
94070 / 26C data transmission
system / DESCR: transistorized
FSK system used to convert one
1200-bps or one 2400-bps data
signal for transmission over a
single voice channel / - I $2400
to $3900 I C7
Phflco Corp. I Communications &
Electronics Div., 3900 Welsh Rd.,
Willow Grove, Pa. / Philco message and data switching systems I
DESCR: communications processor
and message switching system /
USE: routing, storing and forwarding messages / $300.000 to
$3,000,000 / C7
Quindar Electronics Inc., 60 Fadem
Rd., Springfield, N. J. 07081 /
solid state frequency multiplexing
/ DESCR: tone signalling for
frequency multiplexing in
supervisory control and 'telemetering systems; low speed and
high speed; germanium and silicon
types / USE: means of frequency
or time division multiplexing
for all types of supervisory
control and data transmission I
$300 to $600 / C7
Scientific Data Systems, Inc.,
1649 Seventeenth St., Santa
Monica, Calif. 90404/ communications systems (computer
types) / DEseR: melsageswitching units / USE: with
full-duplex, half-duplex, simplex
telegraph or telephone lines /
- / C7
Tally Corp., 1310 Mercer St., Seattle, Wash. 98109 / data communication systems / DEg;;R: paper
tape, magnetic tape, card data
communication terminals operating
over dial-up telephone lines at
60-120 Char/sec i automatic error
correction routines, including
typewriter I-O / USE: plugged
into dataphone or eQUivalent /
$20 per month to $300 per month
/ C7
Transitel International Corp.,
615 Winters Ave., Paramus, N.J.
07642 / supervisory control
systems / DESCR: solid state
supervisory systems for conventional operation or use with a
digi ta 1 control computer; provides
digital communication between
remote devices and/or processes
and a central point / USE:
in the gas or water utilities
or in any of the process industries / $5000 up I C7
Ultronic Systems Corp. I 44 Wall
St., New York, N. Y. / character
multiplex / OEseR: up to 64
teletype lines on one voice
grade line; various code levels
and bit rates can be acccmnodated
/ - / quote from fac tory / C7
A..
AUERBACH
VltroniQ. Systems Corp., *a / DATA
pvMI4J / DESCR: transmission
and reception of digital data
up to 1200 bi ts/sec over conventional Schedule 4 telephone
Ii nes / - / under .,$500 / C7
Ul tronics Systems Col'p., *8 / magnetic tape·· tranimlssion terminal
-- Mode I 3000 / DESCR: all ow.
transmission and reeeption of
magnetic tape data over conventional telephone 1 ines I USE:
with paper tape eqUipment, high
:~;~gobr~n~;r8, etc. / under
URS Corp. -- see 11
C8.
COMPUTERS
Astrodata, Inc.
The Bunker-Ramo Corp., 277 Park Ave. ,
New York, N. Y. 10017 / digital
MIL spec. computer BR-133 /
DESCR: general-purposei extreme
ruggedness and reliability /
USE: shipboard; military uses
- real-time control/ - / C8
CONCOR, Inc.
Computer Co. of America, 121 Gill
Rd., Haddonfield, N.J. 08033/
the "Compulator" series, desktop
computers / DESCR: fully inte~
grated group of desktop computers
/ USE: business. data or
scientific problem solving /
$650 to $2500 / C8
Computer International Sales Co.
Control Data Corp. -- see CIO
DA-PEX Company, 334 Francis Bldg.,
Louisville, Ky. 40202 / used
computer broker / OESCR: consul t and advise wi th owners to
help them obtain the best price
when buying or selling used computers and punched card machines
/-/-/ca
Digital Equipment Corp .• 146 Main
St., Maynard, Mass. 01754 /
LINC computer / DESCR: small,
general purpose digital computer
equipped with devices and
logical circuits; programs in
simplified symbolic language;
built-in oscilloscope presents
words, numbers, graphical displays of incoming or processed
data / USE: biomedical research
lab. I $42,000 up / C8
DigItal Equipment Corp •• *8 /
LINC-8 / OEseR: combining
concepts Bnd operating siinplicity
of LINC with speed, memory advantages, variety of peripheral
devices of PDP-8; .including
multiplexed analog-to-digital inputs; relay register output
provisions; dual digital LINtape
transports; 1ntegral alphanumeric
oscilloscope display / USE:
biomedical and environment
science research / $38,500
-- full range additional options
available / C8
Digital EQUipment Corp., *a I
PDP-I computer / DESCR: general
purpose, solid state, digitaJ
computer; 100,000 additions l-... ~
sec.; control simultaneously 1
large variety of peripheral deviees; single address. single
instruction, stored program,
18-blt word length / USE: from
scientific on-line experimentation
to real time process control /
$120,000 up / C8
Digital Equipment Corp., .a /
PDP-4 computer / DESCR: general
purpose, single address, parallel. binary, l8~b1t word length:
random access magnetic core memorYi cycle time 6 usecs: operates
with variety of peripheral devices
/ USE: from scientific on-line
experimentation to rea} time process control / $60,000 up / C8
Digital EQuipment Corp. f *a /
PDP-5 computer / DEseR: sma 11
scale genenl purpose; one-address, fixed word length, parallel computer using 12 bit, two's
complement arithmetic; magnetic
core memorey with cycle time of
6 usecs / USE: in larger
computer systems / $25,000 up
/ C8
Digital Equipment Corp., *a /
PDP-6 computer / DESCR: mediumsized system; 16 accumulators i
15 index registers; provision
for expansion; elements interconnected by busses and operate
asynchronously; contains all
hardware necessary for timeshared use / USE: very-high
BUYERS' GUIDE
('apacity scientHic data process i 09; t Imc shari no /
$250,000 up / CD
Digital Equipment Corp., .s !
PDP-7 computer / OESCR: highspeed, solid state digital
computer; single address, fixed
18-bit word length, binary
machine: random access magnetic
core memory; cycle time of 1.75
u sec; 285.000 add it ions per sec.
I USE: scientific lab; computing
center; real-time process control
system / $,15,000 up / CO
Oigi ta 1 Equipment Corp .• ·a I
PDP-O computer! DESCR: compact, general-purpose digital
computer; high speed, random
access, magnetic core memory;
binary operations on 12- or 24bit 2'5 complement numbers; cycle
time 1.6 usee; integrated solid
state logic modules / USE:
SCientific computation, system
and control applications, on
line data collection and
reduction / $18,000 / CB
Digital Eauipment Corp. -- see C12
Ferranti Electric, Inc., East
Bethpage Rd .• Plainview, N. Y.
11803 l ARGUS ~OO and 500
computers / DESCR: general
purpose and process control, silicon integrated circuitry, full
range process input/output
devices / - / $45,000 to $60,000
/ CD
Scientific Control Corp., 14008
Distribution Way, Dallas, Texas
75234 / computers, general
purpose / DESCR: 5 computers
ranging from 2 to 5 usec.: fully
parallel, indexed operation /
USE: scientific and data processing applications, independentally or as integral part
of ,jata handling systems
through adequate interfacing /
$14,800 to $100,000 / C8
Soci~t€ d'Electronique & O'Automatisme
C9.
COMPlJfERS, ANALOG
Burr-Brown Research Corp., 6730
S, Tucson Blvd., Tucson. Ariz.
B5706 / analog computer/simulator
/ OESCR: educational analog
simulator and special purpose
analog computers / USE: undergraduate instruction in physical sciences and engineering.
Also. industrial control and
computation / $3000 to $50,000
/ C9
COMCOR, Inc.
GPS Instrument Co., Inc., IBB
Needham St., Newton, Mass. 02164
/ GPS 10,000 analog computer /
DESCR: general purpose with hybrid
capability, expandable to over
300 computing elements: high
speed operation for iterative
and statistical computation /
USE: general purpose; hybrid
$50,000 up / C9
GPS Instrument Co., Inc., .a /
GPS 200! analog computer / DESCR:
compact solid state, real-time,
compressed time and hybrid operation: based on full output band
width to over 1 megacyc Ie per
second / USE: general purpose;
hybrid / $20,000 to $70,000
/ C9
F.B. MacLaren & Co., Inc., 15
Stepar PI., Huntington Sta.,
L.r., N.Y., 11746/ analog
computers / DESCR: custom
designed precision electromechanical systems to perform
specific mathematical operations
In military and industrial computer applications / USE: data
conversion - voltage to position,
velocity, voltage, etc. / variable,
depending on application / C9
Pastoriza Electronics, Inc., 385
Elliot St., Newton, Mass. 02164
/ PAC (Persona 1 Ana log Computer)
/ DESCR: small analog computer
for teaching applications: contains
two integrators, two multiplexers,
one adder, power and patch cords,
read-out meter, controlS / USE:
simulate and solve differential
equations / $350 / C9
Perspective, Inc.
Philbrick Researches, Inc., 34
Allied Drive at Route 128,
Dedham, Mass. 02026 / analog
computing components / OESCR:
modular analog computing instruments; amp 1ifiers, multipliers,
21:020.005
dividers, integrators, differentia.
tors / USE: research, process control, Simulation, active mathematics
/ $300 up / C9
Reeves Instrument Co .• 100 East
Gate Blvd, Garden City, N. Y.
11532 / REAC 600 analog computer
/ DESCR: high speed, solid state,
large scale computing system:
expandable to powerful hybrid fae ilIty / USE: product analysis and
systems simulation / varies /
C9
Reeves lnstrument Co. -- see C14
Simulators, Inc., 1856 Walters
Ave., Northbrook, Tll. 60062 /
simulation equipment / DESCR:
small, medium and large general
purpose analog and hybrid computers
/ USE: simulation, on-line data
analysis / $5000 to $150,000 / C9
Systron-Donner Corp., B8B Galindo
St., Concord, Calif. 94520 I
SO 10/20 analog computer / DESCR:
general purpose desk top computer: full ~ 100 volt operating
range, visual computer circuits
on removable problem board.
patchable electronic mode control
and time scales, expandable to 20
operational amplifiers / USE:
teaching and instructional use for
engineering and mathemat ics student.s: also for simulation and
optimization / $6000 to $qooo /
C9
Systron-Donner Corp., "'a / SO 40/80
analog computer / DESCR: general
purpose, desk top:!: 100 volt:
but It-in digital logic, patchable
electronic mode control and time
scales, expandable up to 84 amplifiers / USE: in research for
Simulation and optimization of
dynamic problems. Also at universities for teaching and instructional use / $14,000 to
$75,000 / C9
West Eleven, Inc., 11836 San
Vecente Blvd., Los Angeles,
Calif. 90049/ Hitachi 303 analog
computer / DESCR: low-cost desktop: satellite for large analog
computers / USE: high schools:
cOlleges: research laboratories:
aid in teaching mathematics,
electronics and mechanics: engineering aid in solving small scale
problems at high speed / $1400 to
$5050 / C9
West Eleven, Inc .• "'a / Hitachi 505,
analog computer / DEseR: low
cost, advanced analog computer~
highest quality standards ~ solid
state (silicon) 100 V desk-top~
modular, 10 amplifiers to 120
amplifiers / USE: high speed
simulations and computations by
engineer, researcher or scientist
/ $7300 to $60,000 / C9
CIO.
COMPlJfERS, DIGITAL
American Bosch Arma Corp., ARMA
Div., Roosevelt Field, Garden
City, N. Y. 11532 / Micro 0 computer / DESCR: ·stored program
13 bi t (expandable to 18 bits)
serial binary microelectronic
computer operating on fractional
whole numbers at rates up to
BO,OOO operations per sec. / USE:
aircraft inertial navigation:
missile guidance applications /
$10,000 to $14,000 ea. in quantity / CIO
The Bunker-Ramo Corp., Defense
Systems Div., 8433 Fallbrook Ave.,
Canoga Park, Calif. 91304 / BR-130
(AN/UYK-ll digi tal computer /
DESCR: medium scale: 6 usec readwrite cycle: 8K core memory (expandable to 32K): interleaved
I/O; real-time interrupts; NTDS
compatible / USE: Polaris and
Transi t navigat ion systems: range
tracking: photo recon interpretation: oceanographic data systems: communications intelligence
processing systems / quote on
request / CIO
The Bunker-Ramo Corp., Defense
Systems Div., *a / BR-133
(AN/UYK-3) digital computer /
DESCR: general purpose: 1 usec
read-write cycle: 16K core memory (expandable to 32K): multilevel priority interrupt: NTDS
and mobil OPCON I/O devices
compatible / USE: satellite
tracking: fire control: simulation: reconnaissance: small
ships data handling: air defense:
oceanographic applications: auto-
iag~ mapping / quote on reques t
• The Hunker-Ramo Corp. -- see C8
CAE, 17, Route de la Reine,
Boulogne/Seine, France / CAE
90-10 / DESCR: basic cycle:
1.751ls, large connection with
peripheral equi pments. i ntegrated circuit / USE: process
control and real time / $30,000
to $200,000 / CIO
CAE, ·a / CAE 90-40 / DESCR:
four differen t pos sibil i t i ell for
external connection I USE: real
time and scientific appUcatJons
/ $200,000 to $400,000 / CIO
CAE, ·a / CAE 90-80 / DESCR:
specially designed for external
connection / USE: real time
and scientific applications /
$400,000 to $800,000 / CIO
Cambridge Thermionic Corp., 445
Concord Ave., Cambridge, Mass.
02138 / digital computer systems
/ DESCR: designs, develops and
manufactures / USE: industrial,
commercial and mi 11 tary application' / - / CIO
Celestron Associates, Inc. -- see
CI5
Cognitronics COrp., 549 Pleasantville Rd., Briarcliff Manor,
N, Y. / computers / DESCR: full
line designed to perform justificRtion and hyphenation decisions and output completed tape
for operation of hot and cold
type machines / USE: accepts
raw punched tape text and outputs tape complete wi th instruction' / $30,000 to $75,000 / CIO
Collins Radio Co., Dallas,. Tex.
75207 / C-8500 electronic computing system / DESCR: intermediate scale. integrated circ"it: 32-bit word, max. 262,000
bytes; 2 usec core storage;
overlapped core banks; 32 highspeed I/O channels and I multiplex channel/USE: communication; industrial systems / - /
CIO
Computer Co. of America -- see ce
Computer Control Co., Inc., Old
Connecticut Path, Framingham,
Mass. / computers, digital/
DESCR: real-time, on-line computers featurhg monolithic
integrated digital logic circuit
modules, General or special
purpose / - / - / CIO
Control 0818 Corp., BIOO 34th Ave.
So., Minneapolis, Minn. 55440 /
8090, 160A, 1700, 3000 Serle.,
and 6000 Series computers /
DESCR: fmall, medium, largescale general purpose digital
computer systems: some with timesharing capabilities: world's
largest digital computer: use
with variety of peripherals;
modular design for expansion /
USE: general purpose computations: process control: total
management information systems:
scientific and engineering computation, / $100,000 to
$5,000,000 / CIO
Control LogiC, Inc., 3 StratJimore
Rd., Natick, Mass, / special
purpose sye:tems / DESCR:
special purpose digital data
handling, measurement, control,
data formatting systems designed
to meet specific customer requirements / - / - / CIO
Digital Electronics Inc., 2200
Shames Dr., Westbury, N. Y.
11590 / DIGIAC 3080 computer /
OESCR: mobile, self contained:
solid state machine with printed
cards, requires no special maintenance / USE: in computer
education / $19,500 / CIO
Digital Equipment Corp. -- see ce
Electro-Mechanical Research, Inc.,
ASI Computer Div., 8001 Bloomington Freeway, Minneapolis,
Minn. 55420 / ADVANCE serie,
digi tal computer systems /
DESCR: general purpose digital
computers: series inCludes lowcost 6020, 6040, 6050, and 6070.
Machines are program compat ible
and Include full software package / USE: scientific and
engineering computation and online systems applications /
$BO,OOO to $225,000 / CID
ElectrO-Mechanical Research, Inc.,
ASI Computer Div., *a / digital
computers / DESCR: small to
medium scale, high speed, general purpose: associated peripheral equipment / USE: scient if-
AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
ic, engineering, on-line systems
application ,I $30,000 to $500,000
/ CIO
Engineered El ect ron i cs Co., 1441 E.
Chestnut St .. Santa Ann, Calif.
92702 / custom digital systems
/ DESCR: wi 11 de 1 i ver a completely tested system according
to customer's requirements -' • .'
subject to negot iation I CIO
Ferranti Electric. Inc. -- seE" C8
Ferranti-Packard Electrjc Ltd.,
Industry St .• Toronto 1;), Ontario,
Canada / Ff' 6000 gE'neral purpose
digital computer I OESCR' 24bit: multi-processing mf'mory
protection by hardware: 1\2
address order code with 7 accumulators to 3 index registers
available to each program / USE:
special purpose needs through
special interfaCing equipment I
$12Q,OOO to SI,OOO,OOO / CIO
Friden, Inc., a subsidiary of The
Singer Co., 2350 Washington Ave.,
San Leandro. Ca I if. 94577 / bOlO
electronic computer ,I OESeR:
fully transistorized, random
access core storage: desk-s ized:
removable program panel: accepts
input from punched tape, edgepunched cards, etc. Output:
printed document, tape, cards /
USE: hi lling, various accounting applications, statistical
quali ty control product analysis reports / $19,000 to $20,000
/ CIO
General Electric Co., Process
Computer Business Section,
2255 W. Desert Cove Rd •• Phoenix,
Ariz. 85002/ computers, digital
/ DESCR: magnetic core: magnetic bulk memory backup: complete line of peripherals,
including process and data communications / USE: real-time
process applications for monitoring, logging, operator guide or
control / $20,000 to $1,000,000 /
CIO
General Electric Co., Process
Computer Business Section, "'a I
information processing systems;
data communications systems /
DESCR: 11 computers from smallscale (GE-1I5) punched-card
processor, wi th capability for
use as remote terminal, to a
large-seale, time-sharing computer (GE-645): 12 different
data-communications equipments /
USE: business, banking, scient i ii c/engineeri ng, educat i on,
government / $1375 per month
rental and $66,000 purchase to
$150,000 per month rental and
$7,000,000 purchase / CIO
General Instrument Corp" Radio
Receptor Div. -- see S9
General Precision. Inc., Kearfott
Products Div., 1150 McBride Ave.,
Little Falls, N. J. 07424 /
AN/ASN-24 (V) / DESCR: general
purpose digital computer set
including variety of input-output
signal conVersion and controldisplay modules. Fully qualified
to MIL E 5400 Class II. Logistics complement established /
USE': real time digital control
and processing in manned aircraft (e.g., central navigation
In USAF C-1411 / - / CIO
General Precision Inc., Kearfott
Products Div •• "'a / GPK-lO /
DESCR: general purpose microcircuit digital computer: large,
internally stored memory is NDRO,
electrically alterable: up to
550,000 bits: extensive inputoutput and computing capacity /
USE: real time ai rborne processing and control/ - / ClO
General Precis ion, Inc., Kearfott
Products Div., ·a / L qO-1 /
DESCR: microcircuit dig! tal
computer with 5 megahertz serial
bit processing; 2B bit data
word, up to 16,000 words of
memory; large input-output capabilitYi compiler, simulator
developed / USE: airborne data
processing and control / - / CIO
Honeywell Electronic Data Processing, 60 Walnut St., Wellesley
Hills, Mass. 02181 / Series 200
computers / DESCR: six models of
business data proceSSing systems
ranging from small card system to
super-powered multi-programming
models, including complete array
of peripheral equipment / USE:
business and scientific data
processing applications I
$150,000 to $2,500,000 / CIO
f
8/66
DIRECTORIES
21:020.006
lIonE'vwell lnc"
Industrial Div .•
100 Virginia Drive, Fort WashIngton, Po. 19034 / H20 digital
control system I OESeR: low
cost, real-time system with
IS-bit word: 1.75 usee. cycle
time: parallel I/O channels:
16 priority hardware interrupts:
memory protect; parity checking
/ USE: on line industrial control, laboratory data acquisition
of 1'-1 ine scient Uie computations
/ $21,000 to $200,000 / CIO
Information Processing Systems,
I
Inc., 200 W. 57th St •• New York.
Y. 10019 ! sale of used computer systems / DESCR: brokerage
~.
of used computer systems for
organizat ions having purchased
equipment and now upgrading to
newer machines I - / - I CIO
Litton Industries, Data Systems
Div., 8000 Woodley Ave.
I
Van
Nuys. Calif. 91406 I microelectronic general purpose computer
I DESCR: family of micromodular,
high speed, mi 1 it arized, off the
shelf gpneral purpose machines:
multiprogramming and multiprocessing: user options I USE:
general purpose computer applications / $100,000 up / CIO
Monroe Computer Systems Division,
550 Central Ave., Orange, N. J.
/ Monrobot XI / DESCR: desksize general purpose electronic
computer: 2000 word drum memory
(optional high capacity storage
system provided by magnetic
Monro-Card): needs no airconditioning or special installation I USE: general business
account ing: packaged programs
for commercial' and engineering
applications: educational tool
in secondary schools and colleges / $24,500 basic operating
system / CIO
The National Cash Register Co. 1
Main & K Sts., Dayton, Ohio
45409 / ~CR 315 RMC computer /
DESCR: first commercially
available computer to employ all
thin film memory; new high speed
peripheral units plus floating
point logiC have been added /
USE: for random, sequential,
real-time or remote inquiry
processing / $300,000 up / CIO
The ~at ional Cash Register Co.,
!CIa I NCR 500 computer / OESCR:
ability to communicate in one
or a combination of five data
processing languagesj offers
over 20 different types of
supporting units / USE: variety
of applications, including payroll accounting, bill and charge.
sales and inventory analysis /
$25,000 to $30,000 / CIO
Sorthrop Corp., Nortronies Div.,
2301 W., l20th St., Hawt~orne.
Calif. / ~OC 1050-A militarized
ai rborne digi tal computer /
OESCR: 2048 20-bit word memory,
add time 89.5 microseconds, multo
time 835 microseconds, conductively cooled. designed to meet
MIL-E-5400 (G) environment / USE:
aircraft navigation I CIO
:'ms:
design, development, product ion of checkout s,'stems
I'SE: idt'nticnl s\'stf'ms chrck
various subsystems at production Siff'S nnli aftt't' aSSE'mbled togf'ther on launch. pad
variE's
C12
Digital Equipmf'lIt Corp., 1-16
Main St .• Maynnrd. Mass. 01754
. memor\' If'st s\'stf'ms 'OESeR:
single
to automat ic
core
testers: memory E'xerciset's to
plane testf"l'S 'for coincidt'nt
curnnf rnrmorips or \\'ord
address memories: other special
purpose systems' {"51:::
testing magnetic memory cores,
planes, stocks for tab evaluations and production linf"
appl icat ions 'dt>P('tHis on
svstem ' C12
Exact EIec1 ronics Inc., .J5:i S.E.
2nd Ave" !fillsboro, Ore.
qil23
wa\,pform generators
OESCR: electrollic instruments
of vacuum tubE' or solid-state
design, producing n variety of
standard anct complex low freQuency waveforms
rSE: as
operat ional and measuring
devices in military. industrial and medical application
, $400 to S3000 / C12
General Instrument Corp., Radio
Receptor Div., 100 Andrews
Rd .• Hicksville, :'\. Y. 11802
I custom designed general
support equipment / DESCR:
automated test equipment
ut1112:1ng qeneral purpose or
spe~ial purpose computer and
data gathering devices.
Hardware and/or software
designed to customer specificat ions ! - I C12
Hickok Electrical Instrument
Co., 10514 Dupont Ave.,
Cleveland, Ohio 44106 "
DMS-3200 digital measuring
system' DESCR: digital
display of electrical parameters as determined by oluain selection -- DC voltagE', lmc,
countpr. ohmmeter, capacity
metPr I [,SE: circuit tpsting
of potentials. components, and
timing circuits: 5400 to 5520
i C12
Honevwell, Inc .• Electronic Data
Processing Div., 60 Walnut St .•
Wellesley Hills. Mass. 02161 I
memorY tester' DESCR: automatic" testing of computpr memories, as planes 01' stacks /
t:SE: quality assurance testing
, S80,OOO to S100,OOO ! C12
George Kelk Ltd. -- see Cll
TRW Svstems Group, 1 Space Park,
Redondo Beach, Ca I if. 90276 /
computer test equipment /
DESCR: pres en t equ i pment
available for standard line
computers: capabi 1 it ies for
building test equipment for all
computer sys terns
- I
/
C12
W~'le Labs -- seE' CIO
\
("
C13.
CO~'P[TER COMPO~E~TS
(SEE
ALSO SPECIfiC TYPES)
Astrodata, Inc.
The Bunker-Ramo Corp., 277 Park
Ave" ~ew York, ~, y, 10017 I
thin-film circuits / OESeR:
irltegrated: packaged to customer's specs. by a proprietary
process / USE: military: aerospace: commercial products I on
application / C13
Cambridge Thermionic Corp., 445
Concord Ave., Cambridge, Mass.
02138 " digital logiC modules /
DESCR: 100 KC germanium lines
and 2MC silicon line, both have
same pin configuration. A IOMC
integrated circuit logic module
line also available I USE:
industrial, commercial and
military applicati ons / $2.50
to $40.00 I C13
COllCOR, Inc.
Computer Cant 1'01 Co .• Inc" Old
Connecticut Path. Framingham,
Mass. / computers, components
DESCR: wide variety digital
circuit modules, magnetic core
memories. magnetic and difJital
test instruments ;' - ,I - / Cl3
Consolidated Electrodynamics Corp.,
360 Sierra Madre Villa, Pasadena, Calif. (H109 / analog computer function modules I DESCR:
encapsulated modules / USE:
computers constructed from these
modules solve arithmetic and
algeIJratc problems, control
and simulate processes, and perform manv other funct ions I - /
C 13
.
Control (.og)c. Jnc. -- see C6 and
CIO
'A\ Controls. Inc., ().14 J)orchestf'r Avp., Boston, Mass.
!12125 / aerospac:p systems .'
DESCR: aerospace qualified
digital magnetic control systems
include: memories. clocks.
timers, vplocitv meter counters.
intervalomf"ters', logic modules.
Iplemetrr counters.' [SE: data
storagp and control ahoard
satf'llilf's and space vehicles'
S1000 - 520,000 ' C13
General Electric Co .• Electronic
Components Sales Operat ion
General Instrument Corp .• Radio
Receptor Div. -- Sf>e S9
Honevwell, Inc .• Electronic Data
ProcE'ssing Div. -- see P9,
PI;'}, R9, 55, Tl
Internat ional Diode Corp., 90
Forrest St., Jersey Cit)" \'. J.
07304 ! alloy junction switching
diodes . DESCR: hermet i ca 11 y
sealed glass package 007 and
smaller: super-speed switching
combined with high forward
current I USE: digital computers, voltmeters, coupling
with tunnel diodes in coincidence circuits / $.45 to 52.65
I C13
International Rectifier, 233
Kansas S1., EI Segundo. Calif.
90246 / silicon controlled
rectifiers / DESCR: 3 terminal,
4-layer solid-state devices for
control amplification of a-c
power or a-c to d-c conversion I
USE: controlling firing point
on'a-c phase cycle I $1.50 to
$500 I C13
International Resistance Co., Inc.
(IRC) , 401 N. Broad SI., Philadelphia. Pa. 19108 / computer
components /DESCR: reSistors,
precision potentiometer and
trimmers, zener diodes / - / I C13
'
Litton Industries. Data Systems
Div., 6000 Woodley Ave .• Van
Suys, Calif. 91406 / display I
DESCR: modular display consoles
with microminiatured electronics
for ultra reUability: militarized; user opt ions! USE: computE'r output display I 57,;,000
up ! C13
Litton Industries. Data Systems
Div., .... a / microelectronic
power supply / DESCR: various
vol tage and power ratings;
militarized off the shelf ultra
high reliability / llSE: avionic: computers and related
input/output equipment / $1000
to S1500 ' C13
Litton Industries, Triad Distributor Div. -- see Tl4
Litton Industries, WinchE'ster
Electronics Div.
Lockheed Electronics Co., 6201
E. Randolph St., Los Angeles,
Calif. I position transducer /
DESCR: standard units measure
displacement from 1" to 150";
designed around an infinite
resolution potentiometer which
is actuated through a precision
spring motor / t:SE: measurement of position or displacement I $200 to $350 I C13
Lockheed Electronics Co. -- see
C5
Motorola Semiconductor Products,
Inc" 5005 E. McDowell Rd.,
Phoen ix, Ari z. 85008 I computer components / DESCR:
semiconductor devices: germanium and silicon transistors; silicon rectifiers and
diodes: thyristors: rectifier
assemblies: integrated circuits I t.:SE: electronic circuits .I 20 ¢ to $75 / C13
Nexus Research Laboratory, Inc.
PAKTRON Div. Illinois Tool \lJorks
Inc., 1321 Leslie Ave .•
Alexandria. Va. 22301 / capacitors I DESCR: MYLAR, po1ycarbonate, metalized mylar,
miniature capacitors / t:SE:
circuit component I variable /
C13
[)1
Rot Ton Mfg. Co .• J I1C., Hashrouck
LanE', Woodstock, \. y, 12·1()f) ,
cooling devicE'S and air sourcE'S
/ DESCR: cool illg devic('s and
high pressurC'lvacuum ai r sources
specifically dt'signt'ct for the
computer inrlustry 'I:SE: cooling electronic circuits llnd
provide air sourcf'S for tape
control, fluidic power supplies,
tare air bporings, etc. '53.9;')
to 5185 " C13
SagE" ~:Iec[fonics Corp., ReX' 3926,
Hochester, ~. Y. 1·1610 ' Rl"sistors I DESCR: miniature precision wirewound J'lolover resistors
I - , - .' C13
Scientific Data Systems, Inc.,
J649 Seventeenth St., Santa
Monica, Calif, ()0404 ! computE'r components
DESCR:
complete range of peripheral
devices. memories. analog ;digital instrumentation I 1'5E:
digital clJmputer systems
C13
Scientific Data Systems, Inc .•
*a / multiplexers. analog I
DESCR: models with from 2 to
256 channels.' liSE: to swi tch
a number of analog inputs into
a single output, qenerally under
digital control / $400 to $4000
I C13
Lear Siegler. Inc., Power Equipment Div., P. O. Box 6719.
Cleveland, Ohio 44101 / clutch
and/or brake / DESCR: stationary coil magnetic particle
module. Can be used as ei ther
a clutch or brake. MOdels with
torque range up to 60 lb. in.
Time to reach rated torque as
low as 2 milliseconds. Smooth.
noise-free engagement. Maintenance-free, long-life with
consistant performance independent of normal environmental
range / USE: clutch or brake
mounted directly on actuated
shaft / $40 to $70 I C13
Socie'te d'Electronique & O'Automatisme
Westinghouse Electric Corp .•
Electronic & Specialty Products
Group
Wyle Labs -- see C5
C14.
COMPUTl~G
SERVICES
Automated Data Processing Services, Inc.
Booz, Allen Applied Research,
Inc •• 135 S. LaSalle St.,
Chicago, Ill. / scientific and
technical services / DESCR:
computer and hardware systems
design. installation management, computer feasibi 1 i ty,
appl ications, systems analys is,
software deSign, information
retrieval systems. scientific
computation I - I - / C14
The Bunker-Ramo Corp., 277 Park
Ave., New York. N. Y. 10017 I
TeleCenter services / DESCR:
on-line, off-line data processing: processor, data storage, communications, inputl
output equipment on customer's
premises tailored to his requirements / L'SE: storage,
updating, rE'trieval of any data
subject to continuous change and
frequent inquiry / $100 per mo.
to'$35,OOO per mo. I C14
Computer Advisors to Management
(CAM), Div. of Statist.ical
Tabulating Corp., 104 S,
Michigan Ave., Chicago, Ill.
60603 ! Professional counsel ing
in economic evaluation and
application of data-processing
and computer syst.ems / DESCR:
provides full line of advisory
services from feasibility
studies to systems design,
equipment selection and personnel indoctrination / - I C14
Computer Applications Inc., 555
Madison Ave .• New York, N. Y.
10022 / computer servi ces, consulting /oESCR: programming
systems. data processing applications, scientific and enginef'ring applications, systems
engineering, real-time applicat j ons. proJ ect management,
data proceSSing service centers
I VSE: business. institutional,
government, military / - I C14
Computer Associates, Inc.
AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
Computpr Fulfjllmpnr, 22.i rss i n{1
sE'rvices: "\ationwide chain of
data centers; compulPrs ranging
from small digital systpms 10
l:nge-scale systE'ms: dataphollf'
and remof e servi ct's'
011
request ! Cl4
Control TE'chnology, Inc .. 12:\2
Belmont Ave .• Long Beach,
Ca Ii f. 908(}4 'comput i Ilg
services! DESCR: digilal,
analog and h}'brid: software.
machine rental; simulat ion
studies,' - .' - ' C14
Cybertype Corp. -- see Cl;;
DA-PEX Company -- spe ('R
Data-Mat, Div. of Statistical
Tabulating Corp., 20·1 S. \lichigan Ave .• Chicago. Ill. 60t)(}3 '
eight data-processing and computer service centers' OESCR:
"come- i n-and-do-i t -yourse 1{"
service: customer sE'Iects PQuipment and operates it himself'
hourly rates or on contract
basi s 'CI'"
Decision Svstems ]nc.
Design Automation, Inc .• .t Tyler
Rd., Lexington, Mass. 02173 !
computer analysis of electronir:
circuit performance / OESeR:
computer calculatjon of nOIllinear DC, nonlinear transient
and 1 inear sinusoidal frequency
response of any electronic circuit. wHh any parts values,
and any signals applied
t:SE:
dpsign re-view analysis I 51;')0
and up .' Cl4
Informat ics. Inc., 5430 Van :'Iiuys
Blvd., Sherman Oales, Calif,
91401 I computing servicE'S /
DESCR: specializing in the
des ign, analys is, programming
and implementation of computerbased systems I USE: government and industry ,I - / Cl4
Information International Inc.,
200 Sixth St., Cambridge, Mass.
02]42 / automatic film readinq
service I DESCR: accept customer
film for reading; magnetic tape
output. Will develop program
if required; system rental available (special rates for universities) / USE: service center
for automatic film reading /
$200/hour, rental I C14
ITT Data Services, a division of
International Telephone and
Tf:'legraph Corp., P. O. Box 402,
Paramus, N. J. / data processing
services / DESCR: full range of
scientific and commercial data
processing serv,ices, including
programming, computational
services and data center managpment / - .' Cl4
Kflystone Computer Associates,
Inc. -- see r12
Litton Systems. Inc., MelIonlcs
Systems Oevelopment Div .•
1001 I\'. Maude Ave .• Sunnyvale.
Cal if, q IOB6 ,I system des i9n
tools 'DESCR: general-purpose
digital computer programs used
to simulate and evaluate complex satellite, command anri
control, transportation. information management and industrial rrocpss control
systems / VSE: optimization
of system design prior to
procurement I $5000 to $.;O,ono
I C14
Management Systems Corp., 209
Griffin St.. Dallas, TE'x.
75202 / comput i ng serv i cps
DESCR: f lIrn-I(I~,v comrlll i 11\1
I
a/66
DIRECTORIES
21:020.008
from prohlem dpfinition to
systE'm and report de-sign and
prE-parat ion; faci lit ies for
01 ient programming, test ing
and PfocPssing on hourly
computer usage " - I - / Cl4
McDonnell Automation Center.
"ox 516. St. Louis, Mo. 63166
/ computing services / DESCR:
over $25 mi 11 ion worth of data
processing and computin\l equipment allows E"fficient handling
of onE' time or continuous large
or small jobs / - / - / C14
Monroe Data Processing Inc .• 550
Cf'ntral Ave .• Orange. N. J. /
data processing computing
service ,I DESCR: process all
paperwork for business accounting: comparative analyses for
management; 'also, DATATAX. a
computerized income tax service; raw or codf'd information
processed and fe-turned within
a wE'ek / USE: accoun tants. or
firms who have a staff accountant: management / variable 1
CI4
Nat ionsl Computer Analysts, U. S.
Highway 1, Lynwood Drive,
Princeton, N. J. 08540/ computing servir.es / DESCR;
processing of clients data
for banks; book composition of
directories and dictionaries:'
payroll; hospital packages / / - / CI4
National Physical Laboratory,
Mathematics Div., Teddington,
Middx, England / digital computing service / DESCR:
specialists in numerical
analysis, including problems
in applied mathematics and
theoretical physics; data
processing / - / - / CI4
Philbrick Researches, Inc., 34
Allied Drive at Route 128,
Dedham, Mass. 02026 / computing services / DESCR:
large scale, high-speed repetitive analog computer with
experienced operator / USE:
available by the hour / $25
to $50 per hour / CI4
Programming & Systems, Inc.,
33 W. 42nd St .• New York.
~om~ut~~O;~rtiggn,uJ~~a~: and
specializing in total applications from daily invoicing
on / USE: all areas involved
in ED? / - / CI4
Randolph ComputeI' Corp., 200
Park Ave .• New York, N. Y.
10017 / short term leaSing of
IBM's System/360 equipment I
DESCR: acquiring and leasing
EDP equipment; I'ental charges
lowel' than manufacturer:
initial terms usually fall
between 2 to 4 years; service
on equipment perfonned ,by manufacturer; no charge for over..;
time usage / USE: alternative
to user purchasing his equipment or renting directly from
IBM I rental reduction 10%-15%
and in many cases higher I Cl4
Reeves Instrument Co., 100 East
Gate Blvd., Garden City, N. Y.
11532 I computaU on center /
DESCR: complete hybrid facility for scientific computation
/ USE: for product analysis
and systems simulation int£"rfaced with a digital computer
I depends on application / Cl4
Reeves Instrument Co. -- see C9
The Service Bureau Corp.
Statistical Tabulating Corp.,
104 S. Michigan Ave .• Chicago,
Ill. 60603 / independent dataprocessing and computer service
with nine centers located in
principal cities / DESCR:
JBM 1400 series card and tape;
Systems/360 and Honeywell H200
tape: peripheral equipment.
All phases of management control
and reporting for industry,
business. science and government / - / CI4
Task Force, Div. of Statistical
Tabulating Corp., 104 S.
Michigan Ave., Chicago. Ill.
60603 / temporary personnel
service: (nineteen offices in
principal cities) / DESCR:
offers specialized dataprocessing and computer personnel for temporary service -key-punch, computer and dataprocessing operators: programmers; methods engineers;
systems analyst,S and mathe-
8/66
maticians / - I Cl4
Telecomputations, Inc.
Merle Thomas Corp. -- set> Cl5
U. S. Navy Marine Engineering
Lab., Computer Div .• Annapolis.
Md. 21402 / computing sel'Vic£"s
/ DESCR: Equipment: JRM
360/G40; computt>r-orientpd
mathemat ical systems studies
related to the developml'nt of
advanced naval shipboard machinery. consultation, programming
and data processing services I
- / - / CI4
URS Corp .• 1811 Trousdale Drtve,
Burlingame, Calif. 94011 /
computing services / DESCR:
any system or application involving uti lization and programming of e-Iectronic digital
computer systems / - 1 - I C14
Westinghouse Electric Corp .•
Advanced Data Systems
Wolf Research & Development Corp.,
P. O. Box 36, Raker Avp., West
Concord, Mass. 91781 1 computing services / DESCR: digital computer operations, business and scientific programming.
engineering analysis: applications in data reduction, data
storage, rE"trieval, computer
displays. computer communi cations: in-house H-200, CnC-G150. Whirlwind I / - / - / CI4
C15.
Computer Associates, Inc.
Computer Ful fi llment -- see Cl4
Computer ,Sciences Corp.
Control Data Corp., Control
Systems Div., 4455 Miramar Rd.,
La Jolla, Calif: 92037 I consulting'services / OESCR:
electronic data processJng and
systems design consulting
services of all kinds / - I
request / Cl5
Control Technology, Inc .• 1232
Belmont Ave .• Long Reach.
Calif. 90804 / consulting
services / OESCR: on-line
control systems: hybrid simulation; digital computer softwar. / - / $10 per hr. to $30
per hr. / CI5
Cybertype Corp .• 80 Fifth Ave .•
New Ynrk. N: Y. lOOll / consultants and engineers / DESCR:
supplying computer systems,
applications, programs and
data processing / - / - / CIS
DA-PEX Company -- see C6
Data Systems Anal ysts, Inc.
Design Automation, Inc .• 4 Tyler
Rd .• Lexington, Mass. 02173 /
electronics consulting 1 DESCR:
design review of electronic
equipment and circuits; consulting on design of electronic
circuits and equipment 1 USE:
to assure design will meet
requirements / $15/hr. to $30/
hr. / CI5
Ebasco Services. Inc .• 2 Rector
St., New York, N. Y. 10006 /
consulting and engineering
services / DESCR: systems
analysis and design; commercial,
scientific, engineering, EDP
applications; data communications; feasability studies;
plant automation: data processing Bnd computing services / / - / CI5
Electronic Administrative Services,
Inc.
Electronic M8nagem~nt, Computerology Corp. (fMC). 6900
Wisconsin Ave., Washington.
D. C. 20015 / military and
civilian command and control
OESCR: long range planning and
prediction of functionally encompassing systems / USE:
decision making for implementati on and systems des igns 1 - I'
CI5
Entelek, Inc. -- see E2
Floating Floors, Inc., (subsidiary
of National Lead Co.) -- see F2
H. J. Gruy & Associates, Inc.,
2501 Cedar Springs Rd., Dallas.
Tex. 75201 / petroleum engineering consulting I DESCR:
methematical reservoir model
simulat ion and computer appJ ication to all types of petroleum
engineering problems, including
geophysical mapping wi th X-V
plotter / USE: petroleum exploration, development, refining,
producing / CI5
HRB-Singer. Inc. -- see Jl
Informatics, Inc., 5430 Van Nuys
Blvd., Sherman Oaks, Calif.
91401 I consulting services /
DESCR: specialists in design,
analysis, documentation and
implementation of: System 360.
on-line systems. message switching. PERT. PL/t. file management,
cOUllland/control. synthetic intelligence / - / - / CI5
Information International Inc. -see P12
Information Processing Systems,
Inc .• 200 W. 57th St .. New
York. N. Y. 10019 / eon.ulting
services I DESCR: purchases and
sales of computer systems: appraisals of value of: systems
owned by user. I - -! - / CI5
Infotran. mc., 860 Fifth Ave.,
New York; N. Y. 10021 / eon.ulting .ervlces / DESCR:
special purpose eomputers, data
communications, control systems:
planning, design and development
of total information systems;
new product development: educational services / - / - / CI5
Innovation Consultants. Inc.,
4 E. State St., Doylestown. Pa,
18901 / management consulting
/ DESCR: assistance in planning
enlal'iJed or new computeT applicationl; cost effectheneu
studies on alternatives: network
sehedull ng / - / per diem / CI5
Jonker Corp. --..see 03. PI3
CONSULTING SERVICES
Advance Data Systems. 9261 W.
Third St .• Beverly Hills.
Calif. 90213 1 revenue control
systems 1 DESCR: computer
based systems for automatic
collection of money and tickets
involving computers, ticket
readers, gates. tare vendors,
money handling eqUipment / USE:
automatic revenue collection in
public traniportation. di!tributlon and entertainment fields,
/ varies / CI5
Applied Data Research. Inc ••
Route 206 Center. Princeton,
N. J. 08540 1 management information controls / DESCH: evaluation of data processing system
needs and equipment selection:
review evaluation of existing
installations I USE: computer
users / - / CI5
Auerbach Corp., 121 N. Broad St.,
Philadelphia. Pa. 19107 / ED?
consulting services / DESCR:
design. implementati on of integrated data processing systems:
computer system effectivenel5
evaluation: reliability studies:
installation evaluation. recommendation: feasibility studies;
programming; scientific, technical information studies /
USE: management / - / CI5
Booz, Allen Applied Research, Inc.
-- see C14
'
Booz, Allen & Hamil ton, Inc .•
135 S. LaSalle St .. Chicago.
Ill. I management consulting /
DESCR: feaslbllity studies.
system design, equipment selection, implementation, systems
conversion. EDP audi t and
review / USE: industry; commerce; banking: government:
institutions / - / CI5
Brandon Applied Systems, Inc.,
30 E. 42nd St.. 10017 / consulting services I DESCR:
complete range of consul ti ng
services in data processing,
including systems design, 0.1'.
audits of installations. computer selection, feasibility
analysis and implementation
guidance / USE: by organizations desiring temporary
highly experienced technical
assistance / $80 to $275 per
day / CI5
Celestron Associates, Inc., A
Broadway, Valhalla, N. Y.
10595 / EDP software selentHI.
& business / DESCH: consulting;
programming/analysis services;
software: applications; design
automation: automatic program
translation . Ca 1if.
90250 .' C750 t ape to card converter .' OESeR: converts 5, 6,
7, or 8-channel punched tape to
IBM cards; 20 chars/sec; attaches
to IBM 2~ card punch / ('SE:
tape to card conversion I 53750
($140/mo.1 to $4000 ($149 I mo.1
! C30
Magnet ics Inc., But ler, Pa. 16001
,I 412-20:-'-4711 ! ferrite cores /
DESCR: ff"rrit e pot cores,
toroids, E's, 1'5, V's. Initial
permeabi lit ies from 100 to 2000
for operat ion up to 20mc / liSE:
inductors, pul se transformers,
magnetiC amplifiers .I $.05 to
$5.00
C34.
C31.
CONVERTERS. INFORMATION.
PAPER TAI'E TO MAGNETIC TAPE
Ampex Corp •• Computer Products
Div" qQ37 W. Jefferson Blvd"
Culver City, Cillif. 90230 .'
~'odel I'TS-iooo SystE'm .' OESeR:
conVf'rts data at half the cost
of previous methods: reads 1000
char.'sec from paper tape; orpral es completely off-l jne I
approximately 526.800 (may be
purchased or leased I C31
Control Equipment Corp. -- see C21
Cook Electric Co •• Data Stor Div.
-- see C21
Marksmen, Inc. -- see C29
Tally Corp. -- see C21
Trak Electronics Co., Inc.
see Cl9
C32.
CORES
Ferroxcube Corp •• Saugerties, ~. Y.
12477 .' cores, planes and stacks
./ DESCR: cores in all sizes from
80 mils to 20 mils: wide variety
of plane and stack arrays incI uding coincident current, word
select and special/USE: data
storage for digi tal data process
systems .I custom design / C32
Haddonfield Research & Mig. Co.,
121 GIll Rd., Haddonfield. ~. J.
08033 / cores / DESCR:
80, 50,
30, and 20 mil ferrite cores
produced under controlled conditions to produce optimum parts
for system application. Available in various configurations
I
L'SE: memory planes and logic
applications / $5 'M to $75 /M /
C32
Magnetics Inc., Rutler, Pa. 16001
I
412-285-4711 l powder cores /
DESCR: moly-permalloy powder
cores manufactured in toroidal
shapes ranging from.25" to
2.25" in diameter, available in
permeabilities from 14 to 550 /
l'SE: inductors requiring high
Q and good temperature stability
over wide temperature range /
$ .25 to S8 ,I C32
C33.
CORES, fERRITE
!
C33
CORES. MAGNET! C
Ampex Corp •• Computer Products
Div. -- see C33
Computer Control Co., Inc., Old
Connect ieut Path, Framingham,
Mas s. / cores, magneti c / OESCR:
TCM32. 5 usec, front access, 128
to 4096 word capact ty, B to 48
bits: TCM35 , silicon, 1.4 to 2
usec (coincident current, general purpose); ICM40, monolithic
integrated circuitry, 1 usec full
eyc I e / - / - .' C34
ferroxcube Corp. -- see C32
Haddonfield Research & Mfg. Co.
-- see C32
Lockheed Electronics Co, -- see
C33
Magnetics Inc., Butler, Pa. 16001
/ 412-265-4711 .I tape wound cores
I DESCR: strip wound toroidal
cores made wi th high permeabi 1 i ty
nickle-iron alloys .014" to
.000125" thickness I USE: transformers, magnetic ampl i fiers,
inductors, memory elements /
$.50 to $20 / C34
C35.
COONTERS
Veeder-Root I 70 Sargeant St.,
Hartford, Conn. 06102 I series
1770 electric counter / OESeR:
miniature, rear or panel
mounting, low power requirements,
high count speed (1000 cpm).
reset or non-reset models / USE:
count accumulation in data processing equipment / $8.61 to
$20.70 / C35
Veeder-Root, . . a I series 1951 high
speed electric counter / DESCR:
high speed (ac or dc, 3000 cpm),
compact, long service life (100
million counts). Reset options:
pushbutton, electrical, electrical/mcnual, non-reset / USE:
high speed count accumulation in
data processing systems I $22.19
to $51. 70 / C35
Veeder-Root, .... a I series 1969
Veeder DECADE / DESCR: electromagnetic single wheel counting
device with electric reset,
readout and transfer / USE:
high speed count accumulation.
storage and transfer in data
processing systems / $13 to
$22.25 / C 35
Ampex Corp., Computer Products
Div •• 9937 W. Jefferson Blvd.,
Culver City, Calif. 90230 I
ferrite cores,' DESCR: ferromagnetic memory cores I USE:
computer memories and memory
stacks / - I C33
Burroughs Corp., Electronic Components Div., P. O. Box 1226,
Plainfield, ~. J. 07061 /
Ferri te cores, planes and
stacks I DESCR: ferrite cores
-- 20, 30, 50 and 80 mil. diameters, wide temperature and
standard. Stacks and planes
assembled to speci fi cat i on /
[SE: as main memory in data
processing equipment / - ./ C33
Electronic Memorifls, Inc., 12621
Chadron Ave., Hawthorne. Calif.
90250 ' ferrite cores.' DESCR:
coincident currenhnword select,
lithium, Isodrive
cores and
Shmoo transfluxors in 20, 3D,
50, 80, 100, 140 mi 1 sizes ,.'
[SE: commercial and military
memory stacks and arrays .' - I
C33
ferroxcube Corp. -- see C32
Haddonfield Research & Mfg. Co.
-- see C32
Lockheed Electronics Co., 6201 E.
Randolph St., Los Angeles, Calif.
I computer ferrite memory products " DESCR: core to stacks and
complete memory systems: highspeed (less than one usec cycle
time) systems: integrated c1 rcui t systems I rSE: randomaccess digital data storage for
data processing systems, both
commercial and military applications ,I dependent on customer's
requi rement s :' C33
C36.
COUNTERS. ELECTRONIC
Burroughs Corp., Electronic Components Div., P. O. Box 1226,
Plainfield, N. J. 07061 / uniand bi-directional counterS i
DESCR: ten posl!ion ring counters wi th NIXIE tube readout,
10 electrical outputs and counters are presettable and resettable / USE: as visual indication of an accumulated count i
S70
!
C36
Components Corp. I 106 Main St.,
Denville. N. J. 07834 / OCU-IOO
solid state decade counter i
DESCR: counter wi th inexpensive
D'Arsonval readout; counts at
rates up to 200 kc.; power requirements approximately 6V at
10 milliamps per decade -- none
for readout / - / $50 (quant i ty
discounts available) / C36
Electron Ohio, Inc., 1278 W. 9th
Sf., Cleveland, Ohio 44113 /
counters, mechanical and electronic .' DESCR: rf"sct, predetermining, length measuring:
high speed electro-mechanical .I
USE: record motion, impulses,
length I SIO t.o 550 " C36
Engineered Electronics Co. -- see
Co
General Atronics Corp. -- see Cl
General EI!!ctric Co., Electronic
Componf!nts Sales Opera I jon
General Precision, Inc .• Kearfott
Products Div., llSa McRrirle Ave.,
~~~~i~ Wl~70NB7~3 ~::~:s '/
DESCR:
digit.al eler.lroluminescent
solid state indicnfor modll)ps:
numeric and alpha-numeric rf"adouts. Multi-digit displays use
mul t iplexf'd logic input. Accepts
BCD data direct ly from computer
I USE: matched computer digital
interface for mapping, cockpit,
01' plotting board displays.
remote readouts .I - ,.' C36
General Radio Co., 22 Baker Ave ••
W. Concord, Mass. 01781 I
electronic counters.' DESGR:
cumulative count, frequency,
period, or ratio measurements
can be made from dc 10 rad i 0
frequencies / - I $995 to $314:1
/ C36
Janus Control Corp., 296 Newton
St., Waltham, Mass. 02154 I
electronic decade and instrument
counters and counter-related
products: ntlmerical displays with
and without latching.' OESeR:
high-speed, low-cost, integrated
circuit and discrete component
counters avai lable as modules
and complete functional instruments / USE: industrial and
military applications .I $40 to
$2000 / C36
Texas Instruments, Inc., SemiConductor-Components Div., P. O.
Box 5012, Dallas, Tex. 7.=)222 ,I
series 51/51R counters I DESCR:
RefL digi tal semiconductor networks featuring low power drain
(2mW at 3V), 300 ns propagation
delay, and fanout from 4 to 20:
operating at temperatures from
_55 0 to +125 0 C. / USE: missile
and space appl i cat ions where
size weight and reliabi li ty are
critical/ $28 to $36 / C36
Wang Laboratories, Inc .• 836 North
St., Tewksbury, Mass. 01876 /
transistorized electronic counters / DESCR: universal. preset, and bidirectional: measure
speed. frequency. ratio, draw,
period, time interval, batch control, machine tool posit ion, etc.
I USE: tailored to requirements
for i ndust ri a 1 appli cat ions I
$750 to $2000 / C36
Wang Laboratories, Inc. -- see 06
Wyle Labs. -- see C5
Dl
DATA PROCESSING ACCESSORY
EQUIPIIENT
Tile Bunker-Ramo Corp., 277 Park
Ave., New York. N.r. 10017
bank teller machine, Teleregister ltark I I DESCR: direct-connected to any modern computer; transaction processed and
recorded by central processor;
records continually updated and
instantly retrievable; on-l ine
operation / USE: banks; sa\'inus, mortgage and loan transactions / $0200 plus,' 01
The Bunker-Ramo Corp., ·a I BR-qO
visual analysis console I DESCR:
displays visual data on CRT
screen: compu tel' i npu t; operator input from keyboard, from
light pencil; projected image
from rear port i 1\ CRT / USE:
superimpose and update digi tal
data on maps and chart s '
$100,000 plus / 01
The Bunker-Ramo Corp. -- see C7
CAE Industries Ltd. -- see C7
Collifornia Computer PrOducts, Inc.,
305 N. Muller St., Anaheim,
Calif. 92603 I digital plotters
I DESCR: 0 basic models for
computer controlled preparation
of qua 1 i ty i nk-on-pa per graph i c
presentationsi suitable for online or off-line operation .'
USE: to present digital computer output in pictOrial or
graphic form! $5000 to $50,000
/01
California Computer PrOducts, Inc ..
·a / digi tal plotting systems /
DESCR: off-line digi tal plotting capability and can drive
both 500 and 700 series plotters / USE: for low-speed
reading of standard format tape
to operate ,the digi tal plotters
/ $15.000 to $35.000 1 D1
Camwil, Inc., 11621 Pico Blvd.,
Los Angeles, Cali f. 90064 /
special type Ileads for IBM
selectric mechanisms;' DESCR:
computer and teletype codes;
foreign languages; mathematical,
chemical and electronic symbols.
Type heads prepared to su it
customer requirements .I IlSE:
in all equipment which incorporates the IBM selectric typing
mechani sm / $35 to $3000 ! 01
C37.
COUNTERS. MECHANICAL
Electron Ohio, Inc. -- see C36
West Eleven, Inc •• 11836 San
Vecente Blvd., Los Angeles,
Calif. 90049 / SARCEM. elapsed
time indicator / DESCR: small,
low-cost in-line electrical
time; continuous eIapsed/inoperation time check of any 100
volt 50-60 cycle equipment / / $5 to $7.50 / C37
Whittaker Corp., Technical Products
Div., 9601 Canoga Ave.,
Chatsworth. Cal if. 91311 /
electromechanical counter /
OESCR: hi-directional and
accurately record 15,000 counts
per minute. Visual or switch
readout available with either
mechanical or electrical reset
/ - / - / C37
C38.
COURSES AY MAIL (COMP(J[ER
fIELD)
Bonner & Moore Associates, Inc.
-- see 11, Pl2
Entelek, Inc., 42 Pleasant St.,
Newburyport. Mass. 019:10 / programmed instruct ion / DESCR:
4 programmed instruction courses
in computer-based planning (PERT),
i nven tory cont ro I and forecast i ng
/ - / $27.50 to $47.00 / C38
Entelek, Inc. -- see E2
Inst itute for Comput ing Sciences
-- see E2
International Accountants Society.
Inc., Business Electronics Div.,
209 W. Jackson Alvd., Chicago,
Ill. 60606 / home study cours~s
on programming business computers
I DESCR: stuny of computer programming with particular attention to business applicat.ion !
USE: by individuals and companies in training computer programming personnp.l .' $285 OQ"{,
discount allowed companies fln-,
rolling 5 or more at. one time)
Cohu Electronics, Inc., Box 623,
San Diego, Calif. 92112 / 490
series digital coupler / DESCR:
recording device for use wi th
DVM/ratiometer. Actuates adding machine to record completed
voltmeter readings; operates
most lO-key office adding machines to produce permanent
printed record of vol tmeter
readings / USE: on the production line, in the repair shop,
genera 1 laborn tor y and i ndu 5trial data logging / $795 / 01
Cohu Electronics, Inc., *a / 510
series DVM/ratiometer / DESCR:
4-digit, lightweight unit, 1
control for range and function;
bidirectional tracking 109ici
high input resistance i USE:
reads voltages or ratios: laboratory, bench or assembly 1 ine
/ $995 to $1385 / 01
Control Data Corp. -- see 04
Cook Electric Co., Data Stor Div ••
6401 W. Oakton, Morton Grove,
II I. 60053 / recorder / DESCR:
data processing accessory equipment and data recording equipment / USE: data systems /
$4000 to $20.000 / Dl
D4.-PEX Company -- see CU
Data Trends, Inc.
Digi tal Devices -- see 05
Digital Electronic Machines, Inc.,
2130 Jefferson, Kansas City,
Mo. 64108 I TPU, tape preparation uni t / DESCR: keyboard
input converted to punched
paper tape and/or printed tape
listing / USE: data gathering
for computer input I $11150 up
/ Dl
Digitronics Corp •• I Albertson Ave.,
Albertson, L.L, N.Y. 11507 I
DATA-VERTER / DESCR: a source
data acquisition and transmission
system I USE: to collcct information for inventory control,
data collection, warehousing,
stocking, etc. / $1495 to $lB75
/ Dl
Digi tronics Corp., *a / paper tape
readers and handlers 'DESCR:
reads and transports all levels
/ C38
AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
8/66
DIRECTORIES
21:020.012
of paper or mylar puncbed tape
/ USE: input to compu'ter or
automated control systems / $295
to $5890 / 01
DlscOD Corp., 4250 NW 10th Ave.,
Fort Lauderdale, Fla. 33309 /
data minimizer I DESeRj data
processing unit approximates
any input function by a series
of linear functions or straight
line segments / USE, pre-processing analog or digital data
to conserve computer time and
storage requirements I $40,000
to $50,000 / 01
Dresser Products, Inc., 1l2-114
Baker St' l Providence, R.I.
02905 / #5UO spUcer / DESCR,
portable splicer, weight 5 Ibs.
Once placed on splicer, tapes
can be joined, looped or re-
paired wi thout being touched
by hand until splice is complete I USE: splicing punched
paper tapes / $148 / 01
Electron Ohio, Inc" 1276 W. 9th
5t .. Cleveland, Ohio 44113 /
magnetic drum / DESCR: medium
speed delays from users to
several hoursj used as program
storage; flux responsive heads
read out at rest; solid state
electronicsj "out-of-contact"
recording / USE: indus trial
con trol purposes; sorti ng.
inspection, control systems I
$1000 to $20,000 / 01
Electron Ohio, Inc. -- see C7
General Devices, Inc., Box 253,
Princeton, N.J. 06540 / "DAN"
data acquisition system I DESCR:
PDf progranrners and mul tiplexing systems; up to 90 channels
into digital words of 10 data
bi ts plus sign, etc. / USE:
time division multiplexes I
$9500 to $14,790 / 01
General Electric Co., Process
Computer Business Section
General Instrument Corp., Defense
& Engineering Prod'ucts Group,
Radi 0 Receptor Di v. t Andrews
Rd., Hicksville, N.Y. 11802/
data processing equipment I
DESCR: data acquisition processing, storage and display;
overall system design and programming for on and off line
computers, sensors and output
devices I USE: var~ety of
information handling systems
in-vol ving analog and digital
processes / various I 01
Allen Hollander Co., Inc.
HGuston Fearless Corp. -- See 12
IRvac Corp., 26 Fox Rd., Bear Hill
Industrial park, Waltham, Mass.
02154 / Model TI'R-200 typewriter
transmi tter/receiver / DESCR:
adapted for use as an I/O device; 15.5 char/secj machine
function plus optional functional switches / USE: entry
and receiving device for data
processing / $1640 uni t price
/ 01
Invac Corp. -- see T9, TIO, T7,
KI
Kyros Corp., P.O. 406, Madison,
Wis. / Kysolve solvents / DESCR:
to "strip" computer tape coatings and to combine visual with
magnetic bi ts on the same tape
/ USE: can be tailored. to
specific· problems / $1.50 per
pt. to $4.50 per gal. / 01
Liskey Aluminum, Inc., Box 580,
Glen Burnie, Md. 21061 / DataAire / DESCH: modular, air
condi tioning, packaged uni tsj
engineering and installation
specialist services provided /
USE: controlling special computer room environmental conditions / - / DI
Liskey Aluminum, Inc •• *8 /
Spacemaker / DESCH: moveable
office parti tions, sound and
dust proof I USE: computer
room and general offices / 01
Missouri Research Laboratories,
Inc., 2109 Locust St., St.
Louis, Mo. 63103 / Model 131
digi tal address selector /
DI!:SCR: selects and decodes
addresses to provide read commands; features thumbwheel
selection of binary or BCD
addresses up to 22 bi ts / USE:
PCM telemetry address Bnd data
pickoff, ground station selection computer testing, selection of discrete data for readout / $1500 / 01
8/66
Missouri Research Labora tories,
Ine., ·a / Mode) 160A. uni.versal
logic translator / DESCR: provides logic level translation
and/or inversion with driven'
outputs available. Capable of
translating. up to 30 channels
and inverting up to 15 channels
; USE: interface for incornpa tible digi tal equipments /
$550 to $1050 / 01
Monarch Metal Products,' Inc.,
MacArthur Ave., New Windsor I
N.Y. 12550 / data processing
ac~essory equipment / DESCR:
items for the filing, sorting,
storage and moving of punched
cerds, control panels, disk
packs and magnetic tape reels;
USE: filing, storage and
transportation of punch cards,
control panels, disk packs and
magnetiC tape reels / - / Dl
Hay Myers Corp., 1302 E. Main St ot
Endicott, N. Y. 13760 / data
processing accessory eqUipment ./
DESCR: mobile and fixed equipment / USE: storage and processing / - I Dl
National Blank Book Co., Water
St., Holyoke, Mass. 01040 I
data binders / DESCR: binders
for housing data processing
forms with unbreakable cable
flexible posts; six styles /
USE, loose leaf binding of
tabulating forms / 50t to $7.50
/ DI
National Blank Book Co., ·a /
perforatot tape r DESCR: paper
tape for connnunicBtions, readers and perforators, data collection, control equipment and
converters; available in 5, 6
or 7 and 8 channel s, oiled and
unoiled / USE: transmitting
information and converting
tapes to cards / priced per roll
/ 01
Ohio Envelope Ca., Box 19086,
Cincinnati, Ohio 45219 / file
folders and filing supplies /
DESCR: file folders and filing
supplies for storage of paper,
tape and other EDT information
/ - / custom made / 01
Photon, Inc., 355 Middlesex Ave.,
Wilmington, Mass. 01667 ; phOtotypesetting machines / DESCR:
computer-driven off-line, printout and phototypesetting machines using ei ther paper Or
magnetic tape input / USE: as
computer printout system; as
automated typesetting; $15,000
to $295,000 / Dl
Potter Instrument Co., Inc.
Robbins Data Devices, Inc., 1558 127th St., flushing, N.Y. /
data processing accessories /
OESeR: splicers, encoders,
winders, reels, center feed unwinders, unwind cans, data tape
holders, punched tape folde:rs
and envelopes, mailing boxes,
bulk tape erasors, splicing
patches I USE:. editing, storing, winding and unwinding of
tape / $15 to $400 / 01
Scientific Data Systems, Ine. -see Cl3
Lear Siegler, Inc., Power EqUipment Div. -- see Cl3
TAB Products Co., 550 Montgomery
St" San Francisco, Calif. 94216
/ data processing auxiliary
equipment; computer room equipment / DESCR: card files, open
reference files, storaways,
trucks, unit spacefinder card
files, control panel cabinetsi
tape reel racks, tape cabinets,
disc pack ·racks, disc pack
cabinets, trucks, forms handling equipment; USE: storage
and handling of data processing and computer room materials
/ wide / 01
Trak Electronics Co., Inc. -see CI9
Weber Electronies, Inc.
Wheeldex, Inc. -- See F4, P14,
Te, TB
Wright Line Division Barry Wright
Corp., 160 Gold Star Blvd.,
Worcester, Mass. 01606 / disk
pack storage I DESCR: 4ft 811d 6"
thickness can be stored in any
of 6 available models; four have
work surfact tops; all equipment bas full-suspension drawers
/ USE: storage of disk packs
/ varies / 01
Wyle Labs -- See CIO
02.
OATA PROCESSING MAatINERY
(SEE ALSO SPECIFIC TYPES)
Ampex Corp., Computer Products
Div. -~ see C21, C31
Bell Telephone Mfg. Co., Automation Systems Div., Berkenrodetel 33, Hoboken, Belgium
I "Jacketing System" document
handling system / OESCR:
based on the use of a mylar
jacket which is a reusable
document and information
carrier / - / - / 02
Bell Telephone Mfg. Co., Automation Systems Div., ·a /
mailhandling equipment and
postal automation systems /
DESCR: automatic and semiautomatic letter sorters as
well as indexing desks des';'
tined to automate mail handlIng / - / - / 02
The Bunker-Ramo Corp. -- see
C7, 01
Control Data Corp. -- see 04
Dura Business Machi.nes, 32200
Stephenson Highway, Madison
Heights, Mich. ; Dura MACH 10
automa tic typewd ters / DESCR:
punched paper tape/edge card,
"selectric" or binary code,
special code models available,
speed 15.4 c.p.s. Auxiliary
equipment including punches;
readers edit control I USE:
rep~ti tive wri ting applications, da ta preparation for
input, systems applications
/ $2810 to $5000 / 02
Dymec Div. of Hewlett-Packard
Co., 395 Page Mill Rd., Palo
Alto, Calif. 94306 / digital
data plotting systems / DESCR:
systems accept digital data
on magnetic tape, punched
card or tape and reduce to
X- Y smooth curve or poin t
plot / USE, data plotting
applications / $7000 to
$14,000 / 02
Friden, Inc., a subsidiary of
the Singer Co., 2350 Washington Ave., San Leandro,
Calif. 94577 / 5010 Computyper. electronic billing
accounting machine / OESCR:
produces completed invoices at
electronic speeds; stores numbers; performs calculations in
milliseconds; equipped wi th a
removable program panel.
-trademark / USE: for billing
and acc'ounting / $6000 to
$7000 / D2
Friden, Inc., a subsidiary of
The Singer Co., 2350 Washington Ave., San Leand,.;.Q, Calif.
94577 / FLEXOWRITEII{!lI automalic wri ting machine / DESCR:
produces business documents
and simultaneously punches
tape or cards. With some
models, changing program
panels, means changing machine
functions. Up to 145 words
per minute / USE: purchase
orders, letter writing, personnel records, sales and
production orders, legal
documents, etc. I $2400 to
$4600 / 02
General Electric Co., Process
Computer Business Section
Geo Space Corp., 5803 Glenmont
Drive, HOllston, Tex. / ADA-200
seismic data conversion system
/ OESCR, analog to digital to
analog magnetic tape: operates
in real time; digitizes up to
29 channels of analog data
simul taneously / USE: convert
and playback seismic data I - I
02
Honeywell, Inc., Electronic Data
Processing Div. -- see P9, P15,
89, S5, TI
International Computers and ,Tabulators Ltd., I.t.T. House, ·Putney, London S.W. IS, U.K. /
computer systems and O.E .•.
products / OESCR, I.C.T. 1900
series of dIgital computers
and O.E.M. peripheral and ancillary equipment / - / - / 02
Ornni-Data, Div. of Borg-Warner
Corp. -- see PIO
Potter Instrument Co., Inc.
Recognition Equipment Inc., 4703
Ross Ave., OaUas Tex. 75204 /
electronic retina computing
reader I DESCR: general purpose optical character recognition system; reads printed
or typewri tten information,
A ..
AUERBACH
eliminates need for data conversion methods such a~ keypunching; U,SE: automates input to computers / $600,000 to
$750,000 / 0 2 .
.
Societe d'Electronique D'Automatisme
Teletype Corp.
03.
OATA RECOROING EQUII'III!NT
Addo-X, Inc., 845 Third Ave.,
New York, N.Y. 10022/ Addo-X
data capture &. control / OESCR:
10-key shuttle carriage addirigbookkeeping machines linked to
AddO-X program controlled tape
punches and IBM card punches:
dlgl t verifier lIod. 7-U / - /
- I 03
Addo-X, Inc., .a / Addo-X 990 key
data collection system / DESCR:
high speed key operated. Each
key encoded wi th di screte nu • .
ber. Numbers are transmitted
from remote stations to central
data collection station / USE:
attendance recordingj job recording; production control/ ... /
03
Addo-X, Inc. -- see Al
Ampex Corp., Computer Products Div.,
9937 W. Jefferson Blvd ••. Culver
Ci ty, Calif. 90230 / lIodel ATlI-l3
digi tal tape recorder / DESCR:
airborne and portable; produces
recorded data blocks inmediately
compatible with computers, needing no intermediate processing /
USE: reconnaissance, geophysical
and similar applications I - / 03
Ampex Corp., InstX'umentation Div.,
401 Broadway, Re.dwood City, Co Ii f.
94063 / Model CDR tape recorder
/ OESCR, digital cartridge tape
recorder I USE: cOlllllercial and
industrial/ - / 03
Ampex Corp., Instrumentation Dlv.,
0a / Models DAS-IOO and SP-3OO
instrumentation tape recorders
/ - / USE, medical and Indust~
rial data / - / 03
Ampex Corp.,. Instrumentation DiVot
.a / Model FR-900 tape recorder
/ OESCR, rotary head, 5.0 MHz
instrumentation tape recorder /
USE, for radar recording / -- /
03
Ampex Corp., Instrumentation Div.,
·a / Models FR-1800 U.5 MHz)
and FR-16oo (2.0 MHz) tape recorders / DESCH: instrumentation tape re.corders. / USE:
telemetry and laboratory test
data / - / 03
Ampex Corp., Research Oi v o. Redwood City, Coli!. 94063 / recording systems I OESCRa electron beam recording systems
development / - / - / D3
Ampex Corp. -- see 12 and Tl
The Bristol COo, Waterbury, Conn4
06720 / da ta recordlng./ OESCR.
electronic. electrical and mechanical equipment for analog
and digital data; chart recorders, logging and printout / USE,
process, utility and pipeline
applications / $150 to $2000 /
03
Connecticut Technical Corp. t 3000
Main St .• Hartford, Conn.,
06120 / digital printers /
DESCH, tape listing (numeric)
printers, data logging typewri tetsj single Une or coded
input I US!, instrumentation,
data logging and process control printout / $250 to $1000
/03
..
Consolidated Electrodynamies
Corp., 360 sterra Madre Vllla,
Pasadena, CaU!. 91109 / data
recorders / OESeR, Include
several types of recording oscillographs, strip-chart recorders, magnetic tape recorderl
reproducers. indicating con ..
trollers, vibraiion monitors,
and other instruments I USE,
for recording data / - / 03
Control LogiC, Inc. -- see CIO
Cook Electric' Coo, Data Star
Olv. -- see 01
Dennison Manufacturing Co., Framingham, Mass. / print-punch
marking machines / OESeR.
prlnts and punches simul taneously up to 320 control tickets
per minutei may be converted
into punch-cards, paper tape
and/or magnetic tape / USE,
/
/
/
BUYERS' GUIDE
21 :020.013
forms projlll'Lor ; liSE: online or off-linc, BCD or bi-
inventor)' cOlltrol, retail
pr ice ticket, production conIfOI I $69 (monthly rental)
to $115 (monthly rentall I 03
DI/AN ContrOls, Inc., 944 Dorchester Ave., Boston, Mass.
02125 " series "N" and tlDl"
lister/printers I DESCR: high
speed lister,:pdllter handles
numeric printout (2400 lines/
min.) and alphanumeric printout (}200 lines "min,); expandable in 4 column increments to 16 columns (series
"OLU ) and 32 columns (series
U:olII) .' USE:
listing, data
lO\Hliny. DVM printout. addressin\l. computer output
printing I $:lOOO to $10,000
, 03
Electron Ohio, Inc. -- see C7
Electronic Development Corp.,
423 West Broadway, So. Boston,
Mass. 02127 I 42:J data logging
systems I OESeR:
data acqui-
si tion and alarm scanning
systems accepting up to 1200
inputs and producing typewri ter and punched tape outputs / USE: will record and
limit test temperatures,
flows, pressure, etc. I
$14,500 to $25,000 I 03
Electronic Engineering Co. of
Calif., P.O. Box 58, Santa
Ana, Calif. 92702 I EECO 755
data recording system I DESCR:
digitizes up to 200 analog
inputs and records on magnetic
tape in IBM format I - I $8500
to $25,000 I 03
General Precision Inc., Link
Group, Colesville Rd., Binghamton, N.Y. 13902 I waveform
display analyzer I DESCR:
computer aided film scanning
and recording display device
I USE: digital to graphic
and graphic to digital conversion, data recording and
film readout / varies I 03
Giannini Scientific Corp.,
Flight Research Div. -- see
Cl
.
Hagan Controls Corp .• 250 hit.
Lebanon Blvd .• Pittsburgh, Pa.
15226 ,I marine data logger /
OESCR: digital data recording
system consisting of operators
console. two printers and one
modular constructed floor cabinet; solid state circuits and
printed circuit boards / USE:
continuous monitoring of pressures, temperatures. etc. /
$50,000 and up I 03
Hagan Controls Corp., *a /Optimac
recorder .I DESCR: measures up
to four electrical inputs.
records them on vertical moving
strip chart: use cartridge type
capillary inking systems, tran5istor12ed ci rcuit ampl Hiers.
easily removable chassis / USE:
to record process variables which
have been converted into analog
dc currents and voltages I $315
to $820 I D3
Jonker Corp., 26 N. Surmnit Ave.,
Gai tnersburg, Md. 20760 /
Terma trex / DESCR: information and/or data retrieval
system: uses optical coincidence cards to store data/
information / USE: retrieval
of documents, engineering
drawings and data, personnel,
chemical compounds, etc. /
$5000 to $35,000 I 03
Jonker Corp. -- see CIS, PI3
Marksmen, Inc. -- see C29
Potter Instrument Co., Inc.
The Standard Register Co., Dayton, Ohio 45401 / source record punch f DESCR: desk-size
electronic data collecting unit
for recordi ng j nforma ti on both
printed form and key-puncbed
code simul taneously on ZIPCARDS (tab card unit sets):
several models available I
USE: recording hospi tal
charges at source; production
and inventory control in
industry / - / D3
Strsza Industries, 790 Greenfield Drive, EI Cajon, Calif.
/ Mod. 1201 microfilm printerl
plotter / DESCR: converts
computer output to alphanumeric and graphic informationj 62,500 char/sec 10,000 vectors/sec 64 or 128
characters: 3S RID or 16 nun
camera - hard COpy camera,
nary
03
I $120,000 to $160,000 I
Strllzll Industric!s, ·8 / Mad.
1311 display/printer / DESCR:
converts computer output to
alpha-numeric and graphic
information: 30,000 char/sec.,
10,000 vectors/sec.; 35 or 16
mm camera: 16" display tube;
light pen; keyboard / USE: on
line, BCD or binary I $45.000
to $65,000 I 03
Stromberg-Carlson Corp., Data
Products Div., P.O. Box 2449,
San Diego, Calif. 92112 / S-C
4020 compu ter recorder / DESCR:
operates on-line with a computer or accepts digital magnetic tape signals and converts binary or BeD codes into
combinations of alphanumeric
printing, curve plotting and
I ine drawin~s / USE:
converti ng compu ter da ta to gra ph s,
plots, charts, maps on microfilm, movie film, hard copy /
$150,000 to $200,000
I 03
Stromberg-Carlson Corp., Data
PrOducts Div., ·a / S-C 4400
compu ter docurnen t recorder /
OESeR: records alphanumeric
output directly from computer
or compu ter-genera ted tapes
onto 16mm microfilm. Option
permi ts production of 35mm film
for aperture card filing systems / USE: automated and
semi-automated storage and retrieva) systems / $00,000 to
$100,000 I 03
Trak Electronics Co., Inc. -see Cl9
Paul G. Wagner Co. -- see PIS
Wang Labs, Inc. -- see e20, C36,
06
04.
DATA REDUCTION EQUI PUENT
Adage, Inc. -- see Cll
Control Data Corp., 0100 34th
Ave., So •• Minneapolis, Minn.
55440 / data reduction equipmen t / DESCR: a complete line
of peripheral equipment for
use with digital and hybrid
computer systems I - / - / 04
Control Logic, Inc. -- see CIO
The Gerber Scientific Instrument
Co., H3 Gerber Rd., Sou th
Windsor, Conn. (P.O. Box 305,
Hartford, Conn.) / data reduction equipment / DESCR: X and
Y reading heads; back-lighted
work surfaces; chart spooling
equipment I llSE: converts
graphical analog data to a
pri n ted or coded form I $3000
to $25,000 I 04
Stromberg-Carlson Corp., Data
ProdlJcts Di v. -- see 03
plications. lIermetically
sealed or epoxy encapsulated
construction / USE: in timing
Dnd sync circuits, and phase
shi fting of sine waves / $1.50
to $250 I D5
General Instrument Corp., Defense
and Engineering Products Group,
Radio Receptor Div., Andrews Rd.,
HiCksville, N.Y. 11802 / delay
lines / DESCR: magnetostricti vel 10ngi tudinal and torsional
delay lines for digital and
analog computers / USE: computers, coders and decoders,
simulators, missiles and aircraft
I $100 to $3000 I 05
Technitrol Inc., 1952 E. Allegheny
Ave., Philadelphia, Pa. 19134/
electro-magnetic delay lines /
DESCR: lumped and distriblJted
constantj 5ms to 10 ms delay.
Impedance 50 to 2000 ohms.
Tapped and programmable / $1 to $15 I 05
06,
DESK CALCULATORS
Friden, Inc., a subsidiary of The
Singer Co., 2350 Washington
Ave., San Leandro,Calif. 94577
/ 132 electronic calculator /
DESCR: same as 130 electronic
cal cula tor wi th addi tion of
automatic square root / USE:
scientific and engineering
calculations
I $1950 / 06
Friden, Inc., a subsidiary of The
Singer Co., *8 I rotary desk
calculators / DESCR: complete
line featuring models wi th
short-cut multiplication, automatic squaring and square root,
separate mul tiplier keyboard,
tough-one-key division and fast
chain mul tiplication I USE:
scientific, business and engineering calculations I $300
to $1400
I
D6
I
I
$2150
06
Wang Laboratories, Inc., 836 North
St., Tewksbury, Mass. 01876/
Wang 300 series electronic desk
calculators / DESCR: feature
Single electronics packages
wi th up to four sa telli te keyboards. Large numerals, duplex operations, exclusive
"phantom touch" keys, square,
square root, eX and Inx. I
USE: business, statistical,
and scientific calculations I
$1690 to $513Q
I
06
Wang Laboratories, Inc. -- see
C1O, C36
05.
DELAY LINES (COMPUTER TAPE)
Wyle Laboratories. Inc. -- see
C10
Andersen Laboratories, Inc., 501
New Park Ave., West Hartford,
Conn. / delay memories I OESeR:
magnetostrictive delay memories; digital glass memories I
USE: buffer memories f $75 to
$500 I 05
CollJmbia Technical Corp., 50 St.
at 25 Ave., Woodside, N.Y.
11377 / delay lines (complJ ter
types) / DESCR: electromagnetic networks of lumped constant and distributed constant
types, of fixed or variable
delays / USE: as information
storage
I $10 to $100 I 05
Cornell-Dubilier Electronics Div.
Federal Pacific Electric Co.,
50 Paris St., Newark, N.J.
07101 I delay lines I OESCR:
custom designed delay lines -engineered lumped constant to
meet requirements of computers
I USE: in pulse equipment I / 05
Digital Devices, Inc., 200 Michael
Dr., Syosset, L.I., N.Y. / delay lines I OESeR: magnetostrictive delay lines and computer memory systems / USE:
computer memories, data storage I $30 to $30,000 (systems)
/ 05
EL-RAo Manufacturing Co., 4300 N.
California Ave., Chicago, Ill.
60618 I delay lines I OESCR:
units for both conventional
Wiring and prin ted circui t ap-
07,
I $10,000 to $250,000 I 011
Electron Ohio, Inc. -- see 01
F'riden. Inc., a subsidiary of the
Singer Co., 2:J50 Washington Ave ••
San leandro, Cal if. 94577 .: 6010
magnetic disc file / OESeR: operates on-line with the 6010
electronic computer; stor<',~
122,OtlO alphanumeric characters;
features automatic address verification and variable length data
capability / USE: with 6010;
storage of payroll, invoice, inventory. accounting, etc. data /
$7000 to $0000 I DB
General Electric Cu., Process
Computer Business Section
General Instrument Corp .• MauneHead Div., 13040 S. Cerise,
lIawthorne, Calif. 90250/ magnetic memory,discs /DESCR:
records and plays back data up
to 10 million bits with median
access times from 5 to 20 milliseconds / USE: inventory control, process control, cOrm1unications, multiplexing, data
logging, data buffer / $1500
to $13,000
I - I
DIFFERENTIAL ANALYZERS
$30,000 (RAO system) to
$200,000 I D8
Scientific Data Systems, Inc. -see M2
DRUMS, MAGNETI C
Bryant Computer Products, Div. of
Ex-Cell-O Corp. -- see S4
The Bunker-Ramo Corp. -- see C7
Control Data Corp.
Digital Development Corp., 5575
Kearny Villa Rd., San Diego,
Calif. 92123 I magnetic drums I
DESCR: capaci ty to 1024 tracks
at 3600 RPM; read-wri te selection electronics. Sealed units.
I USE: computer memory I $1000
to $40,000 / D9
Electron Ohio, Inc. -- see 01
General Electric Co., Process
Computer Business Section
General Instrument Corp., MagneHead Div., 13040 S. Cerise,
Hawthorne, Calif. 90250 I magnetic memory drum / DESCR: records and plays back da ta up
to 50 million bits wi th median
access times from 5 to 20 milliseconds / USE: inven tory control, communications, multiplexing, data logging. data buffer
I
Philbrock Researches, Inc. -see C9
I DB
Scientific Data Systems, Inc.,
1649 Seventeenth St. t Santa
Monica, Calif. 90404 I discs,
magnetic / DESCR: Rapid-Access
Data (RAD) Storage System, 17msec average access time, capacity 2.097 million char/unit.
Mass Memory Disc Storage System,
162 msec average access time,
capacity 67 million char/controller (IJP to 2 controllers)
09.
Friden, Inc., a subsidiary of The
Singer Co., *s I 130 electronic
calculator / DESCR: desk sizej
gives answers in milliseconds;
entries and answers on cathode
ray tube screen; automatic
transfer of intermediate answers / USE: business, scientific and engineering calculations
reliabilit) for c:ontinuou~
oper;J t iOIl ;flld extreme t~lldrOIl
ments .' USE: computer memory
El .
$3000 to $60,000 / 09
ECONOMIC RESEARCH
Bonner & Moore Associ ates. Inc.
-- see 02
URS Corp.
DB.
DISCS, MAGNETIC
Bryant Computer Products, oiv.
of Ex-CeU-O Corp. -- see S4
Control Data Corp.
Da ta Products Corp., 8535 Warner
Dr., Culver City, Calif. 90321
I DISC fILES ® 1 OESCR: large_
scale random access DISCfILES.
Capaci ties from 200 million to
I billion bits I USE: as part
of data processing system /
$50,000 to $100,000
I
Data Products Corp., "'a
OISCfILES®
I OESCR:
08
I on-line
large-
scale random access DISCfIlES
directly connected to computer
systems to augment memory
capac! ty I USE: part of a data
processing system I $75,000 to
$125,000 I 08
Digi tal Devolopment Corp., 5575
Kearny Villa Rd., San Diego,
Calif. 92123/ magnetic discs
I
OESCR:
capaci ty to 250 mil-
lion bi ts at 3600 RPM; readwrite selection electronics.
System capabili ties--operate
with standard computers.
Se31ed units provide maximum
AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc,
E2.
EDUCATION (SEE ALSO COURSES)
Aries Corp., Westgate Research
Park, McLean, Va. 22101 I education I DESCR: fundamentals
of data process ing and programming courses in JOVIAL and
other languages. Specially designed courses in programming,
computer communications, and
information retrieval I USE:
computer training / determined
by course requirements / E2
Automation Institute of America,
Inc. t Su ite 600, 760 Market St.,
San Francisco, Calif. 94102 /
data processing training /
DESCR: courses ranging from
Card Punch Operator training
through Compu ter Programming and
Systems Design -- entry skill
and advancement courses / USE:
ind;vidual enrollment and company
sponsored programs / - / E2
Brandon Applied Systems, Inc., 30
E. 42nd St., Ne~ York, N.Y. 10017
/ technical training courses /
OESeR: series of 7 technical
8/66
21:020.014
DIRECTORIES
training course. / DESCR, serIes of 7 technlUI training
courses in computer field on a
seminar basis, publicly and on
an In-house bash.
Public
courses giveo where firm has
offices / - / $75 to $175 / E~
Computer Systems Institute, Inc ..
300 Sixth Av •.• Suite 275. Pittsburgh. Pa. 15222 / computer
progralllDlng training / DESCR:
train computer prograomers i
graduates Bre capable of writIng programs for RCA 301. IBM
1401 and 1410 systems; also
training the visually handicapped for prograDllllng pos! tions
/ USE: data proce .. lng fI.ld /
$750 to $1500 / E2
Control Technology, Inc., 1232
Belmont Ave., Long Beach, CaUf.
9OB04 / .ducatlon / DESCR:
courses in advanced programming;
combined analog-digital simulation; advanced hybrid simulation;
advanced analog computation;
dlgl tal simulation / - / $250 to
$350 / E2
Digital Equlpm.nt Corp. -- s.e
B2. C5
Entelek, Inc., 42 Pleasant St. t
Newburyport, Mass. 01950 /
computer-assisted instruction I
OESeR: computer-based management games / USE: remote use
of time-shared computer in simulation of management decisionmaking / - / E2
Informatics, Inc., 5430 Van Nuys
Blvd., Sherman Oaks, Calit'o
91401 / .ducation / DESCH:
System 360 training, on-line
systems, executive trainingj
presented Symposiums on Disc
Files (1964), On-Line Systems
(1965). and Comput.rs/Graphlc
Arts. with UCLA (1966) / - / / E2
Innovation Consultants, Inc., 4 E.
State St., Doylestown, Pa, 18901
/ education / DESCH: In-house
and some public courses on computer appUcatlons / USE: for
technically untrained top IIlBngement / p.r diem / E2
Insti tute for Computing Sciences,
Preston Forest Tower, P.O. Box
30245. Dellas. T.x. 75230 / computer programming / OESeR: comprehensive programing training
(Including actual computer run
practice programs) designed to
provide technical qualification
t'or entry in the computer field
as a programmer or system analyst / USE: initial career
training / $725 to $695 / E2
Institute for COmputing Sciences,
·a I electronic computing for
mRnagement I DESCR: management
training program in the potential ot' electronic computing
systemsj course offered in resident and correspondence form
/ USE: manag.m.nt training /
$325 to $360 / E2
Programming & Systems, Inc., 33
W. 42nd St., New York, N.Y.
10036 / EDP .duca tion / DESCH:
complete range of EDP courses
from key punching through programming of IBM 1401 and Syst.m 360 / - / $90 to $650 / E2
Scientific Educational Products"
30 E. 42nd St., New York, N.Y.
10017 / Minivac 6010 / DESCH:
self instructional digital compu ter tra iner / USE: in laboratory or classroom to teach
basic concepts of digital computers, including basic logic,
Boolean algebra, binary arithmetic, basic computer operations and basic switching circuitry / $285 / E2
Scientific Educational Products,
*a / Nordac II / DESCH: soUd
state digital logic trainer /
USE: to teach basic logic,
Boolean algebra, and basic
digital computer functions /
$465 / E2
URS Corp.
F2.
FLOORS
Fabri-Tek Inc., 59(H S. County
Rd. 18, Box 24035, MinneapOlis,
Minn. 55424 / Information storage devices and related equipment / DESCR: memory systems,
planes and stacks for use in
electronic data processing
equipment / USE: information
8/66
storage devices / - / E2
Floating Floors, Inc., litching systems / - I
.
- I P12
Profimatics., Inc.
AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
Programmatics Inc., 12011 San
Vicente Blvd., t05 Mocles,
Cal it. 90049 / Assembly Programs
/ DESCR: only conmercially
available meta-assembler: computer independent: assembl(~ for
any machine on any machi ne /
USE: free-standing or system
processor / $10,000 to $50,000
I Pl2
Programmatics Inc., °a / Systems
Programming I DESCR: Assemblers,
FORTRAN. CDIlOL, ALGOL. PL-I,
Operating Systems, Sort-Merge,
PERT / USE: free-standing or
system processor / - / P12
Progralmling Services, Inc.
B. I. Savage Co. -- see C15
The Service Bureau Corp.
Systems Science Corp. -- see CIS
Technical Information Processing.
150;] N. t~ashington, Wheaton,
Ill. 60107 I technical programming / DESCR: optimizing programs, including Bellman's
dynamic progranming, Pontryagin's maximum principle and
variational forms: electrical
equipment design, networks and
delay lines / USE: design and
operating problems / $100 to
$5000 I P12
Telecornputations, Inc.
Merle Thomas Corp. -- see CIS
Tim Systems Group, 1 Space Pilrlc,
Redondo Beach. CaliCo 90278 /
programming services / DESCR:
all types of applications-missile guidance and control:
communications code generation,
etc.I-/p12
URS Corp., 1811 Trousdale Drive,
Burlingame, Calif. 94011 / prograJJll1ing services / OESCR: programming languages, computer
simulations, real-time routines,
executive routines, operating
sys terns, assembly programs,
monitors, report generators,
file processors, information
storage, retrieval, compilers
/ - I - I P12
Westinghouse Electric Corp.,
Advanced Data Systems
Wll!f Research & Development Corp.,
P.O. Box 36, Baker Ave., 11est
Concord, Mass. 01781 / programming services I OESCR:
mllthemlltical analYSis and programming services; large staff
of analysts and prograrrmers
experienced in prograrruning scientifiC, engineering, business,
industrial, aerospace, military
applications / USE; digital
computers / - / P12
P13.
PUBLICATIONS
Auerbach Corp., 121 N. Broad S1.,
Philadelphia, Pa. 19107 / Auerbach standard EDP reports /
DESCR: ·0 vol. reference service, up-to-date analytical
information on major computer
sys terns: compara ti ve eval uations by means of standardized
"benchmark" tes ts / USE; analystsj systems designers / - /
P13
Bonner & Moore Associates, Inc.
-- see 11, P12
Data Processing Management Assoc.,
505 Busse lIighway, Park Ridge,
ll!. 60068 / Introducing Computers to Small Business / DESCR:
the uses and misuses of computers
and related EDP equipment and
servi~es by small businesses /
- f $7.75 I P13
Data Processing Management Assoc.,
*a I Journal oC Oata llanagement
/ OESCR: monthly publication of
the OPMA publi shed for the da ta
processing users group / - / $5
per year I P13
Commerce Clearing House, Inc.
hayden Book Co., Inc., 116 11est
14th St., New York, N. Y. /
textbooks / DESCR: texts and
trade books on subjects of:
programming, digi tal tape recording. digital computers and
systems, analog computers. data
transmission and systems / USE:
training and general information I $3.50 to $15 I P13
Informatics, Inc., 5430 Van Nuys
Blvd., Sherman Oaks, Calif.
91401 I publications I DESCR:
prepared major software publications for IBM and UNIVAC;
nationwide services I - / - /
P13
8/66
DIRECTORIES
21 :020.018
Jonker Corp., 26 N. Summit Ave.,
Gaithersburg, Md. 20760 / publication indexes I DESCR: indexes to chemical compound
spectra including infrared,
nuclear magnetic resonance,
X-ray diffraction, gas chromatography and mass spectroscopy
I USE: to identify unknown
chemical compounds or mixtures
/ $300 to $1000 / PI3
Jonker Corp. -- see 03, C15
P14.
PUNQI CARD ACCESSORIES
Dolin Metal Products, Inc., 315
Lexington Ave" Brooklyn, N. Y.
11216 / tab card files / DESCR:
build-up type drawers in 4
sizes, 2 stylesi storage units
for tab card boxes I USE:
general filing and storage /
$3.50 to $4.50 per drawer /
PI4
EnteIek, Inc., 42 Pleasant St.,
Newburyport. Mass. 0)950 / keypunch performance aids I DESCR:
5 flowcharts guide 024 & 026
keypunch opera tors throug~ preparation of program plannIng
card, alphanumeric punching and
error correction / - / $15 /
PI4
Monarch Metal Products, Inc. -see Dl
Ray Myers Corp., 1302 E. Main St.,
Endicott, N. Y. 13760 / punch
card accessories / DESCR:
mobile and fixed equipment /
USE: for storage and processing/-/PI4
TAB Products Co. -- see Dl
Wheeldex, Inc., 1000 N. Division
St., Peekskill, N.Y. 10567/
mechanized files and continuous pinfeed forms / DESCR:
special automatic files for
handling punch cards, tabulating cards in any volume- / - /
- / PI4
.
Wtight Line Division Barry Wright
Corp., 160 Gold Star Blvd.,
Worcester, Mass. 01606 / Gold
Star Fi ling System / DESCR:
composed of 14 pieces of equipment inel uding 3 wide files of
30 drawers to 1 drawer desk
models; / one tray used in all
files / USE: for fi ling of
punched cards / depends on
complement of equipment / P14
P15.
PUNQI CARD MAQlINES
Addo-X, Inc. -- see 03 .
Honeywell, Inc •• ElectronIc
Data Processing Div~, 60
Walnut St., Wellesley Hills,
Mass. 02161 / card reader/
punch / DESCR: punc~ed card
reading and/or punchlng at
100-400 cpm / USE: data
processor peripheral / $13,500
to $15,750 / PI5
Soroban Engineering, Inc., P.O.
Box 1690, Melbourne,Fla. 32902
/ card equipments / DESCR:
card punches, card readers,
card interpreters Call endfeed) / USE: computer inputoutput, punches to 650 cards
per min., readers to 1100
cards per min. / on reques t /
PI5
Uptime Corp., 15910 West 5th Ave.,
Golden, Colo. 80401 / SPEEDPlJNQI 120 / DESCR: asynchronous serial card punch; speed,
160 char. per sec., echo check
punch verification, .photoelectric jam detectlon. Optional: offset reject, hole
count verification, 50-cycle,
230-vol t power / USE: card
output from processing systems / $10,500 to $12,300 /
Pl5
Paul G. Wagner Co., 1227 S. Shamrock Ave., Monrovia, Calif.
91016 / MICRO-PUNQI 461 / DESCR:
portable, printing key punch;
gang punches and prints fully
interpreted numeric data into
standard 60 column cards,
weighs 8 pounds / USE: production control, inventory recording, etc. / $245 / PI5
90247 / regulated solid state
power supplies / DESCR: photoelectric line and block punched
tape reading devicesj mechanical block tape reading devices;
supporting tape handler equipment / USE: numerical controls
and da ta inpu t devi ce / $400 to
$3000 / RI
Cook Electric Co., Data Stor Div.,
6401 W. Oakton, Horton Grove,
U!. 60053 / readers / DESCR:
paper tape; photoelectric;
magnetic tape; character by
character / USE: reads data
on tape / $4000 to $13,000 /
Rl
DA- PEX Company -- see C8
General Electric Co., Process
Computer Business Section
Omni-Data, Dov. of Borg-Warner
Corp., 511 N. Broad St.,
Philadelphia, Pa. 19123 /
photoelectric tape readers /
DESCR: for reading virtually
all punched tape from trans1 ucen t to opaque / USE: da t8
processing input, conununication terminals, .numerical
control input / $540 to $3190
/ RI
Potter Instrument Co., Inc.
Trak Electronics Co., Inc. -see C19
R2.
R3.
READERS
Chalco Engineering Corp., 15126
S. Broadway, Gardena, Calif.
8/66
READERS -- FILII
General Precision Inc .• Link
Group -- see 03
Information International Inc.,
200 Sixth St., Cambridge, Mass.
02142 / programmable film
reader / DESCR: three models
available - systems automatically extracts customer specified data from film under program control: reads any da ta
originally collected on or
transferred to film: output on
magnetic tape -- also wri tes
all film / USE: similar to
digital computer except that it
has film I/O 06_35 ... or 701Nl1)
/ $241,000 up / R3
R5.
RI.
READERS -- QlARACTER
Cogni tronics Corp. 549 Pleasantville Rd., Briarcliff lIanor,
N.Y. / remote optical character recogni tion / DESCR:
consists of remotely located
scanners transmi tting over
telephone lines to centrally
located, multiplexed character
recogrd tion equipment / USE:
transmi tting of typed or
printed data for conversion
into machine language / - /
R2
Control Data Corp., 8100 34th
Ave. So., Minneapolis, Minn.
55440 / Con trol Da ta 915 Page
Reader / DESCR: hi gh-speed
character recogni tion printed
page reading device; allows
direct transmission of printed
data to computer; reads ASA
standard type font; handles
documents up to 11" x 14" I
USE: - / - / R2
Cook Electric Co., Data Stor
Dov. -- see HI
Discon Corp. -- see C26
General Precision, Iilc., GPL Div.,
Bedford Rd., Pleasantville,
N. Y. 10570 / GPL character
vector generator / - / - /
$20,000 to $50,000 / R2
OPTOmechanisms Inc., 40 Skyline
Drive, Plainview, N.Y. 11803/
photo interpretation film
viewers / DESCR: high resolution stereo for 70mrn to 9"
film; visual display of angular/coordinate measurements;
output to tape punch, typewriter, card punch, printer
or on-line computer / USE:
vieWing roll film; taking precise X-Y coordinate measurements on film to 1 micron
accuracy / - / R3
Recogni tion Equipment Inc.
see 02
READERS, MAGNETIC INK
Cook Electric Co., Data Stor Div.
see Rl
R6.
READERS, MAGNETIC TAPE
ContrOl Data Corp.
Cook Electric Co., Data Stor Div.
LUr;;I~e:e~!arch
Laboratorles. 210
W. l31st St., Los Angeles,
CaUf. 90061 / magnetic tape
readers / DESCR: accepts tape
cartridges from recorders for
on-line tape processing / - /
$9000 to 12,000 / R6
MIdWestern Instruments, Inc.,
Subsidiary of Tele Corp.
Photocircui ts Corp., Glen Cove.
N. Y. / tape movement through
read head by means of direct
drive capstan utilizing printed
motor. No pinch rollers. friction brakes, clutches or solenoids used, no adjustments required / USE: data processing
accessory equipment, data recording and readout device for
paper and magnetic tape / $1575
to $3330 / R6
Trak Electronics Co., Inc. -- see
CI9
R7.
READERS, PAPER TAPE
Addo-X, Inc., 845 Third Ave., New
. York, N.Y. 10022 / Addo-X tape
reader / DESCH: 12 characters
per sec. paper tape reader;
reads 5, 6, 7 or 6 channel
tapej posting to adding or
bookkeeping machine / - / - /
R7
Carl ton Controls Corp. -- see RS
Chalco Engineering Corp -- see HI
Control Data Corp.
Cook Electric Co., Data Stor Di v.
-- see HI
Creed t; Co. Ltd., Hollingbury,
Brighton, Sussex, England /
teleprinter manufacturer /
DESCR: telegraph communications
equipment and range of paper
tape handling equipment for
tape preparation, verification,
duplication, translation and
edi ting / USE: in variety of
data processing installations
where paper tape is used for
input or output / - / R7
Ferranti-Packard Electric Ltd.,
Industry St., Toronto 15, Ontario, Canada / photo electric
paper tape reader s / DES~R!
various models, both mil1tary
and cOrmlercial, from 50 to 1000
characters per second. Latest
release is a 1000 character per
second reader/spooler / USE:
computer I/O; data conununicalions; numerical control; off
line edi ting / $2730 to $10,000
/ R7
IRVBC Corp. -- see TIO, T7
Omni-Dato, Div. of Borg-Warner
Corp. -- see 81
Photoc1rcui ts Corp. -- see 86
Rheem Electronics~ 5250 W. £1
Segundo Blvd., Hawthorne, Calif.
90250 / photoelectric punched
tape readers / DESCH: transistorized and micrologic character and block readers; speeds
20 ch/sec. to 1000 ch/sec.
wi th or wi thout fanfOld tanks,
take-up and supply reels / USE:
peripheral device for entry of
digi tal information / $400 to
$3000 / R7
Soroban Engineering, Inc., Port
Malabar Industrial Park - Palm
Bay, P.O. Box 1690, Melbourne,
Fla. 32902 / tape equip... nts /
DESCR: tape perforators, roaders, and printers. Perforators
to 300 char. per sec. / USE:
tape perforator/readers,
perforator/printers / on request / R7
Tally Corp., 1310 Mercer St.,
Seattle, Wash. 98109 / Tally
readers and perforators /
DESCR: perforate and read
paper, plastic, foil at speeds
to 150 char/sec; asynchronous,
bidirectional operation. Perforators feature bit for bit
read after wri te mode checkingj
readers uti li ze s tar wheel
principle / USE: digital data
sys tems / $325 to $1800 / R7
Teletype Corp.
Wlng Laboratories, Inc., 839 North
St.t Tewksbury, Mass. 01676/
block tape readers / DESCR:
parallel readout device from 6
to 32 lines/block wi th form A
contact. Utilizes tape as
A
AUER8ACH
~
storage medium, operates by
pulsing 8 solenoid / USEs
numerically controlled equipment for prograrrmed production
or testing / $1200 to $2200 /
87
Wang Laboratories, Inc. -a / prograrmable block tape reader /
DESCH: parallel readout device
for fixed and/or variable block
lengths of 4 to 40 lines to
drive relays or transistors /
USE: numerically controlled
equipment for progrsrmed production or testing / $1750 to
$3550 / 87
Wang Labs, Inc. -- see C36, D6
R8.
READERS, mOTOELECTRIC
Carlton 'Controls Corp., 15 Sagamore Rd., Worcester, Mass. 01605
/ photoelectric tape reader /
DESCR: perforated, for ei ther
paper or mylar tapej requires
no adjustment or maintenance
other than avoidance of abuse.
Speed 60 characters per second
/ USE: to read perforated tape
/ $400 to $500 / 88
Chalco Engineering Corp. -- see
RI
Discon Corp. -- see C26
Ferranti-Packard Electric Ltd. -see R7
International Rectified, 233 Kansas St., El Segundo, CaUf.
90246 I photoelectric readouts
/ DESCR: silicon array of
light sensing and converting
elements; converts 11ght energy
to electrical energy in conjunction wi th openings pre-arranged
in information carrier / USE:
standard or cus tom des! gned
assemblies / $1 to $95 / 88
Invac Corp. -- see TID, T1
Oki Electronics of America, Inc.
202 East 44th St., New York,
N. Y. 10017 / serial card reader
/ DESCH: 80 col umn • tandard
card; 100 cards per min. photoelectric reader / - / $6000 to
$8000 / R8
Omni-Data, Div. of Borg-Warner
Corp. -- see Rl
Photoci'rcuits Corp., Glen Cove,
N. Y. / mi 11 tarhed tape r.ader
/ DESCR: palled tests al required by MIL-E-164oo Cia .. 3
and MIL-T-212oo CIa .. 2 / USE:
as check out device tor progranuning pre-flight functions,
pre-flight tests and pre-check
of all flight prograDlDing "here
severe environmental conditions
have to be met / $7390 to $9980
/ R8
Rheem Electronics -- see R7
Wyle Labs -- see ClO
R9.
READERS, PUNOI CARD
AMP Inc .. Eisenhower Blvd., Harrisburg, Pa. 17105 / card programming system / DESCR: de.k top
or rack mount, 960 circuits I
USE: translates punched information into data or switching
control output. / - / 89
Control Data Corp.
Digi tal Electronic Machines, Inc ••
2130 Jefferson, Kansas City-, Mo.
64108 / CRU, card read unit /
DESCRt reads punched cards for
input to telephone network or
conversion for teletype input;
interchangeability or code
boards I USEs data cOlllllunic8tlons / $1850 up / 89
Drexel Dynamics Corp., Maple Ave.,
Horsham, Plf. 19044 / card readers / DESCRt static, military,
commercial, IBM or Rem Band
format automatic card feeders
for static readers; card programmed potentiometers, sequencers; badge readers / USE:
progra ... ing and control / $150
to $6000 / R9
Friden, Inc., a Subsidiary of the
Singer Co., 2350 Washington Ave.,
San Leandro, Caut. 94577/
automatic card reader / DESCHt
reads standard Holleri th coded
punched cards. Equipped wi th
automatic card feed system;
hopper holds up to 200 card. /
USE: provides rapid, accurate
conversion of coded source data
to a variety of bUsiness forms /
$2800 to $3100 / R9
Hickok Electrical Instrument Co.,
10514 Dupont Ave., Cleveland,
BUYERS' GUIDE
Ohio 4410tl / Cardmatic card
reader / OESeR: high currentcarryi no capaci ty self-actuating
card-reader swi tch handles 50 to
540-hole punched card data; man-
lIal and motorized models available / USE:
punched card con-
trolled cireui try / $195 to
$1240 / R9
lIoncywell, Inc., Electronic Data
Processing Div., 60 Walnut St.,
Wellesley lIills, Mass. 02181 I
card reader I DESCR: punched
cart.! reading at 400 or aoo cpm;
photoelectric by column / USE:
data processor peripheral I
$9000 to $11,000 I R9
S'Jroban Engineering, Inc. -- sec
PI5
llptime Corp., 15910 West 5th Ave.,
Golden, Colo., 80401 I SPEEDRI::ADER 400 I DESCR: asynchronous serial punched card reader i
speed, 400 BO-column cards per
min., photoelectric reading,
timing, misregistration. jam
detection. Optional: offset
r~ject. 50-cycle. 230-vol t
power. 51-column card ki t /
USE: card input to processing
systems I $5700 to $6200 I R9
Uptime Corp. ·a / SPEEDREADER
1500 / OESeR: asynchronous
serial punched card reader;
speed 1500 OO-column cards per
min., photoelectric reading.
timing, misregistration, jam
detection. Optional: reject
system, 50-cycle, 230-vol t
power. 51-column card kit / USE:
card input to processing systems 1$11,700 to $13,500 I R9
Uptime Corp., -a / SPEEDREADER
SOO / OESCR: asynchronous
serial punched card reader;
speed VOO eO-column cards per
min., photoelectric reading,
timing, misregistration, jam
detection. Optional: reject
system, 50-CYCle, 230-volt
power, 50-COlumn card kit / USE:
card input to processing systems
/ $8000 to $9100 I R9
Wyle labs -- see ClO
nIl.
REGISTERS, SHIFTS
01/AN Controls, Inc. -- see C3
Engineered Electronics Co.
see C5
W)'le Labs -- see C5
R12.
RELAYS (COMPUTER TYPES)
The Bunker-Ramo Corp. -- see 11
Executone, Inc" 47-37 Austell
Place, long Island City. N.Y.
11101 I printact relay I DESCR:
miniature, general purpose,
plug-in relay for P. C. Board
application, Latching and nonlatching type / USE: for
swi tching electronic circui try
I $1.75 to $2 I R12
R13.
RESEARCH
Ampex Corp., Research Div., 401
Broadway, Redwood City, Calif.
94063 / research and development / DESCR: study and development of foil bearings, magnetic
recording heads, core memories,
tape transport mechanisms,
electron beam and other new
recording techniques, ferrite
materials for communications /
- I - I R13
Booz, Allen Applied Research. Inc.
-- see C14, CIS
Control Technology, Inc., 1232
Belmont Ave., Long Beach, Calif.
90804 I research I DESCH: error
analysis of digital, analog and
hybrid simulationsj new methods
of problem solutionj control
system theory and applications
I - I - I RI3
Design Automation, Inc., 4 Tyler
Rd., Lexington, Mass. 02173/
research / DESCR: in area of
computer simulation of electronic circuits and systems. and
mathematica~ and physical models
of electronic devices sui table
for computer simulation of tbese
devices I USE: . research and
development contract / - / R13
Engineered Electronics Co., 1441
E. Chestnut 51., Santa Ana,
Cal if. 92702 / breadboard and
training systems / DESCR: contain all required power supplies,
21:020.019
indicators, etc. t so the various components may be plugged
together ond Corm desired combination / USE: a quick method
to try various circuit designs
I $1000 to $6DOO I RI3
HRB-Singer, Inc. -- see I1
Informatics, Inc .• 5430 Van Nuys
Blvd •• Sherman Oaks, Calif.
91401 I research I DESCR:
synthetic intelligence, coltlnand/
control, real-time applicatiUns
I - I - RI3
Serendipi ty Associates
URS Corp. -- see 02
Westinghouse Electric Corp.,
Electronic & Special ty Products
Group
R14.
RESOLVERS
Reeves Instrument Co. -- see C9
R15.
RESOLVERS -- COORDINATE
TRANSFORM
Discon Corp.
General Precision, Inc., Kearfott
Products Div., llSO McBride Ave .•
Li t tie Falls, N. J. 07424 I
resolvers / DESCR: 3- and 4wire resolvers in size 5 to 54;
accuracies down to 5 seconds
max. error from EZ: windingcompensated types, matched
resolver-ampl ifier combinations.
and transolvers / USE: coordinate conversion. trigonometric
functions, vector additions,
angle summing, phase conversion
I - I RI5
Reeves Instrument Co. -- see C9
R16.
RESOLVERS, PRODUCT
General Precision, Inc .• Kearfott
Products Div., -- see RI5
R17.
RESOLVERS -- SINE-COSINE
Clifton Precision Products, Div.
of Litton Industries
General Precision, Inc., Kearfott
Products Div. -- see R15
Reeves Instrument Co. -- see C9
RIB.
ROBOTS
Dnivation Inc., Bethel, Conn. I
UNlMATE -- industrial robot /
DESCR: teachable material
transfer machine, performs
manual labor. Weight handling
capac! ty of 75 Ibs. I USE:
operates die casting machines.
plastiC molding machines,
forge presses; loads and unloads; starts machine tools /
$18,000 to $20,000 I RIB
R19.
RIBBONS, DATA PROCESSING
Columbia Ribbon & Carbon Mfg. Co.,
Herb Hill Rd., Glen Cove, N.V.
I data processing ribbons /
DESCR: fabric film base ribbons
for data processing equipment /
USE: OCR, MCR systems, general
print-out, plate imaging on
high speed equipment / - / 819
Honeywell, Inc., Supplies O·iv.,
60 Walnut St., Wellesley Hills,
Mass. 02UH / printer ribbons I
DESCR: rolled fabric sheet
(typically: nylon, 12-20
inches wide, 10-25 yards long)
impregnated with ink, mounted
on a stiff, cardboard mandrel
I USE: high-speed printers /
$15.75 to $23.75 I RI9
Standard Products Corp., 656 lIain
St., New Rochelle, N.Y. I 100%
nylon computer-printer uninked
fabric ribbons / DESeR: high
count precision woven nylon
fabrics I USE: inked by ribbon
manufacturers for use in high
speed printers I - I R19
51.
SCANNERS
Ampex Corp., Research Div., 401
Broadway, Redwood City, Calif.
94063 ! scanners I DESCR:
silver hall ide film scanning by
electron beam recording t.echniques I - I - I SI
Auindar Electronics Inc., 60 Fadem
Rd., Springiield, N. J. 07081 I
scanners (solid state) / DESCR:
solid state equipment for digitol telemetering: uses 3 state
coding to provide security /
USE: for remote supervisory
contrOl, data transmission I
$1200 to $5000 ! SI
The Bristol Co., Waterbury, Conn.
06720 / scanners I DESCR: 1owcost, solid-state system utilizing pulse duration modulation
code with non-return-to-zero:
from 3 to 31 points per rack
unit / USE: monitoring process,
pipeline or utility I - I SI
Cognitronics Corp. -- see R2
Cohu Electronics, Inc., Box 623,
San Diego, Colif. 92112 I input
scanner, model 453M / DESCR:
scanning accomplished by means
of electro-mechanical stepping
swi t ches: s canner allows loea 1
or remote control, manual or
automatic operation / USE: with
either digital or analog measuring or recording instruments in
any application where multiple
signals must be scanned / $2500
I SI
Control Equipment Corp., 19 Kearney
Rd., Needham Heights, Mass. 02194
/ Series 3010 relay multiplexer
/ DESCR: 3-pole switching: contact life 1 billion operations:
5 to 100 channelsi 200 channels/
second scanning; flexible programming: digital outputs isolated by buffer amplifiers I - /
$1300 to $J{)OO I SI
Control Equipment Corp., ·0 I
Series 3020 multiplexer. electronic I OESCR: all solidstate; .:!: 0.02% accuracy and
stability: 5 to 100 channels:
30,000 channels/second scanning;
flexible programming: digital
outputs isolated by buffer amplifiers I - I $1200 to $12,000
I SI
Control Equipment Corp., ""a /
Series 3080 crossbar multiplexer / DESCR: I, 2, or 3 pole
switching, 100 to 1000 channels,
50 channel/second scannings
flexible programming / - / $1600
to $3000 I SI
Data Trends. Inc.
Elect.ronic Engineering Co. of
Calif., P. O. Box 58, Santa Ana,
Calif. 92702 I EECO 765 analog
mul tiplexer / DESCR: up to 100
channels + 50 millivolts to + 5
volt input: 100 megohm closed
input, impedance patchboard
sequencing I - I $2100 to $3600
I SI
•
Hagan Controls Corp., 250 M1.
Lebanon Blvd .• Pittsburgh, Pa.
I alarm indicating monitor /
DESCR: scans various de volt
inputs, compares with preselected
set point values, initiates
alarm wben input is in alarm
condition I USE: scans analog
voltages of critical process
vari ables, warns operator of
hazardous condition. Also. to
obtain digital readout of a
variable / $16,000 and up I 51
Jonker Corp. -- see 03, C15, PI3
F. B. MacLaren & Co., Inc. t 15
Stepar PI., Huntington 5ta.,
L. I., N. Y. 11746 I scanners /
DESCR: uni t provides servoed
optical elements to scan models
and maps in azimuth and elevatlon, introduce image roll, and
maintain proper focus for simulation systems / USE: for custom designed simulator programs
/ variable, depending on application / 51
Nash and Harrison Ltd. -- see Cll
S2.
SERVOMECHANISMS
Ampex Corp., Instrumentation Div.,
401 Broadway, Redwood City.
calif. 94063 / servomechanisms /
DESCR: servomechanisms lor longitudinal and rotary head instrumentation tape recorders, reelto-reel and continuous loop / I - I S2
The Bristol Co .• Waterbury, Conn.
06120 / servo mechanisms I
DESCR: null-balance, motordriven units: relay rack mounting: retransmitting slidewire
and alarm attachments avai lable
/ USE: measure and indicate
milivolt input I $500 to $BOO I
S2
Clifton Precision Products, Div.
of Li lton Industries
AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
General Preci s i on, Inc., Kearlet t
ProdUcts Div. I 1150 McBride Ave.,
Llltle Falls, N. J. 07424 I
servomechanisms / DESCR: 2-,
3-, and 4-component Flite-Line
servos, with or without electronics: use size 8 or size 11
Kearfott components. Single and
dual speed servos: DC and AC
integrating servos / USE: D-A,
A-D, coordinate and signal conversion: program actuation;
reference positioning: all
servo applications / - / 52
F. B. Maclaren {; Co., Inc., 15
Stepar Pl., Huntington Sta., L. I.
N. Y. 11746 / servo systems I
DESCR: custom designed electromechanical assemblies to perform
addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, integral ion, differentiation or followup and data
conVersion functions, in both
military and industrial applications / USE: all instrument servo applications / varhble, depending on application I S2
Moog Inc., Industrial Div., East
Aurora, N. Y. / computer memory
access I DESCR: servo components
and systems, primarily electrohydraulic / USE: to position
pick-off heads in disk type computer memory systems I $200 to
$3000 I S2
Reeves Instrument Co. -- see C9
lear Siegler, Inc., Power Equipment Div. -- see Cl3
S3.
SIMULATORS
Aircraft Armaments, Inc., York Rd.,
Cockeysville, Md. 21030 / simulators I DESCR: air traffic control, missile training (REDSTONE,
SERGEANT. ATLAS. POLARIS. NIKEHERCULES), anti-submarine warfare
training, space vehiCle, radar
target, 3-axis flight / USE:
training, test and evaluation of
personnel, comppnents and systems
/ custom / S3
Burr-Brown Research Corp., 6730 S.
Tucson Blvd., Tucson, Ariz. 85706
/ analog simulator/oomputer /
DESCR: accurate Simulator/computer utilizing high quality,
field proven Burr-Brown operat ional amplifiers / USE: for
teaching physical dynamics to
university undergraduates in all
engineering and physical science
departments I $3000 to $50,000
I S3
COMRESS, Ine., 2120 Bladensburg
Rd., N.t., Washington, D. C.
200lB / SCERT (systems and computers, evaluation & review
technique) / DESCR: computerized simulation system for evaluating hardware/software. Applications are simulated through
the program which outputs specific data regarding costs and
performance on computer configurations I USE: managing computer
installations; equipment selection. enhancement and design,
and as a guide in programming J
variable depending on specific
job requirements I S3
Exact Electronics Inc. -- see C12
RRR-Singer, Inc. -- see 11
Philbrick Researches, Inc. -- see
C9
Scientific Data Systems, Inc.,
1649 Seventeenth St., Santa
Monica, Calif. 90404 I simulators, digital/ SDS DES-I an
extension of SOS 9300 generalpurpose digi tal computer; hybrid
interface equipment can link any
SOS computer to virtually any
analog computer creating integrated hybrid computing system I
USE: simulation applications and
the solution of differential equations I approx. $200,000 (DES-l)
! S3
Scienti fie Educat ional Products
-- see E2
Technical Measurement Corp., Telemetrics Div •• 2630 S. Fainiew
St., Santa Ana, Calif. 92704 /
510 PCM simulator / DESCR:
solid state; 5 programmable 33
bit words with main and subframe capabilities / USE:
checkout data handling equipment I $10,000 to $15,000 I S3
Technical Measurement Corp., Telemetries Div., ·a I 513 stored
program simulator I DESCR:
solid state PCM, PAM. PDM programmable simulator; can simu-
8/66
21:020.020
DIRECTORIES
late any fomat / USE: checkout
of data handling equipment /
$20,000, to $30,000 / 53
TRW Systems Group, 1 Space Park.
Redondo Beach, Co IIf. 90278 /
simulators / capabi 11 ty for
development and application of
simJlation models of systems to
evaluate systems design Bnd
recom'Dend improvements / -
I -
/53
URS Corp. -- see 02, Pl2
54.
STORAGE SYSTEIIS
Bryant Computer Products. Div. of
Ex-Cell-O Corp., 850 Ladd Rd.,
Walled Lake, Mich. 48088 / AUTOLIFT R drum sys tems / DESCR:
rotating, digital, mass storage,
random access. Standard line
to meet needs. Capacities of
706,500 to 100 million bi t5 /
USE: computer peripheral equipm-,nt / on request / 54
Bryant Computer Products, Div. of
Ex-Cell-O Corp., 0a / lIodel 2A
Series 4000 disc file systems /
DESCR: rotating, digital, mass
storage, random acceSSj modular,
non-interchangeable discs.
Available one to 26 discs,
equal to capaci ties of 83 million to 3.8 billion bits /
USE: computer peripheral
equipment / on request / 54
Bryant Computer Products, Div. of
Ex-CeU-O Corp., *a / PhD drum
systems / OESCR: rotating,
digital data, mass storage,
random accessj up to four independent channels of simultaneous random access to same
store; capacities up to 340
million bits / USE: computer
peripheral equipment / on request / 54
Control Data Corp., -- see Cl4
Cook Electrical Co., Data Stor
Div., "6401 W. Oakton, Morton
Grove, Ill. 60053 / magnetic
storing systems / OESeR: incremental, continuous magnetic
tape readers and recordersj
systems engineering assistance
/ USE: various applications /
$4000 to $15,000 / 54
OA-PEX Company -- see C8
DI/AN Controls, Inc. -- see 12,
Cl3
Digi tal Devices -- see D5, 112
Dolin lIetal Products, Inc., 315
Lexington Ave., Brooklyn, N.Y.
11216 / mobile storage systems
/ DESCR: adaptation of existing storage equipment on movable carriages rolling on
tracks one row in front of
another to increase capaci ties
/ USE: where space is limited
/ - / S4
Fabri-Iek Inc. -- see E2, M2
Image Instruments, Inc •• 2300
Washington St., Newton Lower
Falls, lass. 02162 / storage
tube systems / OESCR: storage
tube systems used for displaying computer output for off
line processing or man-machine
decision making / USE: temporary storage for output to be
visually displayed / $15,000
to $30,000 / 54
Trak Electronics Co., Inc. -see Cl9
55.
STORAGE, MAGNETIC
Ampex Corp. -- see 03, 12, and
112
Bryant Computer Products, Div. of
Ex-Cell-O Corp. -- see 54
Control Data Corp.
Cook Electric Co., Data Stor Oiv.
-- see 54
Data Conununications, Inc. -- see
C7
Data Products Corp. -- see D8
Digi tal Development Corp .• 5575
Kearny Villa Rd., San Diego,
Calif. 92123 / magnetic storage
systems I DESCH: up to 13 commands; 8.5 msec. average access:
6 modular capaci ties 7.5 to 250
million bi ts per uni t. Up to 8
disc units per system; simultaneous mul tiple access I/O
channels / USE: computer memory / $15,000 to $2,000,000 /
55
Electronic Memories, Inc. -- see
12
8/66
teJ"lll~nal variety, and long life;
available with silver and gold
contacts / USE: limit and control / - / 56
MICRO SWITCH, a Dlv. of Honeywell,
•• I Sub lub-miniature Iwltches
/ DESCR:· tinhlt of snap-action
Iwitcbel, the "15Xl" weigh. 1/28
ounce; plated turret-type ierminalsi variety of actuators; UL,
CSA Usted at 1 amps 28 vdc or
115/230 vac capacity / USE:
limit and control functions / /56
'
MICRO SWITCH, a DIY. of Honeywell,
·s / V3 miniature basic snapaction switch / DESCR: postage
stamp sized; has wide variety of
terminals, contact arrangements,
operating characteristics, long
operating life (over 10 million).
General purpose types. UL , CSA
listed at IS amps 125/250 vac:
1/4 amp vdc / USE: limit and
control functions I 56
General Instrument Corp., lIagneHead Div. t 13040 S. Cer he,
Hawthorne, Calif. 90250 / magnetic disc memory system '/
OESeR: electronics to interface with any data source;
median access time from 5 to 20
millisecondsj up to 50 million
hi ts of storage / USE: inventory control, process control.
cODlllunications, mul tiplexing.
data logging. data buffer /
$3000 to $50,000 / 55
General Instrument Corp ••• agneHead Div., *0 / magnetic drum
memory system / DESCR: electronics to interface with any
data source: median access time
from 5-20 .millisecondsj up to
10 million bits of storage /
USE: inventory control. process contrOl, cOlllnunications,
mul tiplexing. data logging,.
data buffer / $5000 to $100,000
/ 55
General Precision, Inc., Librascope Group -- see 112
H"neywell, Inc •• Electronic Data
Processing Div •• 60 Walnut St.,
Wellesley Hills, lIa ... 02181 /
mass memory fUe / DESCR: magnetic card storage and retrieval i 15 to 300 million character s / USE: data processor
peripheral / $29,250 to
$100,125 / 55
Midwestern Instruments, Inc.,
Subsidiary of Tele Corp.
Scientific Data Systems. Inc. -08, 12, 1'3
56.
57.
SWITCHES, STEPPING
Jamel Cunningham Son & Co., Inc.
-- lee 56
58.
SYNCHROS
Clifton Precision ProdUCts, Div.
of Litton Industries
General Precision, Inc., Kear1'ott
Products Oiv •• 1150 McBride Ave ••
Little Falls, N. J. 07424 /
synchros / DESCR: low and high
Z hi-accuracy CX's, CDX's, TX's,
TR's, induction pots, multispeed synchros, RX's, RDX's,
RC's and tandem synchros ranging
from size 5 to 100 / USE: data
transmission. computing systems
and servos I - I S6
Reeves Instrument Co. -- see C9
Technical Measurement Corp., Telemetries Div., 2830 S. Fairview
St., Santa Ana, Calif. 92704 /
6723 bit synchronlzeT / DESCH:
regenerates PCM data to improve
SIN ratio, g~nerates 4 phases of
clock, converts.·1Iata to NRZ-S(L)
and NRZ-S(L) under program control / -' / $25,000 to $30,000 /
56
SWITalES
James Cunningham Son & Co., Inc.,
10 Carriage St., Honeoye Falls,
N.Y. / Cunningham crossbar
switch / Df;SCR: coordinately
actuated switch matrix constructed in 8 3 axis cartesian
format; a co-linear line contact arrangement permits a
shielded and balanced system
/ USE: for switching and
routing binary and digi tal
data. Sampling. mul tiplexing
and scanning of analog information / $180 to $1800 / 56
Electro-iliniatures Corp., 600
Huyler St., So. Hackensack,
N.J. 07606 / cODlllutator
swi tches / DESCH: circular
plastic compounds into which
is embedded various metal segments or rings. Unit rotates;
contact wi th rotating unit made
by brushes / - / $10 to $3000
59.
SYSTEMS ENGINEERING
Advance Data Systems -- see CIS
Aircraft Armaments, Inc. -- see 53
Ampex Corp. -- lee 12, M2. and Rl3
Auerbach Corp. -- see CIS
Bonner & Moore Associates, Inc.
-- see 02, II, and P12
Booz, Allen Applied Research, Inc.
-- see CI4, CI5
The Bristol Co., Waterbury, Conn.
06720 / systems engineering /
DESCH: engineer and fabricate
components and packaged systems
for recording, controlling and
telemeterlng / USE: analog or
digital techniques i loggers
(including computer-based equipment); supervisory systems;
instrumentation; panels: consoles
/ no average estimate can be
given / S9
The Bunker-Ramo Corp. -- see 11
COntrol Data Corp. -- see C14
Cook Electric Co., Data Star Div.
-- see 54
James Cunningham Son & Co., Inc. t
10 Carriage St., Honeoye Falls,
N. Y. / systems engineering /
DESCR: custom electronic systems
involving switching. routing or
scanning of high speed digital
data or low level analog Signal
Inrormatlon / - / N/A / 59
Decision Systems Inc.
Di s con Corp.
Ferranti-Packard Electric Ltd.,
Industry St., Toronto 15. Ontario,
Canada / systems engineering I
DESCR: design and manufacture of
cormnercial and military digital
systems I USE: various I varies
/ 59
General AtronicI Corp. -- see CI
General Instrument Corp., Radio
Receptor Div., 100 Andrews Rd ••
Hicksville, N. Y. 11802 / general
support equipment / OESeR': custom
design spee1al purpose digital
sYltems utilizing general purpole
or special purpose computers / - I
- /59
HRB-Singer, Inc. -- see 11
/56
Engineered Electronics Co •• 1441
E. Chestnut St •• Santa Ana,
Calif. 92702 / rotary thumhwheel swi tches I OESCR: compact; legible switch / USE:
to convert dial setting to
eqUipment code and to provide
In-line readout / $3.80/switch
to $25/5wl toh / 56
F & F Enterprises, Inc., Chicago
Switch Div., 2035 Wabansia Ave.,
Chicago, Ill. 60647 / switches
/ DESCR: panel swl tches lighted
or unlighted, rocker or push
button up to 6PDT. momentary
or maintained circui ts, push
push. plug into PC board / USE:
progranming, instruction. read
out / 50t to $6 / S6
Litton Industries, USECO Dh.
MICRO SWITCH, a Div. ,or Honeywell,
11 W. Spring St., Freeport. Ill.
61032 IlIltniatute toggle switches
/ DESCH: TW Series has 10 tiny,
lightweight, long-life SPOT,
DPD'I' .witche, with 5 different
circuitry options each to g·tve
widest range of 2 and 3 positions maintained and momentary
Versions / USE: large scale
computer maintanance panels;
military and commercial electronIc use / - / S6
MICRO SWITCH, a Div. or Honeywell,
*a / Series 2 lighted pushbuttons
/ DESCR: round or rectangular
display; over 60 different
colored display screenl; wide
choice in circuitry and handling
power in 30 different switch
units / USE: control and display functions / - / 56
MICRO SWITCH, a Dlv. or Honeywel!,
*a / "SM" subminiature switches
/ DESCH: "SM" SPOT switches combine Imall size, light weight
with ample precision operation,
A
AUERBACH
Innovation Conlultants, Inc., 4 £.
State 51.. Doylestown, Po. 18901
/ systems engineering / DESCR:
allfstance in problem definition,
computer Iystems ~elign and total
Iystem engineering / USE: publishing. advertising, marketing.
printing, education, allociations
/ per diem / 59
Keystone Computer Associates, Inc.
-- see Pl2 .
Reeves InstrUllent Co. -- see C9
Scientific Data Systems, Inc.,
1649 Seventeenth St., Santa
Monica, Calif. 90404 / systems
engineering I DESCR: complete
systems engineering services in
conjunction with computer system
sales / - / no charge for systems
engineering if 80% or more of
system price· is represented by
SDS standard products, including
50S digl tal computer / 59
Scientific Data Systems, Inc. -see Cll
Merle Thomas Corp. -- see C15
TRW Systems Group, I Space Park.
Redondo Beach. Calif. 90278 /
systems engineering / DESCR:
total capability to provide
systems engineering' and technical
direction / USE: data systems
application. / - / 59
URS Corp. -- see II
Wolf Research & Development Corp.,
P. O. Box 36, Baker· Ave., W.
Concord. Mass. 01761 / systems
engineering / DESCR: computer
applications, data control complexes for satellite systems.
management information and control systems, feasibility studies,
hardware configuration and realtime controls / - / 59
TI.
TAPE HANDLERS
Ampex Corp., Computer Products Div .•
9931 W. Jefferson Blvd. t Culver
City; Calif. 90230 / famlly of
servo-driven, interface-compatible,
single capstan digital tape transports / OESCR: maximum tape
speeds; Model TM-7, 36 ips;
Model TM-9. 75 ips; Model TM-ll.
120 ips; Model TM-12, 150 ips.
Dual or multiple speeds, single
within given ranges, packing
densities 200, 556. 600 cpi
available all models / - / - / TI
Ampex Corp. -- see 03
Bell Telephone Mfg. Co •• Automation
Systems Div .• Berkenrodelel 33.
Hoboken. Belgium / digital magnetic tape handlers / DESCR: a
wide choice of tape speeds as well
as IBM compatibility on 7 and 9
tracks / USE: for connection to
any computer / $9000 to $17,000 /
Tl
Chalco Engineering Corp. -- see Rl
Control Data Corp .• 8IDO 34th Ave.
So., Minneapolis. Minn. 55440 I
680, 685 and 690 Magnetic Tape
Certifiers / DESCR: automatically
inspect magnetic tape for variety
of faults; also sell certified
magnetic tape. plus certification
services Dnd actual tape certification equipment / - / - / Tl
Cook Electric Co., Data Star Div .•
6401 W. Oakton, Morton Grove, Ill.
6005S-1 tape handlers / DESCR:
magnetic tape ·readers and recorders; militarized paper tape
readers ./ USE: data acquisition
and equipment testing / $4000 to
$20,000 / Tl
Cycle Equipment Co., P. O. Box 307,
Los Gatos, Calif. 95030/ cycle
tape handlers (perforated tape)
I DESCR: cyc.le winders. feeders,
unwlnders and tape transports;
speeds up to 35" per second with
3" diameter core; 52" per second
with· NAB hub in reel sizes to 8"
/ USE: communications industry,
data processing industry, printing
industry (automatic typesetting),
etc. / $13 to $480 / Tl
DA-PEX Company -- see ce
Data-link Corp., Box 117, Los Altos,
'Calif. 94022 / D-L 40 SpllcerGauge-Punch / OESCR: punched tape
splicer with registration gauge
and ,manual code hole punch / USE:
splicer section holds tape; punch
will punch individual codes;
gauge verifies correct tape
jointing / $85 / Tl
Data-link Corp., 0. / D-L 45 Unwinder / DESCH: center feed
unwlnder for 5-6-7-8 channel
punched paper tape / USE: to
/
BUYERS' GUIDE
21:020.021
teed tape into EDP or automatic
equipment from the cenler of
wound tape / $20 / Tl
Data-link Corp., ·8 / punched tape
winder I OESCR: electric winder
3/4" or 1" I split or demountable
reel, 35 to 70 CPS with friction
clutch drive with 2 oz. +1/2 oz.
pull at hub / USE: wind-paper
tape from original data equipment / $75 to $95 / Tl
Dresser Products I Inc," 112-114
Baker St .• Providence, R. 1.
02905 I #6501 electric tape
rewinder / DESCR: designed to
rewind punched tape from unwind
can onto tape reader reel at 225
feet/min. Unwind can holds full
roll of tape / USE: rewinding
tape / $107 to $152 I Tl
Hewlett-Packard Co., Datamec Div.,
345 Middlefield Rd"
MOUntain
View, Calif. 94041 / 0-2020 digital magnetic tape unit
I OESeR:
1 or 2 tape speeds 1 j ps to 45
ips: packing densi ty 200, 556
and 800 bpi j 7 or 9 track / USE:
computer tape system / $4800 to
$13,000 I Tl
Hewlett-PackBl'd Co., Datamec Div ••
0a / 0-3029 digital magnetic tape
uni t / DESCR: replacement for
IBM 729-11 or 729-V; low cost,
plug interchangeable / USE: with
IBM 1400 or 7000 series computers
/ $14,500 / Tl
Hewlett-Packard Co., Datamec Div.,
·a I 0-3030 digital magnetic
tape unit / DESCR: tape speed
75 ips: packing density 200,
556 and 000 bpi: single and multiple units / USE: computer tape
system / $10,000 to $16,000 / Tl
Honeywell, Inc .• Electronic Data
Processing Div., 60 Walnut St.,
Welle' ley Hills, Mass, 02101 I
magnetic tape unit / DESCR:
digital unit. 1/2" and 3/4"
tape, wide variety of speeds and
densities / USE: data processor
peripheral I $10,000 to $40,000
/Tl
i
(
Invac Corp. -- see T9
Uidwestern Instruments, Inc •• Subsidiary of Tele COrp •• 41st &
Sheridan Rd., Tulsa, Okla. 74101
/ tape transport systems / OEseR:
complete series of tape transport
systems; low to high performance
range with all IBM format COMpatibilities; on-line use lfith
all maj or computer manufacturers
equipments / USE: on-line computer, off-line data processing.
data handling and data acquisition I - I Tl
Monarch Metal Products, Inc. -see Dl
Omni-Data, Dh. of Borg-Warner
Corp., 511 N. Broad St., PbHadelphia, Pa. 19123 I paper tape
reelers / DESCR: high-speed
unidirectional and bidirectional
tape handler, speeds up to 100"
per sec. in either direction
with reel sizes up to l~" /
USE: feed and take up paper
tape tram readers, punches and
recorders / $705 to $2000 / Tl
Potter Instrument Co., Inc., 151
Sunnyside Blvd., Plainview,
N. Y. 11003 I computer peripheral equipment and systems /
OESeR: digital magnetic tape
handlers and systems: input and
output of data to and from computer-an-line and off-line /
USE: electronic data processing
/T!
(
Prestoseal Mfg. Cerp .. 37-12 lOOth
St., Corona 1 N. Y. / paper tape
splicer / DESCR: splicer for
punched paper tape. no cements
or splicing patches used. Bond
is a fusion between the fibers
of the tape, 200 splices per
hour / - / $672 / Tl
Teletype Corp.
12.
(
"'-.
TAPE, MAGNETIC
Ampex Corp., Magnetic Tape Oiv.,
401 Broadway, Redwood Ci ty,
Calif. 94063: (manufacturing
facilities) P. O. Box 190,
Opelika, Ala. 36801 / lIIagnetic
tape / OESeR: research, development, and production / USE: CDIJlputer, instrumentation. video
and audio recordJng / - / T2
Audio Devices, Inc., 235 East 42nd
St., New York. N. Y. / computer
tape / DESCR: magneUc recording
tape. Variety or reel types and
reel colors, in plastic cases,
and with reel collars. / USE:
computer systems using magnetic
tope / vories with size and quantity I T2
Certron Corp., 2233 Burry Ave.,
Los Angele., Coli!. 90064 / magnetic tape certification /
DESCR: certify new magnetic
tape, recert:lty and rehabilitate
used magnetic tape / - / $6 to
$12 / T2
COMPtrrRON, INC., Member of the
BASF Group, 122 Calvary S1.,
Waltham, Ma ... 02154 I COMPUTAPE / OESCR: high qual! ty,
high density magnetic tape for
computers and instrumentation
exclusively. Guaranteed at 556,
000, or 1000 bpi. Full-width
certification available / USE:
computers and instrumentation
/ available upon request / T2
COntrol Data Corp. -- see Tl
Cook Electric Co., Data Star Oiv.
-- see Tl
Honeywell Electronic Data Processing, Supplies Div., 60 Walnut
St •• Wellesley Hills. Mass.
02101 / ~ inch magnetic tape /
DESCR: magnetic oxide-coated,
Mylor-base, rolled in various
lengths from 700 feet to 2400
feet on heavy plastic reels /
USE: store information / $19.50
to $36.50 per reel· / 12
Honeywell Electronic Data Processing, Supplies Div .. °a I 3/4"
magnetic tape / DESCR: magnetic
oxide coated, Mylar-base. rolled
in various lengths from 700 feet
to 2450 feet on heavy metal
reels / USE: store information
/ $30 to $66 per reel / 12
Informat ion for Industry, Inc.,
1000 Connecticut Ave., N. W.,
Wa,hlngton, O. C. 20036 I magnet i c tape Uni term Index /
DESCR: sale owners of data
base covering all U. S. chemically related patents issued
since 1950 to date. Programs
available for IBM, Burroughs,
and CDC equipment / USE:
patent searching by law firms
and research department personnel I $6600 to $11,900 I 12
Memorex Corp., 1180 Shulman Ave.,
Santa Clara, Calif. 95052 /
preCision magnetic computer
tape / OESCR: heavy duty, long
wearing: specially treated surface; low level modulation
moise; standard configurations
/ USE: on digital transports /
- 112
Micronetic Corp .• 3127 Colvin St.,
Alexandria. Va. 22314 / Micronetic 404 magnetic tape / DESCR:
patented 'thermosetting binder
system / - / $23 to $29 / T2
Reeves Soundcraft Corp., 15, Great
Pasture Rd., Danbury, Conn.
06813 / magnetic tape for computers / DESCR: base material
of Mylar film or approved equivalent: tapes of various lengths:
magnetic performance measured on
aU channels of IBIt-compatible
tape drive: photo-sensing markers
I USE: data storage / $10 to
$40 / T2
T3.
TAPE, FILING SYSTEMS
Ampex Corp. -- see 12
Cook Electric Co., Data Star Div.
-- see Tl
Dolin Metal Products, Inc., 315
Lexington Ave .. Brooklyn, N. Y.
11216, I "Tape-Stor" units I
OESeR: build-up type reel units,
2 .stock sizes with reel inserts
for 4 standard size reels;
special sizes and types also
available / USE: storage of data
tapes I $15 to $10 / T3
Monarch Metal Products, Inc. -see 01
Ray Myers Corp., 1302 E. Main St.,
Endicott, N. Y. 13760 / tape
library / OESCR: storage for
magnetic tapes I - / - I T3
'Sdentific Data Systells, Inc.,
1649 Seventeenth St., Santa
lIonica, Calif .. 90404 / tape,
magnetic--filing systems I OESCH:
single-chAinel tape transport
(HAGPAK) \t!I , transrer rate 1500
char/sec; leven-channel uniU,
den,itie' 200, 556, 800 bits/
inch, read/write speeds 60, 75,
120 inches/sec, transfer rates
12, IS, 33, 41.7, 40, 60, 96 kc
/ - / $15,000 (MAGPAKl to $43,000
I T3
Scientific Data Systems, Inc. -see U2
TAB Products Co. -- tee Dl
Wheeldex, Inc., 1000 N. Division
St .. Peek.ki 11, N. Y. 10567 /
mechanized fUes ond continuous
pinfeed forms / DESCR: motorized
shelve. and simUar automatic
tiling equipment for magnetic
tape/-/-/T3
~right Line Div., Barry Wright
Corp., 160 Gold Star Blvd ••
Worcester, UalS. 01606 / TAPESEAL computer tope storage system
I DESCR: system developed around
flexible polyethylene belt which
wraps around tape reel; protects
and increase. storage capacity or
reeh up to 100% when stored in a
cannister / USE: belt (TAPE
SEAL) allows the hanging of reel
of tape for storage / $1.50 for
belt, equipment in wide price
range I T3
T4.
TAPE, READERS
Addo-X, Inc. -- see R7
Carlton Controls Corp. -- see R6
Cook Electric Co., Data Stor Div.
-- see Tl
Electronic Engineering Co. of Calif.,
P. O. Box 58, Santa Ans, Caut.
92702 / EECO 05lA/052 tape search
& control system / DESCR: reads
time on magnetic tape in either
forward or reverie direction.
Front panel selection of all IRIG
codes; millisecond output resolution. Other codes available / / $4500 to $8800 / T4
Midwestern Instruments, Inc. t Subsidiary of Tele Cerp.
Mohawk Data Sciences Corp. I Rarter
St .. Herkimer, N. Y. 13350 /
Model 700 buffered tape unit /
DESCH: provides universal interrace to output BCD character
serial, bit parallel reading.
half-inch tape with 80 character
bJock NRZ recording, accepts and
records BCD input / USE: input
or output device where magnetic
t ape is i nvo 1ved / $0000 to
'$10,000 I T4
Omni-Data, Div. of Borg-Warner lee Tl
5-1 Electronics, Inc., 103 Park
Ave., Nutley, N. J. 07110 I digital magnetic tape transports /
DESCR: ruggedized envlronraental,
computer-compatible: only models
qualified to MIL-E-5400 and
Mlt.-:-I-26600; utilized in airDorne,
shipboard, vehicular, oceanographic· and seismic requirements.
Recording methods: RZ, RB, NRZ,
NRZI, and phase modulation / USE:
on and orf line recording and
reading or digital information in
computer and data acquhit ion application. / $10,000 to $25,000 /
T4
T5.
TAPE, RECORDERS
~:~i~: ~rrg~o /~~2' O~;~~~~ci Qi)
instrumentation recorder / DESCR:
6 magnetic tape cartridges contalniitg endless-loop tapes up to
1200 ft. in length: records or
reproduces data in up to 4 channels / USE: hu.lt recording,
vibration data analysis, delay
simulation, proceu control,
phY'iologlcal/biological data
aequisition I $3200 to $5700 / T5
DB!:Pil:~_~ngATA~:A~~:~!~_Di v. ,
AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
T6.
TAPE, REELS
Audio Devices, Inc. -- see T2
Cook Electric CO •• Data Stc.»r Div.
-- see Tl
.
Cycle Equipment Co., P. O. Box 307,
Los Gato" Cali f. 95030 I tape
reell (perforated tape) / DESCR:
avai lable in 6", a", 1OJ2" and
12" diameters; adj ustable for
widths to accommodate 11/16".
7/a" and I" wide tape; detachable
solid round 3" diameter plastic
core / USE: on w~deTs reeders
and tape transports in accumulaUng, dispensing and storing
tape I $17 to $24 I T6
Uemorex Corp. -- see T2
Omni-Oata, Dh. of Borg-Warner -see Tl
I
T7.
TAPE, PAPER
Arvey Corp., Lamcote Div., 3500 N.
Kimball Ave .. , Chicago, Ill. 60618
Ampex Corp. t Audio and Video Communications Div., 401 Broadway,
Redwood City, Calif. 94063: (manufacturing facilities) 600 Wooten
Rd., Colorado Springs. Colo.
00909 I tape recorders I DESCR:
videotape rp.corders, color and
black-and-white; professional
audio· recorders / - I - / T5
Ampex Corp. -- see C21, C31, 02.
12, and Tl
Con.olidated ElectrOdynamics Corp.,
360 Sierra Madre Villa, PSJ8dena I
Cali!. 91109 / magnetic tape recorder/reproducers I DESCR: analog and digital .ystems available.
Types incl ude portable, 1.5 mc
response, extra wide and double
bandwidth, general laboratory,
high-speed digital and continuous
loop / - / - I T5
.
Datapulse Inc., KRS Instruments Div.,
mentation recorder / DESCR:
single tape continuous-loop
tridge with reverse and fast
forward operating modes, pushbutton controls. solid-state
electronics / USE: record Bnd
reproduce data / $950 to $2390 /
T5
Genisco Technology Corp., Systems
Div., -- see A2
Leuch Corp., Controls Div., 717 N.
COney Ave., Azusa, Calif. /
DDR-3300 digital recorder/reproducer system / OESCR: weighs leS's
than 125 lbs., works off 12 vol til,
operates during 109 vibration;
quantizes and encodes analog Signals, records them in computer
compatible digital format / USE:
oil industry exploration / - / T5
Leach Corp .• Controls Div., *a /
&ITR-3200 recorder/reproducer /
DESCR: provides 14 channels analog and FM or 16 digital channels:
7 tape speeds; tape capacity 2400
Ft. standard / USE: high environmental applications including aircraft. missile, nuclear test, etc.
I - / T5
Lufkin Research Laboratories, 210 W.
131st St., Los Angeles, Calif.
90061 / digi tal magnetic tape
recorders / OESeR: portable, scientific, airborne and keyboard recorders; battery powered and cartridge loaded / - / $1100 to $2300
I T5
Midwestern Instruments, Inc., Subsidiary of Tele Cerp.
S-I Electronics, Inc. -- see T4
Texas Instruments Inc., Industrial
Products Group, 3609 Buffalo
Speedway, Houston. Tex. 77006 /
Series 500/1000 digital tape
transports / DESCR: precision
magnetic tape transports lor recording digital data; tape path
permanently alJgned for life of
instrument / USE: in the field or
laboratory: ",herever requirements
make n portable instrument neces.ary/-/T5
ca~-
/ perforator tape / DESCR: mylar
reinforced paper, foil, and metallized foil combinations; all
standard colors, widths and thicknesses / USE: for photoelectric
and electro-mechanical readers /
- / T7
Chalco Engineering Corp. -- see HI
Data-link Corp •• Box 117. Los Altos,
Calif. 94022 / O-L 00 Serie.,
splice correction tape / DESCR:
,elf-adhering tape, I ft.
lengths, for 5, 6, 7, 8 channel
tape to make tape splices or
cover code error~ for hand
punched corrections 0-5 code
levels) / USE: with a splicer
and punch / $0.50 to $15 I T7
Invac Corp., 26 Fox Rd., Bea~ lIili
Industrial Park, Waltham, Mass.
02154 / Model R-125 photoelectric
tape reader / OESeR: accommodates 5 to 8 level, 11/16 to I"
wide ·tape ror photoelectric
reading at 0-150 char/sec
Bsynchronousln desk or panel
mounting-exceeds EIA standards /
USE: peripheral equipment for
data processing applications /
$750 unit p.r.ice / T7
Paper Manufacturers Co. -- see P4
TO.
TAPE, PAPER-FILING SYSTEIIS
Dresser Products, Inc •• 112-114
Baker St., Providence, R. L
02905 / tape file I OESCR: data
8/66
DIRECTORIES
21:020.022
processing fOlders: six styles,
letter size documents; two
styles, legal size documents.
Available in various colors Bnd
wi tb one I two or four tape
pockets / USE: transporting and
fil log punched paper tape and
punched cards with associated
data / $89/M to $120/M / T8
Wbeeldex, Inc., 1000 N. Dhision
St., Peekskill, N. Y. 10567 /
mechanized tues and continuous
pinfeed forms / OESeR: motorized and manual files for all
material sizes trom cards to
correspondence Including paper
and magnetic tape., reels, etc.
/-/-/T8
19.
TAPE. PAPER-PDNalES
Adda-X, Inc. -- see 03
Control Data Corp.
Cook Electric Co., Data Stor Div.
- .. see Tl
Creed & Co.Ltd. -- see R7
Digital Electronic Machines, Inc.
-- see 01
Iovse Corp., 26 Fox Rd., Bear Hill
Industrial Park, Waltham, MalIS.
02154 / Model P-135 tape punch /
DESCR: accommodates 5 to 8
level, 11/16 to 1" wide tape tor
punching at 0-35 char/sec, DC
operated-exceeds EIA standards I
USE: peripheral equipment for
data pTOcesslng applications I
$460 unit price / T9
Robins Data Devices I
Inc~
-- see 01
Soroban Engineering I Inc. -- see R7
TlO.
TAPE, PAPER-READERS
Chalco Engineering Corp. -- see HI
Control Data Corp.
Creed & Co. r td. -- see R7
Electronio Engineering Co. of
Calif., P. O. Box 58, Santa Ana.
Cal! f. 92702 / EECO 5000 Series
photo block readers / DESCR: all
solid state drive photo electric
readout, 40-160 bit per block, 12
blocks per second. Eliminates
need for buffer storage I .. /
$1200 to $2700 / TlO
lnvsc Corp., 26 Fox Rd., Bear Hill
Industrial Park. WalthaM, Mass.
02154 / Model R-110 photoelectric
tape reader / DESCR:
acaO_G-
dates 5 to 8 level, 11/16 to I"
wide, tape for photoelectric
reading at 0-35 charI sec asynchronously; desk or panel mounting-exceeds EIA standards / USE:
peripheral equipment for data
proceSling applications / $470
unit price / TI0
!nvse Corp. -- see T7
Omnl-Data, Div. of Borg-Warner --
see TI
Rheem Electoonics, 5250 W. El
Segundo Blvd., Hawthorne, Calif.
90250 / punched ·tape spoo1ers /
DESCR: 15 to 100 IPS., rewind
200 IPS, for 8" and l~" reels:
gentle tape take-up during
spooling and reWind / USE:
automatic tape supply and take
up during tape reader operation
/ $700 to $2500 / TiO
Soroban Engineering, Inc. -- see
R7
Tally Corp. -- see R7
Wang Labl., Inc. -- lee ~t 06,
R7
Til.
TELEMETERING SysTEMS
Airpax Electronics I Inc., P. O.
Box 8488, Fort Lauderoale, F18~
33310 / telemetry / OESeR:
frequency discriminator, tape
speed compensated I USE: - /
$395 / Tll
Astrodata, Inc.
The Bendix Corp., Bendix-Pacific
Div., 11600 Sherman Way, Hollywood, Calif. 91605 / telemetry
systems / DESCR: variety of
standard and special purpose
telemeter transmitting and receiving systems, IRIG FM/FM
standards used I USE: missile
and space flight test programs
/ $2000 to $10,000 / Tll
The Bristol Co., Waterbury, Conn.
06720 / tel.emeters / DESCR:
Metameter~ analog systems
(impulse duration type): Metatronic analog frequency-type
systems: digital telemeteriog
111!;F.: measurement. transmission
8/66
and readout of variables in
process and utility applications / $500 to $1000 / Til
CAE Industries Ltd., P. O. Box
6166, Montreal 3, Quebec,
Canada / telepath telemetry I
DESCR: on-line open and closed
loop systems unattended remote
control and supervhion of
remotely located Itation equipment and processes / USE: low
speed te legraph and data speed
operation applications in utilities, pipeline, process con ..
trol industry / $5000 to $20,000
per site / Tll
DI/AN Controls, Inc. -- see CI3
Electl'O-Mechanical Research. Inc.,
P. O. Box 100, Sarasota, Fla.
33378 / telemetering instrumentation, components, systems
/DESCR: data acquisition
coding, transmission, reception,
demodulation and/or decommutation including: fm, pam, pdm,
pcm: telemetry and data processing systems / USE: test and
monitoring of aerospace vehicles / not applicable / T11
General Devices. Inc. -- see C28,
01
General Electric Co., Electronic
Components Sales Operation
General Instrument Corp., Detense
and Engineering Products Group.
Radio Receptor Div., Andrews Rd.,
Hicksville, N. Y. 11802 / telemetering systems / DESCR: micro ..
wave telemetry transmitter,
lightweight compact equipment
capable at 15 watts CW output
power in the 2-3 KMC telemetry
band / IJSE: missiles, aircraft
and aerospace eovi ronment /
$3000 to $12,000 / Tll
Genisco Technology Corp .. , Systems
Div., 18435 Susana Rd., Compton,
Calif. 90221 / telemetry checkout equipment / DESCR: receivers and discriminators for
processing of telemetered
signals / USE; ground and production checkout / under $100
and up / T11
International Electronic Research
Corp., 135 W. Magnolia Blvd.,
Burbank, Calif. 91502 / telemetry systems / DESCR: transmitters, voltage controlled
oscillators. mixer amplifiers to
complete RF systems / USE: airborne or aerospaoe telemetry for
data link information / - / T11
Moore AlJociatei: inc., 893".•
American St., SaD Carlos, CaUf.
/ data acquisition systems /
OESeR: time division multiplex
systems (alarm supervision.
remote control, digital telemetering data); also inputoutput packages for computer
interface, autOMatic sub-pro...
gram/controller operations related to data aCiUilitiOnS, and
USE; power
code converters
utility economic load dispatch;
hydroelectric dam operation controlling power ·generation, 011
well production economics and
test, etc. / $1800 and up / Tll
Quindar Electronics Inc., 60 Fadem
Rd., Springfield, N. J. 07081 /
solid state analog. and digital
telemeterlng / DESCR: analog
and digi tal telemeterlng modules
furnished with or w/o tone keyers
and converters, with or w/o
computer interface adapters (BCD
to decimal, etc.) / USE: for
data transmission and handling
/ $300 to $1500 / Til
Ste11armetrics, Inc., 210 E.
Ortega St., Santa Barbara. Calif.
93101 / 00-1024 digital deCOIIImutator / DESCH: ground-based
solid ,tate telemetry decommutat ion system featuring integral
10-blt digital output, continuous rate tuning, up. to 90 channel readout of standard IRIG
and special format signals / - /
approximately $17,000 / Tll
Stellametrics, Inc., "a / Series
200 • .""utators / OESeR: solid
state electronic COIIDDutatoTs
feature modular flexibility for
up to 120 channels on a lingle
unit. and slaving capability to
combine more than one unit in 1\
single package / USE: for m!ssile, space vehiCle an~. satellite telemetry applications /
$2000 to $4000 / T11
Technical Measurement Corp., Telemetrics Div., 2630 S. Fairview
I
A ..
AUERBACH
St., Santa Ana, CaUf. 92704 /
620 universal· PCM decollll!lutator I
DESCR: low colt univernl
system; ealily adaptable for all
exhting or proposed fixed POt
telemetry formatsj conditions
and decoaanutates / USE: PCM
telemetry signals / $45,000 to
$85,000 / T11
Transitel International Corp.
- .. lee C7
TRW Systems Group, 1 Space Park,
Redondo Beach, CaUf. 90278 /
telemetering systems / DESCR:
complete capability exists in
Pel! telemetry and· command decoder equipments j proven space
hardware / - / - / Tll
Weltinghouse Electric Corp ••
Electronic & Special ty Products
Group
T12.
THIN-FILMS, MAGNETIC
The Bunker-Ramo Corp. -- see Cl3
Haddonfield Research & Mfg. Co.,
121 Gill Rd., Haddonfield, N. J.
08033 / magnetic thin-fllms /
DESCR: "Memro-film" thin magnetic aUoy substrates and
planes i fabricated and etching
methodl; custom and standard
parts; maintaining quaU ty and
unifomity / USE: computer
memory appllcations / lOt per
bi t to 75. per bit / T12
T13.
TIMING DEVICES
Chrono-Iog Corp., 2583 West Chester
Pike, Broomall, Pa. 19008 /
digital clocks/calendars / DESCR:
electronic and electromechanical
time of day clocks/calendars to
provide digital time readings to
computers, data loggers, time
displays, and telemetry systems
/ USE: to provide decimal or
BCD time readings to digital
systems / $350 to $2500 / Tl3
throno-log Corp., "a / programmable
clock/calendar / DESCR: reads
date and time of day into memol'}'
under prograM control on IBM
7000, System/360 and CDC computers / USE: to provide date
and time for billing and job
identification on computers with
moni tor rout ines / $2500 to
$4500 / Ti3
throno-Iog Corp., "a / time code
generator/readers / DESCR: generate lertal time codes for
recording on analog tape recorders. Read back time code to
~dentify data recorded on tape
tOT time correlation and quick
look analysis / USE: telemetry,
wind tunnel tests, seismogTaphic
and oceanographic studies, etc.
/ $2490 to $5000 / Tl3
General Electric Co., Electronic
Components Sales OperatiC!n
Log-itek, Inc., 42 Central Drive,
Farmingdale. L. I., N. Y. 11735
/ digital clock / DESCR: generates time of day or elapsed time:
displays and makes available for
computer entry / USE: determine
computer time, count down, process time, etc. / $850 to $2000
/ TI3
Logitek. Inc., *a / tape search
and control / DESCR: searching
of magnetic tape to particular
time as recorded by time code
generator / USE: data correlation and editing / $4000 to
$22,000 / T13
Logitek, Inc., "8 / time code
generator / DESCR: generates
precise time hf01'lllat1on fOT
recording on magnetic tape / USE:
correlation and editing of recorded data / $4000 to $6000 /
T13
Logitek, Inc. -- see Tl3
TRW Systems Group. ~ Space Park,
Redondo Beach, Collf. 90278 /
timing devices / DESCR: latest
lIardll'a"!'e designs incorporate
modularity, flexibility for
broad spectrum of mission requirements / USE: programmerssequencers in spaceborne appli-.
cationl / - / Tl3
Ti4.
TRANSFORMERS
Aladdin Electronics -- see Tl5
AMP Inc., Eisenhower Blvd..
.
Harrisburg, Pa. 17105 / CAPITRON
tranlformers / DESCR: high and
low vol tage custom deSigned
transtormers / USE: applications requiring specially designed units / - / TI4
Hallllond Manufacturing Co. Ltd.,
394 Edinburgh Rd. North, Guelp_,
Ont., Canada / transformers /
DESCR: electronic. electrical:
all types, power, filament, audio,
miniature, printed circuit, inverter, torroids, isolating,
voltage adjusting. military,
chokes, reactors, control distribution; units to customer
speCification / USE: power
supplies, computer circuits,
machine operation / $1 to $250 /
Ti4
Litton Industries, Triad Distributor Div., 305 N. Briant St.,
Huntington, Ind. 46750 / transformers / DESCR: power (plate,
filament, isolation, toroidal,
rectifier); audio (input, output, interstage); filter reactors; low frequency instrumentat ion uni ts; pulse transformers / - / $2 to $30 / Ti4
T15.
TRANSFORMERS. PULSE
Aladdin Electronics. 703 Murfreesboro Rd·., Nashville. Tenn. 37210
/ pulle transformer / DESCH:
micro-miniature and miniature
sizes: point to point wiring or
pIc application. Commercial
and Mil-Spec. Standard catalog
items or special units. Engineering service / USE: coupling
circuits or blocking oscillator
circuits -- step-up or stepdown / 80. to $3.50 / Tl5
EL-RAO Manufacturing Co. t 4300
N. California Ave., Chicago,
Ill. 60618 / pulse transformers / DESCR: units for
both conventional wiring and
printed circuit applications.
Hennetically sealed and epoxy
encapsulated construction /
USE: interstage coupling:
pulse shaping: wide band
coupHng / 75t to $15 / TI5
HaDmond Manufacturing Co. Ltd.,
394 Edinburgh Rd. North, Guelph,
Ont., Canada / pulse transformer / DESCH: open bracket
mounting, epoxy cast, milit~ry,
to customer specifications only
/ USE: t ri gger SCRs, wave
shaping / $10 to $100 / Tl5
Litton Industries. Triad Distributor Oi v. -- see T14
Marksmen, Inc:
see C29
Technftrol Inc •• 1952 E. Allegheny
Ave., Philadelphia, Pa. 19134 /
pulse transformers / DESCR:
miniature, subminiature, plastic
molded; 10 ns to 5 ms pulse
width / - / 75t to $5 / TI5
.=
T16.
TRANSLATING EQUIPMENT
COMRESS, Inc., 2120 Bladensburg
Rd., N. E•• Washington, D. C.
20018 / TRANSIM (transiati on via
simUlation) / DESCR: 100% translation of computer programs from
a variety of source machines to
a variety of object machines /
OSE: program translation from
various computeTs to other incompatible machines / variable /
TI6
George Kelk Ltd. -- see C20
Trak Electronics Co., Inc. -lee C23
T17.
TYPEIYRITZRS, ELECTRIC,
CONTROLLED
Connecticut Technical Corp., 3000
Main St. t Hartford. Conn. 06120
/ input-output typewriters /
DESeR: heavy duty electric
machine moditled to furnish
coded and/or un coded input and/or
output. Any code, many special
modifications / USE: graphic
arts indultTy, computers, communications systems, data
logging, process control / $660
to $2000 / Tl7
Connecticut Technical Corp. -see 03
DU'l'8 Business Machines -- lee 02
Invac Corp. -- see OJ
Oki Electronics of America Inc.,
202 East 44th 5t., New York,
N. Y. 10017 / OKITYPER / DESCR l
alphanumeric typewriter with
BUYERS' GUIDE
intt'gral read punch / - I $2800
to $3400 .' 1'17
VI.
VISIIAI. OIrmn' ot:VICES
Astrodnto. ll1c.
The Bunker-Rnmo Corp •• Defense
Systems Div .• 8433 Fallbrook
Ave .• Canoga Park, Calif. 91304
I nR-90 visual analysis console
I OESeR: display console for
man/machine interface: stored
program control, combined
electronic and photographic
displays using rearported CRT I
USE: graphical data analysis:
dnta getle-ruter Center, Stillwa ter.
Okla. 74074 I OC 66
Education & research I coml svc / mM 7040;
peripheral equipment / Non-credit language
courses I S 5 I E 1956
Old Dominion College, School of Engineering, Box
6173, Norfolk, Va. 23508 I OC 66
Educational I coml svc / IBM 1620; mM 1622;
IBM 407; IBM 082; IBM 026 / Introduction to
Computer Programming; Intermediate Computer
Programming; Introduction to Engineeringi
Introduction to Digital Computers; Methods of
Engineering Analysis: Statistics and Quality
Control I S 22 I E 1964
Olympic College. Data Processing Dept. t 16th &
Chester, Bremerton, Wash. / -c 66
Training systems programmers / IBM 1620 &
support equipment I Computer courses. 2-year
curriculum students I S 4 / E Orange Coast College, 2701 Fairview Rd •• Costa Mesa.
Calif. / ·C 66
Education I IBM 1401, IBM 1620. Unit record
equipment / Introi Unit Record; Programming:
Systems courses / 5 9 / E 1947
Orange County Commu_nity College, Middletown. N. Y.
OC 66
Administrative & education / Unit record
equipment / Basic Machine Operation and Wiring; Programming. Full curriculum being
planned for data proceSSing I expect switch
to a computer next few months / 5 4 / E 1963
Oregon State Univ. Computer Center, Corvallis,
Ore. 97331 I OC 66
Provide computing facilities for instruction.
research. and administration / CDC 3300; reM
1620; ALWAC IIIE; NmULA (University designed
& constructed) I courses related to computing
given in Mathematics, Statistics. Elect. Engineering. Business Administration I 5 20 /
E 1966
.
Parsons College, Fairfield. Iowa 52556 / -C 66
Education / mM 1460 with 5 disk drives; 1050
Teleprocessing system I Computer Programming
and Systems Design I S 6 I E 1963
Peirce Junior College, Mid-City Center, 1622 Chestnut St., Philadelphia, Pa. 19103 I *C 66
Education on a post secondary level I reM
punched card equipment: Monrobot Xli June 1966
delivery IBM 1401G / Key Punch: Office Auto·mation; Computer Prograrmning: Business Automation Management / S 20 / E 1959
Plattsburgh State University College, Plattsburgh.
N.Y./OC66
Education, research, and community service I
coml svc / mM 1440 / Computer Science / S 4 /
E 1965
Polytechnic Institute of Brooklyn, Computer Center.
333 Jay St .• Brooklyn, N. Y. 11201 / -c 66
Education for students and staff, research /
SCHOOL, COLLEGE, AND UNIVERSITY COMPUTER CENTERS
,
',-
("'--
com 1 s vc I IBM 7040 wi th (u 11 opU ons and
channel B; IBM 1401, 1402, 1403; B-729V tape
drives: punch card equipment / 10 half-semester and 2 one week non-credit courses in
Fortran IV and MAP languages (open to all
registered students and to statn; credit
courses by academic departments / S 14 I
E 1960
Pomona College, Computer Center 1 Millikan Laboratory.
Claremont, Calif. 91713/0(; 66 .
Educational and administrative functions /
rBM 360, Model 40; 32K, 1442 reader-punch,
1443 printer: peripheral equipment I Numerical
Analysis; independent student and faculty
research I 5 1 / E 1965
Portland State College, Portland, Ore. I -C 66
Education Bnd research I IBM 1620-1622;
peripheral equipment / Fortran Coding; SPS
Coding / 5 8 I E 1963
Prince George's Community College. 5000 S11 ver Hi 11
Rd., Suitland, Md. 20028 / 0(; 66
Junior Co llege / IBM series 50 / two courses:
Introduction to fDP, Basic PrograltUtling Concepts / 5 3 / E 1964
.
Princeton University Computer Center, Princeton,
N. J. 08540 / 0(; 66
Education and scientific research / IBM 70941410; mM 7044-1401; mM 1410; mM 1620; IBM
360-40 I Junior level courses in Math. Dept.:
senior and graduate courses In Dept. oC
Electrical Engineering: Elementary Programming:
lecture series on FORTRAN, SNOBOL, etc. /
5 32 / E 1961
Queensborough Community College, Bayside, N. Y.
11364 I 0(; 66
Education / DIGIAC 3080 / Computer Programming I 5 2 I E 1964
Randolph-Macon College, Computer Center, Ashland,
Va. 23005 I 0(; 66
Undergraduate liberal arts education! IBM
.1620 Model I. 20K, card; off-line 407 I
Introduction to Digital Computation (mostly
prograltUtling): Numerical Analysis / 5 3 /
E 1963
Reed College, Portland, Ore. 97202 I 0(; 66
Education and research for faculty and students I coml svc / mM 1620 with 1311 disk
unit, plus associated card equipment / extensive use within a number of courses in natural
and social sciences / S 2 / E 1965
Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, Computer laboratory, Troy, N. Y. I 0(; 66
Education I coml svc I IBM 360 Model 50 I
courses gi.ven, ~n conjunr.tinn with computi'W'.
center / 5 - / E 1952
Rhode Island College Computer Lab., Mt. Pleasant
Ave" Providence 8. R. I. / ~ 66
Administration and education / coml svc /
IBM 1440 disk system and peripheral equipment / Fortran Programming (or faculty and
students / 5 5 / E 1965
Richmond Professional Institute, 901 W. Franklin
St., Richmond, Va. 23220 / 0(; 66
Educational/IBM 1620 with keypunch, sorter,
reproducer: 1004 UNIVAC / functional Wiring:
Computer Programming / 5 3 / E 1965
Riverside City College, Riverside, Calif. / ~ 66
Education I IBM 1620; peripheral equipment /
Introduction to Data Processing: Electromechanical Machines: Keypunch Tnining for
the Deaf; Problems in Punched Card Data
Processing; Computer Programming: Problems in
Computer Data Processing; Data ProceSSing
Systems / 5 8 I E 1963
Rochester Institute of Technology, 65 Plymouth Ave.
South, Rochester, N. Y. 14608 / ~ 66
Educational/18M 1620 Model 1-2OK / Programming and Numerical Methods / S 3 / E 1963
Roosevelt Unlv., 430 S. Michigan Ave., Chicago, Ill.
60605 I 0(; 66
Research and education / mM 1620 and peripheral equipment / Data Processing; Programming;
Systems and Procedures / S 10 I E 1963
Rose Polytechnic Institute, 5500 Wabash Ave., Terre
Houte. Ind. 47803 / 0(; 66
Engineering education and research / IBM 1130;
CDC GI5 / Fortran Programming: Numerical
Analysis / 5 1 / E 1960
Rutgers, The State University, Center for Information Processing, New Brunswick, N. J. / ~ 66
Education and research computing / coml svc I
mM 7040; 1401; 1620; IBM 360-67 on order I
Theory of Programminlj)j Programming & Data Pro ..
cessing; Programming &- Numerical Analysis:
Numerical Solution of Differential Equations;
Programming for Research / S 16/ E 1958
St. Cloud State College, St. Cloud, Minn. 56301 I
0(; 66
Educational I IBM 1620, 1622; peripheral
equipment planned / Basic programming; Business programming; Math for Scientists &
Engineers; Numerical Analysis / S 1 / E 1964
St. Edward's Univ., 3001 S. Congress, Austin, Tex.
76704 / 0(; 66
Education and administrative use / coml svc,
limited / IBM 1620-1622 system, model I;
026 keypunch; 084 sorter / Introduction to
Digital Computers: Numerical Analysis I Math
required I 5- / E 1964
St. Francis Xavier Unlv., Computation Centre,
Antigonish, N. 5. / 0(; 66
Research and education / rBM 1620, 4OK; Off
line printer, sorter. two key punch /
Numerical Analysis / 53 I E 1964
St. Johns River Junior College, Palatka, Fla.
32077 / "C 66
Education; service for administrative & business offtces / IBM punch card equipment /
Unit record equipment courses, Key punch
course, & beginning, Intermediate and advance
1401 program courses / S 3 / E 1962
St. Mary's Univ., 2700 Cincinnati Ave., San Antonio,
Tex. 76228 / 0(; 66
Education, research and administrative support / coml svc / IBM 1620 and periphera 1
equipment / Introduct!on to Programming;
Numerical Methods {or Computeu / S 4 /
E 1962
St. Michael'S College, Winooski, Vt. 05404 / .C 66
Education, administration, research /
Burroughs Datatron 205; tape punch 466; tape
unit 544, 4K memory drum, photoelectric
reader I Introduction to Electronic Data
Processing: Advanced Electronic Data Processing / 5 2 / E St. Peter's College, Kennedy Blvd., Jersey City,
N. J. 07306 / 0(; 66
Education and research / LGP-30; tape typewrt ters: photo-electric reader: high speed
punch unit / Digital Computer Programming;
NUmerical Analysis / 5 3 / E 1964
Somford Univ., Birmingham,. Ala. 35209 / "C 66
Education and administration / IBM 1620 Model
I card system: supporting equipment / BUSiness
Data Processing; Introductory Progranming /
56/E19b4
San Antonio College Computer Center, 1300 San Pedro,
San Antonio, Tex. / "C 66
Education and administration / IBM 1440:
punch card equipment / Programming; Punch
Card Account{ng: Computer Concepts; Advanced
Programming; Systems Bnd Procedures: Advanced
Systems & Procedures / S 13 / E 1954
San Jacinto College, 8060 Spencer Hwy., Pasadena,
Tex. / 0(; 66
Teaching / IBM 1620, unit record equipment /
two unit record and four computer courses /
5 3 I E 1963
San Joaquin Delta College, Processing Dept. f Stockton, Calif. / 0(; bb
Education / IBM 1620; £AM equipment / Fundamentals of Data Processing; Machine Operation
and Wiri ng: Programming i Business, Scientit1~,
Fortran: Data Processing Systems / S 4 /
E 1959
Santa Ana College, 1530 W 17th St., santa Ana,
Ca IIf. 92706 / 0(; 66
Education and administration / mM computer,
2 disk drives, periphera 1 equipment / AA degree in Business Data Processing: AA degree
in Computer Science I 5 4 I E 1964
pavannah State College. Savannah, Ga. / tC 66
Administration, instruction, research / IBM
1620 / ComTluter Programming; Computer
Concepts / 5 2 / E. 1965
Seton Hall Onlv., Computer Center, S. Orange, N.J.
0(; 66
Support of faculty and student research; educational program and computer science; administrative data processing / IBM 1620-20K
card I/O disk file; unit record support equip ..
ment / Numerical Analysis, Numerical Methods
in Matrix Algebra: Numerical Methods in Ordinary Differentiul Equations; Numerical Methods
in Partial Differential Equations; Computer
Programming & Numerical Methods; Introduction
to Electronic Data ProceSSing / Plans for
program in Computer Science and for Introduction of Remote Terminals / 5 10/ E 1963
Shippensburg State College, Shippensburg, Pa.
17257 / 0(; 66
Educotion / coml svc I mIl 162O-20K, 1311 disk
drive. 1622 / Computer programming; graduate
and undergraduate data processing / S 2 /
E 1963
Siena College, Loudonville, N. Y. 12211 I 0(; 66
Administrative applications / IBM 1620: punch
card equipment / Introduction to Programming;
Accting Systems; special ADP course / S 3 /
E 1963
Slippery Rock State College, Slippery Rock, Pa.
16057 / 0(; 66
Administrative / mM record equipment / Rental
of IBM system / 360 Uodel 20 being considered.
Computer courses wi 11 then be offered / 5 2 /
E 1963
Snow College, Ephraim, Utah 84627 I ·C 66
Student records and library control / 402: 026:
082; will change over to 1130 as soon as one
.
can be obtained / Key Punch I 5 2 I E 1965
South Dakota School of Mines and Technology. Computation Center, Rapid City, '5. D. 57701 I "C 66
Education and scientific research / mM 1620
(card 1/0); mM 407 (on order) I Digital Computer Programming; Fall 1966, Numerical Methods I 5 7 I E 1962
South Dakota State Univ .• Brookings, S. D. 57006 /
0(; 66
Research and teaching / mM 1620 40K with
punch card equipment / FORTRAN progr3rnming
course / 5 3 / E 1961
Southeastern Mass. Technological Institute, New
Bedford Branch. Purchase St., New Bedford, Mass.
I 0(; bb
Education ond faculty research / Burroughs
Oatatron 205; paper tape input-output /
Introductory Digital Computer Programming /
5 1 / E 1965
Southern Colorado State College, Pueblo, Colo. /
0(; 6b
Education and researc'h, business application /
coml svc I IBM 1620; 1622, 1443, 1311, plus
AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
21 :035.005
unit record equipment / IntrotluC'tion to Digital
Computers; NUmerical Analysis; Lineor Prllqramming; Business Machine Accountin~l Systt'ms /
5 7 / E 1963
Southern Illinois Univ., Computinu Ct>lltt~r, Carbondale,
Ill./0(;66
Administration, research, education / equipment located on both Carbondale and Edwardsville campuses and at Vocational Technical
Institute-IBM 7040. 1620, (2) l~Ol's. Optical Scanner (Carbondale campus): mu 1401,
1620 (Edwardsville campus): and IBM 1·101
(Vocational Technical Institute) / Carbondalt~;
ten courses related to Engineering, Departmt'nt
of Accounting and Business, and Applied Scienc\!;
Edwardsville, Cour courses ( Manugemenl, Matl'lematics); and Vocational Technical Institute,
twelve courses / 556 (Carbondale campus) I
E 1958
Southern UnlY., Computing Center, Baton Rouge, la.
0(; 66
Education / mIl 1620, IBM 1440; IBI.I 1622, IBI.I
1443, 18U 1311 and other periphero 1 t'quipment /
Theory and Use o( Computi ng lloch 1nes; Int 1'0duction to Data ProceSSing I & II; Automations
and Computers; Numerical Analysis /S 1 / E 195'
Southwest Texas Junior College: P.O. Box 70: Uvalde,
Tex. 78801 I 0(; 66
Education / 2- 26 Key punch machines: 1-02
Sorter; 1-514 Reproducer; 1-·102 Accounting
nklchine; 1-85 Collator / Introduction to Data
Processing: Card punch machines; Systems;
Applications: ProgroltUtling / rmt 360 Uodel 20,
delivery Januory, 1967/5 1 / E 1963
Sou thwes tern Sto te Co liege, Dept. of Phys ic s ,
Weatherford, Oklo. 73096 / 0(; 66
Instruction in pure Sciences Dnd Ullthematics
mM 1130 with card I/O (to be delivered Jan.
1967) / Computer Programming for Science
(others being developedl/ S 2 / E 1966
Stanford Unlv., Computation Center. Stanford, Calif .
"'C-oo
Education / mM. 7090-1401, CDC 8090; Burroughs B5500; PDP-l / some "Quickie" courses
offered by Center itselfj university has large
well-rounded Computer Science Department /
5 100 / E 1953
State College of Iowa, Cedar FOlls, Iowa 50613 /
0(; 66
Administration, research and education / IBM
140l-8K and peripheral equipment;- IBM 162020K; unit record / Center used for demonstration purposes at present / 5 10 / E 19<19
State Teachers College, Datu Processing Center,
Kirksville, Mo. / "'C 66
FacilitDte administration oC the college /
rBM 1440 / Programming the 1440, Information
Systems and Computers / S 2 / E 1966
State University Agricultural & Technical College,
Alfred, N. Y. 14802 I 0(; 66
Education / IBM 1620 and perJpheral equipment / AAS degree offered in datu processing
5 8 I E 1963
State University College at Buffalo, 1300 Elmwood
Ave., Buffalo, N. Y. 14222/0(; 66
Education and research / IBM 1130 due in Nov.,
1966 / Introduction to Computer Scienccj
Introduction to Computer Programming / 5 - /
E 1965
State University College, Cortland. N.Y. 13045/
0(; 66
Primarily administrative; slowly moving
toward computer education and research / rm,
024 (2); 056, 514, 548, 063, 085 for support
of UNIVAC 1004-1 with read punch / Introduction to Computing Science; Progromming the
UNIVAC 1004 / S 6 / E 1958
State University College a t Potsdam, Potsdam, N. Y.
13676 / "C 66
Education, research, administration / Unit
record equipment; Sept. 1966 IBM 1<'140 /
5 5 I E 1965
State University of New York, Agricultural and Technical College, Cobleskill, N. Y. / "C 66
Educational facUities and administrative
services / IBM 1401 card system ond complete
unit record / OP curriculum leading to AAS
in Oat. Processing / 5 3 I E 1964
State University of New York at Albany, Albuny,
N. Y. 12203/ 0(; 66
EdUcation and research / CDC 3100 / Introduction to Computer Science / 5 15 / E 1965
State University of New York, Binghamton, N. Y.
13901 I 0(; 66
Educotlon I mM 1460-1448; IB!I 1130 I
Computer Concepts / S 19 / E 1965
State University of New York at Buffalo, Computing
Center, Goodyear 11011, Buffalo, N. Y. 14214 I
0(; 66
Research and education / coml svc / IDM 70<14
32K, B, C channels, off .. line 4K 1401; two IOU
l620-60K, one with 1311 disk; 18U 360-40 in
October / Mathematics, statistics; education;
engineering / 5 30 / E 1961
-"tate University of New York, College of Forestry,
Syracuse, N. Y. 13210 / "C 66
Service ond education I IBU 1620 Model II /
Introduction to Computer Prograrnmi nCJ: Computer
Concepts and Applications / S 3 / E 1962
State University of Ne~v York College at Oswego, Picz
Hall, Oswego, N. Y. 13126 / "C 66
Provides computer (acilities for instruction
in their use I IBII 1620 Model I 20K cord I/O;
mM 082 card sorter: two IBM 026 printing card
punches / IBM 1130 on order (or next year /
Math, programming for students with and wi th-
8/66
21:035.006
out calculus background / 5 4 / E 1964
State University of New York, Downstate Medical
Center, 450 Clarkson Ave. r Brooklyn 3, N. Y.
0(;66
Administrative and scientific computing needs /
IBM. 1620; 1410 coupled directly to 1440 real
time system I Seminars on Fortran I 5 50 I
E 1963
State University of New York Maritime College, Fort
Schuyler, Bronx, N. Y. 10465 / "C 66
Research and student instruction / LGP-30j
1130 system on order / Elementary programming
all students 1 5 lIE 1961
Stetson Univ .• De Land, Florida / "C 66
Administration, educBtion, research I coml
sve / IBM 1620i IBM 407 Bnd related tab
equipment / Introductory programming course /
5 8 1 E 1962
Swarthmore College. Swarthmore, Pa .• 19061 / -C 66
Education and research I coml svc I IBM 1620II with 40K. disk pack Bnd monitor / None /
S 6 1 E 1964
Syracuse Dnh., Computing Center, Syracuse, N. Y. /
0(; 66
University research usJng Computers. Teaching
and research on computers and in Computer
Science / IBM 7074: IBM 1460: February 1967
delivery of mM 360-50 / Numerical Analysis;
Systems Programming; Mathematical Programming;
ete. 1 5 22 1 E 1956
Teachers College Computer Center, 525 W. 120th St.,
New York, N. Y. 100Z1 1 OC 66
Research, administration, and education / IBM
1620 Model II with disk and printer; Digltek
optical scanner. EAM equipment / FORTRAN II
o prourammlng 1 5 20 1 E 1964
Temple Junior College. Temple. Tex. 76501 / arc 66
Instruction / IBM unit record equipment /
Key punch; PrinCiples o( Unit Record Machines:
Introduction to Computer Programming: 403
Acct. machine / anticipate computer installation soon 1 5 2 1 E 1963
Tennessee Tech, O. ft'. Mattson Computer Center, Box
2lA nu, Cookeville, Tenn. I -C 66
Education / coml svc I m.1 1710: reM 1620 and
oll-line eauipment / courses offered by an. o~her d~pt 1 5 5 1 E 1960
Tennessee Wesleyan College. Athens. Tenn. 37303 I
·C 66
Education and training I IBM 402.series 50 /
Function and operation o( IBM machines: Introduetion to EOP 1 5 2 1 E 1963
Texas A & M Unlv., Data Processing Center, College
Station, Tex. 1 0(; 66
Education and research / reM 7094; three IBM
1401 / M.S. degree in computer science; expanding computer science graduate program;
short course programs provide 8 teaching
service to industry / S 75 I E )958
Texas Tech Computer Center, Lubbock, Tex. / tIC 66
Education and research / reM 1620-1: roM
162O-II; IBM 1401; IBM 7040 and peripheral
equipment / Fortran prograrruning (or credit
and noneredit 1 5 8 1 E 1962
Thornton Township JUnior College, l5l5t & Broadway,
Harvey, Ill. 60426 1 0(; 66
Education; administrative needs I IBM 1440
with 2 disk drives; peripheral eouipment /
Data processing courses / S 3 I E 1965
Trenton Junior College, 101 West State St.; Trenton,
N. J. 1 0(; 66
.
Data processing instruction (or students; prepare reports (or administrators; prepare
statistical reports for administrative &
academic staffs / ·coml SVC / mo 1620: mH'
unit record equipment / FifteeR courses offered including: Introduction to Electronic Data
Processing; Programming I & II; BasiC Computer
Systems I & IIi Computer Systems & Applications
I & IllS 4 1 E 1962
Tri State College, Angola, Ind. / tc 66
Service bureau for various school departments,
comple1.e biUing service for cities water
utility / coml sve / IBY 1620 Model Ii punch
card erruipment I Data Processing for business
students; Computer ProgralllDing Cor all students:
evening course in Management Decision / S 3 I
E 1963
Trinidad State Junior College, Trinidad. Colorado I
"C66
Education / IBM 1401 with a 1402 punch render,
1403 printer; G-IS Control Data Computer with
magnetic tape storage; mil unit record eoufpment / Data Processing Department offers severa 1 computer related courses which award an
Associate of Applied SCience Degree upon completion of program 1 5 -I E 1964
Trinity Unh., 715 Stadium Drive, San Antonio, Tex.
78212 1 0(; 66
Research (or university personnel and student
edueation 1 Coml sve 1 LGP-3O; CDC '1700 I
ProgrslIIl1ing: Numerical Analysis: Computer
Techniques; Pulse and Digital Techniquesj
5tatlstles 1 5 6 1 E 1960
Tulane Unh., Tulane Computer Laboratory. 6823 St.
ChaTles Ave., New Orleans, La. 70118 / ec 66
Educational and research for university / com!
svc / mil 7044 I Introductory courses in
computer sciences I S 10 / E 1958
Tuskegee Institute, Computer Center. Tuskegee, Ala.
36088 1 OC 66
Education and service to academic, research
and administrative areas / coml svc / mu
l620-6OK; IBM 4OF; keypunch; sorter I Introductory Computing; Advanced Computing / S 9 /
E 1961
8/66
DIRECTORIES
Tyler Junior College. Tyler, Tex. I -c 66
Education and administration / IBH 1620 card
system and periphcro 1 eouipment / Electronic
Data Processing I & IIi Computer Programming
I & IllS 2 1 E 1964
Union College, Computer Center. Schenectady, N. Y.
1230B 1 0(; 66
Computing and data processing services to
students, faculty, and administration / IBIS
1620 and periphera 1 equipment-. Equipment to be
replaced with larger computer shortly / Computer programming; starting next year. will offer
Advanced" Programming; System Design I S 7 /
E 1962
U.S. Coast Guard Academy, Computing Center, New
London, Conn. / *C 66
EducatJon and research / IBM 1620-4OK,
peripheral equipment and punch card enuipment /
2 semesters required of all students / S 3 /
E 1963
United States Merchant Marine Academy, Kings Point,
N.Y./"C66
Instruction in u'se of analog computers: simulation-Nuclear Ship Savannah I (2) EAI 231R
analog computers: X-Y plotters, oscillographs,
ship simulation equipment I Analog Computer
Technology, NSS Savannah Nuclear Reactor
Operator Training / planning expansion to digita 1 computers / S 5 I E 1963
United States Military Academy. West P.oint, N.Y.
10996 1 0(; 66
Education, research, and academic administra ..
tion / GE Datanet-30; GEtt225 with peripheral
equipment: time-sharing'r·emote terminals /
programming in first semester and use of
computers in subsequent courses I S 16 /
E 1959
United States Naval Academy, Annapolis, lid. / trC 66
Edueatlon 1 IBM 1620-1622-1311-407 1 FORTRAN
\. Programming: Digital Computing I S 5 I E 1962
U. S:'"'Naval Postgraduate School, ltonterey, Calif.
93940 1 "C 66
Research and consulting I CDC 1604: 2-GOC
160: my 1401 / 25 courses on aspects of the
eomputer field 1 5 21 1 E 1960
The Univ. o( Akron, 302 E. Buchtel Ave., Akron,
Obi 0 44304 1 .C 66
Educational and administration / coml svc
IBM 1620-60K with peripheral equipment;
Burroughs 205 magnetic tape system / Computer
Science; special topics in computer Science /
5 16 1 E 1961
Unh. of Alabama, P. O. Box 2511, University. Ala. I
0(; 66
Education. research. and testing analysis /
Univac Solid-Stote SOj Univac 1004 with remote
access to 1107 / Introduction to Computer
Science; Programming: Numerical Analysis;
Management and Marketing: Application courses /
5,31 E 1961
Unh .._Q'{ ·i\lberta, Calgany, Alberta, Canada I ec 66
Re·se~rch. education, administrative service I
IBM 360 Model 30 (64K) wi th 2 disk drives 1
Several computing science and extension
eourses 1 5 12 1 E 1962
Unh. o( Arkansas, Computing Center, Fayetteville,
Ark. 7Z101 1 0(; 66
Education Bnd research / coml SYC / mu 7040,
6 tapes; IBM 1401, 2 tapes / Digital Computer
Programming: Computer Organization and Programming; Introduction to Computers / S 15 / E 1900
Unlv. of California, P. O. Box 112, Riverside. Call(.
92502 1 OC 66
Academic research and education I coml svc /
IBn 7040 with peripheral equipment I Computer
Methodology and programming: NUmerical Analysis;
extension courses in Business Bnd Sc:ientilic
Progra ... ing 1 5 13 1 E 1963
Univ. of Ca U(ornia ComputeT Center, 201 Campbell
Ho11, Berkeley, Collf. 10(;66
Research and maintenance of general purpose
computer / IBM 7094-7040 I Non-credit courses
in: Computer Programming; Computers in Engineering; ete. 1 5 53 1 E 1956
Univ. o( Cali(ornia, Computer Center, Davis, Calif.
95616 1 0(; 66
Education and researr.h on computer application
and development I IBM 7044j Ca1comp plotter,
Model 750 1 Introduetlon to FORTRAN IV Programming Language (non-credit) 1 5 22 1 E 1960
Dnh. of California, UCLA Computing Facility. Los
Angeles 24, Calif. 1 0(; 66
Education and research for faculty and students
IBM 7094 with 9-729 IV magnetie tape units and
peripheral eQUipment; 2 IBII 1401 "Ith 2-729 IV
magnetic tape; on-line console; IBM 360-40 with
peripheral equipment: SWAC computer with electrostatic memory and drum storage and peripheral
equipment / Non-credit courses in Fortran IV,
IlAP, 1401 and 360 machine languages and others i
various courses given by individual departments 1 S 30 I E 1950
Unh. of Chattanooga, Chattanooga, Tenn. 37403 I *C 66
Edueatlon 1 coml soe 1 IBM 1620 - 1443 printer
and tab installation I Engineering and Business
Admlnls tratlon 1 5 6 1 E 1963
Dniv. of Cincinnati. Computing Center, Cincinnati 31,
Ohio 1 0(; 66
Education and research / coml svc / my 1620
with 40K eore, 1311 disk; 1410, five 729 (II)
tapes, 1403 printer I Business Adm., engineer.ing, arts. ~ciencel, etc. I S 7 , E 1958
Univ. of Colorado, Graduate School Computing Center,
Boulder, Colo. 1 .C 66
Research and education / coml IVC I IBM 7044
IA
AUERBACH
~
(32K) and peripheral equipment; IBM 1401 (4K)
and peripheral equipment: Calcomp plotter /
Institute of Computing Science offers graduate
level courses. Computing Center offers noncredit courses 1n basic progremming / S 18 /
E 1962
Univ. o( Connecticut. University Computer Center,
Storrs, Conn. / Itt 66
Provide computer facilities (or all types o(
University research and education / IBM 7040
with 10 tapes, 1401 in/out, mM 1620 with disk:
PACE 231R 1 FORTRAN programmi ng workshops 5
times a year 1 5 9 1 E 1961
Univ. o( Delaware, Newark, Del. I It(: 66
Research and education / coml svc / SDS 9300/
~ES-I, IBM 1620-II, EAI 23lR-V, EAI TR-48 1
undergraduate and graduate degree programs in
computer science I S 20 / E 1957
Unh. o( Denver, Denver, Colo. 80210 / -c 66
Research and education / coml svc / Burroughs
B 5500 / ProgralJlfting: Numerical Analysis /
engineering courses use computer /5 10 / E 1958
Univ. of Detroit, 4001 W. McNichols, Detroit, Mich.,
48221 I OC 66
Research, instruction, and administration / com!
svc I IBM 1410, 40K and peripheral eauipment /
Numerical Analysis, Engineering Graphics, Computer Teehnology 1 5 20 1 E 1963
Dnh. of Florida, Computing Center, Gainesville, Fla.
32601 1 OC 66
Education and research / coml svc / IBM 1401:
mat 709; Calcomp 363 / Fortran programming:
seminars in AOp'l 5 25 1 E 1962
Unh. of Georgia, Athens, Ga. 30&01 / Itt 66
Education and research I cOIIIl svc I IBM 7094;
(2) IBM 1401: IBM 1620 I Four computer science
eourses 1 5 47 1 E 1958
Dnh. of Hawaii, Statistical and Computing Center,
Hon,olulu, HawaII 96822 1 0(; 66
Academic research and teaching computing /
reM 1401: IBM 7040 I computing courses given /
5 21 1 E 1960
Unlv. of Idaho, Moseow, Idaho 83843 1 0(; 66
General university computing I IBM 162O-4OK:
(2) 1311 disk files; unit reeord equipment 1
Computer programming and applications / S 7 /
E 1962
Unlv. of Illinois, Department o( Computer Science,
Urbana, Ill. 61601 1 0(; 66
Education and research for students and
faeulty 1 IBII 7094; Illiae II; IlliDc III
being buIlt by University I Digital Computing;
Data Processing: Programming; Numerical
Analysis; Boolean Algebra; Logical Design of
Automatic Digital Computers; Circuit Design:
Threshold LogiC j Semiconductor Computer Devices: Advanced Theory of Magnetic and .Optic
Computer Memory Devices; Swi tchi ng Theory I
5 32 1 E Univ. o( Iowa. Computer Center, Iowa CHy, Iowa I
0(; 66
Research and education / coml svc / mal 7044321(, 8729 III & II tape units; 1301 dlse;
1401; 360-30 16K; 4 tape units 1 Computer
Science Dept. offers courses / S 53 / E 1958
Unlv. of Kansas, Computation Center. 110 Summerfield
Hall, Lawrence, Kan. 66044 / *C 66
Education and research I coml svc, limited /
IBM 7040, 1401; GE 415, Oatanet 30 1 Four
computing courses and thirty teaching applications 1 S 20 1 E 1957
Unlv. of Kentucky, Computing Center, Lexington, Ky.
40506 1 0(; 66
Educational, research and administrative
aetlvltles 1 eoml svc 1 IBM 7040 with peripheral equipment: reM 1410 with peripheral equipment; IBM 1620 with peripheral equipment; IBM
1401 with peripheral equipment; IBM ·1050 remore consoles; IBM punch card equipment /
Automatic Data Processingj Fundamentals of
Programming; Design o( Digital Computer;
Numerical Analysis; Introduction to Algorithmic Processes j Computer 01"ganization and
Programming: In(ormation Processing Systems;
Algorithmic Languages and Compilers: Analog
and Hybrid Computer Techniques: System Simulation; Non-numerical Application o( Computers: Computers and Programming Systems / (ull
degree program in Computer SCience at B.S.
level 1 5 40 1 E 1958
Dniv. o( Louisville, Speed Scientific School. Computing Lab., Louisville, Ky. 40208 1 0(; 66
Education and research / mM 1620-1311-1710;
IBM 704, 321(; PACE 221R 1 Numerieal Math;
Digital Computation; Analog Computation: Adv.
~igital Computation; Eng. Appl. of Digital
Computation 1 5 6 1 E 1958
Uolv. of Manitoba. Winnipeg. Manitoba •. Canada I *C 66
Research and education I coml svc / IBM 1620dtsc; IBM 360-65, 4 disc, 2 tapes; communications facilities. etc. 1M. Sc. (computer
science); Dndergrad electives: Programming,
Numerleal Analysis, Statlstles 1 5 25 1 E 1964
Unh. of Maryland, Computer Science Center. College
Park, Md. 1 0(; 66
Education, Institutional and Academic Research,
'Central Computing Faellity 1 IBM 7094-1401
system; my 360-30 system I Many computerrelated eourses 1 S 60 1 E 1963
UDh. of Massachusetts Research Computing Center,
Amherst, Mass. / *C 66
Prov1de computing facilities and service to the
Uni versity community / coml svc / CDC 3600321., 6 tapes / M. S. in computer science:
undergraduate minor in C. 5. 1 5 20 1 E 1960
(,
/
SCHOOL, COLLEGE, AND UNIVERSITY COMPUTER CENTERS
URiL o'f Miamt, Coral liilbll~s. Fla. :1:\12·1 I "'C htl
({t'sean'h anti (>.Iucation in computer thl'ory and
!Juiv. nf llennsylvania, Computl'r CI~nt(!r, Phi ladelp'lda,
ilPI)lications I coml svc I mM 7040-1'101: card
saner, .tupl1cator, interpretor / Computer
f<:ducation and research / Tlvo IBM 1040; two IBM
10101; two IBM 1620; RCP ,1000; POP-I!; PDP-6 /
computi ng courses gi ven / S ·10 I E 1956
Univ. of Portland Computer Center, 50{)0 N. Wi llamette
n!vd., Port Ja nd, Oregon / ·C 66
I::ducation, research, administration I coml
svc I Burroughs 205 with 4000 - 10 digit word
memory, 6 magnetic tape units; rBM punch card
Programming; Comllutt'T Applications: Computer
Systt'ms Simulation; Numerical Analysis / S I·t /
~; 1'165
Univ. (If Michigan, Ann A.rbor, Mich. / OC lJ{)
t-:ducation anti research / IBM 7090 with. IBM
1·110 as a pt!ripheral processor / Many courses
com'('rned wi th one or more aspects of the
theory, design, development, or programming of
(',omputers. Rackham School of Graduate Studjes
afftol's several courses in information anti
('ontrol / S :\1 I E lq59
.
Univ. of Minnt~sota Duluth, Duluth, Minn. 55012/
*C 06
Provide r.omputl!T services for rcsearch and
instruction .I IBM 1620 with 60K core storage,
l:llI disk stllralJ{~ ttriVl~, 1443 line printer;
pl'riph~ral unit record eQuipmcnt J Malh;
Compuu'r Programming (3 cr/quarter); Bus &
Econ; l\l'.countinQ Systems & Data Processing;
Ed. Psych.; Data Processing in Education I
S 2 / E 1~~5
Univ. ot' Minnesota, School of Business Administration, Computer Ct'nter, Minneapolis. Minn. I -C 66
Rt!sl'ardl and education / Univac Solid-State
80: IBM 1620 / Introduction to Computers:
Fortran .I S 12 / E Univ. of Mississippi, University, Miss. 38677 / *C 66
Education / com I svc / TBM 1620 Model T with
60K memory / Raslc Fortran Progranuning/ S 6 /
E-
l
21:035.007
Unh'. of Missouri, Computer Research Center, B &
P.A Bldg., Columbia, Mo. 65201 I It(; 66
Research for facul ty and graduate students:
education ,I IBM 7040 and peripheral eQuipment;
IBM 1710 with 1620 ModeJ n and peripheral
equipment / Fortran IV; Fundamentals of Digital
Computer Programming; Numerical Analysis:
Advanced Numerical Analysis I S 25 / E 1960
Univ. of Missouri at Rolla, Rolla, Mo. I"'C 66
Education I coml svc / reM 1620; Calccmp Model
566 I Tntroduction to Computing Techninues;
Introduction to Algorithmic Processes; Computer Organization and Programming: Introductjon
to Information Structures; Algorithmic Languages for Digital Computers;'B'usiness Data
Processing TechniQues; Introduction to Numerical Methods and Digital' Computer; Computer and
Programming Systems; Computational Methods of
Numerical Analysis; Logic of Digital Computers;
Digital Computer Programming Languages; Data
Processing for Management; Technioues of Information Processing and Retrieval; Special
Problems in Computer Scien'ce: and others /
8.5. and M.S. degrees in Computer Science
are offered I S 46 I E 1959
Univ. of Montana Computer Center. Missoula, Mont.
59801 I .c 66
Support University research and train students
/ coml svc / JBM 1620 I Introduction to Computer Programmi n9: Digi ta 1 Computers & Codi ng;
Computer Methods; AppUcation of Digital Computers: Numerical Analysis I S 5 I E 1964
Vniv. of Nevada, Reno, Nev. / *C 66
University-wide computing service to the Univ{"l'Sity / coml svc / reM 1620 Model II 601<, 3
disk drives: 1013 teleprocessing unit I
Principles of electronic data processing and
computer programming / Center conducts
numerous programming workshops I 5 16 / E 1960
Univ. of New Brunswick, Fredericton, N.B., Canada I
*C 66
Education and research I coml svc I JBM 1620-11;
60K memory, 2-1311 disk-packs; 1443 printer;
1627-I1 plotter I Programming; Numerical
Analysis; Computer Logic / S 5 I E 1959
Univ. of New Hallllshire, Computer Center, Durham,
N.H. I *C 66
Research and instruction I coml svc I IBM 1620
with 2 tape drives, IBM 360, model 40 I
Numerical Methods and Computers, 16 other
courses / S 10 / E 1961
Univ. of North Carolina, Computation Center. Chapel
Hill. N.C. 27515 I *C 66
Research and education I UNIVAC ll05, UNIVAC
1004 TIl. mM 360. Model 30 I Introduction to
Digital Computer Usage; Fundamentals of Jnforrna tion Processi ng; Metaprograms; Symbolic
Logic; Intermediate Symbolic Logic; Business
Data Processing; Introduction to Numerical
Analysis; Introduction to Automatic Digital
Control; related courses for graduates / S 70 I
E 1959
Unlv. of North Dakota, P.O. Box 8282, University
Station, Grand Forks, N.D. / -c 66
Education / coml svc I mM 1620; punch card
equipment / Programming for Engineers; Numerical Analysis; Statistics / Expanding to reM
360 Model 30 in Dec .• 1966 I S 3 I E 1961
Univ. of Ottawa Computing Centre, 700 King Edward
Ave., Ottawa 2, Ontario, Canada / "C 66
Education of undergraduates and graduates /
TBM 1620 Model II; disk packs and 40K core
storage: interpreting keypunches and card
sorting facilities / Numerical Analysis; Computer Programming; Scientific Computations I
mM 360 model G40 expected early this fall I
S 7 I E 1958
.
Unlv. of the Pacific, School of Engine~ring, Stockton,
Call f. 95204 I *C 66
Education, some research I LGP-30 with high
speed read punch and off-line flexowriter /
Basic Programming I 5 1 / E 1964
Pa.
Univ.
I
*C bb
:~uli,~:~~! ~i~~ ~{~o p{e~r~;~~puerto
~
Rico /
66
University administration ant'! research I IBM
1401 with peripheral equipment! Introduction
to Punched Card Methods; Punched CHrd Methods;
1401 Symbolic Programming System / S 25 /
E 1962
Unh. of Rhode Island, Kingston, R. r. I "C 66
Research and education for entire university
IBM 360-'10; 131k, disk oriented / Computer
Science; Introduction to Digital Computers;
Scientific Applications of Digital Computers;
Problems in Computer Science; Digital Computation I S 10 I E 1959
Univ. of St. Thomas, 3812 Montrose Blvd; lIouston,
Tex. 77006 I .C 66
Programming education and computing facility
for students and staff I coml svc I CDC GI5
computer: Friden Flexowri ter; reM 026 Key
Punch / Algebra for Computation; Digital
Computer Programming; Differential EquatJons;
Numerical Analysis / S 3 / E 1961
Univ. of Scranton, Scranton, Pa. 18510 / *C 66
Educatjonal, administrative and commercial I
coml svc I BUl"Tough 205 cardatron & Datafi Ie
full system I Programming for 205 & Algol:
Advance Programming & Numerical Analysis /
S 7 I E 1965
The University of the South, Sewanee, Tenn. 37375 I
*C 66
Education and research / IBM 1620-1 wi th paper
tape read-punch I Basic Programming; Introduction to Numerical Analysis I 5 2 I E 1963
Univ. of South Carolina, Computer Science Center,
Columbia, S. C. 29208 I *C 66
Provide computer service, guidance, and
instruction for University communjty / coml
,cv I IBM 7040 - 32K, 8 tape; IBM 1401 - 8K,
4 tape I Fortran; Cobol; Computer Design;
Systems Design I S 18 I E 1957
.
Univ. of South Dakota, Vermillion, S.D. 57069/ .C 66
Education .I IBM 1620 Model I 40K, card I/O,
disk; 1443 printer on order'/ Computer oriented courses given / S 1 I E 1963
Dniv. of Southern California. Computer Sciences
Laboratory, 1020 W Jefferson Blvd., Los Angeles,
Calif. 90007 I ·C 66
Academic and research; con:puters and governmental systems research: under and post graduate training / 8-800; 11-400, H-200 and
supporting tabulating equipment I Compi ler
Languages: COBAL and FORTRAN; Assembly languages; Quantified Research Design; Statistics;
Bio statistic, I S 30 I E 1961
Univ. of Southern Mississippi, Box 48, Southern
Station, Hattiesburg, Miss. 39401 / "'C 66
Education and research / coml svc I IBM 1620-1
and periphera 1 elJuipment I Basic ProgrammingFortranj Linear Programming Techniques; Digital
Computer Programming-symbolic, maChine, and
complier programming: Construction of Compliers;
Advanced Digital ProgTclmming / S 4 / E 1963
Univ. of Southwestern Louisiana, Box 133, USL Station,
Lafayette, La. 70501 I *C 66
Education, research, administration I coml
svc I mM 1620-40K wi th periphera 1 eouipment /
Advanced Digital Computer Programming: Construction of Compilers; Design of Computer
Languages; Information Theory and Information
Retrieval; Heuristic Programming and Artificial
Intelligence; Real time and Hybrid Computation:
Theory of Automata and Fini te State Machines I
S 5 I E 1960
The Uni v. of Tennessee, Uni versity Computi ng Center,
Knoxvi lle, Tenn. 37916 / *C 66
Research I coml svc I mM 1040-1401 / Mathematics; Fortran IV; Accounting; Engineering I
S 48 I E 1960
Vni v. of Texas Medical Branch, Research Computations
Center, Galveston, Tex. 77550 I OC 66
Assist medical researcher in design and analysis
of research I reM 1620-1 with 2 disks and 40K
memory; IBM 1232 I - / S i l l E Unh. of Toledo, Computation Center, 2801 Bancroft,
Toledo, Ohio 43606 I *C 66
Academic, research / coml svc I IBM 1620 Model
I 40K memory. 1311 disk file, 1627 plotter I
Introduction to Computing Techniques; Digital
Computing & Numerical Analysis: The Use of
Computers in Engineering I S 4 I E 1962
Univ. of Toronto, Institute of Computer Science,
Toronto. Ont., Canada I OC 66
Education and research / coml svc I IBM 7094 II:
IBM 1460: Calcomp plotter / Degree program in
computer science I S 25 I E 1946
Unlv. of Tulsa, 600 S. College, Tulsa 4, Okla. I ~ 66
Education for undergraduates and graduate
research I coml svc I TBM 1620 and peripheral
enuipment / Fortran Programming I S 2 I E 1963
Univ. of Utah, Salt Lake City. Utah 84112 I *C 66
Research and education at university / coml
svc I JBM 7044-1401; CDC 3200; Univac 1108 on
order / Programming; Use of Computers in Science
and Engineering; Computer Science I S 25 I
E 1958
AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
Univ. of Virginia, Compllter-Sl'il'nce Cln., Charlottesvillt!, Va. 22903 / ~ 66
Education and research support! coml svc I
Burroughs B5500 / - / S 12 / E ]f)59
Univ. of Waterloo, Computing C{'ntre, University Ave.,
Waterloo, Ontario, Canada / otC 66
Research and education / coml svc, 1 imi ted /
IBM 7040 with on-line; TBM J·Wl; roM 1710;
mM 1620 II: Pace Tr-40; IBM 1620; and supporting peripheral equipment I Ana Jogue Computation; Numerical M"ethods; Digital Computer Progr!lmmi ng; Numerica I Analysi s: Pri ndples
of Computer Science: Series of graduate
courses in Numerical Analysis; Computer Programming; Advanced Computer Techniques; many
more I S 21 I E 1960
.
Univ. of Western Ontario, London, Ontario / .C 66
Research, teaching and administrative I IBM
7040 (32K) and peripheral enuipment I Graduate and undergraduate, MA or SA in Computer
Science I S 30 / E 1959
Univ. of Windsor, Computer Centre, Windsor, Ont.
Canada I It(; 66
Education and research, administrative work /
coml svc / TBM 1620-TI. 40K core memory. 21311 disc drives, card rIO, off-line 407 /
Courses offered by departments of ITBthematics
and electrical engineering I S 2 I E 1964
Univ. of Wisconsin, 3203 N. Downer Ave., Milwaukee,
Wis. I *C 66
Administration, education and research I
IBM ]<101 and peripheral equipment: mM 1620
Model 2 and peripheral eouipment; Calcomp
pri nter, Uni t-record eouipment I Fortran
Programming; Systems Progralmning; Introduction to Computing Machinery / 5 34 / E 1962
Univ. of Wisconsin, Computing Center, 5534 Sterling
Hall, Madison, Wis. I ~ 66
~:duca t i on wi th sa te II ites I coml svc / CDC
3600 with coe 924 and link satellites: COC
16048/160; IBM 1460 I Introduction to
Programming (no credit); credit courses
given by Computer Sciences Dept. / 517 I
E 1964
Vnlv. of Wyoming, University Station, P.O. Box
3275, Laramie, Wyo. 82010 I *C 66
Educational and faculty research; theses I
coml svc I Philco 211-1 / Introduction to
FORTRAN; Introduction to Machine Language:
Introduction to Metalanguage I S 9 / E 1963
Utah State Univ., Logan, Utah 84321 I • C 66
Education and research I coml svc 'I IBM
1620-I, 40k core. card I/o; IBM 1401 G 4K
core, card rio I Data Processing: Computer
Programming; Programmi ng Busi ness Problems:
Programming Scientific Problems: Advanced
Programmi n9; Compi ler Languages; Moni tors
and Systems Designs: Techninues in Operations
Research; offer degree program with emphasis
in mathematics or in management science I
S 10 I E 1961
Valparaiso Univ., Valparaiso. Ind. 46363/ It(: 66
Scientific computation and liberal arts
approach to computer and programming / TBM
1620 with disk-unit record / Introduction to
Programming; Numerical Analysis I S 4 I E 1961
Vanderbilt Univ., Computer Center, Nashville, Tenn.
37203 I *C 66
Education, researCh, administrative I coml
svc I mM 1401-1072 complex, 10K memory:
peripheral eouipment; tab eouipment I Aiming
for graduate degree program in computer
science / S J2 I E 1959
Vassar College, Poughkeepsie, N.Y. 12601 / "'C 66
Faculty and student research; education I
IBM 360, Model 30 E. - disks I Introductory
programming (no credit); intermediate level
semester course in Statistics; Numerical
Analysis (full year) at advanced level in
Math / Computer Center opens December. 1966 I
S 5 I E 1966
Vincennes Univ., Vincennes, Ind. 47591 I CIoC 66
Education and administration I IBM 1620 card
system 20K with 1443 printer I Machine
Language; SPS courses; Fortran; Programming
project / two year curriculum in Science
Data ProceSSing, and Industrial Data Processing I S 6 I E 1962
Virginia Military Institute, Lexington, Va. 24450.1
*C 66
Education, research and administration I IBM
1620-40K with peripheral enuipment I Introduction to Symbol ic Programming; Introduction to
Automatic Programming; Computer Programming
Systems and Methods; Advanced Programming I
S 5 I E 1963
Virginia Polytechnic Institute, Blacksburg, Va. I
*C 66
Education and administration / coml svc / IBM
1040, 2 IBM 1401 tape systems and uni t record
equipment / Introductory programming courses
by academjc departments / S 20 J E 1954
Virginia State College, Petersburg, Va. 23803 /
*C 66
Education and research I coml svc I IBM 162060K. 407, 85 collator, 514 reproducing, etc. I
Basic Computer Concepts; Computer Programming;
courses in computer science are service
courses I Institution has no major pursui t
in computer science I S 5 I E 1964
Washburn Univ., Crane Observatory. Topeka, Kans. I
*C 66
Education and research I coml svc - for service only, no solicitation I IBM 1620-1622;
keypunch, verifier, sorter I Digital Computer
Programming; Numerical Methods I S -J E 1964
8/66
DIRECTORIES
21:035.008
Washington and I.ee Univ .• Computer Center. Lexington,
V•• 24450 / ·C 66
Education and administrative sel'vices I IBM
1620, data processing lone semester; Computer
Progr.... lng I S 3 / E 1962
Washington State Univ., Pullman, Wash. / tc 6b
Research and teaching / IBM 709, System 36030; System 360-67 will be installed Nov.
1966/ Full graduate program In Information
Science I S 35 / E 1957
Wayne State Unlv .• Computing and Data Processing
Center, Detroit. Mich. 46202 / *C 66
Education, re~earch and !;ervice to the University / IBM 7074; 2 mM 1401; IBM 1460/
64 courses offered / S 100 / E 1947
Weber State College, Ogden. Utah / *C 66
Two year programmer trat ni ng course / coml
sve ! IBM 1401 4K with two 1311 disk drives
several courses in 1401 and related programmer training I S 4 / E 1963
Wesley College, College Square, Dover, Del. / ·C 66
Education and administration; commercial I
coml svc I mM 1620, 402 printer, reproducer,
sorter, punChes, collator / Introduction to
Data Processing; Scientific Data Processing /
S - / E 19b2
Westchester Community College, 75 Grasslands Rd.,
Valhalla, N.Y / OC b6
Education / Burroughs 205 with magnetic tape
key punch / Basic programming & FORTRAN I
S I / E 1964
West Chester State College, West Chester, Pa.
19360 / OC b6
_
Educational; maintain student records / IBM
1620; 1622 card-read punch; 407 accounting
machine; and peripheral eouipment I Basic
Computpr Science; Computer Programming I S 2 I
E 19b4
West Georgia College, Carrollton, Ga. 30117 I *C 66
Computational services for education and
college administration I IBM 1620 model 160K, 2 disk drives, on-line printer, peripheral eouipment I Mathematics 200; Introduction
to Computer Programming I S 5 I E 1964
West Texas State Vnlv., Canyon, Tex. 19015 I .C 6&
Education. research, administration / IBM
1620 Model II with disk, 1401 t'pe, 360 In
Nov. / B courses in School of Business; 2
eourses in Ma th dept. / Degree program in
School of Business with emphasis in data
processing / S 14 / E 1964
West Vi rgi nia Jnsti tute of Technology, Montgome
West Va. 25136 / OC 66
Education and administration / coml sve
1130 / Computer Programming (engineerin\"
science, business) / S 1 / E lq66
West Virginia University Computer Center, Ad.
MOl1Jantown. W. Va. 26506 I "'C 66
Provide facilities for adminhtratlon,
tion and research / coml sve I rBM 32k .....
IBM 8K 1401; IBM 60k Ib20 / Industrial Engineering; Math / 5 53 / E 1963
8/66
Western Carolina Computer Operations. Western
C.rollna College, Cullowhee, N. C. 28723/ ec 66
Education, research, administration I IBM 1620
with disk, sorter: peripheral equipment /
Courses range Crom introductory automatic and
electronic data processing through systems
analysis and data processing nanagement I
S 5 / E 1963
Western Kentucky Unlv., College Heights, P.O.,
Bowll ng Green, Ky. / OC 66
Educational I .estimated delivery date July,
1966 IBM 1130/ Tntroduction to Computers;
Intermediate Computer Programming: EOP Systems
Design; Unit-record Data Processing / S 6 /
E 1966
Western Michigan Vnlv., Kalamazoo, Mich. I "C 66
Provide research, training and service
facilities for faculty, staff and students /
IBM 1620, Model I; 1622, 1311, IBM punch c.rd
equipment. IBM 360 Model H50, 262 storage,
\052, 1442-1443, 2504, 1403, 2701; 3 remote
consoles on order / Fortran workshop (no-credit);
Introduction to Computers I; Introduction to
Computers II; Programming for Computers:
Numerical Analysis; Automatic Programming
Systems / 5 5 / E 1962
Western State College, Gunnison, Colorado 81230 /
OC 66
Education and administration / IBM 1620-1622
Modell; unit record eauipment / Computer
Programmi ng / 5 4 / E 1963
Western Washington State College, Computer Center,
Bellingh.m, Wash. / OC 66
Education, research, administration I coml
svc I reM 1620-40K card with disk / Introductory Programming; NUmerical Methods I 5 4 I
E 19b2
Westminster College, Fulton, Mo. 65251 I ·C 66
Education, student and faculty research, and
school business / IBM 1620 Model I, disk drive,
tape input I Basic Progranming (Machine Language, SPS, FORTRAN), Advanced Programming,
computer oriented research in other Oepts. I
S 1 / E 1963
WhfJaton College, 501 E. Seminary Ave .• Wheaton, Ill.
60167 / OC 66
Education, research, and business management
and registration applications.! coml svc I
reM 1620-1622 and peripheral equipment I
Basic programming course using SPS and
FORTRAN / S 6 / E 1958
Whitman College, Walla W.ll., Wash. / OC 66
Student education, faculty research I mM
Ib20 Model I; Ib22 ·Model 2, 1311, 1443/
Introductory Programmi ng; Numerica I Ana lysl s
S 2 / E 1964
Sir George Williams Vniv .• 2015 Drummond St., Montreal,
Quebec / .c 6b
Provides central computer center for academic
and administrative needs / coml svc I JBM
1620 Model I with disk drives &. 40K core:
ba.!k-up auxiliary machines / Introduction to
A ..
AUERBACH
Computer Programming IS. 9 / E 1963
Wilkes College, Wilkes-B.rre, P•• 18703 I OC b6
Scientific computation in conjunction with
gnduate and undergraduate program /
Burroughs 205, with magnetic tape units /
Advanced student individual study / 5 - I
E 19b5
Winston-Salem State College, Data Processing Center,
Winston-Salem. N. C. / *C 66
Administ1"8tion, research and testing / coml
,vc / IBM 1620 .. I th punch c.rd e~uipment /
programming the mM 1620 computer; keypunching / S 5 / E 1964
Wisconsin State Univ., ·£au Clairr, Wis. 54701 I
OC 6b
Administrative / mM 1620 Model I and periph-
:~~e~~!~:~n~u~i~::!Cc:~:~~:/i~9 ~ jd~a~~~~
Wisconsin State Vnlv., laCrosse, Wis. 54601 / II(': 66
Just now establishing: center for administrative, research &. edueational purposes / Data
processing eqUipment in operation: reM 360
and 1130 on order / One course at ;present:
More courses next year / S 4 / E 1961
Wisconsin State Unh., Computer Center, River Falls,
Wis. / OC 66
I~structional and faeulty research I IBM 1620
20K / three courses in.Computer Coding;
Nu,",,-rical An.lysls / 53/ E 1963
Wisconsin State Dnh., 1800 Grand Ave., Superior,
Wis. 548BO / OC 66
Ad!Dinistrative use & research / lB. 402,
~:i ~e;~::!d t::r~g~e? in~:d~!~O:n t:rg:~
Processing; Computer Programming (FORTRAN)
5 5 / E 1964
Yale Computer Center, 60 Sachem St., New Haven,
Conn. / OC 66
Education for faculty, students, and stafr /
mM 1401-4K; mM 7094-7040 OCS / Engineering
and applied sciences courses; Fortran /
5 35 / E 1958
York Junior College, Country Club Road, York, Pa. I
OC 66
Educational and administrative / IBM 1620 with
card reader and card punch / Introduction to
Data Processing; Basic Computer Systemsi
Fortran Programmingj 1440 Programming I
5 4 / E 1962
The Youngstown Univ., 410 Wick Ave., Youngstown,
Ohio 44503 / OC 66
Education and research / coml svc / IBM 1620
with card input/output; mM. 403 as printer
and related auxiliary equipment I Computer
Techniques; Principles of Business Computer /
5 8 / E 1963
- 001 -
21:040.001
Directory of Periodicals
Computer Industry
ANNOTATED DIRECTORY
OF
PERIODICALS FOR THE COMPUTER INDUSTRY
PREFACE
§
040.
This directory is a list of periodicals concerned with the computer industry. In this
issue, we have limited our selections to those English language publications directly covering the computer industry. Included are: Biographical Services, Computer References,
News Periodicals, and Technical Periodicals. Those periodicals which publish an occasional
article related to electronic data processing have not been included at this time. Some
periodicals which consistently cover EDP, but from a particular industry viewpoint have
been omitted until future expansion of the directory. Engineering journals, concerned
basically with hardware, are not included.
In those cases where a publication has been noted as being available through controlled circulation, qualified readers may apply for free subscriptions. Applications may
be obtained by writing to the address listed with the publication. The indicated costs are
annual subscription rates.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
2/63
21:040.011
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
Directory of Periodicals
Computer Industry
REPORTS
ANNOTATED DIRECTORY OF PERIODICALS FOR THE COMPUTER INDUSTRY
§
Communications of the Association for Computing
Machinery
040.
American Documentation
14 East 69th Street
New York 21, New York
Suite 413
1025 Connecticut Avenue, N. W.
Washington 6, D. C.
Monthly
Quarterly
Published by the American Documentation Institute as a
scholarly journal and forum for the discussion of new and
experimental work dealing with documents - their storage
and retrieval.
Technical articles devoted to new applications of digital
computers, new techniques for problem solution with
computers, and news and notices of computer industry
activities.
$10.00 (to non-members)
$12.50 (to non-members)
Computer Abstracts
Automatic Data Processing
See "Data and Control"
Technical Information Co., Ltd.
Chancery House
Chancery Lane
London W. C. 2, England
Business Automation
Monthly
OA Business Publications, Inc.
288 Park Avenue West
Elmhurst, Illinois
A comprehensive abstracting service. It includes about
300 abstracts per issue with an average length of 50 words.
Each sheet is printed on one side only to allow for clipping.
It is well organized and indexed. The coverage includes
periodicals from America, Europe, and Asia, as well as
books and patents. The service includ,es the issues of
Computer News.
Monthly
Articles describing specific business computer applications and utilizations; generally written in non-technical
language and accompanied by many pictures. Other
articles occasionally serve as a forum for new directions
and problems to be conquered by the EDP profession.
$96.00
Computer Bulletin, The
$5.00
British Computer Society Ltd.
Finsbury Court, Finsbury Pavement
London E.C. 2, England
Business Automation News Report
OA Business Publications, Inc.
288 Park Avenue West
Elmhurst, Illinois
Quarterly
In addition to several papers that might well be included
in the Computer Journal, there are news items, editorial
comments on the news and events, surveys of different
fields and book reviews. There are also a variety of
News service covering events within the computer and
short letters, communications, and abstracts of future
electronics industries. Includes such features as annual
reports, earnings figures, corporate organization develop- conferences.
ments, personalities in the news, schedule of meetings,
$~. 80 (to non-members)
and new equipment announcements.
Weekly
$5.00
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
2/63
21:040.012
§
040.
Computer Characteristics
Adams Associates
Bedford, Massachusetts
Quarterly
A table of the salient features of commercially-available,
U. S. produced, digital computers. Entries are coded for
twenty-five features plus supplementary notes.
$10.00
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
Computing Reviews
Association for Computing Machinery
14 East 69th Street
New York 21, New York
Bi-Monthly
Contains reviews of articles in selected periodicals furnished by a variety of people active in related areas of the
computer industry. There is frequently a strong bias in
the review and the length depends upon the industry of the
various reviewers. A few reviews do not discuss the
document. The coverage is extensive but not timely, and
includes important material ante-dating the reviews.
Computer Journal, The
$12.00 (to non-members)
British Computer Society Ltd.
Finsbury Court, Finsbury PavementLondon E. C. 2, England
Control Engineering
Quarterly
McGraw- Hill Publishing Co., Inc.
330 West 42nd Street
New York 36, New York
Contains papers of wide interest to users and suppliers
of computers, both technical and non-technical. The
topics range from computer and compiler construction to
acceptance tests and specific applications, mathematical
and commercial. Most papers are ones that have been
presented at British Computer Society meetings and the
resulting discussions are reported as edited transcripts.
There are also some book reviews and correspondence on
earlier papers.
Monthly
Technical articles devoted to design, application, and
testing of instrumentation and automatic control systems.
Includes sections on information systems, newapplications in control instrumentation, and new products in the
control field.
$3.00
$9 .80 (to non - members)
Computer News
Data and. Control
formerly,Automatic Data Processing
Technical Information Co., Ltd.
Chancery House
Chancery Lane
London W. C. 2, England
Business Publications Ltd.
180 Fleet Street
London E. C. 4, England
Monthly
Monthly
A supplementary service to Computer Abstracts. A
separate document with a limited coverage of news items,
new equipment, speciai applications, and an editorial.
Articles, reports, and news items covering the area~
of production control and a'Utomation, production
planning and control, operational research, stock
control, data capturing, and transmission.
Received with Computer Abstracts.
$9.50
Computers and Automation
Berkeley Enterprises, Inc.
815 Washington Street
Newtonville 60, Massachusetts
Monthly
Data Processing
American Data Processing, Inc.
22nd Floor, Book Tower
Detroit 26, Michigan
Monthly
Articles covering problems and work done in the computer industry. Some attention devoted to the sociological
problems associated with electronic data processing, as
well as a section on new hardware installation and appli.::
cation-developments within the computer field, A periodic computer census is included,
Columns and articles describing EDP techniques and practices presented in non-technical terms. Specific articles
written to cover individual case histories of selected
installations.
$15.00
$8.S0
2/63
ANNOTATED DIRECTORY OF PERIODICALS FOR THE COMPUTER INDUSTRY
§
21:040.013
'Electronic News
040.
Fairchild Publications, Inc.
7 East 12th Street
New York 3, N. Y.
Data Processing
Associated lliffe Press Ltd.
Dorset House
Stamford Street
London S. E. 1, England
Weekly
Quarterly
Although aimed at top management and the chief executives this periodical is of interest to all users in
business and industry. The majority of the articles deal
with specific applications of specific equipment. Each
article is illustrated by good diagrams and photographs.
Other peripheral subjects are also covered; for example,
descriptions of new equipment and general interest topics
such as insurance of equipment.
A weekly newspaper covering events and announcements
pertinent to the electronics fielq. Has a separate section
for news coverage of computer events and highlights
major EDP industry trends in featured articles.
$3.00
IBM Journal of Research and Development
International Busiiless Machines Corp.
590 Madison Avenue
New York 22, New York
Quarterly
$12.00
Technical articles, generally devoted to the detailed
documentation of the results of IBM research projects
such as semi-conductors, logic circuits, and a few programming techniques,using excellent illustrations.
Data Processing Digest
1140 South Robertson BlVd.
Los Angeles 35, California
$5.00
Monthly
Digests of data processing articles of interest to
management and technicians in EDP. Digests are mainly
prepared by a good selection of extensive quotations from
each article. A reading list is suggested for material
not possible to digest. Provides wide, timely coverage
of over one hundred current publications plus editorial
comment from invited contributors.
1. R.:S. International Convention Record
Computer Sessions
Institute of Radio Engineers
1 East 79th Street
New York 21, New York
$24.00
Technical papers devoted to engineering and mathematical
problems related to computer design and utilization. Includes papers on use of computers in hardware design.
Datamation
LR.E. Transactions on Electronic Computers (PGEC)
F. D. Thompson Publications, .Inc.
141 Ea,.st 44th Street
New York 17, New York
Institute of Radio Engineers
1 East 79th Street
New York 21, New York
Monthly
Bi-monthly
wi~ely circulated periodical of the computer appli~tions mdustry. Contains editorials and articles speak-
Most
mg out on controversial subjects related to professional
development trends. It is laced with satire, parody,
and squibs. Carries news .of people, computers, and
events concerning the EDP industry .
Controlled circulation.
The scope of subject articles covers deSign, theory, and
practice relating toqigital and analog computation devices.
Emphasis on techniqiles for accomplishing the functions
of logic, arithmetic, storage, control, mass data storage
input-output, as well as allied fields of SWitching theory,
symbolic logic, number systems, pattern recognition,
etc.
$17.00 (to non-members)
EDP Newsletter
Information and Control
Industry Reports, Inc.
1327 F. Street, N. W .
Washington 4, D. C.
Academic Press, Inc.
III Fifth Avenue
New York 3, New York
Weekly
Quarterly
A newsletter service carrying computer industry press
releases pertinent to marketing, equipment, contracting,
and personnel events. Presented in capsule style for
quick reading about ''what's new" in the computer field.
Mathematically based technical papers and advanced
theoretical discussions devoted to information theory and
control techniques.
$50.00
$13.50
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
2/63
~1:040.014
§
040.
Information Processing Journal
Cambridge Communications Corp.
238 Main Street
Cambridge 42, Massachusetts
Monthly
A new journal which contains approximately 300 abstracts
per issue. The abstracts are also available separately
on 3x5 cards or miqrofilm, which replaces their former
inclusion in IRE Transactions (PGBC). Some 400 source
publications are listed, giving a particularly wide coverage of the U.S.A., including many fringe entries such as
The Wall Street Journal. Entries are given several subject classifications. Each issue is subject- and authorindexed; an annual cumulative index is promised. The
material is undated.
$44.00
ST ANDARD EDP REPORTS
Journal of Machine Accounting
Journal of Machine Accounting, Inc.
1750 West Central Road
Mount Prospect, illinois
Monthly
Contains articles related to machine processing, auditing,
and a~counting problems and some possible approaChes
to solution of these problem s • Devoted to both BAM and
EDP installation. problem s.
$5.00
Mathematical Tables and Other Aids to Computation
National Academy of Sciences
Printing and Publishing Office
2101 Constitution Avenue
Washington, D.C.
Quarterly
instruments and Cont:t:ol Systems
Instruments Publishing Co., Inc.
845 Ridge Avenue
.
Pittsburgh 12, Pennsylvania
Monthly
Standard EDP Reports
Heavily instrument-oriented articles and advertising.
Related to the computer field through process control applications and plant reporting or other data collection
devices. Contains Simulation Council Newsletters describing activities of a group seeking ,to encourage the
use of the computers in simulation of business activities.
$4.00
Journal of the Association for Computing Machinery
Association for Computing Machinery
14 East 69th Street
New York 21, New York
AUERBACH/BNA
1231 - 24th St., N. W.
Washington, D. C.
Monthly
A loose-leaf service up-dated monthly. It covers, in considerable detail, the basic specifications, performance,
and a general description of all major hardware and software .items .in a computer system. Some three computer
system s are covered in each issue. There is' supplementary material to explain the reports and reports are ineluded from time to time to cover special fields of interest.
$900.00
Quarterly
Technical and theoretical papers devoted largely to
mathematically based proofs of the theory of problems,
and sometimes solutions, as well as advanced computer
techniques.
Systemation Letter
Ross- Martin Company
Box 800
Tulsa 1, Oklahoma
$10.00 (to non-members)
Bi-monthly
A news-letter publication devoted to systems and procedures related to the control of paper flow within the office.
Written in a conversational style, it covers System Fundamentals, Fact Gathering, Analysis, Procedure Charts,
Forms, DeSign, and Work Simplification.
$20.00
2/63
,
I
-
ANNOTATED DIRECTORY OF PERIODICALS FOR THE COMPUTER INDUSTRY
§
21:040.015
040.
Systems and Procedures Journal
Systems and Procedures Association
7890 Brookside Drive
Cleveland 38, Ohio
Bi-monthly
Articles covering the broad field of procedures in business management. Presents both special case study
articles and interpretations of the effect of existing work
in the future. Generally devoted to non-technical interpretations of systems and procedures (particularly the
role of the systems specialist).
$7.50
Systems Management
Data Processing Publishing Corp.
200 Madison Avenue
New York 16, New York
Bi-monthly
Non-technical material for systems and procedures
specialists dealing with equipment for the office and
office systems. Concerned with microfilm data recording and collection equipment, as well as non-technical
appraisals of computer developments.
$3.00
'© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
2/63
SPECIAL REPORTS
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
23:001. 001
&.
SIA",AID
SPECIAL REPORTS
CONTENTS
/AEDl?
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
~
SPECIAL REPORTS
CONTENTS
Factors to Consider in Contracting for an Electronic Data Processing System ••.•. 23:010.001
A Survey of the Character Recognition Field • . . • • • . . • • . • . . • • • . • • • . • . • • •• 23:020.001
Decision Tables Symposium . . . . . . • . . . . . • • • . . . . • • • • • . • • • . • • . • . . • . •. 23:030.001
Magnetic Tape Handlers: A State-of-the-Art Report. • . • . • • . • . • • • • . . . . • • . •. 23:040.001
High-Speed Printers: A State-of-the-Art Report . . . . • . • • • . • • • • . . • • • . . • . •. 23:050.001
Random Access Storage Devices: A State-of-the-Art Report • . . . . • • . . . . • • • . • • 23:060.001
Digital Plotters: A State-of-the-Art Report . . • . • • . • • . • . • • . • • • . • . . . . . . . • 23:070.001
Data Collection Systems: A State-of-the-Art Report. . . . • • • • . • • . • • • • • . • • . .• 23:080.001
How Computer Rental Terms Look in 1965 . . . . . • . • . . • . . • . . • . • . . . • • • . • • • 23:090.001
Data Communications - What It's All About •.•..•.•.•••••••.•••.••••••• 23:100.001
l
I\
"
l
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
4/66
/
23.010.001
SPECIAL REPORT
FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN CONTRACTING FOR
AN ELECTRONIC DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM
prepared by
the Technical Staff of
AU ERBACH Corporation
i
\
\
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
9/62
23:010.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
Special Report
REPORTS
AUERBACH/BNA SPECIAL REPORT
FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN CONTRACTING FOR
AN ELECTRONIC DATA PROCESSI NG SYSTEM
§
OlD .
•1
INTRODUCTION
The acquisition of an electronic data processing system is a major expenditure for any
company. Therefore, the user should carefully consider the factors which are involved
in a contract for procuring a computer system. A checklist of factors, which should be
considered before final negotiation of a contract, is given in the Summary, paragraph
.8, and their implications are discussed in this Special Report. Most of these items,
once called to the user's attention, will be familiar to him, but many of them are not
covered in a manufacturer's initial proposal nor in his standard contract.
It is desirable to obtain from the manufacturer a copy of his U. S. Government General
Services Administration schedule (including sample government contracts and operating practices) as well as his standard commercial contract form. These documents
will indicate the type of conditions to which the manufacturer is willing to agree.
Additional specific data is best obtained by discussion with other users, perhaps through
the appropriate users' group. Although contract information is considered confidential, users will generally discuss specific points, if asked.
It is often desirable to obtain specific statements from the manufacturer covering all
of the points discussed in this Special Report as a means of defining the system and
services being acquired. The degree to which manufacturers are willing to negotiate
special contracts varies. Some do not deviate from a standard contract while others
permit great flexibility.
This Special Report does not cover the numerous legal considerations involved in a
contract of the size and complexity encountered for a computer system. Legal counsel should be obtained .
.2
BASIC CONTRACT DETAILS
. 21
Specifications
.211 Equipment
The manufacturer should provide detailed specifications of the equipment units at contract initiation. These detailed specifications will permit the initiation of effective
preparation for the arrival of the system. If specifications are not complete, programmers may be unable to complete effective, detailed coding. (This is less critical, however, if a firm, process-oriented language is available.) The hardware unit speCifications should be carefully determined to insure obtaining an expected level of
performance .
. 212 Software
In addition to the specification of the equipment configuration, it is reasonable to ex-
pect a complete definitive delineation of the specific program "packages" which are to
be made available.
Perhaps the one area that will be most difficult to specify is the software to be provided
by the manufacturer. Software includes program translators (compilers, assemblers,
generators, etc.) as well as utility routines, report generators, merge and sort routines, etc. The ideal objective would be to have all languages and routines fully docum"ented, completely free of errors, easy to learn and easy to use. At the present
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
9/62
23:010.220
§
ST ANDARD EDP REPORTS
OlD.
state-of-the-art, provision should be made for additional manufacturer's assistance in
the utilization and implementation of these techniques.
Prior to actual acceptance of the equipment, there should be an evaluation of the use of
the translator.
The user should determine if a process oriented (compiler) language will be useful.
Experienced programmers often prefer assemblers. (See Sections 15 through 18 of
each Computer System Report in Standard EDP Reports for data to assist in these decisions.) The user should determine that the translator for the language to be used is
readily available and fully tested. It may be found that the sort routines, report program generators, utility debugging routines, etc., will not fit within the conceptual
ideas of the user's intended operational practices. The manufacturer may, therefore,
be asked to modify them as necessary.
The user should assure himself that all of the software he is obtaining will operate on
the equipment configuration he is to receive. (See Standard EDP Reports, Computer
System Reports, : 180. 6. )
.22
Method of Payment
The method of payment should be specified in the contract. Apart from outright purchase and normal rental contracts, it is also possible to obtain a rental contract which
includes a purchase option (usually exercisable within a fixed time period). With a
purchase option, a major portion of the rental charge can be applied to subsequent purchase.
Before a decision is made relative to the type of payment, the user should determine if
his expected amortization schedule is acceptable by the Internal Revenue Service so
that some evaluation can be made of the various alternatives in the light of corporate
profits. (Reference #1, paragraph. 9).
The term of the contract should be established. Rental contracts are usually renewable
on a year-to-year basis and cancellable (after an initial period) on 30 to 90 days' notice. One year is the minimum acceptable time by manufacturers as an initial period
in conventional contracts. The user might obtain more service by agreeing to a minimum term which is longer than one year.
The responsibility for personal property and sales and use taxes should also be specified in the contract .
. 23
Amount of Chargeable Time
Rental contracts should clearly define the amount of chargeable time included in the basic rental fee. Some of the more common definitions of the amount of chargeable time
are:
a) any 176 hours per month.
b)
176 hours plus "lunch" hours.
c)
any 8 hours per day.
d)
the time during a specific period such as: 9AM to 5PM, or 8AM to 5PM (with
the lunch hour available to the user).
Additional charges beyond the amount included in the basic rental fee should also be defined. These charges are usually a stated percentage of the basic hourly rental rate;
forty (40) to fifty (50) percent being common. Charges for time beyond the basic time
are usually based directly on the actual time used on each unit or subsystem.
9/62
23:010.240
SPECIAL REPORT
§
010 .
. 24
Chargeable Tim e
The time to be counted as chargeable time is usually defined similarly to serviceable
time (see Standard EDP Reports, Glossary, 7:261. 27). This is· the time during which
the system is productive or could have been productive, if the user operated efficiently.
It is not unusual to declare rerun time as nonchargeable, provided it is caused by
equipment malfunction rather than operator error .
. 25
Assurance of Serviceable Time
The manufacturer guarantees (at least implicitly) a number of serviceable hours per
day (or month). In some cases, when the number of serviceable hours is less than the
guarantee, the user can reduce his rental pro rata: e. g., if 176 hours per month are
agreed upon and 6 hours of that time are unavailable, the rental fee can be reduced by
6/176. In case of major failures, a back-up facility should be provided (see. 51, last
paragraph) .
.3
ACCEPTANCE
.31
Shipping and Installation Charges
Payment for these services should be mutually agreed upon during contract negotiations.
It is customary for shipping charges to be borne by the prospective user; however, the
costs of in-transit insurance, physical installation and final test of the hardware are
absorbed by the manufacturer.
The site preparation for the equipment is the user's responsibility, but should be designed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations in order to insure proper installation and operating conditions (Reference #2, paragraph. 9). The manufacturer will usually be most cooperative in supplying physical installation data and advice. Complete environmental details should be specified by the manufacturer's siteinstallation engineering staff and should include: air conditioning, power, equipment
layout, cable lengths, floor loads, special power outlets and service area layout. Manufacturers sometimes overstate floor space requirements (systems can be operated in
"crowded" conditions if necessary), but otherwise, provide good assistance on site design (see paragraph .4).
In cases where the manufacturer delivers equipment which differs from that specified
and requires site changes, the manufacturer may then be held responsible for such
changes .
. 32
Delivery and Acceptance Dates
Delivery and acceptance dates should be established. The user can normally postpone
the delivery date with as little as 30 days notice without penalty. Should the equipment
be delivered before program preparations are completed a considerable amount of money can be wasted unnecessarily. Therefore, the delivery date should be carefully reviewed as the implementation of the system progresses, and postponed, if necessary.
Any program packages specified in the contract should be available at their promised
date. Software should be delivered several months earlier than hardware to permit
time for familiarization and use.
The actual delivery date is not as important as the acceptance date, which is the date
before which the acceptance tests should have been passed. In some cases, manufacturers have agreed to penalty clauses should the acceptance date be delayed. This
is not common, but penalty clauses as high as $1,000.00 per day have been negotiated.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
9/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:010.330
§
010 .
. 33
Acceptance Tests
Acceptance tests should be specified and should include additional tests of the system
after it has passed the diagnostic and engineering program tests used by the manufacturer's installation team.
It is important in any new system to test all components and their interactions as part
of the overall system. A system should operate without serious eqUipment failure for
a mutually agreed-upon period (usually 40 to 80 hours) before being considered for final acceptance tests.
The final acceptance test procedures should be explicit. Good acceptance procedures
involve these factors (Reference #3, paragraph .9):
a)
The schedule for the acceptance test period should be clearly defined. This
schedule should show how the time throughout the day should be allocated to
periods of operation, idleness, preventive maintenance, etc. The acceptance test period should last at least 30 days in order to obtain a good estimate of both the mean-time-between-failures (MTBF) and mean-time-to-repair (MTTR).
b)
During each of the operating periods, the nature of the work which the computer is to be doing should be clearly defined. The work which the computer
should do during the operating period might be divided into cycles. In each
cycle the following should be performed:
(1) process actual, but tested, data for key applications;
(2) process special data designed to test all of the special features of
the eqUipment and any program packages supplied. (Experience
has shown that a selection of actual data will not begin to test all
of the possible conditions, therefore, a special input is desirable.
Conversely, a set of spec,ial data can never be developed to predict all the unusual conditions which occur in practice, therefore,
a large section of actual data is also desirable).
(3) use diagnostic routines which exercise all parts of the equipment,
including peripheral units.
By repeating this cycle of tests throughout an operating period, a good test of the system can be obtained. Of course, each program should be designed to check its own
operation so that any errors which the system makes are promptly reported. Anyoutput should be checked against specified standard results. The minimum performance
level required for acceptability during the test period must be agreed upon in advance.
This agreement might include minimum mean-time-between-failures, maximum mean
repair time, maximum repair time, and minimum percentage operating time out of totalon-time. Estimated performance speeds (as listed in Standard EDP Reports) can be
used as a basis to establish anticipated performance times.
Rental charges for the equipment should not be effective until the system components
have passed the stipulated acceptance tests.
For well established eqUipment with many prior satisfactory installations, the acceptance testing may be considerably simplified. A method often used is to operate the system for a continuous period of one month on the normal work, loaded to the expected
schedule. Rent is then paid retroactively to the beginning of the period, provided a ratio of 0.90 (or better) chargeable time to scheduled operating time has been achieved .
.4
ENVIRONMENT
The minimum environmental conditions under which the manufacturer's equipment will
perform satisfactorily should be stated. Allowable variations in the following requirements should be specified~
9/62
23:010.410
SPECIAL REPORT
§ OlD •
. 41
Temperature and Humidity
•
equipment - in use and on standby
• magnetic tape - in use and in storage
In these two areas. the specification will help determine the amount of air conditioning
that the user will have to install .
. 42
Power
requir~ments
•
voltage
and permissible variation
•
frequency requirements and permissible variation
•
waveform variations allowable
Advance specification of these factors will help determine requirements for power
transformers and/or a motor-generator set .
. 43 ·Space
• free floor space around each equipment unit to permit access for maintenance.
•
space to be devoted to the maintenance engineers. equipment and spare parts .
.5
MAINTENANCE
.51
Reliability
Reliability is measured as a ratio of serviceable time to the sum of serviceable time
and down-time (time when faults are awaiting repair or are being repaired or fault- .
caused rerun time). It is frequently quoted as a percentage and often called percentage
"up-time" (values of 95 to 98 percent are generally expected). In general, only time
that had been scheduled for work by the user is considered in this calculation. A guaranteed up-time should be negotiated at least in the form of minimum serviceable hours
per day (usually equal to the time required by the user for his basic jobs ranging from
8 to 20 hours).
A more technical method of specifying acceptable reliability is to indicate the meantime-between-failures and the mean-time-to-repliir equipment failures. Proportions
of up-time and down-time can be estimated from these figures.
Under certain conditions. the importance of the data or of the workload situation will
not permit delays due to equipment (or any other) failure. In such cases, it is desirable to specify that an emergency or "back-up" facility be available. Charges incurred
under such circumstances are usually absorbed by the equipment manufacturer if the
emergency is caused by the total system failure .
. 52
Maintenance Responsibility
The contract should define maintenance requirements and procedures, describing the
types of maintenance: fully attended, resident. non-resident - unattended, or emergency. In connection with a purchase agreement, there may be a need for a separate
maintenance and spare parts contract. In most rental contracts, the equipment manufacturer guarantees a minimum percentage of up-time or other assurance of usable
time. The responsibility for reliability then rests with the manufacturer. For both
rental and separate maintenance contracts, the level of skill, number of people and
their location (e. g., user's installation or manufacturer's office) can be considered
as discussion points. In the case of on -site maintenance personnel, facilities such as
space. power and furniture are usually supplied by the user.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
9/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:010.600
§ 010.
Duration of scheduled maintenance should be specified in the contract after the level of
acceptable reliability has been agreed upon. The user should have the right to establish his operating hours and the manufacturer should adjust scheduled maintenance
times accordingly. Attention should be given to the availability of maintenance services during scheduled extra shift operation and also during occasional unscheduled
overtime requirements. The maximum time between the call for maintenance and the
arrival of maintenance personnel might also be specified.
The method of scheduling and charging the time required to make any changes to equipment and/or engineering improvements should be stipulated. These items are usually
a matter of mutual agreement at the time of occurrence. For rental contracts, however, these usually include modifications or substitutions to maintain the eqUipment
equivalent to the "current product-line." In any case, an agreement should be reached
on those types of improvements which will be installed at no cost and those which will
be paid for by the user. When improvements for increased reliability are necessary
(e.g., marginal components or units to be replaced) to maintain the percentage of uptime, they should be made at no cost to the user .
.6
USER'S RIGHTS
In the case of rental contracts, the conditions under which the user can modify and/or
maintain the equipment (if any) should be specified. Usually the user may rent time on
his own system to outside users in order to utilize slack periods. Sometimes the manufacturer will agree to buy time. In this case, rates and procedures should be established .
.7
ADDITIONAL FACTORS
.71
Special Equipment
If any unit of the system is being constructed especially for the user, the contract
should include complete technical performance specifications. If the unit involves the
interconnection of equipments of two manufacturers, the individual responsibilities for
performance and maintenance should be carefully defined.
Price, delivery and acceptance conditions for special units should be stated within the
terms of the contract. The policies adopted for regular equipment can usually be modified for special equipments .
. 72
System Design
Often the user's system is based on a design outlined in the manufacturer's proposal.
In this case, the detailing of the system design and the extension of the system concept should be accomplished with assistance from the manufacturer. The degree and
level of system design assistance is a point of negotiation. The number, level and
type of skill of personnel assigned, the assignment of specific indiViduals, the responsibility of the manufacturer's personnel, as well as their qualifications, are pOints
which should be considered. The tenure of their assignment should also be agreed upon
in addition to the availability of additional manufacturer's support personnel for speCific needs such as writing special programs, debugging or design of difficult parts of the
procedures •
. 73
Training
Training courses may be specified to be held on the user's premises and/or at the manufacturer's training centers. The program language to be used should be decided upon
early in the implementation program, and this language should be used in the training
courses. The choice of a program language is dependent on the availability of an operational translator prior to the delivery date.
9/62
SPECIAL REPORT
23:010.740
§ OlD.
A "reasonable" number of programmers and systems analysts should be trained (usually as many as the user actually intends to employ in these positions). Training is
also necessary for console operators. Advanced programming courses and orientation
programs to be presented to top management personnel should be considered. If good
systems courses (as opposed to programming and coding) can be made available, they
are especially desirable for training new analysts.
As part of the training program, it is usual for the manufacturer to provide complete
training materials and reference manuals. Manuals and training materials should apply to the equipment and the languages to be used, not to earlier systems .
. 74
Program Testing
Ideally, the user's first application should be pre-tested. This might be accomplished
on equipment provided by the manufacturer at another site. Usually no charge is made
for a limited number of machine hours for this purpose. The exact number of hours is
subject to negotiation. It is good practice to utilize the translator program and learn
how to use it during this practice application .
. 75
Special Programs
In some cases the user may wish to contract with the manufacturer to supply specific
operational programs (in addition to software packages). In this case, there should be
a firm mutual understanding of: the form of documentation of the programs provided;
delivery data; acceptance date; how changes and improvements will be made after the
program is accepted; how the user can train his own people on the program; and the
maximum permissible processing time or other measure of efficiency. The user will
have to provide firm specifications for the program early in the schedule and will not
have the same flexibility in changing requirements as he might have if his own group
was doing the programming. Attention should be given to the acceptance tests for such
programs .
.8
SUMMARY
As this Special Report has pointed out, there are many major factors to be considered
in contracting for an electronic data processing system. These factors are recapitulated below and may be used as a checklist before negotiating a contract.
•
Basic Contract Details
EqUipment - the manufacturer should provide detailed specifications of
the equipment units.
Software - specifications should indicate the software to be provided.
The user should assure himself that the software provided
should operate on the equipment configuration selected.
Type of payment - the user should be aware of the various types of payments possible, aside from outright purchases and rental
contracts. The user should also investigate the tax implications involved with a particular agreement.
Amount of chargeable time - rental agreements should clearly define the
amount of chargeable time included in the basic rental fee.
In addition, a definition of the "amount of chargeable time"
should be stated.
Chargeable time - a definition should be provided for the time that is to
be counted as chargeable time.
Assurance of serviceable time - this time should be specified by the manufacturer' and in the event of a major failure, what back-up
facilities are available.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
9/62
ST AII.fDARD EDP REPORTS
23:010.900
§
010.
• Acceptance
Shipping and installation - payment for these services should be mutually agreed upon during contract negotiations. Some charges
are undertaken by the user while others are absorbed by the
• manufacturer.
Delivery and acceptance dates - these particular dates should be established during contract negotiations. Software packages
should be delivered before equipment to allow for familiarization and use.
Acceptance tests - these tests should be specified and the test procedures made explicit. The amount of time that tests should
run satisfactorily before the equipment is considered acceptable should be stipulated in the contract.
•
Environment - the minimum environmental conditions under which the manufacturer's equipment will perform satisfactorily should be
stated.
• Maintenance
Reliability - the minimum level of reliability and methods of maintaining reliable operation should be agreed upon at contract negotiation.
Maintenance responsibility - maintenance of equipment responsibility
and the types of maintenance provided should be specified.
• Additional Factors
System design - support from manufacturer may be desirable in detail,
ing system design and system concept.
Training - training courses should be provided by the manufacturer and
the location of the training center be specified.
Program testing - initial programs should be pre-tested, perhaps, on
equipment provided by the manufacturer at another site.
Special programs - the user may contract with the manufacturer to supply specific operational programs other than the software
packages provided .
.9
REFERENCES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Anthony, Robert N. and Samuel Schwartz. Office Equipment: Buy or Rent?
Management Analysis Center, Inc., 275 Newbury St., Boston 16, Mass. ($15)
2. "Cutting Your Cost of Your EDP Installation." Data Processing Digest.
(1958), 1140 Robertson Blvd., Los Angeles, California. ($35)
3. Stringer, J. B., and R. O. Bennett. "Acceptance Trials of Computer Systems
for Government Use." The Computer lournal. (October, 1961) Vol. 4 #3
pp. 185-196.
9/62
23:020.001
~
AUERBACH
STANDARD
EDP
REPUITS
~
i
\,---
SPECIAL REPORT
A SURVEY OF THE CHARACTER RECOGNITION FIELD
PREPARED BY
LAWRENCE FEIDELMAN
TECHNICAL STAFF
AUERBACH CORPORATION
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
23:020.100
,.
I
\ '-.-
1&.
STANDARD
EDP
REPORTS
AUERBACH
SPECIAL REPORT
SPECIAL REPORT
A SURVEY OF THE CHARACTER RECOGNITION FIELD
.1
INTRODUCTION
In the early days of electronic data processing, when the amounts of information being
handled in most computer applications were relatively small, the need to manually keypunch the information in a machine-readable code caused no particular concern. Today,
when vastly more sophisticated machines are being used to store, retrieve, and process
large amounts of information, this manual operation has come to be viewed as a fundamental weak point in computer-based information systems - too slow, expensive, and unreliable to be tolerated in applications involving large volumes of input information. The
one solution to tillS problem is the automatic character reader - a device that has been
developed to the point where it has replaced manual keypunching in selected application
areas, although it still lacks certain functional refinements that will be necessary to make
it suitable for the full spectrum of computer input operations;
Character readers are machines for directly converting alphanumeric characters or symbols into a machine-readable form.
The output of the readers may be in the form of
punched cards, punched paper tape, or magnetic tape - or the readers may be operated
on-line (directly connected) to a computer.
Most current readers are severely limited in the type fonts they can read, and, in some
cases, in the size of the character set (alphanumeric vocabulary) they can handle. On the
other hand, character readers are in effective and economically efficient use in several
major industries. Banking is probably the largest current application area for character
readers. The credit-card industry, led by the oil companies, and utility bill processing
are other major application areas. In addition, some retail merchandising firms are now
using character readers, and the United States Post Office Department (which is already
using optical ZIP-code reader/sorters) has expressed interest in seeing a character reader developed to read hand-written addresses.
Character readers offer the advantages of being faster and more accurate than manual keypunching, since they permit printed data to be entered directly into data-processing systems without any additional human action. The present purchase prices of commercial
magnetic character readers average around $80,000. The prices for optical character
readers range from $75,000 upward, depending upon the speed and sophistication of the
machine (rentals run between $3,000 and $15,000 per month) .
.2
CHARACTER READER TYPES AND FUNCTIONS
There are two basic types of character readers: magnetic and optical. Magnetic character
readers are used almost exclusively within the banking industry. They can handle only
special type fonts printed in magnetic ink. The font most widely used in the United States,
and adopted as a standard by the American Bankers Association, is Font E-13B - a highly
stylized font that can be used to represent only 10 numeric digits and 4 special symbols
(Figure 2). Another font, which was developed by Compagnie des Machines Bull-General
Electric, is capable of representing all the characters in the alphabet as well as all the
numeric symbols (Figure 3). However, the Bull font, which has been adopted as a standard
by the European banking community, can at present be read only by the Bull CMC-7 and
Olivetti 7750 magnetic character readers.
Since magnetic readers detect only magnetic marks, non-magnetic dirt or other marks will
not cause reading errors. However, considerable care must be taken with the quality of
the printing on the documents. Ink densities and character image are both critical.
Relatively high quality-control standards must be maintained in the printing process to
prevent charact.er deterioration and extraneous ink spots.
Optical character readers are used in nearly all the major application areas other than
banking. They work on the principle of recognizing the difference in contrast between the
characters and the background on which they are printed. Some optical readers do not require special fonts and are theoretically capable of reading most type fonts (with suitable
adjustments). So far, however, this theoretical capability is too expensive to realize for
commercial use, although there are several optical character readers that can read more
than one type font. The least expensive units are restricted to one font, which is usually
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
23:020.200
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
.2
CHARACTER READER TYPES AND FUNCTIONS (Contd. )
specially designed for low error rates and is often restricted to numerics plus a few
special symbols. Also, optical readers tend to be somewhat less reliable than magnetic
readers because of their greater sensitivity to dirt, document creases, and poor paper
quality. Despite these drawbacks, optical readers seem to offer the most promise for the
future, and new techniques are being explored and developed to overcome the major functional problems.
All existing commercial character readers, whether magnetic or optical, consist of three
basic functional units:
• Document transport,
• Scanner, and
• Recognition unit.
A functional block diagram of a typical character reader is shown in Figure 1.
Documents
Transport
Unit
Document
Output
Hopper
Scanner
Unit
Recognition
Unit
Punched Cards
MagnetiC Tape
Punched Paper Tape
Control Signals ___ •
DataFlow _
To
L-_----<. Data
Processor
Figure 1. Functional Diagram of a Character Reader
The function of a character reader's document transport is to move each document to the
reading station, position it properly, and move it into an "out" hopper. Transport mechanisms can be divided into two basic types: one for handling individual documents (paper
sheets or cards) and the other for handling continuous rolls (cash register or adding
machine tapes).
The function of a character reader's scanner is to convert the alphanumeric characters and
symbols on a document into some analog or digital representation that can be analyzed by
the recognition unit. There are two basic methods for accomplishing this: magnetic and
optical.
The recognition unit is the heart of the character reader. This unit matches patterns from
the scanner against reference patterns stored in the machine and either identifies the
patterns as specific characters or rejects them as being unidentifiable .
.3
DOCUMENT TRANSPORTS
Document transports in character readers designed to handle adding machine or cash
register tapes consist of a tape well in which the paper roll is loaded, paper guides, and
a paper drive control. Once the tape has been manually threaded, the paper is automatically moved past the read head in a manner similar to the movement of a film reel in a
movie projector. A vacuum system is frequently used to keep the paper flat. The maximum length of the paper roll that can be handled ranges from 100 feet for the National Cash
Register Optical Journal Reader (4) (5) to "any reasonable length" for the Recognition
Equipment Journal Tape Reader. The paper-roll mechanisms are usually designed so that
the roll can be backed up any time rereading is required. A special feature of the feeder
mechanism used in the Recognition Equipment Journal Tape Reader (6) is an automatic tape
advance, which speeds up tape movement when there are large spaces between print lines.
In most other readers, tape speed is constant at all times.
1/66
A
-AUERBACH
~
(Contd.)
SPECIAL REPORT
(
\
.3
23:020.300
DOCUMENT TRANSPORTS (Contd.)
In character readers dcsigned to handle individual sheets or cards, the document-transport
function is divided into two phases: (1) feeding the documents from the input hopper, and (2)
transporting the documents past the reading station. A common device for document feeding
is called a friction feeder. This consists of a belt wound around capstans and partially resting on the document stack. Constant pressure is exerted against the belt by the document
stack. As the belt moves across the top of the stack, it pushes the top documents into a
separator station, where a combination of rollcrs and another belt separates the top document from all documents below it. This technique is used in the IBM 1419 Magnetic Character Reader. (2)
Vacuum or suction feeders are also used to lift documents off the input stack. One example
of a vacuum feeder is used in the Philco General-Purpose Character Reader, (1) which employs a pair of vacuum belts to lift the document from the stack and carry it forward to the
transport unit.
Both the friction and vacuum devices, however, have problems in handling documents of thin
paper and may occasionally feed more than one document at a time. A new type of feeder,
which has been designed by Rabinow Electronics (a subsidiary of Control Data Corporation) (3)
uses a set of cone-shaped rollers to feed the documents. The rolling cones engage a corner
of the top-most document and roll the corner away from the pile up into paper rollers, which
carry the document to the transport unit. This unit is said to eliminate the possibility of
feeding two sheets at a time.
A popular method for transporting the document to the reading station is a vacuum-drive conveyor belt. (1) (3) (7) Some character readers, such as the IBM 1428 and the Rabinow RUR
model, use the conveyor belt to place the document on a rotating drum, which moves the
document past the read head. The paper is held to the drum by means of a vacuum.
One of the basic disadvantages oj the above mechanical techniques is that they cannot move
the document as fast as it can be read. One approach to this problem has been the use of a
high-resolution CRT scanner, developed by Philco Corporation, (8) which can scan the entire
document without requiring any mechanical movement. Another method, used by UNIVAC
Division of Sperry Rand Corporation, uses a vidicon scanner which takes a picture of the entire document at once. (9) Both of these systems will be discussed later in this report.
.4
MAGNETIC SCANNER UNITS
Scanner units, as previously mentioned, are divided into two basic categories: magnetic and
optical - and these deSignations are used to characterize the readers themselves.
Since the banking field represents the major application area for magnetic character readers,
all of the magnetic readers produced in the United States have scanning units designed to handle the E-13B font shown in Figure 2.
(
III
•••
Figure 2. Sample of E-13B Font Characters
"'-. ..
Most scanning units convert the magnetic characters into an analog voltage waveform for
subsequent identification. The principle used is based on the electrical signals that are
generated by moving the characters past the read head. Each character generates a signal
that has a unique waveform, which the recognition unit matches against reference waveforms. The companies presently using this technique are Burroughs, General Electric,
and National Cash Register.
IBM uses a digital scanning technique, which is exemplified by the IBM 1419 Magnetic Character Reader. (2) In this machine, each character is scanned by 30 magnetic heads stacked
vertically and interconnected to give 10 outputs. The outputs are transmitted to a 70-bit
shift register in the recognition unit, where they are matched against stored reference
patterns.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:020.400
.4
MAGNETIC SCANNER UNITS (Contd.)
Another type of digital scanning technique is used in the Compagnie des Machines BullGeneral Electric CMC-7 and Olivetti-General Electric 7750 magnetic readers, which are
designed for the special Bull magnetic font shown in Figure 3. This font, which has been
adopted by the European banking community, can be used to represent 26 alphabetical characters, 10 numerals, and 5 special symbols. Also, it is easy for human beings to read.
Each character is composed of seven vertical strokes, which define six intervals of short
and long durations (i. e., gap widths between strokes). The reader scans each character
from left to right and records the variations in magnetic flux, which indicate the width of
the gap between the strokes. Each character is then identified by the num1,)er and sequence
of narrow and wide gap widths.
11 111 \1 111111' ,II
11\::11 III::' 1111 'II
1::1111
1111111
II :::11
Figure 3.
.5
Irill'
III ,
IIII111
111"11
III
1111111
1111111
II11
II::: II
II::
'1:::1'
:\1
1 111 ' '1111
1111111
II::
III
11111
II: :' "
Sample of Bull Magnetic Reader Type Font Characters
OPTICAL SCANNER UNITS
Optical scanning methods are based on the differences in contrast between the characters
and the background on which they appear. The function of the scanner is to sample either
portions of a character or a complete character to determine the relationships between
light and dark areas. The common types of scanners used are mechanical discs, flyingspot scanners, parallel photocells and vidicon scanners .
• 51
Mechanical-Disc Scanner
The mechanical-disc scanner consists of a lens system, a rotating disc, a fixed aperture
plate, and a photomultiplier, as shown in Figure 4. The characters to be read are flooded
with light, which is reflected from the surface of the document into a rotating disc via the
lens system. The disc has apertures extending from its center toward its periphery. As
the disc rotates, the apertures pick up light samples. A fixed aperture plate regulates the
amount of light and directs the light to a photomultiplier. The photomultiplier tube converts
the light samples into signal pulses. By varying the voltage threshold, the photocell outputs
can be adjusted for different background colors.
The mechanical-disc scanner senses a character of data at a time. Movement between
characters and lines is accomplished either by moving the document, as in the NCR Optical
Journal Reader, (5) or by repositioning the lens system, as in the IBM 1428 Alphameric
Optical Reader. (13) Consequently, this type of scanner is relatively slow by comparison
with the other scanners mentioned.
LENS
FIXED
APERTURE
PLATE
LIGHT
DIGIT 5 BEING
FLOODED 8Y LIGHT
SOURCE
Figure 4.
1/66
PHOTOMULTIPLIER
CONVERTS REFLECTED
LIGHT INTO ELECTRICAL
IMPULSES
Mechanical-Disc Scanner
A.
AUERBACH
•
(Contd.)
SPECIAL REPORT
.52
23:020.520
Flying-Spot Scanner
The flying-spot scanner consists of a cathode-ray tube, a projection lens, a phototube, and
a control unit. A beam of light is generated in the cathode-ray tube and deflected across
the tube in a scan pattern. The lens system projects this scanning light spot onto the document, from which it is reflected into a phototube. The phototube generates a voltage signal
whose level is proportional in each instant to the amount of reflected light, thus indicating
light and dark areas. The resulting signals are then either fed directly to the recognition
unit in analog form or first transformed into digital form.
The flying-spot scanner offers more flexibility than the mechanical disc, since its scanning
pattern can be automatically adjusted by the control unit. This permits the use of different
scanning modes (i. e., scanning certain character fields, scanning speCified portions of the
document). Also, being completely electronic, it is faster than the mechanical disc and is
generally classified as a medium-speed device.
The introduction of high-resolution cathode-ray tubes (2000 optical lines) has made manufacturers look to the development of a reader in which a complete document can be scanned
without any document motion other than that required to position it under the read station.
A scanner of this type is now being manufactured by Philco Corporation. (8) Sylvania Corporation has worked on the development of a similar device, which was expected to achieve
very high reading speeds of up to 6,000 characters per second. (14)
. 53
Parallel Photocells
The use of a vertical grouping of photocells (13) speeds up scanning operations by simultaneously sampling a number of points which, when combined, add up to a complete vertical
slice of the character. The electrical signals generated by the photocells are then quantitized into either black, white, or gray levels. This data is fed into a shift register and
stored until data on the entire character has been accumulated. Due to the parallel sampling, this type of scanner can achieve higher speeds than the flying-spot scanner.
A variation of this method that eliminates the need for shift registers uses a full "retina"
of photocells to sample an entire character rather than just one vertical slice. Besides
eliminating the shift register, this method also increases reading speed to approximately
2,400 characters per second. Rabinow Electronics (a subsidiary of Control Data Corporation) (3) and Recognition Equipment (6) are two of the companies currently using a retina of
photocells for sampling. This sampling technique has the present capability for achieving
a higher speed than any of the previously-mentioned techniques .
. 54
Vidicon Scanner
So far, we have discussed scanning methods that read characters by reflecting light from
the document to one or more photocells. A totally different method being used is to project
the characters onto a vidicon television camera tube and scan the active surface with an
electron beam. The resulting video signals are quantitized to digitally indicate black or
white.
.
This type of scanner is currently being used by the UNIVAC Division of Sperry Rand
Corporation. (9) (15) By storing a group of characters on the tube (the NDP vidicon scanner
can store 45 characters), the need for document movement during the scanning operation is
eliminated in cases where the document contains a reasonably small number of characters.
The advent of high-resolution vidicon tubes could permit the character capacity to be increased to the point where document movement during scanning will be eliminated on most
documents.
Another advantage of the vidicon scanner is speed. Since it takes only 30 milliseconds for
the beam to scan the entire tube, a full grouping of stored characters can be read in that
time. At present, due to the limited number of characters that can be stored on the tube,
the scanner is only medium-speed (i.e., 500 characters per second). However, once this
limitation no longer exists, vidicon scanners should be as fast as or faster than the flyingspot type.
.6
RECOGNITION UNITS
Recognition units probably represent the area of greatest technical development in the character reader field. Because of the rapidity of the progress being made, we will limit our
discussion to the five most common types of recognition units now available commercially.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
23:020.610
• 61
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
Optical Matching
Optical matching was one of the earliest recognition methods to be used. It is based on the
use of two photographic masks for each character. One mask is a positive transparency of
the character and the other is a negative transparency. The positive transparency shows
all the significant areas that should be covered by the character, and the negative transparency shows those areas that should be left blank.
The negative and positive images of the unknown character are projected onto their opposite
masks; i. e., the positive image is projected onto the negative mask, and the negative image
onto the positive mask.
Phototubes behind each mask detect any light passing through. A character is identified by
first measuring the total light passing through each of the reference masks and selecting the
one that passes the smallest amount. Character identification or rejection is then made by
comparing the amount of light passed through the selected mask with a threshold value.
Ideally, no light should pass through the reference mask if it matches the character being
identified. In practice, however, the match is seldom precise enough to completely blank
out all light, which is the reason for establishing the threshold value as a tolerance.
/'
The RCA multi-font reading machine, (16) which employs an optical-matching technique,
can read up to 500 characters per second.
Although most readers using this technique do so in conjunction with a conventional scanning unit, a scanner is not required. For example, an optical character reader being designed by Rabinow Electronics uses a mirror beam splitter to project the character onto
the optical masks. If developed, this should result in a significant increase in reading
speed.
The advantages of the optical-matching technique are its ability to identify a full alphanumeric character set and its relative Simplicity, which makes it less expensive than some
of the other techniques. Also, the masks can be manually changed to enable the reader to
handle different character fonts. The major disadvantage is that errors are easily caused
by characters that do not meet strict standards of shape and registration. Also, there may
be problems in distinguishing between such similar letters as "Q" and "0" or between different punctuation marks.
· 62
Analog Waveform Matching
Analog waveform matching is another recognition method that has been in use for some
time, particularly in the magnetic character readers used by the banking industry. It is
based on the principle that each of certain characters passing under a read head will produce a unique voltage waveform as a function of time; that is, the waveform of each character will differ either in shape or length with respect to time. Characters are identified
by matching their waveforms against reference waveforms.
Machines using this technique have reading speeds of approximately 500 characters per
second. The principal disadvantage of this system is that only a limited number of characters have unique waveforms. Consequently, this technique is found mainly in systems
dealing with a limited character set.
• 63
Frequency Analysis
Frequency analysis is a digital recognition method developed for fonts consisting of closelyspaced vertical lines. The outstanding example of this kind of font is the Bull magneticink font shown in Figure 3. Naturally, the Bull CMC-7 and Olivetti 7750 magnetic character readers use this recognition technique. The widths of the gaps between the vertical
lines of each character are measured by variations in magnetic flux. An unknown character
is identified by comparing the sequence and number of its narrow and wide gaps with stored
codes for each of the alphanumeric characters. An analog vers ion of this technique is
undergoing investigation at General Electric. (10)
The advantage of the frequency-analysis technique is that it can accommodate a full character set. Speed is another advantage; the Bull CMC-7 magnetic reader, which uses this
technique, has a maximum speed of 1, 3000 characters per second.
· 64
Matrix Matching
This technique, one of the more widely-used, stores the scanner signals in a digital register
that is connected to a series of resistor matrices. Each matrix represents a single reference character. The other end of each matrix is connected to a second digital register,
1/66
(Contd. )
A
AUERBACH
~
SPECIAL REPORT
.64
23:020.640
Matrix Matching (Contd.)
whose voltage outputs are representative of what should be obtained if the reference character were present. Recognition is based upon the resultant output voltage obtained from
each matrix.
The advantage of the matrix-matching technique is that the resistor matrices can be modified easily, making it easy to change character fonts. ill addition, a full alphanumeric
character set can be read. The technique also has the advantage of being quite fast, since
the matching is done by resistor matrices. Reading speeds of up to 2,400 characters per
second have been obtained. The technique is similar in theory to the optical-matching
technique described earlier, but it can handle misregistered characters much more effectively. The numerous machines using this technique are listed in the comparison chart.
.65
Stroke Analysis
This technique, used by Farrington Electronics, (7) is based on the stroke or line formation
of each character. The characters are differentiated from each other by the number and
position of vertical and horizontal strokes. The formation of the unknown character is
matched by a special-purpose computer against a character truth table, which indicates
the stroke formation for each reference character. At present, this technique is limited
to identifying only a special character font called the Selfchek font, which emphasizes
straight lines. Work is being done to generalize the technique so that it can be applied to
any character font.
\,
Stroke analysis has the advantage of being able to handle a full alphanumeric character set,
but the maximum speeds obtainable by the Farrington character readers are about 300
characters per second, which is low compared to the 2,400 characters per second obtained
by machines using the matrix-matching technique. Also, the stroke-analysis method does
not have the font flexibility of the matrix-matching technique because of the need to change
the wired recognition program in the special-purpose computer every time it is necessary
to switch to a different character font.
.7
(
\
ECONOMICS AND SELECTION CRITERIA
The question of whether it pays to replace a manual keypunching operation with an automatic
character reader cannot be answered in any general way. The answer depends upon the
characteristics of the specific application - particularly upon the volume of input data that
must be regularly handled, the accuracy requirements of the input operation, and the speed
of the computer. A rule of thumb that can be helpful in reaching a preliminary decision on
whether to seriously investigate the use of a character reader is that an installation preparing 10,000 input documents per day or requiring 8 to 12 keypunch operators is about the
smallest that might gain from using character-recognition equipment. As the daily input
volume approaches 30, 000 documents, character readers tend to cost less to operate than
keypunch devices. (19) The final criterion for making the decision is, of course, the number
of characters produced per dollar. A simple formula for determining this cost is to determine:
F=
a
b+c
c
Where
F = number of characters produced per dollar.
'--
a
= total characters produced per month.
b = monthly equipment rental cost.
c = monthly employee salary.
For example, assuming an operator's salary of $350 per month and a typical 200-characterper-second character reader renting at $2,000 per month, then if the character reader is
run 7 hours per day, 20 days per month, it will produce 42,893 characters per dollar.
This characters-per-dollar figure is roughly 17 times larger than could be achieved by a
typical manual keypunching operation without verification.
(
There are four major criteria for evaluating character readers. Cost, of course, is the
most obvious one, but it must be carefully related to the functional capabilities of reading
speed, flexibility, and reliability. Naturally, all three of these capabilities directly influence the cost of character-reading equipment; but, as is the case with all equipment, the
initial cost is only part of the story.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc,
1/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:020.700
.7
ECONOMICS AND SELECTION CRITERIA (Contd.)
The reading speeds of character readers currently on the market range from about 70 to
2,400 characters per second. You will find, when comparing machines of different speeds
and prices, that the number of characters read per dollar tends to increase at a much faster
rate than machine costs.
Better performance in terms of flexibility and reliability might also save you money over
the long run despite the higher initial equipment cost incurred. Flexibility pertains to a
reader's ability to read a variety of character fonts, including handwritten characters, as
well as its rescan ability (i. e., ability to re-read a line of characters), paper-handling capability, and special format features. The ability to read only selected fields and to skip over
crossed-out characters are two format features that are very useful in some applications.
Reader reliability is, of course, a fundamental criterion. The reliability of a character
reader is measured by its reject and error rates. The "reject rate" is generally defined
as the percentage of the total documents read which the reader rejects because it is unable
to recognize one or more characters. The "error rate" refers to the percentage of documents containing one or more characters which were incorrectly identified by the reader.
The reject rates of present readers range from 2% to 15%, while the error rates generally
do not exceed 1%. The best way of judging the reliability of a character reader is to compare it with the error rate of the current keypunch operation which the machine is being
considered to replace .
.8
TRENDS AND FUTURE DEVEWPMENTS
The scope of applications for character readers is currently limited primarily by their inability to read a variety of different fonts and by their poor performance on handwritten
documents. Consequently, considerable development effort is being put into both these
areas, as well as into improvements in reliability and speed .
. 81
Multi-Font Capabilities
The work being done on the development of multi-font character readers is taking the form
of three basic approaches: manual, semi-automatic, and fully automatic.
The manual method consists of altering the recognition logic by manually replacing such
machine parts as plugboards and optical masks. This method is low in cost but is clearly
inadequate for reading a stack of documents in which the character fonts are mixed.
The semi-automatic approach consists of effecting changes in the recognition logic by
means of operator controls. This means that either the machine must store all the different reference patterns that can occur, or the recognition parameters must be modified
by means of a special-purpose control unit. The latter technique is used in the presentlyavailable Philco General Purpose Print Reader. (1) Although it has the advantage of being
flexible, it is expensive. The monthly rental for the Philco character reader is appro~i
mately $15,000, as compared with the typical rental charges of around $3,000 for firstgeneration character' readers.
The automatic technique demands a recognition unit that can automatically sense a change
in the character style and adjust itself to the change. This is really a self-adaptive or
learning machine, a type of device that is still in the early experimental stages .
. 82
Recognition of Handwriting
Since each individual has his own style of handwriting, it is difficult to set any recognition
standards for handwritten characters that will not lead to a high reject rate. Consequently,
this problem is even more perplexing than the multi-font recognition problem, because the
recognition logic of the machine can never be set for a particular style.
/
/
The work being done on the recognition of handwritten characters can be divided into two
classes: hand-printed characters and script. Some of the techniques currently being investigated in connection with handwritten documents are curve tracing, detection of
selected features, and context recognition (which is discussed below). Although a number
of companies are working on the problem, most of the work has been kept confidential.
The primary customer for a reader capable of handling handwritten documents appears to
be the U. S. Post Office Department.
(Contd. )
1/66
A..,
AUERBACH
SPECIAL REPORT
.83
23:020.830
Improvements in Reliability
Naturally, reliability in the form of low error and reject rates is a prime consideration in
all the development work being done on character readers. One approach that is being
followed to reduce these rates is to improve the resolution of the scanning units and thereby
increase the number of sample points from which the equipment can make an identification.
As previously mentioned, Philco Corporation is using a cathode-ray tube that has a resolution of 2, 000 optical lines. Even better resolution can be expected in the near future.
(
A longer-range approach to the reliability problem is the work being done on "context recognition." This is an attempt to simulate a human being's ability to read by context. When a
person reads, the legibility of individual letters or even individual words is usually not
critical. This is because human beings read letters within the context of the entire word
and words within the context of the entire sentence. Consequently, the word "Ouic" in the
phrase "Ouic and dirty" would easily be identified in context by most human readers as the
word "Quick," even though the first letter of the word is an "0" and the last letter is
miSSing.
The first thing needed to automate this process of context recognition is a group of fundamental rules that will aid the machine in identifying the characters on the basis of the context in which they are used. These context rules must be chosen to agree with the typeof
material being read. If a new application is added, then new rules should be instituted.
Changes of these rules can be accomplished by utilizing either hardware (e. g. , plugboards)
or programming techniques.
Although context recognition is not yet sophisticated enough to become the major element of
a recognition scheme, it can be used as a backup method for identifying illegible characters.
The most obvious advantage is the ability to identify a complete word even if one or two
characters pr8sent recognition difficulties. Context recognition will certainly involve an
enormous increase in the storage capacity and logical capabilities of character readers,
but this may be justified by the increase in efficiency that can be attained. However, the
economics of context-recognition readers will remain highly speculative until considerably
more development work has been undertaken.
(
\."
Context recognition also promises to be useful in the problem of reading handwriting. It
could be the basis of a technique for reading complete words rather than a character at a
time. Again, it would radically increase the storage requirements and the cost for a reader,
but the results might well be worth it. Again, the economics will remain unclear, pending
additional development work .
. 84
Improvement in Speed
Another, though less critical, area of development emphasis in character-reader engineering is speed. The major limitation on reading speed is the amount of time it takes to
mechanically move the document past the reading station. Work now under way indicates
that this limitation will be removed by overlapping the two functions of transporting and
scanning documents. This is already being done in the UNIVAC Readatron through the use
of a vidicon scanner, which photographs an entire card-type document and performs the
scanning function within the cathode-ray tube. This allows a new document to be moved
into place while the previous one is being scanned. Speed can be further increased by the
use of control logic that permits selective scanning; i. e., scanning only.those areas of the
document that contain pertinent information .
• 85
Summary
The character recognition field is still relatively new, and much work remains to be done
in improving equipment performance and developing more flexible character readers at
lower cost. Consequently, the field is in an active state of developmental flux that can be
expected to continue for several years. In the near future, we can expect to see multi-font
capabilities in many commercially-available character readers. Further away, possibly
in five years, character readers able to read handwriting should be commercially available,
and reliability should be greatly improved. By that time, we can expect to see character
readers replacing punched cards as the primary computer input medium.
.9
I
~-
THE COMPARISON CHART
The accompanying comparison chart (page 23:020.910) summarizes the Significant characteristics of representative optical and magnetic character readers in terms of the type of
document feed and transport unit, document size, document speed (documents/minute),
types of scanners and recognition units, type font, character set, and reading speed. It
should be noted that the indicated reading speed usually represents a maximum or potential
speed; the actual speed is dependent on the size and number of documents being read.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
23:020.90 I
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
REFERENCES
1/66
(1)
Philco General Purpose Print Reader, News Release, December 11, 1963.
(2)
IBM General Information Manual, IBM 1219 Reader Sorter and IBM 1419 Magnetic
Character Reader.
(3)
Rabinow, J. "Developments in Character Recognition Machines at Rabinow Engineering
Company," Optical Character Recognition, Spartan Books, 1962, pp. 27-50.
(4)
National Cash Register Optical Journal Reader Manual.
(5)
Gerlach, R. K. "Wide-Tolerance Optical Character Recognition for Existing Printing
Mechanisms," Optical Character Recognition, Spartan Books, 1962, pp. 93-114.
(6)
Electronic Retina Character Reader Manual, Recognition Equipment, Inc.
(7)
Hensley, Jr., C. C. and G. L. Fisher, Jr., "Some Elements of Optical Scanning,"
Optical Character Recognition, Spartan Books, 1962, pp. 15-26.
(8)
Chatten, J. B. and C. B. Teacher, "Character Recognition Techniques for Address Reading," Optical Character Recognition, Spartan Books, 1962, pp. 51-59.
(9)
Griffin, E., "Optical Character Recognition System Using A Vidicon Scanner," Optical
Character Recognition, Spartan Books, 1962, pp. 73-83.
(10)
Booth, W. T., G. M. Miller, and O. A. Schleich, "Design Considerations for Stylized Font
Characters," Optical Character ReCOgnition, Spartan Books, 1962, pp. 115-128.
(11)
Bull Information, 26 April 1963.
(12)
Optical and Magnetic Character Recognition -
(13)
IBM General Information Manual, IBM 1428 Alphanumeric Optical Reader.
(14)
Electronic Week, October 9, 1961.
(15)
National Data Processing Character Reader Sales Manual, 1963.
(16)
Hannan, W. H., "The RCA Multi-Font Reading Machines," Optical Character Recognition,
Spartan Books, 1962, pp. 3-14.
(17)
Feidelman, L., The Survey of the Character Recognition Field, Masters Thesis submitted
to The Moore School of Electrical Engineering, University of Pennsylvania, August, 1963.
(18)
Stevens, Mary E., "Automatic Character Recognition" Department of Commerce, May 1961, PB161613.
(19)
Stein, Edward S. and Associates, Factors Influencing the Design of Original-Document
Scanners for Input to Computers, Department of Commerce, TN-245, August, 1964.
(20)
AUERBACH Corporation, Survey of Computer Peripheral EqUipment, Technical Report
1048-TR-2, submitted to Information Systems Branch, Office of Naval Research, Washington,
D. C., August 1962.
(21)
Shelton, G. 0., "Print Reader Recognizes Variety of Fonts," Electronics, December 21,
1962, pp. 58-62.
(22)
Rosenblatt, F., Principles of Neuro-dynamics, Spartan Books, 1962.
(23)
Fischer, George L. Jr., Donald K. Pollack, Bernard Raddack, and Mary E. stevens,
Optical Character Recognition, Spartan Books, 1962.
(24)
Philco Print Reader Manual, Philco Corporation.
(25)
Farrington Optical Scanner Documents.
(26)
Yovits, Jacobi and Goldstein, Self-Organizing Systems, Spartan Books, 1962.
(27)
Yovits and Cameron, Self-Organizing Systems, 1959. '
(28)
CMC-7 Character Reader Manual, Compagnie des Machines Bull, February 1964.
CMLT, Bull Corporation, December 1963.
State-of-the-Art Report, U. S.
(Contd. )
A
AUeRBACH
~
SPECIAL REPORT
23:020.910
COMPARISON CHART: OPTICAL AND MAGNETIC CHARACTER READERS
DOCUMENT
FEED
TYPE
DOCUMENT
TRANSPORT
TYPE
Typed Page Reader
Vacuum
Drum
8-1/2 x 11
Not specificd
Optical - flying
spot scanner
Matrix Matching
Upper case
standard Elite type
Alphanumerics,
punctuation marks
75
B102 & B103
Sorter-Reader s
Friction
Conveyer
belt
Length: 5.94 to 9.06
Width: 2.69 to 4.06
1,000 to
1,565
Magnetic
Analog waveform
matching
E-13B
Numerals, four
special characters
Max. 1,300
Control Data Corp.
915 Page Reader
Vacuum
Conveyer
belt
Length: 2.5 to 14
Width: 4 to 12
Max. 180 for
8-1/2 x 11
documents
Optical parallel
photocells
Matrix matching
A.S.A. Font
Alphanumerics, punctuation
marks, special symbols
Max. 370
Farrington
Electronic s, Inc.
Selected Data
Page Scanner
Vacuum
Drive
rollers
From: 4.5 x 5.5
To: 8.5 x 13.5
Depends upon Optical number of
mechanical disc
lines and fields
Stroke analysis
Selfchek 12F and/or
Selfchek 12L
Alphanumerics, punctuation
marks, special symbols
Max. 200
1P Page Reader
Vacuum
Drive
rollers
From: 4.5 x 5.5
To: 8.5 x 13.5
150 to 300
lines per
minute
Optical mechanical disc
Stroke analysis
Selfchek 12F and/or Selchek 12H
or 12L, A. S. A. Font, IBM 1428
Alphanumerics, punctuation
marks, special symbols
Max. 280
1D Document
Reader
Vacuum
Drive
rollers
Card stock:
Max. 440
From: 2.2x2.75
To: 8.5x6.0
Documents:
From: 2.625x2.75
To: 8.5 x 6.0
Optical mechanical disc
Stroke analysis
Selfchek 7B, 12F and/or
Selfchek 12H,
IBM 403,
IBM 1428
Alphanumerics, punctuation
marks, special symbols
Max. 330
9SP Model Series
Vacuum
Drive
rollers
Standard tab
cards; 51 or 80
columns
Max. 180
Optical mechanical disc
Stroke analysis
Selfchek 12F and/or 7B
Numerals
Max. 330
2J3M
Journal Tape
Reader
Tape
spool
Vacuum,
conveyer
belt
Length: to 350 ft.
Width: 1-5/16 to
4-1/2 inches
2,880 lines
per minute
maximum
Optical - flying
spot scanner
Stroke analysis
Selfchek 9B or 12F,
IBM 1428, NCR Optical Font,
A.S.A. Font
Alphanumerics, special
symbols, limited
punctuation
Max. 1,000
2S3C
Self-Punch
Vacuum
Drive
rollers
Standard tab
cards; 51 or 80
columns
Max. 550
Optical mechanical disc
Stroke analysis
Selfchek 7B, 7BR,
9B, 12F and 12L
Alphanumerics, special
symbols, punctuation
Max. 600
General Electric
Company
MR-20
S-12D
Vacuum
Conveyer
belt
Length: 4.75 to 9.0
Width: 2.5t04.1
1,200
Magnetic
Analog waveform
matching
E-13B
Numerals, special
symbols
Max. 1,800
Compagnie des
Machines BullGeneral Electric
LD-1
(CMC -7 Reader)
Friction
Conveyer
belt
Length: 2.36 to 8.75
Width: 2.75t04.50
330 to 620
Magnetic
Frequency analysis
Bull Font
(CMC-7)
Alphanumerics
Max. 700
OlivettiGeneral Electric
7750
Friction
Conveyer
belt
Length: 5-3/4
to 8-3/4
Width: 2-3/4
to 4-1/8
Max. 750
Magnetic
Frequency analysis
Bull Font
(CMC-7)
Alphanumerics
Max. 1,888
International
Business Machines
Corp.
IBM 1428 I,
II, & III
Friction
Vacuum
drum and
conveyer belt
From: 3-1/2 x 2-1/4
To: 8-3/4 x 4-1/4
Max. 400
Optical mechanical disc
Matrix matching
IBM 1428
Alphanumerics, symbols
Max. 480
IBM 1412
Friction
Drum
Length: 6 to 8-3/4
Width: 2-3/4 to
3-2/3
Max. 950
Magnetic
Matrix matching
E-13B
Numerals, 4 special
symbols
Max. 1,600
IBM 1282
Friction
Clutch
Standard tab cards:
50 to 80 columns
Max. 200
Optical
Matrix matching
1428-Farrington
Optical Code
Numerals,
3 symbols
IBM 1419
Model I
Friction
Conveyer
belt
Length: 6 to 8.75
Width: 2.75 to 3.67
Max. 1, (laO
Magnetic
Matrix matching
E-13B
Numerals, 4 special
symbols
Max. 2,112
IBM 1418
I and II
Friction
Vacuum drum
and conveyer
belt
Length: 5.875 to 8.75 Max. 420
Width: 2.75 to 3.67
Optical mechanical disc
Matrix matching
IBM 407-1
or 407-E-1 Font
Numerals, special
symbols
Max. 500
IBM 1285
Vacuum
Conveyer
belt
Journal rolls Max. 2,IUO
Width: 1-5/16 to 3-1/2 cards/min.
Length: 36 to 200 feet
Optical
Matrix matching
1428-NCR Optical code
Numerals,
7 symbols
Max. 365
MANUFACTURER
Burroughs Corp.
EQUIPMENT
MODEL
DOCUMENT
SIZE
(INCHES)
DOCUMENTS
PER
MINUTE
SCANNER
TYPE
TYPE FONT
RECOGNITION TYPE
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
CHARACTER SET
READING SPEED
(CIIAHACTE RS/SEC .)
?
1/66
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:020.911
COMPARISON CHART: OPTICAL AND MAGNETIC CHA1V\CTER READERS (Contd.)
DOCUMENTS
PER
MINUTE
SCANNER
TYPE
From: 1. 31 x 10
To: 3.25 x 1200
26 lines
per second
Optical mechanical disc
Matrix matching
NCR Selfchek (NOF)
Numerals, special
symbols
Max. 832
Journal
tape
reader
From: 1. 31 x 10
To: 3.25 x 1200
52 lines
per second
Optical mechanical disc
Matrix matching
NCR Selfchek (NOF)
Numerals, special
symbols
Max. 1,664
Friction
Conveyer
belt
Length: 5.25 to 10
Width: 2.5t04.5
Max. 750
Magnetic
Analog waveform
matching
E-13B
Numerals, 4 special
symbols
Max. 1,200
407-1 MICR
Sorter-Reader
Friction
Conveyer
belt
Length: 4 to 8.75
Width: 2.75t04.5
Max. 1,200
Magnetic
Analog waveform
matching
E-13B
Numerals, 4 special
symbols
Max. 3,200
Univac
DiviSion,
Sperry Rand
Corp.
Readatron
Picker
belt
Card
Credit card size
Max. 200
credit cards
Optical vidicon scanner
MatrLx matching
No. 281
Numerals
Max. 580
Philco Corp.
(Div. of Ford
Motor Company)
General Purpose
Print Reader
Vacuum
Conveyer
belt
From 3 x 5
To: 8-1/2 x 11
180 for 8-1/2 Optical - flying
x 11 docuspot scanner
ments; 360
for 3 x 5 cards
Matrix matching
Multiple type fonts
Alphanumerics,
punctuation,
special symbols
Max. 2,000
Rabinow
Electronics
(Subsidiary of
Control Data
Corp.)
RUR 3200-1
Vacuum
Conveyer
belt
5.5 x 8.63
Max. 400
Optical parallel
photocells
MatrLx matching
Billing open type
Numerals
Max. 1,000
RUR 4100-1
Tape
spooling
device
Continuous
tape
Optical parallel
photocells
(retina)
Matrix matching
Cash register type
10 numerals and 14 alphabetic
characters
Max. 110
5820
Vacuum
Conveyer
belt
Max. 4 x 8-1/2
Min. 2-1/2 x 2-1/2
Max. 1500
Min. 750
Optical vidicon scanner
Stroke analysis
RCA N-2
10 numerals,
5 symbols
Max. 1,500
70/251
Vacuum
Conveyer
belt and
drum
Max. 4 x 8-1/2
Min. 2-1/2 x 2-1/2
Max. 1800
Optical vidicon scanner
Stroke analysis
RCA N-2
10 numerals,
5 symbols
Max. 1,500
Electronic Retina
Document Carrier
Vacuum
Conveyer
belt
From: 2.00 x 2.00
To: 5.00 x 8.75
1,200
Optical parallel
photocells
(retina)
Matrix matching
Multiple
type fonts
Alphanumerics, punctuation
marks, special symbols,
mark sense
Max. 2,400
Journal Tape
Carriage Reader
Tape roll
Journal
Width: 1-5/16 to 6
Max. 1,800
lines per
minute
Optical parallel
photocells
(retina)
Matrix matching
Multiple
type fonts
Alphanumerics, punctuation
marks, special symbols,
mark sense
Max. 2,400
Conveyer'
belt and
drum
From: 3.25x4.88
To: 10.00 x 14.00
Max. 30
Optical parallel
photocells
(retina)
Matrix matching
Multiple
type fonts
Alphanumerics, punctuation
marks, special symbols,
mark sense
Max. 2,400
MANUFACTURER
National Cash
Register Co.
Radio Corp.
of America
Recognition
Equipment, Inc.
DOCUMENT
FEED
TYPE
DOCUMENT
TRANSPORT
TYPE
420-1
Optical Reader
Automatic
cash registcr
tape spooling
device
Journal
tape
reader
420-2
Optical Reader
Automatic
cash register
tape spooling
device
402-3 MICR
Sorter-Reader
EQUIPMENT
MODEL
Electronic Retina
Rapid Index Page
Reader
1/66
?
DOCUMENT
SIZE
(INCHES)
--
--
A
TYPE FONT
RECO(;NITION TYPE
AUERBACH
~
CHARACTER SET
READING SPEED
(CHARACTERS/SEC. )
23:030.001
SPECIAL REPORT
DECISION TABL ES SYMPOSIUM
prepared by
Paul Dixon
Technical Staff
AUERBACH Corporation
!\
"'-©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:030.002
§
030.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Introduction...
Decision Tables .
Users' Experience
General Electric
Sutherland Corporation
Insurance Company of North America
RAND Corporation . . ..
Conclusions Drawn by Users
Comments
23:030.1
23:030.2
23:030.3
23:030.31
23:030.32
23:030.33
23:030.34
23:030.4
23:030.5
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
1.
Credit Approval Flow Chart
23:030.2
LIST OF TABLES
12/62
1.
2.
3.
Credit Approval Decision Table . • • . . . • .
Decision Table Elements . . . . . . . • • . .
Example of Limited Entry Table: Credit Approval Table
23:030.2
23:030.2
23:030.2
4.
5.
6.
Example of Extended Entry Table: Rate Determination Table
Limited Entry Form of Table 4: Rate Determination Table
Example of Mixed Entry Table: What Is It? . . . . . .
23:030.2
23:030.2
23:030.2
7.
8.
Example of Transfer of Control: Code Test Table • • .
File Updating Routine: File Maintenance Table TAB-OOI
23:030.2
23:030.2
23:030.100
Special Report
Decision Tables Symposium
AUERBACH/BNA SPECIAL REPORT
DECISION TABLES SYMPOSIUM
§ 030 •
.1
INTRODUCTION
The Decision Tables Symposium discussed decision tables as a tool of system analysis
and as a programming tool.
The ACM Joint Users Group and the CODASYL Systems Development Group, which
sponsored the symposium, described what decision tables were, presented various
users' experience with decision tables, and defined DETAB-X (DEcision TABle eXperimental), a language that makes use of COBOL- 61 in decision table format. Tlle
Systems Group has spent considerable time investigating the potential of decision tables
for problem definition, and in defining DETAB-X, so that many others may actually
experiment with this valuable tool. It is anticipated that DETAB-X will be recommended
as an addition to COBOL- 61. At this stage it is premature to speculate whether any
manufacturers intend to include DETAB- X in their COBOL compiler package.
If the claims presented by users at the symposium are borne out by others, the decision
table technique promises to be yet another major tool in system analysis and programming methodology .
.2
DECISION TABLES
Constructing Decision Tables is a method of stating conditions which must be met in
order to draw conclusions and decide what action to take. The tables provide a tabular
representation of complex procedures in a way that is easy to visualize and understand.
For example, consider the statement: "If credit is OK, approve order; if credit is not
OK. but pay experience is favorable, approve order; otherwise return order to sales. "
Normally, the next step in formalizing this statement is to draw a flow chart:
NO
NO
Return to
Sales
YES
YES
Approve
Order
Figure 1. Credit Approval Flow Chart
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
12/62
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
.23:030.101
§
030.
A Decision Table for this situation would appear as follows:
TABLE 1. CREDIT APPROVAL DECISION TABLE
Credit OK
Y
N
N
Pay Experience 'Favorable'
-
Y
N
Approve Order
X
X
-
Return to Sales
-
-
X
The basic difference between a flow chart presentation of a decision-making process
and its presentation in decision table form is that in a decision table the sets of conditions and their related sets of actions are presented as vertical "rules, " side by side.
The decision table organization is particularly advantageous in presenting complex
logical processes which would result in a complex, difficult-to-follow chart.
Flow charts depict decision proceElses sequentially; decision tables depict the same
processes in parallel.
A decision table technique is neither particularly new nor revolutionary. As a concept,
it is very easy to understand. The interest lies in the technique being developed for the
systematic exploitation of decision tables in system analysis, and in development of
techniques which permit completed decision tables to serve directly as source programs
ready for direct compiling into object computer programs.
The basic elements of a decision table are:
(1) Condition stub.
(2) Condition entry.
(3) Action stub.
(4) Action entry.
TABLE 2. DECISION TABLE ELEMENTS
CONDITION
STUB
CONDITION
ENTRY
ACTION
STUB
ACTION
ENTRY
Descriptions of conditions on which decisions are to be based are entered in the condition stub; descriptions of actions which may result from the various combinations of
decisions, based on the conditions, are entered in the action stub.
A decision is a specific answer to a question posed by a condition. For example, the
first entry in the condition stub of Table 1 reads "Credit OK." This entry can be
interpreted as "Is Credit OK, or is Credit not OK?" By examining the item of data
which records the state of the credit, the decision is made: YES (Credit OK), or NO
(Credit not OK).
12/62
SPECIAL REPORT
§
23:030.102
030.
In the action entry part of the table, a set of actions to be carried out for each rule
whose conditions have been met is entered. The resulting actions may be a computation, data transfer, initiation of an input or output proc~ss, or transfer of control to
another decision table, as discussed in the paragraphs which follow. Table 3 is a
typical table for a simple problem. (It is an expanded version of Table 1.)
TABLE 3. EXAMPLE OF LIMITED ENTRY TABLE
CREDIT APPROVAL TABLE
RULE 1
RULE 2
RULE 3
RULE 4
CREDIT OK
Y
N
N
N
PAY EXPERIENCE 'FAVORABLE'
Y
N
N
SPECIAL CLEARANCE OBTAINED
-
-
Y
N
APPROVE ORDER
X
X
X
-
RETURN ORDER TO SALES
-
-
-
X
Decision tables may be of one of three forms:
(1) Limited entry table.
(2) Extended entry table.
(3) Mixed entry table.
In limited entry form, the entire condition is stated in the condition stub and the entry
portion is limited to a single character per rule per condition. The entry will be
"Y" (yes), "N" (no), or "-" (irrelevant). Similarly, the entire action is written in the
action stub, and the action entry per rule per action is limited to an "X" (execute), or
"-" (irrelevant).
In an extended entry form, part of the condition or action extends directly into the
entry portion of the table.
Both forms may be used within one table; however, within anyone row of a table, either
limited entry or extended entry form must be used exclusively. Such a table is called
a mixed entry table.
\
The DETAB-X experimental language extension to COBOL is designed to handle all three
forms of decision tables. Table 3 was an example of a limited entry table; Table 4 is
an extended entry table. Table 5 has essentially the same contents as Table 4, presented
in limited entry form. Table 6 is a mixed entry table.
TABLE 4. EXAMPLE OF EXTENDED ENTRY TABLE
RA TE DETERMINATION TABLE
RULE 1
RULE 2
AGE
LE 25
SEX
ACCIDENTS
SEX RATE EQ RATE
I
'~
SET NEWRATE EQ
©
RULE 3
RULE 4
LE 25
GR 25
GR 25
"M"
"P"
-
-
-
-
EQO
+ RISK FACTOR
RATE
-
SPECIAL~ RATE
RATE
1962 lJy Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
RATE
GRO
RATE
12/62
23:030.103
§
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
030.
The qualifiers such as "LE 25, " "GR 25, " "F, " "EQ 0" are "extended" from the condition stub to the condition entry part of the table. Action descriptors, such as
"+ RISK FACTOR" are extended from the action stub to the action entry part of the table.
Table 4, if designed as a limited entry table, would appear as shown in Table 5.
Obviously, the extended entry form of a decision table requires fewer entries to describe
the same logic when dealing with m.ultianswer conditions.
TABLE 5. LIMITED ENTRY FORM OF TABLE 4
RA TE DETERMINATION TABLE
. RULE I
RULE 2
RULE 3
RULE 4
AGE LE 25
Y
Y
N
N
AGE GR 25
-
-
Y
Y
SEX "M"
Y
N
-
-
SEX "F"
Y
-
-
a
ACCIDENTS GR a
-
Y
N
X
-
Y
SET RATE EQ RATE + RISK FACTOR
-
-
SET RATE EQ RATE - SPECIAL- RA TE
-
-
X
-
SET NEW RATE EQ RATE
X
X
X
X
ACCIDENTS EQ
TABLE 6. EXAMPLE OF MIXED ENTRY TABLE: WHAT IS IT?
RULE I
RULE 2
IS IT AN ANIMAL
Y
Y
NUMBER OF LEGS
4
HAS IT FEATHERS
N
RULE 3
RULE 4
ELSE
Y
N
4
4
2
N
Y
Y
-
NOSE
LONG
SHORT
LONG
-
NECK
SHORT
LONG
LONG
-
IT IS
ELEPHANT
GO TO
TABLE E
GIRAFFE HALLUCINATION
TABLE G
PSYCHIATRIST
BIRD
TABLE B TABLE X
When used as system analysis and programming tools, the tables must provide for
sequencing of operations. Appropriate action entries, such as the last two lines of
Table 7, provide such sequencing. An action entry controlling sequence will either
pass control to another table unconditionally, or provide for entry into another table
and a return to the entry in the original table following the one from which the exit was
originally made. In DETAB-X Language this facility is provided by the 00 statement
and the GO TO statement. Table 7 illustrates the procedure.
12/62
SPECIAL REPORT
§
23:030.104
030.
TABLE 7. EXAMPLE OF TRANSFER OF CONTROL
CODE TEST TABLE
RULE 1
RULE 2
RU.LE 3
"AU
"Bit
"c"
-
A-COUNT
B-COUNT
C-COUNT
DO AB-PROCESS
X
X
-
-
DO AC- PROCESS
X
-
X
-
A-EDIT
B-EDIT
C-EDIT
ERRORS
X
X
X
X
JOB-CODE EQ
ADD 1 TO
DO
GO TO NEXT-JOB
ELSE
Table 7 implies the existence of seven other tables. These tables are: AB-Process,
AC-Process, A-Edit, B-Edit, C-Edit, Errors, and Next Job. In Rule I, for example,
"DO AB-Process" will cause table "AB-Process" to be entered, and, on completion of
that table, control will be returned to DO AC-Process in Rule 1 of Table 7.
A table to which temporary control is transferred with a DO statement should have no
rules terminating with a GO TO statement, since this would contradict the return of
control that is indicated by the DO action.
While the transfer of control terminology used here applies to the proposed DETAB- X
language extension to COBOL, any other equivalent terminology may be used where the
tables are not to be compiled by COBOL.
The final example given below illustrates the use of a limited entry table in defining
the logic of a simplified file maintenance application. Starting and ending procedures
are excluded, and would be normally found in other tables.
The file names and data fields are:
File Names
Data Fields
1 . Master file
1. STOCK-NR-A
2. ON-HAND-A
2. Change file
1. STOCK-NR-C
2. QUANTITY
3. CHANGE- CODE
Outputs:
1. New- Master file (same as master file)
2. Ship-Order file (same as change file)
The work to be done is as follows:
\
"-
When an item from the master file does not have a change record to apply
against it, write the master file record into the new master file.
When an item from the change file does not correspond to a master file
record, it must be a "NEW ITEM." In this case, create a new master
file record from the change file record.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
12/62
23:030.105
§
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
030.
When the stock number of the master file agrees with the stock number of
the change file, update the master file record as follows:
(1) If the change-code is equal to "REC, " adjust quantity on hand.
(2) If the change-code is equal to "SHIP, " and the quantity requested
is available, adjust "ON-HAND-A" and write shipping order. If
the quantity requested is not available, modify the change-code
to read "BACK-ORDER" and write shipping order.
(3) If the change-code is equal to "ADJUST, " apply quantity in change
file to ON- HAND in master file.
Table 8 shows this specification in tabular form. It seems obvious that the tabular
presentation, when compared to the text description, is more concise and permits
ready checking of the .logic involved.
TABLE 8. FILE UPDATING ROUTINE
FILE MAINTENANCE TABLE TAB-OOI
RULE 1 'RULE 2 RULES RULE 4 RULES RULE '6 ELSE
STOCK-NR-A EQ STOCK-NR-C
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
-
STOCK-NR-A LR STOCK-NR-C
-
-
-
Y
N
STOCK-NR-A GR STOCK-NR-C
-
-
-
-
-
Y
-
CHANGE-CODE EQ "REC"
N
N
Y
N
-
-
CHANGE- CODE EQ "SHIP"
Y
Y
-
N
-
-
Y
CHANGE- CODE EQ "NEW- ITEM"
-
-
-
-
CHANGE- CODE EQ "ADJUST"
-
-
-
-
Y
-
QUANTITY LR ON- HAND- A
N
Y
-
-
-
-
MOVE (ON- HAND- A + QUANTITY) TO ON- HAND- A
-
-
X
X
X
-
-
SET CHANGE CODE EQ "BACK-ORDER"
-
X
-
-
-
MOVE (ON- HAND- A- QUANTITY) TO ON- HAND- A
-
-
WRITE SHIP- ORDER FROM CHANGE
X
X
-
-
-
WRITE NEW-MASTER FROM MASTER
-
-
WRITE NEW-MASTER FROM CHANGE
-
-
READ CHANGE
X
READ MASTER
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
DO ERROR ROUTINE
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
GO TO TAB-006
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
While each rule is independent of the others, it is important to consider, within each
table, the frequency with which each rule will be carried out, and the order in which
actions are listed in order to minimize the number of instructions to be carried out
when the coding resulting from the table is used. Analysis of each specific problem
should show which of the rules contained in the table will be satisfied most frequently.
Those rules should be entered first. When such a table is being executed, the most
common path through the table will be preceded by a minimum number of condition tests.
12/62
23:030.300
SPECIAL REPORT
§
030 .
.3
USERS' EXPERIENCE
The companies which presented papers on their experience with the use of decision
tables were:
General Electric (2 papers)
ill.surance Company of North America
RAND Corporation
Sutherland Corporation
.31
General Electric
Reports on experience gained by GE in its Large Steam Turbine- Generator Department
and in the area of manufacturing were presented. The Turbine Department has used
computers for ten years, an IBM 704 for five years. GE now has approximately 200
active programs, half of them commercial and half engineering applications.
Decision tables were initially applied to develop specifications for manufacturing
planning work. Once the decision to apply decision table techniques had been made, a
decision table compiler was developed. ill. the process, it was discovered that decision
tables are excellent for expressing compiler logic.
The first decision table application was the development of a program to produce control instructions for three-dimensional contouring on a milling machine. The whole
job was done by one man in 4 months. The program was then completely debugged in
3 weeks by another engineer while the author was taking a vacation. The completion of
the job in that time was entirely unexpected by management because it was estimated
that it would take much longer.
Now there are forty active programs which were developed using decision table
techniques and the decision table compiler.
ill. the manufacturing area, two major jobs were cited. The first one, static rotor
manufacturing planning, was developed using both decision table and charting techniques
to obtain a measure of comparison.
Using decision table techniques and the compiler, the rotor program was designed and
completed in 6 weeks. Using charting techniques, 14 weeks were required to design
and complete the same program. The charted program, when compiled, was 50 percent larger than the compiled decision table program. However, the decision table
program ran 30 percent longer.
The second major program design was for planning the manufacture of gears. The output of that program provided detailed instructions on manufacturing each type of gear.
Some 100, 000 gear variations are possible. To manufacture a gear takes about thirty
separate machine operations.
To design and debug the program using decision tables took 2.5 man-years. Approximately 3,000 decision tables were generated, resulting in 60,000 object instructions.
The planning cycle for a specific gear manufacture run was cut from 4 weeks to 25
minutes by using the computer.
ill. addition, decision tables were used to design a simulator program for real-time
models of inventory management. The program was designed and debugged in 6 manmonths. Approximately 100 decision tables and 8,000 object instructions were generated.
The use of the program has already indicated reduction of inventories by 20 to 30 percent.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
12/62
ST ANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:030.320
§
030 .
• 32
Sutherland Corporation
The major achievement cited by Sutherland was the successful design of a highly complex file maintenance specification.
Eight months of conventional effort, using charting techniques to define the logic of the
system, were abortive. Using decision tables, the system was completely specified
in 3 weeks .
. 33
Insurance Company of North America
The experience of INA has been similar to that of the Sutherland Corporation. A complex casualty file system defied all attempts at successful definitions using charting
techniques. INA succeeded in programming the system using decision table techniques.
In the'course of this project, they developed a preprocessor which accepts cards punched
with decision table codes, converts them into COBOL-like statements for permanent
documentation, and produces a source program tape for assembly by IBM 7080
AUTOCODER.
Since their system is expected to be in operation for many years, one of the main requirements of the system was facility to incorporate changes. INA claims that use of
the decision tables makes this relatively easy because the logical implications of each
change are clearly shown on the tables. The tables themselves form the main documentation of the system. (EDITORS NOTE: These are two of the main benefits of decision
tables .)
. 34
RAND Corporation
RAND Corporation developed a FORTRAN decision table preprocessor called FORTAB,
which operates under the control of the FORTRAN monitor. The preprocessor accepts
decision table statements and translates them into a FORTRAN source program, which
is then compiled.
RAND's work has been experimental, and has had encouraging results. The program
in decision table form is its own documentation, and it was found to be easy to prepare.
The decision table program took twice as long to compile as its normal FORTRAN version and used one third more memory, but ran almost as fast. On the other hand, the
program ran successfully on the first try and saved much debugging time.
The FORTAB preprocessor will be released through SHARE. It is easy to learn, and
the FORTAB manual is only 16 double-spaced pages .
.4
CONCLUSIONS DRAWN BY USERS
All decision table users represented at the symposium claimed a number of advantages
for the technique in most system analysis and programming areas:
(1) It forces a clear problem statement and shows where information is
missing.
(2) It forces a complete logical description of the problem.
(3) It completely defines, at system level, decisions to be implemented.
(4) It leads to low-cost translation of a defined system into a working
computer program.
(5) It permits development and orderly presentation of systems too complex for effective charting.
.
(6) It provides extreme subroutinization by forcing. the segmentation of the
overall system into logically manageable tables.
A
12/62
@I]
A-U-ER-BA-CH-j
'--1
23:030.500
SPECIAL REPORT
§
030.
(7) It is suitable for documentation, and for communication of system
and program design between people.
(8) It assists in implementing system changes, and quickly points out
consequences of anyone change, even in complex systems.
(9) It permits system definition and description divorced from procedural
content.
(10) It is a technique which is easily learned.
(11) Decision table language and presentation are suitable for direct
translation into machine language; i. e., it lends itself to direct
compiling.
(12) It is helpful in designing compilers themselves.
(13) It is useful for presenting management policies and rules, and for
communicating system design to management for evaluation .
.5
COMMENTS
The potential value of decision tables as a system analysis and programming tool
appears to have been demonstrated during the symposium. Promise lies particularly
in the direction of using decision tables as a source programming language. The
logically clear presentation which decision tables permit should ultimately permit the
compiling of object programs almost as efficient as those coded by skilled machine
language programmers. This could be achieved by having the compiler analyze each
table as a whole prior to generating an object code. While this would increase compiling time, it would provide object program efficiency, which is most important in
repetitive program runs. Further development work is required to increase the
sophistication with which tables may be used. In particular, studies are required to
evaluate and develop techniques for application of decision tables to the design and
programming of large real-time systems because it is there that the inadequacy of
present methodology is most obvious.
The CODASYL Systems Development Group invites comments and criticisms of
DETAB- X, and any suggestions on its improvements.
Any correspondence should be directed to:
Mr. Sol Pollack
RAND Corporation
1700 Main Street
Santa Monica, California
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
12/62
ST ANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:030.600
§
.6
030 •
Bibliography
Armerding, G. W.,
"FORTAB. A Decision Table Language for Scientific Computing
Applications, " Proc. Decision Tables Symposium, NYC: 81-7
(Sept 1962). Issued also as: Rand Corp. No. RM-3306-PR
(Sept 1962)
Bromberg, H.,
"COBOL and Compatibility; " Datamation
Brown, L. M.,
"Decision Table Experience on A File Maintenance System, "
Proc. Decision Tables Symposium, NYC: 75-80 (Sept 1962)
Calkins, L. W.,
"Place of Decision Tables and DETAB-X, " Proc. Decision
Tables Symposium, NYC: 9-12 (Sept 1962)
Cantrell, H. N.,
"Commercial and Engineering Applications of Decision Tables, "
Proc. Decision Tables Symposium, NYC: 55-61 (Sept 1962)
Cantrell, H. N., et at.,
"Logic-structure Tables, " Communs. ACM 4(6): 272-5 Qun 1961)
Cunningham,
J.,
Evans, O. Y.,
~2):
30-4 (Feb 1961)
"Decision Tables Symposium, " Proc. Decision Tables Symposium,
NYC: 7-8 (Sept 1962)
"An Advanced Analysis Method for Integrated Electronic Data
Processing, " paper written in 1959 and published first by the
National Machine Accountants Assoc. of Long Beach, Calif.,
in March 1960.
A condensed version was issued in 1960 as; mM General
Information'Manual, F20-8047"; and a sequel issued in Sept
1961 as; "mM Ref. No.1 J 1."
Evans, O. Y.,
"Decision Tables. A Preliminary Reference Manual." Systems
Engineering Services Clearinghouse Report, Ref. No.1 J 1
(Sept 1961), a sequel to mM General Information Manual,
F20-8047. See preceding reference.
"GE 225 TABSOL Manual (Preliminary), " G. E. Computer Dept.,
Arizona. No. CPB-147 (5M 3-61)
12/62
Grad. B.,
"Decision Tables in Systems Design," Dig. Tech, Papers, ACM
Natl Conf.; 76-7 (Sept 4-7, 1962), Syracuse, NY
Grad. B.,
"Structure and Concept of Decision Tables, " Proc. Decision
Tables Symposium, NYC: 19-28 (Sept 1962)
Grad. B.,
"Tabular Form in Decision Logic, " Datamation 7(7): 22-6
Qui 1961)
Grad. B.,
"Using Decision Tables for Product Design Engineering, " a
paper prepared for 1962 ArnE Winter General Meeting, NYC
Feb 2, 1962 (CP 62-378)
Hawes, M. K.,
"Decision Table Tutorial Using DETAB-X, " developed by
Instruction Task Force of the-CODASYL Systems Development
Group for the Decision Tables Symposium of Sept 20-1, 1962
Hawes, M. K.,
"The Need for Precise Problem Definition, " Proc. Decision
Tables SympOsium, NYC: 13-18 (Sept 1962)
23:030.60l
SPECIAL REJlORT
§
.6
030 .
Bibliography (Contd.)
Holstein, D.,
"Decision Tables. A Technique for Minimizing Routine,
Repetitive Design, " Machine Design 34(18): 76-9 (Aug 2,
1962)
Kavanagh, T. F.,
"Manufacturing Applications of Decision Structure Tables, ..
Proc. Decision Tables Symposium, NYC: 89- 97 (Sept 1962)
Kavanagh, T. F.,
"TABSOL. A Fundamental Concept for Systems-oriented
Languages, " Proc. Eastern Joint Computer Conf., NYC
(NJCC #18): 117-36 (Dec 1960)
Kavanagh, T. F.,
"TABSOL--The Language of Decision Making, " Computers &
Automation 10(9): 15, 18-22 (Sept 1961). (This is a shortened
version of Cantrell's "Logic Structure Tables".)
Naramore, F.,
"Application of Decision Tables to Management Information
Systems, " Proc. Decision Tables Symposium, NYC: 63-74
(Sept 1962)
Nickerson, R. C.,
"An Engineering Application of Logic-structure Tables, "
Communs. ACM 4(11): 516-20 (Nov 1961)
Phillips, C. A.,
"Current Status of COBOL," Proc. USAF World Wide Data
Systems and Statistics Conf. (Oct 26, 1961)
Pollack, S. L.,
"DETAB-X. An hnproved Business-oriented Computer
Language, " Rand Corp. No. RM-3273-PR (Aug 1962)
Pollack, S. L.,
"What is DETAB-X?" Proc. Decision Tables Symposium, NYC:
29-39 (Sept 1962)
Pollack, S. L.,
and B. Grad.,
"DETAB-X. Preliminary Specifications for A Decision Table
Structured Language, " Data Description and Transformation
Logic Task Forces of the CODASYL Systems Group, Sept 1962
"Question and Answer Period •.•. 9/20/62, " Proc. Decision
Tables Symposium, NYC: 9-12 (Sept 1962)
"TABSOL Application Manual. Introduction to TABSOL, " G. E.
Computer Dept. Arizona. No. CPB-147A (5 M 6-61)
Wright, K. R.,
"Approaches to Decision Table Processors, " Proc. Decision
Tables Symposium, NYC: 41-4 (Sept 1962)
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
12/62
23:040.001
SPECIAL REPORT
U. S. MANUFACTURED
MAGNETIC TAPE HANDLERS
A STATE OF THE ART REPORT
prepared by
the Technical Staff of
AUERBACH Corporation
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
23:040.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
Special Report
AUERBACH/BNA SPECIAL REPORT:
U. S. MANUFACTURED MAGNETIC TAPE HANDLERS
A STATE-OF-THE-ART REPORT
§
040 .
.1
INTRODUCTION
The classification of computer programs into two types, computer-limited and inputoutput-limited, is evidence of the problem of getting information to and from a computer
fast enough to utilize the internal speed and efficiency of the computer. One of the most
important types of computer devices is the magnetic tape handler functioning both as
external memory to the central processor and as the primary communications medium
to other computers and to peripheral equipments. Ever since the introduction of the
high-speed digital computer, manufacturers of tape handlers have been plagued with the
problem of keeping the speed of their units abreast of the ever-increasing speeds of
central processors.
This report presents the characteristics of contemporary American computer magnetic
tape handlers available both as integral parts of computer systems and as separate
components. (For additional reference to technical terms, see Glossary, 7:194
and :195.)
One must be careful not to confuse systems characteristics such as data block load size,
effective character transfer rate, checking features, and in some special cases, interblock gap, with the physical characteristics detailed in the accompanying chart. Also,
to eliminate confusion, no attempt has been made to include price data. Such data would
be meaningless, particularly in the case of those tape handler manufacturers who sell
their tape equipment for connection to any number of different computer systems. For
such cases, it is the type of connection or "interface" which governs the overall package
price.
The chart form of presentation has been chosen because it is a most convenient way to
compress data for easy comparison of the parameters of the various units. The charted
data is discussed, and finally, observations are made on the status and future of developments in the magnetiC tape field .
.2
COMPARISON CHART GUIDE
The detailed characteristics and performance of the tape handlers are presented in the
chart. The categories of information presented are:
Identity
- Manufacturer
- Model Number
Physical Form
- Drive Method
- Head Arrangement
- Tape Buffer ReserVOir Type
Storage Characteristics
-
© 1963
Total Number of Tracks
Number of Data Tracks
Data Rows per Inch (i. e., Packing Density)
Data Rows per Block
Interblock Gap (Inches)
Tape Width (Inches)
Tape Length (Feet)
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
23:040.200
§
ST ANDARD EDP REPORTS
040 .
•2
COMPARISON CHART GUIDE (Contd.)
Performance
-
Application
- Representative Computer Systems
Using This Unit
Peak Speed (Data Rows Per Second)
Peak Speed (Characters Per Second)
Peak Speed (Digits Per Second)
Tape Speed (Inches Per Second)
Start Time (Milliseconds)
Stop Time (Milliseconds)
Rewind Time (Minutes)
Observations on the Comparison Chart
Twelve manufacturers of tape handlers are listed on the chart; of these, six are also
manufacturers of lines of computers. These companies (Burroughs, Control Data,
IBM, Honeywell, RCA, and UNIVAC) normally supply tape handlers as components of
a complete system, but most will also sell their tape handlers as separate components.
The remaining manufacturers (Ampex, Consolidated Electrodynamics, Datamec,
Information Storage Systems, Midwestern, and Potter) carryon significant marketing
effort. Their primary markets are the special-purpose system builders and those
computer manufacturers who do not make their own units. Of the independent group,
Ampex and Potter are best established in the field. Ampex is broadly based in all
aspects of magnetic tape technology and in magnetic core memories, while Potter concentrates on computer peripheral equipment, including printers and paper tape readers.
The remaining independent companies are newer in the field and have not yet had a
major effect on the market .
. 21
Physical Form Characteristics
Two major mechanical elements characterize the physical form of all of the existing
tape handlers: the tape drive method, and the means for buffering (isolating) the tape
drive from the inertia of the storage reels. Tape is advanced (or driven) by a pinch
roller that holds the tape against a drive roller, by a magnetic clutch driven capstan,
or by a vacuum capstan that uses external air pressure to hold the tape against the
capstan. The portion of the tape to be accelerated is isolated from the storage reels
by vacuum columns, by tension arms, by a combination of vacuum and arms, or by
storage bins. The physical form of all available tape handlers can be shown by a
simple tree diagram:
PHYSICAL FORM
Drive Method
Pinch
Roller
Vacuum
Capstan
Buffer Type
Clutched
Capstan
Vacuum
Columns
Tension
Arms
Storage
Bins
Each of these methods is highly developed today; obtaining further improvement in
mechanical performance may require new methods of solving the drive and buffer
problems.
Great flexibility in the physical arrangement of the read/write and erase heads is provided by the independent tape equipment manufacturers in order to satisfy a variety
of customer requirements. All of the independent companies will provide for
compatibility with the tapes and data structures of the computer manufacturers, while
generally each computer manufacturer is most concerned with his own particular data
characteristics.
However, it is to be noted that the concept of "IBM-compatibility" is gaining more favor,
primarily as a marketing tactic. IBM-compatibility is the concept of producing a tape unit
which will read and record the binary data structures used in the IBM 7090 series
computers.
~
3/63
A-U-ER-SA-CH-j-'@
'-1
\
I
SPECIAL REPORT
§
23:040.210
040 .
. 21
Physical Form Characteristics (Contd.)
The most important storage characteristic of magnetic tape is its packing density.
Early tapes typically had packing densities of 100 to 200 rows per inch, but existing tapes
permit densities ranging from 400 to more than 1,500 rows per inch. Such high densities
depend critically upon tape material quality, good dimensional stability*, high uniformity
of read-write heads, and sophisticated electronic circuitry. The pack.ing densities in the
800 to 1,500 rows per inch range generally use either more than one clock track or selfclocking of each track to compensate electronically for the effects of tape skew and variations between heads. In this type of self-clocking, each track is so recorded that a clock
signal can be extracted electronically without reference to other tracks. Thus, it is
possiQle to overcome the effect of timing variations between tracks. Another factor in
achieving high packing density is the degree of resolution of information that can be recorded on the tape. This factor depends on intimate contact between the read-write
head and the tape, a ,small head-gap, the thickness and quality of the tape coating, and
good control over the amplitude and duration of the drive current in order to limit
magnetic saturation of the tape. The full potential of achieyable tape resolution has not
yet been exploited. (In actual practice, achieving specified densities is not always as
easy as manufacturer sales literature implies.)
The length of the interblock gap has an important effect on total storage capacity, because in most systems the blank space that constitutes the gap is unav~ilable for st0rage
of information. A limited number of designs have made use of the interblock gaps
for information storage, but the practice is not common. The effect of interblock gaps
can be minimized in most systems by the use of longer blocks. Because the size of the
recorded block has a critical effect on the total capacity of a tape and on the overall
speed of processing the data recorded on it, the total tape capacity must be considered
as a system characteristic rather than a tape handler characteristic.
Other important storage parameters are tape length and tape width. These parameters
and the number of tracks determine the number of digits or characters that can be recorded in a single tape row.' The majority of tape handlers are designed to use 1/2-inch
wide tape and record one character at a time. A minority use 3/4- or I-inch wide tape,
and some of these can record two digits or characters side by side. Standard size reels
used in most computer installations are either 2,400 or 3,600 feet long. No standard
tape units are available for use with reels larger than 3,600 feet, and few units are
specially designed for short reels.
Because of the length of tapes normally used and the permissible maximum physical tape
movement velocities, full-reel rewind times range from approximately one to more than
3 minutes. The fastest rewind times are obtained when the tape can be unloaded from the
buffer reservoirs ana the entire tape path cleared. Obtaining significantly faster rewind
times will require substantially improved reel drive systems.
Tape life depends chiefly on wear caused by friction against read/write heads. Mechanical
damage caused by the action of pinch rollers and tape guides is also important. Tape life
is presently said to range from 20,000 to 50,000 passes; however, it is doubtful whether
many users attempt such extended use in normal practice. More extensive use of
pneumatic techniques, including air film lubrication at the heads, might increase potential tape life even more .
. 22
Performance Characteristics
The data rate of a tape unit depends upon the packing density and the tape velocity. Tape
speeds range from 30 to 150 inches per second. Because of the basic mechanical limitations, tape speed is one of the parameters that has changed least with the advance in
the state of the art, as demonstrated by the Uniservo J models, which in 1951 moved tape
at 100 inches per second. Another important performance factor is the ability of the
tape drive to accelerate and decelerate the tape between the stationary condition and the
constant running velocity. Improvements in start and stop times reduce the length of the
* The facility of the
tape material to record data rows at the same density consistently, in
spite of stresses caused by short forward and backward movements, as well as temperature
variations, humidity, and aging factors.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:040.220
§
040 .
. 22
Performance Characteristics (Contd.)
interblock gap and increase the effective data transfer rate, but such improvements .are
limited by the strength of the tape, the wear due to pinch rollers, the friction available,
the desired tape velocity and stability, and the electromechanical response of the tape
drive actuator. Start and stop times shorter than the few milliseconds presently common
will probably requlre a new approach in both the electronics of the read/write circuitry
and in the electromechanical system elements.
Among the most important characteristics of a magnetic tape system are the checking
features it uses. The checking system embraces the tape, the recording and reading
operation, and the processing of the data; hence, checking is only partly related to
features of the tape handler. The most common checking technique is the transverse
parity check (either odd or even parity), which uses one of the tracks to establish a constant parity condition, and thus serves to signal a reading or recording error in any
single bit position of a character. Odd parity is sometimes used to eliminate the need
for a separate clock track by ensuring that between successive rows at least one of the
tracks will always show a change in magnetic state.
In many cases the system also provides for a longitudinal parity check, with the parity
bit for each track forming a longitudinal parity check character located at the end of each
block. By means of the central processor, a single error within a block can be corrected
through the use of both transverse and longitudinal parity data. Generally, however,
more than one error will occur, since errors are usually due to dirt, dust, or flaws.
Some systems take advantage of the frequently transient nature of errors by using programmed or automatic reread operations, sometimes at varying amplifier settings. The
most sophisticated checking systems use many check characters which are computed
from the contents of the block and recorded at the end of the block. Such systems (e.g.,
Honeywell's Orthotronic error-correcting) allow detection and correction of several
simultaneous errors.
A major aid in checking is the use of dual, or two-gap, heads that permit the information
to be checked (usually only for transverse parity) after it has been written, so that a
recording error·can be corrected .
.3
SUMMARY OF TIlE STATE OF THE ART
At present, the commercially available tape handlers use pinch roller, clutched capstan,
or vacuum capstan tape drives and vacuum-column, tension arms, or storage-bin tape
buffers.
Tape packing densities range from 125 to more than 1,500 characters per inch. The
most common tape width is lI2-inch, and tape reel length is usually 2,400 or 3,600 feet.
Tape movement speeds of 30 to 150 inches per second, and start and stop times of 1.5
to 5.0 milliseconds, are common.
We believe that with the presently used techniques, the potential for further improvements in performance is limited. On the other hand, there is still considerable room
for reductions in cost, and improvements in reliability and simplicity of operation. We
expect further developments in low-cost tape handlers of moderate performance and in
cartridge-loaded units (such as those used in the IBM Hypertape Drive). It may even be
possible to develop a low-cost, cartridge-loaded magnetic tape device that will be competitive with paper tape reader and punch units for keyboard and business machine
applications.
For radically improved performance in terms of higher capacities, shorter access
times, and higher information transfer rates, we expect that other devices, including
disc files, will become more important than tape in the largest systems. This is
particularly true for the on-line applications. MagnetiC tape equipment will, on the
other hand, continue to be improved and will, we feel, continue to be the primary
input-output medium for all classes of computers.
3/63
SPECIAL REPORT
§
23:040.210
040 .
. 21
Physical Form Characteristics (Contd.)
The most important storage characteristic of magnetic tape is its packing density.
Early tapes typically had packing densities of 100 to 200 rows per inch, but existing tapes
permit densities ranging from 400 to more than 1,500 rows per inch. Such high densities
depend critically upon tape material quality, good dimensional stability*, high uniformity
of read-write heads, and sophisticated electronic circuitry. The packing densities in the
800 to 1,500 rows per inch range generally use either more than one clock track or selfclocking of each track to compensate electronically for the effects of tape skew and variations between heads. In this type of self-clocking, each track is so recorded that a clock
signal can be extracted electronically without reference to other tracks. Thus, it is
possil?le to overcome the effect of timing variations between tracks. Another factor in
achieving high packing density is the degree of resolution of information that can be recorded on the tape. This factor depends on intimate contact between the read-write
head and the tape, a ,small head-gap, the thickness and quality of the tape coating, and
good control over the amplitude and duration of the drive current in order to limit
magnetic saturation of the tape. The full potential of achieyable tape resolution has not
yet been exploited. (In actual practice, achieving specified densities is not always as
easy as manufacturer sales literature implies.)
The length of the interblock gap has an important effect on total storage capacity, because in most systems the blank space that constitutes the gap is unava.ilable for st0rage
of information. A limited number of designs have made use of the interblock gaps
for information storage, but the practice is not common. The effect of interblock gaps
can be minimized in most systems by the use of longer blocks. Because the size of the
recorded block has a critical effect on the total capacity of a tape and on the overall
speed of processing the data recorded on it, the total tape capacity must be considered
as a system characteristic rather than a tape handler characteristic.
Other important storage parameters are tape length and tape width. These parameters
and the number of tracks determine the number of digits or characters that can be recorded in a single tape row.' The majority of tape handlers are designed to use l/2-inch
wide tape and record one character at a time. A minority use 3/4- or I-inch wide tape,
and some of these can record two digits or characters side by side. Standard size reels
used in most computer installations are either 2,400 or 3,600 feet long. No standard
tape units are available for use with reels larger than 3, 600 feet, and few units are
specially designed for short reels.
Because of the length of tapes normally used and the permissible maximum physical tape
movement velocities, full-reel rewind times range from approximately one to more than
3 minutes. The fastest reWind times are obtained when the tape can be unloaded from the
buffer reservoirs and the entire tape path cleared. Obtaining significantly faster rewind
times will require substantially improved reel drive systems.
Tape life depends chiefly on wear caused by friction against read/write heads. Mechanical
damage caused by the action of pinch rollers and tape guides is also important. Tape life
is presently said to range from 20,000 to 50,000 passes; however, it is doubtful whether
many users attempt such extended use in normal practice. More extensive use of
pneumatic techniques, including air film lubrication at the heads, might increase potential tape life even more .
. 22
Performance Characteristics
The data rate of a tape unit depends upon the packing density and the tape velocity. Tape
speeds range from 30 to 150 inches per second. Because of the basic mechanical limitations, tape speed is one of the parameters that has changed least with the advance in
the state of the art, as demonstrated by the Uniserv.().1 models, which in 1951 moved tape
at 100 inches per second. Another important performance factor is the ability of the
tape drive to accelerate and decelerate the tape between the stationary condition and the
constant running velocity. Improvements in start and stop times reduce the length of the
* The facility of the tape material to record data rows at the
same density consistently, in
spite of stresses caused by short forward and backward movements, as well as temperature
variations, humidity, and aging factors.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:040.220
§
040 .
. 22
Performance Characteristics (Contd.)
interblock gap and increase the effective data transfer rate, but such improvements .are
limited by the strength of the tape, the wear due to pinch rollers, the friction available,
the desired tape velocity and stability, and the electromechanical response of the tape
drive actuator. Start and stop times shorter than the few milliseconds presently common
will probably requlre a new approach in both the electronics of the read/write circuitry
and in the electromechanical system elements.
Among the most important characteristics of a magnetic tape system are the checking
features it uses. The checking system embraces the tape, the recording and reading
operation, and the processing of the data; hence, checking is only partly related to
features of the tape handler. The most common checking technique is the transverse
parity check (either odd or even parity), which uses one of the tracks to establish a constant parity condition, and thus serves to signal a reading or recording error in any
single bit position of a character. Odd parity is sometimes used to eliminate the need
for a separate clock track by ensuring that between successive rows at least one of the
tracks will always show a change in magnetic state.
In many cases the system also provides for a longitudinal parity check, with the parity
bit for each track forming a longitudinal parity check character located at the end of each
block. By means of the central processor, a single error within a block can be corrected
through the use of both transverse and longitudinal parity data. Generally, however,
more than one error will occur, since errors are usually due to dirt, dust, or flaws.
Some systems take advantage of the frequently transient nature of errors by using programmed or automatic reread operations, sometimes at varying amplifier settings. The
most sophisticated checking systems use many check characters which are computed
from the contents of the block and recorded at the end of the block. Such systems (e.g.,
Honeywell's Orthotronic error-correcting) allow detection and correction of several
simultaneous errors.
A major aid in checking is the use of dual, or two-gap, heads that permit the information
to be checked (usually only for transverse parity) after it has been written, so that a
recording error can be corrected .
.3
SUMMARY OF WE STATE OF THE ART
At present, the commercially available tape handlers use pinch roller, clutched capstan,
or vacuum capstan tape drives and vacuum-column, tension arms, or storage-bin tape
buffers.
Tape packing densities range from 125 to more than 1,500 characters per inch. The
most common tape width is 1/2-inch, and tape reel length is usually 2,400 or 3,600 feet.
Tape movement speeds of 30 to 150 inches per second, and start and stop times of 1.5
to 5.0 milliseconds, are common.
We believe that with the presently used techniques, the potential for further improvements in performance is limited. On the other hand, there is still considerable room
for reductions in cost, and improvements in reliability and simplicity of operation. We
expect further developments in low-cost tape handlers of moderate performance and in
cartridge-loaded units (such as those used in the IBM Hypertape Drive). It may even be
possible to develop a low-cost, cartridge-loaded magnetic tape device that will be competitive with paper tape reader and punch units for keyboard and business machine
applications.
For radically improved performance in terms of higher capacities, shorter, access
times, and higher information transfer rates, we expect that other devices, including
disc files, will become more important than tape in the largest systems. This is
particularly true for the on-line applications. Magnetic tape eqUipment will, on the
other hand, continue to be improved and will, we feel, continue to be the primary
input- output medium for all classes of computers.
3/63
SPECIAL REPORT
23:040.300
COMPARISON OF MAGNETIC TAPE HANDLERS
(COMMERCIALLY USED IN THE UNITED STATES-1963)
PHYSICAL FORM
IDENTITY
Manufacturer
Ampex Corp.
Model
Number
TM-2
Ampex Corp.
TM-4
Burroughs Corp.
B 421
Burroughs Corp.
B 422
Consolidated Electrodynamics Corp.
Control Data Corp.
DR-2700
CDC 603
Drive
Method
Pinch
ollers
Pinch
rollers
Pinch
rollers
Pinch
rollers
Pinch
rollers
Vacuum
capstans
Vacuum
capstans
Control Data Corp.
CDC 606
Datamec Corp.
Pinch
rollers
Pinch
DK-1
ModelsA-E rollers
Pinch
DK-1
Models F, rollers
G,H
Pinch
729 II
rollers
Information Storage
Systems, Inc.
Information Storage
Systems, Inc.
IBM Corp.
D 2020
PERFORMANCE
STORAGE CHARACTERISTICS
Head
Arrangement
Buffer Type
Total
Tracks
Data
Tracks
V
Vacuum columns
V
V
Data Rows
Per Inch
Interblock
Gap, in.
Tape
Width,
inches
Tape
Length,
feet
Pdak Speeds
Data Rows
per Second
Characters
per Second
Digits
per Second
3,600 max.
120,000 max.
V
V
APPLICA TION
2.0
1.5 max.
3.0 max.
NCR 315, PhUco 2000
3.3
1.8 max.
4.5 max.
CDC 1604, GE 225, SDS 920
6.7
7.1
1.5
B 270, B 280
B 5000
Stop Time,
msec.
V
V
800 max.
V
0.50
3,600 max.
V
V
1 two-gap
Tension arms &
vacuum columns
Vacuum columns
60,000 max.
7
6
200 or 556
0.75
0.50
2,400
50,000
50,000
50,000
112.5, 120,
or 150
30/60 or
37.5/75
90
1 two-gap
Vacuum columns
7
6
200 or 556
0.75
0.50
2,400
66,600
66,600
66,600
90 or 120
5.0
5.0
1.5
V
Tension arms &
vacuum columns
Vacuum columns
7 to 16
V
556
V
0.50,0.75
Or 1.0
3,600 max.
83,400
V
V
30 to 150
3.0
2.5
3.0 max.
7
6
200 or 556
0.75
0.50
2,400
41,700
41,700
41,700
75
3.0
3.0
1.3
CDC 160, 160-A
Vacuum columns
7
6
200 or 556
0.75
0.50
2,400
83,400
83,400
83,400
150
4.0 max.
4.0 max.
1.3
All CDC system"
Vacuum columns
7
6
556 max.
0.75
0.50
2,400 max.
16,667
16,667
16,667
5.0 max.
1.5 max.
4.0 max.
V
1 erase,
1 read,
1 write
1 erase,
1 read,
1 write
V
800 max.
V
1.0, 0.50
V
Tape bins
32
V
1,250 max.
0.50
1.00
3,600
V
Tape bins
7
6
800 max.
0.75
0.50
2,400
90,000
90,000
1 two-gap
Vacuum columns
7
6
200 or 556
0.75
0.50
2,400
41,667
250,000 max.
500,000 max. 750,000 max.
10 to 30
100 or 200
1.5
1.5
3.6
90,000
112.5
1.5
1.5
2.4
41,667
41,667
75
Read 10.5
Write 7.5
Read 2.1
Write 5.1
1.2
IBM 1401,1410,7040,
7070, 7080, 7090, etc.
Read
Write
6.7
5.0
Read 2.1
Write 3.8
0.9
IBM 1401, 1410, 7040,
7070, 7080, 7090, etc.
Read 10.5
Write 7.5
Read 2.1
Write 5.1
1.2
IBM 1401, 1410, 7040,
7070, 7080, 7090, etc.
0.9
IBM 1410, 7040, 7070,
7080, 7090, etc.
729 IV
Pinch
rollers
1 two-gap
Vacuum columns
7
6
200 or 556
0.75
0.50
2,400
62,500
62,500
62,500
112.5
IBM Corp.
729 V
Pinch
rollers
1 two-gap
Vacuum columns
7
6
200, 556, or
800
0.75
0.50
2,400
60,000
60,000
60,000
75
IBM Corp.
729 VI
Pinch
rollers
1 two-gap
Vacuum columns
7
6
200, 556, or
800
0.75
0.50
2,400
90,000
90,000
90,000
112.5
Read
Write
6.7
5.0
Read 2.1
Write 5.8
IBM Corp.
7330
Pinch
rollers
1 two-gap
Vacuum columns
7
6
200 or 556
0.75
0.50
2,400
20,016
20,016
20,016
36
Read
Write
7.6
5.0
Read 12.9
Write 15.3
IBM Corp.
7340
Hypertape
Single
capstan
1 two-gap
Vacuum columns
10
8
1,511
0.45
1.00
1,800
170,000
170,000
340,000
Midwestem Instruments
M 3000
Pinch
rollers
V
Vacuum columns
V
V
V
0.50 or 1.0
2,400
Miruteapolis-Honeywell
Regulator Co.
404-3 &
804-3
Vacuum
capstan
Vacuum columns
10
8
400
0.67
0.75
2,400
24,000
32,000
Minneapolis-Honeywell
Regulator Co.
404-1 &
804-1
Vacuum
capstan
Vacuum columns
10
8
400
0.67
0.75
2,400
48,000
Minneapolis-Honeywell
Regulator Co.
804-2
Vacuum colunms
10
8
556
0.67
0.75
2,400
Vacuum columns
10
8
777
0.67
0.75
2,400
Vacuum
Representative
Computer Systems
Using This Unit
Start Time,
msec.
IBM Corp.
capstan
Rewind
Time,
minutes
Tape
Speed,
in./sec.
1 erase,
1 read/
write
1 erase,
1 read/
write
1 erase,
1 read/
V
2.2 or 13.3 IBM 1401, 1410, 7040,
7044, 7072
3.0 max.
3.0 max.
60 to 150
6.0 max.
3.5 max.
48,000
60
3.5
5.0
2.7
H-400, H-800
64,000
96,000
120
2.7
3.5
1.3
H-400, H-800
66,700
88,900
133,300
120
2.7
3.5
1.3
H-800, H-1800
93,000
124,000
186,000
120
2.7
3.5
1.3
H-800, H-1800
V
V
V
112.5
1.5
IBM 7074, 7080, 7090,
7094
1.5 max.
write
Minneapolis-Honeywell
Regulator Co.
804-4
Potter Instrument Co.,
Inc.
MT-36
Pinch
roUers
V
Vacuum columns
V
V
NS
V
0.50,0.75
or 1.0
3,600 max.
NS
86,000 max.
NS
36
3;0 max.
1.5 max.
3.0 max. Recomp II
Potter Instrument Co.,
Inc.
MT-120
Pinch
rollers
V
Tension arms &
V
V
NS
V
0.50 or 1.0
3,600 max.
NS
240,000 max.
NS
75 to 120
3.5 max.
1.5 max.
3.0 max.
Potter Instrument Co.,
Inc.
906 II
Pinch
rollers
1 two-gap
Tension arms &
0.3 min.
0.50 to 1.25 3,600 max.
NS
500,000 max.
NS
150 max.
3.0 max.
1.5 max.
2.6 max. Bendix G-20
Radio Corp. of America
381
Pinch
roUers
Single
head
Tension arms
7
6
333
0.34 avg.
0.50
1,230
10,000
10,000
10,000
30
7.0
NS
3.0
RCA 301
Radio Corp. of America
581
Pinch
roUers
Single
head
Weight-sensing
bins
16
12
333
0.46svg.
0.75
2,400
33,333
33,333
33,333
100
3.5
NS
5.0
RCA 301, SOl, 601
Radio Corp. of America
582
Pinch
rollers
1 two-gap
Weight-sensing
bins
16
12
667
0.66avg.
0.75
2,400
66,667
66,667
66,667
100
3.5
2.0
3.2
RCA 301, SOl, 601
Radio Corp. of America
681
Pinch
roUers
1 two-gap
Weight-sensing
bins
16
12
800
1.1 nom.
0.75
2,400
120,000
120,000
180,000
150
6.0
1.3
2.1
RCA 601
UNIVAC Division,
Sperry Rand Corp.
Uniservo II Clutched
capstan
1 erase,
Vacuum columns
8
6
2.4 or 1.05
0.50
2,400
25,000
25,000
25,000
100
12.0 to 18.8
9.2 to 17.8
UNIVAC Division,
Sperry Rand Corp.
InA
Uniservo
Vacuum
capstan
1 erase,
Vacuum columns
9
V
1,000
0.4 to 0.6
0.50
3,600
100,000
133,000
200,000
100
4.0 max.
4.0 max.
UNIVAC Division,
Sperry Rand Corp.
Uniservo
IIA
Clutched
capstan
1 erase,
Vacuum columns
8
6
125 Or 250
1.05
0.50
2,400
25,000
25,000
25,000
100
5.0
Vacuum
capstan
1 erase,
1 read/
write
1 read/
write
1 read/
write
1 read,
write
vacuum columns
Up to
vacuum columns 20/inch
V
2,000 max.
125 or 250
5.0
UNIVAC II, S8-80, SS-90
2.1
UNIVAC III, 490, 1107
UNIVAC Ill, 490, 1107
V - Variable·'
NS - Not specified
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
23:050.001
SPECIAL REPORT
HIGH·SPEED PRINTERS
STATE OF THE ART REPORT
prepared by
the Technical Staff of
AUERBACH Corporation
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA 'ncorporated
4/63
23:050.100
Special Report
AUEBACH/BNA SPECIAL REPORT
STATE OF THE ART OF HIGH-SPEED PRINTERS
§
050 •
•1
BACKGROUND
Since its inception over a decade ago, the computer industry has witnessed the development of faster and faster computers through a number of advances in the technology of electronic and electromechanical applications. The rapidly developing
industry has also been continually faced with the problem of getting information into
and out of the central processors at speeds compatible with the ever-increasing speeds
of internal storage media.
In the early days of the industry, computers were utilized mostly in scientific and
mathematical applications. For such applications, the single-action character
printers were fast enough to cope with the limited amount of input-output data that
they were required to print. These applications involved large amounts of computation with relatively limited amounts of input and output. With the advent of commercial or business applications for electronic computers, circumstances changed
drastically. Large volumes of data were fed into the computer and a relatively small
amount of computation was performed on each data record. In some cases the data
output was voluminous, causing problems in producing usable output fast enough.
A temporary solution reached in the mid-1950's was to record data at high speeds on
magnetic tapes and then, in separate "off-line" operations, transmit this data to
various types of line printers, most of them impact or "line-at-a-time" types. The
speeds of these printers ranged from 5 lines per minute up to 1,800 lines
per minute •
•2
THE DEVELOPMENT OF HIGH-SPEED PRINTERS
The development of high-speed printers has followed two basic paths:
(a) Impact Printers - which print by means of some kind of mechanically driven
typebar or type-generating device. The basic principle of operation, similar to that employed in the ordinary typewriter or adding machine, has
many variations.
(b) Non-Impact Printers - which form an image on some medium, generally
by electrical charges. The image is then developed, fixed, or rendered
opaque by a suitable means. The medium can be some form of paper, a
special transfer material (e.g., a Xerox drum or plate), or a cathode
ray tube.
Almost all existing high-speed printers used in data processing installations today are
impact printers, and this report is concerned only with this type. The accompanying
chart summarizes the operating features of the major impact printers used with
tOday's electronic data processing systems.
Most of the printers operate in the range of 600 to 1,000 lines per minute, but the
operating range extends from 150 to 1, 200 lines per minute. It is significant that
the Burroughs High-Speed Printer System, which operated at 1,500 lines per minute
and had more flexibility in format control and record selection than most printers
available today, is no longer available as a standard product item from the Burroughs
Corporation.
The entire concept concerning the use of high-speed printers in commercial data
processing installations has changed in emphasis from using printers for off-line
applications to employing small computing systems as controllers for high-speed
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:050.300
§
050.
on -line printers. With the increased use of on -line printing, the throughput of the
entire computer system becomes limited by its slowest component, whether that
component be the magnetic tape unit, the card reader, the central processor, or the
line printer. In most cases, the card reading and magnetic tape data transfer rates
are sufficiently fast to make the line printers the slowest factor. It can be readily
seen from the system performance graphs throughout Standard EDP Reports that in
the smaller system configurations the printer speed is the limiting factor in those
systems which use on-line printers. Where paired configurations are shown, the
input-output data transfer rates for the detail and report files are much faster. Where
the printing is done off-line, the tape unit or central processor time is more likely to
be the limiting factor •
•3
•
METHOD OF PRINTING
With the exception of the IBM 370 and the Soroban MT series "stick" printers, line
printers are characterized by the printing of an entire line essentially with one stroke.
The need for a moving carriage is therefore obviated, and much greater speeds are
achieved than are possible with single-character printers. Line printers utilize continuous pin feed forms. All incorporate some form of high-speed skipping function in
which multiple lines can be skipped at several times the normal printing speed .
• 31
Stick Printers (See Soroban, IBM 370.)
Intermediate-speed printing for computers is offered by the single-element stick
printer. The printing element is normally an eight- sided metal element embossed
with eight cha.racters on each face to provide sixty-four print characters. The
character to be printed is selected by the decoding logic which actuates a rotation
and/or an in-out movement of the stick. At the time of the "dwell" (no movement) of
the stick, a single hammer is struck against the paper from the rear. The paper is
usually moved into contact with aD. inked ribbon against the printing stick to produce
the printed character.
HorizQntal positioning and carriage return result from the motion of the entire printing aljlsembly across the platen in a manner somewhat similar to the action of
typewriters.
The general characteristics of stick printers are:
• 32
•
Relatively low speed (30 to 60 lines per minute) •
•
Ribbon motion across the paper, as in a conventional typewriter •
Hammer-Actuated Type Bar or Wheel Printers (See IBM 407)
Many line printers, especially the earlier and slower ones, employ a series of type
bars or wheels • Each printing position has a separate bar or wheel containing all
characters of the print set. All pOSitions are printed simultaneously, after the entire
line has been decoded and each bar or wheel has been independently positioned. The
actual printing occurs when hammers, driven by electronic triggers, strike the paper
into contact with an inked ribbon against the type face.
The general characteristics of wheel or bar type printers are:
•33
•
Relatively low speed (50 to 150 lines per minute).
•
Ribbon motion across the paper, as in a conventional typewriter •
Matrix Printers (See IBM 720, 730)
Since the physical positioning and recoil movement of individual hammers against the
embossed characters is the primary limiting factor in the design of faster printers,
I
4/63
A-U-ER-BA-CH-,7"""1Nn
r"1
23:050.340
SPECIAL REPORT
§
050.
a number of high-speed printers have been designed which employ matrix-type print
heads. Each head consists of a small rectangle of fine wires. Olaracters are
formed by electromechanically actuating selected individual wires in each print head
and, with these wires, striking the ribbon against the paper. Matrix printer~ can
employ either a stationary head assembly or a moving head assembly. The stationary
assembly has one head for each printing position, while the moving assembly has
one-half or one-fourth as many individual heads spaced farther apart. Each head of
the moving assembly prints in two or four positions in tum after the entire head
assembly has been shifted laterally a slight distance.
In general, experience with matrix printers has been characterized by frequent and
troublesome mechanical maintenance and service problems. Currently, no highspeed impact type matrix printers are produced in the United States. It may reasonably be stated that the mechanical matrix printer has been displaced by other types.
The general characteristics of matrix printers are:
. 34
•
High speed (500 to 1,000 lines per minute).
•
A hidden flat metal platen.
•
Ribbon motion across the paper, as in a conventional typewriter.
•
A relatively poor printed image •
"On-the-Fly" Printers (See UNIVAC, Anelex, Shepard.)
High print speeds are achieved in "on-the-fly" printers by extremely rapid hammer
action against continuously moving type elements. Although such machines can be
either solid-drum, multiple-wheel, or chain types, their printing methods are
similar. The majority of printing units included in the chart fall into this category.
During each print cycle (normally the time allocated to load the print buffer; decode
its contents; print one line, including hammer action and recoil; and space the paper),
all characters rotate past the print hammers at each printing position. The character
to be printed is selected by decoding, and a fast-action hammer, controlled by an
actuator, presses the paper against the type slug at the exact moment the required
character is in position. If the machine is printing at 600 lines per minute, each
total printing cycle is one six-hundredth of a minute. This interval is in tum divided
into discrete timing units for each character which is available, plus several units for
paper advance. In some drum printers, if all hammers are fired at, say, time "3",
a "C" might be printed in every position across the page.
In the asynchronous mode of printing, such as is used in the Anelex 4-1000 printers,
the firing of the hammers does not commence at any fixed point during the rotation
of the drum. Rather, firing commences whenever a signal is received to indicate
that line spacing has been completed and the print buffer loading is finished. Firing
terminates when a counter indicates that all characters have rotated past the hammers
or when the buffer holding the line of characters to be printed has been sensed and
found empty. Skipping is controlled by a special control tape or by the central
processor.
In the chain printers (only the IBM 1403 printers), hammers are individually timed,
because each character travels horizontally across many printing pOSitions during the
print cycle. Five identical sets of 48 characters are assembled serially on a horizontally moving chain which resembles a bicycle chain. At each print position, the
paper is forced into contact with the ribbon against the chain by a solenoid-activated
hammer fired as the appropriate character on the chain passes the printing position.
In the 1403 Model 3, the chain has been replaced by a train mechanism in which type
slugs move in the same horizontal plane as in the chain at more than twice the speed.
If all hammers were fired simultaneously, several sets of sequential characters
rather than a line of identical characters would be printed.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:050.400
§
050.
Printers designed for only numeric printing are equipped with drums or chains on
which numeric type faces are repeated several times, often with blank print segments
between the groups for spacing. Such an arrangement (generally with two sets of print
characters) permits two lines to be printed for each drum revolution. Thus, at 1,000
revolutions per minute, 2,000 lines of numeric print per minute are produced.
Hammer action in "on-the-fly" printers is either by: (1) free flight, or ''ballistic, "
hammers (movement stopped by contact with the paper and the drum), or (2)
"controlled flight" hammers (fixed spatial movement). The most important advantage
claimed for the latter design principle is positive control over the depth of penetration
of hammer action. When such a printer is operated without paper in the tractor feed,
the hammers are prevented from striking the print drum by "end of paper" safety
switches.
Vertical format control is generally effected by an 8- or 12-channel paper tape loop.
The vertical spacing of the punches controls the actual spacing on the printed sheet.
In some printers it is necessary to use a loop the exact vertical size of the printed
page; in others it is possible to use loops representing only the vertical area'to be
imprinted.
The general characteristics of "on-the-fly" printers are:
•4
•
High speeds (600 to 1,200 lines per minute).
•
The absence of a platen.
•
Ribbon movement parallel with paper motion; ribbon width at least
equal to maximum line length.
•
Hammers which strike the paper from behind.
•
Printing often recognizable by a light box framing the characters
(chain printers) or lack of horizontal alignment (drum printers) .
FUTURE OUTLOOK
While certain new models and variations of present models of impact printers will
appear, it does not seem likely that any dramatic change in the performance of
mechanical printers can be expected. Perhaps, a two-fold increase in speed can
reasonably be expected, but speed increase of a greater order of magnitude appears
very unlikely. The problems which tend to limit the speed of mechanical printers
are associated with paper handling and movement in the printing plane, as well as the
problems caused by stresses on the paper itself (particularly multi-part forms) when
it is being moved and imprinted upon at high speeds.
It can be safely assumed that new mechanical printers appearing on the market will
have either cost or performance advantages, or both, over those presently available.
Continuation of the general trend to increased accuracy of registration can be expected and, hopefully, the cost of the printing mechanisms and associated paperhandling mechanisms will be reduced. With the present price range of high speed
printers ($30,000 to more flui.n $70,000) * moving down during the last 3 years,
continual reduction in price can be expected, if for no other reason, from linprovement in production methods. Nevertheless, this downward price trend will not be
a· marked one.
*
4/63
Exclusive of associated buffer storage and controllers. Prices are not
shown on the comparison chart because of the near-impossibility of
obtaining prices that are truly comparable with respect to the amount
of control circuitry included.
23:050.340
SPECIAL REPORT
§ 050.
a number of high-speed printers have been designed which employ matrix-type print
heads. Each head consists of a small rectangle of fine wires. Characters are
formed by electromechanically actuating selected individual wires in each print head
and, with these wires, striking the ribbon against the paper. Matrix printer\S can
employ either a stationary head assembly or a moving head assembly. The stationary
assembly has one head for each printing position, while the moving assembly has
one-half or one-fourth as many individual heads spaced farther apart. Each head of
the moving assembly prints in two or four positions in turn after the entire head
assembly has been shifted laterally a slight distance.
In general, experience with matrix printers has been characterized by frequent and
troublesome mechanical maintenance and service problems. Currently, no highspeed impact type matrix printers are produced in the United States. It may reasonably be stated that the mechanical matrix printer has been displaced by other types.
The general characteristics of matrix printers are:
. 34
•
High speed (500 to 1,000 lines per minute).
•
A hidden flat metal platen.
•
Ribbon motion across the paper, as in a conventional typewriter.
•
A relatively poor printed image •
"On-the-Fly" Printers (See UNIVAC, Anelex, Shepard.)
High print speeds are achieved in "on-the-fly" printers by extremely rapid hammer
action against continuously moving type elements. Although such machines can be
either solid-drum, multiple-wheel, or chain types, their printing methods are
similar. The majority of printing units included in the chart fall into this category.
During each print cycle (normally the time allocated to load the print buffer; decode
its contents; print one line, including hammer action and recoil; and space the paper),
all characters rotate past the print hammers at each printing position. The character
to be printed is selected by decoding, and a fast-action hammer, controlled by an
actuator, presses the paper against the type slug at the exact moment the required
character is in position. If the machine is printing at 600 lines per minute, each
total printing cycle is one six- hundredth of a minute. This interval is in turn divided
into discrete timing units for each character which is available, plus several units for
paper advance. In some drum printers, if all hammers are fired at, say, time "3",
a "c" might be printed in every position across the page.
In the asynchronous mode of piinting, such as is used in the Anelex 4-1000 printers,
the firing of the hammers does not commence at any fixed point during the rotation
of the drum. Rather, firing commences whenever a signal is received to indicate
that line spacing has been completed and the print buffer loading is finished. Firing
terminates when a counter indicates that all characters have rotated past the hammers
or when the buffer holding the line of characters to be printed has been sensed and
found empty. Skipping is controlled by a special control tape or by the central
processor.
In the chain printers (only the IBM 1403 printers), hammers are individually timed,
because each character travels horizontally across many printing positions during the
print cycle. Five identical sets of 48 characters are assembled serially on a horizontally moving chain which resembles a bicycle chain. At each print position, the
paper is forced into contact with the ribbon against the chain by a solenoid-activated
hammer fired as the appropriate character on the chain passes the printing position.
In the 1403 Model 3, the chain has been replaced by a train mechanism in which type
slugs move in the same horizontal plane as in the chain at more than twice the speed.
If all hammers were fired simultaneo'usly, several sets of sequential characters
rather than a line of identical characters would be printed.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
ST ANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:050.400
§
050.
Printers designed for only numeric printing are equipped with drums or chains on
which numeric type faces are repeated several times, often with blank print segments
between the groups for spacing. Such an arrangement (generally with two sets of print
characters) permits two lines to be printed for each drum revolution. Thus, at 1,000
revolutions per minute, 2,000 lines of numeric print per minute are produced.
Hammer action in "on-the-fly" printers is either by: (1) free flight, or "ballistic, "
hammers (movement stopped by contact with the paper and the drum), or (2)
"controlled flight" hammers (fixed spatial movement). The most important advantage
claimed for the latter design principle is positive control over the depth of penetration
of hammer action. When such a printer is operated without paper in the tractor feed,
the hammers are prevented from striking the print drum by "end of paper" safety
switches.
Vertical format control is generally effected by an 8- or 12-channel paper tape loop.
The vertical spacing of the punches controls the actual spacing on the printed sheet.
In some printers it is necessary to use a loop the exact vertical size of the printed
page; in others it is possible to use loops representing only the vertical area'to be
imprinted.
The general characteristics of "on-the-fly" printers are:
•4
•
High speeds (600 to 1,200 lines per minute).
•
The absence of a platen.
•
Ribbon movement parallel with paper motion; ribbon width at least
equal to maximum line length.
•
Hammers which strike the paper from behind.
•
Printing often recognizable by a light box framing the characters
(chain printers) or lack of horizontal alignment (drum printers) •
FUTURE OUTLOOK
While certain new models and variations of present models of impact printers will
appear, it does not seem likely that any dramatic change in the performance of
mechanical printers can be expected. Perhaps, a two-fold increase in speed can
reasonably be expected, but speed increase of a greater order of magnitude appears
very unlikely. The problems which tend to limit the speed of mechanical printers
are associated with paper handling and movement in the printing plane. as well as the
problems caused by stresses on the paper itself (particularly multi-part forms) when
it is being moved and imprinted upon at high speeds.
It can be safely assumed that new mechanical printers appearing on the market will
have either cost or performance advantages, or both, over those presently available.
Continuation of the general trend to increased accuracy of registration can be expected and, hopefully, the cost of the printing mechanisms and associated paperhandling mechanisms will be reduced. With the present price range of high speed
printers ($30,000 to more than $70, 000) * moving down during the last 3 years,
continual reduction in price can be eXpected, if for no other -reason, from Improvement in production methods. Nevertheless, this downward price trend will not be
a· marked one.
*
4/63
Exclusive of associated buffer storage and controllers. Prices are not
shown on the comparison chart because of the near-impossibility of
obtaining prices that are truly comparable with respect to the amount
of control circuitry included.
23:050.401
SPECIAL REPORT
§
050.
Any significant increases in over-all printer unit output will probably have to corne
through a shift in emphasis from mechanical printers to non-impact printers. Within the last 5 years, non-impact printers have been developed which are designed to
produce copy at rates of 5, 000 lines per minute or faster, using various electrical
and chemical processes to imprint the paper copy. One limitation on the development
and eventual use of the non-impact printers has been the problem of developing a
convenient process to produce simultaneous multiple copies and copy of sufficiently
high print quality to serve as routine business documents, such as bills, checks, and
receipts.
At present, these devices are significantly more costly and do not generally produce
printed documents of the highest quality. Use of improved treated papers and new
chemical and physical processes should enhance development in this area. However,
as far as general commercial computer installations are concerned, the penetration
of non-impact printers upon the market should not be expected for at least two to
three years. During this period, the relatively special uses of these printers will
probably prove economical, and these developments will promote the general acceptance of non-impact printers.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:050.402
§
050.
APPENDIX
Data Processing Terms Commonly Used in Connection with Line Printers
Carriage
That portion of a printing device which serves to hold and transport the paper being
printed.
Control Character
A coded character which is part of a computer program or some common language
medium. Instead of being printed, a control character initiates some kind of mechanical activity on the part of the device being used for printing.
Counter
A mechanical or electromagnetic device capable of numeric accumulation; an accumulator. Within a computer program, a storage location used to total numeric information.
Drum
With reference to printing, the imprinting device in an on-the-fly printer consisting of
a constantly revolving shaft, drum, or series of interlocked wheels, embossed with
the characters which are to be imprinted.
Edit
To rearrange information. Editing may involve the deletion of unwanted data; the
selection of pertinent data; the insertion of various symbols, such as page number and
typewriter characters; and the application of standard processes such as zero
suppression.
Font
A particular style and size of the type faces for a set of characters.
Frame
Total area of a single print position.
Hard Copy
A visible record on a permanent medium readable by the human eye.
Pitch
The horizontal spacing of type characters; e.g., 12-pitch.(12 characters per inch) is
"elite" pitch, lO-pitch is "pica" pitch, and 8-pitch is "billing" pitch.
Platen
An element of the carriage in a typing or printing device which is usually (but not
necessarily) a hard rubber cylinder. The function of the platen is to support the paper
as it is struck by the type face, and to guide the paper as it is spaced.
Plugboard
A wired control panel.
4/63
SPECIAL REPORT
§
23:050.403
050.
Position
With reference to a printing or typing device, one position is equivalent to a potentially
printable or printed character for that space. The number of "positions" available
determines the maximum length of the printed line.
Registration
The physical positioning of a print line or character (vertical or horizontal registration)
with relation to a form set or the machine itself.
Tractor
A device used on printers which controls the vertical movement of paper through the
carriage, normally by means of pinion wheels which engage pinfeed or punched-hole
margins.
Accelerated vertical motion of a form through a printing device.
Solenoid
An electro-mechanical actuator, used to convert electrical energy into physical
movement.
VFU
Vertical Format Unit - A device used to control the skipping of a high-speed printer.
Vernier
A printer control, normally rotational in nature, used for fine vertical or horizontal
carriage adjustments to align the form being printed while the printer is operating.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
SPECIAL REPORT
23:050.405
COMPARISON CHART:
PHYSICAL FORM
IDENTITY
Manufacturer
Model
Paper
Feed
Mechanism
Recording
System
Plug.
board
Anelex Corp.
300
Sprocket
Drum
No
Anelex Corp.
580
Sprocket
Drum
No
Anelex Corp.
4·1000
Sprocket
Drum
No
Vertical
Spacing
Control
Tape
8 Channels
HIGH SPEED PRINTERS
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
PRINTING CHARACTERISTICS
Printable
Characters
Prints
Serially
by:
Print
Positions
Hori.
zontal
Spacing
(char/
inch)
Vertical
Spacing
(Hnes/
inch)
Form Width
(Inches)
Maxi·
mum
Mini·
mum
Maxi.
mum
Copies
Speed (alphameric
lines/minut e)
Peak
l·inch
Spacing
Skipping
Speed
(inches/sec
APPLICATION
Representative Computer Systems
Using This Unit
48
Line
120 to 160
10
6/8
19
3
6
300
257
25
48 to 64
Line
80
10
6
9.50
9.50
6
1,000
643
25
8 Channels
48 to 64
Line
120 to 160
10
6
19
4
6
667 or 1,000
643 Or 487
25
Bendix G·20; GE 225; Philco 1000,
2000, 4000; RCA 301
5
6
700
518
25
Burroughs B 200 Series, B 5000
6
300
244
18
1,200
720
25/50
150 or 300
(600 or 1,010*)
133 or 238
16
CDC 160, 160·A, 924-A
25
IBM 305
Burroughs Corp.
B·231
Sprocket
Drum
No
12 Channels
64
Line
120
10
6/8
20
Data Products Corp.
P·3300
Sprocket
Drum
No
No
64
Line
132
10
6
19
Data Systems Devices of
Boston, Inc.
1·132
Sprocket
Drum
No
64
Line
132
10
6
22
Holley Computer Products
Co.
H-207
Sprocket
Drum
No
8 Channels
10 to 64
Line
120
10
6/8
22
6
IBM Corp.
370
Sprocket
Octagonal
print sUck
Yes
7 or 12
Channels
47
Character
80
10
6
16.75
7
IBM Corp.
407"*
Sprocket
120 Wheels
Yes
12 Channels
47
Line
120
10
4/6 or 6/8
16.75
IBM Corp.
720
Sprocket
Matrix
printer
No
12 Channels
49
Line
120
10
6/8
20.38
IBM Corp.
730
Sprocket
Matrix
printer
No
12 Channels
49
Line
120
10
6/8
3
4.75
6
29
6 to 7
Burroughs B 205
400
30/70
IBM 70S, 7080
1,000
667
30/70
IBM 70S, 7080
150
4
500
20.38
4
150
IBM Corp.
1403 Model
I, 2
Sprocket
Horizontal
chain
No
12 Channels
48
Line
100 or 132
10
6/8
18.75
3.50
6
600 (1,285*)
480
33/75
IBM 1401, 1410, 1460, 7010, 7040,7044
IBM Corp.
1403
Model 3
Sprocket
Horizontal
• 'train' J
No
12 Channels
48
Line
132
10
6/8
18.75
3.50
6
1,100
750
33/75
IBM 1410, 1460, 7010, 7040, .7044
IBM Corp.
1443
Sprocket
Horizontal
bar
No
12 Channels
52 (13,
39, or 63
optional)
Line
120
10
6/8
16.75
4
150 or 240
(430 or 600*)
132 or 196
15
IBM 1440
Minneapolis-Honeywell
Regulator Co.
422-3,
822-3
Sprocket
Drum
Yes
2 Channels
56
Line
120
10
6/8
22
3.50
10
900
560
20
H-400, H-800
Minneapolis-Honeywell
Reguliltor Co.
422-4,
822-4
Sprocket
Drum
Yes
2 Channels
56
Line
160
10
6/8
22
3.50
10
900
560
20
H-400, H.800
Potter Instrument Co., Inc.
LP 600
Sprocket
Drum
No
8 Channeis
64
Line
80 to 160
10
6
17.78
4.19
5
600 (1,200*)
450
25
PotterInstrumentCo., Inc.
LP 1200
Sprocket
Drum
No
8 Channels
64
Line
160 max.
10
6
17.78
4.19
5
1,000
(1,200*)
570
18.5
Shepard Laboratories Inc.
190
Sprocket
Drum
Yes
6 Channels
64
Line
120
10
6
22
3
6
680 (900*)
407
14
Sorohan Engineering, Inc.
MT·l
. Sprocket
or friction
Octagonal
print stick
No
No
56
Character
97
10
6
11
7
57
(100 char/sec
4
Soroban Engineering, Inc.
MT-5.0
Sprocket Print stick
Or friction
No
No
Up to 128
Character
97
10
6
11
5
24
(40 char/sec)
?
UNIVAC Division, Sperry
Rand Corp.
4152
Sprocket
Drum
No
No
51
Line
128
10
6/8
22
4
5
700 (922*)
475
22
UNIVAC III
UNIVAC Division,8perry
Sperry Rand Corp.
7912
Sprocket
Drum
No
No
51
Line
100 to 130
10
6/8
21
4
5
600
430
20
UNIVAC 88-80, 88-90, 1107, 490
Bendix G-20
NCR 315, 304; RCA 501
** IBM printer models
"Peak speed for sll-numeric data (may require special character set).
716, 717 and 7400 sre variations of this model which sre no longer in production. They were used as on-line printers for the
709, 705 and 7070 series computer systems.
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Il\Corporated
4/63
23:060.001
I
\
SPECIAL REPORT
RANDOM ACCESS STORAGE:
A STATE·OF·THE·ART REPORT
Prepared by
The Technical Staff of
AU ER BACH Corporation
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
23:060.100
Special Report
AUERBACH SPECIAL REPORT
RANDOM ACCESS STORAGE: A STATE-OF-THE-ART REPORT
.1
INTRODUCTION
The increasingly widespread use of automated techniques to improve order processing,
inventory and production control, and various types of management information systems
has sparked a strong interest in the capabilities and application of random access storage
devices. These systems generally must employ equipment of the "on-line" type, in which
the storage files are electrically connected to the main frame of the computer so that data
storage and retrieval can be both immediate and automatic. The on-line file concept calls
for some kind of random access storage medium, which, as the name implies, permits
data to be retrieved from it on a random basis.
Mass random access storage devices are also desirable for the utilization of modern multiprogrammed computer systems (in which utilization of the equipment is maximized by
processing several independent programs concurrently) and high-performance software
systems (compilers, operating systems, sorting routines, etc.). The importance of this
type of equipment in the current computer market is illustrated by the fact that IBM's new
System/360 line includes six different types of random access storage devices (described
in report sections 420:042 through 420:047) with a wide range of data capacities, access
times, and data transfer rates.
The functional meaning of the term "random access" is best understood by comparing
random access storage with magnetic tape storage. Data is stored on magnetic tape in
serial form, and the time required to retrieve a certain piece of data is dependent upon its
location on the tape. Retrieval time, therefore, can vary widely according to the location
of the data within the storage medium. In contrast, the time to retrieve data from random
access storage is not related to its location in the medium. The retrieval time for anyone
given item of data is, in the ideal case, the same as for any other item of data.
This idealized definition of random access storage does not strictly apply to most of the
existing mass random access storage devices. In these devices the access times to retrieve two different items of data may differ slightly according to the locations of the data.
Time is required to move the section of the storage medium containing the desired data
into position under the read/write head. This is called "latency" or "rotational delay_ "
Latency is directly dependent upon the relationship between the locations of the desired
data and the data currently under the read/write head; to bring the new data into pOSition
under the read-write head may require a quarter, half, or full turn of the storage medium.
An additional period of time, called "head positioning time, " may be required to position
the read/write head over the proper track of the storage medium. In any case, the variance
in access times is measured in milliseconds, an insignificant amount as compared to the
minutes required to run through several thousand feet of magnetic tape,
One storage medium that does meet the strict definition of random access is the computer's
internal core memory. All data contained in it literally can be accessed in equal time,
regardless of its physical location. Although functionally ideal, core memory is economically impractical for most mass-storage purposes because of the high cost per character
stored.
A highly Significant recent development in this area is IBM's Model 2361 Core Storage (see
Section 420:042), which makes up to 8.4 million characters of 8-microsecond random access
storage available to the larger central processor models in the System/360 line. Its cost,
however, is still too high to justify its use for master-file storage in most applications.
Current development work in this area indicates that within a few years it probably will be
possible to store hundreds of millions of characters in this kind of medium and access them
within a few microseconds - and at a reasonable cost.
.2
I
"
'--
HARDWARE TYPES
The most commonly used mass random access storage devices at the present time are
magnetic drums, magnetic disc files, and cartridge-loaded units. These three basic types
of devices differ functionally in a number of ways that can be important from an applications
viewpoint.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:060.210
.21
Drums
Magnetic drum devices consist of a revolving drum with a magnetizable surface on which information is arranged in tracks. Read/write heads pick up and record data as the desired items
pass beneath them. This means that there may be a rotational delay of up to one drum revolution when accessing a given record. In practice, the delay averages out to one-half a revolution.
Most magnetic drum devices employ an individual, fixed read/write head for each track, so that
this rotational delay is the only time factor that must be considered in the accessing operation.
High data transfer rates are frequently achieved by recording data simultaneously (in parallel) in
two or more adjacent tracks. IBM's new 2301 Drum Storage unit reads and records four bits in
parallel and transfers 1,200,000 characters per second. Control Data's 861 and 862 Drum
Storage units read and record 13 bits (2 characters plus a parity bit) in parallel and can transfer
up to 2,000,000 characters per second.
When compared to the other types of random access storage deVices, drums have relatively fast
access times and transfer rates, relatively low storage capacities, and a relatively high cost
per character stored. The type of drum memory with a fixed read/write head serving each data
track is particularly well suited to the storage of systems programs, address directories for
larger-capacity random access units, and for on-line applications where short response time is
more important than large storage capacity.
Though most magnetic drum units use multiple fixed read/write heads, there are some exceptions. Two units available for use with UNIVAC systems use movable access mechanisms to
decrease the number of read/write heads necessary to serve large data stores. In both these
units access time is significantly increased by the need to move the heads from one data track
to another. The Randex drum unit used in the UNIVAC Solid State 80/90 systems offers a choice
of one or two drums in a single cabinet and has a Single access mechanism with one read/write
head per drum. The average time required to position the read/write head over the selected
data track is 333 milliseconds. The newer Fastrand unit, used with the UNIVAC III, 490, 1050,
and 1107 computer systems, also offers two drums in one cabinet and has a single access
mechanism. It differs from the Randex unit, however, by using 32 read/write heads per drum.
Each head serves 96 data tracks in a Fastrand I unit and 192 data tracks in a Fastrand II unit.
All 64 heads are moved horizontally as a single unit, and the average head-positioning time is
only 57 milliseconds. The multiple-head arrangement makes it possible to access up to 688,128
characters at any given position of the access mechanism .
. 22
Disc Files
Magnetic disc devices are a variation on the drum concept. They consist of multiple discs
mounted on a single shaft to provide larger and considerably less expensive storage capacity
than fixed-head drums. Data is recorded on concentric circular tracks, usually on both faces
of the discs.
In the first generation of disc file equipment, exemplified by the IBM 1405 Disc Storage Unit and
the IBM 305 RAMAC, a single access arm serves all the discs. In these units, the arm moves
vertically to the selected disc, then horizontally across the disc to the appropriate data track.
This extensive mechanical movement of the head, plus the time it takes for the desired record
to rotate past the head, makes these initial disc file units significantly slower than drum devices.
The average access time of these early units is more than one-half second.
Access time has been improved in later equipment models. Most of the second-generation
disc file units, as exemplified by the Bryant 4000 (used in Honeywell and other computers) and
the IBM 1301, have a separate access arm for each disc. The multiple access arms form a
comb that moves as a single unit. The elimination of the need for vertical pOSitioning reduces
the average head-positioning time by a factor of 4 to 6 as compared with the early IBM 1405 unit.
In the Bryant 4000 disc files, each access arm has six read/write heads, each of which services
128 data tracks. The IBM 1301 uses a Single read/write head on each access arm to service all
250 data tracks on each disc.
A later IBM unit, the 1302, uses the same principle as the 1301 but offers more characters per
track and more tracks per disc through an increase in the recording density. This approximately
quadruples the capacity, doubles the peak data transfer rate, and Significantly lowers the cost
per character stored.
Anelex Corporation produces two disc file units. Both models use comb-type access mechanisms.
Model 800 consists of one to eight diSCS, with a total storage capacity of up to 23 million characters. Each of its access arms has eight read/write heads (four per disc face), and the average
time for head positioning is 100 milliseconds. Model 4800 is a similar unit, but with larger
storage capacity and faster head-positioning time. It consists of from 8 to 24 diSCS, capable of
storing up to 95 million characters, and has an average head-positioning time of 50 to 65 milliseconds.
(Contd.)
2/65
23:060.220
SPECIAL REPORT
.22
Disc Files (Contd.)
A subtle but significant variation on the comb-type access mechanism is provided in the disc
storage units manufactured by Data Products Corp. and General Electric. These units feature
a separate, individually-positioned access arm for each disc. Each arm has eight read/write
heads (four per disc face). This arrangement is more flexible than the comb-type access
mechanism, but it has the drawback that only one or two of the 16 or more access arms can be
positioned at a time. (A new, larger GE disc storage unit will permit any or all of its access
arms to be positioned at the same time. )
Burroughs, in its On-Line Disc System, uses another variation of the comb-type access mechanism. All movement of the read/write heads is eliminated by providing an individual head for
each data track. Consequently, the total access time is limited; as in fixed-head drum devices,
to the rotational-delay time, which ranges from 0 to 40 milliseconds. This is less than one-fifth
of the time required by most of the disc files, in which a comb of access arms has to be moved
horizontally across the disc surfaces. Despite the large number of read/write heads used in the
Burroughs unit, the cost per chm'acter of storage is still competitive.
Disc-file development has been hampered by two major mechanical problems: positioning
movable read/write heads with the desired speed and precision, and preventing physical
contact between the heads and the disc surfaces. A number of complex electro-mechanical
techniques have been developed to position the heads quickly and accurately, but their
uncertain reliability is still causing headaches for both manufacturers and users.
The read/write heads must be kept within a few ten-thousandths of an inch of the magnetic
recording surface in order to achieve the high recording densities required for high data
transfer rates and large storage capacities. To avoid damaging physical contact between
the heads and the rapidly revolving disc surface, many units use the principle of "floating"
the read/write heads on a layer of air generated by the rotational friction of the discs. Some
units also employ solenoids as a fail-safe device that retracts the heads in case of power
failure. Although these solutions are obviously workable, they are mechanically complex
and expensive .
. 23
\
-".
I
/'
I
!
\~
,/
I
\.
Cartridge-Loaded Units
The third basic type of random access storage device is the cartridge-loaded units, which
utilize a variety of different types of magnetic media. NCR's CRAM, RCA's Model 3488,
and IBM's 2321 Data Cell Drive all use magnetic cards, which are extracted from a replaceable cartridge and wrapped around a revolving drum that carries them past the read/write
heads. The IBM 1311 and 2311 Disk Storage Drives and the Anelex Model 80 all use interchangeable stacks of discs. Potter's new RAM unit uses continuous loops of magnetic tape.
Each of these units represents an attempt to combine the rapid-access capabilities of
random access devices with the practically unlimited total storage capacity (on-line plus
off-line) of magnetic tape. From an applications point of view, the total storage capacity
and flexibility of operation gained by having interchangeable cartridge units must be measured against the relatively long delays that occur whenever cartridges must be manually
interchanged to make new information available on-line.
The trail-blazing NCR CRAM (Card Random Access Memory) unit uses flexible magnetic
cards. A cartridge contains 128 or 256 cards. For a read/write operation, the selected
card is dropped from the cartridge and held by vacuum against the revolving drum, which
carries it under the read/write heads. A fixed read/write head serves each track. After
the card has been read and/or recorded upon, it is stripped from the drum, and its momentum carries it up through a return chute and back into the cartridge. There is no need for
the cards to be replaced in any particular sequence; the eight selector rods can cause the
selected card to drop, regardless of its position in the cartridge, through the use of eight
binary-coded notches in the top of each card.
In the NCR Model 353-1 CRAM, each cartridge can store over 5.5 million alphanumeric
characters. Each card in the cartridge has seven 3100-character data tracks, all of which
can be read or recorded upon when the card is wrapped around the revolving drum. The
recording mode is Similar to that of many magnetic tape systems; there are 8 bit channels
per track, and a "read-after-write" check is performed upon recording.
The newer Model 353-2 and 353-3 CRAM units use bit-serial recording, one bit channel
per H20-character data track. This change in the recording mode reduces the equipment
cost and increases cartridge capacity to 8 million characters in Model 353-2 and 16 million
characters in Model 353-3, but it also results in a lower data transfer rate than that of the
Model 353-1.
RCA's Model 3488 Random Access Computer Equipment uses the same basic principles as
CRAM, but each Model 3488 unit can hold 8 or 16 interchangeable card magazines at a
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
23:060.230
23
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
Cartridge-Loaded Units (Contd.)
time. Each magazine holds 256 cards and up to 42 million characters of data. Each card
contains 64 bands of two tracks each, and each band holds four 650-character blocks. of
data. Four pairs of read/write heads are moved, in unison, to one of 16 possible positions
so that they can serve all of the 64 bands. Access time to data on a particular card is
normally between 290 and 465 milliseconds, depending upon the position of the addressed
magazine. Model 3488 storage is clearly intended for applications where a large volume of
relatively inexpensive random-access storage is needed, rather than where fast access is
important. The Model 70/568 Mass Storage Unit in RCA's new Spectra 70 line is physically
similar to Model 3488, but each band holds one 1900-byte record and each magazine holds
31 million eight-bit bytes in the 70/568 unit.
IBM's new 2321 Data Cell Drive, like RCA's Model 3488, provides economical storage for
extremely large volumes of data in applications where relatively slow access times can be
tolerated. Each 2321 drive stores up to 400 million characters (or 800 million packed
decimal digits) in 10 removable, interchangeable "data cells" with a capacity of 40 million
characters each.
Data in the 2321 is recorded on magnetic strips, 13 inches long and 2. 25 inches Wide, which
are arranged in data cells mounted vertically around the circumference of a cylinder or
"tub file" that can be rotated. Each of the 10 data cells is divided into 20 subcells, and each
subcell contains 10 magnetic strips. There are 100 recording tracks on each strip, and
each track can hold a maximum of 2, 000 characters. A bidirectional rotary positioning
system positions the selected subcell beneath an access station. The selected strip is withdrawn from the cell, placed on a separate rotating drum, and moved past the read/write
heads, where reading and/or recording take place. Then the strip is returned to its original
location in the cell. When a previously-addressed strip is on the drum, time to access data
on a different strip varies from 375 to 600 milliseconds.
The IBM 1311 and 2311 Disc Storage Drives are patterned after the larger IBM 1301 and
1302 Disc Storage Units. They use the comb-type access mechanism with interchangeable
"Disc Pack" cartridges conSisting of a stack of 6 discs. A cartridge has a total storage
capacity of 2, 980,000 characters in the 1311 and 7,250,000 characters in the 2311, and it
can be replaced in one minute. Compared with the IBM 1301, the 1311 and 2311 cartridge
units have much lower on-line storage capacities, which may be offset by the advantages of
cartridge loading and the lower price tags.
Anelex offers a functionally similar unit, the Model 80, which utilizes interchangeable
cartridges called "Disc Kits." Each kit contains six discs and can store up to 3,900,000
characters. A constant head-positioning time of 75 milliseconds is achieved as a result
of the superimposed operations of seven binary-clutch motions. The comb-type access
mechanism contains tw'o heads per disc surface. Provision is made for mechanically
coding the Disc Kits to provide for read-only operations by sector for data protection.
Potter's RAM unit, a new addition to the cartridge-loaded class of equipment, offers a
number of interesting features. Data is recorded on 30-inch-Iong loops of standard
computer-grade magnetic tape held in interchangeable cartridges. Each tape loop is 2 inches
wide and contains 112 recording tracks. Bit-serial recording is used, at a density of 1000
bits per inch. A single cartridge contains 16 tape loops and can store up to 7.2 million characters. Vacuum capstans and "air bearings" are used to reduce wear and contamination of
the tape. Any tape loop not engaged in a data transfer process remains stationary and is
drawn away from both the drive capstan and the read/write heads.
Seven reading heads and seven writing heads serve each of the 16 RAM tape loops. All of
the heads move in unison to anyone of 16 discrete pOSitions. Average head pOSitioning time
is 62.5 milliseconds, and average rotational delay is 25 milliseconds. Data transfer rate is
86,000 characters per second.
.3
THE COMPARISON CHART
The accompanying comparison chart (page 23:060. 800) summarizes the significant characteristics of a number of representative random access storage devices. The entries have been
selected to pinpoint specific advantages or disadvantages of each device from a user's point
of view. An explanation of the meaning and significance of each comparison chart entry
follows.
•
Category - The storage devices included in this chart can be
grouped into three major categories: Magnetic Drums, Magnetic Disc Files, and Cartridge-Loaded Units (in which the
storage medium is conveniently replaceable).
(Contd.)
2/65
SPECIAL REPORT
.3
23:060.300
THE COMPARISON CHART (Contd.)
•
Device - Identifies each device by manufacturer, model
number, and the name by which it is commonly known.
•
Representative Computer System - It is difficult (if not meaningless) to evaluate a random access storage device independently of the computer system to which it is connected. A single,
representative computer system has been selected to serve as
a basis for all the comparison-chart entries for each storage
device. The capacity and performance characteristics of some
storage devices can be Significantly different when they are associated with other computer systems.
•
Report Reference - Indicates the section of AUERBACH
Standru:d EDP Reports where you will find a more detailed
description of each random access storage device (or a closely
related unit).
•
Storage Medium recorded.
•
Storage Capacity - The five entries in this general category
define data storage capacity in terms of:
•
The physical medium upon which data is
(1)
The number of data cliscs or drums per physical unit of
random access storage (often a variable quantity, in
which case the range is indicated).
(2)
The number of tracks on each disc surface or drum
upon which data can be recorded. Where a logical track
(or "band") is composed of two or more parallel bit channels, which are always read and recorded at the same
time, the fact is noted under "Features and Comments. "
(3)
The maximum number of alphanumeric characters that
can be recorded on a single track.
(4)
The maximum number of characters that can be read or
recorded without any repositioning of the read/write heads.
(5)
The maximum number of alphanumeric characters (usually
6 data bits per character) that can be stored in each physical random-access storage unit. The characters are
assumed to be in the code and format most commonly used
to represent alphanumeric information in the particular
system. It should be noted that in many random access
devices, the number of decimal digits of all-numeric information that can be stored is substantially higher than the
number of alphanumeric characters. Capacity and performance of the IBM System/360 random access units are indicated in terms of 8-bit bytes; each byte can hold one
alphanumeric character or two decimal digits.
Head Positioning Time - For storage devices with movable
read/write heads, the time required to reposition these heads
is reported in terms of:
(1)
The minimum time required to move the heads to the
next adjacent track pOSition.
(2)
The average time required to position the heads to read
a randomly-placed record.
(3)
The maximum (worst-case) pOSitioning time.
For the cartridge units that use magnetic cards, what the indicated "head positioning times" actually represent are the
times required to withdraw a card from the cartridge and position it on the read/write drum.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:060.301
.3
.4
THE COMPARISON CHART (Contd.)
•
Average Rotational Delay - The average time (in milliseconds)
required for the first character of the selected data record to
reach the read/write heads after the heads have been properly
positioned (usually one-half a revolution in the case of magnetic
disc and drum storage devices). The total average "access
time" for a randomly-placed record is, of course, the sum of
"Average Head Positioning Time" and "Average Rotational
Delay. "
•
Peak Data Transfer Rate - The maximum rate at which data is
read from or recorded upon the random access storage medium
after the desired record has been located, expressed in characters per second. When large blocks of data must be read
from or recorded in consecutive storage locations, the overall
effective data transfer rate, in some cases, will be significantly
lower than the peak rate, due to rotational delays between
records and/or the need for repositioning.
•
Transfer Load Size - The number of alphanumeric characters
that can be transferred to or from the random access storage
device in a single read/write operation. The load size is fixed
in some cases and variable in others. Where the minimum
increment for a variable-length load is greater than one word,
the increment is stated; e. g., "100 to 20,000 by 100. "
•
Read/Write Checking - The type of checking performed upon
the accuracy of data recording and/or reading. The most
commonly-employed method is to generate and record a parity
bit for each character, word, or record, and to check the recorded data for correct parity when it is reread. "Check characters" usually implies a similar but somewhat more powerful
system for detecting errors (and, in some cases, correcting
them). "Read after write" parity checking or separate (and
time-consuming) "write check" operations permit detection of
most recording errors at the time of occurrence - a highly
desirable feature.
•
Representative Cost - To complete the picture, a purchase
cost figure, expressed in dollars per character, is listed for
each type of random access storage. This cost is based upon
the price of a single physical storage unit of the largest available
capacity, together with any control units that are required to
connect it to the specific computer system shown in the chart.
(The costs of general-purpose computer data channels and multiplexors are not included.) It is important to note that the cost
per character for a particular type of random access storage
may vary Significantly when it is associated with a different
computer system, or when more or less storage capacity is
required .
THE ECONOMICS
The economics of using random access devices involves considerably more than simply comparing their cost with that of magnetic tape transports. To achieve any sort of valid economic
measurement, you must make a comparison between the two fundamentally different methods
of processing: on-line and batch. On-line processing implies that all transactions are processed in essentially the order in Which they are presented to the data processing system, so
random access to the stored files is a prerequisite. In the more conventional batch-processing
approach, the transaction data must be arranged in the same sequence as the master file before processing. The major economic differences between the two methods can be determined
by comparing their access times, storage costs, and overall throughput costs .
. 41
Access Times
A comparison between the access times of on-line and batch processing really necessitates
a comparison between the access time of the random access device and the times for the
transaction-file sorting required for batch processing. Once the transaction record is
matched or merged with the master-file record in batch processing, the remaining processing time required will be about the same as that required for the on-line processing
(Contd.)
2/65
23:060.410
SPECIAL REPORT
.41
Access Time (Contd.)
operation. In malting such a comparison, kecp in mind that in a well-designed on-line system, most of the access time can probably be overlapped with computer processing; only
the non-overlapped access time needs to be measured against the sorting time for the batch
processing case.
These timing factors will vary with the file size, record size, computer system configuration, and type of random access device used. Each case will therefore need to be considered
separately, and no generalizcd conclusion can be drawn.
· 42
Storage Costs
Here we must consider the cost of: (1) the storage units themselves, (2) all control units
necessary to connect thc storage units to the central processor, and (3) the storage media
(cartridges, tape reels, etc.) required to hold all of the necessary information, both online and off-line. Using currently-available equipment, disc files (and large-capacity drum
files) tend to compare favorably in cost with cartridge and tape units for storage requirements of up to around 100 million characters. For storing files of over one billion characters, they tend to become unwieldy because of the large number of physical units required
and their space and maintenance requirements.
When properly used, the best cartridge units appear to offer Significant advantages in storage cost over both magnetic tape and disc units for storage requirements up to several
billion characters. When total storage requirements exceed this level, tape systems are
unmistakably the cheapest, due to the very low cost of the tape itself.
On the basis of relative cost, it would seem that a combination of both serial and random
access storage is likely to become standard practice in many of the EDP installations of the
future. Discs, drums, or future nonmechanical random-access stores would be used for
smaller files of up to about 100 million characters, and magnetic tape would be used for the
very large-volume files. Normally, the more active records would be held in random
access storage for faster accessibility, while the rest would be stored on magnetic tape for
economy.
· 43
Throughput Costs
In determining the effect that random access storage will have on the number of transactions
your EDP system can process per dollar, you are getting close to the crux of whether or
not random access storage is practical for your own particular installation. In attempting
to make this decision, you must begin considering some of the broader systems implications
of using random access storage.
It is obvious that a well-deSigned on-line system is greatly superior to a batch-type system
with respect to the total response time required to process a given transaction and update
the necessary files. The advantage might be as much as seconds versus hours or even days.
However, in order to handle high peak loads without excessive delays, an on-line system
may require significantly more throughput capacity (computer power) than a batch-type system designed to handle the same total workload. With currently-available computer hardware, a system configuration designed for efficient batch proceSSing generally will be able
to process more records per day at a lower cost than a corresponding random access configuration of the same computer system. This is due not only to the cost of the random
access units themselves, but also to the added core storage and communications equipment
that is usually required for on-line processing.
On the basis of the number of transactions processed per dollar, therefore, batch processing usually shows a significant advantage over on-line proceSSing with currently-available
equipment. This advantage may be more than offset, however, by a number of system
performance considerations centered around a significant expansion of the data processing
system's utility to an organization.
·5
SYSTEMS CONSIDERATIONS
The use of random access storage can rarely be justified solely on the basis of the economic
comparisons described above. The decision is really one of whether an on-line system will
provide enough added user advantages over a batch-type system to justify the added expense.
These advantages take the form of faster response, more timely management information,
and the economies of integrated operations.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
'I)
J
./
"
,I
23:060.510
I
.,
.f
I,
\\
.51
I"
"
t
/"
,;
i
I-'
ST ANDARD EDP REPORTS
,
j'
'taster Response
On-line random access files can, of course, provide immediate responses to requests for
information. Because data can be entered into the system on a random basis and filed immediately, as contrasted with the batch processing techniques used in punched-card or
magnetic-tape systems, answers to queries are not only rapid but based on completely upto-the-minute information. In cases where different types of data must be supplied to a
system lIser, data retrieval can usually be accomplished in one pass, whereas a batchprocessing system might require a number of separate passes through the diffe,rent files.
The morc diverse the data requirements of an organization and the greater the need for
up-to-date information, the more practical an on-line system becomes .
. 52
Timely Management Information
The on-line system's ability to respond quicldy to diverse queries with up-to-date information is extremely attractive to management. Not only can the system provide the type of
information necded to tighten the administration and control of operations, but it can provide
more pertinent inputs to the management decision-making process.
The ability of an on-line system to process transactions as they occur also Simplifies the
scheduling problems within the computer facility. Tradeoffs no longer need to be made between regular daily tasks and the occasional tasks such as end-of-month closings and weekly
reports. This tends to reduce peak-load buildups and even out the data proceSSing workload
so that more consistent and efficient use is made of the computational equipment.
. 53
Integrated Operations
Mass random access storage devices are a vital element in the development of modern integrated information systems. By permitting rapid access to all of the pertinent information
in the organization's files, random access devices open the door to a total-systems concept
in which each individual transaction can immediately trigger the appropriate entries in all
of the affected files. For example, a single sales order might cause changes in inventory,
production scheduling, material control, dispatching, billing, accounts receivable, credit,
commiSSion, and other records. Integrated systems will make it possible for large modern
corporations to enjoy the same degree of centralized control and flexibility of operation as
small Single-proprietor businesses.
2/65
r
\\
SPECIAL REPORT
.
...
\
23:060.800
\
'.
CHARACTERISTICS OF RANDOM ACCESS STORAGE DEVICES.
MAGNETIC DRUMS
Category
Control Data
861
Drum Storage
Device
Representative Computer System
Report Reference
Storage Mcdiwn
Data Discs or Drums
per Physical Unit
Data Tracks per Disc
Surface or Drum
Storage
Capacity
Average Rotational Delay,
~sec.
Peak Data Transfer Rate,
Characters/sec.
Transfer Load Size, Characters
Read/Write Checking
Representative Cost, $ per
Character
Features and Comments
Bryant 4000
(Honcywell 460)
Univac 1107
Univac SS80/90 Model II
Honeywell 400
245:04.5
420:047
(777:043)
781:043
772:043
501:042
Drum
Drum
Drum
Drum
Dl"Um
Unit
IBM 1301
Disc Storage
IBM 1302
Disc Storage
IBM 1405
Disc Storage
NCR 315
NCR 315
4·20:044
420:045
601:042
601:043
321:042
403:013
417:043
401:042
401:043
Discs
Discs
Discs
Discs
Discs
Discs
Discs
Magnetic discs
4, 8, 12,
or 16
20 or 40
25 or 50
6
(10 sides)
6
(10 sides)
100
200
256
250
500
200
10,752
36,864
5,120
3,072
2,780
5,850
1,000
936,000
15,360,000
IBM System/3BO
(245:042)
256
4,718,592
IBM System/360
201:042
50
66,060,288
IBM 1401 and 1440
IBM 1401
768
7,680
NCR 353-1
CRAM Unit
IBM 7080
2,000
Total Capacity
IBM 2321
Data Cell Drive
IBM 7074
128
688,128
IBM 2311 Disc
Storage Dr! vo
GE 225
3,072
3,840
IBM 1311 Disc
Storage Drive
CDC 1601-A
B5500
16
200
4,097,200**
GE M640A
Disc Storage
4, 8, 12, 16,
or 20
64
4,194,304
Burroughs
Data Products
5024 Discfile
(CDC 818)
3, 6, 12, 18,
or 24
2
Total Capacity
System
lor 2
1
20,486**
Burroughs B 472
On-Line Disc
1
1
Tot::tl C apaci ty
Maximum
Univac
Randox Drum
Univac 1107
Maximum Characters
Accessible Without
Head Repositioning
Minimum
Univac
FII-880 Drum
IBM System/3BO
65,536
Head
Positioning Average (Random)
Time,msec.
Univac
Fastrand I Drum
CARTRIDGE-LOADED UNITS
MAGNETIC DISC FILES
CDC 3200
Maximum Characters
per Track
Maximum Character
Capacity per Physical
Unit
IBM 2301
Drum Storage
4,096
24,000
"
20 or 40
786,432
Total Capacity
524,288
294,912
222,400
100,663,296
48,000,000
33,554,432
18,874,368
55,600, 000
234,000,000
2, 000 or 4,000*
Magnetic discs
Magnetic strips
Ten 200-:-strip
cartridges
100 per strip
Magnetic cards
703:044
One 256-card
cartridge
Up to sixteen
256-card
cartridges
7 per card
56 per card
3,100
20,000 or
29,800*
36,250**
40,000**
21,700 (1 card)
400, ODD, 000**
RCA 3301
One 256-card
cartridge
2, 000**
7,250, 000**
Equ~p.
Magnetic cards
3,625**
2,000,000 or
2,980,000*
RCA 3488
Random Access
Computer
Magnetic cards
2,000 or 2, 980*
20, ODD, 000
NCR 353-3
CRAM Unit
5,555,200
1,120
62,720 (1 card)
16,056,320
64 per card
2,600
10,400
681,574,400
0
0
30
0
125
60
0
35
70
50
50
90
75 or 54*
30
375
235
235
290
0
0
57
0
333
95
0
120
199
160
165
600
250 or 154*
85
550
235
235
378
0
0
86
0
540
130
0
200
305
180
180
800
392 or 248*
145
600
235
235
465
17.2
8.6
35
16.7
35
33.5
20
26
26
17
17
25
20
12.5
25
23
23
30
2,000, 000
1,200, 000**
150,900
368,760
9,280
35,500 or
71,000
90,000
184,000
22,500
156, aDO*'"
64,700**
38, 000
80,000
1 to 131,072
1 to 20,486**
6 to 344,064
Parity
Cyclic check
characters
Parity
0.029
O. 080**
Fixed heads;
13 bit channels
per track
Fixed heads;
4 bit channels
per track
0.0044
Movable access
mec hanism has
64 read/write
heads
6 to 393,216
320
Parity,
character
count
Parity
0.0348
Fixed heads;
6 bit charmels
per track
0.0091
Movable access
mechanism has
1 head per drum
27,500 to
75,000
512
Parity
0.0026
All rcad/write
heads (6 per
disc surface)
move in unison
100, 000
58,800 or
98, 000
96 to 30,240
by 96,
240, or 480
8 to 32,768
Check chars. ,
write check
Check chars.
0.0053
Fixed heads, 1
per track
0.0062
Individually
positionablc
access arm for
each disc
77,000
100,000
192 to 3,072
by 192
1 to 111,200
1 to 234,000
200 or 1,000
100 to 20,000
by 100
1 to 36,250**
1 to 40,000**
2 to 3, 100
Word & record
parity, write check
Check chars. ,
write check
Check chars. ,
write check
Parity,
write check
Parity,
write check
Cyclic chcclc
charactcl'lI
Cyclic check
characters
Two-way
parity, read
after write
0.0018
0.0030
0.0234 or
0.0163'
Two access
"combs" serve
250 track positions each;
variable record
lengths
Single access
arm serves all
discs (second
arm is optional)
0.0065
Individually
positionable
access arm for
each disc
·0.0041
Variable record
lengths, defined
by format disc
Changeable
"Disc Pack"
cartridges
0.0074'-
Changeable
"Disc Pack"
cartridges
0.00043-'
Changeable
"Data Cell"
cartridges hold
200 strips each
0.0068
Changeable
CRAM cartridges
of 256 cards
each; 8 bit
channels per track
2 to 120
Two-way
parity, read
after write
0.0022
Changeable
CRAM cartridges
of 256 cards
each; 1 hit
channel per track
1 to 166,400
Parity, read
after write
0.00034
Changeable cartridges of 256
cards each;
2 hit channels
per track
* Denotes that an optional featurc is required to achieve the indicated figure.
** Expressed in terms of 8-bit bytes.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
\
\.J
23:070.001
SPECIAL REPORT
DIGITAL PLOTTERS:
A STA TE-OF-THE-ART REPORT
Prepared by
The Technical Staff of
AUERBACH Corporation
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
3/64
23:070.100
Special Report
Digital Platters
AUERBACH SPECIAL REPORT
DIGITAL PLOTTERS: A STATE-OF-THE-ART REPORT
§
.1
070 .
INTRODUCTION
Graphic display recorders have been a principal form of output in analog computing systems
for a number of years. The growing use of these devices in digital systems, however, is
a relatively recent development, and present trends indicate a widening range of applications
for plotting equipment in both the scientific and non-scientific fields. The chief value in a
plotter lies in the fact that large amounts of digital computer data can be reduced and converted to graphical form for easier study and interpretation. This type of output has proven
valuable in such applications as the plotting of missile trajectories and orbits, the checking
and comparing of engineering design calculations, in speeding up final analysis of scientific
evaluation studies, and in automatic weather map plotting.
In the non-scientific areas, plotters are being used to generate business progress, sales
inventory, and production charts that give management a graphic tool to help forecast future
trends. Other uses include the checking and charting of automatic machine tool performance,
the production of traffic density pattern data for computer-controlled highway studies, and
the plotting of earth moving and fill problems which are more easily dealt with in graphical
form.
Digital plotters can be used in more general application areas than their analog counterparts,
in the same sense that a digital computer can be used as a general purpose system whereas an
analog system is usually designed for relatively speCialized applications. Digital plotters
also eliminate the problems of drift, dynamic response, and changing gain settings which
are inherent in analog operations.
The possibility of using your existing high-speed printer for certain point plotting applications
should not be overlooked. Standard character printers such as the IBM 1403 and the Anelex
4-1000 have been found quite useful in applications where high precision is not required, as
in the graphical representation of business trends. Several computer manufacturers offer
printers which are specially modified for more pl'ecise plotting and standard subroutines to
facilitate their use. This report, however, is devoted to equipment designed specifically for
digital plotting .
.2
TYPES OF DIGITAL PLOTTERS
There are currently two general types of digital plotters, which are characterized by
whether or not the plotting surface remains stationary. In the "table" type plotter, a flat
plotting board is fixed in some position and all plotting movements are performed by the
plotting (writing) mechanism. The writing mechanism con»ists of a carriage and pen assembly
that moves along one axis of the plotting surface. The pen unit is free to move along the
other axis either independently or in unison with the carriage. Motion in the X or Y direction,
or in both directions simultaneously, is thus obtained, permitting the pen to reach any coordinate value contained within the plotting area.
The second basic type is the so-called "drum" plotter that uses a movable plotting surface
in conjunction with a writing carriage to provide the required two-dimensional motion. In
these units, the writing element moves along one axis while rotation of the drum supplies
the other coordinate. At the present time, California Computer Products is the only major
manufacturer that builds plotters of the drum type. All of their units employ an incremental
plotting technique wherein the graph or curve is produced by a series of fixed incremental
steps of the drum and/or carriage. Bi-directional motors are used to control motion along
both the X and Y axes so that each input digital signal causes a small incremental step
(1/100 inch or less) of the carriage, the drum, or both. A third (Z axis) input signal is used
to control the raising and lowering of the pen from the surface of the paper.
Other techniques have been developed for digital plotting applications, such as the allelectronic plotting-board currently under development by the Ford Instrument Company of
Long Island City, N. Y. This design is capable of high speeds since all limiting physical
aspects of mechanical plotting systems are eliminated. A sheet of sensitized paper is
sandwiched between two X-Y conductive grids consisting of fine wires. When the appropriate
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
3/64
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:070.300
§ 070.
X and Y coordinates are chosen and the wires energized, a voltage potential exists at the
crossing point of the two wires. The sensitized paper reacts to this voltage potential to produce a mark at that one point. To produce the next point, a new pair of grid lines is chosen
and energized. At present, the Ford Instrument system is capable of handling about 50 points
per second.
Radiation Incorporated of Orlando, Florida, has produced a plotting device called the Radicorder which also employs electrosensitive paper as the recording medium. This unit moves
the paper at a selected rate of speed while a special multistylus recording transducer "marks"
the paper in one or more places across the width of the chart. In this way, three distinct
forms of binary input data (graph, character, and on-off event data) can be recorded simultaneously. Although this device, as well as the Ford Instrument unit described above, may
find wider applications in the future, they are not being commercially marketed at the
present time and are only mentioned here to give some indication of advanced developments
in the plotter field.
In comparing the relative merits of the drum type to the more common table-type plotters,
it is evident that more programming control is required for the drum type because of its
incremental stepping nature (e. g., many commands may have to be given just to reach an
initial starting point). In most table types, the plotter can accept two sets of coordinates and
plot a line between them. This can result in generally faster plotting times, except where
many short-line segments are required. In addition, errors in individual points tend to
become cumulative in the incremental method.
The table-type plotters are generally more versatile in that they can be built to meet high
precision or large size requirements, and can incorporate many supplemental features such
as interchangeable recording heads for inking, punching, or scribing, and the ability to plot
more than one curve at a time. All of these advantages are accompanied by proportionately
higher costs. Comparative prices of digital plotters alone (no peripheral units included),
range from $4, 500 to $9,600 for the drum type, while prices of table-type plotters range
from about $6,500 to $50,000.
Ability to operate on-line with a digital computer is another criterion for classifying digital
plotters. The drum-type plotters produced by California Computer Products are all
adaptable to on-line operation, and interface units are available from them for such widelyused computer systems as the IBM 1401, IBM 1620, NCR 315, and LGP-30. Some
manufacturers offer on-line operation as an optional input mode and state that the required
interface units can be supplied by them or by the computer manufacturer. In contrast
to the on-line mode, all digital plotters on the market today can operate off-line, using
either punched cards, punched tape, or magnetic tape as the chief source of input data.
Off-line plotters using input from magnetic tape are particularly suitable for use with large,
expensive computers, since they make it unnecessary to slow the computer down to the
relatively low speed of the plotter .
.3
THE COMPARISON CHART
The accompanying comparison chart (Page 23:070.900) summarizes the significant characteristics of representative digital plotting devices. The entries have been selected to describe
specific operational criteria for each device from a user's point of view.
•
•
•
•
3/64
Type - Almost all the plotters included in this chart are of either the table
type or drum type as described in the preceding paragraphs. Horizontal
positioning of the plotting table or drum is implied unless otherwise noted.
On-line Operation - This entry simply specifies whether or not a plotter
can be connected to a digital computer data channel for direct, on-line
output. At the present time, only a few computer manufacturers offer
digital plotters as part of their standard line of peripheral equipment, but
several plotter manufacturers are prepared to supply interfaces that will
adapt their equipment for on-line use with most digital computers.
Inp~t Device Supplied - A few plotters are marketed as integrated systems
which include either a magnetic tape transport or a paper tape reader as a
standard part of the equipment. Some also have rather elaborate operating
panels and provisions for manually entering data through a keyboard.
Input Medium - The physical medium upon which the data to be plotted can
be stored is listed here. This is generally magnetic tape, paper tape, or
punched cards. When they are provided, facilities for manual input are also
indicated here.
SPECIAL REPORT
§
23:070.400
070.
•
Input Code - The majority of plotters can receive input data in pure binary
or in some binary-coded-decimal (BCD) form, depending upon the types of
input media employed. For example, most table-type plotting boards require
four decimal digits to specify each coordinate value, since the matrix range
usually extends from -9999 to +9999. Some drum-type incremental units
utilize three successive 2-bit characters to specify three of the six possible
operating movements (+X or -X, +Y or -Y, Pen Up or Pen Down) for each
point. In the case of magnetic tape units, all manufacturers state provisions for accepting data from IBM-compatible tapes recorded at a density
of 200 bits per inch. A few models also have the ability to handle tape
recorded at 556 bits per inch.
Chart Size - The actual plotting area available is stated in inches. Only
the width dimension is listed for drum-type units, since rolls of 120 feet are
standard with these plotters.
o
Plotting Mode - All plotters are capable of operating in a "point" mode wherein a single point is plotted for each pair of input coordinates. This is a
relatively simple operation for the table-type plotters, but a series of commands
(including the pen-up, pen-down control) usually must be given for each point
to be plotted by the drum type. An extension of the point mode is the "continuous" mode, which allows significantly higher curve-plotting speeds to be
attained. However, the input data must be supplied to the plotter as a continuous train of closely-spaced points. The incremental stepping nature of
the drum-type units makes them particularly well suited for this type of
operation.
As defined for table-type plotters, the "line" or "line-drawing" mode results
in constructing a straight line between two consecutive pairs of input data
coordinate values. The drum-type plotters cannot operate in this fashion,
but they can produce lines of any desired length by plotting the required number
of incremental steps with the pen held in the down position.
•
•
•
Accuracy - Percentage figures are quoted for full-scale accuracy. For
example, if a plotter with a 30-inch by 30-inch plotting surface has an accuracy
figure of O. 05%, the plotter is capable of moving the pen to within O. 015 inch
(0. 05% of 30 inches) of the true value of any specified coordinate. Where the
accuracy figures vary according to the plotting mode, both figures are listed.
Speed - For the drum-type plotters, the speed is fixed for each model
according to the incremental step size. For table-type units, however, the
speed can vary greatly according to the plotting mode and the maximum
distance traveled along either axis to move from one coordinate to the next.
To keep the chart as orderly as possible, all figures given in this column
refer to maximum speeds only, as rated by the manufacturers.
Symbol Printing - Most plotters offer symbol printing devices as optional
equipment, which enable special symbols to be plotted instead of points.
Alphanumeric character sets are also available with many plotters so that
fully annotated graphs can be produced to further identify and define the
output data.
Comments - This column is used to mention any additional facts about a
particular unit that are unusual or of general interest .
.4
REPRESENTATIVE SYSTEMS
Some examples of specific computer-controlled digital plotting systems are presented here
to illustrate the overall relationship between the computer output and the plotting operation.
In the first case, a drum-type incremental plotter manufactured by California Computer
Products is connected on-line to an IBM 1401 system. Either of two methods can be used
for making the connection, depending upon whether or not an IBM 1407 Inquiry Station is
available as part of the 1401 installation. If the Inquiry Station is available, the plotter can
be connected to the computer through a special attachment in the 1407. Alternatively, a
J-1401 Adapter can be used in place of the 1407 unit to effect the required interfacing between
the plotter and the 1401 Processing Unit. The cost of this particular adapter is $3,500, and
it can be used with any model of incremental plotter. Total cost of the plotter and adapter
can range from about $8,000 for ll-inch plotters to $13,000 for 30-inch plotters. Regardless of the method used, no modification of the basic computer system is required.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
3/64
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:070.401
§
070.
As described earlier in this report, the principles of operation are the same for each of the
models of incremental plotters. The 1401 BCD characters 0 through 9 are the only ones
required to control the plot operation. Each of the ten characters will cause a distinct
plotter movement, as depicted in Figure 1 and as listed below:
1401 Character:
0
1
Plotter Operation:
Pen +Y
Down
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+Y,
+X
+X
-Y,
+X
-Y
-Y,
-X
-X
+Y,
-X
Pen
Up
A single output instruction can shift the IBM 1401 to an output plotting operation. The instruction M %X1 BBB W will initiate the plotting of one or more points, as controlled by the
data stored in the character locations starting at storage address BBB. The plotting action
is terminated upon receipt of a group-mark character from the core storage of the 1401
Processor.
A good example of off-line operation is that performed by the Dymec Magnetic Tape Plotting
System (Model DY-6575) using tapes prepared by the large-scale IBM 7090 computer. Here,
automatic plotting is achieved by including all necessary plotter commands on binary-coded
tapes that have been prepared by appropriate computer subroutines. The tapes are recorded
on IBM 729 Magnetic Tape Units at speeds of 75 or 112.5 inches per second, but are read back
at much slower rates in order to match the plotter operating speed.
Complete instructions for plotting any given point of a curve are contained in a single 36-bit
tape word, as illustrated in Figure 2. Each word contains 12 bits of x-coordinate data, 12
bits of Y-coordinate data, 6 bits of word identification, and 6 command bits. During plotting
the tape is run at a speed of 3 inches per second, and the bits read from the tape are shifted
through a 6-bit by 6-bit shift register. When a complete word has been read, the instruction
portion of the word is interpreted and the plotter is operated accordingly. A typical portion.
of tape is illustrated in Figure 3.
o
+X, +y
I
\
,.
z
•
P
P
P
P
P
P
1
0
0
0
0
0
X12 X 7 X.
1
-X, +y
-X
-X, -y
v_ v. s
PB
ss
S-', Stop pulse to tape transport
xa- t. X, ---- X l2 to X·re;~ster of digital-fa-analog converter
COMMANDS {
0
Figure 1 - Drum Plotter
step Directions for IBM 1401.
\
X" x. X, VB V, XB
X,o X, V,. V7 V. VB
x_ X. V" V. V,
X B X, V,o V,
o
TAPE DIRECTION
YB- t. ",---- Y,2 to Y-reglster
palO t, Pan down
PB=O. Pen up
55 .. t. Stop tape transport, but slart oQain on nelel pulse
Figure 2 - Word Format for IBMDymec Binary Tapes.
__- - - - TAPE OIRECTION
BLANK
(6)
ADDRESS
WORD
BLANK
(6)
CALIBRATION
CHECK
BLANK
(2)
X=3000
y .. 2000
(USING STOP
AND RESTART)
STOP
PEN UP
BLANK
(2)
REST OF POINTS
GRID CORNER
PLOTS
FIRST POINT
SLEW RECORDER
STOP
PEN DOWN
LAST POINT
BLANK (6)
OR
GAP
PEN UP
NOTE:
BLANK IS DEFINED AS TWO OR SIX COMPUTER WORDS WITH B TRACK ZEROS (NO IDENTIFICATION BITS).
Figure 3 3/64
Portion of Tape Recording for Dymec System.
RESTART
NEXT PLOT
PEN DOWN
STOP
a
PEN UP
SPECIAL REPORT
23:070.402
§ 070.
For example, the beginning point of a curve is written with the commands PB = 0 and SS = 1.
Thus, the pen is up while the plotter servos are slewing to the position defined by the 12 bits
of X and Y coordinate data. On reaching the correct point, a start pulse is sent to the tape
transport control unit. The next point is written with PB = 1, so the pen drops and plotting
commences. When the plot is completed, the last word has S = 1 anaXB, YB = O. This
command will stop the tape transport, leaving the system ready for selection of the next
curve by the operator. Alternatively, this combination of command bits can be used to
initiate various optional system operations controlled by bits stored in the positions normally
occupied by the X-Y coordinate data. Some typical operations which can be added to the
standard system are: change paper, change to a different color ink, find next address and
continue plot, change plot mode or symbol.
The tape for the Dymec system is recorded at a density of 200 bits per inch, or 33-1/3 IBM
7090 words per inch. Since the tape is read at 3 inches per secpnd, the word rate into the
shift register is 100 words per second. Thus, if 25 points define 1 inch of curve under
computer control, the plotting rate is 4 inches per second. Since end-of-record gaps,
address codes, calibration points, etc., are occasionally needed, the tape length is
approximately equal to the final curve length. Thus, a 2, 400-foot reel of tape can contain
2,400 feet of curve, equivalent to about 2-2/3 hours of plotting time. The tape writing time
(at a speed of 75 inches per second) is about 6-1/2 minutes, so that this system is capable
of approximately 25 hours of continuous plotting for each hour of expensive computer time.
The cost of this Dymec system, including plotter, tape transport, and all control circuitry,
is $29,450.
Examples of some actual plots reproduced from brochures supplied by plotter manufacturers
are shown in Figures 4, 5, and 6. The first of these was produced off-line on the Model
3440 Dataplotter made by Electronics Associates, Inc. The contour plotting illustrated here
is a vivid example of a plotter's ability to reduce large volumes of data accurately and
rapidly. This system of weather contours was reproduced in less than 3 minutes, whereas
it would take a draftsman approximately 3 hours to do the same job. This kind of plotting
speed can result in better weather analYSis, since charts of this type can be updated much
more frequently than heretofore.
In Figure 5, a portion of a fully annotated drawing that was produced by a drum-type plotter
(California Computer Products Model 560) connected on-line to an IBM 1401 computer is
shown. The Allis-Chalmers Manufacturing Company of Milwaukee, Wisconsin, builds a
rotary kiln that is a process machine used for the production of cement clinker, lime, iron
ore blast furnace charge, and other commercial chemicals. Once the process application is
defined and a specific kiln tube is selected, an IBM 704 computer is employed to select,
locate, and optimize all design details of the kiln tube and supporting mechanisms (rings and
rollers). The 704 then generates a tape for the IBM 1401. The 1401, in turn, prints the
output and drives the Model 560 Incremental Plotter. From the original design data, the
system generates visual output of what was formerly presented as tables of sizes and
stresses. Using the 1401-plotter combination, a fully annotated kiln drawing can be completed in 20 minutes (Figure 5). Each kiln proposal drawing had previously required 20 to 30
hours of manual drafting time. Because of the plotter's speed and relatively low cost,
proposal drawings such as these can accompany sales proposals whenever needed.
Our last example, Figure 6, illustrates a set of "curves" produced by the Model 570 Magnetic
Tape Plotting System built by California Computer Products. At Thompson Ramo Wooldridge's
Space Technology Laboratories, it became apparent that subroutines describing certain
standard shapes would be quite useful when developed to allow the programmer to call them
out and place them anywhere, and in any size, on a plot or a drawing. To demonstrate the
flexibility of such a subroutine, the Las Vegas girl was described in plotter instructions as
a subroutine. From it, the chorus line in Figure 6 was plotted. Other, more prosaic
standard subroutines have been developed and are currently in use in the production of
standard technical plots.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
3/64
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:070.403
§ 070.
'\
\
Figure 4 -
3/64
Weather Contours Plotte d by EAI Dataplotter.
SPECIAL REPORT
23:070.404
070.
§
,
13;"
~
· !, .
· I.
I
·:
. , ..
-'--+
'''''''
""
c ••
prEll /tC!.
3
,
,
--------~_.._
'0- - - '
,
, ~ Lml
~
BlRde LA
. I.
,
PLlHN
PIEft NI:I.
u_
1
:j :]
.:.~
PLAIN
PlEft ND.
2
---.
1
iff ":. ~ m· ,
--------- ~ _____ -------_=_ -I.
~.*lTOHS.
T
~
: j, : .
1
l= .~•. ~ .(1
}- _
~
-+-- -' 5~:.a
::
-
.0'_ NO
~
9TRT\C:::-''1'1-7 rONS
16 X 560
ROTRRY KILN
Y RLLIS·CHRLMERS MFG. CO.
CEMENT CO
DIGITAL lNCREMENlRL PLOTTER
Y PROPOSAL DRA~ING
75 • SLOPE IN INCHES PER fOOT
Figure 5 -
Annotated Drawing Produced by Calcomp Model 560 Plotter.
Figure 6 -
Curve Plotting by Calcomp Model 570 Plotter.
@1964 Auerbach Carporation and Info, Inc.
3/64
23:070.900
SPECIAL REPORT
CHARACTERISTICS OF DIGITAL PLOTTERS
MANUFACTURER
NAME
AND/OR
MODEL NO.
TYPE
INPUT
DEVICE
SUPPLIED
No
None
Aero Service Corp,
Division of Litton
Industries,
210 E. Courtland St. ,
Philadelphia, Pa.
Aero Automated
Coordinatograph,
Models A and E
Benson-Lehner, Inc.
14761 Califa Street,
Van Nuys, California
Electroplotter,
Model J
Table
No
None
Electroplotter II
Table
*
Magnetic tape
transport*
Incremental
Plotters,
Models 563,
564,565, 566
Drum
Yes, with
small to
medium size
computers.
Magnetic Tape
Plotting
System,
Models 570, 580
Drum
No
Concord Control Inc.
Concord
1282 Soldiers Field Road, Coordinatograph
Boston, Mass.
Table
No
Dymec, Division of
Hewlett - Packard Co.
395 Page Mill Road,
Palo Alto, California
Magnetic Tape
Plotting System
Model DY -6575
Table
No
Digital Data
Plotting System
Model DY -6242
Table
California Computer
Products, Inc.
305 Muller Ave. ,
Anaheim, California
Table
ON-LINE
OPERATION
INPUT
MEDIUM
INPUT CODE
Magnetic tape Binary or
Paper tape
BCD
Punched cards
CHART SIZE
(INCHES)
Model A:
47 x 47
PLOTTING
MODE
ACCURACY
(%)
SPEED
(MAX. )
Line
Model A:
0.005
Model A:
1. 8 in/sec
Model E:
0.03
Model E:
1.8 in/sec
Model E:
60 x 120
No
Punched cards
Manual (keys)
Magnetic tape*
Paper tape*
Punched cards
Manual
(switches)
Magnetic tape*
Paper tape*
Computer*
BCD or
Binary
BCD or
Binary
Computer
Special
adapter
required for
each computer*
BCD or
Binary
Magnetic tape
transport
Magnetic tape
BCD
None
Magnetic tape
Punched cards
Paper tape
Magnetic tape Magnetic tape
transport
Paper tape
reader
Paper tape
Punched cards
Manual keyboard
30 x 30
30 x 30
SYMBOL
PRINTING
!J symbols*
Inked or scribed plotting
available.
12 symbols*
Manual or automatic control
of origin and scale factor.
Point
Line *
Continuous *
0.05 (point
5 pOints/sec
mode)
75 points/sec
0.1 (linemode)* continuous *
Point
Line *
Continuous *
0.05 (point
6. 66 pOints/sec 12 symbols or
mode)
digits.
0.1 (line mode) * 75 pOints/sec '16-character
printing set*
continuous *
Models 563,564· Point
Continuous
29.5
M>dels 565,566:
11
0.1
29.5 or
11
Point
Continuous
0.1
60 x 60
Point
Line
Binary or
BCD
15 x 10
30 x 30*
Point
Continuous
Line *
BCD
11 x 17
Point
Model 563:
2 in/sec
Models 564,566:
1.5 in/sec
Model 565:
3 in/sec
1.5, 2, or 3
COMMENTS
*
Incremental step size is
0.01 inch for Models 563 and
565; 0.005 inch for 564 and
566.
*
Any model incremental
plotter can be used as output
for either the 570 or 580
Tape System. Model 570
operates from tape densities
of 200 bpi; Model 580 - 556
bpi.
in/sec
-
Interchangeable heads for
scribing, graving, inking,
punching, or printing can be
used. High precision
machine.
0.005
1 in/sec
Yes
10. 15 (point)
4 in/sec
*
IBM-compatible tapes are
standard. Provisions for
multiple plotter outputs. *
Card input:
0.8 point/sec
Paper tape
input: 1.3
pOints/sec
*
Several different card and
paper tape codes can be
accommodated by factory
modification.
0.2 (continuous
0.15
* Optional at extra cost.
@1964 Auerbach Carporation and Info,lnc.
3/64
23:070.901
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
CHARACTERISTICS OF DIGITAL PLOTTERS (Contd.)
INPUT
DEVICE
SUPPLIED
INPUT
MEDIUM
*
Special interface unit required for online operation*
Punched cards
Paper tape
Computer*
Manual keyboard
Table
No
None
Model 3440
Dataplotter
Table
No
Magnetic tape
transport
Model 3500
Dataplotter
Table
*
Ford Instrument Co.
31-10 Thomson Ave. ,
Long Island City, N. Y.
Electronic
Plotter
Special chart
Yes
None
Gerber Scientific
Instrument Co.
P. O. Box 305,
Hartford, Conn.
Model30-D
Plotter
Table
No
None
Mode130-DV
Vertical table
*
A-6-12
Vertical table
MANUFACTURER
Electronic Associates, Inc.
Long Branch, N. J.
NAME
AND/OR
MODEL NO.
TYPE
ON-LINE
OPERATION
3100 Series
Dataplotters
Table
Models 3200
and 3300
Dataplotters
INPUT CODE
BCD or
Binary
CHART SIZE
(INCHES)
PLOTTING
MODE
ACCURACY
(%)
SPEED
(MAX.)
SYMBOL
PRINTING
11 x 17
Point
Line *
Punched cards BCD or
Paper tape
Binary
Manual keyboard
30 x 30
45 x 60*
Point
Continuous
(model 3300
only)
0.05 - point
0.1 - line
Point: 1.33
same as 3100
pOints/sec
Continuous:
0.417 pOint/sec
Magnetic tape BCD or
Punched cards * Binary
Paper tape*
Manual keyboard
30 x 30
45 x 60*
Point
Line
Continuous
0.05 - point
0.1 - line
5.8 points/sec same as 3100
1. 9 in/sec
Specialinter- Punched cards BCD or
face unit re- Paper tape
Binary
quired for on- Manual keyline operation* board
Computer*
30 x 30
45 x 60*
Point
Line
0.05 - point
0.1 - line
5.8 points/sec same as 3100
2 in/sec
Punched cards
Magnetic tape
15 x 15
Point
Punched cards Binary or
Paper tape
BCD
Magnetic tape*
Manual keyboard
30 x 30
Point
Paper tape
reader
Paper tape
Manual keyboard
Binary or
BCD
30 x 30
No
Magnetic tape
transport
Magnetic tape
Manual keyboard
Binary or
BCD
Milgo Electronic Corp.
7620 N. W. 36th Ave. ,
Miami, Florida.
Models 4022D
and 4023D
Recorders
Table
*
None
Radiation, Inc.
5800 McCoy Road,
Orlando, Florida
High-Speed
Digital Plotter
Special chart
No
Magnetic tape
transport
0.075
2 pOints/sec
0.7 in/sec
16 symbols*
48-character
printing set*
50 pOints/sec
No
0.01
1.5 pOints/sec
24 symbols
Point
0.01
1. 7 points/sec
24 symbols*
78 x 150
Line
0.008
5 in/sec
24 symbols*
Magnetic tape Binary or
Punched cards BCD
Paper tape
Keyboard
Computer*
30 x 30
Point
Line
Continuous
0.05
50 in/sec
Magnetic tape
llx11
Point
0.5
* Optional at extra cost.
3/64
40 character
printing set
standard with
4022D
Yes
COMMENTS
3100 series accepts 3-digit
input coordinates: all other
Dataplotters accept 4-digit
(-9999 to +9999) inputs. All
units have manual input
keyboard for selecting one or
more sets of scale factor and
origin values which can then
be changed automatically by
the program.
This is a developmental
model that features allelectronic operation.
All Gerber plotters accept
4-digit (-9999 to +9999)
inputs, and each has an
extensive manual control
console.
A 72-character print head is
available for all models.
Model 4023D has two writing
carriages and can plot two
curves simultaneously.
This is a multistylus unit
that can record three forms
of input data simultaneously
on special electrosensitive
paper.
23:080.001
SPECIAL REPORT
DATA COLLECTION SYSTEMS:
A STA TE-OF-THE-ART REPORT
Prepared by
The Technical Staff of
AUERBACH Corporation
,..I
I
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
7/64
23:080.100
Special Report
Do to Co II eet i on
AUERBACH SPECIAL REPORT
DATA COLLECTION SYSTEMS: A STATE-OF-THE-ART REPORT
§ 080 .
.1
INTRODUCTION
Automatic data collection (ADC) implies the recording, in machine-readable form,
of the pertinent data about a transaction at the time the transaction occurs. Some data
collection systems feed data directly into real-time computer systems to provide up-to-theminute information for operational decisions: others simply collect and record the transaction
data in machine-readable form for later batch processing.
This report summarizes the results of a comprehensive AUERBACH survey of the
characteristics and applications of the transmitting automatic data collection equipment that
is commercially available in the U. S. today. (Information on the cost and availability of the
more detailed 85-page report from which this material has been extracted can be obtained
from the publisher, AUERBACH INFO, INC.)
A comparison chart (Page 23:080.900), arranged in a format designed to facilitate
objective comparisons, presents the key hardware, performance, and cost characteristics of
each of nine different transmitting data collection systems. The meaning, derivation, and
significance of the comparison chart entries are explained in Paragraph. 6, THE COMPARISON
CHART. A brief description of each of the systems included in the comparison chart is presented in Paragraph. 7, CHARACTERISTICS OF INDIVIDUAL SYSTEMS .
.2
WHY AUTOMATIC DATA COLLECTION?
The need for improving the accuracy and reducing the cost of providing the necessary
input to automatic data processing systems has long been recognized. Furthermore, modern
manufacturing control systems require up-to-the-minute information about what is happening
in the plant, so that operating decisions can be based upon current conditions rather than upon
statistics covering last week's operations.
Transmitting data collection equipment that can meet both these needs is now
available from several major EDP equipment manufacturers. Through the use of such equipment, it is now feasible to design systems that can;
o
provide the complete, timely data needed for accurate cost
control:
G
reduce the number of times and places at which data must be
transcribed, thereby cutting clerical costs and error rates;
o
make and implement operating decisions of a routine
nature; and
o
provide information about current plant conditions upon
request.
Actual real-time control of manufacturing operations is still quite rare, but
the other potential advantages of automatic data collection - reduced clerical costs, increased accuracy, more effective cost control, and sounder operating decisions - have
immediate significance for nearly every business •
.3
TYPES OF TRANSACTION RECORDING UNITS
Transaction recording units are devices that can record pertinent data about a
transaction in machine-readable form at the time the transaction occurs. The objective of
such devices is to collect data accurately and quickly in a form suitable for processing on
a computer or tabulating equipment, thus eliminating the need for manual key-punching.
A wide variety of techniques and equipment is currently being employed for transaction
recording. While this report is concerned primarily with transmitting data collection systems
designed for industrial use, a review of some of the other techniques and representative equipment used in transaction recording will help to establish the proper perspective.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
7/64
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:080.300
§
080.
One of the simplest transaction recording techniques has been widely used by retail
outlets: prepunched tags, such as the Dennison and Kimball tags. When an item is sold, the
sales clerk is instructed to tear off one section of the tag (which contains the item identification
and price) and deposit it in a box near the cash register. These tags are collected periodicany ,
carried to the data processing center, and converted to standard punched cards for use in sales
analysis and inventory control applications. Although the method is simple and inexpensive, it
generally involves a high error rate because clerks frequently neglect to tear off and deposit the
required sections. Furthermore, the prepunched tags are difficult to modify for exceptions.
The prepunched tag method is very useful for sales analysis to indicate the fast-moving and slowmoving items, but it has generally been found inadequate for accurate inventory control.
Many organizations employ simple manual devices which record, in machine-readable
form, information coded on embossed cards (e.g., credit cards). Imprinters for this purpose
are produced by Addressograph-Multigraph, Dashew Business Machines, Farrington Electronics,
and others. Usually the coded information is read by an optical character reader to produce
input to a computer system. Like the prepunched tags, this system is simple, relatively
inexpensive, provides for capturing a record at the source of certain relevant information about
each transaction, and requires manual transportation of the recorded data to the processing
center. The system is generally suitable only for billing and sales analysis by territory since
only the customer's name, identification number, and amount of transaction are currently
imprinted. The reject rate has been found to be relatively high because of difficulty in maintaining the required quality of imprinting. Advanced versions of these imprinting devices are
electrically powered and can provide accumulators for development of batch control totals.
Other variations of this general type of transaction recorder are represented by mM
Porta-Punches, in which variable data is encoded by pushing partially punched holes out of a
card, and the Mek-A-Punch (at one time produced by American Data Machines), :n which
variable data is set up by lever movements and punched into a card by pulling a handle forward.
Mark-sensing is a widely-used technique that permits data to be recorded at its
source on standard punched cards, using no special equipment except a pencil that produces
electrically conductive marks. After the cards have been carried to the central proceSSing
site, the marked data can be sensed and converted to standard punched-hole form by such
machines as the mM 514 Reproducing Punch or 519 Document Originating Machine.
Another important transaction recording technique is the connection of paper tape
punches (or, less frequently, card punches) to cash registers, typewriters, savings bank
window machines, and other manually-operated business machines to capture a machinereadable record of each transaction. As an example of this widely-used technique, let us
examine the use of a cash register with an integrated tape punch. As each sale is rung up,
the clerk records the department number as well as the amount via the register keyboard.
Both are punched into the paper tape, which is collected and carried to the data processing
center at the end of each day to provide input data for sales analysis. Incorporation of the
customer's account number into the paper tape record of each transaction enables billing
to be accomplished from the same input. The obvious advantage of this system is that
source data is captured in machine-readable form as a byproduct of the normal cash register
operation. Serious drawbacks to the use of such systems, however, are the cost of the paper
tape punch in each register, the frequency of clerical errors in entering department numbers,
and the number of tape rolls that must be collected and spliced for efficient computer processing.
A variation of this basic technique is the use of optical journal tape readers, such
as the NCR 420-1 and the new mM 1285, to read the printed transaction records produced by
many standard cash registers, adding machines, and accounting machines.
Industrial data collection systems of the non-transmitting type are similar to the
cash registers described above in that they produce a record on punched tape or cards of the
pertinent data about each transaction, which must be manually transported to a central location
for subsequent processing. The system response time of such equipment is necessarily long,
and it is obviously unsuitable for real-time control applicatiOns, yet its relatively low cost
may make it more suitable than transmitting equipment for many small-scale installations.
A good example of the non-transmitting type of industrial data collection equipment
is the Control Data 180 Data Collector. The 180 accepts input data from punched cards and/or
dials and converts it directly into 8-level punched tape codes. Fixed alphanumeric data on
pimched cards of 28 to 80 columns and variable numeric data from up to 16 dials can be read
and recorded at the tape punching speed of 17 characters per second. Operation of the Control
Data 180 consists simply of setting the appropriate dials and inserting the card(s) into the
reader. A "not complete" light remains on until recording of the message has been completed.
Time and date information is automatically added to the message by a built-in clock unit.
Accuracy checks include a character parity check at the recorder and means for detecting
operational errors or equipment malfunctions.
7/64
23:080.400
SPECIAL REPORT
§ 080.
The highest level of transaction recorders in the field today, and the one that will be
of maximum value to most large manufacturing companies, is represented by the transmitting
data collection systems that are now being used extensively for employee attendance recording,
production control, labor distribution, inventory control, and a variety of other applications.
The object of this report is to survey and evaluate the commercially available data collection
systems of this type •
•4
TRANSMITTING DATA COLLECTION SYSTEMS
A data collection system of the transmitting type consists of:
o
input units which accept and transmit fixed data from prepunched
cards or badges and variable data from dial, lever, or slide settings
or keyboards;
o
output units which record the transmitted data on punched tape or
cards or control its direct entry into a computer system; and
o
cables or communications facilities to transmit the data from
the input units to the output units, which may be located in the
same plant or many miles apart.
Transmitting data collection systems can be classified as "on-line" systems, which
feed data directly into a computer, or "off-line" systems, which produce punched or printed
transaction records that will generally be processed later by a computer. Several of the systems surveyed in this report can be used in either on-line or off-line configurations.
A typical transaction message in a production control and labor distribution application might consist of: employee number (read from the employee's badge); job number
(read from a prepunched card traveling with the job); machine operation number, transaction
code, and quantity completed (entered by the employee via manually operated dials or levers);
input station number (transmitted automatically); and time and date (added automatically at the
central recording unit) .
.5
FACTORS TO CONSID ER IN PLANNING FOR ADC
Enough successful and unsuccessful installations of transmitting data collection systems have now occurred so that we can list a number of desirable things to do - and to avoid when planning such an installation.
The first question is: Do you really need automatic data collection? Instead of
installing an expensive mechanized system to record actual job hours, for example, it might
be better to install a good hourly job standard system and not bother to record actual hours.
The reduced time lags between occurrence and reporting of events that automatic data collection
makes possible are of no value unless management knows what actions are dictated by the
reports it receives and initiates those actions promptly.
The decision to use automatic data collection equipment in connection with conventional
batch-type processing should be made only after a detailed systems study. (It is assumed that
all real-time information systems will require some form of transaction recording equipment. )
The systems study must determine what information management needs and the minimum amount
of data that must be collected to satisfy those needs. Then a suitable system must be designed.
It is unlikely that straightforward mechanization of existing manual reporting systems will lead
to the most efficient use of automatic equipment. Existing systems should be streamlined
wherever possible, and the full support of top management is essential.
All potential applications should be carefully considered. For example, an integrated
data collection system in a production plant can be used for attendance reporting, inventory
control, parts and material requisitioning, shipping, purchasing, billing, inspection, and
numerous other functions - all in addition to the primary functions of production control and
labor distribution.
Complications will arise from material substitutions, returns, damaged items,
obsolete parts, inaccurate counts, unplanned requisitions, reworks, etc. Provisions should
be made to handle all such complications without deviating from the cardinal design principle:
send all messages relating to a particular application through the mechanized system. Don't
plan to mechanize only the high-volume transactions and handle the exceptions manually. Dual
systems will create continual problems and additional expense.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
7/64
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
23:080.500
§ 080.
One of the biggest problems in specifying a data collection system is determining
system capacity - how many input stations and central recording units will be needed. The
peak loads that will be imposed on the system must be determined; these will most commonly
occur at clocking-out time in systems used for attendance reporting. Message lengths should
be minimized to reduce data entry and data transmission times. Message length and transmission speed will determine the service time per transaction. The service time, in turn,
determines the maximum number of input stations that can be adequately serviced by each central
recorder. In determining the capacity of individual input stations, the time required
to enter the necessary cards, badges, and/or variable data must be added to the data transmission time.
Closely related to system capacity is the question of where to locate the input stations.
You will need to consider the maximum distance an employee should have towalk to get to an
input station, the maximum waiting times that can be tolerated, and the costs of walking to the
station and waiting to use it as compared to the costs of additional input stations and transmission lines.
One of the major disadvantages of transmitting data collection systems is their relatively high cost of installation. The cable cost for systems interconnected by multi-wire cables
can represent a Significant portion of the total system cost. A reasonable estimate is about $1. 00
per foot of cable, with the cost of the cable itself amounting to about one-third of the total and
the labor involved in junction box connections .accounting for much of the remainder. Input stations in most installations will frequently be moved, and each move will usually require relocation and extension of the existing cables.
Since many commercially available data collection systems can utilize two-wire
transmission facilities as an alternative to multi-wire cables, the relative merits of the two
transmission modes should be examined. Buildings separated by city streets or plants at locations remote from the central recording point can be handled more easily with two-wire hookups.
A two-wire system can utilize existing telephone lines with no additional installation or maintenance costs. Buttwo-wire systems generally require special adapters (usually Data-Phone
subsets) to provide for serial transmission of the bits that make up each character. Multiwire cables eliminate the need for subsets and often permit higher transmission speeds.
Where the published specifications for a particular data collection system do not
exactly coincide with your requirements, remember that most manufacturers will be glad to
discuss potential modifications of their equipment when a sizable installation seems to require
such modifications. It is probable, for example, that most "off-line" systems can be adapted
for on-line use with most digital computer systems, though the user will probably have to bear
the engineering costs of the necessary modifications.
Another important point to consider is the training and indoctrination that must be
given to each employee who will be using a transaction recorder. With at least 30 minutes of
well-planned instruction, it should be possible to reduce the rate of human errors to about
1 per cent of the total transactions. To insure acceptance of the mechanized system by the
employees, they must be thoroughly briefed in advance. The briefing should explain why the
system is needed, how it will operate, and how it will affect each employee. Several data
collection installations have failed because the need for pre-installation training and indoctrination was ignored, leading to a strongly rebellious attitude among the workers.
The need for high reliability in a data collection system can hardly be over-emphasized.
Therefore, in evaluating specific equipment, it is wise to ask the manufacturer's representative
such questions as:
7/64
It
What happens if a single input station fails?
system go down? )
(Does the entire
o
What happens if a single cable breaks?
incapacitated? )
o
What happens if a central recorder fails? (Are all connected
input stations incapacitated, or can another recorder pick up
the load?)
•
Where are the nearest service technicians, and how soon can one
be summoned?
(Is the entire system
23:080.600
SPECIAL REPORT
§ 080 •
.6
THE COMPARISON CHART
The comparison chart on Page 23:080.900 summarizes the key characteristics of nine
commercially available transmitting data collection systems, in a concise format designed to
facilitate objective comparisons and pinpoint the specific advantages and disadvantages of each
system. The comparison chart entries are explained below, and a brief description of each of
the data collection systems included in the comparison chart is presented in Paragraph. 7,
CHARACTERISTICS OF INDIVIDUAL SYSTEMS.
(
"'---
.61
Probably the most important factor in determining the success of a data collection installation is the speed, convenience, and flexibility of data entry. Input data can be broadly
classified as either "fixed" or "variable." Fixed data is defined as data ·read from previously
prepared punched cards, plastic badges, or other semi-permanent, machine-readable data storage
media. Variable data is data entered manually at transaction time by means of a keyboard or by
dial, slide, or lever settings .
. 611
Punched Card Input
All the systems described in this report can accept fixed input data from standard,
Hollerith-coded, 80-column punched cards. The method of entry is usually by manual insertion
and then removal of one card at a time. The number of columns that can be read from each card
and the number of cards that can be read in a single transaction are indicated .
. 612
Badge Input
Some systems can accept fixed input data from badges or tokens which are manually
inserted into the input device. This capability is particularly valuable for employee attendance
recording. The number of columns that can be read from each badge and the number of badges
per transaction are indicated .
. 613
Variable Input
The type of facilities that permit the user to enter variable data at transaction time,
and the number of digits that can be entered in a single transaction, are indicated. The variable
data will usually be entered by means of a set of dials, switches, slides, or levers .
. 614
Restricted Input
In many applications there will be certain semi-permanent data that is part of all or most
messages from a given input station. If the input device includes means for entering variable data
and then preventing it from being altered by unauthorized personnel or reset to zero after each
transaction, this is called "restricted input." The method of restriction is noted; most commonly
this consists of a hinged, lockable cover over some of the dials, levers, or slides used for
variable input .
. 615
Transaction Codes
Multi-purpose data collection systems usually utilize a transaction code to specify the
nature and, in many cases, the message format of each transaction. The number of available
codes is specified here. In some systems the transaction code is entered by the same method
as the other variable data; in other systems there are special provisions. Certain types of
transactions may be restricted, requiring insertion of a supervisor's key or special badge to
initiate their transmission •
. 616
Automatic Reset
Automatic resetting of the variable dials, levers, or slides to zero after a message
has been transmitted is a feature that will increase input speeds and reduce errors in most data
collection applications •
• 617
Visible Settings
After the variable data for a transaction has been entered, it is important to note
whether the settings are visible to the user so that he can verify that the data has been entered
correctly before the message is transmitted. Where a 10-digit or typewriter-like keyboard is
used, there is usually no visible record of the data that has just been entered. In systems that
employ dials, levers, or slides for variable input, the settings will generally be visible, though
it may not be easy to read them quickly and reliably. Some input units incorporate a direct,
digital display of the data about to be transmitted.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
7/64
23:080.620
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
Ii! 080 •
. 62
Output
.621
Medium
Data collection systems of the transmitting type can be broadly classified as "on-line"
systems, which feed data directly into a computer, and the more common "off-line" systems,
which produce a punched or printed record of each transaction that mayor may not be processed
later by a computer. Output from an off-line system will generally be on punched tape, punched
cards, magnetic tape, or a printer. The basic output media for each system are listed here .
. 622
Code
The standard output code (e.g., the number of levels for punched tape output) is briefly
described here •
. 623
Maximum Input: Output Unit Ratio
Data collection systems of the transmitting type can assume a wide variety of equipment
configurations, ranging from a single input unit with cable-connected recorder to a far-flung network with multiple input units transmitting data to multiple recorders or computers by means of
both common carrier facilities and direct cable connections. Probably the most important
parameter in planning the equipment configuration of a system is the maximum number of input
stations that can be connected to a single central recording unit, as indicated in this entry. See
Paragraph.7 for configuration details for each system .
. 624
Error Checks
Once a data collection system has been installed and accepted, the operations of an
industrial firm will tend to become heavily dependent upon it. Therefore, it is extremely important that the data collection hardware be designed to:
(a)
minimize the occurrence of errors; and
(b)
insure that virtually all errors that do occur
will be detected and corrected.
Minimization of the occurrence of errors involves a great many relatively intangible
factors such as component reliability, mean time between failures, conservatism in circuit
deSign, transmission line quality, preventive maintenance, proper training of all system users,
and availability and quality of service. The prospective user of any data collection system must
satisfy himself that the incidence of errors and system down-time can be kept low enough to meet
his needs.
Errors will occur, even in the best-engineered and costliest systems. Therefore it is
important to detect and correct as many of these errors as possible. The main types of error
checking performed by each system are listed here. The most common checks are:
. 625
•
Input interlocks - checks which verify that the correct
types and amounts of data have been inserted, in the correct
sequence, for each transaction. Such checks can detect many
procedural errors committed by persons entering input data
into the system.
•
Parity - addition of either a "zero" or "one" bit to each
character code so that the total number of "one" bits in every
transmitted character code will be either odd or even. Character
parity checking can detect most single-bit transmission errors, but
it will not detect the loss of two bits or of an entire character.
•
Message length - checks which involve a comparison of the
number of characters received at the output unit with the correct
number of characters as specified for that particular type of transaction. Message length checks can detect many errors arising from
both improper data entry and equipment or line malfunctions •
Time and Date Recording
The time of day and/or the day of the week or month form an important part of the
record of each transaction in most data collection applications, so special provisions are frequently
made to supply this information automatically.
7/64
23:080.626
SPECIAL REPORT
§ 080.
.626
Feedback Capability
"Feedback" in on-line data collection systems is the capability for the computer to
process messages from the input stations and send appropriate replies back to the originating
stations, thereby making it possible to "close the loop" in real-time information systems .
. 63
Transmission
These entries describe the available means for connecting and transmitting data between
the input stations and the central recording units, along with the resulting speeds and maximum
ranges .
. 631
Speed
This is the normal peak rate of data transmission, in characters per second .
. 632
Line Requirements
Where input and output units can be linked by direct cable connections, the number of
conductors required is listed here. In cable-connected systems, data will usually be transmitted
in a "parallel by character" mode; i. e., all the bits comprising a single character are transmitted
simultaneously via multiple conductors, and successive characters are transmitted sequentially.
Where 2-wire communication lines are employed, data transmission will necessarily be "serial
by bit;" i. e., each bit of each character is transmitted sequentially over the same pair of conductors. A Bell Data-Phone subset is commonly used at each sending and receiving terminal
to perform the necessary conversions between the parallel and serial transmission modes.
Several systems can utilize either multi-conductor cables or 2-wire communication lines .
. 633
Range
The maximum allowable distances between input stations and central recorders in
cable-connected systems are listed here. Where common-carrier telephone lines are used, the
range is essentially unlimited .
. 64
The approximate single-shift monthly rental prices for each input station, central
recorder, and control unit (when required) are listed here. Where there is a choice of two or
more models with different capabilities, the price range is shown.
The "Typical 10-Station System" is defined as a small, off-line system providing ten
input stations capable of accepting card, badge, and variable input data (where available); one
central recorder; and any required central control units. Costs of cables, transmission lines,
subsets, and installation are not included in the indicated monthly rentals .
.7
CHARACTERISTICS OF INDIVIDUAL SYSTEMS
.71
Control Data Transacter System
The Transacter System was developed and originally marketed by the Stromberg Division
of General Time Corporation, but Control Data Corporation purchased all sales and engineering
rights to the system in February, 1964. Control Data announced at that time that it plans to continue marketing the Transacter System without significant changes to its specifications.
The Transacter System consists simply of remotely operated Input Stations and a central
Compiler (receiver-recording station). Up to 36 Input Stations can be connected to a single Compiler.
Each input station can perform the following tasks: accept prepunched input data from
punched cards or badges; provide dials for setting variable information such as quantities and
transaction codes; and emit fixed information such as location codes and programming instructions
from a plugboard, as required by the individual application. A system of interlocks requiring
correct precomposition of the message prior to transmission helps to reduce input errors.
Activated by a Transmit bar, and without further human intervention, the Input Station
transmits the data to the Compiler over a cabling network which can extend up to 2,500 feet in
length. The Compiler adds to the message the date, time, and shift information, end of message
code, and any needed instructions for subsequent processing equipment. The final message is
normally pnnched on paper tape at a speed of 60 characters per second. Any of the standard
sizes and levels of paper tape can be used.
The Compiler verifies the accuracy of the message by comparing its length to a predetermined program, and by performing a parity check on each character transmitted.
©1964 Auerbach Carporotion and Info, Inc.
7/64
23:080.720
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
~
080.
The output tape is in suitable form for use in communications systems, in tape-to-card
converters for tabulating equipment, or for direct input into a high-speed page printer. Recent
announcements indicate that the Transacter equipment can now provide output on magnetic tape or
directly into a computer system .
. 72
Control Data 8010 System
The 8010 system was announced by Control Data Corporation in June, 1964. It accepts
fixed input data from punched cards and/or variable data from ten 10-position dials. Output is
normally on 7-level magnetic tape. Data is transmitted at the rate of 54 characters per second
over either 24-wire cables or 2-wire communication lines. Up to 128 input stations can be tied
into a single system. The 8010 system can be connected to existing Control Data computers for
on-line use .
. 73
Digitronics 201/751 Data Collection System
The Digitronics 201/751 system includes input card reading stations with manual entry
capability (the D201 and variants) and a message collection and recording center (the D751) which
accepts and checks complete messages from any number of input stations. Accepted messages are'
transferred to magnetic tape or punched tape, or directly into a computer. Both fixed and variable
numeric information can be transmitted at a speed of 50 characters per second. Fixed input data
is obtained from prepunched cards, while variable input data can be entered manually by means of
thumbwheel switches or by a 15-digit keyboard. Restricted input can be obtained on one model by
placing a plastic cover over the thumbwheel switches.
The operating procedure consists simply of setting the variable data and insertinga
card into the reading station. Messages received at the collection point are checked for correct
parity. Should an error occur, the message is rejected and the operator is alerted. If the
message is properly received, a positive acknowledgement is returned to the operator, indicating
that the next message may be entered into the system.
Transmission is parallel by character, using 10-wire cables at distances up to
2,500 feet. Conventional leased communications lines can be used for greater distances.
Digitronics Corporation states that the 201/751 system is aimed primarily at folder
and paper control operations, as oppos ed to normal industrial uses, and that a high degree of
customization is offered to meet specific user requirements .
. 74
Friden Collectadata 30 System
The Friden Collectadata 30 System consists of three basic components: Transmitters,
Receivers, and a Control Console. Identification Badge Reader Stations are offered as optional
equipment. These units can transmit and receive alphanumeric information over an intra-company
cabling network up to two miles long, at a maximum speed of 30 characters per second. Fixed
input data is obtained from standard prepunched cards or plastic badges. Variable input can be
selected manually by means of 10 front-panel dials and a 7-position transaction selector. Restricted entry dials are also available for occasional use. All characters and code groups that
make up the Friden Systems code (65 total) can be handled by the system.
The receiving station consists of a central control console and one or more paper tape
punch receiving units that produce the system output on 8-channel paper tape. All transmission
cables terminate at the control console, which allows an operator to connect or disconnect any
receiver to/from any transmitter, as the need arises. A central time recorder is also included
in the console to register the time of day for each transaction. Provisions are available for
connecting up to 20 transmitters (card readers and/or badge readers) and up to 22 receivers to
each central control console.
The general operating procedure consists of inserting the proper card or badge into the
transmitter, setting the appropriate dials and transaction selector, and depressing a Start switch.
The remainder of the operation is entirely automatic, including the generation of error indicating
signals at both the sending and receiving terminals, and the granting of priority to the next transmitter requiring the cable network.
The Collectadata System can be used in conjunction with leased communications lines to
provide long distance hook-ups between any desired points. An optional Automatic Program Control feature switches the entire system into an attendance recording mode up to 4 times during a
24-hour day .
. 75
General Electric
310~stem
The GE 3101 Data Accumulation System consists of from· 1 to 10 Collectors that accept
input from punched cards and/or dials, and a single Accumulator that receives and converts the
transmitted data into 8-level punched tape codes. The components are connected by 33-wire cables
7/64
23:080.760
SPECIAL REPORT
§ 080.
I
~.
whose maximum length is 10,000 feet. Fixed alphanumeric data on punched cards of 24 to 80
columns is read and transmitted at 60 characters per second. Variable numeric data is entered
by means of 18 rotary dials and transmitted at 110 characters per second. Use of eight of the dials
can be restricted by means of a locked cover plate. There is also a 12-position Message Type
dial for transaction code entry.
Messages may consist of data from a single card only, from the dials only, or from a
combination of the dials and any number of punched cards. The operator inserts the proper card
into the reader on the right side of the collector, sets the appropriate variable dials and Message
Type dial, and presses one of three transmission buttons. A Busy light on the Collector remains
on until transmission of the message has been completed. Time and date information can be added
to the transmitted message by an optional clock in the Accumulator.
Transmission accuracy is checked by a character parity check (standard) and a digit
sum check (optional). When the digit sum check is used, each message must consist of an even
number of characters.
The GE 3101 system can be connected to aGE 200 series or 400 series computer for
on-line operation .
. 76
IBM
35~pata
Collection System
The IBM 357 Data Collection System is designed primarily as an off-line (intra-plant)
system, although facilities are available for connecting the system on-line to an IBM 1440 or 1460
computer. Input can be read from standard 80-column prepunched cards, from 22-column-wide
identification badges, or from up to 12 manually set 11-position slides. Designated card columns,
badge columns, and/or slides can be read or not read depending upon "instruction codes" in specific
card columns.
The off-line output medium in this system is punched cards. A modified version of either
the IBM 24 or 26 Card Punch is used to produce output at a rate of up to 20 characters per second.
A switching control unit enables up to 20 input stations to be connected to one card punch. Switching
is accomplished by sequential scanning of "ready" input lines; from 35 to 700 milliseconds are required to search through all 20 input stations for a waiting station. The output format can be
controlled by a combination of program card and patch-panel wiring, and data can be punched
into any or all of the 80 columns in each output card.
Transmission of data is automatic upon insertion of a card or badge into the proper
reader slot. Variable data can be set up off-line and then transmitted under control of the card
reader. Discrepancies in transmitting (either by commission or omis sion) are indicated by lights,
and up to 15 seconds are allowed for making any necessary corrections to the current transaction;
otherwise, the entire transmission must be repeated. A transaction can consist of any number of
cards in sequence, so that the 15-second wait period is valuable in case an error is made near the
end of a long transaction.
The 357 system offers several features that can be incorporated into an installation at the
user's option. Among these are:
• 77
•
Portable manual entry units (Cartridge Readers) which
permit off-line composition of variable data.
•
Readout Clock for automatic recording of time at end of
each transaction.
o
Switch control for automatically switching to a back-up
punch •
IBM 1001 Data Transmission System
The IBM 1001 Data Transmission System consists of a network of 1001 Data Transmission
Terminals transmitting data over leased or toll telephone facilities to one or more centrally located
card punches. Input can be read from standard 80-, 51-, or 22-column cards or entered manually
on a 10-digit keyboard. The basic system accepts only numeric data and can read only the first
22 columns of a card. The optional alphabetic features permit transmission of the 10 digits, 26
letters, and 3 special characters from the first 36 columns of a card. Data transmission speed is
approximately 12 columns per second.
The receiving station consists of an IBM 24 or 26 Card Punch equipped with a data translator,
a conventional telephone equipped with an exclusion switch, and a receiving data subset. The output
format can be controlled by a program card, and data can be punched into any or all of the 80 columns
in each output card.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
7/64
STANDARD EDPREPORTS
23:080.780
§ 080.
Contact is established by dialing the receiving station from the telephone associated with the
transmitting 1001 terminal. The sending and receiving operators can speak to each other when data
is not being transmitted over the line. An unattended receiving station can "answer" a call and start
accepting data automatically. A parity check is performed upon each character at the receiving
station, and a record-length check can be programmed.
Unlike most of the other systems described in this survey, the IDM 1001 system is not
well suited for in-plant use by production workers. It is intended to be used by specially trained
office employees, and is particularly suitable for linking branch offices with the home office .
. 78
IDM 1030 Data Collection SB'tem
The IDM 1030 Data Collection System is designed primarily for two-way communication
between remote plant locations and a central processing area. Input can be from prepunched cards,
identification badges, manual entry slides, or preset data cartridges. A variety of input stations
are available for handling various combinations of these inputs.
The input stations are also available with two types of line capabilities. A "control"
station (model A) operates over two-wire communications lines while a "satellite" station (model B)
transmits over multi-wire cable attached to a control station. This flexibility permits a wide
variety of system configurations with varying combinations of control and satellite stations. The
maximum number of control and satellite stations per communication line is:
•
•
10 control stations per communication line.
8 satellite stations per control station.
•
Total of 24 control and satellite stations per 2-wire
communication line.
The 1030 system transmits all input data to the central processing area in a serial-bybit form at 60 characters per second. It can be used on-line with IDM System/360, 1440, or 1460
computers.
Each control station provides for the connection, by an additional multi-wire cable, of up
to 9 printers. The printers, in conjunction with an input control station, give the 1030 system online inquiry and reply capabilities to and from the computer. Up to 9 printers can be connected to
an input control station, but no more than 24 can be connected across anyone 2-wire line.
A 1026 or 1448 Transmission Control Unit (at the computer site) controls message
reception, character assembly, polling of communication lines, and other related functions. The
1448 can handle as many as 20 lines. Optional automatic time equipment can be included which
records the time of day for each transaction.
For off-line applications, punched card output can be produced by connecting one or more
1034 Card Punch units to the transmission line(s). One or two punches can serve as output for any
combination of up to 24 input stations. Input station polling, as well as parity and message length
checks, are performed at the card punch .
. 79
RCA EDGE System
The RCA EDG E System ~lectronic :Q.ata gathering ~quipment) transmits data from remote
points to a central location for recording on punched paper tape or for direct on-line input to an
RCA 301 or 3301 computer. In addition to reading input data from pre-punched cards or tokens
(badges), the remote input stations can handle manually-selected variable data in numeric or
(optionally) alphanumeric form. The data is represented by 6-bit binary-coded characters (plus
an odd parity bit) and is transmitted over ordinary two-wire lines in a phase-modulated serial-bybit mode. Maximum transmission speed is 27.7 characters (250 bits) per second.
Central switching facilities are provided by automatic "Line Concentrators" which are
capable of handling fan-in ratios between 25: 1 and 25:4 (input stations: recorders or computer
terminals). The flexibility of the Line Concentrators enables the total transmission load to be
distributed over all available receiving points. In addition, each Line Concentrator can be interconnected by trunk lines to other Line Concentrators so that any input station has access to any
receiver.
Each Central Recorder station contains two independent paper tape punches that produce
output on 7-channel paper tape. Automatic time equipment is included which registers the time of
day for each transaction. A special Central Receiver Terminal unit is used to provide direct input
to a computer from a Line Concentrator. Through the use of a Communication Mode Control (CMC),
the on-line EDGE System can be used as part of a two-way real-time network with the ability to
request information through auxiliary inquiry stations and receive answers from the computer.
Comprehensive error checking is performed by the EDGE system. When a transmission
error is detected, the message is automatically retransmitted.
7/64
23:080.900
SPECIAL REPORT
§ 080.
COMPARISON CHART: TRANSMITTING DATA COLLECTION SYSTEMS
MANUFACTURER
SYSTEM
INPUT
- Punched Card Input
Columns/card
Cards /transaction
CONTROL DATA
TRANSACTER
CONTROL DATA
8010
DIGITRONICS
201/751
FRIDEN
COLLECTADATA 30
GE
3101
IBM
1001
IBM
357
IBM
1030
RCA
EDGE
15, 22, or 80
1, 2, or 3
2S to SO
up to 4
up to 50
1
up to SO
lor 2
24 to SO
unlimited
up to 80
unlimited
up to 36
unlimited
up to SO
lor 2
up to SO
lor 2
Badge Input
Columns /badge
Badges /trans action
15 or 22
1
none
none
10
1
none
10
unlimited
none
10
1
lto 12
1
Variable Input
Type
Digits /trans action
10-position dials
6
10-position dials
10
10-position switches
5
12-position dials
10
12-position dials
10
ll-position slides
6, 9, or 12
10-digit keyboard
variable
ll-position slides
12
levers
10 or 25 (4)
Restricted Input
Type
Digits/transaction
plugboard
10
programmed
no limit
covered switches
5 (1)
covered dials
S
covered dials
8
slides can be
locked
none
slides can be
locked
coded plug
3
Transaction Codes (No.)
Automatic Reset
Visible Settings
10
yes
yes
9
yes
yes
none
no
yes
7
yes
yes
12
yes (1)
yes
10
yes
yes
none
yes
no
10
yes
yes
11 or IS
yes
yes
punched tape
magnetic tape,
punched tape, or computer
BCD
punched tape
punched cards or
IBM 1440 or 1460 computer
Hollerith or 6-bit BCD
punched cards
S-level
punched tape or
GE computer
S-level
Hollerith
punched cards or IBM 1440, punched tape or
1460, or 360 computer
RCA 301 or 3301 computer
Hollerith or 6-bit BCD
7-level
OUTPUT
Medium
Code
5-, 6-, 7-, or S-level
magnetic tape
or CDC computer
7-level
Maximum Input: Output
Unit Ratio
36:1
128:1
50: 1 or greater
20:1
10:1
20:1
unlimited
24:1
25:1
Error Checks
input interlocks, message
length, parity, special
circuit checks
parity, message
length, and
special checks
parity, message
length
input interlocks,
message length,
parity
parity, digit sum check
input interlocks,
message length
message length,
parity
input interlocks, parity,
message length, punch
comparison check
input interlocks,
parity, start-end
sequence, message length
Time Recording
Data Recording
Feedback Capability
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes (1)
yes (1)
no
yes
yes
no
yes (1)
yes (I)
(5)
yes (1)
no
(5)
no
yes
no
yes (1)
no
yes
yes
yes
(5)
60
16- to 60-wire or
2-wire
2,500 ft (2)
54
24-wire or
2-wire
2,500 ft (2)
50
10-wire or
2-wire (3)
2,500 ft (2)
30
15-wire or
2-wire (3)
2 miles (2)
60 (cards) or 110 (dials)
33-wire
12
2-wire (3)
60
2-wire
27.7
2-wire
10,000 ft
20
41- to 66-wire or
2-wire (3)
5,500 ft (2)
(2)
Smiles (2)
(2)
$68
$350
$40 (1)
$1,030
$50
$725 & $250
$275
N/A
$40-140
$600-3,200
none
$2,700
$40-70
$46
$7S
$824
$61.50-71.50
$45-75
none
$790
$29-67
$67 or 87
$79
$S16
$15-23
$95-135
none
$365
$100-140
$370
none
$1,620
$69-135
$400
$215
$1,305
TRANSMISSION
Speed (char/sec)
Line Requirements
Range
COSTS (PER MONTH)
Input Station
Central Recorder
Control Unit
Typical 10-Station System
(1) Optional
(2) Range is essentially unlimited when telephone lines are used.
(3) A Data-Phone subset is required at each transmitting and receiving station for 2-wire operation.
(4) Variable input data may be alphanumeric.
(5) Feedback can be obtained through use of other units producted by this manufacturer.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
7/64
/
23:090.001
SPECIAL REPORT
HOW COMPUTER RENTAL TERMS LOOK IN 1965
Prepared by
The Techn ical Staff of
AUERBACH Corporation
,
I
\
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
5/65
23:090.100
Speci aI Report
Computer Rental Terms
AUERBACH SPECIAL REPORT
HOW COMPUTER RENTAL TERMS LOOK IN 1965
.1
INTRODUCTION
At the heart of every computer procurement study is one principal question: "Which
computer system will do the job at the lowest overall cost?" Despite its obvious
importance, this question is a difficult one to answer accurately because of the numerous relatively intangible factors such as equipment reliability, availability and competence of the manufacturers' support personnel, software performance, and programming
difficulty. Even the true cost of the computer equipment itself can be hard to pin down
because of the complicating effects of varying extra-usage charges, down-time credits,
discounts, and purchase options.
An accurate analysis of relative equipment costs involves projections of the monthly
use of each system throughout the contract period, plus a study of the implications of
all the clauses in each contract. The evaluation of such a study is difficult because
most of the standard computer rental contracts fail to cover certain major cost factors.
Often the contracts do not define potentially important points such as whether or not
set-up time is to be included in chargeable machine usage time. Extra-usage charges
are often established by individual branch managers rather than by specific terms in the
standard contracts. In general, equipment rentals during the first decade of the computer
era have been handled in a suprisingly informal way, perhaps because the essential
question often was "Will it ever work?" rather than ''Willit always work?"
Nowthatcomputers are a vital cog in most business organizations, rental contracts
are more important than ever. A well-prepared contract* should show what costs the
user will need to bear during the installation period and exactly how much help he can
count on from the manufacturer. It should show how much computer time is allowed
under the basic rental charge, how operational time is to be computed, the cost of extra
time, and the discount, if any, that is applicable when the equipment is not fully utilized.
It should show what the user can expect when a breakdown occurs: how soon the service engineer should arrive and what credits are allowed for time lost due to the breakdown. A well-prepared computer rental contract should cover all these and numerous
other points that may involve major expenditures by one of the contracting parties.
Unfortunately, although contract terms are becoming increasingly important, objective
comparisons between the terms offered by different manufacturers are still very
difficult to make. Differences in terminology and frequent omissions of important
factors from the standard contracts continue to make it hard for the prospective user
to evaluate all of the alternatives.
.
The objective of this survey is to summarize, in plain, concise English, the major
provisions of the standard commercial and government computer rental contracts currently being offered by eight major U.S. manufacturers. A knowledge of the terms
that all eight manufacturers are prepared to offer. can clearly strengthen the prospective user's bargaining position when negotiating with anyone manufacturer.
.2
ORGANIZATION OF THE SURVEY
The arrangement of the tables which summarize the results of this survey is based
upon the U.S. Government's Invitation for Bids to manufacturers of data processing
equipment (General Services Administration Solicitation No. FPNN-E-27286-N-2-1-65,
issued January 11, 1965). The General Services Administration issues such an Invitation for Bids each year; then it negotiates a one-year contract, running from July 1
to June 30, with each computer manufacturer. This contract, which in some cases
is not finally negotiated until after July 1, then forms the standard contract between
all Federal agencies and the manufacturer concerned.
* For advice on preparing a contract that will help to minimize the costs and maximize
the value of your computer system, see the earlier AUERBACH Special Report,
"Factors to Consider in Contracting for an Electronic Data Processing System," on
page 23:010.001.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
5/65
23:090.200
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
.2
ORGANIZATION OF THE SURVEY (Contd.)
Because the U.S. Government is such an important computer user, the aims of its
negotiators and the contracts which they negotiate are extremely influential in setting
computer marketing trends. The aims of the negotiators are clearly indicated in the
Invitation for Bids, which forms the basic framework for each round of contract negotiations, and the contracts themselves are part of the public records.
The tables that follow summarize the contract terms which are being sought by the
U. S. Government negotiators for the coming year's contracts, with references to the
particular section of the current Invitation for Bids that provides a detailed explanation
of each point. Alongside the terms currently sought by the U. S. Government for each
contract factor, the tables summarize the terms currently offered (as of May, 1965)
in the standard government and commercial computer rental contracts of each of the
following manufacturers: Burroughs, Control Data, General Electric, Honeywell,
IBM, NCR, RCA, and UNIVAC The tables were prepared by obtaining, analyzing,
and summarizilig a copy of each manufacturer's Authorized Federal Supply Schedule
Price List for July 1, 1964, through June 30, 1965, and (where available) a standard
commercial contract form. The material to be published was submitted to each manufacturer for prepublication review and was discussed with the manufacturers' designated representatives for verification and clarification where necessary •
.3
CONCL USIONS
In compiling and analyzing the tables of computer rental terms, the AUERBACH
Standard EDP Reports staff arrived at four significant conclusions:
(1)
Commercial contracts tend to omit many of the user safeguards that U.S. Government contracts include.
(2)
Terms in the standard contracts, both commercial and government,
vary widely enough so that they may well constitute a decisive factor
in the decision to rent a specific computer system.
(3)
Most manufacturers are willing, in varying degrees, to alter the
terms of their standard contracts through clauses which are added
during contract negotiations.
(4)
From the user's viewpoint, standard contracts as presently written
are inadequ,ate in a number of important respects.
Looking at these conclusions in turn, among the subjects which simply are not specified in most of the standard commercial contracts are: firm delivery dates for
hardware and software, standards for acceptance tests (or even the existence of such
tests), and guidelines for assessing penalties for nonperformance. It would be nice
to-believe that all the equipment will be delivered on time, that all the required software
will be available when needed, and that both the hardware and software will always perform according to expectations; but these are assumptions that no businessman can
afford to make without some clearly-specified assurance - such as the terms requested
by the U.S. Government negotiators .
.Areas where the standard contract terms vary among the different manufacturers
seem to be more prevalent than areas where the terms are in agreement. Extra-time
charges (for operation beyond the time allowed by the basic monthly rental) can
effectively double the rental cost of some computer systems, while involving no extra
cost on others. Purchase options, by crediting some portion of the previously-paid
rental charges, can reduce the purchase price of a system by 75% or more in some
cases, or by a maximum of only 20% in others; the options are free in some cases,
but involve an extra cost in others. Discounts for users who cannot keep their equipment busy throughout a full shift now appear in some contracts, but not in others.
Most of the standard commercial contracts are far from sacred, so the user is likely
to find it worthwhile to engage in some bargaining before signing on the dotted line.
During the preparation of this survey, we received comments from manufacturers'
representatives which indicated that they are in a position to offer varying degrees of
flexibility in their contract terms, depending upon the particular user's needs, the
competitive situation, the potential for additional business, and other variable factors.
This flexibility of terms applies to various manufacturers' poliCies regarding delivery,
extra-time charges, acceptance tests, performance standards, program testing time,
purchase option credits, and nearly every other item in the standard contracts except
the basic monthly rental. Checks among computer users confirmed that contracts
(Contd.)
5/65
23:090.300
SPECIAL REPORT
.3
CONCLUSIONS (Contd. )
currently in force do vary significantly from one another as a result of clauses added
during negotiations.
Most of the current standard contracts do not offer the computer user as much protection as he might reasonably expect. None of the standard contracts reviewed in
this survey contains any assurance that the program run times or software performance
promisedin the manufacturer's proposal will actually be achieved, nor any penalty for
failure to achieve the anticipated throughput in the user's installation. Even where
damages are specified inthe standard contracts, the liability rates are generally inadequate to compensate for the actual losses; hence, the user generally remains "locked
in" and must try to make the best of a less-than-satisfactory situation. Despite the
recent emphasis on "integrated product lines," none of the current standard contracts
assures the user that a faster, program-compatible system will actually be available
to him when he needs it. Such assurance would help the user to formulate his future
expansion plans with far greater confidence.
In the earlier Special Report on page 23:010.001, we suggested and explained the factors
that should be considered when negotiating a computer contract. The survey tables
that follow summarize the standard contract terms that are currently applicable (as
of May, 1965) when computer systems are rented. The information in these two
Special Reports should be well worth studying at an early stage in every computer procurement program, and judicious use of this information should help to insure that
the resulting contractwillbeare1atively comprehensive and satisfactory one.
(
\
""
\
"
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
5/65
SPECIAL REPORT
23:090.401
COMPUTER RENTAL TERMS
BURROUGHS STANDARD TERMS
SUBJECT MATTER
Commercial
(5/65)
,
',,-
(
CONTROL DATA STANDARD TERMS
TERMS SOUGHT BY U. S. GOVT.
(From Solicitation of 1/11/(5)
What is the min:imum rental period?
One year or less.
(Ref: Sect. A-I, l(a).)
2 years
How much notice is needed to cancel
the contract?
90 days for a complete computer
system, or 30 days for any component of a system (Sect. A-I, l(a).)
90 days
What software is to be supplied,
and when?
As written into the contract, plus
further future work developed by
the manufacturer for general use.
(Sect. A-I, 2(b).)
What damages will be paid if the
hardware is not delivered on time?
Government
(l/64-6/65)
Commercial
(5/65)
1 year or less
1 year
System -
Parts - 30 days
Unspecified
Basic rental of the system, with a
minimum amount of $100 per day
delayed. (Sect. A-I, 3(a).)
What damages will be paid if the
software is not delivered on time?
Government
(7/64-6/65
GENERAL ELECTRIC STANDARD
TERMS
Commercial t
(5/65)
7/64-6/(5)
Commercial
(5/65)
Government
(7/64-6/65)
IBM STANDARD TERMS
Commercial
(5/65)
Government
1 year or less
-
(l/64-6/65)
NCR STANDARD TERMS
Commercial
(5/65)
Commercial
(5/65)
Government
(7/64-6/65)
Commercial tt
(5/65)
Government
(7/64-6/65)
1 year
1 year or less
1 year or less
90 days
System -
3 months
System - 90 days
Parts - 30 days
System - 90 days
Parts -- 30 days
As requested
by U. S. Covt.
(See 2nd col.)
Unspecified
Items selected
from RCA lists,
plus further
future work
developed for
general use.
None - no
guaranteed
delivery date.
As requcBted
by U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
Unspecified
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
Lesser of basic
rental or $100
per day.
Unspecified
Lesser oC basic
rental or $100
per day.
Unspecified
Lesser of basic
rental or $100
per day.
Lesser of basic
rental or $100
per day.
Unspecified
As requested
by U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
Unspecified
As requested
by U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
Unspecified
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
200 hours
176 hrs.
176 hrs.
176 hours for
NCR 315
200 houra for
NCR 304.
Unlimitcd for
NCR 315.
Spectra 70 unlimited use.
Other systems 200 brs/month.
200 hours (Note:
Spectra 70 not
available before
contract expires. )
200 hours
40%
Approx. 45%
10% for most
System/360
equipment:
otherwise.
normally 30%
10% for most
System/360
equipment;
otherwise.
normally 30%
40%
40%
Vary with system RCA 3301 - 15%
and type of use;
consult RCA.
Unspecificd
140%'
140%'
Unspecified
Varies with each
item of equipment
130%
Unspecified
Unspecified
UnspeCified
130%
Unspecified
150%'
150%'
Unspecified
139%
UnspeciIh~d
Unspecified
Unspecified
140%
Unspecified
160%'
160%'
Unspecified
151%
Unspecifi"d
Unspecified
120% for RCA
3301,
150%
1 year or less
1 year for the
agreement
System - 90 days System - 90 days
Parts - 30 days
Parts - 30 days
System - 90 days
Parts - 30 days
3 months
System - 90 days
Parts - 30 days
System - 3 months System - 90 days
Machine - 1
Parts - 30 days
month
As request by
U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
Unspecified
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
Unspecified
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
Service and
utility routines.
No liability
As requested by
U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
Unspecified
As requested by
U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested by
U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
Unspecified
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
Unspecified
As requested
by U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
$100 per day per software item
delayed, with a maximum amount
of the basic machine rental.
(Sect. A-I, 3(b).)
No liability
As request by
U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
Unspecified
Lesser of basic
rental or $100
per day.
Lesser of basic
rental or $100
per day.
Unspecified
Lesser of basic
rental or $100
per day.
Unspecified
What is the minimum acceptable
performance during acceptance tests?
90% good time througbout 30 days
running. with at least 100 hours
used during the 30 days. (Sect.
A-1,4)
Unspecified
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U.S. Govt.
(Sec 2nd col.)
Unspecified
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col,)
How many hours of operational use
time per month is allowed in the
basic monthly rental ?
200 hours per month.
(Sect. A-I, 5(c).)
176 hours
200 hours
176 hours
176 hours
GE-600 and
Datanet-30 &
600 systems unlimited; otherwise, 200 hrs/
month.
GE-600 and
Dntanet- 30 &
600 systems w1limitcd; otherwise, 200 hrs/
month.
176 on I-year
contracts;
200 on 3- year
contracts.
What is the extra usage rate,
expressed as a percentage of the
basic monthly rental hourly rate?
This is not mentioned in the
Invitation for Bids.
40%
40%
Varies
Varies
20%
45%
What is the standard rate for
w1limited usage, expressed in
terms of the basic monthly rental?
This is not mentioned in the
Invitation for Bids.
5-dayweek:
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
108%"
6-dayweek:
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
110%
7-dayweek:
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
112%
·
(7/64-6/65)
UNIVAC STANDARD TERMS
1 year or less·
1 year
•
•
Governl11tJnt
RCA STANDARD TERMS
1 year
1 year or less
90 days
1 year or less
Government
HONEYWELL STANDARD TERMS
t GE commercial terms are
currently being revised.
* Reduced rates on Honeywell Series
200 equipment will be introduced
7/1/65.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
!)O days
Parts - :10 days
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
25% ofwhole
system rental, or
45% of processor
rental
tt UNIVAC commercial terms are
currenUy being revised.
5/65
23:090.402
STANDARD EDP REPORTS
COMPUTER RENTAL TERMS (Contd.)
BURROUGHS STANDARD TERMS
SUBJECT MATTER
CONTROL DATA STANDARD TERMS
TERMS SOUGHT BY U. S. GOVT.
(From Solicitation of 1/11/65)
Commercial
Government
Commercial
Governm~t
GENERAL ELECTRIC STANDARD
TERMS
Commeroial t
Government
HONEYWELL STANDARD TERMS
Commercial
IBM STANDARD TERMS
Government
CommE)rcial
Government
NCl! STANDARD TERMS
Commercial
Government
RCA STANDARD TERMS
Commercial
Government
UNIVAC STANDARD TERMS
Commerclal tt
Government
As .requested
How is .the amount of central
processor time used computed for
establishing the rental due?
Only that time between program
START and program STOP,
measured either by meters or by
users' estimates. (Sect. A-1,
5(a).)
As requested
by U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
Unspeclfied
As requested
by U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U. S. Gov!.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested by
U.S. Govt. on
hourly contracts.
As requested
by U. S. Gov!.
(See 2nd col.)
Unspecified
As requested
by U.S. Gov!.
(See 2nd col.)
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
How is the usage time of peripheral
units computed. for establishing
Actual metered usage, where this
is practical; otherwise program
run time whenever the peripheral
is used in the run. (Sect. A-1,
5(a).)
Any peripheral
As requested
used is charged
by U.S. Govt.
for full run-time. (See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
As requested
by U.S. Gov!.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U. S. Gov!.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested by
U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested by
U.S. Govt. on
hourly contracts.
As requested
Unspecified
by U.S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U. S. Gov!.
(See 2nd col.)
Unspocified
by U. S. Govt.
As requested
by U.S. Gov!.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
How long will it take for a serviceman to respond to an emergency
service call?
One hour maximum (Sect. A-I. 6)
Unspeclfied
Unspecified
Unspecified
Two hours
Unspecified
1 hour, undor
normal
conditions.
1 hour, under
normal
conditions.
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
What credit is allowed to a user
when his system is down ?
Credit at basic rental rates
whenever a down period exceeds
12 hours. (Sect. A-1, 6)
Unspecified
As requested
by U. S. Gov!.
(.ee 2nd col.)
Credit at basic
rental rates when
fault
As requested
by U. S. Gov!.
(see 2nd col. )
As requested
by U. S. Gov!.
(see 2nd col.)
Unspcclfied
As requested
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
Unspecified
As requested by
U.S. Gov!. when
production
requirements
Interfered with.
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
As requested
by U. S. Gov!.
(See 2nd col.)
As requested
by U. S. Gov!.
(See 2nd col.)
How much computer time is provided
free of charge before installation?
Enougb time to put all the applicationa into operation on installation
day. (Sect. A-1, 10)
UnspeCified
Enough time to
allow the major
portion of a single
shift to be utUized
on installation day.
2 hr. /$1, 000
basic rental
2 hr./$l, 000
basic rental
As requested.
by U. S. Govt.
(See 2nd col.)
6 hrs/$l, 000
basic monthly
rental.
6 hrs/$l,OOO
basic month
rental.
Unspecified.
allowance based
on system
configuration.
10 hr•. /$l,OOO
basic rental.
NCR 310 - 20 hr••
NCR 304 - 40 hr•.
NCR 315 - 40 hr••
Unspecified
7 hrs/$l,OOO
basiC monthly
rental, subject
to following
maxlmum
allowances:
RCA 301 - 35 hrs.
RCA 501 - 77 hrs.
RCA 3301- 85 hr••
Per $1,000 basic
monthly rental:
U 1107 - 2 hrs.
U 490 - 3 hrs.
urn - 3 hrs.
U 1050 - 7 hrs.
USS - 7 hr••
U 1004 - 7 hrs.
How much computer time is
provided free of charge after
installation?
All available time outside baSic
rental period for the first 90 days,
plus COBOL, FORTRAN, and
ALGOL compilation time as requlred. (Sect. A-1, 10)
Unspecified
B 100 & 200:
6 hrs/$l,OOO
basic rental.
B 5000 & 5500:
3 hr./$l, 000
basic rental.
In all cases,
compilation of
debugged COBOL
programs also
allowed.
As requested
by U.S. Govt.
excludiog any
compilations.
As requested
by U.S. Govt.
excluding ALGOL
and FORTRAN
compilations.
40 hrs., pins
all COBOL
compilation &:
testiog time.
Unspoclfied
All available
Balance, if any,
of pre-installation time outside first
As requested by
U.S. Govt. for
most large tape
& RAMAC 8ySterns. Otherwise
30 day. only.
COBOL compUation time allowed
in addition.
Unused balance
of preinstallation
allowance.
Up to 10 hr./
$1,000 basic
monthly rental.
Unspecified
Unspecified
A. reque.ted by
U. S. Govt. except
that 90-day period
applied only to
U 490, rn, & 1107.
Otherwise, period
is ouly 30 day••
Basic rental rate
Basic rental rate
Basic rental rate
Unspecified
Unspecified
mM Data Center
rates
NCR Data Center
rates
Basic rental rate
Unspecified
RCA System
Center rates
Basic rental rate
the rental due?
What charge is made for machine
Basic rental rate.
time needed when free time allowances (Sect. A-1, 10)
have been used ?
Unspecified
t GE commercial terms are
currently being revised.
5/65
allowance.
shift, during first
30 or 90 day••
A. negotiated
Basic rental rates
(See 2nd col.)
1tUNIVAC commercial terms are
currently being revised.
SPECIAL REPORT
23:090.403
COMPUTER RENTAL TERMS (Contd.)
\",
BURROUGHS STANDARD TERMS
SUBJECT MATTER
CONTROL DATA STANDARD TERMS
TERMS SOUGHT BY U.S. GOVT.
(From Solicitation of 1/11/65)
Commercial
What reduction in monthly rental is
allowed if full utilization is not
achieved?
Some definite reduction Is requested.
What discounts in the rental rate are
applicable in special situations?
Discounts are requested for:
(Sect. A-1. 5(.).)
•
Multiple systems
Government
Commercial
166 bra/month
contracts can be
pro-rated if
between 83 and
166 hours used;
a-year contracts
can allow for
building from
125-hr usage for
75% 00 full use
and rent in Year
3 (B 5500).
B 5000/5500 can
No reduction
b. brought inOO
use over two years,
with reduced
rent at 75% of
basic rental for
125 hrs. being
bullt up inOO full
use.
GENERAL ELECTRIC STANDARD
TERMS
Commercial t
Government
No reduction
Government
No reduction
HONEYWELL STANDARD TERMS
Commercial
No reduction
Government
No reduction
Commercial
Government
NCR STANDARD TERMS
Commercial
Governmont
No reduction
No reduction
NCR 315 on a
a-year agreement can have
25% discount
if used nnder
100 hours/month.
no reduction
RCA STANDARD TERMS
Commercial
No reduction
Government
UNIVAC STANDARD TERMS
Commercial 1t
Government
No reduction
No reduction
5% or 18%.
None
None
Unspecified
Unspecified
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
7% for 12 301s.
• Educational use
None
None
20%
20%
Varies, 0-50%
25%
25%
Varles
20%
None
20%
20% on 30l.
20 or 40%
20%
• Hospitals
None
None
Unspecified
Unspecified
None
None
None
None (some
hospitals are
considered
educaticnal) •
None
None
None
20% on 301.
20% on 301.
None
o When the rental paid exceeds the
purchase price of the equipment.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No diSCOWlL
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
• Whenever the purchase price of
the equipment is reduced.
No discount
speCified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discounL
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
o As soon as the equipment has
become obsolete. (This is considered to occur as soon as a
successor bas been announced.)
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No diScoWlt
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
No discount
specified.
Unspecified.
Free credit of
60-65% of rental
paid, with maximwn credit of
60% of purchase
price (75% for
B-220).
Credit based on
rental paid in
specific years:
60% of Years 1
& 2. plus 40%
thereafter, subject to 70% max!mum. No
charge made
for option.
Credit based
on rental paid
Free credit of
50% of rental
paid. up 00 50%
of purchase price.
Free credit of
70% of rental processor rental and
50-60%of perIpheral rental
paid during 1st 2
years of contract.
Option lasts 2
yel\I"s only.
Free credit of
70% of processor
rental, and 5060% of perlpberal
rental paid during
1st 2 years of
contract.
Option lasts 2
years only.
Option costing
1% of purchase
price and valid
for 1 year (2 years
for state & local
gom.) allows
45-70% of rental
paid.
Option costing 1%
of purchase price
and valid for 2
years allows
between 45-70% of
rental paid.
Another I free option allows up to
15% per year of
machine age, up
to specified.
ltmits.
Option costing 1%
of purchase price
and valid for up to
24 months allows
between 50-70%
of total rental
paid as credit
against purchase
price.
NCR 304 o[["rs
free, no-Umolimit option of
40-50% of rental
paid, with max. of
60% credit.
NCR 315 orrore
24-month option
costing 1% o[
purchase prIce
allowing 50-70%
of ootal ronln!
paid as credit.
Free option of
65% (on Spectra
70 systems) or
45%-60% (on
other systems)
of total rental
paid. Maximum.
credit: 75%.
Free option of
45-65% of total
rental paid.
depending upon
system. Maximum.
credit: 75%.
Free option of
between 40% and
65% of ootal
rental paid
wl\hin first 3
years.
Lesser of current
or original price.
Lesser of current
or original
price.
Lesser of
current or
original price.
Original price.
Lessor of
current or
original price.
Lesser of
current or
original price.
LesBer of
current or
origtnal price.
Original price.
Lesser of
current or
original price.
Lesser of
current or
original price.
12% for 7 or
more H-BOOa.
(Sect. A-l. 5(0).)
What rental adjus1m.ents may come
into force?
mM STANDARD TERMS
A rental adjustment is requested
In each of the following
circumstances:
(Sect. A-1. 5(e).)
What credit is allowed if a user
purchases the equipment he bas
been renting?
What is the purchase price if a user
purchases the equipment he has
been renting?
The credit should take into account
the physical age of the system
rented, and the total rental paid
by the user. (Sect. A-1. 19)
The lesser of the then-current
orthe original purchase price.
(Sect. A-1. 19)
Unspecified.
in specific years:
60% of Years 1
& 2. plus 40%
thereafter I subject to 70% maximum. No
charge made
for option.
Lesser of current Lesser of
or orig1nal price. current or
original price.
Lesser of current
or original
price.
~
©
GE commercial terms are
currently being revised.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
tt UNIVAC commercial terms are
currently being revised.
5/65
23: 100.001
A;;~p
AUERBACH
m
REPORTS
SPECIAL REPORT
DATA COMMUNICATIONS - WHAT IT'S ALL ABOUT
I\.
PREPARED BY
F. H. REAGAN, JR.
TECHNICAL STAFF
AUERBACH CORPORATION
(
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
4/66
23: 100. 100
A ST"""
\
SPECIAL REPORT
DATA COMMUNICATIONS
AEDP
\
"---
AUERBAC~
~
REPORTS
SPECIAL REPORT
DATA COMMUNICATIONS - WHAT IT'S ALL ABOUT
.1
INTRODUCTION
Data communications is a new and rapidly expanding field that has emerged
from a wedding of the communications and data processing technologies. The
need for rapid, accurate transmission of data between the widely scattered plants
and offices of modern corporations has imposed strong pressures upon both the
communications common carriers and the computer manufacturers to develop
the necessary techniques and equipment. Impressive progress has been made
during the last few years, so that now nearly every company can find transmission facilities and equipment that will effectively fulfill its data communications needs.
u. S.
industry is recognizing, at an ever-increasing rate, the advantages of
company-wide data communications networks and of the closely related concepts
of real-time data processing and integrated management information systems.
Although only about 1 percent of the computers sold in 1965 were linked to a
data communications system, Western Union has predicted that 60 percent of
the computers likely to be sold in 1975 will be so linked. A. T. & T. expects
that the volume of information transmitted in the form of digital data will eventually equal the volume transmitted by voice.
A data communications system can be considered to consist of a group of functional units whose primary purpose is to transfer digital data between two or
more terminals in a reliable manner. Each unit has a specific set of functions
to perform; the exact functions and the sequence and manner in which they are
enacted are determined by the overall system requirements. Because system
requirements vary from business to business and from application to application, the data communications systems iIi use today vary widely in their functions, their structures, and their degree of complexity. Some systems transfer
messages between remote terminals via one or more switching centers where
communications processors are located; other systems transmit inquiries
from numerous remote terminals to a central data processing facility, which
generates responses and routes them back to the inquiring terminals. The
design of systems such as these demands a thorough knowledge of both communications and data processing technology.
This report provides an introduction to the concepts and techniques that should
be understood by every prospective user of a data communications system. The
sections that follow describe the types of applications in which data communications systems are being effectively employed, the factors to be considered in
designing a system, the various components of a system and their functions, and
the communications facilities and services provided by the common carriers.
This Special Report, which constitutes an introduction to the concepts and
equipment involved in the design of modern data communications systems,
is also appearing as a feature article in the April 1966 issue of Data Processing Magazine. The report is based upon material extracted from the
System Design section of AUERBACH Data Communications Reports, another analytical reference service from AUERBACH Info, Inc.
AUERBACH Data Communications Reports is designed to provide the specialized information that computer users need in order to understand and apply
the current technology and new developments in the rapidly expanding field
of data communications. Definitive reports and comparison charts describe
the characteristics of commercially available communications terminals
and processors, the data communications facilities provided by the common
carriers, and systematic techniques for designing data communications systems and selecting equipment. Regular supplements keep the service comprehensive and up to date. For more information about AUERBACH Data
Communications Reports, please write or phone the publisher: AUERBACH
Info, Inc., 121 North Broad Street, Philadelphia, Pa. 19107 (Area Code 215,
LO 7-2930).
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
4/66
SPECIAL REPORT
23: 100.200
.2
APPLICATIONS
Current applications of data communications systems vary widely in their functions, their scope, and their equipment and programming requirements. New
applications are being developed every day, and it would clearly be impossible
to describe, or even list, all of the specific applications in which data communications equipment is being used. A more rational approach is to divide the
total spectrum of data communications applications into a few fundamental
"application classes, " each performing a certain general function and involving
a certain type of data flow pattern. Most specific applications will then fall
neatly into one application class or combine the functions of two or more classes.
Although coarser or finer breakdowns could be justified, it seems reasonable
to consider six fundamental application classes. The function and data flow
pattern of each of these classes are described in the paragraphs that follow .
4/66
. 21
Data Collection
The function of this class of applications is the collection and transmission to
a central processing point of information concerning the operations of geographically separated manufacturing plants, warehouses, branch and regional
sales offices, and other outlying facilities. The basic data flow pattern is
unidirectional, from multiple remote (and/or local) terminals to the central
processing facility. This type of system can: (1) provide the complete,
timely information about a firm's overall operations that is required for
accurate cost control and informed management decisions, and (2) reduce
the number of times and places at which data must be manually handled and
transcribed, thereby cutting clerical costs and error rates.
· 22
Data Distribution
In this class of applications, the principal function is the distribution of data
generated and/or processed at a central facility to one or more outlying
locations. Again the basic data flow pattern is unidirectional, from the
central facility to the remote (and/or local) terminals. This function, of
course, is the complement of the data collection function described in the
preceding paragraph, and many data communications systems combine the
collection and distribution functions. To appreciate the potential value of a
data distribution system; it is necessary'to realize that data has no real value
until it has reached the actual point of application in a useful form. Significant financial benefits can frequently be realized through cutting down the
elapsed time and improving the accuracy of the data dissemination process.
· 23
Inquiry Processing
To meet the competitive demands of modern business, many firms are
finding it desirable (and in some cases essential) to "go on-line" by establishing central data files that can be randomly accessed to provide prompt
responses to inquiries from outlying locations. In this class of applications,
the basic flow pattern is bidirectional; inquiry messages are transmitted
from a network of remote terminals to the central processing facility, and
appropriate response messages are generated and transmitted back to the
inquiring terminals.
The inquiry processing function is frequently combined with real-time file updating;
the appropriate entries in the central data files are modified each time a transaction
occurs so that the central files always reflect the true current status of the business.
Although inquiry processing and real-time file updating systems promise great benefits for nearly every type of business organization, their advantages in terms of
faster response and centralized control should be carefully weighed against their
costs to ensure that the higher direct cost of a real-time system, as compared with
that of a more conventional batch-type processing system, is worthwhile. Realtime inquiry systems are especially beneficial for organizations such as bariks,
brokerage firms, airlines, and hotels, where prompt servicing of customer inquiries is of critical importance.
· 24
Computer Load-Balancing
Organizations that have two or more computers in geographically separated locations may find it advantageous to connect them by means of communications liriks.
This permits more effective utilization of each of the interconnected computers
because the slack time in one computer's schedule can be used to help smooth out
the peaks in another's. Reliability is greatly enhanced because the communications
liriks make it easy for one or more computers to take over another computer's
workload when a breakdown occurs. The data flow pattern in this class of application is bidirectional; input data and results are transmitted between each pair
of interconnected computers, and the volume of data flow depends upon their relative workloads at any given time.
A
(Contd. )
AUERBACH
®
23:100.250
DATA COMMUNICATIONS
. 25
Computer Time-Sharing
In an effort to make the facilities of a computer system conveniently available to
multiple users, extensive development work is in progress on "time-sharing"
systems. The design objective of a time-sharing system is to furnish continuous
computing service to many users simultaneously, while providing each user with
virtually instantaneous responses. Multiple consoles, each equipped with appropriate input and output facilities, are employed, and each console is connected
to the central computer facility by a communications link. (Some or all of the
consoles are likely to be close enough to the central facility so that direct cable
connections can be used.)
The basic data flow pattern in a time-sharing system is bidirectional and similar to the pattern for the inquiry processing class of applications; input data
and operating instructions are transmitted from the consoles to the central
computer facility, and the results of computations are transmitted back to
the appropriate consoles. The widely-discussed "public utility" computer concept, in which multiple subscribers would share the facilities of a giant centralized computer complex on a toll basis, is a logical extension of the computer
time-sharing class of applications.
.26
Message Switching
The activities of a modern corporation tend to be spread out over a large number
of widely separated locations, and an efficient system for handling communications
among all these locations is vitally necessary. Where communications traffic is
high, a computer-controlled message switching system is likely to be the best
overall choice. In this type of application, the data flow pattern involves twoway message traffic between a number of terminals and a central switching
center. The sending terminal transmits each message to the center, which
stores it temporarily, performs any processing or code conversion functions
that maybe required, and then transmits the message to one or more designated
receiving terminals. Large networks may utilize two or more switching centers which are interconnected by high-speed communications links.
.3
SYSTEM DESIGN
The installation of a data communications system should always be preceded by
a thorough study and re-evaluation of the patterns of information flow throughout
the organization. Money spent in simply mechanizing the existing procedures
for collecting, transmitting, and disseminating information is likely to be largely
wasted. The real purpose and need for every type of information that is currently being transmitted should be questioned. It is likely that most executives
are regularly receiving some information that is of little or no value to them,
while failing to receive other information which could aid Significantly in
decision-making and cost control, and which couId easily be provided if the need
were. recognized. In some cases, the improved flow of information resulting
from such a thorough study of information needs will provide far greater benefits than the data communications equipment itself - and may even preclude
or postpone the need for mechanization of the information system.
.31
Information Flow Requirements
In order to determine the most suitable structure for a specific data communications system, a number of basic factors must be evaluated. These can generally be described as the "information flow requirements," and they include
the follOWing:
•
The number of data sources and points of distribution, and their
locations.
•
The volumes of information (in terms of number of messages and
lengths of messages) that must flow among these locations.
•
The intervals at which messages will be transmitted. Are these
intervals fixed or random? What are the peak rates, and at what
times of day will they occur?
•
The form of the data to be transmitted.
•
The form in which the data must be when received.
•
How soon the information must arrive at its destination to be
useful. How much delay is permissible, and what are the penalties for delay?
•
The reliability requirements. What degree of accuracy must be
maintained in the transmitted data? What is the penalty for system failure?
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
4/66
23: 100.320
SPECIAL REPORT
.32
Using Existing Facilities
Usually, by the time the need for data communications develops, a company has
established extensive voice and message communications facilities. The locations served by these existing facilities frequently include the locations to be
served by the proposed data communications network. A serious study of the
implementation of a data communications system must include an analysis of
the company's present communications facilities and the ways in which they
can be employed. For example, leased lines may currently carry little or
no traffic at night; these lines could be used forthe transfer of data during the
slack hours at no increase in the present cost of communications facilities
other than for switching, termination, and terminal devices. Use of present
facilities requires close coordination between the company personnel responsible for general communications and the personnel responsible for data communications. The local common-carrier communications consultants should
be contacted for help in determining the ways in which existing facilities can
best be used or modified for data communications .
. 33
Design Problems
The design of a data communications system requires a careful analysis of the
foregoing factors. It also demands satisfactory solutions to a wide variety of
potential problems, many of which are interrelated in complex ways. These
problem areas include the folloWing:
•
Estimating the volume of data to be transmitted, now and in the
future, and the associated traffic statistics.
•
Providing for traffic overloads.
•
Distributing the storage and computer capabilities to best fulfull
the system requirements, and balancing these capabilities with
the capacities and speeds of the transmission facilities to minimize
the overall cost.
•
Optimizing the system configuration in terms of fulfulling reliability
and backup requirements and maintaining continuous, efficient operation.
•
Selecting adequate yet economical error detection and correction
techniques.
•
Establishing the programming requirements for any communications
processors, and specifying the necessary storage and processing
capabilities.
•
Formulating a training program for operating and maintenance personnel, and an indoctrination program to help all employees understand the purpose of the system and its effects upon their jobs.
A design problem of a slightly different character, but one that deserves considerable emphasis, is the development of a system that is "open-ended"; i. e., one that
is capable of expansion to handle new plants or offices, higher volumes of traffic,
new applications, and other difficult-to-foresee developments associated with the
growth of the business. The design and implementation of a data communications
system is a major investment; proper planning at design time to provide for future
growth will safeguard this investment.
These design problems cannot be treated separately; they are interrelated through
the various system parameters, so that a decision that solves one problem may
lead to a variety of others. Tradeoffs become necessary among the equipment,
the programming systems, the communications facilities, and the operating requirements. A clear, explicit statement of the goals to be accomplished will aid
greatly in determining the appropriate tradeoffs .
.4
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Figure 1 illustrates how data flows between two terminals in a typical data communications system of the basic point-to-point type. In most cases, several
of the functional units shown in the diagram are housed in a single cabinet and
marketed as a single communications terminal device. Each of these functional
units is briefly discussed in the following paragraphs .
. 41
Input/Output Devices
The input device at the transmitting terminal may be a keyboard, paper tape
reader, card reader, magnetic tape unit, or computer. The output device at
the receiving terminal may be a tape punch, card punch, printer, magnetic tape
unit, display device, or computer. Devices such as magnetic tape units and
4/66
A
(Contd. )
AUERBACH
'"
23: 100.410
DATA COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSMITTING TERMINAL
Input
Device
r-
Input
Error
Control '-+ Control
t
-
RECEIVING TERMINAL
Modulator
?
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L __ _ Synchronization
-::z:-....
Demodulator
C ommunications
Facility
r-
I
I
Error
Output
Control I- Control
,
-
Output
Device
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L __ a. Synchroni- c.--_ J
zation
Figure 1. Data Flow in a Typical Data Communications System
.41
Input/Output Devices (Contd.)
computers frequently perform both input and output functions, either alternately
or simultaneously.
The data communications terminals on the market today differ widely with respect to input/output media, speed, flexibility, operating convenience, compatibility with other equipment, and, of course, cost. The system designer's
choice can range from conventional low-speed equipment (such as Teletype
Corporation's low-cost and widely used line of teleprinters) to specialized
high-speed devices (such as IBM's line of Synchronous Transmit-Receive
Terminals, RCA's Video Data display units, and small programmable computers such as UNNAC's 1004). Faced with such a wide variety of equipment
choices, the system designer must approach the selection of terminal equipment in a systematic, objective manner.
Numerous data communications terminal.devices are described in AUERBACH
Standard EDP Reports. Table I lists some of these devices and the report
sections where they are described .
I
\
"
. 42
Input/Output Control Units
The input control unit at the transmitting terminal controls and accepts data
from the input device at a rate that is usually dictated by the input device'S
speed. The control unit stores the data temporarily and transmits it at a
rate compatible with that of the communications facility. At the receiving
TABLE I: REPRESENTATNE DATA COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
Manufacturer
Equipment
Reference
Burroughs
B 493 Typewriter Inquiry Station
201:103, 203:101
GE
GE-115 Computer System
310:011
Honeywell
288 Data Station
510:108
IBM
1013 Card Transmission Terminal
1050 Data Communication System
1060 Data Communication System
1070 Process Communication System
2740 Communication Terminal
2741 Communication Terminal
7701 & 7702 Magnetic Tape
Transmission Terminals
7711 Data Communication Unit
2260 Display Station
420:106.128
420:106.121
420:106.122
420:106.123
420:106.134
420:106.135
420:106.129
NCR
42-501 On-Line Window Machine
601:106
RCA
6050 Video Data Terminal
6051 Video Data Interrogator
710:104
710:104
UNNAC
Data Line Terminals (with UNN AC 1004)
770:101
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
420:106.131
420:102
4/66
23: 100.420
SPECIAL REPORT
.42
Input/Output Control Units (Contd.)
terminal, the output control unit accepts the received data, stores it temporarily, and supplies it to the output devices at the appropriate rate. In control
units which terminate more than one line, the type and capacity of the buffer
storage is a primary concern because it determines the frequency at which
each line must be serviced. Various types of buffers are available, such as
magnetic core memories, magnetic drums, transistorized shift registers,
and delay lines.
It should be noted that not all data communications terminals employ buffered
input/output control units. When no buffers are used, the input, data transmission, and output functions must proceed simultaneously and at the same
speed.
Complex data communications systems that terminate many lines in a central
facility usually use either a multi-line communications controller in conjunction
with a general-purpose computer or a specialized, stored-program communications processor. These units are capable of buffering and controlling simultaneous input/output transmissions on many different lines. Again, a wide variety of
equipment is now available to perform these functions. The available devices
differ in the number and speed of lines they can terminate and in their potential
for performing auxiliary or independent data processing. Examples include the
three multi-line communications controllers available for use with the generalpurpose IBM System/360 computers and the Collins Data Central system, a computer system designed especially for message switching applications.
AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports contains descriptions of most of the communications control equipment that is available for use in conjunction with generalpurpose computer systems. Table II lists some of these controllers and the
report sections where they are described. More detailed analyses of an even
broader range of communications equipment can be found in AUERBACH Data
Communications Reports, the specialized AUERBACH Info, Inc. reference
service for designers and users of data communications systems .
. 43
Error Control Units
The primary purpose of a data communications system is to transmit useful information from one location to another. To be useful, the received copy of the
transmitted data must constitute an accurate representation of the original input data, within the accuracy limits dictated by the application requirements and
the necessary economic tradeoffs. Errors will occur in every data communications system. This basic truth must be kept in mind throughout the
design of every system. Important criteria for evaluating the performance of
any communications system are its degree of freedom from data errors, its
probability of detecting the errors that do occur, and its efficiency in overcoming the effects of these errors.
Errors in the received messages which form the output from a data communications system can result from:
•
Operator errors in preparing the input or in operating the transmitting
or receiving terminal.
•
Malfunctioning of the transmitting or receiving terminal equipment.
•
Malfunctioning of the communications lines, due either to random
pulses interfering with data transmission or to a more permanent
condition, such as complete failure of the line.
Techniques which merely detect and indicate errors are generally less complex
and expensive than techniques which detect errors and then correct them. In
most error control schemes, the digital data at the transmitting terminal
is encoded to conform to some set pattern. At the receiver, the data is decoded
and checked to see whether the received data pattern conforms to the prescribed
rules.
There are two basic, commonly-used methods for automatic checking of data:
validity and redundancy. A validity check ascertains whether each data code
is one of a number of permitted bit configurations; this checking is usually
performed on a character basis, and any code configuration which does not
represent a legitimate member of the character set is considered an error. In
redundancy checking, one or more additional bits are added to each data configuration in accordance with a specific formulation rule. Checking is accomplished by testing the additional bits to see whether they still conform to the
formulation rule. The most common form of redundancy checking is parity
4/66
A
(Contd. )
AUERBACH
'"
23: 100.430
DATA COMMUNICATIONS
TABLE II: REPRESENTATIVE DATA COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLERS
Equipment
Manufacturer
Burroughs
..
201:103
B 100/200/300 Series Data
Communications System
B 5500 Data Communications System
203:101
Control Data
3276 Communication Terminal Controller
6600 Series Data Set Controller
260:102
260:103
GE
Datanet-30 Data Communications Processor
Datanet-70 Communications Controller
330:104, 340:101
330:105
Honeywell
281 Single-Channel Communication Control
286 Multi-Channel Communication Control
510:103
510:104
IBM
1009
1448
2701
2702
2703
7710
7740
7750
7770
7772
401:101
414:103
420:106
420: 107
420:108
401:106
414:106, 420:106
402:105, 420:106
420:103
420:104
NCR
Teletype Inquiry System
On-Line Savings System
601:105
601:106
RCA
3378 Communications Mode Control
3376 Communications Control
70/652 & 70/653 Communication Controls
70/668 Communication Controller
(Multichannel)
703:101
703:103
710:101
710:102
UNIVAC
Communication Terminal Module Controller
Word Terminal Synchronous
Communication Terminal Synchronous
785:102, 790:101
785:102, 790:101
785:102, 790:101
(
"'
Reference
.43
Data Transmission Unit
Transmission Control Unit
Data Adapter Unit
Transmission Control
Transmission Control
Data Communication Unit
Communication Control System
Programmed Transmission Control
Audio Response Unit
Audio Response Unit
Error Control Units (Contd.)
checking, in which the total number of "I" bits in a data configuration of some
arbitrary length is required to be either even or odd. Parity checking can be
performed on a character basis, on a message basis, or both.
Error correction procedures may be fully automatic, or they may require extensive manual intervention by the operators. The most common method of error
correction is retransmission of either the complete message or individual segments of it until the entire message has been received with no detected errors .
. 44
Synchronization Units
Because the data signals are time-dependent (i. e., the bits are transmitted at
precise time intervals), some means must be provided to ensure synchronization between the transmitting and receiving stations. Two commonly-employed
techniques are referred to as "start/stop synchronization" and "synchronous
transmission. "
In the start/stop technique, extra signals are transmitted with each character
of data to identify the beginning and the end of the character. The data bits
within each character are transmitted in a strict time sequence, but characters
are transmitted asynchronously; i. e., there is no definite time relationship
between the transmission of successive characters. The advantages of this
method are that it allows data transmission from sources with highly irregular
data input rates (such as manual keyboards), and that the probability of cumulative
errors in synchronization is minimized. The disadvantage of start/stop synchronization is that it increases the required line capacity due to the extra start
and stop hits that need to be transmitted along with the data bits.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
4/66
23: 100.440
SPECIAL REPORT
.44
Synchronization Units (Contd.)
In the synchronous transmission technique, a specific character is transmitted
to the receiving terminal, which interprets the character and adjusts its
synchronizing circuitry to conform with the transmitted bit rate. The synchronous method is sometimes referred to as "bit stream synchronization. "
The advantage of this type of synchronization is that it permits higher data
transmission rates than the start/stop method; the disadvantage is that it
requires highly precise and relatively expensive circuitry to maintain synchronization throughout the transmission of long messages .
. 45
Modulation-Demodulation Units
The pulse signals generated by business machines usually need to be modified
to obtain greater transmission efficiency and compatibility with common-carrier
communications facilities. The unit used at the transmitting terminal to accomplish this modification is called a "modulator." At the receiving terminal a
"demodulator" is required to convert the signals back into a form usable by
business machines. Typically, both functions are incorporated into a modulationdemodulation unit for two-way data communications. This unit is commonly
called a modem or data set.
Data sets are available from the common carriers for use with a wide range of
standard communications facilities. Among the most widely used are the Bell
System Data-Phone 200 Series Data Sets, which permit use of the public telephone
network for data communications at speeds of up to 2,000 bits per second. In
addition, several other companies (such as Collins Radio Co. and Lenkurt
Electric Co.) manufacture data sets for use with private communications facilities or, in some cases, with leased common-carrier facilities .
.5
COMMUNICATIONS FACILITIES
A communications facility, in the broadest sense, is a means by which data can
be transmitted between two or more points. Some of the common types of
communications facilities are telephone and telegraph cables, high-frequency
radio, and line-of-sight microwave. Although there are many types of communications facilities, the types most commonly used for data transmission at
present, because of their wide availability and economy, are the standard telegraph and public telephone line facilities. Telephone line facilities, though
designed specifically for voice communications, can be employed for transferring digital data at higher rates than are possible with telegraph facilities.
Communications facilities, in conjunction with appropriate terminal and/or
processing equipment, can be employed for operation in one or more of the
following basic modes:
•
Simplex - transmission in one direction only.
•
Half-duplex - transmission in both directions, but in only
one direction at a time.
•
Full-duplex - transmission in both directions simultaneously.
The allowable volume of data communications and the flexibility of operations are
greater for full-duplex operation than for haIf-duplex or simplex operation, but
the cost of the communications facilities and terminal equipment is also higher .
. 51
The Common Carriers
A communications common carrier is a company whose services are offered
for public hire for handling interstate or foreign communications by electrical
means. All interstate (across state lines) traffic is regulated by the Federal
Communications Commission. Intrastate (within a state) traffic is regulated
by a state utility board. In some large cities, intracity traffic is regulated by
a city agency.
The major common carriers' providing interstate communications services are
the Bell System and the Western Union Telegraph Company. The American
Telephone and Telegraph Company (A. T. &T.) heads the Bell System and coordinates the operations of its wholly or partly owned operating companies.
In addition, there are a number of independent telephone companies, the largest
of which is the General Telephone and Electronics Company. In general, the
independent telephone companies offer the same types of services as the Bell
System, although rates and exact services vary to some extent. Some of the
smaller companies have limited capabilities, and care must be taken when
planning data communications facilities within their areas.
4/66
A
(Contd.)
AUERBACH
'"
23: 100.510
DATA COMMUNICATIONS
.51
The Common Carriers (Contd.)
The communications facilities offered by each common carrier and the attendant
costs are published in documents called tariffs, which are available to the public.
Because of the complexity of these tariffs, the common-carrier communications
consultants should be contacted early in the planning stages for a data communications system to determine the facilities and rates in the areas to be served .
. 52
Classes of Common-Carrier Facilities
The facilities offered by the common carriers can logically be divided into three
classes:
.53
•
Narrow-Band Facilities: These facilities provide data communications
capabilities at up to 200 bits per second, and they are most commonly
used with low-speed teleprinter terminals.
G
Voice-Band Facilities: These facilities make use of communications
channels having bandwidths of about 3, 000 to 4,000 cycles per second.
The public telephone network uses channels with a bandwidth of about
3,000 cycles per second. Equipment is currently available from the
common carriers for data transmission at up to 2,400 bits per second
over leased voice-band facilities and up to 2,000 bits per second over
the public telephone network.
•
Broad-Band Facilities: These facilities commonly use microwave
transmission techniques to provide data communications at rates
significantly higher than voice-band facilities. Telpak is a group
of services of graduated capacity that can provide transmission rates
of up to 500,000 bits per second. Other broad-band facilities can
provide transmission rates of up to several million bits per second.
In some cases, one broad-band channel can be subdivided to provide
several logically independent communications channels of lower
capacity.
Types of Common-Carrier Service
Within a particular class of common-carrier communications facilities, different
types of service can be obtained. The three general types of service are:
.6
o
Leased Service: Provides the user with the exclusive use of a communications line. Leased lines are available in all three classes.
o
Public Switched Service: Provides the user with access to a communications network which is available to the general public. In general,
charges are based on usage. The Bell System TWX network and the
Western Union TELEX network are examples of narrow-band (low-speed)
public switched services for message transmission. The public telephone network provides voice-band service on a switched (dialed)
basis.
D
Multistation Leased Systems: Provides the user with a private communications network accessible only by stations installed by that user.
The majority of the available multistation leased systems are for
narrow-band (low-speed) communications networks. In general, such
a system is a packaged plan designed to provide a specific type of service,
but the package is variable within certain limits to meet the needs of
individual applications. Examples include the Bell System 83B series
and Western Union Plans 115, 116, and 117, which are packaged
systems with polling capabilities .
SUMMARY
A data communications system may be of value wherever data must be transmitted between georgraphically separated locations. During the past few years
a wide variety of communications equipment and facilities has become available,
and the impact of data communications upon business and industry is growing
rapidly. Designing a data communications system for a specific application
requires a good understanding of both data processing and communications
technology and of their interrelationships. A systematic, objective analysis
of the information flow requirements and of the available equipment and facilities should always be performed to ensure that the resulting system will
achieve its primary aim - to transmit useful information economically from
one location to another.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
4/66
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Create Date : 2018:05:10 08:19:09-08:00 Modify Date : 2018:05:11 14:01:37-07:00 Metadata Date : 2018:05:11 14:01:37-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:6f746879-af31-4f40-88f8-c91f318d7a16 Instance ID : uuid:8df36e7a-86cc-044a-afcb-dab9dbf68393 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 607EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools